Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2026-027 - 2/24/2026 - Approved
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF Greenwood Sports Complex BOND 2022/2024 Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 f (1RP4fiM1��`� 185►2 Gignac Architects 416 Starr St/Corpus Christi, TX 78401 09/08/2025 CONFORMED SET Record Drawing Number CP-295 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION/ TITLE SECTION DIVISION 00 PREFACE DOCUMENTS 00 00 00 COVER SHEET 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 01 SEALS PAGE (OPTIONAL) 00 01 02 LIST OF DRAWINGS DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 52 23 AGREEMENT(REV 12-2021) 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS(REV6-2021) 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (REV4-2022) DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK(REV 10-2018) 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES(REV 5-2020) 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT(REV5-2020) 01 33 01 SUBMITTAL REGISTER(REV 10-2018) 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES(REV 10-2018) 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS(REV8-2019) 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS(REV8-2019) 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Part T Technical Specifications 014523 TESTING REQUIREMENTS 01 57 23 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 03 11 13.11 CONCRETE FORMS 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING 03 49 00 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE Table of Contents 00 01 00- 1 Greenwood Sports Complex— Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 DIVISION/ TITLE SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 63 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 16 00 SHEATHING 06 41 16 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 42 23 PLYWOOD INTERIOR PANELING 07 41 13.16 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 07 46 46.13 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 33 13 COILING COUNTER DOORS 08 71 11 DOOR HARDWARE 08 83 00 MIRRORS 08 91 19 FIXED LOUVERS 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 91 00 PAINTING 10 14 16.13 PLAQUE DISPLAY STANDS 10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 28 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 75 16 FLAGPOLES 11 68 33 BASEBALL—SOFTBALL FIELD EQUIPMENT 11 68 33.13 BASEBALL-SOFTBALL TEAM BENCHES 11 68 33.23 BASEBALL-SOFTBALL FIELD FENCE TOP PROTECTION 11 68 43 EXTERIOR SCOREBOARDS 12 36 23.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 62 23 OUTDOOR PORTABLE BLEACHERS 13 31 33 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURE Table of Contents 00 01 00-2 Greenwood Sports Complex— Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 DIVISION/ TITLE SECTION 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 22 13.10 SITE GRADING 31 22 16.13 ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING 31 22 16.23 CHANNEL SHAPING 312316.13 TRENCHING 312413.10 EMBANKMENT 32 01 13.61 SLURRY SEAL 32 01 13.62 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS 32 11 00 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 23 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 32 12 16.13 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 32 15 13.13 STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING 32 16 13.13 CURB AND GUTTER 32 16 23 SIDEWALKS 32 16 33 DRIVEWAYS 32 17 13 PRECAST CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS 32 17 23.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 18 23.13 BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL RED INFIELD DIRT 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 31 32 COMPOSITE FENCES AND GATES 32 33 43.53 SITE TABLES 32 33 46 DECORATIVE CHAIN BARRIER 32 84 00 IRRIGATION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION 32 92 13 HYDROSEEDING 32 93 03 LANDSCAPE PLANTING 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES Table of Contents 00 01 00-3 Greenwood Sports Complex— Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 DIVISION/ TITLE SECTION 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 31 13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 33 31 23 WASTEWATER UTILITY FORCE MAIN PIPING 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 30 STORMWATER STRUCTURES Appendix All Testing Reports as Applicable 1 APPENDIX 1 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT PROVIDED BY TOLUNAY WONG 2 APPENDIX 2 PONY BASEBALL FIELD DIMENSIONS AND DISTANCES 3 APPENDIX 3 PONY GIRLS FAST PITCH PLAYING FIELD DIMENSIONS AND DISTANCES 4 APPENDIX 4 TCEQ REPORT— USE OF RECLAIMED WATER 5 APPENDIX 5 MEMO ON WATER/CHEMICAL PRESSURE INJECTION METHOD PROVIDED BY TOLUNAY WONG END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 0100-4 Greenwood Sports Complex— Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURER F : INSURER E : INSURER D : INSURER C : INSURER B : INSURER A : NAIC # NAME:CONTACT (A/C, No):FAX E-MAILADDRESS: PRODUCER (A/C, No, Ext):PHONE INSURED REVISION NUMBER:CERTIFICATE NUMBER:COVERAGES IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. OTHER: (Per accident) (Ea accident) $ $ N / A SUBR WVD ADDL INSD THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. $ $ $ $PROPERTY DAMAGE BODILY INJURY (Per accident) BODILY INJURY (Per person) COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT AUTOS ONLY AUTOSAUTOS ONLY NON-OWNED SCHEDULEDOWNED ANY AUTO AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Y / N WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below If yes, describe under ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE $ $ $ E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE E.L. EACH ACCIDENT EROTH-STATUTEPER LIMITS(MM/DD/YYYY)POLICY EXP(MM/DD/YYYY)POLICY EFFPOLICY NUMBERTYPE OF INSURANCELTRINSR DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) EXCESS LIAB UMBRELLA LIAB $EACH OCCURRENCE $AGGREGATE $ OCCUR CLAIMS-MADE DED RETENTION $ $PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $GENERAL AGGREGATE $PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $MED EXP (Any one person) $EACH OCCURRENCE DAMAGE TO RENTED $PREMISES (Ea occurrence) COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY PRO-JECT LOC CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) CANCELLATION AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 25 (2016/03) © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. CERTIFICATE HOLDER The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD HIRED AUTOS ONLY 3/2/2026 Higginbotham Insurance Agency,Inc. PO Box 870 Corpus Christi TX 78403-0870 Renee Terrell 361-561-4237 361-844-0101 rterrell@higginbotham.net Starr Indemnity &Liability Company 38318 BARCO6 Valley Forge Insurance Company 20508BarcomConstruction,Inc. 1146 Heinsohn Road Corpus Christi TX 78406 The Continental Insurance Company 35289 Continental Casualty Company 20443 1717119134 B X 1,000,000 X 500,000 15,000 1,000,000 2,000,000 X 8033339802 9/12/2025 9/12/2026 2,000,000 C 1,000,000 X X X 8033339766 9/12/2025 9/12/2026 D X X 10,000,00080333397979/12/2025 9/12/2026 10,000,000 X 10,000 C X N 8033339816 9/12/2025 9/12/2026 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 A Builder's Risk ITH100065517925 9/12/2025 9/12/2026 Any 1 Building Limit Catastrophe Limit 10,000,000 10,000,000 . See Attached... City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi TX 78469-9277 GS ACORD 101 (2008/01) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD © 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER:FORM TITLE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page of AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: LOC #: AGENCY CARRIER NAIC CODE POLICY NUMBER NAMED INSURED EFFECTIVE DATE: BARCO6 1 1 Higginbotham Insurance Agency,Inc.Barcom Construction,Inc. 1146 Heinsohn Road Corpus Christi TX 78406 25 CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE General Liability policy includes a blanket automatic waiver of subrogation endorsement that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires it.(Contractor's General Liability Extension Endorsement -Form CNA74705XX 01/15). General Liability policy includes a blanket automatic additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires such status.(Blanket Additional Insured -Owners,Lessees or Contractors - With Products-Completed Operations Coverage -Form CNA75079XX 10/16). General Liability policy includes a primary &non-contributory provision only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires such provision.(Contractor's General Liability Extension Endorsement -Form CNA74705XX 01/15). Auto Liability policy includes a blanket automatic waiver of subrogation endorsement that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires it.(Contractors Extended Business Auto Plus Coverage Endorsement -Form CNA63359XX 04/12). Auto Liability policy includes a blanket automatic additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires such status.(Contractors Extended Business Auto Plus Coverage Endorsement - Form CNA63359XX 04/12). Workers'Compensation policy includes a blanket automatic waiver of subrogation endorsement that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the insured and certificate holder that requires it.(Texas Waiver of Our Right to Recover from Others Endorsement -Form WC 42 03 04B 06/14). Umbrella policy follows the terms,definitions,conditions &exclusions of the Scheduled Underlying General Liability,Auto Liability and Employers Liability Insurance.(CNA Paramount Excess and Umbrella Liability Policy –Form CNA75504XX 03/15). Workers'Compensation policy includes an endorsement providing that 30 days notice of cancellation will be furnished to the certificate holder except 10 days notice of nonpayment of premium.(Blanket Notice of Cancellation to Certificate Holders (30 Day)-Form CC68021A 02/13). General Liability policy includes an endorsement providing that 30 days notice of cancellation will be furnished to the certificate holder except 10 days notice of nonpayment of premium.(Changes –Notice of Cancellation or Material Restriction –Blanket 30 Day Notice –Form CNA74702XX 01/15). Auto policy includes an endorsement providing that 30 days notice of cancellation will be furnished to the certificate holder except 10 days notice of nonpayment of premium.(Blanket Notice of Cancellation to Certificate Holders (30 Day)–Form CNA68021XX 02/13). Contractors Professional Liability and Pollution Incident Liability policy: Illinois Union Insurance Company Policy#CEO G47488771 001 09/12/24-26 $3,000,000 Each Claim /$3,000,000 Aggregate Employee Theft (Crime)policy: Continental Casualty Company Policy#6052369039 09/12/25-27 $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Limit RE:RFB/Contract No.6680 |Project No.23170,23171,23172 Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 00 6113 PERFORMANCE BOND Contractor as Principal Name: Barcom Construction, Inc. Mailing address (principal place of business): 1146 Heinsohn Rd. Corpus Christi,TX 78406 Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Mailing address (principal place of business): Engineering Services 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Contract Project name and number: Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 23170,23171,23172 Award Date of the Contract: February 24, 2026 Contract Price: $7,097,714.86 Bond Date of Bond: _3_~ _,._..,_J -_-z_t ___ _ (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date of the Contract) Performance Bond Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 BOND NO. 108444546 Surety Name:Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Mailing address (principal place of business): 4650 West Park Blvd Houston Texas 77041 Physical address (principal place of business): 4650 West Park Blvd Houston, Texas 77041 Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of: Connecticut By submitting this Bond, Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Telephone (main number): 860-277-0111 Telephone (for notice of c/aim):860-277-0111 Local Agent for Surety Name: Southern American Insurance Agency Address: 13823 Schmidt Rd, Cypress Texas 77427 Telephone: 280-890-9294 Email Address: alm@southernamericanins.com The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll-free number: 1-800-252-3439 00 6113 -1 Rev 5/2025 CMCM CMCM Agreement 00 52 23 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on February 24, 2026, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Barcom Construction, Inc (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 – WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Greenwood Sports Complex: Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 ARTICLE 2 – DESIGNER AND OWNER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Gignac Architects 416 Starr St Corpus Christi, Texas, 78401 nickgignac@gignac-associates.com 2.02 The Owner’s Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson 4917 Holly Rd., Bldg 5 Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 JosephJ@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 180 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 210 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. Agreement 00 52 23 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 7,097,714.86 Agreement 00 52 23 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 5 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.B, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner’s option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6 – INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23 - 4 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. Agreement 00 52 23 - 5 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8 – ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor’s records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor’s fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor’s Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10 – CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES (SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS) Agreement 00 52 23 - 6 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta City Secretary Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E Director of Engineering Services __________________________ AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL ___________________________ Assistant City Attorney ATTEST (IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Patrick Hoffman Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Title: 1146 Heinsohn Road Address Corpus Christi Texas 78406 City State Zip Phone Fax patrickh@barconcc.com EMail END OF SECTION Pat Hoffman (Mar 6, 2026 10:27:26 CST) Pat Hoffman Treasurer 361-903-0136 Francis Youngblood (Mar 9, 2026 10:24:53 CDT) Jeff Edmonds (Mar 9, 2026 12:00:38 CDT) M2026-020 2/24/2026 RH/SB Rebecca Huerta (Mar 10, 2026 09:31:07 CDT) Rebecca Huerta PROJECT: RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 RFB 6680 BIDDER: Barcom Construction, Inc. TOTAL BID: $7,097,714.86 COMPLETION TIME: Not Required BIDDER INFO: 1146 Heinsohn Rd. Corpus Christi,TX 78406 P: 361-903-0136 F: CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Part A - GENERAL $341,921.00 Part B - PARKING LOT AND ENTRY IMPROVEMENTS $350,832.76 Part C - BASEBALL FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS $4,246,967.36 Part D - CONCESSION STAND AND RESTROOM BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS $418,840.37 Part E - EFFLUENT LINE EXTENSION $188,173.54 Part F - ALLOWANCES $164,000.00 Part B - BASEBALL FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS $954,934.76 Part C - CONCESSION STAND AND RESTROOM BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS $197,125.29 Part D - ALLOWANCES $84,500.00 Part B - PARKING AREA IMPROVEMENTS $61,419.78 Part E - ALLOWANCES $89,000.00 Total $7,097,714.86 Part A - GENERAL No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price A-A1 MOBILIZATION (Not to exceed 5%)LS 1 $115,812.00 $115,812.00 A-A2 BONDS & INSURANCE (maximum percentage of 2%) LS 1 $27,575.00 $27,575.00 B-A1 MOBILIZATION (Not to exceed 5%)LS 1 $82,722.00 $82,722.00 B-A2 BONDS & INSURANCE (2% maximum)LS 1 $16,545.00 $16,545.00 C-A1 MOBILIZATION (Not to exceed 5%)LS 1 $82,722.00 $82,722.00 C-A2 BONDS & INSURANCE (2% maximum)LS 1 $16,545.00 $16,545.00 Subtotal: $341,921.00 Part B - PARKING LOT AND ENTRY IMPROVEMENTS No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price A-B1 DEMOLITION LS 1 $1,655.00 $1,655.00 A-B2 NEW ASPHALT PAVING SF 4000 $13.24 $52,960.00 A-B3 ASPHALT SEAL COAT SF 126000 $0.33 $41,580.00 CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM A-B4 PARKING LOT STRIPING SF 126000 $0.14 $17,640.00 A-B5 DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE EA 1 $27,587.00 $27,587.00 A-B6 MONUMENT SIGN EA 1 $48,497.00 $48,497.00 A-B7 WHEELSTOPS EA 289 $132.36 $38,252.04 A-B8 CONDUIT EXTENSION - TRENCH LF 2340 $14.14 $33,087.60 A-B9 CONDUIT EXTENSION - 2'' CONDUIT 1 LF 2340 $1.70 $3,978.00 A-B10 CONDUIT EXTENSION - 2'' CONDUIT 2 LF 2340 $1.70 $3,978.00 A-B11 CONDUIT EXTENSION - LABOR LF 2340 $14.14 $33,087.60 A-B12 CONDUIT EXTENSION - PULLBOX EA 9 $5,392.28 $48,530.52 Subtotal: $350,832.76 Part C - BASEBALL FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price A-C1 DEMOLITION LS 1 $40,826.00 $40,826.00 A-C2 GENERAL EARTHWORK AND GRADING LS 1 $163,570.00 $163,570.00 A-C3 DRAINLINES LS 1 $100,000.00 $100,000.00 A-C4 STORAGE TANK WITH PAD, BOOST, PUMP, VALVES & CONTROLS LS 1 $375,102.00 $375,102.00 A-C5 EXCAVATION SPOILS HAUL/ DISPOSAL (ON-SITE) LS 1 $12,038.00 $12,038.00 A-C6 IRRIGATION LS 1 $138,329.00 $138,329.00 A-C7 SLEEVES LS 1 $5,507.00 $5,507.00 A-C8 SIGNS & WARNING TAGS LS 1 $2,205.00 $2,205.00 A-C9 IRRIGATION TESTING LS 1 $2,757.00 $2,757.00 A-C10 POWER FOR IRRIGATION LS 1 $11,029.00 $11,029.00 A-C11 IRRIGATION EXTRA HEADS EA 5 $331.00 $1,655.00 A-C12 BASEBALL ACCESSORIES / EQUIPMENT LS 1 $3,309.00 $3,309.00 A-C13 NEW CONCRETE FLATWORK SF 16500 $10.96 $180,840.00 A-C14 CONCRETE SUBGRADE/ BASE SF 16500 $2.65 $43,725.00 A-C15 SITE DRAINAGE INFRASTRUCTURE LS 1 $139,466.00 $139,466.00 A-C16 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT RELOCATION LS 1 $38,052.00 $38,052.00 CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM A-C17 NEW SCOREBOARDS EA 2 $20,378.00 $40,756.00 A-C18 NEW DUGOUTS - CHAINLINK EA 4 $40,134.00 $160,536.00 A-C19 BLEACHER CANOPIES EA 4 $12,549.00 $50,196.00 A-C20 NEW BLEACHERS EA 4 $7,201.00 $28,804.00 A-C21 MONUMENT RELOCATION LS 1 $27,943.00 $27,943.00 A-C22 PEDESTRIAN LEVEL ENTRY SIGN EA 1 $6,077.00 $6,077.00 A-C23 NEW FENCE MESH/FABRIC FOR EXISTING CUT FENCE SF 1800 $5.46 $9,828.00 A-C24 NEW CHAINLINK FENCE LF 650 $36.02 $23,413.00 A-C25 DEMO/CUT TOP OF CRICKET FIELD BACKSTOP LF 150 $43.02 $6,453.00 A-C26 REPLACE SPORTS LIGHTING CONTROL BOX LS 1 $26,471.00 $26,471.00 A-C27 NEW WIRING AND CONDUIT TO SPORTS LIGHTING LF 2000 $49.74 $99,480.00 A-C28 NEW FLAGPOLES EA 2 $5,570.00 $11,140.00 A-C29 NEW CONCRETE CURB EDGING AT TURF INFIELD LF 118 $46.74 $5,515.32 A-C30 NEW EXTERIOR SOFFIT LS 1 $3,308.00 $3,308.00 A-C31 INFIELD SYNTHETIC TURF (INCLUDING REQUIRED SITE PREPARATION) LS 1 $1,088,076.00 $1,088,076.00 A-C32 OUTFIELD SITE PREPARATION AND SOD SF 130000 $1.17 $152,100.00 A-C33 CORRUGATED YELLOW FENCE TOP PROTECTOR LF 1686 $5.63 $9,492.18 C-C1 DEMOLITION LS 1 $19,275.00 $19,275.00 C-C2 FENCE DEMOLITION LF 2800 $2.66 $7,448.00 C-C3 EARTHWORK AND GRADING LS 1 $45,802.00 $45,802.00 C-C4 INFIELD DIRT AND ACCESSORIES TON 220 $632.38 $139,123.60 C-C5 NEW CONCRETE FLATWORK SF 8000 $11.13 $89,040.00 C-C6 CONCRETE SUBGRADE/ BASE SF 8000 $4.63 $37,040.00 C-C7 DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACES SF 1310 $3.31 $4,336.10 C-C8 NEW SCOREBOARDS EA 4 $22,308.60 $89,234.40 C-C9 NEW DUGOUTS (CHAINLINK)EA 8 $39,917.99 $319,343.92 CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM C-C10 BLEACHER CANOPIES EA 8 $12,550.00 $100,400.00 C-C11 NEW BLEACHERS EA 8 $7,097.86 $56,782.88 C-C12 PEDESTRIAN LEVEL ENTRY SIGN EA 1 $6,077.00 $6,077.00 C-C13 NEW CHAINLINK FENCE LF 931 $49.13 $45,740.03 C-C14 CONCRETE CURB/ DECOMPOSED GRANITE LF 76 $36.28 $2,757.28 C-C15 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE LS 1 $16,544.49 $16,544.49 C-C16 EARTHWORK SPOILS/ DISPOSAL LS 1 $6,254.00 $6,254.00 C-C17 FERTILIZER LS 1 $8,272.00 $8,272.00 C-C18 AMENDMENTS W FREIGHT LS 1 $38,603.00 $38,603.00 C-C19 SOIL PREP / FINISH GRADE SF 18500 $1.10 $20,350.00 C-C20 HYDROSEEDING SF 22200 $0.37 $8,214.00 C-C21 MESQUITE TREES EA 3 $1,103.00 $3,309.00 C-C22 HERBICIDES / PESTICIDES LS 1 $5,514.00 $5,514.00 C-C23 SOIL TESTING LS 1 $2,757.00 $2,757.00 C-C24 TEMPORARY IRRIGATION LS 1 $3,860.00 $3,860.00 C-C25 IRRIGATION LS 1 $25,722.00 $25,722.00 C-C26 IRRIGATION EXTRA HEADS EA 10 $165.44 $1,654.40 C-C27 SLEEVES LS 1 $5,515.00 $5,515.00 C-C28 SIGNS AND WARNING TAGS LS 1 $2,206.00 $2,206.00 C-C29 IRRIGATION TESTING LS 1 $2,206.00 $2,206.00 C-C30 CORRUGATED YELLOW FENCE TOP PROTECTOR LF 2060 $5.63 $11,597.80 C-C31 NEW FLAGPOLES EA 2 $5,569.98 $11,139.96 C-C32 NEW CONDUIT AND WIRING TO SPORTS LIGHTING LF 2500 $41.14 $102,850.00 Subtotal: $4,246,967.36 Part D - CONCESSION STAND AND RESTROOM BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price A-D1 DEMOLITION LS 1 $7,953.00 $7,953.00 A-D2 EXTERIOR PAINTING SF 850 $9.73 $8,270.50 CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM A-D3 EXTERIOR PANELING SF 650 $23.88 $15,522.00 A-D4 NEW SHEETROCK SF 2000 $7.72 $15,440.00 A-D5 NEW CEILINGS SF 600 $9.74 $5,844.00 A-D6 NEW FLOORING SF 600 $5.51 $3,306.00 A-D7 NEW COUNTERTOP LF 40 $96.51 $3,860.40 A-D8 NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES LS 1 $30,550.00 $30,550.00 A-D9 INTERIOR PAINTING SF 2600 $6.79 $17,654.00 A-D10 NEW HOLLOW METAL DOORS EA 4 $4,404.00 $17,616.00 A-D11 NEW INTERIOR DOOR EA 1 $3,446.00 $3,446.00 A-D12 NEW INTERIOR ELECTRICAL FIXTURES EA 30 $183.83 $5,514.90 A-D13 INTERIOR ELECTRICAL SF 600 $102.27 $61,362.00 A-D14 REPAIR SECURITY GATES /GRILLES AT MAINTENANCE BUILDINGS LS 1 $4,371.05 $4,371.05 A-D15 NEW EXTERIOR WALLPACK SECURITY LIGHTING EA 6 $1,214.18 $7,285.08 A-D16 NEW ROLLING COUNTER DOORS EA 5 $2,315.57 $11,577.85 A-D17 NEW STANDING SEAM ROOF SF 250 $92.65 $23,162.50 C-D1 DEMOLITION LS 1 $1,246.00 $1,246.00 C-D2 EXTERIOR PAINTING SF 3200 $3.31 $10,592.00 C-D3 NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES LS 1 $46,995.00 $46,995.00 C-D4 INTERIOR PAINTING LS 1 $10,225.00 $10,225.00 C-D5 NEW INTERIOR ELECTRICAL FIXTURES EA 7 $689.35 $4,825.45 C-D6 INTERIOR ELECTRICAL LS 1 $98,637.00 $98,637.00 C-D7 NEW EXTERIOR WALLPACK SECURITY LIGHTING EA 4 $896.16 $3,584.64 Subtotal: $418,840.37 Part E - EFFLUENT LINE EXTENSION No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price A-E1 EFFLUENT PIPING CIVIL LF 1200 $111.97 $134,364.00 A-E2 EFFLUENT LINE VALVES EA 2 $23,044.27 $46,088.54 CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM A-E3 MISCELLANEOUS EFFLUENT MATERIAL / LABOR LS 1 $7,721.00 $7,721.00 Subtotal: $188,173.54 Part F - ALLOWANCES No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price A-F1 UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS AL 1 $150,000.00 $150,000.00 A-F2 MISCELLANEOUS ASPHALT PATCHING AL 1 $7,000.00 $7,000.00 A-F3 PATCHING REPAIR OF BUILDING EAVES/SOFFITS/FASCIA AL 1 $3,000.00 $3,000.00 A-F4 SPORTS LIGHTING LAMP REPLACEMENT AL 1 $4,000.00 $4,000.00 Subtotal: $164,000.00 Part B - BASEBALL FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B-B1 DEMOLITION LS 1 $18,722.00 $18,722.00 B-B2 EARTHWORK AND GRADING SF 16110 $3.68 $59,284.80 B-B3 INFIELD DIRT AND ACCESSORIES TON 190 $535.03 $101,655.70 B-B4 NEW CONCRETE FLATWORK SF 14637 $10.88 $159,250.56 B-B5 CONCRETE SUBGRADE/ BASE SF 14637 $4.03 $58,987.11 B-B6 SCREENING OF ELECTRICAL YARD LS 1 $17,365.00 $17,365.00 B-B7 NEW DUGOUTS - CHAINLINK EA 6 $40,207.52 $241,245.12 B-B8 BLEACHER CANOPIES EA 6 $12,549.55 $75,297.30 B-B9 NEW BLEACHERS EA 10 $6,690.95 $66,909.50 B-B10 PEDESTRIAN LEVEL ENTRY SIGN EA 1 $6,077.34 $6,077.34 B-B11 ROOF GUTTERS LS 1 $3,308.90 $3,308.90 B-B12 CHAINLINK FENCE REPLACEMENT LF 110 $49.63 $5,459.30 B-B13 NEW FLAGPOLES EA 2 $5,570.00 $11,140.00 B-B14 MESQUITE TREES EA 2 $2,757.41 $5,514.82 B-B15 EXCAVATION SPOILS HAUL / DISPOSAL LS 1 $4,411.86 $4,411.86 B-B16 IRRIGATION LS 1 $29,780.08 $29,780.08 B-B17 IRRIGATION EXTRA HEADS EA 5 $330.89 $1,654.45 CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM B-B18 SLEEVES LS 1 $5,514.00 $5,514.00 B-B19 SIGNS & WARNING TAGS LS 1 $2,205.00 $2,205.00 B-B20 IRRIGATION TESTING LS 1 $2,757.00 $2,757.00 B-B21 NEW PICNIC BENCH AND TABLE EA 18 $1,178.35 $21,210.30 B-B22 SOD SF 6500 $1.10 $7,150.00 B-B23 GRASS SEED AND TEMPORARY IRRIGATION SF 7032 $1.10 $7,735.20 B-B24 NEW ASPHALT SERVICE DRIVE SF 2500 $13.24 $33,100.00 B-B25 CORRUGATED YELLOW FENCE TOP PROTECTOR LF 1634 $5.63 $9,199.42 Subtotal: $954,934.76 Part C - CONCESSION STAND AND RESTROOM BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B-C1 DEMOLITION LS 1 $5,106.00 $5,106.00 B-C2 EXTERIOR PAINTING LS 1 $16,720.00 $16,720.00 B-C3 NEW PLUMBING FIXTURES LS 1 $38,044.00 $38,044.00 B-C4 INTERIOR PAINTING LS 1 $8,669.00 $8,669.00 B-C5 NEW INTERIOR ELECTRICAL FIXTURES EA 7 $1,310.95 $9,176.65 B-C6 INTERIOR ELECTRICAL LS 1 $115,825.00 $115,825.00 B-C7 NEW EXTERIOR WALLPACK SECURITY LIGHTING EA 4 $896.16 $3,584.64 Subtotal: $197,125.29 Part D - ALLOWANCES No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price B-D1 UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS AL 1 $70,000.00 $70,000.00 B-D2 PATCHING REPAIR OF BUILDING EAVES/SOFFITS/FASCIA AL 1 $3,000.00 $3,000.00 B-D3 IRRIGATION REPAIR BUDGET AL 1 $7,500.00 $7,500.00 B-D4 SPORTS LIGHTING LAMP REPLACEMENT AL 1 $4,000.00 $4,000.00 Subtotal: $84,500.00 CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM Part B - PARKING AREA IMPROVEMENTS No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C-B1 DEMOLITION LS 1 $1,655.00 $1,655.00 C-B2 NEW ASPHALT PAVEMENT SF 3800 $13.24 $50,312.00 C-B3 SEAL COAT EXISTING ASPHALT PAVEMENT SF 12000 $0.33 $3,960.00 C-B4 PARKING LOT STRIPING LS 1 $3,308.90 $3,308.90 C-B5 ACCESSIBLE PARKING SIGN EA 4 $330.89 $1,323.56 C-B6 ACCESSIBLE SYMBOL EA 4 $82.72 $330.88 C-B7 NEW WHEELSTOP EA 4 $132.36 $529.44 Subtotal: $61,419.78 Part E - ALLOWANCES No.Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C-E1 UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS AL 1 $70,000.00 $70,000.00 C-E2 PATCHING REPAIR OF BUILDING EAVES/SOFFITS/FASCIA AL 1 $3,000.00 $3,000.00 C-E3 SPORTS LIGHTING LAMP REPLACEMENT AL 1 $8,000.00 $8,000.00 C-E4 SINK HOLE/ PLUMBING REPAIRS AL 1 $8,000.00 $8,000.00 Subtotal: $89,000.00 CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE Addendum No. 1 11/11/2025 21:05:12 PM Addendum No. 2 11/11/2025 21:05:13 PM Addendum No. 3 11/12/2025 13:18:58 PM Addendum No. 4 11/14/2025 1:28:07 AM CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Other No Contact Period Statement - RFB 6680 10/7/2025 8:07:20 AM Plans Plans/Drawings 10/7/2025 8:05:41 AM Addenda Addendum No. 1 10/10/2025 8:01:06 AM Invitation To Bid Invitation to Bid - RFB 6680 10/7/2025 8:07:19 AM Addenda Addendum No. 2 11/7/2025 9:10:01 AM Other Presentation: Pre-Bid Meeting 6680 10/22/2025 9:52:51 AM Other Site Visit Notification 10/22/2025 9:52:52 AM Other Site visit sign-in sheet 10/24/2025 12:49:00 PM Addenda Addendum No. 3 11/11/2025 4:31:35 PM Addenda Addendum No. 4 11/12/2025 4:59:46 PM CIVCAST RFB 6680 - Greenwood Sports Complex Bond 22/24 Report Created On: 11/14/2025 9:26:30 PM BID FORM Project Name: Project Number: Owner: OAR: Designer: of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder:(full legal name of Bidder) Signature:(signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name:(printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title:(title of person signing Bid Form) Attest:(signature) State of Residency: __________________________________________ Federal Tx ID No. ____________________________________________ Address for Notices: _________________________________________ _________________________________________ _________________________________________ Phone: ______________________ Email: ___________________________________ By its signature below, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement, acknowledges receipt GREENWOOD SPORTS COMPLEX - WESTSIDE PONY BASEBALL (A), UNIVERSAL LEAGUE YOUTH BASEBALL (B), SPARKLING CITY SOFTBALL (C) City of Corpus Christi Joseph Johnson, Assistant Director Construction Management Gignac Architects 23170 (WESTSIDE), 23171 (UNIVERSAL), 23172 (SPARKLING CITY) Bid Form 23170 - WESTSIDE PONY BASEBALL, 23171 - UNIVERSAL LEAGUE YOUTH BASEBALL, 23172 - SPARKLING CITY SOFTBALL Page 1 of 5 Rev 8/2019Addendum No. 2 Barcom Construction, Inc. Patrick Hoffman Treasurer Texas 45-4563476 1146 Heinsohn Road Corpus Christi, TX 78406 361-851-1000 patrickh@barcomcc.com CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF Greenwood Sports Complex BOND 2022/2024 Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Gignac Architects 416 Starr St/Corpus Christi, TX 78401 09/08/2025 Record Drawing Number CP-295 Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION / SECTION TITLE DIVISION 00 PREFACE DOCUMENTS 00 00 00 COVER SHEET 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 01 SEALS PAGE (OPTIONAL) 00 01 02 LIST OF DRAWINGS DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 52 23 AGREEMENT (REV 12-2021) 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS (REV 6-2021) 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (REV 4-2022) DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK (REV 10-2018) 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES (REV 5-2020) 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT (REV 5-2020) 01 33 01 SUBMITTAL REGISTER (REV 10-2018) 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES (REV 10-2018) 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS (REV 8-2019) 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS (REV 8-2019) 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Part T Technical Specifications 01 45 23 TESTING REQUIREMENTS 01 57 23 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 03 11 13.11 CONCRETE FORMS 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING 03 49 00 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 DIVISION / SECTION TITLE 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 63 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 16 00 SHEATHING 06 41 16 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 42 23 PLYWOOD INTERIOR PANELING 07 41 13.16 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 07 46 46.13 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 33 13 COILING COUNTER DOORS 08 71 11 DOOR HARDWARE 08 83 00 MIRRORS 08 91 19 FIXED LOUVERS 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 91 00 PAINTING 10 14 16.13 PLAQUE DISPLAY STANDS 10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 28 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 75 16 FLAGPOLES 11 68 33 BASEBALL–SOFTBALL FIELD EQUIPMENT 11 68 33.13 BASEBALL-SOFTBALL TEAM BENCHES 11 68 33.23 BASEBALL-SOFTBALL FIELD FENCE TOP PROTECTION 11 68 43 EXTERIOR SCOREBOARDS 12 36 23.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 62 23 OUTDOOR PORTABLE BLEACHERS 13 31 33 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURE Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 DIVISION / SECTION TITLE 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 22 13.10 SITE GRADING 31 22 16.13 ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING 31 22 16.23 CHANNEL SHAPING 31 23 16.13 TRENCHING 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENT 32 01 13.61 SLURRY SEAL 32 01 13.62 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS 32 11 00 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 23 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 32 12 16.13 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 32 15 13.13 STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING 32 16 13.13 CURB AND GUTTER 32 16 23 SIDEWALKS 32 16 33 DRIVEWAYS 32 17 13 PRECAST CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS 32 17 23.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 18 23.13 BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL RED INFIELD DIRT 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 31 32 COMPOSITE FENCES AND GATES 32 33 43.53 SITE TABLES 32 33 46 DECORATIVE CHAIN BARRIER 32 84 00 IRRIGATION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION 32 92 13 HYDROSEEDING 32 93 03 LANDSCAPE PLANTING 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 4 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 DIVISION / SECTION TITLE 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 31 13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 33 31 23 WASTEWATER UTILITY FORCE MAIN PIPING 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 30 STORMWATER STRUCTURES Appendix All Testing Reports as Applicable 1 APPENDIX 1 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT PROVIDED BY TOLUNAY WONG 2 APPENDIX 2 PONY BASEBALL FIELD DIMENSIONS AND DISTANCES 3 APPENDIX 3 PONY GIRLS FAST PITCH PLAYING FIELD DIMENSIONS AND DISTANCES 4 APPENDIX 4 TCEQ REPORT – USE OF RECLAIMED WATER 5 APPENDIX 5 MEMO ON WATER/ CHEMICAL PRESSURE INJECTION METHOD PROVIDED BY TOLUNAY WONG END OF SECTION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1 of 1 00 01 01 Rev 1/2022 00 01 01 SEALS PAGE ARCHITECTURAL Raymond Gignac, AIA, Gignac & Associates, LLP Texas Board of Architectural Examiners, Registration # 629 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- STRUCTURAL -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 09/08/2025 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2 of 1 00 01 01 Rev 1/2022 CIVIL -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- MEP MS2 CONSULTING ENGINEERS Ian Vohwinkle, P.E. President/Principal Patrick Howard, P.E. /Electrical Engineer Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3 of 1 00 01 01 Rev 1/2022 LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION Alexis Dominguez Licensed Irrigator Adla inc. END OF SECTION List Of Drawings Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 00 01 02 - 1 DOCUMENT 00 01 02 - LIST OF DRAWINGS 1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the drawing set titled “Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170, Universal League Youth Baseball 23171, Sparkling City Softball 23172”, City of Corpus Christi and as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications. A. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of type indicated: WESTSIDE PONY BASEBALL 23170 1. TITLE SHEETAND SHEET INDEX G-1.0 2. ABBREVIATIONS AND CONVENTIONS G-1.1 3. ADA GUIDELINES G-2.0 4. SITE SURVEY G-3.0 5. IRRIGATION PLAN L-1.1 6. IRRIGATION PLAN L-1.2 7. IRRIGATION DETAILS L-3.1 8. IRRIGATION DETAILS L-3.2 9. CIVIL COVER & GENERAL NOTES C1.01 10. GENERAL DIMENSION PLAN C2.01 11. GENERAL DIMENSION PLAN C2.02 12. GENERAL DIMENSION PLAN C2.03 13. GENERAL DIMENSION PLAN C2.04 14. GENERAL DIMENSION PLAN C2.05 15. GENERAL DIMENSION PLAN C2.06 16. GRADING PLAN C2.08 17. GRADING PLAN C2.09 18. GRADING PLAN C2.10 19. GRADING PLAN C2.11 20. GRADING PLAN C2.12 21. GRADING PLAN C2.13 22. TURF FIELD DRAINAGE PLAN C2.14 23. TURF FIELD DRAINAGE PLAN C2.15 List Of Drawings Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 00 01 02 - 2 24. UTILITY PLAN C2.16 25. UTILITY PLAN C2.17 26. UTILITY PLAN C2.18 27. STORM WATER POLUTION PREVENTION PLAN C3.01 28. PAVING DETAILS C4.01 29. STORM SEWER DETAILS C4.02 30. UTILITY DETAILS C4.03 31. ACCESSIBLE DETAILS C4.04 32. SITE PLAN AS-1.0 33. SITE PLAN DEMOLITION ASD-1.0 34. ENLARGED SITE PLAN AS-1.1 35. SITE DETAILS AS-1.2 36. SITE DETAILS AS-1.3 37. SITE DETAILS AS-1.4 38. BATTING CAGES DETAILS AS-1.5 39. FLOOR PLAN DEMOLITION AD-1.0 40. FLOOR PLAN A-1.0 41. EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-2.0 42. ROOF DETAILS A-4.0 43. STRUCTURAL NOTES I S1.0 44. STRUCTURAL NOTES II S1.1 45. SITE PLAN S2.0 46. FOUNDATION AND FRAMING PLANS I S3.0 47. FOUNDATION AND FRAMING PLANS II S3.1 48. STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS I S4.0 49. STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS II S4.1 50. TYPICAL CMU SECTIONS & DETAILS S5.0 51. MEP SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS MEP-101 52. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-102 53. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-103 54. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-104 List Of Drawings Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 00 01 02 - 3 55. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-105 56. MEP SITE PLAN – LIGHTING MEP-200 57. MEP SITE PLAN MEP-201 58. PARTIAL ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN – OVERALL SECURITY ROUTING – ALL FIELDS ES-201 59. PARTIAL ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN – OVERALL SECURITY ROUTING – ALL FIELDS ES-202 60. MECHANICAL PLAN M-201 61. ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN E-201 62. ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E-301 63. ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE E-401 64. SCHEDULES & DETAILS E-501 65. PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN DP-101 66. PLUMBING PLAN P-201 67. SCHEDULES & DETAILS P-301 UNIVERSAL LEAGUE YOUTH BASEBALL 23171 1. TITLE SHEETAND SHEET INDEX G-1.0 2. ABBREVIATIONS AND CONVENTIONS G-1.1 3. ADA GUIDELINES G-2.0 4. SITE SURVEY G-3.0 5. IRRIGATION PLAN L-1.1 6. IRRIGATION PLAN L-1.2 7. IRRIGATION DETAILS L-3.1 8. IRRIGATION DETAILS L-3.2 9. CIVIL COVER & GENERAL NOTES C1.01 10. DIMENSION PLAN C2.01 11. DIMENSION PLAN C2.02 12. DIMENSION PLAN C2.03 13. GRADING PLAN C2.04 14. GRADING PLAN C2.05 15. GRADING PLAN C2.06 List Of Drawings Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 00 01 02 - 4 16. STORM WATER POLUTION PREVENTION PLAN C3.01 17. PAVING DETAILS C4.01 18. SITE PLAN AS-1.0 19. SITE PLAN DEMOLITION ASD-1.0 20. ENLARGED SITE PLAN AS-1.1 21. SITE DETAILS AS-1.2 22. SITE DETAILS AS-1.3 23. FLOOR PLAN DEMOLITION AD-1.0 24. FLOOR PLANS A-1.1 25. EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-2.0 26. STRUCTURAL NOTES I S1.0 27. STRUCTURAL NOTES II S1.1 28. SITE PLAN S2.0 29. FOUNDATION AND FRAMING PLANS S3.0 30. STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS I S4.0 31. STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS II S4.1 32. TYPICAL CMU SECTIONS AND DETAILS S5.0 33. MEP SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS MEP-101 34. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-102 35. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-103 36. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-104 37. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-105 38. MEP SITE PLAN MEP-201 39. MECHANICAL PLAN M-201 40. ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN E-201 41. ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E-301 42. ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE & DETAILS E-401 43. ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E-501 44. PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN DP-101 45. PLUMBING PLAN P-201 46. PLUMBING SCHEDULES & DETAILS P-301 List Of Drawings Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 00 01 02 - 5 SPARKLING CITY SOFTBALL 23172 1. TITLE SHEETAND SHEET INDEX G-1.0 2. ABBREVIATIONS AND CONVENTIONS G-1.1 3. ADA GUIDELINES G-2.0 4. SITE SURVEY G-3.0 5. IRRIGATION PLAN L-1.1 6. IRRIGATION AND LANDSCAPE PLAN L-1.2 7. IRRIGATION DETAILS L-3.1 8. IRRIGATION AND PLANTING DETAILS L-3.2 9. CIVIL COVER & GENERAL NOTES C1.01 10. DIMENSION PLAN C2.01 11. DIMENSION PLAN C2.02 12. DIMENSION PLAN C2.03 13. GRADING PLAN C2.04 14. GRADING PLAN C2.05 15. GRADING PLAN C2.06 16. STORM WATER POLUTION PREVENTION PLAN C3.01 17. PAVING DETAILS C4.01 18. ACCESSIBLE DETAILS C4.02 19. SITE PLAN AS-1.0 20. SITE PLAN DEMOLITION ASD-1.0 21. ENLARGED SITE PLAN AS-1.1 22. SITE DETAILS AS-1.2 23. SITE DETAILS AS-1.3 24. FLOOR PLAN DEMOLITION AD-1.0 25. FLOOR PLAN A-1.0 26. EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-2.0 27. STRUCTURAL NOTES I S1.0 28. STRUCTURAL NOTES II S1.1 List Of Drawings Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 00 01 02 - 6 29. SITE PLAN S2.0 30. FOUNDATION AND FRAMING PLANS S3.0 31. STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS I S4.0 32. STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS II S4.1 33. TYPICAL CMU SECTIONS & DETAILS S5.0 34. MEP SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS MEP-101 35. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-102 36. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-103 37. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-104 38. MEP SPECIFICATIONS MEP-105 39. MEP SITE PLAN MEP-201 40. MECHANICAL PLAN M-201 41. ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN - RESTROOMS E-201 42. ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN - RESTROOMS E-301 43. ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE & DETAILS E-401 44. ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES & DETAILS E-501 45. PLUMBING DEMOLITION PLAN DP-101 46. PLUMBING PLAN P-201 47. SCHEDULES & DETAILS P-301 END OF SECTION 00 01 02 Agreement 00 52 23 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on , is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 – WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Greenwood Sports Complex: Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 ARTICLE 2 – DESIGNER AND OWNER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Gignac Architects 416 Starr St Corpus Christi, Texas, 78401 nickgignac@gignac-associates.com 2.02 The Owner’s Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson 4917 Holly Rd., Bldg 5 Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 JosephJ@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 180 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed Agreement 00 52 23 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 210 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 Total Base Bid Price $ ARTICLE 5 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.B, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner’s option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6 – INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. Agreement 00 52 23 - 4 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23 - 5 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8 – ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor’s records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor’s fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor’s Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23 - 6 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10 – CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES (SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS) ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta City Secretary Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E Director of Engineering Services __________________________ AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL ___________________________ Assistant City Attorney ATTEST (IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Title: Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00 - 1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ..................................................................................................... 10 1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................. 10 1.02 Terminology ................................................................................................................................ 15 Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ................................................................................................................... 16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ............................................................................. 16 2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................. 16 2.03 Project Management System ...................................................................................................... 16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ...................................................................................................... 17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ................................ 17 Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse ................................................................. 17 3.01 Intent ........................................................................................................................................... 17 3.02 Reference Standards ................................................................................................................... 18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ...................................................................................... 19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents ................................................................................. 20 3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 20 Article 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work .............................................................................. 20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ............................................................. 20 4.02 Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................ 20 4.03 Progress Schedule ....................................................................................................................... 21 4.04 Delays in Contractor’s Progress .................................................................................................. 21 Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions ................................................................................................................................................... 22 5.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................... 22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ........................................................................................................ 22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ............................................................................................ 23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................... 24 5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................ 25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ............................................................................. 26 Article 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................. 28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .................................................................................. 28 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................ 29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage .................................................................................... 29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions ...................................................................................................... 29 6.05 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................ 30 6.06 Property Insurance ...................................................................................................................... 33 6.07 Waiver of Rights .......................................................................................................................... 34 6.08 Owner’s Insurance for Project .................................................................................................... 34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance .............................................................................................. 35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance ............................................................................................................... 35 6.11 Insurance Policies ........................................................................................................................ 35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage ............................................................................................... 35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ...................................................................................................... 35 6.14 Texas Workers’ Compensation Insurance Required Notice ....................................................... 36 Article 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ..................................................................................................... 38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence .............................................................................................. 38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................. 38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others .................................................................... 39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 40 7.06 Permits ........................................................................................................................................ 41 7.07 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 41 7.08 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................. 41 7.09 Safety and Protection ................................................................................................................. 42 7.10 Safety Representative ................................................................................................................. 43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs .............................................................................................. 43 7.12 Emergencies ................................................................................................................................ 43 7.13 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ......................................................................... 43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION ...................................................................................................................... 44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services ................................................................................ 45 Article 8 – Other Work at the Site ............................................................................................................... 46 8.01 Other Work ................................................................................................................................. 46 8.02 Coordination ............................................................................................................................... 47 8.03 Legal Relationships ...................................................................................................................... 47 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 9 – Owner’s and OPT’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................... 48 9.01 Communications to Contractor .................................................................................................. 48 9.02 Replacement of Owner’s Project Team Members ...................................................................... 48 9.03 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 48 9.04 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................. 48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ................................................................................... 48 9.06 Insurance ..................................................................................................................................... 48 9.07 Modifications .............................................................................................................................. 48 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ............................................................................................... 48 9.09 Limitations on OPT’s Responsibilities ......................................................................................... 48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ...................................................................... 49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program ................................................................................................ 49 Article 10 – OAR’s and Designer’s Status During Construction .................................................................. 49 10.01 Owner’s Representative .......................................................................................................... 49 10.02 Visits to Site ............................................................................................................................. 49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives ........................................................................................... 49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................ 49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments......................................................................... 50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................... 50 10.07 Limitations on OAR’s and Designer’s Authority and Responsibilities ..................................... 50 Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work .................................................... 50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents ....................................................... 50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ................................................................................ 51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................ 51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................ 52 11.05 Change of Contract Times ....................................................................................................... 52 11.06 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................... 53 11.08 Notice to Surety ...................................................................................................................... 54 Article 12 – Change Management .............................................................................................................. 54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal ................................................................................................ 54 12.02 Change Proposals .................................................................................................................... 54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification ................................................................... 55 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 12.04 Substitutions ........................................................................................................................... 55 Article 13 – Claims ....................................................................................................................................... 56 13.01 Claims ...................................................................................................................................... 56 13.02 Claims Process ......................................................................................................................... 57 Article 14 – Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements ....................................................................................... 58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates ......................................................................................... 58 14.02 Records .................................................................................................................................... 58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense ......................................................................................... 59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates ............................................................................................................. 59 Article 15 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ...................................................................... 59 15.01 Cost of the Work ..................................................................................................................... 59 15.02 Allowances .............................................................................................................................. 63 15.03 Unit Price Work ....................................................................................................................... 63 15.04 Contingencies .......................................................................................................................... 64 Article 16 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work .................... 65 16.01 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................ 65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals ............................................................................................ 65 16.03 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................ 66 16.05 Uncovering Work .................................................................................................................... 66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................... 67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ....................................................................................... 67 Article 17 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................ 67 17.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................. 67 17.02 Application for Payment ......................................................................................................... 69 17.03 Schedule of Values .................................................................................................................. 71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value ............................................................ 72 17.05 Basis for Payments .................................................................................................................. 73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment ....................................................................... 73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ........................................................................................................... 74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment ......................................................... 74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner’s Authorized Representative ........................................................... 75 17.10 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................ 76 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.11 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................... 76 17.12 Partial Utilization ..................................................................................................................... 77 17.13 Final Inspection ....................................................................................................................... 77 17.14 Final Application for Payment ................................................................................................. 77 17.15 Final Payment .......................................................................................................................... 78 17.16 Waiver of Claims ..................................................................................................................... 78 17.17 Correction Period .................................................................................................................... 78 Article 18 – Suspension of Work and Termination ..................................................................................... 79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................... 79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................ 79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ................................................................................ 80 Article 19 – Project Management ............................................................................................................... 81 19.01 Work Included ......................................................................................................................... 81 19.02 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................... 81 19.03 Document Submittal ............................................................................................................... 81 19.04 Required Permits .................................................................................................................... 81 19.05 Safety Requirements ............................................................................................................... 82 19.06 Access to the Site .................................................................................................................... 82 19.07 Contractor’s Use of Site .......................................................................................................... 82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities ........................................................................ 83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations.............................................................................. 83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations ........................................................................ 84 19.11 Field Measurements ............................................................................................................... 84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points ......................................................................................... 84 19.13 Delivery and Storage ............................................................................................................... 85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction ................................................................................................. 86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access ...................................................................... 86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control .............................................................................................. 87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires ....................................................................................................... 87 19.18 Blasting .................................................................................................................................... 87 19.19 Archeological Requirements ................................................................................................... 87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources ............................................................................................... 88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies .......................................................................................... 88 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 20 – Project Coordination ................................................................................................................ 88 20.01 Work Included ......................................................................................................................... 88 20.02 Document Submittal ............................................................................................................... 88 20.03 Communication During Project ............................................................................................... 89 20.04 Project Meetings ..................................................................................................................... 89 20.05 Requests for Information ........................................................................................................ 91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log.................................................................................................. 91 20.07 Notification By Contractor ...................................................................................................... 92 20.08 Record Documents .................................................................................................................. 92 Article 21 – Quality Management ............................................................................................................... 94 21.01 Contractor’s Responsibilities .................................................................................................. 94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT .................................................................................. 95 21.03 Contractor’s Use of OPT’s Test Reports .................................................................................. 96 21.04 Documentation ....................................................................................................................... 96 21.05 Standards ................................................................................................................................ 97 21.06 Delivery and Storage ............................................................................................................... 97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects.............................................................................. 97 21.08 Test Reports ............................................................................................................................ 97 21.09 Defective Work ....................................................................................................................... 98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory ........................................................................ 98 21.11 Quality Control Plan ................................................................................................................ 98 21.12 Implement Contractor’s Quality Control Plan ...................................................................... 100 Article 22 – Final Resolution of Disputes .................................................................................................. 101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations ..................................................................................................... 101 22.02 Mediation .............................................................................................................................. 101 Article 23 – Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy ................................................................................ 102 23.01 Policy ..................................................................................................................................... 102 23.02 Definitions ............................................................................................................................. 102 23.03 Goals...................................................................................................................................... 103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................ 104 Article 24 – Document Management ........................................................................................................ 104 24.01 Work Included ....................................................................................................................... 104 24.02 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................. 104 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.03 Contractor’s Responsibilities ................................................................................................ 104 24.04 Document Submittal ............................................................................................................. 105 24.05 Document Numbering .......................................................................................................... 105 24.06 Document Requirements ...................................................................................................... 106 Article 25 – Shop Drawings ....................................................................................................................... 107 25.01 Work Included ....................................................................................................................... 107 25.02 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................. 107 25.03 Contractor’s Responsibilities ................................................................................................ 107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................ 109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports ........................................................................................ 109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees .................................................................................................. 110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures .................................................................................... 110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures .......................................................................... 112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products ............................................................................................... 113 25.10 Requests for Deviation .......................................................................................................... 113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities ...................................................................................................... 114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements ................................................................................................. 116 Article 26 – Record Data ........................................................................................................................... 117 26.01 Work Included ....................................................................................................................... 117 26.02 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................. 117 26.03 Contractor’s Responsibilities ................................................................................................ 117 26.04 Record Data Requirements ................................................................................................... 118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports ........................................................................................ 118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees .................................................................................................. 119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures ....................................................................................... 119 26.08 Designer’s Responsibilities .................................................................................................... 120 Article 27 – Construction Progress Schedule ............................................................................................ 121 27.01 Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 121 27.02 Document Submittal ............................................................................................................. 121 27.03 Schedule Requirements ........................................................................................................ 121 27.04 Schedule Revisions ................................................................................................................ 123 27.05 Float Time.............................................................................................................................. 123 Article 28 – Video and Photographic documentation .............................................................................. 124 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.01 Work Included ....................................................................................................................... 124 28.02 Quality Assurance ................................................................................................................. 124 28.03 Document Submittal ............................................................................................................. 124 28.04 Photographs .......................................................................................................................... 125 28.05 Video Recording .................................................................................................................... 125 Article 29 – Execution and Closeout ......................................................................................................... 125 29.01 Substantial Completion ......................................................................................................... 125 29.02 Final Inspections.................................................................................................................... 126 29.03 Reinspection Fees ................................................................................................................. 126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................ 127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ............................................................................................................... 127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements......................................................................... 127 Article 30 – Miscellaneous ........................................................................................................................ 128 30.01 Computation of Times........................................................................................................... 128 30.02 Owner’s Right to Audit Contractor’s Records ....................................................................... 128 30.03 Independent Contractor ....................................................................................................... 129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ........................................................................................................... 129 30.05 Limitation of Damages .......................................................................................................... 129 30.06 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................. 129 30.07 Severability ............................................................................................................................ 129 30.08 Survival of Obligations .......................................................................................................... 130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries ................................................................................................. 130 30.10 Assignment of Contract......................................................................................................... 130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity ........................................................................................ 130 30.12 Controlling Law ..................................................................................................................... 130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue ................................................................................... 130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury........................................................................................................... 130 30.15 Attorney Fees ........................................................................................................................ 130 30.16 Compliance with Laws........................................................................................................... 131 30.17 Enforcement.......................................................................................................................... 131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation ....................................................................................................... 131 30.19 Contract Sum......................................................................................................................... 131 30.20 Contractor’s Guarantee as Additional Remedy .................................................................... 131 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.21 Notices. ................................................................................................................................. 131 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution - The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date – The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City) authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid – The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents – The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder – An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order - A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract, which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract - The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment - A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications, and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any, that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times - The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor - The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 21. Contractor’s Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work - The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR’s recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract - The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order - A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs - All costs, losses, damages, and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations - Applicable laws, statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 32. Milestone - A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award - The notice of Owner’s intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner - The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City’s officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner’s Authorized Representative or OAR - The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner’s Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner’s Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule - A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual – That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information, solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR - The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents - A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications - The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor - An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions - The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data - Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or c. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work - Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive - A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to “at no additional cost to Owner,” “at Contractor’s expense,” or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms “day” or “calendar day” mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed,” or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” and “provide” have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment, but do not expressly use the words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide.” F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word “all” is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” “provide,” or similar words include the meaning of the phrase “The Contractor shall...” before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT’s project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00 - 17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor’s Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract, Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations, whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall, therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor’s failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00 - 20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer’s or OAR’s interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor’s Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor’s Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work, except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner’s exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner’s exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor’s performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays. Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor’s Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor’s Team. ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site, adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00 - 23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor’s Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor’s Team’s operations; c. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor’s Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor’s safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor’s interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor’s cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR’s issuance of the OPT’s statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR’s issuance of OPT’s statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00 - 27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner’s Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor’s safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor’s Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor’s Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor’s Team that was not created by the Contractor’s Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR’s notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-VIII or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT’s failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor’s full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor’s obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00 - 30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the “other insurance” clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor’s insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers’ compensation policy and Contractor’s professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor’s Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers’ compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers’ compensation obligations. Provide an “All Other States” endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor’s commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or “All Peril” policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor’s Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, “Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured” or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds $5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor’s commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor’s pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00 - 33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT, Contractor, and all Subcontractors, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder’s risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder’s risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner’s Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner, Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner’s Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connect ed with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance by the OPT, named insureds, or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of “Additional Insureds” for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days’ notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy’s terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00 - 36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 City of Corpus Christi – Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi, TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers’ Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage (“certificate”) - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers’ compensation insurance coverage for the person’s or entity’s employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project - includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor’s/person’s Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project (“Subcontractor” in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. “Services” include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. “Services” does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor’s current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers’ Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers’ compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00 - 38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission’s Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor’s failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner’s consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Sit e or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR’s consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year’s Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00 - 39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.B 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor’s reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner’s notice to replace a Subcontractor, Supplier, or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner’s initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers’ Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor’s Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor’s Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00 - 41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner’s exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor’s Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor’s Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor’s Team. E. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor’s Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner’s safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner’s safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor’s warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections, tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney ’s fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor’s Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner’s defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor ’s Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor’s Team, (ii) Contractor’s Team’s action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner’s employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner’s sole negligence. C. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor’s Team. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor’s Team or other individuals or entities under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor’s Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released, waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor’s counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner’s consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner’s full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00 - 46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor’s design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor’s Work. This other work may be performed by Owner’s employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor’s Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor’s Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor’s Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner’s employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays, disruptions, and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S AND OPT’S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner’s Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. OPT’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT’s Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT’s responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10 – OAR’S AND DESIGNER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner’s Representative A. OAR is Owner’s representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner’s representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer’s visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer’s authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner’s quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner’s representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR’s visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR’s authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives’ authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer’s authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer’s authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer’s authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR’s authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer’s decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer’s decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR’s and Designer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor’s Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor’s Team. ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer’s approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner’s correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor’s agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor’s submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents, or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT’s description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies, fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor’s supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor’s risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list “or equal” or “or approved equal” products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer’s responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request, the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13 – CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR’s decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project’s critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00 - 57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project’s critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief, the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor’s job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12, shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer’s initial recommendation regarding a Claim, the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14 – PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.024, the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.003 – Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.023(b) – Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258, shall pay to the Owner, on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.058 – Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov’t Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set -off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor’s employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers’ compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave, vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers’ field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining, with the OPT, which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor- and Subcontractor-owned machinery, trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book (“Blue Book”) multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at 50% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor’s Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00 - 62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor’s Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor’s fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor’s indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor’s fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor’s fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor’s fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; c. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor’s fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor’s fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor’s fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.B.1 through 15.05.B.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.B.1 and 15.02.B.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR’s decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR’s decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor’s selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained by the Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 16 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor’s safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor’s obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Pay claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT’s evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT’s observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner’s right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor’s Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days’ notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses, or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor’s conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor’s Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; l. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set -off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim, demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and e quipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up, training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer’s facilities or on Site; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor’s use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor’s safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical, temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner’s Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer’s estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor’s overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion, show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount, up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00 - 74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City, that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor’s obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner’s Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT’s reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR’s recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR’s recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor’s notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor’s notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor’s coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner’s assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor’s obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor’s access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT’s reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR’s recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.B corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR’s instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Contractor’s obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor’s creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor’s insolvency; 5. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor’s failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 00 72 00 - 80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 8. Contractor’s other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor’s performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR’s request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor’s performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days’ notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor’s performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor’s performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor’s performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days’ notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen, skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier’s printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes, sketches, recordings, and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports, including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor’s Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees’ vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner’s property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms, tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier’s storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier’s instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier’s required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner’s approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00 - 87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction, with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner’s Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner’s Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner’s Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20 – PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor’s project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. c. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Contractor’s organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents, Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor’s superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor’s detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre- Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use “Notification by Contractor” form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor’s field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number, and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. c. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions, traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work (lines added) in yellow; c. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor’s Responsibilities A. Review the OPT’s Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; c. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT’s use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT’s Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan, the OPT’s Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT’s Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor’s Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor’s Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00 - 96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT’s acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT’s acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT’s acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT’s quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor’s Use of OPT’s Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT’s anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT’s quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT’s quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT’s Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor’s Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00 - 97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) “Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications.” B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; c. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; l. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor’s Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00 - 99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor’s Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, c. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.B.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor’s Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor’s Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor’s Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties’ senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00 - 102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit, either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs. Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County, Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23 – MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy, the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00 - 103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect, to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy, women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual: Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities. The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman, a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example, a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor’s aggregate work force on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00 - 104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor’s percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project, the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24 – DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor’s Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for “Drop Metadata.” Uncheck the “Drop Metadata” box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CP Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00 - 106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter “A” designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00 - 107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25 – SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general, to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor’s responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor’s Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00 - 108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer’s attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor’s risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner’s option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors, textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00 - 110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product’s intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for “Drop Metadata.” Uncheck the “Drop Metadata” box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier’s standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of “or equal” products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00 - 112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner’s option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers’ products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase “or equal” or “or approved equal.” 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT’s responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer’s published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor’s markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. c. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is “Approved as Noted,” but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked “Approved as Noted” and “Resubmit with corrections made.” These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as “At Variance With” (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as “Not Approved” if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer’s review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26 – RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor’s responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor’s Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, model number, and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights, gauges, materials of construction, external connections, anchors, and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for “Drop Metadata.” Uncheck the “Drop Metadata” box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of “or equal” products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer’s Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor’s responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of “Filed as Received” and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked “Rejected” and “Submit Shop Drawing.” No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked “Rejected” and “Revise and Resubmit.” Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked “Filed as Received.” When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked “Rejected” and “Cancel - Not Required.” No further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked “Filed as Received.” ARTICLE 27 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years’ minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor’s program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor’s plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.05 Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28 – VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way) including but not limited to streets, curb and gutter, utilities, driveways, fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication, or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date, time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29 – EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR’s notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project, transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00 - 128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30 – MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner’s Right to Audit Contractor’s Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee, which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four (4) years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract, then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to: accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor’s records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner’s designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00 - 129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor’s Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor’s Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of, the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor’s Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County, Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys’ fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney’s fees. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein, and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year, the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments, is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated, this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor’s Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor’s guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 00 72 00 - 132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Gignac & Associates, LLP York Engineering MS2 Consulting Engineers Munoz Engineering Adla inc. A. Paragraph 1.01.A.54 “Substantial Completion” is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. The following items are fully functional and suitable for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. A Certificate of Occupancy is required b. RAS Inspection must be completed All required inspections to be me ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR’S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor’s progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of 24 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 24 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. a. Geotechnical Reports include the following: Geotechnical Engineering Study, prepared by Tolunay Wong, dated March 11, 2025, 30 pages - The Contractor may rely on the following Technical Data provided in this document. 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: NONE SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. 1. Environmental Reports include the following: NONE 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to known Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site include the following: NONE Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 B. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner. ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Broad Form 2. Premises – Operations 3. Underground Hazard 4. Products / Completed Operations 5. Contractual Liability 6 Independent Contractors 7. Personal & Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Per Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate Business Automobile Liability - Owned, Non- Owned, Rented and Leased $500,000 Combined Single Limit Workers’ Compensation Statutory Employer’s Liability $500,000/ 500,000/ 500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability Required if Contract Price > $5,000,000 $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Contractor’s Pollution Liability / Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation > 5 ft or asbestos present $1,000,000 Per Claim ☐ Required x☐ Not Required Builder’s Risk (All Perils including Collapse) Required for vertical structures and bridges Coverage limit shall be in the amount of the total cost of the project. x☐ Required ☐ Not Required Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 4 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 Installation/Equipment Floater Required if installing city-owned equipment or storing contractor equipment on city- owned property Equal to Contract Price x☐ Required ☐ Not Required ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: The Contractor must perform at least 30 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees. ARTICLE 14 – PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination (WD) No Construction Type Project Type TX21 Heavy Heavy Construction Projects (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) TX29 Highway Highway Construction Projects (excluding tunnels, building structures in rest area projects & railroad construction; bascule, suspension & spandrel arch bridges designed for commercial navigation, bridges involving marine construction; and other major bridges). TX33 Heavy Pipeline - On-Shore Pipeline Construction TX34 Heavy Pipeline - Off-Shore Construction TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) TX51 Heavy Dredging projects along the Texas gulf coast area including all public channels, harbors, rivers, tributaries and the Gulf Intracoastal Waterways. TX55 Heavy Tunnel Construction Projects (Bored, 48” In Diameter Or More) Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 5 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 "General Decision Number: TX20250288 03/14/2025 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20240288 State: Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Aransas, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(1). ______________________________________________________________ |If the contract is entered |. Executive Order 14026 | |into on or after January 30, | generally applies to the | |2022, or the contract is | contract. | |renewed or extended (e.g., an |. The contractor must pay | |option is exercised) on or | all covered workers at | |after January 30, 2022: | least $17.75 per hour (or | | | the applicable wage rate | | | listed on this wage | Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 6 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 | | determination, if it is | | | higher) for all hours | | | spent performing on the | | | contract in 2025. | |______________________________|_____________________________| |If the contract was awarded on|. Executive Order 13658 | |or between January 1, 2015 and| generally applies to the | |January 29, 2022, and the | contract. | |contract is not renewed or |. The contractor must pay all| |extended on or after January | covered workers at least | |30, 2022: | $13.30 per hour (or the | | | applicable wage rate listed| | | on this wage determination,| | | if it is higher) for all | | | hours spent performing on | | | that contract in 2025. | |______________________________|_____________________________| The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2025 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 7 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 1 03/14/2025 * BOIL0074-003 01/01/2025 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 33.17 24.92 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0278-002 08/25/2024 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$ 30.80 8.97 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1) Tower Crane.............$ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above.....$ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under..............$ 32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0084-011 06/01/2024 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 28.26 8.13 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 8 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 ** 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 ** 0.00 INSULATOR - MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 ** 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 22.16 5.26 LABORER: Common or General......$ 9.68 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick...$ 11.36 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff...........$ 11.28 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 14.25 ** 0.00 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 9 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................$ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill.................$ 16.22 ** 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift..............$ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................$ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic..............$ 17.52 ** 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete).........$ 16.03 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................$ 12.70 ** 0.00 PAINTER (Brush, Roller, and Spray)...........................$ 14.45 ** 0.00 PIPEFITTER.......................$ 25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$ 25.64 8.16 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 22.73 7.52 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 10 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation...........$ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 12.39 ** 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................$ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck.......$ 12.00 ** 4.11 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($17.75) or 13658 ($13.30). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Please also note that the minimum wage requirements of Executive Order 14026 are not currently being enforced as to any contract or subcontract to which the states of Texas, Louisiana, or Mississippi, including their agencies, are a party. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 11 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classifications and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the type(s) of construction and geographic area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order under rate identifiers indicating whether the particular Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 12 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate), a survey rate, a weighted union average rate, a state adopted rate, or a supplemental classification rate. Union Rate Identifiers A four-letter identifier beginning with characters other than ""SU"", ""UAVG"", ?SA?, or ?SC? denotes that a union rate was prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2024. PLUM is an identifier of the union whose collectively bargained rate prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2024 in the example, is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all changes over time that are reported to WHD in the rates in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing the classification. Union Average Rate Identifiers The UAVG identifier indicates that no single rate prevailed for those classifications, but that 100% of the data reported for the classifications reflected union rates. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 01/01/2024. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the State of Ohio. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 13 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 used in producing the wage determination. The date, 01/01/2024 in the example, indicates the date the wage determination was updated to reflect the most current union average rate. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January, to reflect a weighted average of the current rates in the collective bargaining agreements on which the rate is based. Survey Rate Identifiers The ""SU"" identifier indicates that either a single non-union rate prevailed (as defined in 29 CFR 1.2) for this classification in the survey or that the rate was derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As a weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SUFL2022-007 6/27/2024. SU indicates the rate is a single non-union prevailing rate or a weighted average of survey data for that classification. FL indicates the State of Florida. 2022 is the year of the survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 6/27/2024 in the example, indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. ?SU? wage rates typically remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. However, the Wage and Hour Division (WHD) has the discretion to update such rates under 29 CFR 1.6(c)(1). State Adopted Rate Identifiers Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 14 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 The ""SA"" identifier indicates that the classifications and prevailing wage rates set by a state (or local) government were adopted under 29 C.F.R 1.3(g)-(h). Example: SAME2023-007 01/03/2024. SA reflects that the rates are state adopted. ME refers to the State of Maine. 2023 is the year during which the state completed the survey on which the listed classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 01/03/2024 in the example, reflects the date on which the classifications and rates under the ?SA? identifier took effect under state law in the state from which the rates were adopted. ----------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: a) a survey underlying a wage determination b) an existing published wage determination c) an initial WHD letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter d) an initial conformance (additional classification and rate) determination On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be directed to the WHD Branch of Wage Surveys. Requests can be submitted via email to davisbaconinfo@dol.gov or by mail to: Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 15 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 Branch of Wage Surveys Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 Regarding any other wage determination matter such as conformance decisions, requests for initial decisions should be directed to the WHD Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Requests can be submitted via email to BCWD-Office@dol.gov or by mail to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2) If an initial decision has been issued, then any interested party (those affected by the action) that disagrees with the decision can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Requests for review and reconsideration can be submitted via email to dba.reconsideration@dol.gov or by mail to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and any information (wage payment Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 16 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION" ARTICLE 19 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES C. For the Contractor’s convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Gignac Architects 361-884-2661 Nick Gignac 361-884-2661 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 Water/ Wastewater/ Stormwater 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks & Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div. for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department (City Fiber) 361-826-1956 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 17 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications (Network Operations Center) 1-888-632-0931 CenturyLink 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25 – SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Reference Specification Section 01 33 01 Submittal Registe SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: Hourly Rates Principal Architect: $ 260.00 Project Manager (Architect): $ 195.00 Project Construction Manager: $ 195.00 Construction Administrator: $ 145.00 Intern: $ 110.00 Administrative: $ 80.00 More than 2 submittals is considered excessive City will request reimbursement from Contractor at the rates listed above. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 18 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 26 – RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: 1. Reference Specification Section 01 33 01 Submittal Register 2. Red lined As-Built Plas when project is complete SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 10/2018 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A.Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1.Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2.Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3.The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Greenwood Sports Complex A.Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: Project 1: Westside Pony Baseball 23170 1.Sports Field Improvements 2.Sports Lighting Improvements 3.Support Building Improvements 4.New Irrigation 5.New Hardscape 6.Covered Bleachers and Canopies 7.Dugout Improvements 8.Signage 9.Effluent Water Line Extension 10.Infield Synthetic Turf and Outfield Grass Project 2: Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 1.Sports Field Improvements 2.Sports Lighting Improvements 3.Support Building Improvements 4.New Hardscape 5.Covered Bleachers and Canopies Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 10/2018 6.Dugout Improvements 7.Signage 8.Irrigation Work 9.Picnic Benches and Tables Project 3: Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.Sports Field Improvements 2.Sports Lighting Improvements 3.Support Building Improvements 4.New Irrigation 5.New Hardscape 6.Covered Bleachers and Canopies 7.Dugout Improvements 8.Signage 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A.The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1.NONE B.In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C.Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1.Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2.Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A.The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1.NONE B.Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1.Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 10/2018 2.Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C.Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A.Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A.Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B.The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C.Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D.Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 5/2020 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A.Alternates: 1.This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2.Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3.Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate, and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4.Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5.Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B.The Bid Items described as “Allowances” have been set as noted in the Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner’s discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A.Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES NONE Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 5/2020 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES 1.PROJECT 23170 WESTSIDE PONY BASEBALL A.Allowance A-F1 - UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS 1.The sum of$150,000 to be used for Unforeseen Conditions. B.Allowance A-F2 - MISCELLANEOUS ASPHALT PATCHING 1.The sum of $7,000 to be used for the purchase of Miscellaneous Asphalt Patching. C. Allowance A-F3 – PATCHING REPAIR OF BUILDING EAVES/SOFFITS/FASCIA: 1.The sum of $3,000 to be used for the purchase of Patching Repair of Building Eaves/Soffits/Fascia. 2.PROJECT 23171 UNIVERSAL LEAGUE YOUTH BASEBALL A.Allowance B-D1 - UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS 1.The sum of $70,000 to be used for Unforeseen Conditions. B.Allowance B-D2 – PATCHING REPAIR OF BUILDING EAVES/SOFFITS/FASCIA: 1.The sum of $3,000 to be used for the purchase of Patching Repair of Building Eaves/Soffits/Fascia. C. Allowance B-D3 – IRRIGATION REPAIR BUDGET: The sum of $7,500 to be used for the repair of the irrigation system. 3.PROJECT 23172 SPARKLING CITY SOFTBALL A.Allowance C-E1 - UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS 1.The sum of $70,000 to be used for Unforeseen Conditions. B.Allowance C-E2 – PATCHING REPAIR OF BUILDING EAVES/SOFFITS/FASCIA: 1.The sum of $3,000 to be used for the purchase of Patching Repair of Building Eaves/Soffits/Fascia. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A.Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B.Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A.Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B.Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A.Bid Items A-A1, B-A1, C-A1 – Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1.Include the following costs in this Bid item: a.Transportation and setup for equipment; b.Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c.Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d.Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e.Demobilization; and f.Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B.Bid Items A-A2, B-A2, C-A2 – Bonds and Insurance (Maximum Allowance of 2%) 1.Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents and not exceed 2% of the Bid Price. 2.Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. C.Other Bid Items 1.The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or BID FORM and Schedule of Values. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 33 01 Submittal Register Product Information Sample or Mockup Operations Data 014523 TESTING REQUIREMENTS 2.01.A Record Data 014523 TESTING REQUIREMENTS 2.01.B Record Data 015723 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 1.03.A Sample 015723 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 1.03.B Shop Drawing 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 2.0 Record Data 031113.11 CONCRETE FORMS 1.03.A Record Data 032111 REINFORCING STEEL 1.04.A Record Data 032111 REINFORCING STEEL 1.04.B Record Data 033111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.04.A Record Data 033511 CONCRETE FINISHING 1.04.A Record Data 033911 CONCRETE CURING 1.04.A Record Data 034900 GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 1.2.A Record Data 034900 GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 1.2.B Shop Drawing 034900 GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 1.2.C Sample 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1.3.A Record Data 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1.3.B Shop Drawing 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1.3.C Sample 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY 1.3.A Record Data 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY 1.3.C Shop Drawing 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY 1.3.D Sample 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.4.A Record Data 061063 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.1.A Record Data 061600 SHEATHING 1.3.A Record Data 064116 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.3.A Record Data 064116 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.3.B Shop Drawing 064116 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.3.C Sample 064223 PLYWOOD INTERIOR PANELING 1.2.A Record Data 074113.16 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 1.3.A Record Data 074113.16 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 1.3.B Shop Drawing 074113.16 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 1.3.C Sample 074646.13 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 1.4.A Record Data 074646.13 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 1.4.B Sample 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.4.A Record Data 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.4.B Shop Drawing 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.4.C Sample 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.3.A Record Data 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.3.B Shop Drawing 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.3.C Record Data 083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 1.3.A Record Data 083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 1.3.B Shop Drawing 083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 1.3.C Sample 087111 DOOR HARDWARE 1.3.A Record Data 087111 DOOR HARDWARE 1.3.B Record Data 088300 MIRRORS 1.3.A Record Data 088300 MIRRORS 1.3.B Shop Drawing 088300 MIRRORS 1.3.C Sample 089119 FIXED LOUVERS 1.4.A Record Data 089119 FIXED LOUVERS 1.4.B Shop Drawing 089119 FIXED LOUVERS 1.4.C Sample 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 1.3.A Record Data 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.3.A Record Data 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.3.B Sample 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.3.C Record Data Paragraph No. Specification Section Specification Description Types of Submittals Required Submittal Register Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 01 33 01-1 10/2018 01 33 01 Submittal Register Product Information Sample or Mockup Operations Data Paragraph No. Specification Section Specification Description Types of Submittals Required 099100 PAINTING 1.4.A Record Data 099100 PAINTING 1.4.B Sample 101416.13 PLAQUE DISPLAY STANDS 1.3.A Record Data 101416.13 PLAQUE DISPLAY STANDS 1.4.B Shop Drawing 101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 1.4.A Record Data 101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 1.4.B Shop Drawing 101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 1.4.C Sample 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 1.2.A Record Data 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 1.2.B Shop Drawing 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 1.2.C Sample 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 1.2.D Record Data 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1.3.A Record Data 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1.3.B Shop Drawing 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1.3.C Sample 102613 CORNER GUARDS 1.3.A Record Data 102613 CORNER GUARDS 1.3.B Sample 102813 TOILET ACCESSORIES 1.3.A Record Data 102800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1.3.A Record Data 102800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1.3.B Sample 102800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1.3.C Record Data 107516 FLAGPOLES 1.4.A Record Data 107516 FLAGPOLES 1.4.B Shop Drawing 107516 FLAGPOLES 1.4.C Record Data 107516 FLAGPOLES 1.4.D Sample 116833 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL FIELD EQUIPMENT 1.4.A Record Data 116833 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL FIELD EQUIPMENT 1.4.B Shop Drawing 116833.13 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL TEAM BENCHES 1.4.A Record Data 116833.13 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL TEAM BENCHES 1.4.B Shop Drawing 116833.23 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL FENCE TOP PROTECTION 1.4.A Record Data 116833.23 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL FENCE TOP PROTECTION 1.4.B Shop Drawing 116843 EXTERIOR SCOREBOARDS 1.04.A Record Data 116843 EXTERIOR SCOREBOARDS 1.04.B Shop Drawing 123623.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1.2A Record Data 123623.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1.2B Shop Drawing 123623.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1.2C Sample 126223 OUTDOOR PORTABLE BLEACHERS 1.3.A Record Data 126223 OUTDOOR PORTABLE BLEACHERS 1.3.B Shop Drawing 126223 OUTDOOR PORTABLE BLEACHERS 1.3.C Sample 133133 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES 1.3.A Record Data 133133 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES 1.3.B Record Data 133133 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES 1.3.C Sample 312213.10 SITE GRADING 1.03.A Record Data 3122316.23 CHANNEL SHAPING 1.03.A Record Data 312316.13 TRENCHING 1.03.A Record Data 312316.13 TRENCHING 1.03.B Shop Drawing 312413.10 EMBANKMENT 1.04.A Record Data 320113.61 SLURRY SEAL 1.03.A Record Data 320113.62 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS 1.03.A Record Data 321100 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 1.03.A Record Data 321100 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 1.03.B Record Data 321113.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 1.03.A Record Data 321113.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 1.03.B Record Data 321113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 1.03.A Record Data 321113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 1.03.B Record Data Submittal Register Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 01 33 01 Submittal Register Product Information Sample or Mockup Operations Data Paragraph No. Specification Section Specification Description Types of Submittals Required 311123 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 1.04.A Record Data 311123 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 1.04.B Record Data 311213.19 PRIME COAT 1.03.A Record Data 311213.19 PRIME COAT 1.03.B Record Data 311213.19 PRIME COAT 1.03.C Record Data 321216.13 PLANT MIX ASPHALT PAVING 1.04.A Record Data 321216.13 PLANT MIX ASPHALT PAVING 1.04.B Record Data 323343.53 CONCRETE PAVING 1.03.A Record Data 321513.13 STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING 1.5.A Record Data 321513.13 STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING 1.5.A Sample 321613.13 CURB & GUTTER 1.03.A Record Data 321623 SIDEWALKS 1.04.A Record Data 321633 DRIVEWAYS 1.03.A Record Data 321723.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 1.03.A Record Data 321823.13 BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL RED INFIELD DIRT 1.3.A Sample 323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1.4.A Record Data 323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1.4.B Shop Drawing 323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1.4.C Sample 323343.53 SITE TABLES 1.2.A Record Data 323323 SITE TRASH RECEPTACLES 1.2.B Sample 323346 DECORATIVE CHAIN BARRIER 1.3.A Record Data 323346 DECORATIVE CHAIN BARRIER 1.3.B Shop Drawing 328400 IRRIGATION 1.5.A Record Data 328400 IRRIGATION 1.5.B Record Data 328400 IRRIGATION 1.5.C Shop Drawing 329113 SOIL PREPARATION 1.4.A Sample 329303 LANDSCAPE PLANTING 1.4.A Record Data 334211 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 1.4.B Record Data 334230 STORMWATER STRUCTURES 1.04.A Record Data 334230 STORMWATER STRUCTURES 1.04.A Sample Submittal Register Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 01 33 01-3 10/2018 Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 10/2018 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A.Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence stipulated below: Project to be completed within the Contract time and in a sequence coordinated with City of Corpus Christi. B.Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: NOT APPLICABLE C.Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D.Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A.Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1.Electrical power, 2.Control power, 3.Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4.Communications equipment, and 5.Other designated functions. B.Describe the following in the plan of action: 1.Scheduled dates for construction; 2.Work to be performed; 3.Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4.Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5.Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6.Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7.List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8.Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9.Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C.Submit plan 2 weeks prior to beginning the Work. Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 10/2018 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 8/2019 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A.Provide temporary facilities, including OPT’s field office and the Contractor’s field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B.Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT’s field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1.Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2.Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3.Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B.Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A.Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B.Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C.Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D.Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT’s field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E.Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F.Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G.Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1.Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 8/2019 2.Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. 3.Prevent freezing of pipes, flooding, or the contamination of water. 4.Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A.Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B.Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES – OPT FIELD OFFICE NOT REQUIRED A.The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B.Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor’s use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C.Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D.No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT’s field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A.Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A.Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B.Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A.Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 8/2019 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A.Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1.Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a.Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b.Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2.Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor’s and the OPT’s field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A.Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B.Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi’s Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the “Plan”). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A.Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A.The Owner will furnish one Bond Project sign to be installed by the Contractor. The sign must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The location of the sign will be determined in the field by the OAR and is to be placed at ballpark entrance area. B.Contractor signs are allowed at the contractors’ expense and may require permitting and approval from Development Services. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A.Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 4 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 8/2019 B.Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. C.Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A.Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B.Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A.Install and maintain a construction fence around the laydown area. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. Project fencing requires screening with project rendering image. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A.Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B.Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C.Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A.Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT’s field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B.Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C.Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D.Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT’s field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 8/2019 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A.Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B.Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C.Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D.Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B.Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A.Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B.Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A.Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 8/2019 B.Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled “STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS” and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A.As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1.Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2.Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3.Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B.Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C.Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. D.Development Services Department (DSD) has approved plans for construction. Contractor must register with DSD as the contractor of record and obtain a final permit prior to commencing construction work. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A.Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1.Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2.Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3.Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4.Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5.Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6.Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7.Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 8/2019 8.Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B.Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent, SWPPP, and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C.Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D.Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E.Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A.Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B.Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1.Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2.Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3.Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4.Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C.Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 4 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 8/2019 1.Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2.Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3.Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A.Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner’s operations. B.Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS NOT - APPLICABLE A.Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A.Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B.Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C.Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D.Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E.Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 5 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 8/2019 1.11 DEWATERING A.This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than “well pointing” to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B.Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. C.An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D.Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream, the Corpus Christi Bay, Oso Creek, CC Ship Channel. E.Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F.Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G.Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a “no cost” permit from the Owner’s Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER - NOT APPLICABLE A.An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities Temporary Controls 01 57 00 - 6 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 8/2019 would be [US Ecology (USET) in Robstown, Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi, Texas]. B.The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor’s actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A.Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner’s requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine, which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner’s wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A.All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Owner shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance, Windstorm Engineer included. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A.Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B.Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C.Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Construction Waste Management Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 017419 - 1 SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1.Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Construction Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B.Demolition Waste: Building, structure, and site improvement materials resulting from demolition operations. C.Disposal: Removal of demolition or construction waste and subsequent salvage, sale, recycling, or deposit in landfill, incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or designated spoil areas on Owner’s property. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NONE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A.General: remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2.Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B.Burning: Do not burn waste materials. END OF SECTION 017419 TESTING REQUIREMENTS 01 45 23-1 SECTION 01 45 23 TESTING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 Summary A. This specification shall govern the testing requirements for civil site work associated with the project. In the event the governing authority’s testing requirements are more stringent than the requirements set forth herein the governing authority’s requirements shall be followed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 Supplier Mix Data & Certifications A. Mix Designs, furnished by supplier, shall be presented to Engineer 1. Surface Course Mix Designs a. 1 per mix design B. Mill Certificates, furnished by supplier, shall be presented to Engineer 1. Lime Stabilized Subgrade a. 1 per load 2. Flexible Base a. 1 per load PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Testing Requirements A. Concrete Strength Test (@ 28 days unless noted otherwise on plans) 1. Concrete Pavement a. 1 set of 3 per 75 Cubic Yards for each pavement type (Light Duty, Heavy Duty, Dumpster Pad, etc.) 2. Concrete Sidewalk a. 1 set of 3 per 4,000 Square Feet 3. Curb or Curb & Gutter a. 1 set of 3 per 500 Linear Feet 4. Concrete Inlets a. 1 set of 3 per every 3 inlets B. Field Sieve Analysis after final mixing 1. Lime stabilized Subgrade a. 1 per day C. Eades & Grim Test 1. Lime stabilized Subgrade a. 1 for each soil type D. Atterberg Limits & Gradation Test 1. Caliche a. 1 per 5,000 Cubic Yards E. Los Angeles Abrasion Loss Test 1. Flexible Base a. 1 per 5,000 Cubic Yards F. Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Tests 1. Lab site sampling, Molding, Lab Density, Stability, Maximum Theoretical Specific Gravity (Rice Gravity), Extraction a. 1 per project or 1 per 500 tons 2. Cored In-Place Density, Air Voids, Thickness of Compacted Mix a. 1 per 2,500 Square Yards Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 01 57 23-1 SECTION 01 57 23 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for temporary Storm Water Pollution Prevention. B. The work described in this section is applicable to all sections of the contract documents. All work that would disturb the existing site conditions or present the potential for site runoff shall adhere fully to this specification section. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item(s) below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. The TCEQ TPDES Construction General Permit (CGP) No. TXR150000 effective March 5, 2018 (or most current version). This specification requires compliance with all provisions of the TCEQ TPDES permit. B. The project SWPPP provided with the construction plans. C. City of Corpus Christi ordinance 022941, Storm Water Quality Management Program. D. Any applicable local ordinance or regulation pertaining to storm water pollution control or prevention. 1.03 Submittals A. Submittals of products used in structural and non-structural controls shall be made through established procedures prior to installation on the site. The Contractor shall make available physical samples and product literature on any material used in structural or non-structural controls during the course of the project prior to its implementation in the field. B. Construction and shop drawings containing deviations from local, state, and federal standards and regulations or special designs shall be sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer of the State of Texas and retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. BMP – Best Management Practices B. CSN – Construction Site Notice (Large CSN for large sites; Small CSN for small sites) C. EHS – Environmental Health and Safety D. NOI and NOT – Notice of Intent and Notice of Termination for TPDES permits E. ODR – Owner Designated Representative F. Land Disturbance – Any activity which affects the ground surface and/or vegetation G. SWPPP – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan H. TCEQ – Texas Commission on Environmental Quality I. TPDES – Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System J. Large Construction Activities – Construction activities including clearing, grading and excavating that result in land disturbance equal to or greater than 5 acres of land. K. Small Construction Activities - Construction activities including clearing, grading and excavating that result in land disturbance equal to or greater than 1 acre and less than 5 acres of land. L. Under 1 Acre Construction Activities - Construction activities including clearing, grading, excavating, or any activity which affects the ground surface and/or vegetation that results in land disturbance under 1 acre of land 1.05 Quality Assurance A. In order to minimize the discharge of pollutants to storm water, the Contractor shall implement all permanent and temporary site controls according to TPDES Guidelines, as set forth by the TCEQ. B. Implementation of site controls shall be performed by a qualified contractor experienced in the proper installation of such devices in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications, and in keeping with both recognized Best Management Practices (BMPs), and TPDES regulations. C. The Contractor shall inspect all BMPs at regular intervals as specified in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan for this project. Use standard Owner Inspection forms for each inspection. Record all deficiencies of site controls and take immediate action to correct any deficiencies recorded. Keep records of inspections current and on file, available for review by EPA, TCEQ, MS4 Operator and Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 01 57 23-2 2.01 Materials Specific site control devices are identified in the SWPPP provided with the construction plans. Where such devices are indicated, their material composition shall comply with this section. Refer to the construction plans for details of listed materials. Projects may propose alternative BMPs, as long as they are effective at performing the desired functions. A. Temporary Sediment Control Fence (Silt Fence) B. Inlet Protection C. Rock Filter Dam (Rock Check Dam) D. Stabilized Construction Entrance/Exit E. Tracking Control Mat F. Mulch Sock G. Triangular Filter Dikes: for use on surfaces or in locations where standard silt fence cannot be implemented H. Concrete, Paint and Stucco Washout: shall be used for containment of fluids from concrete truck washout wastes. I. Temporary Storage Tanks: shall be used for temporary storage of fuels on the construction project site. J. Diversion Dike K. Interceptor Swale L. Erosion Control Matting: shall be used on steep slopes, in drainage swales, and in high traffic pedestrian areas of barren soil. It shall include one or more of the following: 1. Jute Mat – a plain fabric made of jute yarn, woven in a loose and simple manner, with a minimum unit weight of 2.7 pounds per square yard. Width shall be as required for the dimensions of the area to be covered. 2. Wood Fiber Mat – a mat composed of wood fibers, which are encased in nylon, cotton or other type of netting 3. Synthetic Webbing Mat – a mat manufactured from polyvinyl chloride or polypropylene monofilaments, which are bonded together into a three-dimensional web to facilitate erosion control and/or re- vegetation. 4. Organic Mulches: shall be used for covering bare soil, retaining moisture under existing vegetation being preserved, and for absorbing the energy of compaction caused by foot or vehicular traffic. Refer to Exhibit M. M. Any other materials indicated in the SWPPP. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. The Contractor shall provide a complete installation of all site control devices and measures (BMPs) indicated in the SWPPP, and as specified herein. These BMPs must be confirmed as fully operational with the Owner before any work that disturbs the site can begin. B. As an alternative to the BMPs indicated in the SWPPP, and as specified herein, the Contractor may propose alternate BMPs that perform the same function as the indicated BMP but may be of a different configuration, materials, or type for review and approval by Engineer. Installation of alternate BMPs shall not proceed until reviewed and approved by Engineer. C. The Contractor shall provide inspection and monitoring of controls in place and shall perform all revisions and updating of SWPPP. An accurate, chronological record of all Contractor inspections, revisions and additional controls shall be kept on file at the project site, for review, with a copy of the SWPPP. D. The Contractor shall submit the NOT to the Owner after all disturbed areas are re-established (stabilized) with vegetative cover following completion of construction. Following acceptance of stabilized areas, all site controls that are no longer necessary shall be removed. 3.02 Contractor Responsibilities A. This project requires implementation of storm water Best Management Practices for control devices and monitoring by the Contractor to comply with all provisions of the SWPPP developed for the project by the Engineer. The Contractor must fulfill all TPDES regulatory requirements, including the filing of the NOI and NOT or signing and posting of the CSN. B. The Contractor shall provide signatures of a Corporate Officer for the NOI, Large CSN, Small CSN, NOT and any other forms or applications as required by the TPDES Construction General Permit Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 01 57 23-3 TXR150000. The Contractor shall also provide delegated authorization to sign reports per 30 TAC 305.128. Individuals conducting site inspections shall be qualified to the satisfaction of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall insert a copy of the signed NOI, and Large or Small CSN into the SWPPP book to be kept at the jobsite. D. The SWPPP book kept at the jobsite shall also contain the following: 1. A letter delegating signature authority to the field personnel for the Contractor 2. A copy of the TPDES permit when received 3. A copy of the Large or Small CSN 4. A copy of the SWPPP provided with the construction plans E. The Contractor shall review the SWPPP and verify existing conditions at the site before determining scope of implementation of site controls. Site survey and site plan drawings shall be used for additional reference. The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in advance, of this site review to allow for Owner participation. F. The Contractor shall construct a Project SWPPP sign and place it at the main entrance to the project site. This sign shall include the NOI and TPDES permit along with the TCEQ TPDES Large or Small CSN, depending on the size of the construction project. G. The Contractor shall complete the SWPPP Project Start-up form and shared SWPPP Acceptance Form as required before commencing soil disturbing activities. H. The Contractor shall provide all material, labor, equipment and services required to implement, maintain and monitor all erosion and sedimentation controls in compliance with the SWPPP. All controls implemented by the Contractor shall comply with the TPDES regulations as issued by the TCEQ with most current version. These controls shall remain in operation until project completion and re-establishment of the site to pre-existing conditions (or improved) or longer as directed by the ODR. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. All earthwork as required to implement swales, dikes, basins and other excavations for temporary routing of utilities, to protect against erosion or sediment-laden (polluted) storm water runoff. 2. All structural controls as shown or specified, including silt fences, sediment traps, stabilized construction entrance, subsurface drains, pipe slope drains, inlet/outlet protection, reinforced soil retention, gabions, rock berms, etc. 3. All non-structural controls as shown or specified, including temporary or permanent vegetation, mulching, geotextiles, sod stabilization, preservation of vegetative buffer strips, preservation/protection of existing trees and other mature vegetation. 4. All modifications and revisions to SWPPP necessary to meet changing site conditions and to address new sources of storm water discharges, as the work progresses. 5. All maintenance and repair of structural and non-structural controls in place shall continue until final stabilization is achieved or as directed by the ODR. 6. Weekly site inspections, as required by the SWPPP, of pollutant sources, including hazardous sources, structural and non-structural controls, and all monitoring of SWPPP revisions and maintenance of inspection records. 7. Removal of all structural and non-structural controls as necessary upon completion, and only after final stabilization is achieved. 8. Filing of NOT within 30 days of final stabilization being achieved and being approved by the Owner, or of another Operator assuming control of the un-stabilized portions of the site. 9. Refer to the SWPPP for additional requirements to ensure compliance with TPDES regulations. 3.03 Inspection A. Inspection and maintenance is required for all areas disturbed by construction activity and for all erosion and sediment controls that are used. Inspection shall be performed at least once a week, and within 24 hours of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater for as long as a portion of the site is disturbed. B. The Contractor should select one individual who will be responsible for the inspection and maintenance of the system. The inspector will look at the control measures and determine if they are performing correctly and effectively. C. Reports shall be prepared and stored in accordance with the CGP. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 01 57 23-4 D. Additional information may be found on the SWPPP provided with the Construction plans. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A.Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for environmental protection , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B.Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity. C.Pre-demolition photographs or video. D.Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1.If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B.Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C.Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D.Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E.Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. F.Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B.Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A.Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 3.4 PROTECTION A.Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A.General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1.Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2.Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3.Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame- cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 4.Maintain fire watch during and for at least 4 hours after flame-cutting operations. 5.Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6.Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B.Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1.Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2.Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3.Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4.Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. C.Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 CLEANING A.Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2.Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3.Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4.Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B.Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C.Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 024119 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE FORMS 03 11 13.11-1 SECTION 03 11 13.11 CONCRETE FORMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation and removal of Concrete Forms as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. American Concrete Institute B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 420, Concrete Structures 1.03 Submittals A. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Owner for review as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Forms may be of either wood or metal, except where otherwise specified or directed by the Owner. B. Forms shall be straight, free from warp, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. C. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight, rigidly braced and strong enough to prevent bulging between supports and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. 2.02 Form Design and Form Plans A. Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. 1. The rate of placing the concrete shall be taken into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. B. For job-fabricated forms, an additional live load of fifty pounds per square foot (50 psf) shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. C. Commercially produced structural units used in formwork shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment, shear or end reaction. D. The maximum working load shall include a live load of thirty-five pounds per square foot (35 psf) of horizontal form surface and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking formwork details for approval. E. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Owner for approval when specified. 2.03 Wood Forms A. Lumber 1. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned, of good quality, and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. 2. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one (1) side and two (2) edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. B. Plywood 1. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch (1/2”) in thickness, with no form lining required. 2. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the span between the supporting studs or joists. 3. Plywood used for forming surfaces which remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class II. C. Reuse of Lumber or Plywood Forms 1. Forms or form lumbers to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. 2. Any lumber or plywood which is split, warped, bulged, marred or has defects that will produce inferior work shall not be used and, if condemned, shall be promptly removed from the work. D. Liner 1. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces, except for the inside of culvert barrels, inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and, any surface formed by a single finished board. 2. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE FORMS 03 11 13.11-2 3. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as Masonite or plywood. 4. Thin membrane sheeting, such as polyethylene sheets, shall not be used for form lining. 2.04 Metal Forms A. The foregoing requirements for timber forms as regard to design, mortar-tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, reuse and wetting shall also apply to metal forms, except that these will not require lining, unless specifically noted on the plans. B. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. C. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. D. Clamps, pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. E. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. F. Metal shall be kept free from rust, grease or other foreign materials. 2.05 Molding A. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. B. Wood molding shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. C. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-fourths inch (3/4”) on the sides. 2.06 Metal Form Ties A. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forms in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. B. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. 2.07 Form Removal Coating A. Shall be oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface, which is approved by the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Supports A. Studs and joists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. B. Shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. 3.03 Form Walls A. Walls shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least four-feet (4’) on each side of joints to provide continuity. B. A row of walls shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. C. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. D. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. E. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical, i.e., long dimensions set in the same direction. F. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel, except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Owner. G. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. H. All forms shall be constructed to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. 1. The forms may be given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. I. Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth inch (1/16”). J. Forms shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE FORMS 03 11 13.11-3 K. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. L. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such formwork is completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. M. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 3.04 Spreaders A. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. 3.05 Metal Appliances A. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2”) from the concrete surface. B. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling, and when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. C. Burning off of rods, bolts or ties will not be permitted. D. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch (1/2”) from the face of the concrete. 3.06 Railing and Ornamental Work A. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork. B. All moldings, panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true, sharp and clean cut. 3.07 Form Removal Coating A. Prior to placing concrete reinforcement, the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. 3.08 Removal of Forms A. Except as herein provided, forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one (1) day when Type I and Type II cement is used, and not less than one-half (1/2) day when Type III cement is used, provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. B. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three (3) hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. C. Weight-supporting forms shall be removed once the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 2,500 psi or as directed by the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 REINFORCING STEEL 03 21 11-1 SECTION 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and placement of Reinforcing Steel as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A.American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete B. ASTM A36 / A36M – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel C. ASTM A82 / A82M – Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement D. ASTM A123 / A123M – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products E. ASTM A185 / A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete F. ASTM A496 / A496M – Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement G. ASTM A615 / A615M – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement H. ASTM A675 / A675M – Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties I. ASTM A706 / A706M – Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement J. ASTM A775 / A775M – Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars K. ASTM A884 / A884M – Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement L. ASTM A934 / A934M – Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars M. ASTM A996 / A996M – Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement N. ASTM D3963 – Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars O. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 440, Reinforcing Steel P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-7320, “Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Mills” Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-7330, “Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Epoxy Coating Applicators” R. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4510, “Mechanical Couplers” S. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) T.American Welding Society AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel" 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). B. Mill approval letter certified by mill. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. The requirements of the Drawings, Owner, ASTM Designation, and / or ACI requirements shall govern all products. B. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation and / or ACI requirements to which reference is made, the provisions of this specification shall govern. C. All bars shall be marked in accordance with ASTM A615 or ASTM A706. D. Furnish copies of a written certification that the reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Section. 2.02 Approved Mills Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 REINFORCING STEEL 03 21 11-2 A. Reinforcement shall be produced by mills that are approved by the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) in accordance with TxDOT DMS-7320. B. Mill certification shall be submitted with each delivery prior to incorporation of the material into the Project. 2.03 Deformed Bar A. Unless otherwise designated on the Drawings, all bar reinforcement shall be deformed. B. Reinforcing Steel must conform to one of the following: 1. ASTM A615, Grades 40 or 60, 2. ASTM A996, Type A, Grades 40 or 60, 3. ASTM A996, Type R, Grade 60, permitted in concrete pavement only (Furnish ASTM A996, Type R bars as straight bars only and do not bend them. Bend tests are not required), 4. ASTM A706 5. ACI 318 C. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75, and will be permitted for straight bars only. D. The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification is shown in Table 1: Table 1 Size, Area, and Weight of Reinforcing Steel Bars Bar Size Number Nominal Diameter (inch) Nominal Area (square inch) Weight Per Linear Foot 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.600 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 2.04 Smooth Round Bars and Dowels A. Reinforcing Steel must conform to one of the following: 1. ASTM A615, Grades 40 or 60, 2. ASTM A996, Type A, Grades 40 or 60, 3. ASTM A996, Type R, Grade 60, permitted in concrete pavement only (Furnish ASTM A996, Type R bars as straight bars only and do not bend them. Bend tests are not required), 4. ASTM A706 5. ACI 318 B. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75, and will be permitted for straight bars only. C. Smooth bars larger than No. 3, provide steel conforming to ASTM A615 or meet the physical requirements of ASTM A36 and ACI 318. D. Concrete pavement 1. Smooth bars and Dowels must have a minimum yield strength of 60 ksi and meet ASTM A615 and ACI 318. 2.05 Spiral Reinforcement A. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth (not deformed) bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the Drawings. B. Bars 1. Bars must comply with ASTM A615, Grade 40; ASTM A996, Type A, Grade 40; or ASTM A675, Grade 80, meeting the dimensional tolerances of ASTM A615, and ACI 318. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 REINFORCING STEEL 03 21 11-3 C. Wire 1. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM A185 and ACI 318. 2. Smooth wire must comply with ASTM A82. 3. Deformed wire must comply with ASTM A496. 2.06 Weldable Reinforcing Steel A. Reinforcement shall comply with ASTM A706 or have a carbon equivalent (C.E.) of at most 0.55%. B. Furnish copies of the chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and sulfur and written certification that the reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Section. 2.07 Welded Wire Fabric A. Provide in rolls or sheets complying with ASTM A185. 2.08 Epoxy Coating 1. Required when and as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Owner. 2. The epoxy shall be applied by an approved applicator in accordance with TxDOT DMS-7330, “Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Epoxy Coating Applicators”. 3. Reinforcement is to be coated in accordance with Table 2. Table 2 Epoxy Coating Requirements for Reinforcing Steel Material Specification Bar ASTM A775 or A934 Wire or Fabric ASTM A884 Class A or B Mechanical Couplers As shown on Drawings Hardware As shown on Drawings 4. Epoxy coating material and coating repair material shall comply with TxDOT DMS-8130, “Epoxy Powder Coating for Reinforcing Steel”. 5. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement will be sampled and tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-739-I. 6. Maintain identification of all reinforcing throughout the coating and fabrication and until delivery to the project. 7. Furnish copies of a written certification that the reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Section and copies of the manufacturers control tests. 2.09 Mechanical Couplers A. When mechanical splices are shown in the Drawings and allowed by the Owner, the following types shall be used: 1. Sleeve-filler, 2. Sleeve-threaded, 3. Sleeve-swaged, or 4. Sleeve-wedge (not permitted on coated reinforcement). B. Furnish only couplers that have been produced by a manufacturer that is approved in accordance with TxDOT DMS-4510, “Mechanical Couplers”. C. Couplers must be sampled and tested in accordance with DMS-4510. D. Furnish copies of a written certification that the mechanical couplers meets the requirements of this Section. 2.10 Ties A. Uncoated Reinforcement 1. Ties shall be a minimum of 16 gauge of like material of the reinforcement 2. Be in accordance with the Drawings and ACI 318. B. Coated Reinforcement 1. Ties shall be a minimum of 16 gauge 7 mil PVC coated 2. Be in accordance with the Drawings and ACI 318 3. Be approved by the Owner. 2.11 Spacers and Blocking A. Galvanized Metal Spacers 1. Be galvanized in conformance with ASTM A123. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 REINFORCING STEEL 03 21 11-4 2. Are to be approved for use by Owner. 3. Not allowed with epoxy-coated reinforcement. B. Metal Spacers with Plastic Coated Tips 1. Are to be approved for use by Owner. C. Stainless Steel Spacers 1. Shall be type 316 or as directed by Owner. 2. Are to be approved for use by Owner. D. Plastic Spacers 1. For approval of plastic spacers on project, representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a five percent (5%) solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. 2. Must be used with epoxy-coated reinforcement. E. Pre-cast Mortar or Concrete Blocks 1. Pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Owner and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. 2. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. 3. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. 4. Except in unusual cases, and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Owner, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches (2 1/2”) square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. 5. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. 6. Not allowed with epoxy-coated reinforcement. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Bending A. The reinforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated on the Drawings. B. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. 1. Field bending and method of, will need to be approved by the Owner. C. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection at no cost to the Owner. D. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter (d), shall be as shown in Table 3: Table 3 Minimum Inside Diameter of Bends Bend Bar Size Number (inch)Grade 40 Grade 60 Grade 75 #3, #4, #5 3d 4d --Bends of 90 degree and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend.#6, #7, #8 4d 6d -- Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 REINFORCING STEEL 03 21 11-5 #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8 5d 6d -- #9, #10 5d 8d -- #11 5d 8d 8d All bends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above. #14, #18 10d 10d -- E. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grades 40 and 60 is required, bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. 1. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of ten (10) times the nominal diameter of the bar. 3.03 Tolerances A. Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be as specified on the Drawings or as shown in Figure 1: Figure 1 Fabrication Tolerances for Bars 3.04 Storage A. All materials shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. B. Materials shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. C. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross-sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 3.05 Splices A. Bars 1. No splicing of bars, except when provided on the Drawings or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 REINFORCING STEEL 03 21 11-6 2. Splices not provided for on the Drawings will be permitted, but not included for measurement, in Grade 40 bars only, sizes No. 8 and smaller, subject to the following: a. For bars exceeding forty-feet (40’) in drawing length, the distance center to center of splices shall not be less than forty-feet (40’) and no individual bar length shall be less than ten-feet (10’). b. Splices will not be permitted in bars less than forty-feet (40’) in drawing length. c. Splices which are not shown on the Drawings, but permitted hereby, shall be made in accordance with Table 4, or as directed by Owner: Table 4 Minimum Lap Requirements Bar Size Number (inches)Uncoated Lap Length Coated Lap Length 3 1’-6”2’-6” 4 2’-0”3’-0” 5 2’-6”3’-6” 6 3’-0”4’-0” 7 3’-6”5’-6” 8 4’-6”7’-0” 9 6’-0”8’-6” 10 7’-6”11’-0” 11 9’-0”13’-6” d. Do not lap No. 14 or No. 18 bars e. The specified concrete cover shall be maintained at such splices and the bars placed in contact and securely tied together. 3. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. a. When permitted in main bars, splices in adjacent bars will be staggered a minimum of two (2) splice lengths. B. Welded Wire 1. Lap length shall be at least two (2) cross wires plus two inches (2”) on each sheet or roll. 2. All intersections of wire shall be securely tied together. C. Box Culvert Extensions 1. For box culvert extensions with less than one-foot (1’) of fill, the existing longitudinal bars shall have a twenty (20) diameter lap with the new bars. 2. For extensions with more than one-foot (1’) of fill, a minimum of one-foot (1’) lap will be required. D. Welding 1. Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the Drawings and by a method approved by the Owner. 2. All welding operations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship, and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the Drawings and AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel" of the American Welding Society. 3. All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced. 4. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars, shall be done in the field. 5. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. 6. Welding of coated bars is not allowed unless the Owner approves of the method and location. E. Mechanical Couplings 1. Install mechanical coupling in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations only where shown on the Drawings. 2. Do not repair damaged threads. 3. Mechanical coupling of coated bars is not allowed unless the Owner approves of the method and location. 3.06 Dowel Bars 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses, shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 4. 2. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of twelve-inches (12”). Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 REINFORCING STEEL 03 21 11-7 3. Bars shall be greased or sleeved on one (1) end. 3.07 Uncoated Reinforcement Placement 1. Handling a. Provide systems for handling the reinforcement to prevent damage. b. Bundles shall be lifted with a strong back, spreader bar, multiple supports, platform bridge, or other means to prevent damage. c. Do not drag or drop reinforcement. d. Do not drag or drop other materials onto reinforcement. 2. Cutting a. Cutting of rods, bolt, and ties shall be done by saw or shear-cut only. b. Burning off of rods, bolts or ties will not be permitted. 3. Reinforcement a. Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the Drawings. 1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. 2) In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-twelfth (1/12) of the spacing between bars. 3) In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-quarter inch (1/4”). 4) Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch (1”) or as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. b. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tensions members and be attached securely thereto. c. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. 4. Support a. Reinforcement is to be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. b. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars, or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. c. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with this specification and the Drawings. d. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2”) from the concrete surface. 1) They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling, and when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. 5. Tying a. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one foot (1’) in each direction, alternate intersections only, need be tied. b. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch (1/2”) from the face of the concrete. 6. Spacers and Blocking a. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers, or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. b. Metal supports are not allowed to come into contact with the soil, subgrade, water, or other material which is corrosive to metal, unless approved by the Owner. 3.08 Coated Reinforcement Placement 1. Handling a. Provide systems for handling the reinforcement with padded contact areas to prevent damage to the coating. b. Bundles shall be lifted with a strong back, spreader bar, multiple supports, platform bridge, or other means to prevent damage to the coating. c. Do not drag or drop reinforcement. d. Do not drag or drop other materials onto reinforcement. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 REINFORCING STEEL 03 21 11-8 2. Cutting a. Cutting of rods, bolt, and ties shall be done by saw or shear-cut only when approved. 1) The cut shall be coated in accordance with ASTM D3963 and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Reinforcement a. Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the Drawings. 1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. 2) In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-twelfth (1/12) of the spacing between bars. 3) In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-quarter inch (1/4”). 4) Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one-inch (1”) or as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. b. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tensions members and be attached securely thereto. c. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. 4. Support a. Reinforcement is to be supported and tied in such a manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. b. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel, overturning of truss bars, or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. c. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with this specification and the Drawings. d. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2”) from the concrete surface. 1) They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling, and when removed, shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. 5. Tying a. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than one-foot (1’) in each direction, alternate intersections only, need be tied. b. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch (1/2”) from the face of the concrete. 6. Spacers and Blocking a. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, or approved plastic spacers. b. Metal supports are not allowed to come into contact with the soil, subgrade, water, or other material which is corrosive to metal, unless approved by the Owner. 7. Coating Repair a. The coating repair shall be in accordance with ASTM D3963 and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.09 Concrete Placement 1. No concrete shall be deposited until the Owner has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 2. Before any concrete is placed, all debris shall be cleaned from the reinforcement. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-1 SECTION 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the construction of structures involving the use of structural concrete as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 11 13.11 CONCRETE FORMS B. 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL C. 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING D. 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ACI 211, “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete” B. ACI 302, “Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction” C. ACI 304, “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete” D. ACI 305, “Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting” E. ACI 306, “Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting” F. ACI 309, “Consolidation of Concrete” G. ACI 315, “Recommended Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Systems” H. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete” I. ACI 614, “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete” J. ASTM C 150 – Specification for Portland Cement K. ASTM C 595 – Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements L. ASTM C 845 – Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement M. ASTM C 1157 – Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement N. ASTM D 994 – Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type) O. ASTM D 1751 – Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 420, Concrete Structures Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 421, Hydraulic Cement Concrete R. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS–4610, Fly Ash S. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS–4640, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete T. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS–6310, Joint Sealants and Fillers U. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS–6160, Waterstops, Nylon Reinforced Neoprene Sheet, and Elastomeric Pads V. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS–4650, Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retardants W. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-100-E X. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-203-F Y. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-401-A Z. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-410-A AA. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-411-A BB. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-413-A CC. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-472-A DD. CRSI, “Reinforced Concrete – A Manual of Standard Practice” EE. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). B. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. C. All test results shall be sent to the Owner upon completion of test. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-2 1.05 Definitions A. Retarding admixture - a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will retard the initial set of the concrete. B. Water-reducing admixture – a material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Any testing required for approval of use of a product is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2.02 Hydraulic Cement A. Cement shall be in conformance with TxDOT DMS-4600. 1. Any testing required for approval of use is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. For cement strength requirements, either the tensile or the compressive test may be used. C. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the Drawings. 1. Except when Type II is specified on the Drawings, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding twelve (12) hours will not exceed 60° F. 2. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. 3. Only one (1) brand of each type will be permitted on the entire project, unless otherwise authorized by the Owner. D. Cement Delivery 1. Bulk a. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. b. Information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. 2. Bag a. Shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. b. Information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. c. Bags shall contain ninety-four (94) pounds net. d. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. 3. No caked cement will be accepted. E. Storage 1. All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins, which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. 2. Storage facilities shall be ample, and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. 3. The Owner may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of forty-eight (48) hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering during periods of no precipitation. 4. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. 2.03Aggregate A. Supply aggregates that meet the definitions in TxDOT Tex-100-E. B. Coarse Aggregate 1. Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof; free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. 2. It shall not contain more than quarter-percent (0.25%) by weight of clay lumps, nor more than one-percent (1%) by weight of shale, nor more than five-percent (5%) of weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-413-A. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-3 3. It shall have a wear of not more than forty-percent (40%) when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-410-A. 4. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, coarse aggregate will be subjected to a five (5) cycle magnesium sulfate soundness of not more than eighteen-percent (18%) when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-411- A. a. Crushed recycled hydraulic cement concrete is not subject to the five (5) cycle soundness test. 5. When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate, including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. Table 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Percent Passing on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No. Nominal Size 2 1/2 2 1 1/2 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 No. 4 No. 8 1 2”100 80 to 100 50 to 85 20 to 40 0 to 5 2 (467)*1 1/2”100 95 to 100 35 to 70 10 to 30 0 to 5 3 1 1/2”100 95 to 100 60 to 90 25 to 60 0 to 5 4 (57)*1”100 95 to 100 25 to 60 0 to 10 0 to 5 5 (67)3/4”100 90 to 100 20 to 55 0 to 10 0 to 5 6 (7)1/2”100 90 to 100 40 to 70 0 to 15 0 to 5 7 3/8”100 70 to 95 0 to 25 8 3/8”100 95 to 100 20 to 65 0 to 10 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. 6. The Loss by Decantation as tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-406-A and the allowable weight of clay lumps shall not exceed one-percent (1%), or the value shown on the Drawings, whichever is smaller. a. In the case of aggregates made primarily from crushing stone, if the material finer than the No. 200 sieve is established to be the dust of fracture and essentially free from clay or shale as established by TxDOT Tex-406-A, Part III, the limit may be increased to one and one-half percent (1.5%). b. When crushed limestone coarse aggregate is used in concrete pavements, the decant may not exceed one- percent (1%) but not more than three-percent (3%) if the material finer than the No. 200 sieve is determined to be at least sixty-seven percent (67%) calcium carbonate in accordance with TxDOT Tex- 406-A, Part III. C. Fine Aggregate 1. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-4 2. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than half-percent (0.5%) by weight of clay lumps in accordance with TxDOT Tex-413-A. 3. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities in accordance with TxDOT Tex-408-A, it shall not show a color darker than standard. 4. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than sixty-percent (60%) by weight when tested in accordance with TxDOT standard laboratory test procedure Tex- 612-J and as noted in TxDOT Item 421 for all concrete subject to direct traffic. 5. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-401-A, the fine aggregate or combinations of aggregates, including mineral filler, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. Table 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate Grade No.3/8”No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 1 0 0 to 5 0 to 20 15 to 50 35 to 75 65 to 90 90 to 100 97 to 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on the No. 200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85, the retainage on the No. 50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. 6. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test (TxDOT Tex-203-F). a. The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the Drawings, whichever is greater. 7. For all classes of concrete except K, the fineness modulus for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10 as determined by TxDOT Tex-402-A. 8. For all class K concrete, the fineness modulus for fine aggregates shall be between 2.60 and 2.80 as determined by TxDOT Tex-402-A. D. Mineral Filler 1. Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material with 100% passing the No. 30 sieve and 65% to 100% passing the No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-401-A. E. Storage 1. The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. 2. If the aggregates are stored on the ground, the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. a. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. 3. When conditions require the use of two (2) or more sizes of aggregates, they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. a. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. 4. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. a. If segregation is apparent, the stockpile shall be remixed and tested. 5. Unless otherwise authorized by the Owner, all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least twenty-four (24) hours to reduce the free moisture content. F. Supplementary Cementing Materials (SCM) 1. Fly Ash a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4610 1) Do not use class C Fly Ash in sulfate-resistant concrete 2. Ultra-Fine Fly Ash (UFFA) a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4610 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag (GGBFS) Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-5 a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4620, Grade 100 or 120 4. Silica Fume a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4630 5. Metakaolin a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4635 2.04Mixing Water 1. Water for use in concrete shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances. 2. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. 3. Water shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421. a. Any testing required for approval of use is the responsibility of the Contractor. 4. The water source shall be able to supply the required amounts of water and shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. 5. The water source shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately. 2.05Admixtures 1. Admixtures must be in conformance with TxDOT DMS-4640 and ASTM C 494 or ASTM C 1017 (for flowing concrete only). a. Any testing required for approval of use is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Dosage rates of admixtures shall be determined prior to use by means of trial mixes made with materials to be used and under anticipated construction conditions. 3. Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. 4. Storage shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. 2.06Mortar and Grout 1. Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of one (1) part hydraulic cement, two (2) parts finely graded sand, and sufficient water to make the mixture plastic and can be easily handled and spread by trowel. 2. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. 3. When required by the Owner, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. 2.07Epoxy 1. Epoxy materials shall conform to TxDOT DMS-6100. 2. Epoxy Bonding Compound for bonding new concrete to hardened concrete or other structural material a. Epoxy Bonding Compound shall be a two component, 100% solids, moisture insensitive system. 3. Epoxy Grout for Epoxy patch on non-horizontal surfaces to concrete a. Epoxy Compound shall be a low-modulus, high viscosity, moisture insensitive system. 2.08 Expansion Joint Material 1. Preformed Fiber Material a. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the Drawings. b. At the Contractor's option, the material shall be one of the following types, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings: 1) Asphalt Board a) Asphalt Board shall consist of two (2) liners of 0.016-inch asphalt impregnated paper, filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. b) Boards shall be smooth, flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. c) When tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-524-C, the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch (1”) in three and one-half inches (3 1/2”). d) Bituminous fiber and bituminous mastic composition material conforming to ASTM D 994 and ASTM D 1751 2) Wood a) Shall be Filler board of selected stock. b) Use wood of density and type as follows: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-6 (1) Clear, all-heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot, after being oven dried to constant weight. (2) Clear, all-heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot, after being oven dried to constant weight. 3) Rebonded Neoprene Filler a) Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed-cell neoprene particles, rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness of the dimensions shown on Drawings. b) Filler material shall have the physical properties in Table 3 and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1752, Type 1 where applicable: Table 3 Filler Material Properties Property Method Requirement Color ASTM D1752 Type 1 Black Density ASTM D1752 Type 1 40 PCF Min Recovery ASTM D1752 Type 1 90% Min. Compression ASTM D1752 Type 1 50 to 500 psi Extrusion ASTM D1752 Type 1 0.25 In. Max. Tensile Strength ASTM D1752 Type 1 20 psi Min. Elongation 75% Min c) The manufacturers shall furnish the Owner with certified test results as to the compliance with the above requirements and a twelve-inch (12”) x twelve-inch (12”) x one-inch (1”) sample from the shipment for approval. 2. Joint Sealing Materials a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, joint sealing material shall conform to the following requirements: 1) The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressible. 2) The material shall not crack or break when exposed to low temperatures. 3) The material shall be one of the following: a) Class 1-a (1) Two component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold Extruded Type. (2) Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. (3) This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self-leveling. (4) It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature leveling. (5) It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77° F, + 3° F maximum for twenty- four (24) hours. b) Class 1-b (1) Two component, Synthetic Polymer, Cold Pourable, Self Leveling Type. (2) Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. (3) It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77° F + 3° F maximum for three (3) hours. c) For Sidewalks and Driveways (1) Shall be Greenstreak #610 or approved equal installed over expansion joint filler. 4) Performance Requirements a) Class 1-a and 1-b, when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-525-C, shall meet the above curing times and requirements as follows: (1) It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured, or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 60° F. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-7 (2) Penetration at 77° F. (a) 150 gm. cone, 5 sec., max. cm..................0.90 (3) Bond and Extension 75%, O° F, 5 cycles (a) Dry Concrete Blocks............................Pass (b) Wet Concrete Blocks............................Pass (c) Steel Blocks (Primed if specified by Manuf.)...Pass (d) Flow at 200° F.................................None (e) Water Content % by weight, max.................5.0 (4) Resilience (a) Original sample min. % (cured).................50 (b) Oven aged at 158° F min. % ....................50 (5) For Class 1-a Material Only (a) Cold Flow (10 min.)............................None b) Greenstreak #610 (1) Provide flexible, modified PVC (polyvinyl chloride) “G-SEAL” as manufactured by Greenstreak, profile style number 610. (2) The modified PVC paving cap seal shall be extruded from an elastomeric plastic material of which the basic resins are prime virgin materials. The compound shall not contain any scrapped or reclaimed material whatsoever. (3) Performance Requirements as noted in Table 4: Table 4 Performance Requirements Property Test Method Requirements Tensile Strength ASTM D412-92 2350 psi min. Elongation ASTM D412-92 375% min. Hardness ASTM D2240-95 81+/-3 Shore A Oil Swell (ASTM Oil #3, 70 hrs @ 212o F change in volume/weight) ASTM D471-95 +/- 15% by vol. +/- 15% by wt. Ozone Resistance (20% strain, 300 pphm, 70 hrs @ 104o F) ASTM D518-91 No Cracking UV Resistance (2000hrs @ 70o F)ASTM G53 2200 psi minimum 200% minimum Abrasion Resistance (10,500 cycles, 1000 g load) ASTM D 3884 Material Loss: -0.35 grams max. Adhesive Bond Strength ASTM D412-92 1000 psi min. Results after Heat Aging (24 hrs @ 70 o F)ASTM D573 Tensile Strength retained: 90% Elongation retained: 90% Hardness change: +/-3 Shore A Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-8 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Forms A. General 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 11 13.11 CONCRETE FORMS 2. Opening in forms shall be provided, if needed, for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. 3. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. 4. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 3.03 Reinforcing Steel A. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL 3.04 Equipment A. Concrete Plant 1. Certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas showing that the equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C94. a. If the Plant is moved, it must be recertified. b. Plants with a licensed engineer’s inspection are required to be reinspected every two (2) years. c. Provide a copy of the certification to the Owner’s representative. d. When equipment fail to meet requirements it shall be removed from service and corrected. 2. The batching Plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. B. Mixing Equipment 1. General a. All equipment, tools, and machinery used for mixing materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. b. When equipment fail to meet specification requirements it shall be removed from service and corrected. c. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the required specifications. 1) The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. d. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements of this specification, adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed, and moved to the placement site, in non-agitating equipment. 2. Mixers and Agitators a. General 1) Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type. b. Volumetric Mixers 1) Capable of combining the materials into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. 2) Shall have rating plates defining the capacity and the performance of the mixers in accordance with the Volumetric Mixer Manufacturers Bureau or equivalent. 3) Mixers shall comply with ASTM C685. 4) Provide information showing the mixers meet the uniformity test requirements of TxDOT Tex-472- A. c. Stationary Mixers Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-9 1) Capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified time or the number of revolutions specified and capable of discharging concrete which satisfies five (5) of the six (6) requirements of TxDOT Tex-472-A. 2) Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. 3) Mixer shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades. a) Any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. b) Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the manufacturer's design when any part or section is worn as much as ten percent (10%) below the original height of the manufacturer's design. 4) If deemed not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Owner and a suitable mixer shall be provided by the Contractor. 5) Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered a stationary mixer. d. Truck Mixer 1) Capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified time or the number of revolutions specified and capable of discharging concrete which satisfies five (5) of the six (6) requirements of TxDOT Tex-472-A. 2) Certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas showing that the equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C94. 3) Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection, cleaning and repair of blades. 4) Mixer shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades. a) Any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. b) Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the manufacturer's design when any part or section is worn as much as ten percent (10%) below the original height of the manufacturer's design. 5) If deemed not adequate or suitable for the work, it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Owner and a suitable mixer shall be provided by the Contractor. 6) An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately going the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. 7) Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified rpm will not require a separate engine. 8) All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum as specified may be readily verified. a) Counters (1) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters that will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revisions. (2) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the Plant not less than fifty (50) nor more than seventy (70) revolutions at mixing speed, transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. b) The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. 9) Shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. e. Agitators 1) Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type, capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. 2) Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-10 C. Hauling Equipment 1. All equipment, tools, and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. 2. Certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas showing that the equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C-94. a. Equipment with a licensed engineer’s inspection is required to be reinspected every two (2) years. b. Provide a copy of the certification to the Owner’s representative. c. When equipment fail to meet requirements it shall be removed from service and corrected. 3. Provide equipment capable of maintaining the mixed concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. 4. When using non-agitating equipment for transporting concrete, provide equipment with smooth, mortar tight metal containers equipped with gates that prevent accidental discharge. D. Placing Equipment 1. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Owner. a. Concrete may be transported by buckets, chutes, buggies, belt conveyors, pumps or other acceptable methods. b. Chutes, troughs, conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. c. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. 1) Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clean of the concrete. d. Belt Conveyors and Pumps 1) When belt conveyors or pumps are used, sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. 2) Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. e. Pipes 1) Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary, to prevent loss of slump and workability. 2) Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes, tubes or other aluminum equipment. f. Troughs and Chutes 1) When steep slopes are necessary, the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical downspouts. 2) Open troughs and chutes shall extend, if necessary, down inside the forms or through holes left in them. E. Scales 1. Check prior to use, after each move, or whenever the accuracy or adequacy is questioned, and at least once every six (6) months. 2. Immediately correct deficiencies and recalibrate. 3. Provide a record of calibration showing the scales are in compliance with ASTM C94. 4. Check batching accuracy of volumetric water batching devices and admixture dispensing devices at least every ninety (90) days. 5. Perform daily checks as needed to confirm accuracy. F. Testing Equipment 1. Shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the tests and in working condition to provide accurate information. 3.05Classification and Mix Design A. General a. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, for the class(es) of concrete specified. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-11 b. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with ACI 211. c. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design. d. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the Drawings. e. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility, the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Owner; however, this will not relieve him of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. B. Aggregate a. Coarse Aggregate Factor 1) The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed forty-eight percent (48%) of the total dry loose volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. 2) The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1, 2 and 3 aggregate. b. Recycled Aggregate 1) Limit recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete as a coarse or fine aggregate to Class A, B, D, E, and P concrete. 2) Limit recycled crushed concrete fine aggregate to a maximum of twenty percent (20%) of the fine aggregate. C. Strength 1. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 5, the Contractor may use an approved water reducing or retarding admixture, or the Contractor shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics that will produce the required results. Table 5 Classes of Concrete Class of Concrete Design Strength1 (psi) Maximum Water to Concrete Ratio2 Coarse Aggregate Grades3,4 General Usage5 A 3,000 0.60 1-4, 8 Inlets, Manholes, Curb, Gutter, Curb & gutter, Concrete retards, Sidewalks, Driveways, Backup walls, Anchors B 2,000 0.60 2-7 Riprap, Small roadside signs, and Anchors C 3,600 0.45 1-6 Drilled shafts, Bridge Substructure, Bridge railing, Culverts (except top slab of direct traffic culverts), Headwalls, Wing walls, Approach slabs, Concrete traffic barrier (cast-in-place) D 1,500 0.60 2-7 Riprap E 3,000 0.50 2-5 Seal Concrete Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-12 F6 4,000 min Or as Noted on Drawings 0.45 2-5 Railroad structures; occasionally for bridge piers, columns, or bents H6 4,000 min Or as Noted on Drawings 0.45 3-6 Prestressed concrete beams, Boxes, Piling, Concrete traffic barrier (precast) S6 4,000 min Or as Noted on Drawings 0.45 2-5 Bridge slabs, Top slabs of direct traffic culverts P 4,000 min Or as Noted on Drawings 0.45 2-3 Concrete pavement DC6 5,500 min Or as Noted on Drawings 0.40 6 Dense concrete overlay CO6 4,600 min Or as Noted on Drawings 0.40 6 Latex-modified concrete overlay LMC6 4,000 min Or as Noted on Drawings 0.40 6-8 Slurry displacement shafts, Underwater drilled shafts 1 – minimum twenty-eight (28) day f’c for all types of cement 2 – Maximum water-cement or water-cementations ratio by weight 3 – Do not use Grade 1 coarse aggregate except as approved by Owner, may not be used in Drilled shafts 4 – Unless otherwise approved, use Grade 8 coarse aggregate in extruded curbs. 5 – For information only, see Drawings and appropriate specifications for required class 6 – Structural Concrete Classes 2. A higher class of concrete with equal or lower water to cementations material ratio may be substituted for the specified class of concrete. 3. To account for production variability and to ensure minimum compressive strength requirements are satisfied, the mix shall be over-designed in accordance with Table 6. Table 6 Over Design Compressive Strength Requirements Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-13 Standard Deviation (psi) No. of Tests 300 400 500 600 700 15 470 620 850 1,120 1,390 20 430 580 760 1,010 1,260 30 +400 530 670 900 1,130 Note: When designing the mix the values above shall be added to the minimum design strength in Table 5 Number of tests of a concrete mixture used to estimate D. Cementations Material 1. Unless otherwise specified or approved, limit cementations material content to no more than 700 lb per cubic yard. 2. Use only Type III cement only in precast concrete or when specified or permitted. E. Admixtures 1. Water Reducing or Retarding Agents a. Water reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. b. When water reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor, reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. 2. Entrained Air Agents a. Entrained air will be required in all concrete, except Class B, in accordance with Table 7 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Table 7 Air Entrainment % Air Aggregate Grade No.Moderate Exposure Severe Exposure 1 4 5 2 4 1/2 5 1/2 3 4 1/2 5 1/2 4 4 1/2 6 5 5 6 6 5 1/2 7 7 6 7 1/2 8 6 7 1/2 1. For specified concrete strengths above 5,000 psi a reduction of one (1) percentage point is permitted. b. Tolerances 1) Shall contain the proper amount as required in Table 7 with a tolerance of plus or minus one and one- half percentage (1 1/2%) points. 2) If the amount is beyond the above tolerance then the load of concrete will be rejected. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-14 F. Consistency 1. General a. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. b. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. c. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. d. Modifications 1) In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Owner may require, an approved water reducing or retarding agent or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates, or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. 2) Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. 2. Slump a. Slump shall be in accordance with Table 8 using the lowest slump possible that can be placed and finished efficiently without segregation or honeycombing. Table 8 Slump Requirements Class of Concrete Concrete Use Recommended Design And Placement Slump 1 (inch) Maximum Design and Placement Slump 2 (inch) A B D Inlets, Manholes, Curb, Gutter, Curb & gutter, Concrete retards, Sidewalks, Driveways, Backup walls, Anchors, Riprap, Small road signs, Slip-formed, Extruded 2.5 or Owner Approved 4 or Owner Approved Thin Walled Section (9 inch or less)4 5 Approach slabs, Concrete overlays, Caps, Columns, Piers, Wall sections (over 9 inch)3 4 Bridge railing, Concrete traffic barrier (cast-in- place)4 6 1/2 Drilled shafts (dry)6 1/2 7 1/2 C F Drilled shafts (underwater, under slurry)5 6 H Prestressed concrete beams, Boxes, Piling, Concrete traffic barrier (precast)4 6 1/2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-15 S Bridge slabs, Top slabs of direct traffic culverts 4 5 1/2 Concrete pavement (slip-formed)1 1/2 3 P Concrete pavement (formed)4 6 1/2 DC Dense concrete overlay 3/4 2 CO Latex-modified concrete overlay 3 7 1/2 LMC Slurry displacement shafts, Underwater drilled shafts 6 8 1/2 1 – Recommended design and placement slump shall be as shown or as approved by Owner 2 – Maximum design and placement slump shall be as shown or as approved by Owner b. Concrete that exceeds the maximum acceptable slump at time of delivery will be rejected. c. When approved, the slump may be increased above the values shown in Table 8 using chemical admixtures, provided that the admixture-treated concrete has the same or lower water-cement or water-cementations material ratio and does not exhibit segregation or excessive bleeding. 1) Mix design must be approved by the Owner. G. Mix Design Options 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421. H. Sulfate-Resistant Concrete 1. When sulfate-resistant concrete is required, use mix design options 1, 2, 3, or 4 given in below using Type I/II, II, V, IP, or IS cement in accordance with ACI 318. a. Option 1 1) Replace twenty percent (20%) to thirty-five percent (35%) of the cement with Class F fly ash. b. Option 2 1) Replace thirty-five percent (35%) to fifty percent (50%) of the cement with Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag c. Option 3 1) Replace thirty-five percent (35%) to fifty percent (50%) of the cement with a combination of Class F fly ash, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, or silica fume. d. Option 4 1) Use Type IP or Type IS cement. (Up to ten percent (10%) of a Type IP or Type IS cement may be replaced with Class F fly ash, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, or silica fume.) 2. Do not use Class C Fly Ash in sulfate-resistant concrete I. Trial Batches 1. Trial batches will be made and tested using all the proposed ingredients prior to the placing of concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture are changed. 2. Trail batches shall be in accordance with TxDOT 421. 3. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. 4. When Transit Mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. a. Batch size shall not be less than fifty percent (50%) of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. 5. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. 3.06Mixing A. Mixing Conditions 1. General a. The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-16 2. Weather a. In threatening weather, which may result in conditions that will adversely affect quality of the concrete to be placed, the Owner may order postponement of the work. b. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall, or from freezing temperatures. c. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall, the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. d. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. B. Mixing 1. General a. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform distribution of the material throughout the mass. b. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum, the mixing shall continue not less than one (1) minute for mixers of one (1) cubic yard or less capacity plus fifteen (15) seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. c. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. d. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. e. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. f. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand, cement, and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. g. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time, the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. 2. Mixing Water a. A portion of the mixing water, required by the batch design to produce the desired slump, may be withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of the Owner and under his supervision. b. When water is added under the above conditions, it shall be thoroughly mixed in accordance with this specification delivery provision for water added at the job site. 3. Ready-Mix Plants a. General 1) It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirements of the governing specifications. b. Mixing 1) Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. 2) Mixers a) Stationary Mixed (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at agitator or a truck mixer operating at agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non- agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. b) Truck Mixed (1) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed (Transit-Mix Concrete), subject to the requirements of Mixing Equipment within this specification. 3.07Quality of Concrete A. General 1. The concrete shall be uniform and workable. 2. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-17 3. The cement content, maximum allowable water cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements herein. 4. Sampling and Testing a. During the process of the work, the Owner or Inspector will require the Contractor to test the concrete actually placed. b. Testing Requirements 1) Testing Rate shall be in accordance with Table 9: Table 9 Testing Schedule Class of Concrete Testing Rate 1, 2 General Usage 3 1 Set Per 500 Linear Feet or less Curb, Gutter, Curb & gutter 1 Set Per 4,000 Square Feet or less Sidewalks, Driveways 1 Set Per 6 or less Inlets, Manholes A 1 Set Per 30 cubic yards or less Or As required by Drawings and / or Owner Concrete retards, Backup walls, Anchors 1 Set Per 50 cubic yards or less Riprap, Small roadside signs B 1 Set Per 30 cubic yards or less Or As required by Drawings and / or Owner Anchors 1 Set Per 30 cubic yards or less or As required by Drawings and / or Owner Culverts (except top slab of direct traffic culverts), Headwalls, Wing wallsC As required by Drawings and / or Owner Drilled shafts, Bridge Substructure, Bridge railing, Culverts (except top slab of direct traffic culverts), Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-18 Headwalls, Wing walls, Approach slabs, Concrete traffic barrier (cast- in-place) D 1 Set Per 50 cubic yards or less Riprap E As required by Drawings and / or Owner Seal Concrete F As required by Drawings and / or Owner Railroad structures; occasionally for bridge piers, columns, or bents H As required by Drawings and / or Owner Prestressed concrete beams, Boxes, Piling, Concrete traffic barrier (precast) S As required by Drawings and / or Owner Bridge slabs, Top slabs of direct traffic culverts P 1 Set Per 30 cubic yards or less or As required by Drawings and / or Owner Concrete pavement DC As required by Drawings and / or Owner Dense concrete overly CO As required by Drawings and / or Owner Latex-modified concrete overly LMC As required by Drawings and / or Owner Slurry displacement shafts, Underwater drilled shafts 1 – For information only, see Drawings and appropriate specifications for required class 2 – Test rates are per day of work unless Owner approves otherwise 3 – For information only, see Drawings and appropriate specifications for required class 2) Testing of Fresh Concrete a) Air Content (1) In accordance with TEX-414-A or TEX-416-A b) Slump (1) In accordance with TEX-415-A c) Temperature (1) In accordance with TEX-422-A d) Making and Curing Strength Specimens (1) In accordance with TEX-447-A 3) Testing of Hardened Concrete a) Compressive Strength (1) In accordance with TEX-418-A b) Flexural Strength (1) In accordance with TEX-448-A c) Maturity (1) In accordance with TEX-426-A Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-19 c. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in the appropriate test procedure for the purpose of curing test specimens. 1) It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the test cylinders are handled in a manner to ensure that the test results are accurate. d. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight (28) day compressive tests, job control will be by seven (7) day compressive tests that are shown to provide the required twenty-eight (28) day strength, based on results from trial batches. e. If the required seven (7) day strength is not secured with the cement specified in the mix design, changes in the batch design shall be made f. All test results shall be sent to the Owner upon completion of test. 3.08 Expansion Joints A.Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the Drawings. B. All open joints and joints to be filled with expansion joint material, shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. C. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete, these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. D. Prior to placing the sealing material, the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. E. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. F. The joint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. G. Where preformed fiber joint material is used, it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint by light wire or nails, to prevent the material from falling out. H. The top one-inch (1”) of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. I. Finished joints shall conform to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. J. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 3.09 Construction Joints A. The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. B.The term monolithic placement shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. C. Construction joints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the Drawings. D. Additional joints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Owner, and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the Drawings for joints in similar locations. E. Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. F. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints, except when horizontal. G. Construction joints requiring the use of joint sealing material shall be as detailed on the Drawings. H. The material will be specified on the Drawings without referenced to joint type. I. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. J. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. K. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material, laitance, dirt or foreign material and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. L. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 3.10Delivery of Concrete A. General 1. Delivery of concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Owner for continuous placement. 2. In all cases, the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. 3. The Contractor shall satisfy the Owner that adequate standby equipment are available. B. Delivery Tickets 1. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching, mixing and delivery date. 2. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-20 3. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. C. Mixers 1. General a. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one (1) sack cement, three (3) parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix Plants. 2. Stationary Mixer a. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation, the mixing time for one (1) cubic yard of concrete shall be one (1) minute plus fifteen (15) seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. b. This mixing time shall start when all cement, aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. c. The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. d. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one-fourth (1/4) of the specified mixing time. e. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. f. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this specification, shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. g. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. D. Truck Mixers 1. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed sixty-three percent (63%) of the total volume of the drum. 2. When used as an agitator only, the loading shall not exceed eighty percent (80%) of the drum volume. 3. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. E. Mixing Speed and Revolutions 1. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer, and each complete batch (containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than seventy (70) nor more than one-hundred (100) revolutions of the drum at mixing speed a. Except that when water is added at the job site, twenty-five (25) revolutions (minimum) at mixing speed, will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix. 2. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. 3. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. 4. The agitating speed shall be not less than one (1) nor more than five (5) rpm. 3.11 Placing Concrete A. General a.Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Owner fully of the construction methods he proposes to use, the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. b. The Contractor shall give the Owner sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms, reinforcing steel placement, and other preparations. c. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit prior to the completion of formwork and placement of reinforcement therein. d. Concrete mixing, placing and finishing shall be done in daylight hours, unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. e. Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finish work. 1) If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started, the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. 2) In case of drop in temperature, the provisions set forth in the "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-21 f. Concrete not meeting the slump, workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification, shall not be placed in the structure or pavement. g. Any concrete that is not in place within the limits outlined in shall not be used. h. The placing shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. i. The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement, and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. j. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than five feet (5’), except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. 1) Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. k. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Owner. l. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. 1) The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. 2) Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. m. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than thirty-six inches (36”) in thickness, unless otherwise directed by the Owner. n. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold joints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. B. Temperature and Time Allowances 1. The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 50° F. 2. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface unless in accordance with section 03 35 29.13 CONCRETE FINISHING. 3. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch, and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the time in Table 10: Table 10 Maximum Time Interval between Addition of Cement to Placing Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete Up to 80° F 30 minutes Over 80° F 15 minutes Agitated Concrete 90° F or above 45 minutes 75° F to 89° F 60 minutes 35° F to 74° F 90 minutes 4. The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the temperature-time maximums shown in Table 10: a. Thirty (30) minutes for direct traffic culverts, b. One (1) hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed thirty (30) minutes for non-agitated concrete. 5. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold joint. a. Not more than one (1) hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placement of concrete. b. Authorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one (1) continuous operation. 6. Consolidation Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-22 a. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. b. Vibrators that operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted, except on steel forms. c. At least one (1) stand-by vibrator shall be provided for emergency use in addition to the ones required for placement. d. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. e. Prior to the beginning of work, a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and through working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into the corners and angles of the forms. f. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically, at point eighteen inches (18) to thirty inches (30) apart, and slowly withdrawn. g. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. h. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated, allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. i. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the joint surface. j. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation, and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced, but not long enough to cause segregation. k. Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding, if necessary, to insure the flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. 7. Slab concrete shall be mixed in a Plant located off the structure. a. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four full curing days. b. If carts are used, timber Planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. c. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. d. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. 8. After concrete has taken its initial set, at least one (1) curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. C. Placing Concrete in Cold Weather 1. General a. Concrete shall be placed as recommended in ACI 306. b. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. c. Permission given by the Owner for placing during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. d. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory, it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete a. Concrete may be placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40° F and rising. b. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 32° F. c. When required, in order to produce the minimum specified concrete temperature, the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly, in accordance with the following: 1) The water temperature shall not exceed 180° F, and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 150° F. 2) The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. 3) The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 50° F and 85° F before introduction of the cement. d. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: 1) Slab Concrete a) The temperature of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 50° F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40° F for an additional 72 hours. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-23 2) Piers, Culverts walls, Retaining walls, Parapets, Wing walls, Bottoms of Slabs, and Other Similar Formed Concrete a) The temperature at the surface of all concrete shall be maintained at 40° F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. b) The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground, shall be maintained above 50° F for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. 3) Protection shall consist of providing additional covering, insulated forms or other means, and if necessary, supplementing such covering with artificial heating. 4) Curing as specified in Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. 5) When impending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before placement. 6) Sufficient extra test specimen will be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed prior to form removal and acceptance. 3. Precast Concrete a. A fabricating Plant for precast products which has adequate protection from cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering, which protects the concrete when placed in the forms, and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities, may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: 1) The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one (1) hour after the concrete is placed. 2) This shall not be construed to be one (1) hour after the last concrete is placed, but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one (1) hour. 3) For fabricating Plants without the above facilities and for job site precast products, the requirements of Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING will apply. D. Placing Concrete in Hot Weather 1. Extra care shall be taken to reduce the temperature of the concrete being placed and to prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. 2. When the outdoor ambient temperature is more than 90°F, the temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed 90°F. 3. When high temperatures, low humidity and dry winds create conditions suitable for plastic cracking, an evaporation retarder may be required to be applied by spray one or more times during the finishing operation. 4. A fog spray shall be used during finishing operations. 5. Curing shall be started as soon as the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit it without damage. E. Placing Concrete in Water 1. Concrete shall be deposited in water only when specified on the Drawings or with written permission by the Owner. a. Its surface shall be kept approximately level during placement. 2. The forms or cofferdams shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. 3. Pumping will not be permitted during the concrete placing, nor until it has set for at least thirty-six (36) hours. 4. The concrete shall be placed with a tremie, closed bottom-dump bucket, or other approved method, and shall not be permitted to fall freely through the water nor shall it be disturbed after it has been placed. a. Tremie 1) The tremie shall consist of a watertight tube fourteen inches (14”) or less in diameter. 2) It shall be constructed so that the bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. 3) It shall be supported so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work area and vertically to control the concrete flow. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-24 4) The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. b. Bottom-dump Buckets 1) Bottom-dump buckets used for underwater placing shall have a capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard (1/2 cubic yard). 2) It shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed and raised very slowly during the upward travel; the intent being to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. 3) The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. F. Placing Concrete in Box Culverts 1. In general, construction joints will be permitted only where shown on the Drawings. 2. Where the top slab and walls are placed monolithically in culverts more than four-feet (4’) in clear height, an interval of not less than one (1) nor more than two (2) hours shall elapse before placing the top slab to allow for shrinkage in the wall concrete. 3. The base slab shall be finished accurately at the proper time to provide a smooth uniform surface. 4. Top slabs which carry direct traffic shall be finished as specified for roadway slabs in Section 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING. 5. Top slabs of fill type culverts shall be given a reasonable smooth float finish. G. Placing Concrete in Foundations and Substructures 1. Concrete shall not be placed in footings until the depth and character of the foundation has been inspected by the Owner and permission has been given to proceed. 2. Placing of concrete footings upon seal courses will be permitted after the caissons or cofferdams are free from water and the seal course cleaned. 3. Any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operation shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. 4. All temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams or caissons shall be constructed or adjusted as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized construction joints in footings or shafts. 5. When footings can be placed in a dry excavation without the use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be omitted, if desired by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing. a. Note: Measurement for payment will be based on the footing dimensions as shown on the Drawings. 3.12 Epoxy A. General Precaution 1. The Contractor is advised to become familiar with type of epoxy, method of application, and its basic limitations prior to using the epoxy. B. Bond New Concrete to Existing Concrete 1. Surface Preparation a. The existing concrete or structural surface to which the new concrete is to be bonded shall be roughened and cleaned. b. The existing surface shall be made free from dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds, waxes and all foreign material. c. Cleaning shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. 1) Washing will not be allowed, unless authorized by Owner. d. During application of bonding compound, surface may be dry, moist, or wet, but surface shall be free of standing water. 2. Proportioning and Mixing a. The epoxy shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. b. The epoxy shall be used in a neat condition (without aggregate filler). 3. Application of Epoxy a. The epoxy-bonding compound shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. b. Area adjacent to work shall be cleaned free of epoxy spills as to provide a neat appearance before work will be accepted. C. Concrete Overlay 1. The concrete overlay shall be in accordance with the Drawings and this section. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-25 2. The concrete overlay shall be applied over the epoxy within a period of time that shall not exceed sixty percent (60%) of the tack free time of the epoxy. a. It is important for the Contractor to note that these times vary with the temperature and pot time. b. The allowable times must be determined from the tack free times that are provided by the manufacturer. 3. If the allowable period of time is allowed to elapse before concrete overlay can be placed, another layer of epoxy shall be applied prior to placement of the concrete. D. Epoxy Grout for patch to non-horizontal surfaces to concrete: 1. Surface Preparation a. The existing concrete or structural surface to be bonded to shall be cleaned. b. The existing surface shall be made free from dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds, waxes and all foreign material. c. Cleaning shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. 1) Washing will not be allowed, unless authorized by Owner. d. During application of bonding compound, surface may be dry, moist, or wet, but surface shall be free of standing water, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer 2. Proportioning and Mixing a. The epoxy shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer instruction. b. The epoxy may be mixed with dry masonry sand. c. Sand shall conform to ASTM C-144 with 100% passing a No. 8 sieve and not more than 15% to 35% passing a No. 50 mesh sieve. d. The amount of sand filler shall not exceed 3/4 to 1 (loose sand to epoxy by volume). 3. Application a. Epoxy shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. b. Area adjacent to work shall be cleaned free of epoxy spills as to provide a neat appearance before work will be accepted. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 11-1 SECTION 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the finishing of concrete as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 427, Surface Finishes for Concrete B. American Concrete Institute 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All equipment, tools, and machinery used and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. 2.02 Screed A. The screed shall be designed rigid enough to hold true to shape and shall have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber. B. A vibrating screed may be used if heavy enough to prevent undue distortion. C. The screed shall be provided with a metal edge. 2.03 Hand Operated Fogging Equipment A. Shall be capable of producing a fine mist, not a spray. B. Equipment shall pump water or water and air under high pressure through a suitable atomizing nozzle. C. Shall be portable enough to use in the direction of any prevailing wind and adaptable for intermittent use to prevent excessive wetting of the concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. 3.02 Treatment and Finishing of Horizontal Surfaces Except Roadway Slabs A. All uniformed upper surfaces shall be struck off to grade and finished. B. The use of mortar topping for surfaces under this classification will not be permitted. C. After the concrete has been struck off, the surface shall be floated with a suitable float. D. Sidewalks 1. Shall be given a broom finish or may be stripped with a brush, as indicated on the Drawings or specified by the Owner. 2. Finish shall be perpendicular to the centerline providing a slip resistant surface. E. Other surfaces 1. Shall be float finished and stripped with a fine brush leaving a fine-grained texture. 3.03 Finish of Roadway Slabs A. As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section of sufficient width to permit working, the surface shall be approximately leveled, struck off and screed, carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to insure filling of all low spots. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 11-2 B. Screed 1. The surface of the concrete shall be screed a sufficient number of times and at such intervals to produce a uniform surface, true to grade and free of voids. 2. Longitudinal screeds shall be moved across the concrete with a saw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway grade or on the adjacent finished slab. 3. If necessary, the screed surface shall be worked to smooth finish with a long handled wood or metal float of the proper size, or hand floated from bridges over the slab. C. When required by the Owner, the Contractor shall perform sufficient checks with a long handled ten- foot (10’) straightedge on the plastic concrete to insure that the final surface will be within the tolerances specified below. 1. The check shall be made with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. 2. Each pass thereof shall lap half of the preceding pass. 3. Ordinates of irregularities measured from the face of the straight-edge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed one-eighth of an inch (1/8”) in depth shall be filled with fresh concrete and floated, making proper allowances for camber, vertical curvature and surface texture. 4. Occasional variations, not exceeding three-sixteenth of an inch (3/16”) will be acceptable, if in the opinion of the Owner it will not affect the riding qualities. 5. The checking and floating shall be continued until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions, high spots, voids or rough spots. D. Rail support holes shall be filled with concrete and finished to match the top of the slab. E. Finish 1. Upon completion of the floating and/or straight edging and before the disappearance of the moisture sheen, the surface shall be given a finish as indicated within the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 2. Should the texture depth fall below that intended, the finishing procedures shall be revised to produce the desired texture. F. In all roadway slab finishing operations, camber for specified vertical curvature and transverse slopes shall be provided. 3.04 Finishing Exposed Surfaces A. Concrete shall be finished as required for the respective items or as otherwise specified on the Drawings. B. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. C. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: 1. After form removal, all porous or honeycombed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. 2. Featheredges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. 3. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. 4. If judged repairable by the Owner, large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Owner. 5. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. 6. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing, shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch (1/2”) and the surface repaired. 7. All fines, runs, drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces that remain exposed. 8. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. 9. Grease, oil, dirt, curing compound, etc., shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. 10. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashing of asphalt, paint or other similar material shall be removed. 11. Repairs shall be dense, well bonded and properly cured, and when made on surfaces that remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding concrete. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-1 SECTION 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the curing of concrete as required to complete the project. 1.02 elated Sections A. 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete B. Texas Department of Transportation Departmental Material Specification DMS-4650, “Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retardants” C. AASHTO Method T-26, "Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be used in Concrete" 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Membrane Curing A. Membrane curing materials shall comply with Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4650. B. It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 40° Fahrenheit. C. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. D. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than four (4) hours nor more than seven (7) days after application. E. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous, uniform moisture impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. F. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface, at the rate of coverage specified herein, dry to touch in not more than four (4) hours and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. G. It shall not disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period. H. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. I. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers, which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material, and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. J. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. K. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the following: 1. 24 hours after application......................2 percent (2%) 2. 72 hours after application......................4 percent (4%) L. Type 1 (Resin Base Only) curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. 2.02 Mat Curing A. Wet Mat 1. Shall be one (1) of the following: a. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. b. Damp burlap blankets made from nine-ounce stock Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-2 2.03 Water A. Water for use in curing shall be free from oils, acids, organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor than 1000 parts million of sulfates as SO4. B. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use. C. Tests shall be made in accordance with AASHTO Method T-26, except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. D. Seawater will not be permitted. E. Water that stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall inform the Owner fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing; shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts, and shall have the proposed method, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. C. Inadequate curing and/or facilities therefore shall be cause for the Owner to stop all construction on the job until remedial action is taken. 3.02 Curing Period A. All concrete shall be cured for a period of seven (7) curing days except as noted below: Table 1 Curing Days of Selected Concrete Description Required Curing Top slabs of Direct Traffic Fourteen (14) curing days (Type I or III cement) Culverts Ten (10) curing days (Type II cement) Concrete Piling (non-prestressed)Ten (10) curing days B. When the air temperature is expected to drop below thirty-five (35) degrees Fahrenheit, the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. C. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature, taken in the shade away from artificial heat, is above fifty (50) degrees Fahrenheit for at least nineteen (19) hours, (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature at all surfaces of the concrete above forty (40) degrees Fahrenheit for the entire twenty-four (24) hours). D. The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. 3.03 Curing Methods A. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table 2 and the following requirements for each method of curing: 1. Form Curing a. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. 2. Water Curing a. General 1) All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. b. Wet Mat 1) Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 2 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Owner. 2) They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-3 3) The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. 4) The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. 5) Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats, anchored positively to the forms, or to the ground, so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. 6) Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. c. Water Spray a) This method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers that keeps all unformed surfaces continuously wet. d. Ponding 1) This method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two-inches(2”) of approved clean granular sand material, kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one-inch depth of water. 2) Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated sand. 3. Membrane Curing a. This consists of curing concrete pavement, concrete pavement (base), curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalk, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the Drawings by impervious membrane method. b. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the Drawings, either Type 1 or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1 (Resin Base Only) will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top of direct traffic culverts. c. Membrane curing shall be applied to dry surfaces, but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. d. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. e. When membrane is used for complete curing, the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. f. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. g. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the Drawings, the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. h. Only one (1) type of curing compound will be permitted on any one (1) structure. i. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed, and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. j. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Owner, but not less than one (1) gallon per 180 square feet of area. k. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of applications of the compound. l. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. m. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement (base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. n. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. o. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. p. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. q. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. r. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface and if the surface of the concrete has become dry, it shall be thoroughly moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. s. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-4 t. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities, pinholes, or other defects; or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, an additional coat of the compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. u. To insure proper coverage, the Owner shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. 1) Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected, an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. v. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing, curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. w. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental to the work, the Contractor, when notified, shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. B. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table 2 and the following requirements for each method of curing: Table 2 Curing Method REQUIRED PERMITTED Structure Unit Description Water for Curing Membrane for Interim Curing Water for Curing Membrane for Interim Curing Top slabs of direct traffic culverts X X Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval (Stub walls, risers, etc.)Other superstructure concrete (wing walls, parapet walls, etc.) X Concrete pavement, curbs, gutters, retards, sidewalks, driveways, medians, islands, concrete structures, concrete riprap, etc. X*X* All substructure concrete, culverts, box sewers, inlets, manholes, retaining walls X*X* * Polyethylene sheeting, burlap polyethylene mats, or laminated mats to prevent outside air from entering will be considered equivalent to water or membrane curing. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 034900 - GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED CONCRETE (GFRC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Glass-fiber-reinforced concrete (GFRC) panels without panel frames. a.GFRC panels include wall units. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for GFRC panels including the following: 1.Panel elevations, sections, and dimensions. 2.Thickness of facing mix, GFRC backing, and bonding pads for typical panels. 3.Finishes. 4.Joint and connection details. 5.Panel corner details. 6.Locations and details of connection hardware attached to structure. 7.Sizes, locations, and details of flex, gravity, and seismic anchors for typical panels. C.Samples: Actual sample of finished products representative of GFRC finish, color, and texture variations. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualifications: 1.Manufacturers: Designated a PCI-certified plant for Group G - Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete, and who employs on Project experienced PCI-certified GFRC testing and inspection personnel , or designated an IAS AC157-certified plant for GFRC , or designated an APA-certified plant for GFRC production. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Handle and transport GFRC panels supported on nonstaining material and with nonstaining resilient spacers between panels. B.Store GFRC panels off of ground on firm, level, and smooth surfaces supported on nonstaining material and with nonstaining resilient spacers between panels. Place stored panels so identification marks are clearly visible. 1.5 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of GFRC panels that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Structural failures, including cracking. b.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2.Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.GFRC Panels: 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Advanced Architectural Stone; Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete or comparable product by one of the following: a.GFRC Cladding Systems, LLC. b.Stromberg Architectural Products, Inc. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Quality-Control Standard: Comply with requirements and recommendations in PCI MNL 130, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Products," unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 2.3 GFRC MATERIALS A.Obtain each GFRC material of same type, brand, and color from single source or producer. B.Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M; Type I, or III. 1.For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use white cement. C.Glass Fibers: Alkali resistant, with a minimum zirconia content of 16 percent, 1 to 2 inches long, specifically produced for use in GFRC, and complying with ASTM C1666/C1666M. D.Backing Sand: Washed and dried silica, complying with composition requirements in ASTM C144; passing a No. 20 sieve with a maximum of 2 percent passing a No. 100 sieve. E.Facing Aggregate: ASTM C33/C33M, except for gradation, and PCI MNL 130, 1/4-inch maximum size. 1.Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match sample. 2.Fine Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand with a maximum of 5 percent passing a No. 100 sieve and a maximum of 3 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F.Coloring Admixture: ASTM C979/C979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, nonfading, and alkali resistant. G.Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of GFRC and complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M and chemical limits in PCI MNL 130 for nonpotable mixing water. H.Polymer-Curing Admixture: Acrylic thermoplastic copolymer dispersion complying with PCI MNL 130. I.Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M, containing not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. 2.4 ANCHORS, CONNECTORS, AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Stainless Steel Plates: ASTM A666, Type 304, Type 316, or Type 201. B.Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276/A276M, Type 304. C.High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Grade A325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436/F436M, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers, finished as follows: 2.5 GFRC MIXES A.Mist Coat: Slurry of portland cement, sand, water, and admixtures; of same proportions as backing mix without glass fibers. B.Face Mix: Proportion face mix of portland cement, facing aggregates, water, and admixtures to comply with design requirements. C.Backing Mix: Proportion backing mix of portland cement, glass fibers, sand, water, and admixtures to comply with design requirements. Provide nominal glass-fiber content of not less than 5 percent by weight of total mix. D.Polymer-Curing Admixture: 6 to 7 percent by weight of polymer-curing admixture solids to dry portland cement. E.Air Content: 3 to 7-1/2 percent; ASTM C185. F.Coloring Admixture: Not to exceed 10 percent of cement weight. 2.6 PANEL FRAME FABRICATION A.Fabricate panel frames and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with components securely fastened. 1.Fabricate panel frames using jigs or templates. 2.Cut cold-formed metal framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3.Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M. 4.Fasten framing members of hollow structural sections, steel channels, or steel angles by welding. Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 5.Weld anchors to panel frames. B.Reinforce framing assemblies, as necessary, to withstand erection stresses. 2.7 GFRC FABRICATION A.Proportioning and Mixing: For backing mix, meter sand/cement slurry and glass fibers to spray head at rates to achieve design mix proportions and glass-fiber content in accordance with PCI MNL 130 procedures. B.Spray Application: Comply with spray-up method procedures in accordance with PCI MNL 130. C.Hand form and consolidate intricate details, incorporate formers or infill materials, and overspray before material reaches initial set to ensure complete bonding. D.Attach panel frame to GFRC before initial set of GFRC backing, maintaining a minimum clearance of 1/2 inch from GFRC backing, and without anchors protruding into GFRC backing. E.Build up homogeneous GFRC bonding pads over anchor feet, maintaining a minimum thickness of 1/2 inch over tops of anchor feet, before initial set of GFRC backing. Measure bonding pad thickness at 25 percent of anchor locations. F.Integral Ribs: Build up homogeneous GFRC integral ribs over expanded polystyrene or polyurethane foam rib formers to comply with design requirements. G.Inserts and Embedments: Build up homogeneous GFRC bosses or bonding pads over inserts and embedments to provide enough anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. H.Curing: Employ initial curing method that ensures sufficient strength for removing units from mold. Comply with PCI MNL 130 procedures. 1.Keep moisture off the surfaces of mixes with polymer curing admixtures during the first three hours of curing. Maintain temperature between 60 and 120 deg F during the first 16 hours. 2.Prevent drying of moist curing mixes during the first 24 hours. Maintain units in surface-damp condition at a temperature above 60 deg F and 95 percent relative humidity for seven days. I.Panel Identification: Mark each GFRC panel to correspond with identification mark on Shop Drawings. Mark each panel with its casting date. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A.Install clips, hangers, and other accessories required for connecting GFRC panels to supporting members and backup materials. B.Install GFRC panels level, plumb, square, and in alignment. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of panels until permanent connections are completed. 1.Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width. 2.Remove projecting hoisting devices. C.Connect GFRC panels in position by bolting or welding, or both, as indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as possible after connecting is completed. D.Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements for welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1.Protect GFRC panels from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required. E.At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nuts. 3.2 REPAIRS A.Repairs are permitted provided structural adequacy of GFRC panel and appearance are not impaired, as approved by Architect. B.Remove and replace damaged GFRC panels when repairs do not comply with requirements. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, in accordance with GFRC manufacturer's written instructions. Clean soiled GFRC surfaces with detergent and water, using soft fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Prevent damage to GFRC surfaces and staining of adjacent materials. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 END OF SECTION 034900 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Concrete masonry units. 2.Decorative concrete masonry units. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B.Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. C.Samples: For each type and color of the following: 1.Exposed Decorative CMUs. 2.and colored-aggregate mortar. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Material Certificates: For each type and size of product. For masonry units, include data on material properties material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. B.Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1.Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C109/C109M for compressive strength, ASTM C1506 for water retention, and ASTM C91/C91M for air content. 2.Include test reports, according to ASTM C1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects 1.Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. B.Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A.Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B.Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work. C.Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. 1.Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A.Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1.Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. B.Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units . C.Decorative CMUs: ASTM C90. 1.Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi . Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.Density Classification: Normal weight. 3.Pattern and Texture: a.Standard pattern, split-face finish. Match Architect's samples. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A.Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime or masonry cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients. B.Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144. 1.White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. C.Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. D.Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer. E.Water: Potable. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A.General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1.Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2.Use mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3.For exterior masonry, use mortar. 4.For reinforced masonry, use mortar. 5.Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B.Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C.Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1.For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load- bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. D.Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color. 1.Application: Use colored-aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a.Decorative CMUs. E.Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476. 1.Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2.Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3.Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C143/C143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 3.2 TOLERANCES A.Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1.For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2.For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3.For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B.Lines and Levels: 1.For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 3.For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 4.For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. 5.For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum. C.Joints: 1.For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2.For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 3.For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A.Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B.Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C.Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. D.Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. E.Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core. F.Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A.Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1.Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2.Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3.Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4.Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B.Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C.Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. D.Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A.Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1.Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2.Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B.Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. C.Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1.Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2.Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches . Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3.6 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A.In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B.Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1.Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2.Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 3.7 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A.above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042200 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 04 72 00 - CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Cast stone trim including the following: a.Cast stone coping at monument sign. 2. Section 042200 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for installing cast stone units in unit masonry. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.For cast stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B.LEED Submittals: 1.Product Certificates for Credit MR 5: For products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. C.Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. 1.Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. D.Samples for Verification: 1.For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches (250 mm) square in size. E.Full-Size Samples: For each color texture and shape of cast stone unit required. 1.Make available for Architect's review at Project site or at manufacturing plant, if acceptable to Architect. 2.Make Samples from materials to be used for units used on Project immediately before beginning production of units for Project. 3.Approved Samples may be installed in the Work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data: For manufacturer. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute, the Architectural Precast Association or the Precast/Pre-stressed Concrete Institute for Group A, Category AT. B.Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through single source from single manufacturer. C.Mockups: Furnish cast stone for installation in mockups specified in Section 042000 " Concrete Unit Masonry." D.Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects[ and set quality standards for materials and execution]. 1.Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Coordinate delivery of cast stone[ with unit masonry work] to avoid delaying the Work[ and to minimize the need for on-site storage]. B.Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets. 1.Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports. 2.Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. C.Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. D.Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1.Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than seven days after completing cleaning. B.Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CAST STONE UNITS Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Dallas Cast Stone Co., Dallas Texas 2.Siteworks Inc., Houston Texas B.Regional Materials: Cast stone units shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. C.Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast method. D.Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1.Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated. 2.Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3.Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated. E.Fabrication Tolerances: 1.Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2.Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch (6 mm). 3.Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater. 4.Location of Grooves, False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch (10 mm) on unformed surfaces. F.Cure units as follows: 1.Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and temperature of 100 deg F (38 deg C) for 12 hours or 70 deg F (21 deg C) for 16 hours. 2.Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following: a.No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) or above. b.No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F (16 deg C) or above. c.No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) or above. d.No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) or above. G.Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. H.Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling Indiana limestone. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A.Provide mortar materials that comply with Section 042000 " Concrete Unit Masonry." 2.3 ACCESSORIES A.Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. B.Dowels: 1/2-inch- (12-mm-) diameter, round bars, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.4 MORTAR MIXES A.Comply with requirements in Section 042000 " Concrete Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.Engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone units according to ASTM C 1364. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR A.Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Section 042000 "Concrete Unit Masonry." B.Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. 1.Set units with joints 3/8 to 1/2 inch (10 to 13 mm) wide unless otherwise indicated. 2.Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3.Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4.Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5.Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6.Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant. 7.Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. C.Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. B.Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. END OF SECTION 04 72 00 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Framing with dimension lumber. 2.Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3.Plywood backing panels. B.Related Requirements: 1.Section 061600 "Sheathing." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension. B.Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2.Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3.For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4.For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5.Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B.Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1.Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2.Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5.Expansion anchors. 6.Metal framing anchors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2.Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3.Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B.Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A.Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1.Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. B.Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C.Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D.Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1.Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3.Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A.General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B.Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1.Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2.Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 3.Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. C.Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D.Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E.Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1.Framing for raised platforms. 2.Concealed blocking. 3.Plywood backing panels. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A.Load-Bearing Partitions: No. 2 grade. 1.Application: interior load-bearing partitions. 2. Species: a.Mixed southern pine; SPIB. B.Joists, Rafters, and Other Framing Not Listed Above: No. 2 grade. 1. Species: a.Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A.General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. B.For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and the following species: 1.Mixed southern pine; SPIB. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 C.For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: 1.Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. D.For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. E.For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A.Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness. 2.7 FASTENERS A.General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1.Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B.Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. C.Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. D.Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). E.Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. F.Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A.Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B.Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick. 1.Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. C.Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch-(50-mm-) long seat and 1-1/4-inch-(32-mm-) wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm). 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B.Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C.Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. D.Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. E.Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. F.Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. G.Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. H.Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. I.Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1.Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2.Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. J.Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3.2 WOOD A.Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B.Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C.Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 3.3 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A.General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load- bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. 1.For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal-(38-by-89-mm actual-) size wood studs spaced 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B.Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. 3.4 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A.General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches (76 mm) on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1.Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors. 2.Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B.Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches (50 mm) from top or bottom. C.Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. D.Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches (102 mm) or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness by depth of joist over supports. E.Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c., between joists. 1.Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal-(19-by-64-mm actual-) size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. 2.Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 PROTECTION A.Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B.Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 06 10 63 – EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A.Product data for engineered wood products, insulating sheathing, underlayment, metal framing anchors, and construction adhesives. B.Provide electronic (PDF) copies of all required submittal information. PART 2 - PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A.Furnish grade stamped lumber that is dressed S4S and complies with PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC’s Board of Review. 1.Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent moisture content at time of dressing and shipment, for sizes 2 inches or less in thickness. 2.For exposed lumber, apply grade stamps to ends or back of each piece or omit grade stamps entirely and issue certificate of grade compliance. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A.Provide lumber of the following product classification in grade and species indicated: 2.3 LUMBER FOR MISCELLANEOUS USES A.Unless otherwise indicated, provide “No. 2” grade light-framing-size lumber of any species for support of other construction, including rooftop equipment and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. 2.4 FASTENERS A.Of size and type indicated that comply with the following requirements. Provide hot-dip zinc- coated fasteners per ASTM A 153; or where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in areas of high relative humidity, provide AISI Type 316 stainless steel fasteners. 1.Nails, Wire and Brads: FS FF-N-105 2.Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. 3.Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. 4.Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. 5.Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A.Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal, and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified including the following: 1.Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which model code evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this project. 2.Allowable Design Loads: As published by manufacturer and determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and verified through comprehensive testing by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 3.Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated by hot-dip process to comply with ASTM A 525, Coating Designation G60, and complying with ASTM A 446, Grade A; ASTM A 526; or ASTM A 527. B.Use galvanized steel framing anchors for rough carpentry, except where exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide Type 316 stainless steel anchors. 2.6 LUMBER AND PLYWOOD TREATMENT A.Reference Architectural drawings and specifications for fire treatment requirements. B.Preservative pressure treat lumber and plywood with water-borne preservatives to comply with AWPA C2 and C9, respectively, and with requirements indicated below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. 1.Plates Southern Yellow Pine No. 2 SPIB 2.Studs Southern Yellow Pine No. 2 SPIB 3.Rafters/Headers Southern Yellow Pine No. 2 SPIB Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 C.Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: 1.Wood, cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3.Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. D.Pressure-treat wood members in contact with the ground or fresh water with water-borne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 pcf. E.Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install rough carpentry work to comply with the International Building Code, 2012 edition, and the National Design Standard, and the following: 1.Recommendations of engineered wood products manufacturer. 2.Recommendations of manufacturer of sheathing, underlayment and other products not covered in above publications. B.Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and cut to fit. C.Securely attach carpentry work to substrates and supporting members using fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view to receive finish materials. D.Install fasteners without splitting wood; fasten panel products to allow for expansion at joints unless otherwise indicated. E.Provide wood framing members of size and spacing indicated; do not splice structural members between supports. Fire stop concealed spaces with wood blocking not less than 2 inches thick, if not blocked by other framing members. F.Contact Architect / Engineer for framing inspection prior to installing interior gypsum board, roofing paper or exterior vapor barrier. G.Fasten construction panel products as follows: 1. Sheathing: a.Nail to framing. Reference structural drawings for nailing schedule. END OF SECTION 06 10 63 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Wall sheathing. 2. Subflooring. 3. Underlayment. 4.Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 2.Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.". 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS 1. Plywood. B.Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2 unless otherwise indicated. C.Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. D.Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.3 WALL SHEATHING A.Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide one of the following]: a.CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc. b.G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold. c.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP. d. Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass e.United States Gypsum Co.; Securock. 2.Type and Thickness: Regular, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. 3.Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm) for vertical installation. 2.4 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A.Plywood Subflooring: Exterior single-floor panels or sheathing. 1.Span Rating: Not less than 16 o.c. 32/16. 2.Nominal Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch (18.3 mm). B.Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment 23/32 inch (18.3 mm) over subfloors. 1. Plywood Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Interior, Underlayment. 2.5 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A.Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1.Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type recommended by sheathing Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B.Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C.Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." D.Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. E.Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. F.Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B.Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Subflooring: a.Nail to wood framing. b.Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c.Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends. 2.Wall Sheathing: a.Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b.Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends. 3. Underlayment: a.Nail to subflooring. C.Space panels 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) apart at edges and ends 3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A.Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2.Install boards with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3.Install boards with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B.Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C.Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1.Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)from edges and ends of boards. D.Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2.Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. B.Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product, including, panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories. 1.Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B.Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1.Show details full size. 2.Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3.Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. 4.Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. C.Samples for Initial Selection: 1.Plastic laminates. 2.PVC edge material. 3.Thermoset decorative panels. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data: For fabricator. B.Product Certificates: For each type of product: 1.Composite wood and agrifiber products. 2.Thermoset decorative panels. 3.High-pressure decorative laminate. 4. Adhesives. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B.Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 C.Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. D.Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A.Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated. B.Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 08712 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A.Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1.The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard. B.Grade: Premium. C.Type of Construction: Frameless. D.Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay. E.Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch (13 mm). F.High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Formica Corporation. b.Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. (Basis Of Design) G.Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: 1.Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2.Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. 4.Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. H.Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: 1.Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS. a.Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch (3 mm) thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. 2.Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC edge banding. 3.Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. I.Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body. 1.Join sub-fronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbet joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints. J.Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1.As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range (Standard and Premium lines) in the following categories or as indicated on drawings: a.Solid colors, matte finish. b.Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish. c.Wood grains, matte finish. d.Patterns, matte finish. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A.Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1.Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent. B.Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1.Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 70 percent. 2.Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A.General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. B.Butt Hinges: 1-3/4-inch (70-mm), institutional five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm- ) thick metal, and as follows: 1.Semi concealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521. C.Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter. D.Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131. E.Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081. F.Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. G.Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9. 1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers. 2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball- bearing slides. 3.For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 2. 4.For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1. 5.For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100. 6.For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1. H.Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. I.Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. J.Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. K.Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated. L.Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1.Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630. M.For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. N.Tackboards: Tackboards shall be ¼” Claridge cork on ¼” MDF backed with ¼: wide, anodized satin finished frame. 1. Color as selected by Architect from manufactures standard color selections. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B.Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors. C.Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D.Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Un-pigmented contact cement. 1.Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.5 FABRICATION A.Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B.Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1.Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. C.Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B.Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B.Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. C.Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). D.Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E.Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 1.Use filler matching finish of items being installed. F.Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1.Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2.Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood blocking, or hanging strips. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B.Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C.Clean cabinets on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 06 41 16 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 064223 – PLYWOOD INTERIOR PANELING GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interior plywood paneling. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A.Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2.2 PANELING A.Hardwood Veneer Plywood Paneling: BC Sanded Pine Plywood. 1.Veneer Matching: Random match. 2.Thickness: 15/32nch. 3.Panel Size: a.48 by 96 inches. 4.Glue Bond: Type II (interior). 5. Face Surface: Sanded. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B.Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. 1.Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 2.Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 3.Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 4.Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. 5.Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PANELING A.Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and color between adjacent panels. 1. Leave 1/4-inch gap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. 2.Install with uniform tight joints between panels. 3.Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. 4.Space fasteners and adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer. 5.Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent. 6.Arrange panels with joints over supports. a.Fasten to supports with countersunk finish nails. END OF SECTION 064223 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 074113.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF SYSTEM (SNAP ON BATTEN) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Standing-seam metal roof panels. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. C.Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product test reports. B.Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.7 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B.Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E1592: 1.Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2.Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings . 3.Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span. B.Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E1680 or ASTM E283 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. . C.Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E1646 or ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. . D.Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift- resistance class indicated. 2.2 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A.Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1.Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E1514. B.Vertical-Rib, Snap On Batten Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and a flat pan between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels, engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and seaming panels together with snap on batten. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MBCI, Craftsman Series Small Batten or comparable product by one of the following: a.Berridge Manufacturing Company. b.McElroy Metal, Inc. 2.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M. a.Nominal Thickness: 22 gauge. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 b.Exterior Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer . c.Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . 3.Clips: One-piece fixed to accommodate thermal movement. a. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 4.Joint Type: Snap on batten. 5.Panel Coverage: 12 inches. 6.Panel Height: 1 inch. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1.Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D1970. 3.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide GCP Applied Technologies Inc., Grace Ice and Water Shield HT or comparable product by one of the following: a.Carlisle WIP Products; a brand of Carlisle Construction Materials. b.Henry Company. B.Felt Underlayment: ASTM D226/D226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C645; cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel system. B.Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1.Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal panels. C.Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels. D.Gutters and Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Finish to match metal roof panels . E.Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels, 0.048-inch nominal thickness; with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles and with welded top box and integral full-length cricket. Fabricate curb subframing of 0.060-inch- nominal thickness, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels. F.Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. G.Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. 1. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. 2.5 FABRICATION A.Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B.Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C.Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. D.Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 2.6 FINISHES A.Panels and Accessories: 1.Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in color coat. 2.Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3.2 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below , wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Extend underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1.Apply over the roof area indicated below: a.Roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 24 inches beyond interior wall line. b.Valleys, from lowest point to highest point, for a distance on each side of 18 inches . Overlap ends of sheets not less than 6 inches. c.Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches . d.Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches . e. Roof-to-wall intersections for a distance from wall of 18 inches . f.Around dormers, chimneys, skylights, and other penetrating elements for a distance from element of 18 inches . B.Felt Underlayment: Apply at locations indicated below , in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 1.Apply over the entire roof surface. 2.Apply on roof not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap over edges of self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches, in shingle fashion to shed water. C.Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.3 INSTALLATION OF STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A.Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2.Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3.Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory- applied sealant. 4.Watertight Installation: a.Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal joints of metal panels, using sealant or tape as recommend in writing by manufacturer as needed to make panels watertight. b.Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. c.At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. B.Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. C.Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 074113.16 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 074646.13 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section includes fiber-cement siding and soffit. B.Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for weather-resistive barriers. 1.3 COORDINATION A.Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B.Samples for Initial Selection: For fiber-cement siding and soffit including related accessories. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Certificates: For each type of fiber-cement and . B.Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For each type of product, including related accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use. B.Store materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.8 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Structural failures including cracking and deforming. b.Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering. 2.Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING – HORIZONTAL PATTERN A.General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; HardiePanel® Vertical Siding, CedarMill or comparable product.. B.Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/16 inch. C.Horizontal Pattern: Boards wide in plain style. 1. Texture: Wood grain . 2.3 Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.4 FIBER-CEMENT BOARDS A.General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; HardieTrim® Boards, Rustic Grain Batten Boards or comparable product. B.Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch. C.Battens: 2 1/2-inch- wide boards with wood-grain texture, spaced 24 inches on center. D.Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.5 FIBER-CEMENT SOFFIT A.General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; HardieSoffit® Panels, CedarMill or comparable product. B.Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/4 inch. C.Pattern: 24-inch- wide sheets with wood-grain texture. D.Ventilation: Textured Cedarmill vented, provides 5 square inches (32.3 sq.cm) of net free ventilation per linear foot, 24 inches (610 mm) by 8 feet (2438 mm). E.Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A.Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. 1.Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated. B.Decorative Accessories: Provide the following fiber-cement decorative accessories as indicated: 1.Corner posts. 2.Door and window casings. 3. Fasciae. 4.Moldings and trim. C.Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated. 1.Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Siliconized polyester coating. D.Fasteners: 1.For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate. 2.For fastening fiber cement, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fiber-cement siding and soffit and related accessories. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. 1.Do not install damaged components. 2.Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c. B.Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B.Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 074646 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim: 1.Formed roof drainage system. 2.Formed low-slope roof flashing and trim. 3.Formed wall flashing and trim. 4.Formed equipment support flashing. B.Related Sections include the following: 1.Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing through-wall flashing, reglets, and other sheet metal flashing and trim. 2.Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 3.Division 7 Section "Membrane Roofing" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing membrane. 4.Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for manufactured roof specialties not part of sheet metal flashing and trim. 5.Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 6.Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sheet metal flashing and trim sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B.Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. C.Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B.Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1.Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2.Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3.Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work. 4.Details of expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. C.Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim indicated with factory- applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment. 2.Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3.Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 4.Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B.Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C.Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weather-tight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.7 COORDINATION A.Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leak-proof, secure, and non-corrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METALS A.Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1.Surface: Smooth, flat 2.Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: a.Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 3.Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4.Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm). B.Recycled Content of Zinc-Sheet Flashing and Trim: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 15 percent. A.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and pre-painted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality. 2.Surface: Smooth, flat. 3.Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a.Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. B.Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper-bearing lead sheet. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A.Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. B.Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, non-perforated. C.Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft.. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B.Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1.Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory- applied coating. 2.Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 3.Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. 4.Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 5.Fasteners for Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. C.Solder for Lead: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. D.Solder for Zinc: ASTM B 32, 60 percent lead and 40 percent tin with low antimony, as recommended by manufacturer. E.Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet. F.Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. G.Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. H.Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. I.Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A.General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B.Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C.Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1.Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. D.Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. E.Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. F.Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. G.Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, non-corrosive metal. 1.Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. A.Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Gutter Style: “A” or as shown on plans. 2. Expansion Joints: Lap type. 3. Fabricate from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm). B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricate downspouts from the following material: a. Pre-painted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 24 gauge. C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4- inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. 1. Fabricate parapet scuppers from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm). 2.7 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- wide joint cover plates. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 6-inch- wide exposed cover plates. 2. Fabricate scuppers from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 6-inch- wide exposed cover plates. 2. Fabricate copings from the following material: a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) C. Roof to Roof and Roof to Wall Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] D. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm). E. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm). F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm). G. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead: 4.0 lb/sq. ft., hard tempered. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) 2.9 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1.Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 2.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1.Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B.Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 1. Coat underside of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2.Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 3.Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 4.Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. C.Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. D.Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant. E.Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1.Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F.Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. G.Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 1.Galvanized or Pre-painted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2.Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. H.Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. 1.Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2.Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." I.Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pre-tinned surface would show in finished Work. 1.Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet. 2.Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. J.Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A.General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B.Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. 1.Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper. 2.Loosely lock front edge of scupper with conductor head. 3.Seal or solder exterior wall scupper flanges into back of conductor head. C.Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A.General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. B.Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. 1.Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 16- inch centers. C.Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. 1.Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 16-inch centers. 2.Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 18-inch centers. D.Pipe or Post Counter flashing: Install counter flashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless- steel draw band and tighten. E.Counter flashing: Coordinate installation of counter flashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counter flashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counter flashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counter flashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. 1.Secure in a waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant. F.Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1.Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2.Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A.General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B.Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of formed through-wall flashing is specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies." 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A.Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B.Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C.Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D.Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Silicone joint sealants. 2.Urethane joint sealants. 3.Acoustical joint sealants. 4.Pick-proof & tamper-resistant sealant: to be provided at all control joints accessible to elementary school students (from finish floor to minimum 6’-0” AFF) at all interior spaces (corridors, classrooms, restrooms, dining areas, multi-purpose space, collaboration spaces, etc.). B.Related Sections: 1.Section 042000 "Concrete Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. 2.Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B.Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C.Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B.Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1.When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 2.When joint substrates are wet. 3.Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4.Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A.Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1.Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2.Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3.Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4.Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A.Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint- sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B.VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1.Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2.Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3.Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C.Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid- applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. D.Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. E.Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. F.Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A.Single-Component, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.DAP Products Inc. b.Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning® 790 Silicone Building Sealant. c.Sika Corporation; SikaSil-C990. d.Tremco Incorporated; Spectrum I. B.Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.DAP Products Inc. b.Pecora Corporation. C.Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.DAP Products Inc. b.Dow Corning Corporation; DOW CORNING® 786 SILICONE SEALANT. c.Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary. 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A.Single-Component, Non-sag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.DAP Products Inc. b.Sika Corporation; Sikaflex - 15LM. c.Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic FC. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A.Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. b.USG Corporation; USG Sheetrock® Brand Acoustical Sealant. 2.5 PICK PROOF & TAMPER RESISTANT JOINT SEALANT: A.2-component, 100% solids, moisture-tolerant, low-modulus, non-sag paste-consistency, epoxy resin binder. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Sika Corporation; Sikadur 23 Lo-Mod Gel 2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A.General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B.Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330 Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B.Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C.Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint- sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1.Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2.Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c.Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d.Exterior insulation and finish systems. 3.Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4.Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 a. Metal. b.Glass. c.Porcelain enamel. d.Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B.Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C.Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A.General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B.Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C.Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1.Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2.Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3.Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D.Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1.Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2.Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3.Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E.Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1.Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2.Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3.Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. a.Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. F.Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING A.Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A.Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A.Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces - JS-1. 1.Joint Locations: a.Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b.Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c.Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems. d.Joints between different materials listed above. e.Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows, and louvers. f.Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces. 2.Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, non-sag, Class 100/50. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B.Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces - JS-2. 1.Joint Locations: a.Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 2.Urethane Joint Sealant: Single component, non-sag, Class 100/50. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C.Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces in corridors - JS-3. 1.Joint Locations: a.Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b.Tile control and expansion joints. c.Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of and walls partitions. d.Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. 2.Pick Proof & Tamper Resistant Joint Sealant: 2-component, 100% solids, moisture-tolerant, low- modulus, non-sag paste-consistency, epoxy resin binder. D.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. E.Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces - JS-4. 1.Joint Locations: a.Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b.Tile control and expansion joints. c.Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of and walls partitions. d.Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. 2.Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant, Class 100/50. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. F.Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces - JS-5. 1.Joint Sealant Location: a.Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b.Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. 2.Joint Sealant: Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Non-sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. G.Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces - JS-6. 1.Joint Sealant Location: a.Joints between kitchen plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b.Kitchen tile control and expansion joints where indicated. 2.Joint Sealant: Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 H.Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces - JS-7. 1.Joint Location: a.Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of acoustical rated walls and partitions. b.Perimeter joints between interior acoustical rated wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. c.Acoustical joints where indicated. 2.Joint Sealant: Acoustical, non-sag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section includes: 1.Exterior standard steel doors and frames. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1.Elevations of each door type. 2.Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3.Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. C.Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. B.Windstorm Openings: Provide copy of current test reports of compliance that doors, frames and hardware for exterior opening assemblies have been tested and approved for use at the wind load and design pressure level requirements specified for the Project. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Record Documents: For fire-rated doors, list of door numbers and applicable room name and number to which door accesses. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Steelcraft; Allegion plc; B Series B18/16 or comparable product by one of the following: 1.Curries, AADG, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY Group. 2.Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 3.Mesker Door; Mesker Openings Group. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with U-factor of not more than 0.50 deg Btu/F x h x sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM C518. C.Windstorm Resistant Exterior Openings (Texas Department of Insurance): Provide exterior hollow metal and door hardware assemblies approved by the Texas Department of Insurance, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures calculated for this project by a registered engineer and are part of the construction documents per the Texas Department of Insurance, authorities having jurisdiction, and the International Building Code Design Loads Section 1609. 1. Hurricane-Resistance Test Performance: Provide hollow metal and door hardware approved assemblies that pass large missile-impact tests, as required by Texas Department of Insurance systems location above grade and cyclic-pressure tests according to testing requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. a.Impact Resistance: Hollow metal with approved door hardware assemblies must satisfy the Texas Department of Insurance’s criteria for protection from windborne debris in both the Inland I zone and the Seaward zone. Assemblies must pass the large missile impact test (which equates to Missile Level D specified in ASTM E 1996-02). Assemblies may be installed at any height on the structure as long as the design pressure rating for the assemblies is not exceeded. 2.3 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A.Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B.Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 2; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level B. . 1. Doors: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 a.Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b.Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. c.Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 18 gauge (0.042 inch), with minimum A40 coating. d.Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e.Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges. f.Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration. g.Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. h.Core: Vertical steel stiffener. 2. Frames: a.Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 16 gauge (0.053 inch), with minimum A40 coating. b.Construction: Full profile welded. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A.Jamb Anchors: 1.Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. 2.Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet. 3.Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. B.Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor. C.Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1.For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M or ASTM A1011/A1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B. 2.5 MATERIALS A.Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B.Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D.Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M. E.Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. F. 2.6 Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. FABRICATION A.Door Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency. B.Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1.Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding. 2.Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3.Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 a.Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. C.Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1.Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2.Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware. D.Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1.Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with beveled stops unless otherwise indicated. 2.Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3.Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal doors and frames. 4.Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 5.Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A.Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1.Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory- applied finishes where spreaders are removed. B.Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with NAAMM-HMMA 840. 1.Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. a.Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. b.Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. 2.Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a.Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3.Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout or mortar. 4.In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 5.Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances: a.Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b.Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c.Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d.Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. B.Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with NAAMM-HMMA 841 and NAAMM-HMMA guide specification indicated. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3.3 REPAIR A.Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. B.Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. C.Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION 081113 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 083313 - COILING COUNTER DOORS (EXTERIOR) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Counter doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type and size of coiling counter door and accessory. 1.Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes. 2.Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. 3.Include description of automatic closing device and testing and resetting instructions. B.Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1.Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2.Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3.Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure. 4.Show locations of controls, locking devices, and other accessories. 5.Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C.Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Windstorm Openings: Provide copy of current test reports of compliance that doors, frames and hardware for exterior opening assemblies have been tested and approved for use at the wind load and design pressure level requirements specified for the Project. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For coiling counter doors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 1.Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Source Limitations: Obtain coiling counter doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from coiling counter door manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for appropriate Wind Zone. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade. B.Windstorm Resistant Exterior Openings (Texas Department of Insurance): Provide exterior hollow metal and door hardware assemblies approved by the Texas Department of Insurance, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures calculated for this project by a registered engineer and are part of the construction documents per the Texas Department of Insurance, authorities having jurisdiction, and the International Building Code Design Loads Section 1609. C.Wind Loading as indicated on drawings 2.3 COUNTER DOOR ASSEMBLY A.Counter Door: Coiling counter door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. B.Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. C.Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel. D.Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-1/2-inch center-to-center height. 1.Slat Interior Facing: Galvanized steel. E.Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated aluminum extrusion and finished to match door. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 F.Curtain Jamb Guides: Aluminum with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise. G.Hood: Aluminum. 1.Mounting: Face of wall. H.Sill Configuration: No sill . I.Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock and . 1.Locking Device Assembly: Cremone-type, both jamb sides locking bars, operable from inside with thumbturn. J.Manual Door Operator: Manufacturer's standard crank operator . K.Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals. L.Door Finish: 1.Galvanex, White (both sides) . M.Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face. 2.4 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A.Door Curtains: Fabricate coiling counter door curtain of interlocking metal slats in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1.Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E84 or UL 723. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. 2.Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face. B.Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. 2.5 HOODS A.General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 2.6 LOCKING DEVICES A.Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side. 2.7 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A.Weatherseals: Equip door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter of door for air-resistant installation unless otherwise indicated. 1.At door head, use 1/8-inch- thick, replaceable, continuous-sheet baffle secured to inside of hood or field-installed on the header. 2.At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene. B.Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door. C.Pull-Down Strap: Provide pull-down straps for doors more than 84 inches high. 2.8 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A.General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B.Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, seamless or welded carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load. C.Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs. D.Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. E.Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.9 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A.General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 B. Push-up Door Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Examine locations of electrical connections. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Install coiling counter doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. 3.3 ADJUSTING A.Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B.Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C.Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter. END OF SECTION 083313 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 087111 - DOOR HARDWARE (DESCRIPTIVE SPECIFICATION) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Mechanical door hardware for the following: a.Swinging doors. 2.Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Door hardware schedule. C.Keying schedule. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1.Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 2.Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B.Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and if required for the project, an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC) or Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC). 1.7 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below: a.Locks: years from date of Substantial Completion. b.Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. c.Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. d.Concealed Floor Closers: years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. B.Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" the DOT's "ADA Standards for Transportation Facilities" the ABA standards of the Federal agency having jurisdiction ICC A117.1 HUD's "Fair Housing Accessibility Guidelines" and . 2.2 HINGES A.Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Allegion plc. b.Hager Companies. c.Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions. B. Antifriction-Bearing Hinges: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.Mounting: Full mortise (butts). 2.Bearing Material: Ball bearing. 3.Grade: 1 (heavy weight . 4.Base and Pin Metal: a.Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel with stainless steel pin . b.Interior Hinges: Stainless steel with stainless steel pin. 5.Pins: Non-rising loose unless otherwise indicated. a.Outswinging Exterior Doors: Nonremovable. b.Outswinging Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable. 6.Tips: Flat button. 7.Corners: Square. 8.Features: Raised barrel. 2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A.Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. B.Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1.Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2.Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw. C.Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated. D.Lock Trim: 1. Description: Lever. 2.Levers: Forged. a.Construction: Solid. 3.Escutcheons (Roses): Forged. 4.Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. E.Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1.Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2.Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3.Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4.Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. F.Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1 ; Series 4000. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.Allegion plc. b.BEST Access Solutions, Inc.; dormakaba USA Inc. c.SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. 2.4 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS A.Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Allegion plc. b.dormakaba USA Inc. c.SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. B.Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing in accordance with UL 305. C.Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing in accordance with UL 305 and NFPA 252. D.Rim Exit Devices: Grade 1. 1.Type: 1, rim. 2.Actuating Bar: Narrow-stile push pad. 3.Material: Stainless steel. 4.Electrified Features: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 a.Push pad monitor switch. b.Double push pad monitor switch. c.Electric locking and unlocking. d.Fail-secure electric latch retraction (dogging) that engages latch when fire-alarm system is activated. e.Delayed egress. f.Alarm. E. Exit Device Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder ; material and finish to match locksets unless otherwise indicated. 1. Match design for lock trim unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS A.Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. Provide cylinder from same manufacturer of locking devices. B.High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.30; Grade 2 permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset. 1.Type: M, mechanical. 2.Number of Pins: Six. 3.Lock Type: Rim type. 2.6 KEYING A.Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1.Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate cylinders. a.Provide three cylinder change keys and five each of master and grand master keys. 2.Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key. B.Keys: Brass. 1.Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a.Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2.7 OPERATING TRIM A.Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; aluminum unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Allegion plc. b.Hager Companies. c.Rockwood Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY Accessories and Door Controls Group, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY. d.Trimco. B. Push-Pull Plates: With square corners, beveled edges, and raised integral lip; secured with exposed screws. 1.Thickness: 1/8 inch. 2.Size: 3-1/2 inches wide by 15-3/4 inches high. 2.8 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A.Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release. B.Carry-Open Bars: BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used. C.Flat Overlapping Astragals: BHMA A156.22; flat primed steel metal bar, surface mounted on face of door with screws; minimum 1/8 inch thick by 2 inches wide by full height of door. 2.9 SURFACE CLOSERS A.Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 a.Allegion plc. b.SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. c.STANLEY; dormakaba USA, Inc. B.Surface Closer with Cover: Grade 1 ; Modern type with mechanism enclosed in cover. 1.Mounting: Parallel arm . 2.Type: Regular arm . 3.Backcheck: Adjustable, effective between 60 and 85 degrees of door opening. 4.Cover Material: Aluminum . 5.Closing Power Adjustment: At least 15 percent more than minimum tested value. 2.10 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A.Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16; polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum base metal. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Allegion plc. b.Hager Companies. c.Trimco. B.Dome-Type Floor Stop: Grade 1 ; with minimum 1-inch- high bumper for doors without threshold and 1-3/8- inch- high bumper for doors with threshold. 1. Provide with extruded-aluminum riser for carpet installations. 2.11 DOOR GASKETING A.Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Hager Companies. b.National Guard Products, Inc. c.Pemko Manufacturing Company Inc.; ASSA ABLOY Accessories and Door Controls Group, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY. d.Reese Enterprises, Inc. e.Zero International; Allegion plc. B.Maximum Air Leakage: When tested in accordance with ASTM E283 with tested pressure differential of 0.3- inch wg, as follows: 1.Smoke-Rated Gasketing: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of door opening. 2.Gasketing on Single Doors: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of door opening. 3.Gasketing on Double Doors: 0.50 cfm per ft. of door opening. C.Rigid, Housed, Perimeter Gasketing: Polyurethane bulb gasket material held in place by housing; fastened to frame stop with screws. 1.Housing Material: Aluminum. D.Overlapping Astragals for Meeting Stiles: EPDM strip gasket material held in place by housing and overlapping when doors are closed; mounted to face of meeting stile with screws. 1.Housing Material: Aluminum. 2.Mounting: Surface mounted on face of one door. E.Door Sweeps: Neoprene gasket material held in place by flat housing or flange; surface mounted to face of door with screws. 1. Housing or Flange Material: Aluminum . 2.12 THRESHOLDS A.Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Hager Companies. b.National Guard Products, Inc. c.Pemko Manufacturing Company Inc.; ASSA ABLOY Accessories and Door Controls Group, Inc.; ASSA ABLOY. d.Reese Enterprises, Inc. e.Zero International; Allegion plc. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 B.Saddle Thresholds: 1.Type: Fluted top, barrier free. 2.Base Metal: Aluminum . 2.13 FINISHES A.Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1.Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2.Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3.Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B.Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. C.Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D.Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. 1.Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. 2.Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. E.Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." F.Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. G.Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 1.Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware. H.Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. I.Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.2 ADJUSTING A.Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A.Hardware Sets: Submit hardware schedule produced by an Architectural Hardware Consultant for review. END OF SECTION 087111 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 08 83 00 - MIRRORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors: 1. Tempered glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions. B.Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work. C.Samples: For each type of the following products: 1.Mirrors: 12 inches (300 mm) square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. 2.Mirror Trim: 12 inches (300 mm) long. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B.Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer. B.Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source. C.Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations: 1.GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 2.GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." D.Safety Glazing Products: For tempered mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B.Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 1.9 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1.Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 A.Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process. 1.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. b.Guardian Industries. c.National Glass Industries. B.Tempered Clear Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality, for blemish requirements; and comply with ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied. 1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B.Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. 2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE A.Top Channel/Cleat and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 1.Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/16 and 3/4 inch (7.9 and 19 mm) in height, respectively. a.Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide D638 FHA Type "J" Channel by Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 2.Top Trim: Formed with front leg with a height of 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) and back leg designed to fit into the pocket created by wall-mounted aluminum cleat. a.Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide D 1638 Top Channel and D 1637M Mirror Mount System Cleat by Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 3.Finish: Clear bright anodized. B.Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. C.Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A.Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, and before tempering, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes. B.Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts before tempering for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. B.Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C.Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 1.Top Channel/Cleat and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 A.Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. B.Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. C.Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. D.Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08 83 00 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A.Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B.Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal). C.Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. 1.For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B.Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 1.Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 2.Show mullion profiles and locations. C.Samples: For each type of metal finish required. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500- L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified. B.Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1.Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. B.Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Louvers located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade shall pass basic- protection, large-missile testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 2 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than louvers indicated for use on Project. C.SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A.Horizontal, Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Construction Specialties Inc., Model DCH 5704, or comparable product by one of the following: a.Airolite Company, LLC (The). b.Greenheck Fan Corporation. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 c.Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. 2.Louver Depth: 5 inches (127 mm). 3.Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for blades and 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames. 4.AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A.General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1.Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2.Screening Type: Insect screening. B.Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. C.Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1.Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. 2.Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. 3.Type: Rewireable frames with a driven spline or insert. D.Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1.Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) mesh, 0.012-inch (0.30-mm) wire. 2.5 MATERIALS A.Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B.Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C.Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1.Use tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2.For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3.For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. D.Post-installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E.Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.6 FABRICATION A.Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B.Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. C.Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1.Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. D.Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. E.Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less. 1.Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. F.Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers. G.Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A.Finish louvers after assembly. B.High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1.Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A.Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B.Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weather tight connection. C.Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D.Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E.Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. F.Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weather tight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. B.Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C.Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1.Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. END OF SECTION 089119 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Interior gypsum board. 2.Texture finishes. B.Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B.Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C.Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1.Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A.Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.CertainTeed; SAINT-GOBAIN. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3.Gold Bond Building Products, LLC provided by National Gypsum Company. 4.USG Corporation. B.Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1.Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2.Long Edges: Tapered. C.Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1.Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2.Long Edges: Tapered. D.Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold- resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.Long Edges: Tapered. 3.Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A.Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1.Material: Galvanized. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c.Expansion (control) joint. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B.Joint Tape: 1.Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C.Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1.Pre-filling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2.Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a.Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3.Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4.Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B.Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. C.Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1.Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. D.Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES A.Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B.Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application. 1.Texture: Orange Peel at painted surfaces. 2.Texture: Smooth at applied vinyl wall covering. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B.Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A.Comply with ASTM C 840. B.Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C.Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D.Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E.Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 1.Control joints shall be located 30 feet-0 inches on center maximum and along building expansion joints, unless noted otherwise on drawings. Locations shall be reviewed with Architect prior to final placement. F.Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1.Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2.Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3.Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. G.Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H.Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I.STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J.Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A.Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1.Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4.Cementitious backer panels: Install minimum 3” base at all gypsum walls. B.Single-Layer Application: 1.On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2.On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a.Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b.At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3.On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4.Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C.Multilayer Application: 1.On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 2.Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A.General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B.Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1. Corner bead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.Control Joint: Maximum 30’-0” on center or as noted on drawings. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A.General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Pre-fill open joints and damaged surface areas. C.Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D.Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a.Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099113 "Painting." 3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A.Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B.Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C.Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.7 PROTECTION A.Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non- drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B.Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C.Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1.Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C.Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1.48 hours before installation. 2.During installation. 3.48 hours after installation. B.After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C.Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Flexco. 3.Roppe Corporation, USA. B.Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous). 1.Style and Location: a.Style B, Cove: As indicated on drawings. C.Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). D.Height: 4 inches (102 mm). E.Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F.Outside Corners: Preformed. G.Inside Corners: Preformed. H.Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B.Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 C.Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B.Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710. 1.Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2.Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4.Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following: a.Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b.Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level. C.Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D.Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1.At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. E.Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B.Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C.Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D.Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E.Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F.On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G.Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. B.Resilient Stair Accessories: 1.Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2.Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3.For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 A.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B.Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1.Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2.Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C.Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D.Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. 1.Apply three coat(s). E.Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 65 13 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 099100 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1.Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. B.Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1.Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C.Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1.Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components: a.Architectural woodwork and casework. b.Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. c.Light fixtures. d.Switchgear. e.Distribution cabinets. 2.Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas: a.Foundation spaces. b.Furred areas. c.Utility tunnels. d.Pipe spaces. 3.Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include: a.Anodized aluminum. b.Stainless steel. c.Chromium plate. d.Copper. e.Bronze. f.Brass. 4. Interior and exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces to be painted include: a.Galvanized steel lintels. b.Galvanized steel pipe & tube railings. c.All other galvanized steel exposed to view. 5.Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following: d.Valve and damper operators. e.Linkages. f.Sensing devices. g.Motor and fan shafts. 5.Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 A."Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1.List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2.VOC content. B.Samples for initial verification purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 1.Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample as to location and application. 2.Submit samples 12 inch by 12 inch for the Architect's initial review of color and texture only. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B.Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1.Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C.Field Samples for final verification: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full- coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required sheen, color and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. 1.Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples. 2.The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room or surface in accordance with the schedule or as specified. After finishes are accepted, this room or surface will be used for evaluation of coating systems of a similar nature. D.Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1.Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude equal products of other manufacturers. 2.Federal Specifications establish a minimum quality level for paint materials, except where other product identification is used. Provide written certification from the manufacturer that materials provided meet or exceed these criteria. 3.Products that comply with qualitative requirements of applicable Federal Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements, may be considered for use when acceptable to the Architect. Furnish material data and manufacturer's certificate of performance to Architect for proposed substitutions. E.VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1.Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2.Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3.Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. 4.Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 5.Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 6.Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 7.Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 8.Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 9.Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 10.Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1.Product name or title of material. 2.Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3.Federal Specification number, if applicable. 4.Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 5.Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 6.Thinning instructions. 7.Application instructions. 8.Color name and number. B.Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A.Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). B.Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C). C.Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following: 1.Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 2.Pratt and Lambert (P & L). 3.The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). 2.2 MASONRY BLOCK FILLER A.High-Performance Latex Block Filler: Heavy-duty latex block fillers used for filling open textured interior and exterior concrete masonry block before application of top coats: 1.S-W:Prep Rite Block Filler B25W25. 2.3 PRIMERS A.Exterior Primer Coating: Exterior latex wood primer used for priming mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels under a flat acrylic emulsion finish: 1.S-W:Exterior Latex Primer B.Interior Masonry Latex-Based Paint: Alkali-resistant paint used as a primer over concrete and masonry under flat and semigloss enamel: 1.S-W:Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300. C.Interior Flat Latex-Based Paint: Flat latex paint used as a primer on plaster under flat, semigloss, and full-gloss alkyd finishes: 1.S-W:Premium Wall and Wood Primer, B28W8111. D.Latex-Based Interior White Primer: Latex-based primer coating used on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint or an alkyd semigloss enamel. 1.S-W:Pro Green 200 Latex Wall Primer. E.Synthetic, Rust-Inhibiting Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer for priming ferrous metal on the exterior Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 under full-gloss and flat alkyd enamel and on the interior under flat latex paint or odorless alkyd semigloss or alkyd gloss enamels: 1.S-W:Pro Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66W310. F.Galvanized Metal Primer: Primer used to prime interior and exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1.S-W:Pro Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66W310. 2.4 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS A.Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use on the interior as an undercoat over a primer on filled concrete masonry under an odorless semigloss enamel finish: 1.S-W:Premium Wall & Wood Primer, B28W8111. B.Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over wood and hardboard under an odorless alkyd semigloss enamel or full gloss alkyd enamel: 1.S-W:Premium Wall & Wood Primer, B28W8111. C.Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use as an undercoat over a primer on ferrous or zinc-coated metal under an interior alkyd semigloss enamel or a full-gloss alkyd enamel: 1.S-W:Premium Wall & Wood Primer, B28W8111. 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A.Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Quick-drying, flat, acrylic paint for use on the exterior over concrete, stucco, masonry (including concrete masonry block), and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement-panel surfaces: 1.S-W:A-100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish A- 6 Series. B.Exterior Semi-transparent Oil Stain: Semi-transparent oil based exterior wood stains: 1.S-W:WoodScapes Semi-Transparent Polyurethane Exterior Stain (A15T5). C.Exterior Full-Gloss Enamel: Full-Gloss Alkyd enamel for use over prime-coated ferrous metal: 1.S-W:Industrial Alkyd Urethane B54W150. 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A.Latex-Based Interior Semi-Gloss Paint: Ready-mixed, latex-based paint for use as a semi gloss finish over concrete and masonry surfaces, including filled concrete masonry block, mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels, and plaster and over prime-coated gypsum drywall, ferrous metal, and zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces: 1.S-W:Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Semigloss Wall Paint. B.Interior Semigloss Odorless Acrylic Paint: Ready-mixed, low-odor interior semigloss acrylic enamel for use over concrete, masonry, and plaster wood, hardwood, gypsum drywall, and metal surfaces: 1.S-W:Pro Industrial 0 VOC Acrylic Eg-Shell. C.Latex-based, Interior Flat Paint: Ready-mixed, latex based paint for use over acoustical plaster surfaces and as a "size" on cotton or canvas covering over insulation: 1.S-W:Pro Mar 200 Zero VOC Flat Wall Paint, B30W2600 Series. D.Exposed Steel Roof Structure and Acoustical Tectum Panels: 2 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 4 mils. 1.First Coat:S-W Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, B42W00081. 2.Second Coat:S-W Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, B42W00081. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD FINISHING MATERIALS A.Varnish-Type Surface Sealer: Sealer for open-grain wood for use as a surface sealer over exterior plywood before application of a prime coat: 1.S-W:A-100 Exterior Latex Primer. B.Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain: Slow-penetrating oil-type wood stain for general use on interior wood surfaces under varnishes or wax finishes: 1.S-W:S-W Minwax Low VOC Waterborne Stain. C.Waterborne Varnish: Clear, oil-type rubbing varnish for use on interior stained or natural-finished woodwork: 1.S-W:S-W Minwax Polyurethane Varnish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 A.Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. 3.2 PREPARATION A.General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1.Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. B.Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1.Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated with using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. 2.Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a.Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b.Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. c.Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, and rinse; allow to dry and vacuum before painting. 3.Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a.Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b.Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c.When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d.Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e.Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4.Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. a.Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and in accordance with requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. b.Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c.Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5.Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non- petroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 C.Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1.Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2.Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3.Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. D.Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A.Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B.Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1.Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules." 2.Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3.The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 4.Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5.The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6.Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment. 7.Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8.Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9.Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field- finished casework to match exterior. 10.Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11.Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12.Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch up painted. C.Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1.Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. D.Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E.Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F.Mechanical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1.Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2.Heat exchangers. 3.Tanks. 4.Ductwork. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 5.Insulation. 6.Supports. 7.Motors and mechanical equipment. 8.Accessory items. G.Electrical items to be painted include but are not limited to: 1.Conduit and fittings. 2.Switchgear. H.Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I.Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J.Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K.Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1.Provide satin finish for final coats. L.Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1.The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2.The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a.Quantitative materials analysis. b.Abrasion resistance. c.Apparent reflectivity. d.Flexibility. e.Washability. f.Absorption. g.Accelerated weathering. h.Dry opacity. i.Accelerated yellowness. j.Recoating. k.Skinning. l.Color retention. m.Alkali and mildew resistance. 3.If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are noncompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A.Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B.Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A.Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B.Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. 1.At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A.General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated. B.Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1.Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a.Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer (FS TT-P-664). b.First Coat: Lusterless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-527). c.Second Coat: Lusterless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-527). C.Zinc-Coated Metal: 1.Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer. a.Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer (FS TT-P-641). b.First Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489). c.Second Coat: Alkyd Gloss Enamel (FS TT-E-489). 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A.General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. B.Concrete and Masonry (Other than concrete masonry units): 1.Semi-gloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils. a.Primer: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). b.Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). c.Finish Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). C.Concrete Masonry Units: 1.Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: 2 coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat. a.Block Filler: High Performance Latex Block Filler. b.Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). c.Finish Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). D.Gypsum Drywall Systems: 1.Odorless semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a.Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer (FS TT-P-650). b.First Coat: Interior Egg-Shell Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). c.Second Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). E.Woodwork and Hardboard: 1.Semigloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats. a.Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). b.First Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). c.Second Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). F.Stained Woodwork: 1.Stained-Varnish Rubbed Finish: 3 finish coats over stain plus filler on open-grain wood. Wipe filler before applying first varnish coat. a.Stain Coat: Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain (FS TT-S-711). b.First Coat: Cut Shellac (FS TT-S-300). c.Filler Coat: Paste Wood Filler (FS TT-F-336). Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 d.Second Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish (FS TT-V-86). e.Third Coat: Oil Rubbing Varnish (FS TT-V-86). G.Ferrous Metal: 1.Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a.Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer (FS TT-P-664). b.First Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). c.Second Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). 2.Semigloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a.Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer (FS TT-P-664). b.Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). c.Finish Coat: Interior semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). H.Zinc-Coated Metal: 1.Lusterless (Flat) Finish: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a.Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer (FS TT-P-641). b.First Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). c.Second Coat: Latex-Based Interior Flat Paint (FS TT-P-29). 2.Semigloss Finish: 2 coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a.Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer (FS TT-P- 641). b.Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543). c.Finish Coat: Interior semi-gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509). END OF SECTION 099100 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 101416.13 – PLAQUE DISPLAY STANDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Plaque Display Stand 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product specified within this specification. 1.Manufacturer’s Specifications 2.Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions B.Shop Drawings: Show sizes, locations and installation details. 1.4 COORDINATION A.Coordinate Work of this Section with work of other sections in which items are to be installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Valley Trophies, LLC, Tribute Stand, Powder Coated Steel or comparable product. 2.2 PLAQUE DISPLAY STAND: PDS A.Size: 5 Foot w/ 8.5″ x 11″ Mounting Plate. B.Display Angle: 45 degrees. C.Mounting: Direct burial. D.Mounting height: mount center line of plaque at 36 inches. E.Coordinate mounting with plaque to be displayed. F.Color selected by Architect from manufacturer's available colors. 2.3 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, 3-inch slump, and 1-inch maximum aggregate size or dry, packaged, normal-weight concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387/C 387M mixed with potable water according to manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.General: Install items in locations and at mounting heights indicated or if not indicated then as directed by Architect. B.Install all items in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions in locations shown on drawings. C.Unless otherwise indicated, install plaque stand after landscaping and paving have been completed. D.Install plaque stand level, plumb, true, and positioned at locations indicated on Drawings. E.Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured. END OF SECTION 101416.13 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 10 1419 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Cutout dimensional characters. 1.3 COORDINATION A.Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: For signs. 1.Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2.Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3.Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size. C.Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1.Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. D.Product Schedule: For dimensional letter signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings or specified. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.9 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b.Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 2.Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A.Cutout Characters: Characters with uniform faces; square-cut, smooth edges; precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.A.R.K. Ramos. b.ASI Sign Systems, Inc. c.Corpus Christi Stamp Works d.Southwell Company (The). 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS A.Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. B.Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A.Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: 1.Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2.Sign Mounting Fasteners: a.Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A.General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated. 1.Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3.Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4.Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5.Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil- canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners. 6.Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B.Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A.Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B.Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C.Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs. D.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2.Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 3.Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B.Mounting Methods: 1.Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface. a.Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B.Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. C.On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. 3.4 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE A.Monument Sign at Entry (Two-Sided) 1.Text: Refer to Drawings 2.Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum. 3.Character Height: Refer to Drawings 4.Thickness: 0.25 inch. 5.Finishes: a. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6.Mounting: Projecting studs. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 7. Typeface: College. END OF SECTION 10 1419 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 101423.13 – PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Non-illuminated panel signs. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: For signage. 1.Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2.Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. 3.Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half size . C.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. D.Sample warranty. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. 1.4 WARRANTY A.Warranty: Custom High Pressure Laminate graphics shall be warranted against fading, de-lamination and weather deterioration within specified warranty period 1.Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" the ABA standards of the Federal agency having jurisdiction and ICC A117.1 . 2.2 PANEL SIGNS A.Panel Sign PS-1: Custom High Pressure Laminate secured to pressure treated wood posts, with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1.Custom High Pressure laminate: Several layers of phenolic resin impregnated kraft filler paper, a digitally imaged graphic, a layer of melamine resin, surfaced by a layer of translucent exterior UV/ graffiti overlay protection, bonded under heat and extreme pressure to form a composite panel: a.Thickness: ½ inch. b.Double sided. c.Matte finish. d.Exterior exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.General: 1.Install signs level, plumb, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2.Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. END OF SECTION 101423.13 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Solid-polymer toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. B.Related Sections: 1. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B.Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2.Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. 3.Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. C.Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M. B.Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). C.Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D.Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. 2.2 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.Ampco, Inc. 2.Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 3.Metpar Corp. 4.Scranton Products B.Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. C.Urinal-Screen Style: Floor anchored. D.Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. Continuous Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive continuous stainless steel hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning. 3.Color and Pattern: Two colors and patterns in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 E.Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; polymer. 1.Polymer Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . F.Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and construction of pilasters with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster. G.Brackets (Fittings): 1.Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; extruded aluminum. H.Overhead Cross Bracing for Ceiling-Hung Units: Manufacturer's standard design; extruded aluminum.. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A.Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1.Material: Stainless steel. 2.Hinges: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel continuous hinge for solid-polymer doors. 3.Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4.Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5.Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6.Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B.Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with anti-grip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C.Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome- plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A.Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B.Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. C.Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at tops and bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at posts to conceal anchorage. D.Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32- inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1.Maximum Clearances: a.Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b.Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). B.Floor Mounted-Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C.Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING A.Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 102113 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 102800 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Public-use washroom accessories. 2.Under lavatory guards. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1.Construction details and dimensions. 2.Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3.Material and finish descriptions. 4.Features that will be included for Project. 5.Manufacturer's warranty. B.Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. 1.Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C.Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1.Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2.Identify products using designations indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. 1.7 COORDINATION A.Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B.Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.8 WARRANTY A.Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness. B.Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180) hot-dip zinc coating. C.Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. D.Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. E.ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2.American Specialties, Inc. 3.Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 4.Bradley Corporation. B.Liquid-Soap Dispenser: 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B 40. 2.Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3.Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. 4.Capacity: 40 fl. oz.. 5.Materials: ABS Plastic. C.Grab Bar: 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B 5806. 2.Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3.Material: 304 Stainless steel, 180 gauge (1.2 mm) thick. a.Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin). 4.Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 5.Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawing. D.Mirror Unit 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-1556 2436. a.Frameless stainless steel mirror, 18-8, type-304, 20-gauge (0.9mm) stainless steel polished to a No. 8 mirror finish. b.Mirror shall have 1/4" (6mm) return concealing 1/4" (6mm) tempered masonite backing. c.Mirror shall be furnished with tamper-resistant mounting screws. 2.Hangers: Secure unit directly to wall through countersunk screw holes with tamper-resistant and theft- resistant mounting screws. 3.Size: 24” x 36”. 2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2.Truebro by IPS Corporation. B.Underlavatory Guard: 1.Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 2.Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. 2.4 FABRICATION A.General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B.Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B.Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B.Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C.Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 102800 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 10 75 16 - FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.This Section includes ground-set flagpoles made from aluminum capable of holding three 4’x6’ flags. B.Related Sections include the following: 1.Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete footings for flagpoles. 2.Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric sealant filling the top of the foundation tube. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Structural Performance: Provide flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, capable of withstanding the effects of wind loads, determined according to NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles." 1.Base flagpole design on nylon flags of maximum standard size suitable for use with flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent. 2.Basic Wind Speed: meet requirements for project location. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of flagpole required. B.Shop Drawings: Include elevations and details showing general arrangement, jointing, fittings and accessories, grounding, and anchoring and supporting systems. 1.Include details of foundation system for ground-set flagpoles. C.Structural Calculations: For flagpoles indicated to comply with local requirements for design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D.Finish Samples for Verification: For each finished material used for flagpoles and accessories. E.Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Source Limitations: Obtain flagpole as a complete unit, including fittings, accessories, bases, and anchorage devices, from a single manufacturer. 1. Obtain flagpoles through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other protective container. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.American Flagpole; a Kearney-National Inc. Company. 2.Concord Industries, Inc. 3. PoleTech 2.2 FLAGPOLES A.Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, comply with the following: 1.Fabricate shop and field joints without using fasteners, screw collars, or lead calking. 2.For tapered flagpoles, provide flush hairline joints using self-aligning, snug-fitting, internal sleeves. B.Exposed Height: 30 feet C.Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide cone-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing complying with ASTM B 241/ (B 241M), Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). Heat treat after fabrication to comply with ASTM B 597, Temper T6. D.Foundation Tube: Galvanized corrugated-steel foundation tube, 0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) minimum nominal wall thickness. Provide with 3/16-inch (4.8-mm) steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges all welded together. Galvanize steel parts, including foundation tube, after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for plumbing pole. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. 2.Provide steel ground protectors extending 12 inches (300 mm) aboveground and 6 inches (150 mm) belowground for steel flagpoles where flashing collars are not provided. E.Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole: PVC pipe foundation sleeve, made to fit flagpole, for casting into concrete foundation. 1.Provide flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole. F.Cast-Metal Shoe Base: For anchor-bolt mounting; provide with anchor bolts. 1.Provide units made from same metal and with same finish as flagpoles. 2.3 FITTINGS A.Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, to match flagpole-butt diameter. 1.0.063-inch (1.6-mm) spun aluminum with gold anodic finish. B.Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and removable handle, stainless-steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access door secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.. C. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two stainless-steel swivel snap hooks per halyard. 1. Provide with neoprene or vinyl covers. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air- entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa, unless otherwise indicated.) B.Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. C.Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate. D.Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (non-traffic) and for Use M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates. 2.5 FINISHES A.Metal Finishes, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B.Aluminum: Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1.Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: non-specular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. B.Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. C.Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base at grade. Secure and brace forms and foundation tube, sleeve, or anchor bolts in position, to prevent displacement during concreting. D.Place concrete immediately after mixing. Compact concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use nonstaining curing compound. E.Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base. 3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION A.General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B.Foundation-Tube Installation: Install flagpole in foundation tube, seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges. Plumb flagpole and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch (50-mm) layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar. END OF SECTION 10 75 16 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 116833 – BASEBALL/SOFTBALL FIELD EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY a.Section includes: 1.Baseball and Softball home plate, bases and pitcher’s rubber b.Related requirements 1.Section 321823.13 Baseball and Softball Red Infield Dirt 1.03 REFERENCES 1.Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. a.National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) b.American Sports Builders Association (ASBA) c.Manufacturers Data and Recommended Installation Requirements 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Manufacturers Product Data 1.Provide manufacturers product data for each type of Baseball and Softball equipment B.Shop Drawings 1.Provide drawings of the manufacturers recommended installation and foundation requirements prior to actual field installation work, for Architects or Owners representatives review. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturers warranties shall pass to the Owner and certification made that the product materials meet all applicable grade trademarks or conform to industry standards and inspection requirements. B.Installer shall have a minimum of five (5) baseball/softball equipment installations or similar experience in the previ- ous three (3) years. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Materials delivered to the site shall be examined for damage or defects in shipping. B.Sound materials shall be stored above ground under protective cover or indoors so as to provide proper protection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sportfield Specialties, Inc., baseball/softball field equipment or comparable product: a.Porter Sports Equipment B.HOME PLATE, BASES AND PITCHERS RUBBER 1.Baseball Field a.Home Plate, LGSHP-UM. b.Set of Three Bases, LGHIBL. i.Female Ground Anchors, LGBBP-44. c.Pitcher’s Rubber, LGBBPB. 2.Softball Field a. Home Plate, LGSHP-UM. b.Set of Three Bases, LGHIBL. i.Female Ground Anchors, LGBBP-44. c.Pitcher’s Rubber, LGBBPB. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A.All Baseball and Softball Field Equipment and Accessories shall be installed as recommended per manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 116833.13 – BASEBALL/SOFTBALL TEAM BENCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY a.Section includes: 1.Baseball and Softball team bench. 1.03 REFERENCES 1.Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. a.National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) b.American Sports Builders Association (ASBA) c.Manufacturers Data and Recommended Installation Requirements 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Manufacturers Product Data 1.Provide manufacturers product data for each type of Baseball and Softball equipment B.Shop Drawings 2.Provide drawings of the manufacturers recommended installation and foundation requirements prior to actual field installation work, for Architects or Owners representatives review. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Manufacturers warranties shall pass to the Owner and certification made that the product materials meet all applicable grade trademarks or conform to industry standards and inspection requirements. B.Installer shall have a minimum of five (5) baseball/softball equipment installations or similar experience in the previ- ous three (3) years. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Materials delivered to the site shall be examined for damage or defects in shipping. B.Sound materials shall be stored above ground under protective cover or indoors so as to provide proper protection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PW Athletic Mfg. Co., players bench with back or comparable product. 1.Length: 72 inches. 2.Frame: 2 3/8 inch galvanized steel pipe. 3.Seat & backrest: Aluminum planks. 2.02 WARRANTY A.Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace TEAM benches that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Warranty Period: 3 years PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A.Install players benches per manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 116833.23 – BASEBALL/SOFTBALL FENCE TOP PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY a.Section includes: 1.Baseball and Softball chainlink fence top protection. 1.03 REFERENCES 1.Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. a.National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) b.American Sports Builders Association (ASBA) c.Manufacturers Data and Recommended Installation Requirements 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Manufacturers Product Data 1.Provide manufacturers product data. B.Shop Drawings 2.Provide drawings of the manufacturers recommended installation. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Materials delivered to the site shall be examined for damage or defects in shipping. B.Sound materials shall be stored above ground under protective cover or indoors so as to provide proper pro- tection. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Advanced Sports Supply, POLYCAP or comparable product. 1.100% virgin high density polyethylene. 2.Pre-slit 3.4.5 inch diameter, heavy duty B.Color: Yellow. C.Provide all necessary components/accessories required for a complete installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A.All Baseball and Softball chainlink fence top protection shall be installed as recommended per manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 11 68 43 – EXTERIOR SCOREBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY a.Section includes: 1. Baseball exterior scoreboards 2.Softball exterior scoreboards b.Related requirements 1.Division 03 – Concrete; Sections: Cast-in-Place Concrete 2.Division 31 – Earthwork; Sections: Excavation and Backfill and Establishment of Sub-Grade Elevations 3.Division 26 – Electrical Specifications 1.03 REFERENCES 1.Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. A.Standard for Electric Signs, UL-48, 13th Edition B.Standard for Control Centers for Changing Message Type Signs, UL-1433, 1st Edition C.Standard for Can/CSA C22.2 D.Federal Communications Commission Regulation, Part 15 E.National Electric Code1.04 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type and size of coiling counter door and accessory. 1.Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes. A.Shop Drawings 1.Provide drawings of the manufacturers recommended installation and foundation requirements prior to actual field installation work, for Architects or Owners representatives review. 2.Stamped and Sealed Drawings and Calculations by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Project Location 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.1. Qualifications Certification: Submit written certification or similar documentation signed by the applicable subcontractor, prime contractor and/or manufacturer (where applicable) indicating compliance with the requirements specified below in the “Quality Assurance” section of this specification. B.Experience Listing: Submit a list of completed projects using the products proposed for this project, including owner’s contact information and telephone number for each project, demonstrating compliance with applicable requirements specified in the “Quality Assurance” section of this specification. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.All components including the scoreboard, control console and other accessories and installation hardware shall be the products of a single manufacturer. B.The company providing the scoreboard shall specialize in the manufacturing of exterior, electronic, athletic scoreboards with a minimum of ten years of experience. C.The scoreboard and other electrical components shall be certified for use in the United States and shall have an Underwriters Laboratories (UL) label securely attached. The scoreboard shall be listed UL Standards 48 and 1433. D.The scoreboard and electrical components shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the National Electric Code. E.The scoreboard and other electrical components shall be electrically grounded in accordance with the National Electric Code, Article 600. F.The scoreboard shall be compliant with the Code of Federal Regulations 47CFR15 – Federal Communications Commission Regulation Part 15, “Radio Frequency Devices”. G.The scoreboard shall be specifically manufactured for outdoor use. H.Existing displays of all scoreboards specified must be currently installed in a location in the United States within 100 miles of the Village of Nyack and be accessible for demonstration to the School District prior to submittal approval. I.Display equipment components must be procured from a single manufacturer. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.Materials delivered to the site shall be examined for damage or defects in shipping. A.Scoreboard and associated equipment shall be delivered to the project site and be housed in a clean, dry environment prior to installation. 1.08 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 A.Field Measurements: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations for grade control. B.Environmental Limitations: Do not install any scoreboard equipment until the mounting structure is secure and concrete foundations have had ample time to cure. C.Mounting Structure: Verify that the mounting structure is capable of supporting the scoreboard’s weight and wind load in addition to any auxiliary equipment and accessories. D.Weather: Scoreboard installation to proceed only within acceptable weather conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MULTIPURPOSE SCOREBOARD A.Product Overview: Multipurpose single sided scoreboard designed and manufactured for exterior use displaying HOME and GUESTS, home and guest scores 99, INNING to 9 and indicates BALL, STRIKE, OUT. B.MANUFACTURERS 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Nevco Sports, LLC, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Spectrum b.Daktronics, Inc. 2.02 PRODUCTS 1.Baseball Field: Baseball/Softball scoreboard, 1600 scoreboard with MPCW-7 controller (16’-0” long x 5’-0” high x 8” deep). 2.Softball Field: Baseball/Softball scoreboard, 1600 scoreboard with MPCW-7 controller (16’-0” long x 5’-0” high x 8” deep). 2.03 SCOREBOARD: A.General Information 1.Power requirement: 120 W 2.Color: To be chosen by Architect from the Manufacturer’s standard colors. Rear of scoreboard shall be painted to match front face color. 3.Scoreboard Perimeter Striping: To be chosen by Architect from the Manufacturer’s standard colors. B.Construction 1.Material: aluminum alloy construction C.Digits 1.Digit: LED 2.LED Digit Color: White 3.Seals: All digits to be sealed front and back with weather tight silicone gel. D.Captions 1.Caption Fabrication: White vinyl applied directly to the scoreboard face. Inning and period captions shall be a reversible panel. E.Scoring Console 1. Controller: Standard LCD controller powered by 12V DC Adapter or an optional internal battery. Keyboard controller shall be a microprocessor-controlled, molded of high impact ABS plastic, has a tactile membrane keypad. 2.04 CONCRETE FOR FOOTING A.Reinforced concrete for sports field scoring system footings shall have a compressive strength of 2500 PSI and shall be air-entrained. 2.05 STRUCTURAL STEEL A.HD Galvanized 8” OD schedule 40 steel pipe, size as required. Height of poles from finish grade: 9’-0”. B.Structural steel to be painted black. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A.Installer Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which scoreboards and associated accessories are to be installed with materials and components specified in this section. Affected Prime Contractors, Owner’s Representative and the Architect shall be notified in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely installation of work. 1.Verify that the mounting structure is ready to receive the scoreboard. 2.Verify that placement of conduit and junction boxes are as specified and are as indicated on the Contract Documents and on the approved shop drawings. 3.Prior to the placement of the footings and columns, verify that the planned spacing of supports aligns with the scoreboard attachment points. 4.Verify that concrete has cured properly according to the specifications. 5.When the installer confirms conditions as being acceptable to ensure proper and timely installation of the work and to ensure requirements of applicable warranties or guarantees can be satisfied, submit written Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 confirmation to the Architect. Failure to submit written confirmation and subsequent installation will be assumed to indicate conditions are acceptable to the installer. 3.02 CONCRETE FOOTING INSTALLATION A.The installation of reinforced concrete footings for the sports field scoring systems shall meet the requirements of this specification section. B.Provide for dewatering from surface water and ground water seepage into excavations and drilled shafts. Refer to the soil borings included in the Project Manual for information pertaining to the recorded elevation of the ground water table at the time the geotechnical investigation was performed. C.All piers shall be exactly centered under columns and shall bear on undisturbed soil. D.All concrete shall be mechanically vibrated. 3.03 CONTROL CABLE AND POWER WIRING INSTALLATION A.Control cable shall be installed from the control console to the control receptacle junction box located in the home dugout. B.Power wiring shall be installed to the sports field scoring systems and control cable shall be installed between the sports field scoring systems and the control receptacle junction box in the home dugout. C.All power and control cables to scoreboards and displays shall be routed in conduit. 3.04 STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMN INSTALLATION A.Verify that all concrete footings have cured adequately. B.Structural steel design, fabrication and erection shall conform to the AISC – Steel construction Manual, current edition. C.All structural steel shall be covered with light gauge end caps. D.All welding shall be performed by a certified welder with experience and certification in the type of welding required. Unless otherwise noted, all welds shall be fillet welds. E.Prior to installation of the structural steel, confirm that the indicated spacing of columns aligns with the scoreboard’s attachment points. F.All horizontal stringers required for installation shall be fabricated from steel capable of friction clamp design. 3.05 SCOREBOARD INSTALLATION A.Verify that the mounting structure is ready to receive the scoreboard. B.Install the unit in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. C.Mount the scoreboard to the columns at the location indicated. Verify that the columns and the scoreboard are installed plumb and level. D.Clean all exposed surfaces. E.Protect the scoreboard and finishes from other construction operations. F.Bond each structure to a copper clad steel ground rod not less than 5/8” diameter and not less than 10’-0” long. An 8’-0” long ground rod is permissible provided the rod extends vertically into the earth at least ten feet. 3.06 CONTROL CENTER INSTALLATION A.Provide boxes, cover plates and jacks in locations as indicated on the plans and as necessary for a complete and functional installation. B.Test connect the control unit to all jacks and check for proper operation of the control unit, scoreboard and all features. Leave control unit in carrying case and other loose accessories with the Owner’s Designated Representative. C.Verify that the earth ground does not exceed 15 ohms 3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A.The scoreboard manufacturer shall provide a demonstration and training session with the Owner and the Owner’s Representative covering the complete operation and maintenance of the specified sports field scoring component and all related accessories. B.Provide 30 spare LED units to the Owner and instructions for replacement. 3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Repairs and Protection of Scoreboards and Associated Accessories 1.Repair or replace broken or defective equipment as directed by the Architect. 2.Protect systems from damage until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 11 68 43 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Plastic-laminate-clad countertops. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-clad countertops. 1.Apply Program label to Shop Drawings. C.Samples: Plastic laminates in each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Product Certificates: For the following: 1.Composite wood products. 2.High-pressure decorative laminate. 3. Adhesives. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS A.Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of plastic-laminate-clad countertops indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1.Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and certificates from certification program indicating that countertops comply with requirements of grades specified. B.Grade: Premium . C.High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS . 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wilsonart LLC; or comparable product by one of the following: a.Formica Corporation. b.Nevamar; a Panolam Industries International, Inc. brand. D.Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1.As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a.Solid colors, matte finish. b.Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish. c.Wood grains, matte finish with grain running parallel to length of countertop. d.Patterns, matte finish. E.Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces . F.Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood. G.Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood. H.Core Thickness: 3/4 inch. 1.Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of core material laminated to top. I.Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. J.Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A.Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard unless otherwise indicated. 1.Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 8 to 13 percent. B.Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of countertop and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard, ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 . 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement . 1.Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.4 FABRICATION A.Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. B.Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed. B.Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop. 1.Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately, and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. C.Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings. 1.Secure field joints in countertops with concealed clamping devices located within 6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches. Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant, heavy-clamping pressure at joints. D.Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E.Countertop Installation: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1.Install countertops level and true in line. Use concealed shims as required to maintain not more than a 1/8-inch-in-96-inches variation from a straight, level plane. 2.Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 3.Seal joints between countertop and backsplash, if any, and joints where countertop and backsplash abut walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop material manufacturer. F.Protection: Provide Kraft paper or other suitable covering over countertop surfaces, taped to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 123623.13 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 12 62 23 – OUTDOOR PORTABLE BLEACHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Design and fabrication of Frame-Type Bleacher 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Structural Performance: Angle frame bleachers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ICC 300. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for telescoping stands. B.Shop Drawings: For telescoping stands in both stacked and extended positions. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C.Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B.Welding certificates. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Operation and Maintenance Data: For angle frame bleachers to include in operation and maintenance manuals. B.Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to telescoping stand finishes and performance. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B.Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C.Standard: Provide angle frame bleachers to comply with ICC 300. D.Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines, ICC/ANSI A117.1 and Texas Accessibility Standards. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings and construction contiguous with telescoping stands by field measurements before fabrication. Verify locations of walls, columns, and other construction that will interface with operating telescoping stands. 1.9 WARRANTY A.Manufacturer’s standard warranty a.1 year PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A.Steel: 1.Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation. 3.Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold formed; ASTM A 501, hot formed; or ASTM A 513, mechanical. B.Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy as standard for manufacturer. 2.1 MANUFACTURER A.General: Multiple-tiered seating on galvanized angle frame structure. B.Frame Type – Non-Elevated Bleachers: 2.2 FRAME-TYPE BLEACHERS A.Product Description 1.4 Row 8 inch Rise Bleachers, Non-Elevated Frame-Type Bleachers a.Rise and Depth Dimensions: Vertical rise and horizontal depth per row: 8 inches x 24 inches. Seat is 17 inches above its respective tread. b.Framework: Prefabricated angle bleacher frames are spaced at 6-foot (max.) intervals and connected by cross braces. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 a.Rise and Depth Dimensions: Vertical rise and horizontal depth per row: 8 inches x 24 inches. Seat is 17 inches above its respective tread. b.Framework: Prefabricated angle bleacher frames are spaced at 6-foot (max.) intervals and connected by cross braces. c.Seats: Nominal 2 x 10 anodized aluminum plank with 2 x 10 anodized end caps. d.Treads: Two nominal 2 x 11 mill aluminum planks with 2 x 11 anodized end caps. e.Risers: Nominal 1 x 6-1/2 anodized aluminum riser plank beginning at Row 2; two 1 x 6-1/2 aluminum riser plank on top row. f.Guard railing: Two lines of aluminum rail with chain link 42 inches above seat on both sides of bleacher and across back of bleacher. g.Aisle: Aisle to be provided with 34” high handrail and intermediate rail at approximately 22” above tread. Handrails with rounded ends are discontinuous to allow access to seating through a 24” wide space. Aluminum tread nosing of contrasting color on aisle steps. B.Materials/Finishes 1. Framework: a.Galvanized Steel: Structural fabrication with ASTM-A529 steel. Shop connections are seal welded. After fabrication, all steel is hot-dipped galvanized to ASTM-A123 specification. 2.Extruded Aluminum: a.Seat Planks, Riser Planks, Step Risers: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6, clear anodized 204R1, AA-M10C22A31, Class II, and a wall thickness of .094”. b.Tread Planks: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6, mill finish and wall thickness of .094”. 3.Accessories: a.Channel End Caps: Aluminum alloy 6063-T6, clear anodized 204R1, AA-M10C22A31, Class II. b. Hardware: i.Bolts, Nuts: Galvanized or plated. ii. Hold-Down Clip Assembly: Aluminum alloy 6061-T6. c.Guard railing: Anodized aluminum rail 1-5/8” O.D. with galvanized chain link. d. Cross braces: Extruded aluminum angle alloy 6061-T6, mill finish. e.Aisle Nose: Aluminum alloy, 6063-T6, black powder-coat finish. C.Manufactured Units: 1.5 Row Models: - 2 Line Chain link from Row 1 to Top - (2) 2 x 11 Tread Planks on All Rows - 1 x 6-1/2 Riser Beginning @ Row 2, (2) 1 x 6-1/2 Riser on Top Row. a.Model 533 NE (5 row x 33') b.Provide ADA seating space as required by the 2012 Texas Accessibility Standards. c.Quantity: As indicated on drawings D.Fabrication 1.Design Load: a.Live Load: 100 psf gross horizontal projection b.Lateral Sway Load: 24 plf seat plank c.Perpendicular Sway Load: 10 plf seat plank d.Live Load of Seat and Tread Plank: 120 plf e.Guardrail: 100 plf vertical and 50 plf horizontal. 2.All connections made in shop to be shop welded. a.Manufactured by certified welders conforming to AWS Standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install bleacher unit in accordance with manufacturer’s installation procedures. B.Anchor bleacher unit to, level concrete slab. END OF SECTION 12 62 23 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 133133 SECTION 133133 - FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES (HIP SHADE) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Fabric Shade Structure 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Delegated Design Submittal: For framed fabric shade structure systems 1.Include analysis data indicating compliance with performance requirements and design data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Provide sealed structural engineering drawings and calculations. 1.Design submittal shall include engineering drawings and calculations, patterning and f abrication of architectural membrane, structural steel frame, architectural HDPE membrane roof, structural steel framing, all fasteners, and installation of structure(s) including foundations and TDI Windstorm Design Requirements if applicable. C.Provide fabric samples and powder coat colors for final order selection. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabrication and erection are limited to firms with proven experience in design and construction of f abric shade structures; such firms shall m eet the following minimum requirements: A.A single manufacturer must design engineer, manufacture the steel and f abric and erect the fabric shade structures including foundations. B.All manufacturers must hav e at least ten (10) years of experience in the design, engineering, manufacture, and installation of structures with similar. C.The manufacturers shall demonstrate that it has a staff of experienced fabric structure installation personnel who will undertake the installation of each project. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify layout information for shade structures shown on the Drawings in relation to the property survey and existing structures and verify locations by field m easurements prior to construction. 1.6 WARRANTY 1. Manufacturer’s warranty shall be provided for a period of 10 years on fabric and 10 years on the structural integrity of the steel from date of substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Provide product by a manufacturer which meets or exceeds the requirements, outlined in this specification. B.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Superior Recreational Products or comparable product. •24'X12'X12 Hip Shade o L:24 x W:12 x H:12 o DOME: 1 o COLUMNS: QTY: 4 Ø5.0" 11-Ga, Embedded o RAFTER: Ø2.875" 12-Ga o ELBOW: Glide 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design framed fabric shade structures. 1.Size/Form: Size and form shall be as indicated on the drawings. A.The shade structure shall conform to the current adopted version of the International Building Code 2018 including local agency am endments and additions to the code. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 133133 B.To comply with International Building Code, Chapter 16 - Structural Design and Chapter 31 -Special Construction, including Texas Department of Insurance Revisions to the 2018 International Building Code. A.All shade structures shall be engineered and designed to meet design criteria of the project location. B.Steel Tubing 1.All fabricated steel shall be determined based on calculated engineering load. 2.All fabricated steel shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A-123. 3.All Steel used on this project needs to be new and accompanied by the mill certificates. 4.All non-hollow structural shapes comply with ASTM A-36, unless otherwise noted. 5.All hollow structural steel shapes shall be cold formed HSS ASTM A-53 grade C, unless otherwise noted. 6.Plate products shall comply with ASTM A-36. 7.All steel is cleaned, degreased or etched to ensure proper adhesion of powder-coat in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. C.Finish 1.All steel components shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A-123 and powder- coated with a minimum 4 mils thickness. Powder-coating shall meet or exceed ASTM standards for Adhesion, Hardness, Impact, Flexibility, Overbake Resistance, and Salt Spray Resistance a.Color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors. D.Welding: 1.All shop welded connections of the shade structure shall be designed and performed in strict accordance with the requirements of the “American Welding Society” (AW S) Specifications. Structural welds shall be m ade in compliance with the requirements of the “Prequalified” welded joints where applicable and by certified welders. No onsite or field welding shall be permitted. E.Hardware: All hardware shall be 316-A4 Stainless Steel and shall be determined based on calculated engineering load. 1.Provide hardware to allow for quick release of fabric shade. F.Fabric Systems: 1.UV Shade Fabric: a.UV Shade fabric is m ade of a UV stabilized high-density polyethylene. b.Fabric shall meet the following fire resistance tests: 1)ASTM E84 2)NFPA 701-97 (W eathered of un-weathered) 2.Stitching & Thread: a.All sewing threads are to be double stitched. b.Thread shall be manufactured from 100% expanded PTFE; m ildew resistant exterior approved thread. Thread shall meet or exceed the following: 1)Flexible temperature range 2)Very low shrinkage factor 3)Extremely high strength, durable in outdoor climates 4)Resists flex and abrasion of fabric 5) Unaffected by cleaning agents; acid rain, m ildew, salt water and rot resistant, unaffected by most industrial pollutants 6)Treated for prolonged exposure to the sun 3.Fabric colors shall be determined from the standard colors available from the manufacturer by the Architect. PART 3 EXECUT ION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Install framed fabric shade structure in accordance with manufacture’s written instructions. B.Foundations: 1.Footings shall be placed in accordance with and conform to delegated design engineered drawings. END OF SECTION 133133 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 11 00-1 SECTION 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for the clearing and grubbing as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 22 13.10 SITE GRADING 1.03 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specifications have the meanings ascribed to them A. Clearing and Grubbing – the clearing, grubbing, and stripping of objectionable matter including the removing and disposing of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project site by mechanical means. PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubble and other objectionable matter as indicated on Drawings, or as directed by the Owner. C. Trees, Tree Stumps and Tree Roots 1. Within Right-of-Way a. Area bounded by the lines two-feet (2’) behind back of curbs 1) Shall be removed to a minimum depth of two-feet (2’) below bottom of proposed road subgrade elevation. b. Area bounded by the lines two-feet (2’) behind back of curbs to Right-of Way line 1) Shall be removed to a minimum depth of two-feet (2’) below proposed finished grade or below natural grade, whichever is lower. 2. Beyond Right-of-Way a. Shall be removed to a minimum depth of two-feet (2’) below proposed finished grade or below natural grade, whichever is lower. D. Vegetation, Humus, and Objectionable Matter 1. Areas which underlie compacted backfill shall be stripped of all vegetation, humus and other objectionable matter encountered within the top six-inches (6") of the soil. a. This material, with the exception of objectionable matter, shall be stockpiled, if feasible, and reused as surface stabilization material. 2. Objectionable matter shall be determined by the Owner and shall become the property of the Contractor and disposed of in accordance with Local, State, and Federal regulations, unless otherwise instructed by the Owner. E. Holes remaining after removal of materials shall be backfilled in accordance with Section 31 22 13.10 SITE GRADING. 3.02 Disposal of Materials A. Onsite 1. The material shall be disposed of at a disposal site as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 2. The Contractor is responsible for the disposal of materials in accordance with all applicable Local, State, and Federal regulations. B. Offsite 1. The material shall be disposed of at a disposal site obtained by the Contractor. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 11 00-2 2. All material removed from site under this operation shall become the property of the Contractor's and therefore the Contractor’s responsibility for proper disposal. 3. The Contractor is responsible for the disposal of materials in accordance with all applicable Local, State, and Federal regulations. 3.03 Protection A. Existing Utilities 1. All existing utilities shall be identified and protected by the Contractor. 2. Damage to utilities shall be repaired by the Contractor at his sole expense as directed by the utility owner. B. Trees, Vegetation, Landscaping, and Other Features 1. That are designated to be preserved shall be protected by the Contractor. 2. Damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his sole expense as directed by the Owner of the item. 3. Do not park equipment, service equipment, store materials, or disturb the root area under the branches of trees designated for preservation. C. Benchmarks, monuments, and existing structures designated to remain shall be protected. 1. Damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his sole expense as directed by the Owner of the item. 3.04 Hazardous Materials A. If the Contractor encounters hazardous substances, industrial waste, other environmental pollutants, underground storage tanks, or conditions conducive to environmental damage, the Contractor shall immediately stop work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner’s representative in writing. B. Contractor shall not be responsible for or required to conduct any investigation, site monitoring, containment, cleanup, removal, restoration or other remedial work of any kind or nature (the “remedial work”) under any applicable level, State or Federal law, regulation or ordinance, or any judicial order. C. If the Contractor agrees in writing to commence and/or prosecute some or all of the remedial work, all costs and expenses, to include any extension of the contract time, of such remedial work shall be paid by the Owner to Contractor as additional compensation. 3.05 Archeological A. In the event that archeological material is encountered during clearing and grubbing activities, the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately and cease all work until notified by the Owner. 1. The Contract Time may be adjusted if the work on the project is delayed. 3.06 Contamination A. In the event that contaminated material is encountered during clearing and grubbing activities, the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately and cease all work in the contaminated area until notified by the Owner. 1. The Contract Time may be adjusted if the work on the project is delayed. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SITE GRADING 31 22 13.10-1 SECTION 31 22 13.10 SITE GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for site grading as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Sections. 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Site Grading – all areas beyond the right-of-way of roadways and access ways PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Fill A. Shall be of similar material as to the natural occurring material onsite and approved by the Owner. B. Shall be uniform as to material, density, and moisture content. C. Shall be free of large clods, large rocks, organic matter, and other objectionable material. D. In all cases material shall be free of construction materials (concrete rubble, pipe, fiberglass, asphalt material, metal, etc.) and trash material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Site Preparation A. Prior to site grading the site shall be cleared in accordance with Section 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. B. Unless specified otherwise on Drawings, the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than six-inches (6”). C. The loosened material shall be re-compacted with any fill material required for the project. 3.03 Placement and Compaction A. No fill that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow, shall be incorporated into a layer in that position; all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. B. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade and in layers not in excess of six-inches (6”) of un-compacted depth, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. C. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of the existing natural ground unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. D. The Owner may order test rolling to evaluate the uniformity of compaction. E. All irregularities, depressions, and soft spots which develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. 3.04 Excess Material A. Excess material from excavation that is not incorporated into the site as fill shall become the property of the Contractor, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. The Contractor is responsible for disposal of the excess material away from the project in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING 31 22 16.13-1 SECTION 31 22 16.13 ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for roadway subgrade shaping as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. ASTM D 698 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) PART 2 - PRODUCTS [NOT USED] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Prior to performing subgrade or base course work all utilities under pavement shall be inspected and tested prior to placement. 1. The Contractor may proceed at his/her own risk, knowing that any repairs required to utilities that requires the removal and replacement of the subgrade, base, and/or pavement surface in accordance with relevant specification will be completed at the Contractors sole expense. 3.02 Stripping and Excavation A. The site shall be cleared and grubbed in accordance with Section 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. B. Unless otherwise noted, remove existing trees, shrubs, fences, curb, gutter, sidewalk, drives, paving, pipe and structures within the graded area which interfere with new construction of finished grading. C. All suitable excavated materials shall be utilized, insofar as practicable, in constructing the required roadway sections or in uniformly widening embankments, flattening slopes, etc., as directed by the Owner. D. Unwanted roadway excavation and roadway excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him outside the limits of the right-of-way at a location suitable to the Owner. E. "Unsuitable" material encountered below subgrade elevation in roadway cuts, when declared unwanted by the Owner, shall be replaced as directed by the Owner with material from the roadway excavation or with other suitable material. F. Maintain moisture and density until covered by the subbase or base. G. Remove soft or wet areas found at any time, replace with suitable material, and recompact (esp. utility trenches). 3.03 Subgrade Preparation A. That area shown on the Drawings for roadway construction shall be cut to grade as indicated on the Drawings. B. Irregularities exceeding two-inches (2") in sixteen-feet (16') shall be corrected. C. Soft areas found at anytime shall be removed, replaced with acceptable material and compacted (esp. at utility trenches). D. The correct moisture density relationship shall be maintained. 3.04 Matching Grades at Right-of-Way Line A. Finished grade at the property line shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. The Owner may require a reasonable amount of filling on private property where the sidewalk grade is above the property elevation with permission from property owner. C. Use suitable material from the excavation. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING 31 22 16.13-2 D. Unless otherwise directed, cuts at right-of-way lines shall be made at a maximum slope of 3:1. 3.05 Drainage A. During construction, the roadbed and ditches shall be maintained in such condition as to insure proper drainage at all times, and ditches and channels shall be so constructed and maintained as to avoid damage to the roadway section. B. All slopes that, in the judgment of the Owner, require variation shall be accurately shaped, and care shall be taken that no material is loosened below the required slopes. C. All breakage and slides shall be removed and disposed of as directed. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CHANNEL SHAPING 31 22 16.23-1 SECTION 31 22 16.23 CHANNEL SHAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for channel shaping as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 22 13.10 SITE GRADING B. 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENTS 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Where shown on the Drawings, selected materials shall be utilized in the formation channels, in which case the work shall be performed in such manner and sequence that suitable materials may be selected, removed separately and deposited within limits and at elevations required. B. Material for fill shall be shall be in accordance with Section 31 22 13.10 SITE GRADING or Section 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. Excavated slopes shall be finished in conformance with the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. B. When completed, the average plane of slopes shall conform to the slopes indicated on the Drawings and no point on completed slopes shall vary from the designated slopes by more than 0.5 foot measured at right angles to the slope, unless otherwise specified. C. In no case shall any portion of the slope encroach on the roadbed. D. The tops of excavated slopes and the end of excavation shall be rounded as shown on the Drawings. E. All suitable materials removed from the excavation shall be used, insofar as practicable, in the formation of embankments in accordance with the specification, Section 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENTS, or shall be otherwise utilized or satisfactorily disposed of as indicated on Drawings, or as directed, and completed work shall conform to the established alignment, grades and cross sections. F. During construction, the channel shall be kept drained, insofar as practicable, and the work shall be prosecuted in a neat workmanlike manner. G. Unwanted channel excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor and removed from the site and properly disposed of in accordance with Local, State, and Federal regulations. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TRENCHING 31 23 16.13-1 SECTION 31 23 16.13 TRENCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for trenching as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item(s) below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. Part 1926, Subpart P – Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Interpretations B. Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C – Trench Safety 1.03 Submittals A. Submit a Trench Safety Program specifically for the construction of trench excavation and designed in accordance with Local, State, and Federal standards and regulations for trench safety laws. 1.Notice: Review of the safety program by the Owner will only be in regard to compliance with this specification and will not constitute, in any form, approval by the Owner nor relieve the Contractor of any obligations under Local, State, or Federal trench safety regulations. B. Construction and shop drawings containing deviations from local, state, and federal standards and regulations or special designs shall be sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer of the State of Texas and retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. A trench shall be defined as a narrow excavation (in relation to its depth) made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than fifteen feet (15’). B. Trenches as used herein, shall apply to any excavation in which structures, utilities, or other items as a result of construction are placed or removed regardless of depth. C. Trench Safety Program as used herein, shall be a written and detailed plan that is developed by the Contractor with all methods and products used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project and includes all information required an in accordance with Local, State (Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C – Trench Safety, but not limited to), and Federal (Part 1926, Subpart P – Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Interpretations, but not limited to) standards and regulations. D. The Trench Safety System shall include, but are not limited to, sloping, sheeting, trench boxes or trench shields, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, dewatering or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. 1.05 Indemnification A. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its employees and agents, from any and all damages, costs (including, without limitation, legal fees, court costs, and the cost of investigation), judgments or claims by anyone for injury or death of person(s) resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract. B. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner, its employees and agents, in case the Owner, or its employees or agents, is negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety, including, but not limited to safety program and design reviews, inspections, failures to issue stop work orders, and the hiring of the Contractor. C. Review of the safety program by the Owner will only be in regard to compliance with this specification and will not constitute approval by the Owner nor relieve the Contractor of any obligations under Local, State, or Federal regulations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 All products shall be in accordance with the Trench Safety Program. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TRENCHING 31 23 16.13-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, 29 CFR, in accordance with Local and State regulations, and industry standards. B. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and not the Owner, to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. 3.02 Installation A. Install and maintain the trench safety system in accordance with the Trench Safety Program and all Local, State, and Federal provisions. B. Install specially designed trench safety systems in accordance with the Contractors trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditions identified in the program. C. A competent person, as identified in the Contractors Trench Safety Program, shall verify that trench safety equipment are certified for the actual installation conditions. 3.03 Inspection A. The Contractor or Contractors independently retained consultant, shall make daily inspections of the trench safety system(s) to ensure that the installed system(s) and operations meet the requirements of the Trench Safety Program, and Local, State, and Federal regulations. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins, slides, or trench safety system failure is apparent, the Contractor shall immediately stop work in and around the trench and move all personnel and individuals to a safe location until the necessary precautions have been taken by the Contractor to safeguard personnel entering the trench. C. The Contractor must maintain a permanent record of daily inspections on site. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EMBANKMENT 31 24 13.10-1 SECTION 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for the furnishing, placing, and compacting materials for the construction of roadways, embankments, levees, dikes, or any designated section of the roadway where additional material is needed as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 107 “Embankment” B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 204 “Sprinkling” C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 210 “Rolling” D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 216 “Proof Rolling” E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure TEX-104-E F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure TEX-106-E G. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure TEX-107-E H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure TEX-115-E 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. In addition to the requirement in the excavation items of the specifications covering the general selection and utilization of materials to improve the roadbed, embankments shall be constructed in proper sequence to receive the select material layers shown on the Drawings, with such modifications as may be directed by the Owner. B. The layer of embankment immediately preceding the upper layer of select material shall be constructed to the proper section and grade within a tolerance of not more than one-tenth of a foot (0.10’) from the established section and grade when properly compacted and finished to receive the select material layer. 2.02 Materials A. Shall be approved on-site material capable of forming a stable embankment. B. Material shall be from on-site excavation free from vegetation or other objectionable material unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Offsite Material 1. When offsite material is to be used, the Contractor must comply with all local, state, and federal laws, ordinances, and regulations. 2. The Contractor must demonstrate and satisfy to the Owner that all permits, contracts, and legal documentation are in place prior to obtaining the material. 3. Prior to obtaining materials from offsite the Contractor shall provide all required material tests to analyze the material to insure compliance with specifications. a. When on-site excavation material is to be used and additional material from off-site is to be incorporated the materials shall be similar in properties. D. Water 1. Shall be free of objectionable materials. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EMBANKMENT 31 24 13.10-2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Prior to placing embankment the area to be covered shall be stripped of all vegetation in accordance with Section 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. C. Equipment shall be applicable to conduct the work as described in this specification or as specified on the Drawings. D. Washes, gulleys, wet areas, and yielding areas shall be corrected as directed by the Owner. E. Trees, stumps, roots, vegetation or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in embankment. F. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings the surface of the ground which is to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to depth of not less than six-inches (6”). 1. The loosened material shall be re-compacted with the new embankment as hereinafter specified. G. Each layer of embankment shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content before beginning compaction. 3.02 Placement A. Embankment shall be placed in layers not to exceed six-inch (6”) un-compacted depth and the full width of the embankment, unless otherwise noted. 1. Where embankment is adjacent to a hillside or old roadbed, the existing slope shall be cut in steps to not less than the vertical depth of an un-compacted layer of six-inches (6"). B. The fill material shall be placed from the low side and compacted. C. Each layer shall overlap the existing embankment by at least the width indicated by the embankment slope. D. Where layers of unlike materials are adjacent to each other, each layer shall be featheredged for at least 100 feet or the material shall be so mixed as to prevent abrupt changes in the soil. E. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a layer in that position, but all such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar methods. F. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing, disking or similar methods to the end that a uniform material of uniform density is secured in each layer. G. Except as otherwise required by the Drawings, all embankments shall be constructed in layers approximately parallel to the finished grade and each layer shall be so constructed as to provide a uniform slope of quarter-inch (1/4”) per foot from the centerline of the embankment to the outside. 3.03 Compaction A. Each layer shall be compacted to the required density by rolling in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. B. Prior to and in conjunction with the rolling operation, each layer shall be brought to the moisture content necessary in accordance with TxDOT Item 204 to obtain the required density C. Prior to and in conjunction with the rolling operation, each layer shall be kept leveled with suitable equipment to insure uniform compaction over the entire layer. D. Rolling shall be longitudinally, begin at the sides, and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least 1/2 the width of the roller. E. All irregularities, depressions, weak or soft spots which develop shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. 3.04 Density Control A. Laboratory Tests shall determine the maximum dry density (Da) and optimum moisture content (Wopt) by means of TxDOT TEX-114-E B. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with TxDOT TEX-115-E and on Table 2: Table 2 Field Density Control Requirements Density Moisture ContentDescriptionTEX-115-E PI ≤ 15 ≥ 98% Da 15 < PI ≤ 35 ≥ 98% Da and ≤ 102% Da ≥ Wopt Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EMBANKMENT 31 24 13.10-3 PI > 35 ≥ 95% Da and ≤ 100% Da ≥ Wopt C. After each layer of earth embankment or select material is complete, testing as required by the Owner will be made by the Contractor. D. If the material fails to meet the density specified, the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction, and the compaction method shall be altered on subsequent work to obtain specified density. E. Such procedure shall be determined by, and subject to, the approval of the Owner. F. The Owner may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction of the embankment layers. 1. Proof Rolling shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 216 3.05 Maintenance of Moisture and Reworking A. Should the subgrade, due to any reason or cause, lose the required stability, density or moisture, before the pavement structure is placed, it shall be re-compacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Excessive loss of moisture in the subgrade shall be prevented by sprinkling, sealing or covering with a subsequent layer or granular material. C. Excessive loss of moisture shall be construed to exist when the subgrade soil moisture content is more than two-percent (2%) below the optimum. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SLURRY SEAL 32 01 13.61-1 SECTION 32 01 13.61 SLURRY SEAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and placement of slurry seal as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 300 “Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions” B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-200-F, Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-203-F, Sand Equivalent Test D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-410-A, Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate Using the Los Angeles Machine E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-411-A, Soundness of Aggregate Using Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4600, Hydraulic Cement G. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6350, Lime and Lime Slurry H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Bituminous Rated Source Quality Catalog (BRSQC) 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Asphalt Emulsion A. The emulsified asphalt shall be type SS-1h or CRS-2H in conformance with TxDOT Item 300 with a four- percent (4%) Latex additive milled into the emulsion by the manufacturer. 2.02 Aggregate A. The aggregate shall consist of natural or manufactured sand, slag, crushed fines, or a combination thereof from a single source meeting the requirements of Table 1 and Table 2. B. Unless noted on the Drawings the aggregated shall be a minimum “B” Surface Aggregate Classification (SAC) in accordance with TxDOT Bituminus Rated Source Quality Catalog (BRSQC). C. The amount of mineral filler added to the mix shall be included when determining the total minus no. 200 aggregate fraction. D. The aggregate shall be clean and free of vegetable matter and other deleterious substances. Table 1 Aggregate Gradation Requirements Sieve Size Tex-200-F, Part II (Washed) Cumulative % Passing 3/8”100 # 4 90 – 100 # 8 65 – 90 # 16 45 – 70 # 30 30 – 50 # 50 18 – 30 # 100 10 – 21 # 200 5 – 15 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SLURRY SEAL 32 01 13.61-2 Table 2 Aggregate Quality Requirements Property TxDOT Test Method Requirement Magnesium Sulfate Soundness 1, % maximum Tex-411-A 30 Sand Equivalent Value, % minimum Tex-203-F 70 Los Angeles Abrasion, % maximum Tex-410-A 30 1 Use design gradation for soundness test 2.03 Mineral Filler A. Mineral filler shall be one (1) of the following: 1. Hydraulic Cement in accordance with TxDOT DMS-4600 2. Hydrated Lime in accordance with TxDOT DMS-6350 B. Mineral filler shall be free of lumps. C. The type and amount of mineral filler shall be determined by laboratory mix design and shall be considered part of the aggregate gradation. 2.04 Water A. All water used with the slurry seal mixture shall be potable and free from harmful solubles. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. All equipment, tools, and machines used in the performance of this work shall be maintained in satisfactory working condition. B. Mixer 1. The slurry seal mixing machine shall be a continuous flow mixing unit and be capable of delivering water and also capable to deliver accurately a predetermined proportion of aggregate and asphalt emulsion to the mixing chamber and to discharge the thoroughly mixed product on a continuous basis. 2. The aggregate shall be prewetted immediately prior to mixing with the emulsion. 3. The mixing unit of the mixing chamber shall be capable of thoroughly blending all ingredients together. 4. No violent mixing shall be permitted. 5. The mixing machine shall be equipped with an approved fines feeder that provides an accurate metering device or method to introduce a predetermined amount of mineral filler into the mixer at the same time and location that the aggregate is fed. 6. The fines feeder shall be used whenever added mineral filler is a part of the aggregate blend. 7. The mixing machine shall be equipped with a water pressure system and fog type spray bar, adequate for complete fogging of the surface preceding spreading equipment, with a maximum application rate of 0.05 gallons per square yard. 8. A calibrated control for aggregate and asphalt emulsion shall be provided and capable of proportioning accurately the materials. 9. The machine shall be capable of a minimum speed of sixty-feet (60’) per minute and shall not be allowed to exceed 180 feet per minute while in operation. 10. Sufficient machine storage capacity to mix properly and apply a minimum of five (5) tons of the slurry shall be provided. C. Spreading Equipment Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SLURRY SEAL 32 01 13.61-3 1. Attached to the mixer machine shall be a mechanical type squeegee distributor equipped with flexible material in contact with the surface to prevent loss of slurry from the distributor. 2. It shall be maintained so as to prevent loss of slurry on varying grades and crown by adjustments to assure uniform spread. 3. There shall be a steering device and a flexible strike-off. D. Auxiliary Equipment 1. Hand squeegees, shovels, and hand equipment shall be provided as necessary to perform work. 3.03 Job Mix Proportions A. The Owner shall approve all slurry seal materials and methods prior to mixing and application. B. The Contractor shall make trial batches for evaluation at his expense to determine the final blend of mineral aggregate and residual asphalt. C. The proportions of the mixture to be used shall be as follows unless variations are approved by the Owner: 1. Aggregate a. The combined mineral aggregate shall conform to the gradation of Table 1. 2. Emulsified Asphalt a. The amount of asphalt emulsion to be blended with the aggregate shall be such to result in a residual asphalt content of 6.0 to 9.0 percent by weight of dry aggregate. 3. Mineral Filler a. Mineral filler shall be 0.5 to 3.0 percent by weight of the dry aggregate. 4. Water a. A minimum amount of water shall be added as necessary to produce the proper consistency and obtain a fluid and homogeneous mixture. 3.04 Construction A. Surface Cleaning 1. Immediately prior to applying slurry seal, the surface shall be cleaned of all loose material, silt spots, vegetation, and other objectionable material. 2. All existing pavement markings shall be removed by the Contractor by an approved method by the Owner. 3. Any depressions, large cracks, etc., shall be patched before applying the slurry seal surface. B. Placement 1. The surface shall be fogged with water directly preceding the spreader. 2. The slurry mixture shall be of the desired consistency when deposited on the surface and no additional elements shall be added. 3. Total time of mixing shall not exceed four (4) minutes. 4. A sufficient amount of slurry shall be carried in all parts of the spreader at all times so that complete coverage is obtained, and the maximum allowable speed shall be 180 feet per minute. 5. The rate of application of the slurry seal shall be between ten (10) and twenty (20) pounds per square yard based on dry aggregate weight. 6. Approved squeegees shall be used to spread slurry in non-accessible areas to the slurry mixer. 7. Excess buildup of slurry on longitudinal or transverse joints will not be permitted. 8. The slurry seal surface shall be rolled by a pneumatic roller having a tire pressure of fifty (50) pounds per square inch. 9. The paved area shall be subjected to a minimum of five (5) passes with the roller. C. Weather Limitations 1. The slurry shall not be applied when either atmospheric and/or pavement temperature is 55° F and falling but may be applied when either the atmospheric and/or pavement temperature is 50° F and rising. 2. Placement shall not occur when temperatures below 32° F is forecasted within twenty-four (24) hours. 3. Placement shall not occur when puddles of water are present, foggy conditions, or rain may occur prior to the material curing. 4. The slurry shall not be applied during period of abnormally high relative humidity. 5. Any slurry that is damaged or washed away due to rain or other sources of water shall be removed and cleaned by the Contractor at his sole expense. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SLURRY SEAL 32 01 13.61-4 3.05 Opening to Traffic A. The pavement shall be opened to traffic once the slurry seal has cured sufficiently to withstand marring and tearing, and until no water will be pumped to the surface. B. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that all construction traffic allowed on pavement open to the public will be subject to the State laws governing traffic on highways. C. If the surface mars, tears, or deteriorates prior to final acceptance it will be the Contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense to the satisfaction of the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS 32 01 13.62-1 SECTION 32 01 13.62 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for asphalt surface treatments as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 210 “Rolling” B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 300 “Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions” C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 302 “Aggregates for Surface Treatments” D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-922-K, Calibrating Asphalt Distribution Equipment. 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Pre-Approved Products A. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. 2.02 Aggregate A. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 302. B. Single Course 1. Shall be Class A, Type A, (Type PA for precoated aggregate), Grade 4. C. Multiple Course 1. Shall be Class A, Type A, (Type PA for precoated aggregate), Grade 3 and Grade 4 aggregate will be required as noted in the Drawings and Specifications. 2.03 Asphaltic Materials A. Shall be AC-5 in summer or AC-3 in winter or other approved material in accordance with TxDOT Item 300, or as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. All storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks and distributors used in storing or handling asphalt materials shall be kept clean and in good operating condition at all times, and they shall be operated in such manner that there will be no contamination of the asphalt materials with foreign material. B. Mixing Plants 1. Shall be capable of meeting the requirements of TxDOT Item 302. C. Distributor 1. General Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS 32 01 13.62-2 a. Furnish a distributor that will apply the asphalt material uniformly at the specified rate or as directed. 2. Transverse Variance Rate a. When a transverse variance rate is shown on the Drawings, ensure that the nozzles outside the wheel paths will output a predetermined percentage more of asphalt material by volume than the nozzles over the wheel paths. 3. Calibration a. Transverse Distribution 1) Furnish a distributor test report, no more than one (1) year old, documenting that the variation in output for individual nozzles of the same size does not exceed ten percent (10%) when tested at the greatest shot width in accordance with TxDOT Tex-922-K, Part III. 2) Include the following documentation on the test report: a) The serial number of the distributor b) A method that identifies the actual nozzle set used in the test c) The fan width of the nozzle set at a twelve-inch (12”) bar height 3) When a transverse variance rate is required, perform the test using the type and grade of asphalt material to be used on the project. 4) The Owner may verify the transverse rate and distribution at any time. 5) If verification does not meet the requirements, correct deficiencies and furnish a new test report. b. Tank Volume 1) Furnish a volumetric calibration and strap stick for the distributor tank in accordance with TxDOT Tex-922-K, Part I. 2) Calibrate the distributor within the previous five (5) years of the date first used on the project. 3) The Owner may require verification of the calibration accuracy in accordance with TxDOT Tex-922-K, Part II. 4. Computerized Distributor a. When paying for asphalt material by weight, the Owner may allow use of the computerized distributor display to verify application rates. b. Verify application rate accuracy at a frequency acceptable to the Owner. D. Aggregate Spreader 1. Use a continuous-feed, self-propelled spreader to apply aggregate uniformly at the specified rate or as directed. E. Rollers 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, furnish light pneumatic tire rollers in accordance with TxDOT Item 210, “Rolling.” F. Broom 1. Furnish rotary, self-propelled brooms. G. Asphalt Storage and Handling Equipment 1. When the Drawings or the Owner allows storage tanks, furnish a thermometer in each tank to indicate the asphalt temperature continuously. 2. Keep equipment clean and free of leaks. 3. Keep asphalt material free of contamination. H. Aggregate Haul Trucks 1. Unless otherwise authorized, use trucks of uniform capacity to deliver the aggregate. 2. Provide documentation showing measurements and calculation in cubic yards. 3. Clearly mark the calibrated level. 4. Truck size may be limited when shown on the Drawings. I. Digital Measuring Instrument 1. Furnish a vehicle with a calibrated digital-measuring instrument accurate to ±6 feet per mile. 2. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of asphalt material in all of the heating equipment and in the distributor, for determining the rate at which it is Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS 32 01 13.62-3 applied, and for determining the rate at which it is applied, and for securing uniformity at the junction of two distributor loads. a. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain in good working order a recording thermometer at the storage-heating unit at all times. 3.03 Weather A. General 1. Material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Owner, are not suitable. B. Standard Temperature Limitations 1. Surface treatment shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 60° F and is falling, but it may be applied when the air temperature is above 50° F and is rising, the air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. 2. Surface treatment shall not be applied when the surface temperature is below 60° F. C. Polymer-Modified Asphalt Cement Temperature Limitations 1. Surface treatment shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 70° F, or when the air temperature is above 80° F and is falling, the air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. 2. Surface treatment shall not be applied when the surface temperature is below 70° F. D. Asphalt Material Designed for Winter Use 1. When winter application is allowed the Owner will approve the air and surface temperature requirements. 3.04 Surface Preparation A. The area to be treated shall be cleaned of dirt, dust or other deleterious matter by sweeping or other approved methods. B. Vegetation shall be removed from the edge of the pavement. C. All raised pavement markers shall be removed by approved method. 1. Any damage to the pavement shall be repaired. D. Utility covers, concrete, and other items shall be protected from being coated or splashed. E. Asphaltic material shall not be placed, lapped, or splashed onto adjacent structures. 3.05 Asphalt Placement A. Asphaltic Material 1. Asphaltic material shall be applied on the cleaned surface by an approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the material in the quantity specified, evenly and smoothly, under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. 2. If it is found necessary by the Owner, the surface shall be lightly sprinkled just prior to the application of asphaltic material. 3. After beginning the work, should the yield on the asphaltic material appear to be in error, the distributor shall be calibrated in a manner satisfactory to the Owner before proceeding. 4. Asphaltic material may be applied for the full width of the seal coat in one (1) application unless the width exceeds twenty-six feet (26’). 5. Asphaltic material shall not be applied until immediate covering with aggregate is assured. 6. No traffic or hauling will be permitted over the freshly applied asphalt material. 7. The asphaltic material shall be applied at the approximate rate indicated on Drawings or if not indicated on the Drawings shall be within the limits of the 0.15 to 0.30 gallons of asphalt per square yard or as directed by the Owner. B. Temperature 1. The temperature of application shall be within the limits recommended in TxDOT Item 300, with that being 2200 F to 3000 F for AC-3 and 2750 F to 3500 F for AC-5. 2. The Owner will select the temperature of application based on the temperature-viscosity relationship that will permit application of the asphalt within the limits recommended in TxDOT Item 300. C. Non-Uniform Applications 1. Application shall cease if it is not uniform. D. Aggregate Placement Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS 32 01 13.62-4 1. Aggregate shall be immediately and uniformly applied and spread by an approved self-propelled continuous feed aggregate spreader, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or authorized by the Owner in writing. 2. The cover material must be evenly and accurately distributed to the end that an even and smooth surface is obtained. 3. Immediately after the aggregate has been applied, the surface shall be adequately raked to insure uniformity. 4. The aggregate shall be applied at the approximate rate indicated on Drawings or as directed by the Owner. E. Patching 1. Prior to rolling all holes or failures in the seal coat surface shall be repaired by use of additional asphalt and aggregate and all fat or bleeding surfaces shall be covered with approved cover material in such manner that the asphaltic material will not adhere to or be picked up on the wheels of vehicles. F. Rolling 1. As soon as proper distribution of aggregate can be obtained, the surface shall be pneumatic having a gross weight of not less than four (4) tons, and not more than ten (10) tons. 2. The surface shall be rolled a minimum of five (5) passes. 3. The Contractor shall so arrange his work that the rolling of all aggregate applied that day shall be completed on the same day. G. Brooming 1. After rolling the surface shall be broomed as soon as aggregate has sufficiently bonded to remove excess material. 2. The Contractor will be responsible for the removal of all excess material. 3. Remove all loose aggregate until work is accepted to prevent hazards to traffic. H. Final Acceptance 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until the work is accepted by the Owner I. Multiple-Course Surface Treatments 1. Where multiple courses are specified, each course shall be applied in the manner specified for a single course. 2. Multiple courses shall be applied within the same day, or immediately thereafter, and prior to opening the roadway to traffic. 3. The rates of application of the aggregate and asphaltic material shall be as follows or as otherwise specified: a. 1st Course 1) Asphalt Cement – O.2 gal/s.y. 2) Aggregate – 1:80 Grade 3 b. 2nd Course 1) Asphalt Cement - 0.16 gal/s.y. 2) Aggregate – 1:100 Grade 4 c. 3rd Course 1) Asphalt Cement – 0.16 gal/s.y. 2) Aggregate – 1:100 Grade 4 3.06 Opening to Traffic A. The pavement shall be opened to traffic once the material has cured sufficiently to withstand traffic without rutting or damage to the surface. B. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that all construction traffic allowed on pavement open to the public will be subject to the State laws governing traffic on highways. C. If the surface ruts, is damaged, or deteriorates prior to final acceptance it will be the Contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense to the satisfaction of the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 32 11 00-1 SECTION 32 11 00 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required, but not limited to, the furnishing and placement of subgrade and base course(s) as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE B. 32 11 13.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE C. 32 11 23.23 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Substitution of Base Course: 1. Product substitution submittal shall be in writing and submitted fourteen (14) working days prior to commencing construction of the base course and contain the following information: a. Product information conforming the requirements of the related Section, b. Design of Substituted Base Course indicating equivalence to the Base Course as indicated on the Drawings, c. Indicating other Bid Items affected by such a proposed substitution. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Subgrade A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 1. If no Subgrade Treatment is indicated in the Drawings the treatment shall be as follows: a. Sand Material 1) Shall be as indicated on the Drawings. a) If not indicated on the Drawings, shall be Cement treated in accordance with Section 32 11 13.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE, unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. b. Other 1) Shall be as indicated on the Drawings. a) If not indicated on the Drawings, shall be Lime treated in accordance with Section 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE, unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. 2.02 Base Course A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings 1. Aggregate Base Course a. Shall be in accordance with Section 32 11 23.13 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Prior to performing subgrade or base course work all utilities under pavement shall be inspected and tested prior to placement. 1. The Contractor may proceed at his/her own risk, knowing that any repairs required to utilities that requires the removal and replacement of the subgrade, base, and/or pavement surface in accordance with relevant specification will be completed at the Contractors sole expense. 3.02 Subgrade Treatment A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the applicable specification for the Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 32 11 00-2 product required. 3.03 Base Course A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the applicable specification for the product required. 3.04 Substitution of Drawing Indicated Subgrade and/or Base Course Material A. General 1. Substitution of Subgrade and/or Base Course materials, other than as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications is allowed subject to: a. A combination of strength and thickness that is equivalent to the Subgrade and/or Base Course strength and thickness as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications, b. Lines and Grades of the roadway surface must be maintained as indicated on the Drawings, including allowances for utilities, c. Owner and Engineer approval. 2. The Contractor may request the Subgrade and/or Base Course product to be substituted in accordance with Part 1 Section 1.03 of this specification. B. Effects of Substitution 1. Proposed Utilities and Existing Utilities a. If the Subgrade and/or Base Course product being substituted changes the depth required for the Subgrade and/or Base Course and as a result the horizontal and/or vertical location of utilities, as indicated on the Drawings, or determined in the field, are required to be adjusted, then: 1) The Contractor will be solely responsible for all costs associated with the changes including but not limited to; Designing, Drawing adjustments, Drawing reproduction, Specifications, Contract, Approvals, and incidentals, and, 2. Lines and Grades a. Roadway 1) If the Subgrade and/or Base Course product being substituted changes the depth required for the Subgrade and/or Base Course it is not to affect the lines and grades of the roadway and shall be maintained as indicated on the Drawings. b. Excavation 1) If the substituted Subgrade and/or Base Course product changes the depth required for the Subgrade and/or Base Course and in turn affects the quantities of existing materials to be excavated and/or filled, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to determine and to ensure that the project can be completed as per the Contract and in accordance with the Lines and Grades as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor will be solely responsible for all costs associated with the changes including but not limited to: Additional labor, materials, equipment, maintenance, disposal, and all incidental expenses required to perform the changes. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-1 SECTION 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing, mixing, compacting of Lime Treated Subgrade as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 204 “Sprinkling” B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 210 “Rolling” C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 260 “Lie Treatment (Road-Mixed) D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-101-E Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-103-E Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-115-E Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials G. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-121-E Soil-Lime Testing H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6350, Lime and Lime Slurry 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Test reports shall be as follows unless noted otherwise: 1. Submit within three (3) working days after the test is completed to the following: a. Owner, b. As directed by the Owner. 2. All test reports shall clearly indicate the following information: a. Location of area tested by the following, 1) Station, 2) Distance from Center Line, 3) Travel lane, 4) Or as otherwise specified b. Date, c. Company whom performed test, d. Person by who performed test by one of the following: 1) Name, 2) Initials, 3) Employee identification number, e. Material tested, f. Test used, g. Test values obtained, h. Indicate Pass or Fail in accordance with the Specification(s) and Drawing(s) requirements, i. Person with the testing company who has reviewed and approves the test results by all of the following: 1) Printed name 2) Signature 3) License number Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Soil A. Soil shall consist of Owner approved material, free from vegetation or other objectionable matter, encountered in the roadbed section and other acceptable material used in the preparation of the roadbed in accordance with this specification. 2.02 Lime A. In accordance with TxDOT Item 260. 2.03 Water A. Water shall be free from deleterious contaminants and other objectionable materials. B. Source of water shall be approved by the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime treated mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of lime, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. C. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work shall be on the project and approved by the Owner prior to the beginning of construction operations. 2. All machinery, tools, and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. 3. The Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment to enable continuous execution of the work and its completion in the required number of working days. 4. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be operated by experienced and capable workmen and shall be that necessary to provide a cement treatment meeting the requirements herein specified. B. Transportation Equipment 1. Shall be capable of hauling the material in a method recognized by the industry as being satisfactory for the material being transported. 2. Shall be of type recommended by manufacturer of product(s). 3. Equipment shall be in compliance with local, state, and federal laws and regulations. C. Rollers 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. D. Storage Facility 1. Material shall be stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until immediately before distribution. 2. If storage bins are used, they shall be completely enclosed. 3. Material in bags shall be stored in weatherproof buildings with adequate protection from ground dampness. E. Lime Slurry Equipment 1. Slurry tanks shall be equipped with agitation devices to slurry lime on the project or other approved location. F. Pulverization Equipment 1. Provide pulverization equipment that: a. Cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth with cutters that will plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-3 b. Provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times. c. Uniformly mixes the materials. 3.03 Material Transportation A. General 1. All material shall be transported in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. B. Truck 1. Each truck shall have the weight of lime determined on certified scales. 2. All exit ports are to be sealed at the plant. C. Bags 1. Each bag shall bear the manufacturer's certified weight. 2. Bags varying more than five-percent (5%) from that weight may be rejected and the average weight of bags in any shipment, as shown by weighing ten-percent (10%), with a minimum of five (5), of the bags taken at random from each pallet, shall not be less than the manufacturer's certified weight. 3.04 Preparation of Roadbed A. General 1. Before other construction operations are commenced, the roadbed shall be graded and shaped as required to construct the lime treatment for material in place in conformance with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross section shown on the Drawings. 2. Unsuitable soil or material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable soil. 3. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support without displacing the construction equipment and the compaction hereinafter specified. 4. Soft or yielding subgrade shall be corrected and made stable before construction proceeds. B. Pulverization 1. The soil shall be pulverized so that 100% of the material passes the two and one-half-inch (2-1/2”) sieve when tested from the roadway in the roadway condition by TxDOT Tex-101-E. 3.05 Placement A. General 1. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of lime, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. B. Application 1. General a. Lime shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. b. Lime amount to be used is to be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, if not on the Drawings. 1) Any rates indicated on the Drawings are the result of preliminary tests and shall be verified. 2) Application rate may be varied by the Owner, if conditions warrant. c. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, the lime operation shall not be started when the air temperature is below 40º F and falling, but may be started when the air temperature is above 35º F and rising. 1) The temperature will be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. 2) Lime shall not be placed when weather conditions in the opinion of the Owner are unsuitable. C. Method 1. General a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, lime shall be applied at a rate in pounds of dry lime per square yards, in the form of a slurry. 2. Slurry Method a. The Lime shall be mixed with water to form a slurry with a solids content approved by the Owner. 1) Commercial Lime Slurry shall be delivered to the project in slurry form at or above the Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-4 minimum dry solids content approved by the Owner. 2) The distribution of lime at the rate(s) required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper lime content has been secured. 3. Dry Method a. Dry placing is not allowed unless approved by the Owner and: 1) The lime is distributed by an approved spreader at the specified rate or as directed by the Owner. 2) The lime is distributed at a uniform rate and in such a manner as to reduce the scattering of lime by the wind. b. The material shall be sprinkled as approved by the Owner. c. The distribution of lime at the rate(s) required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper lime content has been secured. d. Lime shall be applied to the roadway and water and mixing shall commence to permit uniform and intimate mixture of soil and cement and it shall not exceed the specified optimum moisture content for the soil-lime mixture. 3.06 Delivery Certification A. Certification of lime quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. B. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of dry hydrated lime. 3.07 Mixing A. General 1. Mixing shall begin within six (6) hours of lime application. 2. During the interval of time between applications and mixing, hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of six (6) hours or more or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be accepted for payment. B. Initial Mixing 1. The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved equipment, and the mixing continued until, in the opinion of the Owner, a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free from all clods or lumps. 2. Materials containing plastic clays or other material which will not readily mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of the lime application, brought to the proper moisture content and left to cure one (1) to four (4) days as directed by the Owner. 3. During the curing period, the material shall be kept moist as directed. C. Final Mixing 1. After the required curing time, the material shall be uniformly mixed by approved methods. 2. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, they shall be reduced in size by raking, blading, planning, harrowing, scarifying or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that, when all nonslaking aggregates retained on the 3/4” sieve are removed, the remainder of the material shall meet the following requirements in Table 1 when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-101-E, Part III: Table 1 Gradation Requirements Sieve Size Minimum Percent (%) Passing 1-3/4”100 3/4”85 #4 60 3.08 Compaction A. General 1. Prior to the beginning of compaction, the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth. 2. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing and in no case later than twenty-four (24) hours after final mixing. 3. Compaction shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. 4. Bring each layer to the moisture content required. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-5 a. At the start of compaction, the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in unpulverized soil lumps, based on over-dry weights, shall not be below or more than two (2) percentage points above the specified optimum moisture content and shall be less than that quantity which will cause the soil-lime mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. b. When necessary, sprinkle the material in accordance with TxDOT Item 204. 5. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) the width of the roller unit. 6. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. 7. Offset alternate trips of the roller. 8. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH, or as directed. 9. When the uncompacted soil-lime mixture is wetted by rain so that the average moisture content exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction, the entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole expense of the Contractor. 10. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density, stability, or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. 11. Continue work until specification requirements are met. 12. Use mechanical tamps in areas inaccessible to rollers. 13. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one (1) operation, the previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated and the next layer mixed with lime as previously specified. a. The first layer of the material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed with the underlying material. 14. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the Drawings shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. 15. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface, upon completion, shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 16. After each section is completed, tests as required by the Owner will be made by the Contractor. B. Density Control 1. All testing to ensure density requirements shall be completed by a testing facility that is capable of performing all the required tests and is approved by the Owner. 2. Determine the moisture content in the mixture at the beginning of and during compaction in accordance with TxDOT Tex-103-E. 3. Compact to a minimum ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum density determined in accordance with Tex-121-E, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 4. The Contractor shall determine roadway density at a frequency of one (1) test per one-hundred feet (100’) per lane per lift staggered, of completed travel lane sections and under the curb and gutter, unless noted otherwise, or directed by Owner. 5. If the material fails to meet the density requirements, it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements and retested. C. Rework 1. General a. Rework, when required to meet pulverization requirements or density. b. Reworking shall include loosening, road mixing as approved by the Owner, compacting, and finishing. c. When a section is reworked, a new optimum moisture content in accordance with TxDOT Tex- 103-E and density in accordance with Tex-121-E will be determined from the reworked material. d. Compact in accordance with Section 3.8 of this specification. e. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface, upon completion, shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 2. Within seventy-two (72) hours of final compaction a. Shall be done until compaction is met. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-6 3. Beyond seventy-two (72) hours of final compaction a. Shall include the addition of additional lime at ten-percent (10%) to fifteen-percent (15%) of the initial application rate or as deemed necessary by the Owner. 3.09 Finishing A. General 1. Immediately after completing compaction the resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and clipped, skinned, or tight bladed by a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately quarter-inch (1/4”). 2. The surface shall then be thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller, adding small increments of moisture as needed during rolling until a smooth surface is attained. 3. If aggregate larger than No. 4 is present in the mixture; one (1) complete coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the clipping operation. 4. When directed by the Owner, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure provided a dense, uniform surface, free of surface compaction planes, is produced. 5. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained at its specified optimum during all finishing operations. 6. Surface compaction, rolling, blading and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce a smooth, closely knit surface, free of cracks, ridges or loose material conforming to the crown, grade and line shown on the Drawings, within three (3) hours of initial mixing. 7. After the final layer or course of the treated material has been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 8. Remove all loosened material from the surface of the section and dispose of it at an approved location. 9. Do not surface patch. B. Finish grade of constructed subgrade in accordance with the following grade tolerances: 1. Staged Construction a. Grade to within one-inch (1”) in the cross-section and one-inch (1”) in sixteen-feet (16’) measured longitudinally. 2. Turnkey Construction a. Grade to within half-inch (1/2”) in the cross-section and half-inch (1/2”) in sixteen-feet (16’) measured longitudinally. 3.10 Curing A. The completed section shall be moist cured or prevented from drying by addition of an asphalt material at the rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gallons per square yard. B. Curing shall continue for two (2) to five (5) days before further courses are added or traffic is permitted, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. C. However, the lime treated material may be covered by other courses, the day following finishing, when approved by the Owner. D. When the Drawings provide for the treated material to be covered by other courses of material, the next course shall be applied within fourteen (14) calendar days after final compaction is completed, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. 3.11 Construction Joints A. At the end of each day's construction, a straight transverse construction joint shall be formed by cutting back into the total width of completed work to form a true vertical face free of loose and shattered material. B. For large and wide areas the subgrade shall be built in a series of parallel lanes of convenient length and width meeting and approval of the Owner. 3.12 Maintenance A. The Contractor is required to maintain the subgrade in good condition until all work has been completed and accepted. B. Maintenance shall include, but not limited to, the immediate remedy of any defects, maintaining moisture content, repairing damages due to construction and/or local traffic. C. Defect Remedies 1. Low areas shall be remedied by replacing the material for the full depth of treatment, rather than adding a thin layer of material to the completed work, or as required by the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-7 2. Faulty work shall be replaced for the full depth of treatment. 3. All Defect Remedies shall be completed at the Contractors sole expense and at no additional time allowed to the contract. 3.13 Traffic A. Local traffic and construction equipment may be allowed on the completed section if the section has had time to cure or the application of a single course surface treatment has been completed. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-1 SECTION 32 11 13.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing, mixing, compacting of Cement Treated Subgrade as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ASTM C-150 – Portland Cement B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 204 “Sprinkling” C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 210 “Rolling” D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-101-E Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-103-E Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-115-E Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials G. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-120-E Soil-Cement Testing H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4600, Hydraulic Cement I. TxDOT’s Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program (HCQMP) 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). 2. Cement information shall include date information on when it was manufactured and a use-by date. B. Test reports 1. Submit within three (3) working days after the test is completed to the following: a. Owner, b. Owner, and c. As directed by the Owner. 2. All test reports shall clearly indicate the following information: a. Location of area tested by the following, 1) Station 2) Distance from Center Line 3) Travel lane. 4) Or as otherwise specified b. Date, c. Company whom performed test, d. Person by who performed test by one of the following: 1) Name, 2) Initials, 3) Employee identification number, e. Material tested, f. Test used, g. Test values obtained, h. Indicate Pass or Fail in accordance with the Specification(s) and Drawing(s) requirements, i. Person with the testing company who has reviewed and approves the test results by all of the following: 1) Printed name 2) Signature 3) License number Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Soil A. Soil shall consist of Owner approved material, free from vegetation or other objectionable matter, encountered in the roadbed section and other acceptable material used in the preparation of the roadbed in accordance with this specification. 2.02 Cement A. Cement shall be Type I Portland cement. B. Cement shall meet the requirements of TxDOT DMS-4600, TxDOT’s Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program (HCQMP), and ASTM C-150 Type I Portland Cement. 1. Sources not on the HCQMP or other sources to be used in combination with an approved source will require approval before use. C. Cement shall be used prior to the expiration date. 2.03 Water A. Water shall be free from deleterious contaminants and other objectionable materials to the hardening of the cement treatment. B. Source of water shall be approved by the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform cement treated mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of cement, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. C. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work shall be on the project and approved by the Owner prior to the beginning of construction operations. 2. All machinery, tools, and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. 3. The Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment to enable continuous execution of the work and its completion in the required number of working days. 4. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be operated by experienced and capable workmen and shall be that necessary to provide a cement treatment meeting the requirements herein specified. B. Transportation Equipment 1. Shall be capable of hauling the material in a method recognized by the industry as being satisfactory for the material being transported. 2. Shall be of type recommended by manufacturer of product(s). 3. Equipment shall be in compliance with local, state, and federal laws and regulations. C. Rollers 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. D. Storage Facility 1. Material shall be stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until immediately before distribution. 2. If storage bins are used, they shall be completely enclosed. 3. Material in bags shall be stored in weatherproof buildings with adequate protection from ground Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-3 dampness. E. Cement Slurry Equipment 1. Slurry tanks shall be equipped with agitation devices to slurry cement on the project or other approved location. F. Pulverization Equipment 1. Provide pulverization equipment that: a. Cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth with cutters that will plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut. b. Provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times. c. Uniformly mixes the materials. 3.03 Material Transportation A. General 1. All material shall be transported in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. B. Truck 1. Each truck shall have the weight of cement determined on certified scales. 2. All exit ports are to be sealed at the plant. C. Bags 1. Each bag shall bear the manufacturer's certified weight. 2. Bags varying more than five-percent (5%) from that weight may be rejected and the average weight of bags in any shipment, as shown by weighing ten-percent (10%), with a minimum of five (5), of the bags taken at random from each pallet, shall not be less than the manufacturer's certified weight. 3.04 Preparation of Roadbed A. General 1. Before other construction operations are commenced, the roadbed shall be graded and shaped as required to construct the cement treatment for material in place in conformance with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross section shown on the Drawings. 2. Unsuitable soil or material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable soil. 3. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support without displacing the construction equipment and the compaction hereinafter specified. 4. Soft or yielding subgrade shall be corrected and made stable before construction proceeds. B. Pulverization 1. The soil shall be pulverized so that 100% of the material passes the two and one-half-inch (2-1/2”) sieve when tested from the roadway in the roadway condition by TxDOT Tex-101-E. 3.05 Placement A. General 1. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform cement mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of cement, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. B. Application 1. General a. Cement shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. b. Quantity of cement to be used is to be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Owner if not on the Drawings. 1) Any rates indicated on the Drawings are the result of preliminary tests and shall be verified. 2) Application rate may be varied by the Owner, if conditions warrant. c. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, the cement operation shall not be started when the air temperature is below 40º F and falling, but may be started when the air temperature is above 35º F and rising. 1) The temperature will be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. 2) Cement shall not be placed when weather conditions in the opinion of the Owner are Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-4 unsuitable. C. Method 1. General a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, cement shall be applied at a rate in pounds of dry cement per square yards, in the form of a slurry. 2. Slurry Method a. The cement shall be mixed with water to form a slurry with a solids content approved by the Owner. b. The cement shall be mixed with water in trucks with approved distributors and applied as a slurry. c. The distribution of cement at the rate(s) required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper cement content has been secured. d. Slurry shall be applied within two (2) hours of adding water and when the roadway is at moisture content drier than optimum. 1) The percentage of moisture in the soil, at the time of cement application, shall not exceed the quantity that will permit uniform and intimate mixture of soil and cement and it shall not exceed the specified optimum moisture content for the soil cement mixture. 3. Dry Method a. Dry placing is not allowed unless approved by the Owner and: 1) The cement is distributed by an approved spreader at the specified rate or as directed by the Owner. 2) The cement is distributed at a uniform rate and in such a manner as to reduce the scattering of cement by the wind. b. The material shall be sprinkled as approved by the Owner. c. The distribution of cement at the rate(s) required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper cement content has been secured. d. Cement shall be applied to the roadway and water and mixing shall commence to permit uniform and intimate mixture of soil and cement and it shall not exceed the specified optimum moisture content for the soil-cement mixture. 3.06 Delivery Certification A. Certification of cement quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. B. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of dry cement. 3.07 Mixing A. General 1. Portland cement treatment for materials in place may be constructed with any machine or combination of machines and auxiliary equipment that will produce results as outlined in this specification. 2. Mixing shall begin immediately once cement is applied. 3. The mixer shall in one (1) continuous operation mix the soil and cement full depth, and the required moisture uniformly, thoroughly moist-mix the soil, cement and water, until a homogeneous mixture is obtained 4. The mixer shall spread the completed soil cement mixture evenly over the machine processed width of the subgrade and leave it in a loose condition ready for immediate compaction. 5. The soil and cement mixture shall not remain undisturbed, after mixing and before compacting, for more than 30 minutes. B. Moisture 1. The mixture shall be sprinkled in accordance with TxDOT Item 204 to maintain optimum mixing moisture. C. The soil shall be mixed so that, the material will meet the following requirement in Table 1 when tested from the roadway in the roadway condition by TxDOT Tex-101-E. Table 1 Gradation Requirements Sieve Size Minimum Percent (%) Passing 1-3/4”100 3/4”85 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-5 #4 60 3.08 Compaction A. General 1. Prior to the beginning of compaction, the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth. 2. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after mixing and be complete within two (2) hours after the application of cement. 3. Compaction shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. 4. Bring each layer to the moisture content required. a. At the start of compaction, the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in unpulverized soil lumps, based on over-dry weights, shall not be below or more than two (2) percentage points above the specified optimum moisture content and shall be less than that quantity which will cause the soil-cement mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. b. When necessary, sprinkle the material in accordance with TxDOT Item 204. 5. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) the width of the roller unit. 6. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. 7. Offset alternate trips of the roller. 8. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH, or as directed. 9. When the uncompacted soil-cement mixture is wetted by rain so that the average moisture content exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction, the entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole expense of the Contractor. 10. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density, stability, or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. 11. Continue work until specification requirements are met. 12. Use mechanical tamps in areas inaccessible to rollers. 13. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one (1) operation, the previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated and the next layer mixed with cement as previously specified. a. The first layer of the material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed with the underlying material. 14. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the Drawings shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. 15. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface, upon completion, shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 16. After each section is completed, tests as necessary will be made by the Contractor. B. Density Control 1. All testing to ensure density requirements shall be completed by a testing facility that is capable of performing all the required tests and is approved by the Owner. 2. Determine the moisture content in the mixture at the beginning of and during compaction in accordance with TxDOT Tex-103-E. 3. Compact to a minimum ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum density determined in accordance with Tex-121-E, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 4. The Contractor shall determine roadway density at a frequency of one (1) test per one-hundred feet (100’) per lane per lift staggered, of completed travel lane sections and under the curb and gutter, unless noted otherwise, or directed by Owner. 5. If the material fails to meet the density requirements, it shall be it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements and retested. C. Rework 1. General a. Rework, when required to meet pulverization requirements or density. b. Reworking shall include loosening, road mixing as approved by the Owner, compacting, and finishing. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-6 c. When a section is reworked, a new optimum moisture content in accordance with TxDOT Tex- 103-E and density in accordance with Tex-121-E will be determined from the reworked material. d. Compact in accordance with Section 3.8 of this specification. e. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface, upon completion, shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. f. Shall include the addition of additional cement at the initial application rate or as deemed necessary by the Owner. 3.09 Finishing A. General 1. Immediately after completing compaction the resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and clipped, skinned, or tight bladed by a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately quarter-inch (1/4”). 2. The surface shall then be thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller, adding small increments of moisture as needed during rolling until a smooth surface is attained. 3. If aggregate larger than No. 4 is present in the mixture; one (1) complete coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the clipping operation. 4. When directed by the Owner, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure provided a dense, uniform surface, free of surface compaction planes, is produced. 5. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained at its specified optimum during all finishing operations. 6. Surface compaction, rolling, blading and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce a smooth, closely knit surface, free of cracks, ridges or loose material conforming to the crown, grade and line shown on the Drawings, within three (3) hours of initial mixing. 7. After the final layer or course of the treated material has been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 8. Remove all loosened material from the surface of the section and dispose of it at an approved location. 9. Do not surface patch. B. Finish grade of constructed subgrade in accordance with the following grade tolerances: 1. Staged Construction a. Grade to within one-inch (1”) in the cross-section and one-inch (1”) in sixteen-feet (16’) measured longitudinally. 2. Turnkey Construction a. Grade to within half-inch (1/2”) in the cross-section and half-inch (1/2”) in sixteen-feet (16’) measured longitudinally. 3.10 Curing A. The completed section shall be moist cured or prevented from drying by: 1. Sprinkling in accordance with TxDOT Item 204, and / or 2. Addition of an asphalt material at the rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gallons per square yard. B. Moisture content shall be maintained at no lower than 2.5 percentage points below optimum. C. Curing shall continue for at least three (3) days before further courses are added or traffic is permitted, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. D. When the Drawings provide for the treated material to be covered by other courses of material, the next course shall be applied within fourteen (14) calendar days after final compaction is completed, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. 3.11 Construction Joints A. At the end of each day's construction, a straight transverse construction joint shall be formed by cutting back into the total width of completed work to form a true vertical face free of loose and shattered material. B. For large and wide areas the subgrade shall be built in a series of parallel lanes of convenient length and width meeting and approval of the Owner. 3.12 Maintenance Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-7 A. The Contractor is required to maintain the subgrade in good condition until all work has been completed and accepted. B. Maintenance shall include, but not limited to, the immediate remedy of any defects, maintaining moisture content, repairing damages due to construction and/or local traffic. C. Defect Remedies 1. Low areas shall be remedied by replacing the material for the full depth of treatment, rather than adding a thin layer of material to the completed work, or as required by the Owner. 2. Faulty work shall be replaced for the full depth of treatment. 3. All Defect Remedies shall be completed at the Contractors sole expense and at no additional time allowed to the contract. 3.13 Traffic A. Local traffic and construction equipment may be allowed on the completed section if the section has had time to cure or the application of a single course surface treatment has been completed. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-1 SECTION 32 11 23 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and placing Flexible Base Course as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 32 11 00 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE B. 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE C. 32 11 13.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE D. 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. AASHTO T193 – Standard Method of Test for The California Bearing Ratio B. ASTM C-131 – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine C. ASTM C-150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement D. ASTM D-1557 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 204 “Sprinkling” F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 210 “Rolling” G. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 247 “Flexible Base” H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-101-E Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing I. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-103-E Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials J. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-104-E Determining Liquid Limits of Soils K. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-106-E Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils L. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-110-E Particle Size Analysis of Soils M. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-115-E Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials N. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-406-A Material Finer Than 75 mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates (Decantation Test For Concrete Aggregates) O. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-460-A Determining Crushed Face Particle Count P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4600, Hydraulic Cement Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6350, Lime and Lime Slurry R. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-11000, Evaluating and Using Nonhazardous Recyclable Materials Guidelines S. TxDOT’s Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program (HCQMP) 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Design Mix Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal the following: a. Gradation b. Admixture Ratio (if admixture is required) Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-2 c. The Texas Required Base Thickness d. Addition information as directed by Owner C. Test reports 1. Submit within three (3) working days after the test is completed to the following: a. Owner b. Owner, and c. As directed by the Owner 2. All test reports shall clearly indicate the following information: a. Location of area tested by the following, 1) Station 2) Distance from Center Line 3) Travel lane designation 4) Or as otherwise specified b. Date c. Weather 1) Temperature 2) General weather conditions d. Company whom performed test e. Person by who performed test by one of the following: 1) Name 2) Initials 3) Employee identification number f. Material tested g. Test used h. Test values obtained i. Indicate Pass or Fail in accordance with the Specification(s) and Drawing(s) requirements j. Person with the testing company who has reviewed and approves the test results by all of the following: 1) Printed name 2) Signature 3) License number PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Base Material A. Shall be Type A, Grade 1, in accordance with TxDOT Item 247, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or by the Owner. 2.02 Water A. Water shall be free from deleterious contaminates and other objectionable materials. B. Source of water shall be approved by the Owner. 2.03 Prime Coat A. Shall be bituminous material in accordance with Section 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform mixture free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work to process a sufficient quantity of material to provide full depth as shown on Drawings, to use the proper amount of chemical stabilization material (if required), maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the above requirements. C. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-3 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for the proper construction of the work shall be on the project, and be approved by the Owner. 2. All machinery, tools, and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. 3. The Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment to enable continuous execution of the work and its completion in the required number of working days. 4. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be operated by experienced and capable workmen and shall be that necessary to provide a cement treatment meeting the requirements herein specified. B. Transportation Equipment 1. Shall be capable of hauling the material in a method recognized by the industry as being satisfactory for the material being transported. 2. Shall be of type recommended by manufacturer of product(s). 3. Equipment shall be in compliance with local, state, and federal laws and regulations. C. Rollers 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. 3.03 Material Transportation A. General 1. All material shall be transported in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. B. Truck 1. Each truck shall have the weight/quantity of material determined on certified scales or a Owner approved method. 3.04 Preparation of Roadbed A. Before placing base course, the subgrade shall be graded and shaped in conformance with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross section as shown on the Drawings, in accordance with Section 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE or Section 32 11 13.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE, and/or as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. B. Unsuitable soil or material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable soil. C. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support without displacing the construction equipment and the compaction hereinafter specified. D. Soft or yielding subgrade shall be corrected and made stable before construction proceeds. 3.05 Test Section A. The Contractor shall be required to construct a "Test Section". B. The first section of base shall serve as a test section. C. Its length shall be between 300 and 500 linear feet single lane width. D. Evaluation of the equipment and procedure will be done during this section. E. In case it is found that the work is not satisfactory with respect to the specification requirements, the Contractor shall revise his procedures and augment or replace equipment as necessary to assure work completed in accordance with the specifications. F. Additional test sections may be required as directed by the Owner. G. Test sections not conforming to the requirements of the specifications shall be reconstructed. 3.06 Delivery Certification A. Certification of all materials quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. B. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of material. 3.07 Placing A. Spread and shape the material into a uniform layer with an approved spreader the same day it is delivered unless otherwise approved. B. Construct loose material layers that are a maximum of six-inches (6”) in thickness. C. Maintain the shape of the course. D. Sprinkle in accordance with TxDOT Item 204 to control dust. 3.08 Compaction Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-4 A. General 1. Prior to the beginning of compaction, the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth for a maximum depth of six-inches (6”). 2. Compaction shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. 3. Bring each layer to the moisture content required. a. At the start of compaction, the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in unpulverized soil lumps, based on over-dry weights, shall not be below or more than two (2) percentage points above the specified optimum moisture content and shall be less than that quantity which will cause the soil cement mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. b. Maintain moisture content within three-percent (3%) of optimum on the wet side. 1) When necessary, sprinkle the material in accordance with TxDOT Item 204. 4. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half (1/2) the width of the roller unit. 5. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. 6. Offset alternate trips of the roller. 7. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH, or as directed. 8. When the uncompacted soil mixture is wetted by rain so that the average moisture content exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction, the entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole expense of the Contractor. 9. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density, stability, or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. 10. Continue work until specification requirements are met. 11. Use mechanical tamps in areas inaccessible to rollers. 12. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the Drawings shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. 13. Throughout this entire operation, the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface, upon completion, shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 14. After each section is completed, tests as necessary will be made by the Contractor. 3.02 Density Control A. All testing to ensure density requirements shall be completed by a testing facility that is capable of performing all the required tests and is approved by the Owner. B. Determine the moisture content in the mixture at the beginning of and during compaction in accordance with TxDOT Tex-103-E. C. Compact to a minimum ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum density determined in accordance with Tex-121-E, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. D. The Contractor shall determine roadway density at a frequency of one (1) test per one-hundred feet (100’) per lane per lift staggered, of completed travel lane sections and under the curb and gutter, unless noted otherwise, or directed by Owner. E. If the material fails to meet the density requirements, it shall be it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements and retested. 3.09 Finishing A. General 1. Immediately after completing compaction the resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and clipped, skinned, or tight bladed by a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately quarter-inch (1/4”). 2. The surface shall then be thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller, adding small increments of moisture as needed during rolling until a smooth surface is attained. 3. If aggregate larger than No. 4 is present in the mixture; one (1) complete coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the clipping operation. 4. When directed by the Owner, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure provided a dense, uniform surface, free of surface compaction planes, is produced. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-5 5. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained at its specified optimum during all finishing operations. 6. Surface compaction, rolling, blading and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce a smooth, closely knit surface, free of cracks, ridges or loose material conforming to the crown, grade and line shown on the Drawings, within three (3) hours of initial mixing. 7. After the final layer or course of the material has been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings or as directed. 8. Remove all loosened material from the section and dispose of it at an approved location. 9. Do not surface patch. B. Finish grade of constructed subgrade in accordance with the following grade tolerances: 1. Staged Construction a. Grade to within half-inch (1/2”) in the cross-section and half-inch (1/2”) in sixteen-feet (16’) measured longitudinally. 2. Turnkey Construction a. Grade to within quarter-inch (1/4”) in the cross-section and quarter-inch (1/4”) in sixteen- feet (16’) measured longitudinally. 3.10 Prime Coat A. Shall be in accordance with Section 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 3.11 Construction Joints A. At the end of each day's construction, a straight transverse construction joint shall be formed by cutting back into the total width of completed work to form a true vertical face free of loose and shattered material. B. For large and wide areas the subgrade shall be built in a series of parallel lanes of convenient length and width meeting and approval of the Owner. 3.12 Maintenance A. The Contractor is required to maintain the base in good condition until all work has been completed and accepted. B. Maintenance shall include, but not limited to, the immediate remedy of any defects, maintaining moisture content, repairing damages due to construction and/or local traffic. C. Defect Remedies 1. Low areas shall be remedied by replacing the material for the full depth of treatment, rather than adding a thin layer of material to the completed work, or as required by the Owner. 2. Faulty work shall be replaced for the full depth of treatment. 3. All Defect Remedies shall be completed at the Contractors sole expense and at no additional time allowed to the contract. 3.13 Traffic A. The Contractor shall not be permitted to drive heavy equipment over completed portions, but pneumatic- tired equipment required for hauling cement, and water may be permitted after the surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent the equipment from marring the surface, provided protection and cover specified herein are not impaired. B. The base may be opened to local traffic as soon as the prime coat has been applied and sanded or cured as necessary to prevent it from being picked up by traffic. C. It may be opened to all traffic after seven (7) calendar days. 1. Surface course shall be applied prior to opening to through traffic. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PRIME COAT 32 12 13.19-1 SECTION 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the application of asphalt material on the completed base course and/or other approved areas as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 210 “Rollers” B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 300 “Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions” C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 310 “Prime Coat” D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-922-K “Calibrating Asphalt Distribution Equipment” 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Bituminous material manufacturer information and recommendations. C. Equipment information as required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Bituminous Material A. The material used shall be MC-30 in accordance with TxDOT Item 300, unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2.02 Blotter Material A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or approved, use either: 1. Native sand 2. Base course sweepings obtained from cleaning the base PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. Prime coat shall be applied when the air temperature is 60° F and above, or is above 50° F and is rising. 1. The air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. B. Material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Owner, are not suitable. C. Do not permit traffic, hauling, or placement of any subsequent courses shall be permitted over the freshly applied prime coat until authorized by the Owner. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until placement of subsequent courses or the Owner accepts the work. E. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. All storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks and distributors used in storing or handling bituminous material shall be kept clean and in good operating condition at all times, and they shall be operated in such manner that there will be no contamination of the bituminous material with foreign material. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PRIME COAT 32 12 13.19-2 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain in good working order a recording thermometer at the storage-heating unit at all times. 3. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of the bituminous material in all of the heating equipment and in the distributor, for determining the rate at which it is applied, and for securing uniformity at the junction of two (2) distributor loads. B. Distributor 1. Furnish a distributor that will apply the bituminous material uniformly at the specified rate or as directed. 2. Calibration a. Furnish to the Owner a distributor test report, no more than six (6) months old, documenting that the variation in output for individual nozzles of the same size does not exceed ten percent (10%) when tested at the greatest shot width in accordance with Tex-922-K. b. Include the following documentation on the test report: 1) The serial number of the distributor 2) A method that identifies the actual nozzle set used in the test 3) The fan width of the nozzle set at a twelve-inch (12”) bar height 3. Transverse Variance Rate a. When a transverse variance rate is shown on the Drawings, confirm that the nozzles outside the wheel paths will output a predetermined percentage more of bituminous material by volume than the nozzles over the wheel paths. b. When a transverse variance rate is required, perform the test using the type and grade of bituminous material to be used on the project. c. The Owner may verify the transverse rate and distribution at any time. 1) If verification does not meet the requirements, correct deficiencies and furnish a new test report. C. Tank Volume 1. Furnish a volumetric calibration and strap stick for the distributor tank in accordance with Tex- 922-K, “Calibrating Asphalt Distribution Equipment,” Part I. 2. Calibrate the distributor within the previous three (3) years of the date first used on the project. 3. The Owner may verify calibration accuracy in accordance with TxDOT Tex-922-K. D. Computerized Distributor 1. When paying for bituminous material by weight, the Owner may allow use of the computerized distributor display to verify application rates. 2. Verify application rate accuracy at a frequency acceptable to the Owner. E. Broom 1. Furnish rotary, self-propelled brooms. F. Rollers 1. Rollers provided shall meet the requirements for their type as shown in TxDOT Item 210. G. Digital Measuring Instrument 1. Furnish a vehicle with a calibrated digital-measuring instrument accurate to ±6 ft. per mile. 3.03 Surface Preparation A. When, in the opinion of the Owner, the base and/or area is satisfactory to receive the prime coat, the surface may be cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods. B. If found necessary by the Owner, the surface shall be lightly sprinkled with water just prior to application of the bituminous material to control dust and ensure absorption. 3.04 Application A. Bituminous 1. The material shall be applied on the clean surface by an approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the material in the quantity specified, evenly and smoothly under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. 2. Shall be applied at a temperature within the recommended range per TxDOT Item 300. a. Apply material within 15° F of the selected temperature. 3. Distribute the material smoothly and evenly at a pressure necessary for proper distribution at an application rate not exceed 0.20 gallon per square yard of surface, unless otherwise specified. 4. After beginning of the work, should the yield on the bituminous material applied appear to be in Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PRIME COAT 32 12 13.19-3 error, the distributor shall be calibrated in a manner satisfactory to the Owner before proceeding with the work. 5. During the application of the material, the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent splattering of adjacent pavement, curb, gutter, and structures. 6. When directed roll the freshly applied material with a pneumatic-tire roller to ensure penetration. B. Blotter 1. Shall be spread in areas as directed by the Owner before allowing traffic to use the primed surface. 2. Remove blotter material prior to placing subsequent courses. 3.05 Disposal of Materials A. Disposal of all materials shall be in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations, and will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-1 SECTION 32 12 16.13 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of plant-mix asphalt paving as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 210 “Rolling” B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 300 “Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions” C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 320 “Equipment for Asphalt Concrete Pavement” D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 340 “Dense-Graded Hot Mix Asphalt (Method)” E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 341 “Dense-Graded Hot Mix Asphalt (QC/QA)” F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-106-E, Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils G. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-107-E, Determining the Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-203-F, Sand Equivalent Test I. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-207-F, Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures J. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-212-F, Determining Moisture Content of Bituminous Mixtures K. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-217-F, Determining Deleterious Material and Decantation Test for Coarse Aggregates L. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-227-F, Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures M. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-236-F, Determining Asphalt Content from Asphalt Paving Mixtures by the Ignition Method N. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-243-F, Tack Coat Adhesion O. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-408-A, Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate for Concrete P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-410-A, Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate Using the Los Angeles Machine Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-411-A, Soundness of Aggregate Using Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate R. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-460-A, Determining Crushed Face Particle Count S. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-461-A, Degradation of Coarse Aggregate by Micro-deval Abrasion T. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Bituminous Rated Source Quality Catalog (BRSQC) 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Mixture design report C. Quality Control Plan (QCP) D. Truck “Pay Tickets” Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All products shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 340, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings of by the Owner. B. All sources and materials shall be TxDOT approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, TxDOT Item 340, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. For this specification when a TxDOT Item is indicated the terms within the TxDOT Item shall be adjusted as follows: 1. Department – TxDOT 2. Engineer – Owner 3.02 Mixture Design A. The mixture shall be designed in accordance with TxDOT Item 340 and conform to the requirements of this specification with the following modifications: 1. The Owner (Engineer) will not be able to provide any software. 2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a mixture design report that includes the following: a. The combined aggregate gradation, source, specific gravity, and percent of each material used, b. Results of applicable tests, c. The mixing and molding temperatures, d. All applicable correlation and correction factors, e. The signature(s) of the Level II specialist certified by TxDOT-approved hot-mix asphalt certification program who performed the design, f. The date the mixture design was performed, g. A unique identification number for the design. 3.03 Equipment A. General 1. Provide equipment for Asphaltic Concrete Paving in accordance with TxDOT Item 320. 3.04 Quality Control Plan A. General 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to design, produce, transport, place and compact the specified paving mixture in accordance with the requirements herein. 2. The Owner will perform verification testing as needed. 3. Provide quality control (QC) testing as needed to meet the requirements of this Item. 4. Provide a certified Level I-A specialist at the plant during production hours. 5. Provide a certified Level I-B specialist to conduct placement tests. 6. The requirements of TxDOT Item 341 shall be adhered to. B. Quality Control Plan (QCP) 1. General a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall develop and follow a Quality Control Plan (QCP). b. The QCP shall be submitted to the Owner and the on-site Inspector. c. Obtain approval from the Owner for changes to the QCP made during the project. d. The Owner may suspend operations if the Contractor fails to comply with the QCP. e. Submit a written QCP to the Owner and receive the Owner’s approval of the QCP before beginning production. 2. Include the following items in the QCP: a. Project Personnel 1) Provide: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-3 a) A list of individuals that will conduct tests as well their associated certifications (i.e. Level IA, IB, and II certifications), including when certifications will expire for each individual b) A list of individuals responsible for QC with authority to take corrective action and the contact information for each individual listed b. Material Delivery and Storage 1) Provide: a) The sequence of material processing, delivery, and minimum quantities to assure continuous plant operations b) Aggregate stockpiling procedures to avoid contamination and segregation c) Frequency, type, and timing of aggregate stockpile testing to assure conformance of material requirements before mixture production d) Procedure for monitoring the quality and variability of asphalt binder c. Production 1) Detail: a) Loader operation procedures to avoid contamination in cold bins b) Procedures for calibrating and controlling cold feeds c) Procedures to eliminate debris or oversized material d) Procedures for adding and verifying rates of each applicable mixture component (e.g., aggregate, asphalt binder, RAP, lime, liquid antistrip) e) Procedures for reporting job control and acceptance test results f) Procedures to avoid segregation and drain-down in the silo d. Loading and Transporting 1) Provide: a) The type and application method for release agents b) Truck loading procedures to avoid segregation e. Placement and Compaction 1) Provide: a) The proposed agenda for mandatory pre-paving meeting including date and location b) The type and application method for release agents in the paver and on rollers, shovels, lutes, and other utensils c) Procedures for the transfer of mixture into the paver while avoiding segregation and preventing material spillage d) The process to balance production, delivery, paving, and compaction to achieve continuous placement operations e) The paver operations (e.g., operation of wings, height of mixture in auger chamber) to avoid physical and thermal segregation and other surface irregularities f) Procedures to construct quality longitudinal and transverse joints 3.05 Construction A. Prime Coat 1. If a prime coat is required, it shall be applied in accordance with the requirements of Section 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT. B. Tack Coat 1. The material shall not be applied on a previously primed base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. The surface upon which the material is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3. The material shall be applied when the surface temperature is 60° F or higher unless otherwise approved. 4. All contact surfaces of base, curbs, structures, and joints shall be coated with the material. 5. During the application of the material, the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent splattering of adjacent pavement, curb, gutter, and structures. 6. The surface shall be given a uniform application of shall be applied at a rate ranging from 0.05 to 0.10 gallons per square yard and/or as shown on the Drawings. 7. When directed roll the freshly applied material with a pneumatic tire roller to ensure penetration Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-4 as necessary. 8. The Owner may use TxDOT Tex-243-F to verify that the material has adequate adhesive properties. C. Storage and Heating of Asphalt Materials 1. Asphalt cement shall not be heated to a temperature in excess of that recommended by the producer. 2. Asphalt storage equipment shall be maintained in a clean condition and operated in such a manner that there will be no contamination with foreign matter. D. Proportioning 1. All materials shall be handled and proportioned in a manner that yield an acceptable mixture as herein specified and as defined by the job-mix. E. Mixing 1. Weight Batch Plant a. In charging the weigh box and in charging the pugmill from the weigh box, such methods or devices shall be used as necessary to minimize segregation of the mixture. 2. Drum Mix Plant a. The amount of aggregate and asphalt cement entering the mixer and the rate of travel through the mixer shall be coordinated so that a uniform mixture of the desired gradation and asphalt content will be produced. 3. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall not vary from the job-mix by more than the tolerances and restrictions herein specified. 4. The mixture when discharged from the plant shall have a moisture content not greater than one- percent (1%) by weight of total mix when determined by TxDOT Tex-212-F. 5. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall be at a temperature between 250° F and 325° F, or as required. a. After a target mixing temperature has been established, the mixture when discharged from the mixer shall not vary from this temperature by more than 25° F. F. Placing Asphaltic Concrete 1. General a. The material shall not be applied on a previously primed base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Owner. b. The asphalt mixture shall be spread on the approved prepared surface with a paving machine or other approved equipment in such a manner such that when properly compacted, the finished surface will be smooth or uniform density, and meet the requirements of the typical cross sections as shown on the Drawings. 2. Base Surface a. The surface upon which the material is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods to the satisfaction of the Owner. b. Asphaltic material shall be placed when the surface temperature is 60° F or higher unless otherwise approved. 3. Placement Temperature a. Asphaltic material shall be placed prior to it falling below 200° F. 1) If all or any portion of a load is found to be below the temperature then the load may be rejected and will need to be removed by the Contractor prior to placing any additional material. G. Flush Structures 1. Adjacent to flush curbs, gutters, liners and structures, the surface shall be finished uniformly high so that when compacted, it will be one-quarter inch (1/4”) above the edge. H. Construction joints 1. Joints of successive courses of asphaltic material shall be offset at least six-inches (6”). 2. Construction joints on surface courses shall coincide with lane lines, or as directed by the Owner. I. Compacting 1. General a. The asphalt mixture shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with the necessary rollers to obtain the required density and surface tolerances herein described and any requirements as shown on the Drawings. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-5 b. Regardless of the method of compaction control followed, all rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature drops below 175° F. c. The use of hand tamps shall only occur in areas where rollers are not able to obtain compaction. d. The edges of the pavement along curbs, headers and similar structures, and all places not accessible to the roller, or in such positions as will not allow thorough compaction with the rollers, shall be thoroughly compacted with lightly oiled tamps. e. Rolling with a trench roller will be required on widened areas, in trenches and other limited areas where satisfactory compaction cannot be obtained with the approved rollers. f. Unless otherwise directed, use only water or an approved release agent on rollers, tamps, and other compaction equipment. 1) Keep diesel, gasoline, oil, grease, and other foreign matter off the mixture. 2. In-Place Compaction Control a. Use density control unless ordinary compaction control is specified on the Drawings. b. Use the control strip method given in TxDOT Tex-207-F to establish the rolling pattern for density controlled areas. c. Where specific density or air void requirements are waived, furnish and operate compaction equipment as approved. d. Do not use pneumatic-tire rollers if excessive pickup of fines by roller tires occurs. e. When rolling with the three-wheel, tandem or vibratory rollers, it is recommended that rolling start by first rolling the joint with the adjacent pavement and then continue by rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the pavement, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-foot (1’). f. Alternate trips of the roller should be slightly different in length. g. On super-elevated curves, rolling should begin at the low side and progress toward the high side. h. When rolling with vibratory steel-wheel rollers, equipment operation shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210, and the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise directed by the Owner. i. Vibratory rollers shall not be left vibrating while not rolling or when changing directions. In addition, vibratory rollers shall not be allowed in the vibrating mode on mats with a plan depth of less than one and one-half inches (1-1/2”), unless approved by the Owner. j. The motion of the rollers shall be slow enough to avoid other than usual initial displacement of the mixture. k. If any displacement occurs, it shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner and/or Inspector. l. Ensure pavement is fully compacted before allowing rollers to stand on the pavement. 3. Rolling Pattern a. Rolling patterns shall be established by the Contractor to achieve the maximum compaction. b. The selected rolling pattern shall be followed unless changes in the mixture or placement conditions occur which affect compaction. c. When changes in the mixture or placement conditions occur, a new rolling pattern shall be established. J. In-Place Density and Air Voids 1. In-place density control is required for all mixtures except for thin, irregular level-up courses. 2. Material should be compacted to between ninety-two percent (92%) and ninety-six percent (96%) of maximum theoretical density or between four-percent (4%) and eight-percent (8%) air voids. 3. Average density shall be greater than ninety-two percent (92%) and no individual determination shall be lower than ninety percent (90%). 4. Density and Air Void Testing Rate a. Whichever is less 1) One (1) set every 500 tons of compacted asphaltic material, 2) One (1) set every 1,000 linear feet. b. Testing shall be in accordance with TxDOT Tex-207-F and TxDOT Tex-227-F. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-6 c. Pavement specimens, which shall be either cores or sections of the compacted mixture, will be tested as required to determine the percent air voids. d. Other methods, such as nuclear determination of in-place density, which correlate satisfactorily with actual project specimens may be used when approved by the Owner. K. Thickness 1. The total compacted average thickness of the combined HMAC courses shall not be less than the amount specified on the Drawings. 2. No more than ten percent (10%) of the measured thicknesses shall be more than one-quarter inch (1/4") less than the Drawing thickness. 3. If so, the quantity for pay shall be decreased as deemed appropriate by the Owner. 3.06 Ride Quality A. General 1. The pavement surface after compaction, shall be smooth and true to the established lines, grade, and cross-section. B. Equipment 1. Ten foot (10’) straight edge. 2. Diamond Grinding Equipment a. Shall be self-propelled powered grinding equipment that is specifically designed to smooth and texture pavements using circular blades. b. Shall have automatic grade control capable of grinding at least a three-foot (3’) width longitudinally in each pass without damaging the pavement. C. Testing 1. The Owner, Inspector, and/or Owner may require any of the following tests to be performed to verify the project. a. Straight-Edge 1) The Owner, Inspector, and/or Owner shall have the Contractor to test localized defects (obvious settlements, humps, ridges, etc.) with a ten-foot (10’) straightedge placed parallel or perpendicular to the roadway centerline depending on location of defect. 2) The maximum deviation shall not exceed one-eighth inch (1/8”) in ten-feet (10’). b. Mays Roughness Meter 1) The surface shall be tested by the Owner with the Mays Roughness Meter. 2) The Mays Roughness Value for each block (intersection to intersection) or 600-foot section, whichever is the less, shall not exceed ninety inches (90”) per mile per traffic lane. D. Correction of Deficiencies 1. Areas not meeting criteria shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. Local defects a. The Contractor shall correct deficiencies by grinding and fog sealing the aggregate exposed. b. All areas that are corrected shall be retested. 3. Mays Roughness Deficiencies a. For each block of 600-foot section not meeting this criteria, the Owner shall have the option of requiring that block or section to be reworked to meet the criteria, or paying an adjusted unit price for the surface course. b. The unit price adjustment shall be made on the following basis: 1) Adjusted Unit Price = (Adjustment Factor) X Surface Course Unit Bid Price 2) The adjustment factor shall be: a) For Residential Streets: Adjustment Factor = 1.999 - 0.0111 M b) For All Other Class Streets (Non Residential): Adjustment Factor = 1.287 - 0.0143 M, Where M - Mays Roughness Value c. In no case shall the Contractor be paid more than the unit bid price. d. If the surface course is an inverted penetration (surface treatment) the Mays Roughness Value observed will be reduced by ten inches (10”) per mile, prior to applying the above criteria. 3.07 Opening to Traffic A. The pavement shall be opened to traffic when directed by the Owner. B. Traffic shall not be allowed on pavement until the temperature is 150° F or lower unless otherwise directed. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-7 C. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that all construction traffic allowed on pavement open to the public will be subject to the State laws governing traffic on highways. D. If the surface ravels, flushes, ruts, or deteriorates prior to final acceptance it will be the Contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense to the satisfaction of the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-1 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Concrete Paving as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 Submittals A. roduct Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this item shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification, Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel A. Reinforcing steel, if required, shall conform to the requirements as specified in the specification, Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. B. All steel shall be grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint filler shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and as noted on the Drawings. B. Cap seal shall be Greenstreak #610 or approved equal installed over expansion joint filler. 2.04 Backfill A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Shall be constructed in sections of the lengths and widths shown on Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise provided by the Drawings, no section shall be a length less than eight-feet (8’). 2. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint. C. All work per day shall terminate at expansion joints. D. Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Foundation A. Excavation shall be shaped to line, grade per typical cross section, and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Forms A. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Owner. B. Be straight, free from warp, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. C. Shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. D. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3.04 Reinforcing Steel Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-2 A. The reinforcing steel, if required, shall be placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.05 Joints A. Expansion Joints 1. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39’-0” on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. a. If attached to curb and gutter than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the curb and gutter, unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Joint shall be 3/4” and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. 3. Where the paving abuts a retaining wall, sidewalk, curb, or other hard surface expansion joint shall be placed along the entire length. 4. Expansion joint shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through paving. 5. Dowels a. The dowel shall be extended across the joint nine inches (9”) minimum and be sleeved or greased. b. When adjacent to existing curb and gutter or to existing sidewalk dowels shall be drilled into the existing concrete on eighteen-inch (18”) on centers. 3.06 Control Joints 1. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at a maximum of 4’-0” on centers or evenly spaced between expansion joints, or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Shall be 1/2” depth by 1/8” width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.07 Concrete Placement A. Concrete shall be mixed and placed in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. B. The subgrade and reinforcement shall be slightly moist at the time the concrete is placed. C. Shall be placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. 3.08 Finishing A. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden or metal float to a smooth gritty texture. B. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with a one-half inch (1/2”) radius with approved tools or as shown on Drawings. C. Surface Finish 1. Shall be broom finish or as noted on the Drawings a. The surface shall be textured with a heavy broom finish perpendicular to the common travel way. 2. Other Finish a. The surface shall be as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Curing A. Within twenty (20) minutes of the surface being textured the curing compound shall be applied. B. Other methods of curing as outlined in the specification Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. C. Concrete must be protected from freezing temperatures for at least three (3) days. 3.10 Backfill and Grading A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. B. Grading shall promote positive drainage Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 321513.13 SECTION 321513.13 – STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING PART I – GENERAL 1.1. GENERAL CONDITIONS A.Requirements of “General Conditions of the Contract” and of Division I, “General Requirements”, apply to work in this Section with same force and effect as though repeated in full herein. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A.Furnish materials, labor, transportation, services, and equipment necessary to install decomposed granite surfacing as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. 1.3 REFERENCES A.ASTM C 136 – Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.Stabilized decomposed granite surfacing 1.5 SUBMITTALS A.Submit specification data Cut Sheets for products specified under this Section. B.Products: Five pound sample and sieve analysis for grading of decomposed granite material. 1.6 TESTS A.Perform gradation of decomposed granite material in accordance with ASTM C 136. 1.7 MOCK-UPS A.Install a 4-foot wide x 10-foot long mock-up of decomposed granite surfacing with compacted with a vibrating plate at location as directed by Owner’s Authorized Representative. B.Mock-up may become part of project. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A.Do not install decomposed granite surfacing during rainy conditions. 1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.In accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations.. 1.10 COORDINATION A.Notify contractors related to installation of his work in ample time, so as to allow sufficient time for those contractors to perform their portion of work. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Installer: Provide evidence to indicate successful experience in providing decomposed granite. 1.Experience: Minimum 5 years. 1.11 INSPECTION OF SITE A.Verify conditions at site that affect Work of this Section, and take field measurements as required. Report major discrepancies between Drawings and field dimensions to Owner’s Authorized Representative prior to commencing Work. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 DECOMPOSED GRANITE SCREENINGS A.Washed, natural-colored crushed granite stone, free of clay, friable materials and debris and graded in accordance with ASTM C 136 within the following limits: B.Crushed Stone Sieve Analysis Percentage of Weight Passing a Square Mesh Sieve AASHTO T11- 82 and T27-82. 3/8" MINUS AGGREGATE GRADATION Sieve Size % Passing 3/8 inch 100 No. 4 95-100 No. 8 75-80 No. 16 55-65 No. 30 40-50 No. 50 25-35 No. 100 20-25 No. 200 5-15 Note: Gradation based upon AASHTO T11-82 and T27-82 DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 321513.13 2.2 STABILIZER BINDER A.Non-toxic, organic binder that is a colorless and odorless concentrated powder that binds decomposed granite or crushed 3/8” minus aggregate together to produce a firm surface. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A.Verify that gradients and elevations of subgrade are correct. Ensure that a minimum of 1 ½% of cross slope will be provided. Contact Owner’s Authorized Representative if this minimum percentage will not be maintained. B.Verify that weed barrier or plastic sheeting will extend to edge of decomposed granite surfacing. C.Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing decomposed granite screenings. D.Wet surface prior to placing decomposed granite screenings. 3.2 BLENDING STABILIZER A.Blend 12-16 lbs. of Stabilizer per ton of decomposed granite or crushed 3/8” minus aggregate screenings. 1.Thoroughly and uniformly mixed stabilizer throughout decomposed granite or crushed 3/8” minus aggregate screenings. 3.3 PLACEMENT OF DECOMPOSED GRANITE SCREENINGS A.Place Stabilized and fiber-added decomposed granite screenings to a depth indicated in on drawings. B.Grade and smooth decomposed granite surfacing. C.Apply water until moisture penetrates to full depth of decomposed granite screenings. It is critical that full section of decomposed granite screenings receive water at this time. D.Upon thorough moisture penetration, compact decomposed granite screenings to within 90% relative compaction by using a vibrating plate. E.Take care in compacting decomposed granite screenings when adjacent planting and irrigation systems. F.Allow the finished surface to dry completely before allowing traffic. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.Remove and replace decomposed granite surfacing that is damaged, defective, or does not met requirements of this Section. B.Protect decomposed granite surfacing from damage until Final Payment. 3.5 CLEANUP A.Upon completion of Work under this Section, remove rubbish, waste and debris resulting from Contractor’s operations. Leave work area in a neat and clean condition. END OF SECTION 321513.13 CURB & GUTTER 32 16 13.13-1 SECTION 32 16 13.13 CURB & GUTTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Curbs and Gutters as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this specification shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification, Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. Reinforcing steel and Dowels, if required, shall conform to the requirements as specified in the specification, Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL, or as noted on the Drawings. B. All steel shall be Grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint material shall be 3/4” thick wood fiber asphalt-impregnated material meeting the requirements specified in Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES or as noted on the Drawings. 2.04 Backfill Material A. Select Backfill Material 1. Shall be native on-site material from excavation, imported material, or a mixture of sand and clay or other suitable granular material free from vegetation, rocks, debris, and material that is in large clumps greater than two-inches (2”) meeting the following requirements: a. Liquid limit of thirty-five (35) maximum, b. Plasticity index range from eight (8) to twenty (20), c. Moisture range from -1% to 3%. 2. This material shall not include soils with a Unified Soil Classification System of OL, MH, OH, CH, and PT or soils with an AASHTO classification of A7. B. Topsoil Backfill Material 1. Suitable material chosen from the excavation may be used. 2. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. 3. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. 4. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. 5. Should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading. 6. Capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CURB & GUTTER 32 16 13.13-2 B. Shall be placed in sections of the length indicated on the Drawings. C. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint of cross section specified for the curb and gutter and of the thickness indicated on the Drawings. D. Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Subgrade A. Excavation shall be shaped to line, grade per typical cross section, and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. The reinforcing steel and Dowels shall be of type and placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.04 Expansion Joints A. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39’-0” on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. 1. If curb and gutter is attached to rigid concrete pavement than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the rigid concrete pavement, unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. B. Joint shall be 3/4” and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the curb and gutter. C. Expansion material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through the curb and gutter. D. Dowels 1. When required shall be extended across the joint nine-inches (9”) minimum and be sleeved or greased on one (1) end. 3.05 Control Joints A. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at 10’-0” on centers, or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. B. Shall be 1/2” depth by 1/8” width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.06 Concrete Placement A. General 1. Concrete for curb and gutter shall be mixed and placed in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. 2. If dry, the foundation material shall be sprinkled lightly immediately before concrete is deposited thereon. 3. After the concrete has been struck off and after it has become sufficiently set, the exposed surfaces shall be thoroughly worked with a wooden float. 4. The exposed edges shall be rounded by the use of an edging tool to the radius indicated on Drawings. 5. All exposed surfaces of curb and gutter, or curb, shall be brushed to a smooth and uniform surface. B. Curing 1. The completed curb and gutter shall be cured with Type 2, white pigmented, curing compound unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 2. Other methods of curing as outlined in the specification, Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. 3.07 Formed Concrete A. Forms 1. General a. Forms will be required for all curb and gutter that is not Machine Laid. 2. Outside Forms a. Shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Owner. b. Be straight, free of warp, and a depth equal to the depth of the curb and gutter. c. Shall be securely staked to line and grade, and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. d. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3. Inside Forms a. Shall be of wood or metal. b. Of a section satisfactory to the Owner. c. Be straight, free of warp, and a depth equal to the depth of the curb and gutter. d. Shall be securely staked to line and grade, and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CURB & GUTTER 32 16 13.13-3 e. Shall be rigidly attached to the outside forms. f. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3.08 Machine Laid A. Can be used when approved by the Owner. B. The machine weight shall be such that the required compaction is obtained without the machine riding above the bed on which curbing is constructed. C. Shall form curb and gutter that are uniform in texture, shape, and density. D. Forming tube of the extrusion machine or the form of the slip form machine must be easily adjustable vertically during the forward motion of the machine to provide variable heights necessary to conform to the established grade line. E. A pointer, gauge, or other Owner approved method shall be attached to the machine so that a continual comparison can be made between the extruded or slip form work and the grade guideline. 3.09 Backfill A. Sidewalk not Attached 1. Material a. 6” Below Top Of Curb 1) Select Backfill Material, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. b. 6” Below Top Of Curb to Top of Curb 1) Topsoil Backfill Material, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) two- feet (2’) beyond curb immediately after completion of concrete work. c. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 3. Compaction a. General 1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Select Backfill Material 1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-percent (90%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Topsoil Backfill Material 1) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. B. Sidewalk Attached 1. Material a. To bottom of Sidewalk Structure 1) Select Backfill Material, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) full width of sidewalk immediately after completion of concrete work. c. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 3. Compaction a. General 1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Select Backfill Material 1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-percent (90%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Driveway Attached Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 CURB & GUTTER 32 16 13.13-4 1. Material a. To bottom of Driveway Structure 1) Select Backfill Material, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) full width of driveway or to Right-of-Way line, whichever is greater, immediately after completion of concrete work. c. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 3. Compaction a. General 1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Select Backfill Material 1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-percent (90%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-1 SECTION 32 16 23 SIDEWALKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Sidewalks as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL C. 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Administrative Code, Title 16, Part 4, Chapter 68, Rule §68.10 B. Texas Accessibility Standards C. Department of Justice ADA Standards for Accessible Design 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). 1.05 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. ADA Standards – shall mean compliance with the Texas Accessibility Standards and the Department of Justice ADA Standards for Accessible Design PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this item shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification, Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum 28 day strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. Reinforcing steel and Dowels, if required, shall conform to the requirements as specified in the Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL, or as noted on the Drawings. B. All steel shall be Grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Concrete Curing A. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING. 2.04 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint material shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and as noted on the Drawings. 2.05 Detectable Surface A. Unless otherwise stated, shall be in accordance with Texas Accessibility Standards for Detectable Warnings, Department of Justice ADA Standards for Accessible Design for Detectable Warnings, and the Drawings, otherwise specified by the Owner. 2.06 Pavement Markings A. All stripping shall be in accordance with the standard details and specifications of the local governing entity. 2.07 Backfill Material A. Select Backfill Material 1. Shall be native on-site material from excavation, imported material, or a mixture of sand and clay or other suitable granular material free from vegetation, rocks, debris, and material that is in large clumps greater than two-inches (2”) meeting the following requirements: a. Liquid limit of thirty-five (35) maximum, b. Plasticity index range from eight (8) to twenty (20), c. Moisture range from -1% to 3%. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-2 2. This material shall not include soils with a Unified Soil Classification System of OL, MH, OH, CH, and PT or soils with an AASHTO classification of A7. B. Topsoil Backfill Material 1. Suitable material chosen from the excavation may be used. 2. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. 3. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. 4. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. 5. Should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading. 6. Capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Shall be constructed in sections of the lengths and widths shown on Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise provided by the Drawings, no section shall be a length less than eight-feet (8’). 2. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint. C. All work per day shall terminate at expansion joints. D. Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Subgrade A. Excavation shall be shaped to line, grade per typical cross section, and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be compacted to 95% Standard Proctor or as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Forms A. General 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 11 13.11 CONCRETE FORMS 2. Opening in forms shall be provided, if needed, for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. 3. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. 4. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 3.04 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. The reinforcing steel and Dowels shall be of type and placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.05 Expansion Joints 1. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39’-0” on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. a. If attached to curb and gutter than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the curb and gutter, unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Joint shall be 3/4” and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the curb and gutter. 3. Where the sidewalk abuts a retaining wall, driveway, curb, or other hard surface expansion joint shall be placed along the entire length. 4. Expansion material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through the sidewalk. 5. Dowels a. When required shall be extended across the joint nine-inch (9”) minimum and be sleeved or greased on one (1) end. b. When adjacent to existing curb and gutter or to existing sidewalk dowels shall be drilled into the existing concrete on eighteen-inch (18”) on centers. 3.06 Control Joints 1. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at a maximum of 4’-0” on centers or evenly spaced between expansion joints, or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-3 2. Shall be 1/2” depth by 1/8” width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.07 Concrete Placement A. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. The subgrade and reinforcement shall be moist at the time the concrete is placed. C. Shall be placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. D. Subgrade shall be slightly moist at the time the concrete is placed. 3.08 Finishing A. The top surface shall be floated with a float to a smooth gritty texture. B. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with a one-half inch (1/2”) radius with approved tools or as shown on Drawings. C. Surface Finish 1. Shall be broom finish or as noted on the Drawings a. The surface shall be textured with a heavy broom finish perpendicular to the common travel way. 2. Other Finish a. The surface shall be as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Curb Ramp with Detectable Surface A. General 1. Shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings and recommendations of the manufacturer. 2. Properly constructed curb ramp shall be true to line, section, grade and shall be free of loose surfacing and irregularities. 3. The subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, cross section, and shall be of uniform density and moisture, when concrete is placed. 4. The subgrade shall be hand tamped and sprinkled to achieve the desired consistency and uniform support. 5. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, ramps shall have a minimum concrete thickness in excess of four-inches (4"), prior to application of textured surface. B. Slope 1. Slopes, S, shall be as shown in Table 1 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings: Table 1 Required Slopes for Curb Ramps and Sidewalks Ramp Slope (S) 1 Ramp in direction of travel S < 1:12 Side slope of ramp (flare)S < 1:10 Cross Slope 1:100 < S < 1:50 Sidewalks Slope (S) 1 Landings adjacent to ramp S < 1:20 Driveways abutting tied sidewalk S < 1:10 1 In all cases the slope shall be in accordance with ADA Standards C. Width of ramp 1. Shall be as shown on the Drawings. D. Obstructions 1. Shall be removed or relocated, as appropriate, or the location of the ramp may be shifted, if authorized. E. Detectable Warning 1. Surfacing shall be flush with abutting areas and placed using a template as required to achieve an esthetic well-defined edge. 2. Perpendicular Curb Ramps a. Within the public right of way, detectable warnings complying with TAS 705 at a minimum of 24” in depth (in the direction of pedestrian travel) and extending the full width of the curb ramp shall be provided where the pedestrian access route enters a crosswalk or other hazardous vehicular area. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-4 3. Parallel Curb Ramps a. Within the public right-of-way, detectable warnings complying with TAS 705 at a minimum of 24” in depth (in the direction of pedestrian travel) and extending the full width of the landing shall be provided where the pedestrian access route enters a crosswalk or other hazardous vehicular area. 4. Diagonal Curb Ramps a. Within the public right-of-way, detectable warnings complying with TAS 705 at a minimum of 24” in depth (in the direction of pedestrian travel) and extending the full width of the curb ramp or landing, shall be provided where the pedestrian access route enters a crosswalk or other hazardous vehicular area. b. The detectable warning shall be curved with the radius of the corner. 5. The detectable warning shall be located so that the edge nearest the curb line is 6” minimum and 10” maximum from the curb line. 6. Abutting curbs, sidewalks, gutters, driveways, etc. shall not receive textured surfacing. F. Pavement Markings for Street Crossings 1. Shall be placed such that the crosswalk is properly aligned with respect to the Curb Ramp. Curb ramp must be wholly contained within cross walk markings. 2. Proper alignment of striping with respect to intersection and curb ramp shall be done in accordance with ADA Standards, and the Drawings. 3. All stripping shall be in accordance with the standard details and specifications of the local governing entity. 3.10 Curing A. Within twenty (20) minutes of the surface being textured the curing compound shall be applied. B. Shall be as outlined in the Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING will be acceptable with a required curing period of seventy-two (72) hours, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. C. Concrete must be protected from freezing temperatures for at least three (3) days. 3.11 Backfill and Grading A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. B. Grading shall promote positive drainage. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 DRIVEWAYS 32 16 33-1 SECTION 32 16 33 DRIVEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Driveways as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 Submittals A. roduct Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this item shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification, Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel A. Reinforcing steel, if required, shall conform to the requirements as specified in the specification, Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. B. All steel shall be grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint filler shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and as noted on the Drawings. B. Cap seal shall be Greenstreak #610 or approved equal installed over expansion joint filler. 2.04 Backfill A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Shall be constructed in sections of the lengths and widths shown on Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise provided by the Drawings, no section shall be a length less than eight-feet (8’). 2. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint. C. All work per day shall terminate at expansion joints. D. Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Foundation A. Excavation shall be shaped to line, grade per typical cross section, and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Forms A. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Owner. B. Be straight, free from warp, and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. C. Shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. D. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3.04 Reinforcing Steel Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 DRIVEWAYS 32 16 33-2 A. The reinforcing steel, if required, shall be placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.05 Joints A. Expansion Joints 1. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39’-0” on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. a. If attached to curb and gutter than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the curb and gutter, unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Joint shall be 3/4” and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. 3. Where the driveway abuts a retaining wall, sidewalk, curb, or other hard surface expansion joint shall be placed along the entire length. 4. Expansion joint shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through driveways. 5. Dowels a. The dowel shall be extended across the joint nine inches (9”) minimum and be sleeved or greased. b. When adjacent to existing curb and gutter or to existing sidewalk dowels shall be drilled into the existing concrete on eighteen-inch (18”) on centers. 3.06 Control Joints 1. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at a maximum of 4’-0” on centers or evenly spaced between expansion joints, or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Shall be 1/2” depth by 1/8” width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.07 Concrete Placement A. Concrete shall be mixed and placed in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. B. The subgrade and reinforcement shall be slightly moist at the time the concrete is placed. C. Shall be placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. 3.08 Finishing A. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden or metal float to a smooth gritty texture. B. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with a one-half inch (1/2”) radius with approved tools or as shown on Drawings. C. Surface Finish 1. Shall be broom finish or as noted on the Drawings a. The surface shall be textured with a heavy broom finish perpendicular to the common travel way. 2. Other Finish a. The surface shall be as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Curing A. Within twenty (20) minutes of the surface being textured the curing compound shall be applied. B. Other methods of curing as outlined in the specification Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. C. Concrete must be protected from freezing temperatures for at least three (3) days. 3.10 Backfill and Grading A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. B. Grading shall promote positive drainage Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 321713 – PRECAST CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Precast Concrete Parking Bumpers 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product specified within this specification. 1.4 COORDINATION A.Coordinate Work of this Section with work of other sections in which items are to be installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PARKING BUMPERS A.Provide precast concrete parking bumpers of half octagonal configuration and dimensions indicated. Unless indicated otherwise, provide bumpers of 36-inch length. 1.Bumpers shall be manufactured of Class 4000 reinforced concrete, to withstand constant use and rough service. Each bumper shall be reinforced with two No. 4 deformed steel reinforcing bars, minimum. 2.Each bumper to be installed on at-grade asphalt pavement shall be manufactured with two holes to accommodate the installation rebar. Holes shall be positioned 6 inches in from each end. 3.Bumpers to be installed on concrete slabs of parking structures, shall be manufactured without holes. B.Adhesive: Adhesive for anchoring bumpers or wheel stops to pavement shall be an epoxy adhesive manufactured for the purpose, similar and equal to the adhesives specified in Section 95 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Article 95-2.04 or 95-2.05. C.Steel Bars for Installation: Epoxy-coated rebar, No. 5 size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine existing conditions where items are indicated to be installed. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A.Precast concrete bumpers shall be anchored and secured in position on at-grade asphalt pavements, as indicated, with two No. 5 epoxy-coated rebar and an appropriate epoxy adhesive as specified in Article 2.01.B herein. B.Precast concrete bumpers shall secured in position on at-grade concrete pavements, as indicated, with an appropriate epoxy adhesive as specified in Article 2.01.B herein. END OF SECTION 320100 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-1 SECTION 32 17 23.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing, installation, and removal of painted pavement markings as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD) B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 666 “Reflectorized Pavement Markings” C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 678 “Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings” D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Materials Specification DMS-8200, Traffic Paint E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Materials Specification DMS-8220, Hot Applied Thermoplastic F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Materials Specification DMS-8290, Glass Traffic Beads G. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-828-B H. National Board of Fire Underwriters I. Texas Railroad Commission 1.03 Submittals A. The Contractor shall furnish a certified report on the quality of materials ordered for the work. 1. This report shall not be interpreted as a basis for final acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Type I and Type II Marking Materials A. Shall be thermoplastic in accordance with TxDOT Item 666. B. Containers shall be clearly marked with the following information: 1. Color 2. Mass 3. Material Type 4. Manufacturer 5. Manufacturing Date 6. Batch Number 2.02 Glass Traffic Beads A. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 666. B. Containers shall be clearly marked with the following information: 1. Color 2. Mass 3. Material Type 4. Manufacturer 5. Manufacturing Date 6. Batch Number 2.03 Abrasive-blasting Medium A. Shall be of commercial quality and capable of producing the specified surface cleanliness. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, TMUTCD, manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-2 B. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the sequencing of the work and estimate the daily production. C. If roadway is currently open to traffic, the placement of markings shall minimally interfere with the operations of the roadway. 1. Use traffic control as shown on the Drawings and/or as directed by the Owner. D. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform work or services necessary for complete and proper construction of the completed system of pavement markings. E. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, permanent pavement markings on newly constructed pavements surfaced with asphaltic concrete or bituminous seals shall not be applied for a minimum of fourteen (14) days or a maximum thirty-five (35) days. 1. Temporary pavement marking shall be provided during the fourteen (14) to thirty-five (35) day period. 3.02 Storage of Materials A. All materials shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Materials shall be stored within a weatherproof enclosure and protected from damage. 3.03 Surface Preparation A. Equipment 1. Furnish and maintain equipment in good working condition. 2. Equipment shall be able to prepare concrete and asphaltic surfaces in such a manner that the pavement surface will not be damaged. 3. Air Blasting Equipment a. Use moisture and oil traps to remove all contaminants from blasting air and prevent disposition of moisture, oil, or other contaminants on the roadway surface. B. Construction 1. Prepare pavement surface of sufficient area for the pavement marking as recommended by the manufacturer, TxDOT Item 678, shown on the Drawings, and/or as directed by the Owner. 2. Immediately before application of the paint marking material, the existing surface shall be dry and entirely free from dirt, grease, oil, acids, laitance, or other foreign matter which would reduce the bond between the marking and the pavement. 3. Remove all contamination and loose material from pavement surface by sweeping, air blasting, flail milling, blast cleaning, or as recommended by the manufacturer, directed on the Drawings or by the Owner. a. Contaminates up to 0.5 square inch may remain if they are not removed by the following test which is preformed just prior to applying marking material: 1) Air-blast the surface to simulate blasting during application, 2) Firmly press a ten-inch (10”) by two-inch (2”) wide strip of monofilament tape onto surface, leaving two-inch (2”) end free, 3) Firmly grasp the two-inch (2”) free end and remove with a quick pull. 4. When existing marking material is present all loose and flaking material shall be removed by approved method(s). C. Pavement Sealer for Type I Marking Material 1. Pavements less than three (3) years old a. No sealer required unless recommended by manufacturer or noted on Drawings. 2. Pavements greater than three (3) years old a. Pavement shall be sealed as recommended by the manufacturer or in accordance with the following: 1) Seal pavement with Type II marking or an acrylic or epoxy sealer. 2) Sealer shall be of same configuration and color as the Type I marking unless noted on the Drawings. D. Dryness Test 1. Prior to marking placement the pavement shall be tested for dryness by the following method: a. Type I Marking Material 1) Place a sample of marking material on a piece of tarpaper on the pavement. 2) Allow material to cool to ambient air temperature, and then inspect the underside of the tarpaper in contact with pavement. 3) Pavement is considered dry if there is no condensation on the tarpaper. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-3 b. Type II Marking Material 1) Place a one (1) square foot piece of clear plastic on the pavement during a sunny day. 2) The pavement is considered dry if after fifteen (15) minutes no condensation has occurred on the underside of the plastic. 3.04 Marking Equipment A. General 1. Equipment shall be maintained in satisfactory condition. 2. Equipment shall meet or exceed the requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Texas Railroad Commission. 3. All equipment for the work shall be approved by the Owner and shall include the apparatus necessary to clean the existing surface, mechanical marking machine, and such auxiliary hand marking equipment as may be necessary to satisfactorily complete the job. 4. The mechanical marker shall be an approved atomizing spray-type marking machine. 5. It shall produce an even and uniform film thickness at the required coverage and shall be designed to apply markings of uniform cross sections and clear-out edges without running of spattering and within the limits for straightness set forth herein up to a width of eight-inches (8”). 6. Suitable adjustments shall be provided on the sprayer(s) of a single machine or by furnishing additional equipment for marking the width required. 7. For Type I a hand-held thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the marking material when applied. 3.05 Layouts and Alignments A. Suitable layouts and lines of proposed stripes shall be spotted in advance of the marking application. B. Control points shall be spaced at such intervals as will insure accurate location of all markings. C. The Contractor shall provide an experience technician to supervise the location, alignment, layout, dimensions, and application of the marking. 3.06 Weather A. The suitability of the weather shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and by the Owner. B. If the Contractor decides to place markings when inclement weather is impending then all markings damaged due to weather shall be replaced at the Contractors sole expense. 3.07 Application A. General 1. Marking shall be applied at the locations and to the dimensions and spacing indicated on the Drawings or as specified. 2. Marking shall not be applied until the layouts, indicated alignment, and the condition of the existing surface have been approved by the Owner. 3. All marking shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner. 4. The Owner shall be notified upon arrival of shipment or inspecting and sampling of the materials. B. Straightness and Width Tolerances 1. In the application of straight stripes, any deviation of the edges exceeding one-inch (1”) in fifty-feet (50’) shall be obliterated and the marking corrected at the Contractors sole expense. 2. The width of the markings shall be as designated within a tolerance of five-percent (5%). C. Type I Markings 1. Place Type I sealer in accordance with the following and allow to cure: a. Type II paint shall be in accordance with Type II application requirements of this specification. b. Acrylic sealer shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. c. Epoxy sealer shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 2. Apply within the temperature recommendations of the manufacturer. 3. If during application, the operation ceases for five (5) minutes or longer the spray head shall be flushed until the material returns to recommended temperatures. 4. Apply only to pavement surface which is clean and passes the Dryness Test of this specification. 5. For concrete pavement, the surface shall be air-blasted just prior to placing the marking material. a. Air compressor shall be able to generate compressed air at a minimum of 150 cfm and 100 psi using 5/16-inch (5/16”) or larger hose. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-4 6. The marking shall be applied only when the existing surface is dry and clean, when the surface temperature is above 50° F or as recommended by the manufacture, and when the weather is not excessively windy, dusty, or foggy. 7. Thickness a. Minimum 1) New Markings and Retracing water-based markings on surface treatments a) 0.100-inch (100 mils) 2) Retracing on thermoplastic markings a) 0.060-inch (60 mils) 3) All other Type I markings a) 0.90-inch (90 mils) b. Maximum 1) All markings a) 0.180-inch (180 mils) D. Type II Markings 1. Paint shall be applied uniformly by suitable equipment at a rate as recommended by the manufacture and which will result in the required thickness to cover the pavement surface of width and length as required by the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 2. Apply within the temperature recommendations of the manufacturer. 3. If during application, the operation ceases for five (5) minutes or longer the spray head shall be flushed until the material returns to recommended consistency. 4. Apply only to pavement surface which is clean and passes the Dryness Test of this specification. 5. For concrete pavement, the surface shall be air-blasted just prior to placing the marking material. a. Air compressor shall be able to generate compressed air at a minimum of 150 cfm and 100 psi using 5/16-inch (5/16”) or larger hose. 6. The marking shall be applied only when the existing surface is dry and clean, when the surface temperature is above 50° F or as recommended by the manufacture, and when the weather is not excessively windy, dusty, or foggy. E. Glass Traffic Beads 1. Apply beads on top of all Type I and Type II marking material almost instantly after placing the marking material. 2. Provide a uniform distribution of beads across the surface of the stripe with a forty-percent (40%) to sixty-percent (60%) embedment. 3.08 Protection of Markings A. After application, all markings shall be protected while curing. B. The fresh markings shall be protected from damage of any kind. C. The Contractor shall be directly responsible for the protection of markings and shall erect or place suitable warning signs, flags or barricades, protective screens, or coverings as required. D. All surfaces shall be protected from disfiguration by spatter, splashes, spillage, drippings of paint or other materials. E. If markings are damaged or disfigured due to traffic, construction equipment, or construction method the Contractor shall replace the marking at his expense. 3.09 Eliminating Pavement Markings A. Equipment 1. Furnish and maintain equipment in good working condition. 2. Equipment shall be able to eliminate markings on concrete and asphaltic surfaces in such a manner that the color and texture of the pavement surface will be held to a minimum. 3. Air Blasting Equipment a. Use moisture and oil traps to remove all contaminants from blasting air and prevent disposition of moisture, oil, or other contaminants on the roadway surface. B. Marking Removal 1. Asphaltic Surface a. Method of removal may be completed by any of the following: 1) Surface Treatment Method Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-5 a) Apply surface treatment material at a rate shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. b) Place a surface treatment a minimum of two-foot (2’) wide to cover the existing marking. c) Place a surface treatment thin overlay, or microsurfacing a minimum of one (1) lane in width in areas where directional changes of traffic occur or as directed by the Owner. d) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 2) Burn Method a) Use an approved burning method. b) For thermoplastic pavement markings or prefabricated pavement markings, heat may be applied to remove the bulk of the material prior to blast cleaning. When using heat, avoid spalling pavement surface. c) Sweeping or light blast cleaning may be used to remove minor residue. d) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 3) Blasting Method a) Use an approved blasting method such as water blasting, abrasive blasting, water abrasive blasting, shot blasting, slurry blasting, water-injected abrasive blasting, or brush blasting as approved. b) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 4) Mechanical Method a) Use any mechanical method except grinding. b) Flail milling is acceptable in the removal of markings. c) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 2. Concrete Surface a. Method of removal may be completed by any of the following: 1) Blasting Method a) Use an approved blasting method such as water blasting, abrasive blasting, water abrasive blasting, shot blasting, slurry blasting, water-injected abrasive blasting, or brush blasting as approved. b) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 2) Mechanical Method a) Use any mechanical method except grinding. b) Flail milling is acceptable in the removal of markings. c) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 3.10 Marking Material Containers A. When required, all emptied containers shall be returned to the paint material storage or made available for tallying by the Owner. B. The containers shall not be removed from the job site or destroyed without permission. C. The Contractor shall make an accurate accounting of the paint materials used in the accepted work. D. All containers shall be disposed of in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations 3.11 Clean Up A. At all times, the project site shall be kept free of all unnecessary traffic hazards. B. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish from the work site, and shall clean and restore the area to a manner acceptable to the Owner. C. Also, all damage done by the Contractor during the prosecution of the work must be repaired. D. Before acceptance, the work site must be neat and in a presentable condition throughout. E. Disposal of materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and completed in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 3.12 Defective Workmanship or Material Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-6 A. When any material not conforming to the requirement of the specifications or Drawings has been delivered to the project or incorporated in the work or any work performed is of inferior quality, such material or work shall be corrected as directed by the Owner, at the expense of the Contractor. 3.13 Performance Requirements A. Adhesion 1. Installed pavement markings shall adhere to the pavement sufficiently to prevent lifting, shifting, smearing, spreading, flowing or tearing by traffic. B. Appearance 1. In addition to complying with all requirements listed herein, pavement markings shall present a neat, uniform appearance, and shall be free of unsightly conditions caused by spread of excess adhesive. C. Visibility 1. The pavement marking material, in place on the roadway, shall have uniform and distinctive retro reflectance when observed in accordance with TxDOT Tex-828-B. D. Observation Period 1. All material, workmanship and labor furnished shall be covered by manufacturers guarantee and/or warranty for a period of twelve (12) months commencing on final delivery date of materials. 3.14 Performance Period A. All markings and replacement markings that fail to meet all requirements of this specification and Tex- 828-B for a minimum of thirty (30) calendar days after installation shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. B. Markings and replacement markings failing to meet the performance requirements shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor within thirty (30) calendar days after notification at his expense. 1. All replacement pavement markings shall also meet all requirements of this specification for the same warranty period after installation. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 321823.13 – BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL “RED INFIELD DIRT” PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1.Red infield dirt. B.Related Sections: 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Samples, provide sample of “Red Infield Dirt”. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 “Red Infield Dirt” A.Infield 1.“Red Infield Dirt”. This material shall be a red sandy clay loam mixture. All of the soil used in the skinned area shall pass through a 3/8 inch wire screen. A minimum of 97% should pass through a number 8 sieve, and of the remaining 97%, at least 60% should pass through a number 140 sieve. 2.Infield Gradiation Soil Percent (%) Sand 60 - 80% Silt 10 - 20% Clay 15 - 20% 3. Infield Conditioner. a.“Diamond Pro Red Infield Conditioner” or approved substitution. 4.Infield Top Dressing. a.“Diamond Pro Calcined Clay Top Dressing” or approved substitution. B.Home Plate and Pitchers Circle. Batter’s box, catcher’s box and pitchers circle shall be a screened clay loam with a rich red color. Mixture of sand, silt and clay shall be in approximate equal retained percentage proportions. Use “Diamond Pro Home Plate/Mound Clay” or approved equivalent material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A.Provide written verification that infield Sub-grade and Sub-grade Drains are in place and properly compacted, and to grade before proceeding with installation of infield and warning track materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.Infield 1.Turf Contractor shall have laid out the skinned infield, excavated the area to Subgrade elevations, and installed wooden form boards on all dirt perimeters prior to installation of the infield materials. 2.Infield. Red Infield dirt material shall be back dumped onto the Subgrade and spread by track mounted tractor to a thickness of 4-1/2” (compacted). The red infield dirt shall be graded using automated hydraulically actuated laser guided equipment. Compact topping material by thoroughly wetting. 3.Infield Conditioner. After infield material is compacted in place and to grade, infield conditioner 1-1/2” thick (compacted) shall be applied to the 4-1/2” of infield material. Thoroughly blend the total 6” of Red infield dirt and Infield Conditioner and compact. The infield should then be screen dragged to game ready conditions. The infield should then be rolled using a 2-4 ton double barrel roller. 4.Infield Dressing. The Infield Top Dressing shall then be applied evenly covering the infield material. With a light weight screen drag the field should be dragged to final game ready conditions. 5.Home Plate and Pitchers Circle. Install clay loam soil in the batter’s box, catcher’s box and pitchers circle to a depth of 9” to finish grade. Clay loam soil shall be compacted to 95% maximum density ASTM-D698. B.All finish surfaces on infield shall be to elevations shown on the drawings and smooth graded END OF SECTION 321823.13 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 323113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Chain-link fences. 2.Swing gates. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, equipment bases, and other preparatory work specified elsewhere. 2.Review coordination of interlocked equipment specified in this Section and elsewhere. 3.Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. 4.. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. 1.Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a.Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings. b. Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments. c.Accessories: . d.Gates and hardware. B.Shop Drawings: For each type of fence and gate assembly. 1.Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2.Include accessories, hardware, gate operation, and operational clearances. 3.Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C.Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-applied finish. D.Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural performance of chain-link fence and gate frameworks, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.Qualification Data: For . B.Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence, and gate. C.Product Test Reports: For framework strength according to ASTM F 1043, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency . D.Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A.Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements. 1.7 WARRANTY A.Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.Failure to comply with performance requirements. b.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2.Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC A.General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist according to "CLFMI Product Manual" and requirements indicated below: 1.Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings. 2.Steel Wire for Fabric: Wire diameter of 9 gauge . a.Mesh Size: 2.0 inches. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 b.Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 1, 2.0 oz./sq. ft. with zinc coating applied before weaving. c.Coat selvage ends of metallic-coated fabric before the weaving process with manufacturer's standard clear protective coating. 3.Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages . 2.2 FENCE FRAMEWORK A.Posts and Rails: ASTM F 1043 for framework, including rails, braces, and line; terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness according to ASTM F 1043 or ASTM F 1083 based on the following: 1.Fence Height: As indicated on drawings . 2. Heavy-Industrial-Strength Material: Group IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40 . a.Line Post: 1)Up to 6’: 1.9 inches in diameter 2) 6’-0” to 8’-0”: 2.375 inches in diameter 3) 8’-0” to 10’-0”: 2.875 inches in diameter 4) 10’-0” to 14’-0”: 3.5 inches in diameter 5) 14’-0” to 16’-0”: 4.0 inches in diameter b.End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 1)All heights: 4.0 inches in diameter . 3.Horizontal Framework Members: Intermediate top and bottom rails according to ASTM F 1043. a.Top Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter. b.Bottom Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter. c.Intermediate Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter. 4.Brace Rails: ASTM F 1043. 5.Metallic Coating for Steel Framework: a. Type A: Not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. average zinc coating according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or 4.0-oz./sq. ft. zinc coating according to ASTM A 653/A 653M. 2.3 SWING GATES A.General: ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single swing gate types. 1.Gate Leaf Width: As indicated on drawings . 2.Framework Member Sizes and Strength: Based on gate fabric height of 72 inches or less . Gate fabric height up to and including 6 ft. (1.2m) Gate leaf width Post Outside Diameter up to 4 ft. (1.2 m) 2.375 in. (60.3 mm) over 4 ft. to 10 ft. (1.2 to 3.05 m) 2.875 in. (73.0 mm) over 10 ft. to 18 ft. (3.05 to 5.5 m) 4.000 in. (101.6 mm) Gate fabric height over 6 ft. to 12 ft. (1.2 to 2.4m) Gate leaf width up to 6 ft. (1.8 m) 2.875 in. (73.0 mm) over 6 ft. to 12 ft. (1.8 to 3.7 m) 4.000 in. (101.6 mm) over 12 ft. to 18 ft. (2.4 to 5.5 m) 6.625 in. (168.3 mm) over 18 ft. to 24 ft. (5.5 to 7.3 m) 8.625 in. (219.1 mm) B.Pipe and Tubing: 1.Zinc-Coated Steel: ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective coating and finish to match fence framework . 2.Gate Posts: Round tubular steel . 3.Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel . C.Frame Corner Construction: Welded . D.Hardware: 1.Hinges: 360-degree inward and outward swing. 2.Latch: Permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking accessible from both sides of gate. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3.Lock: Manufacturer's standard internal device. 4.Padlock and Chain: . 5.Closer: Manufacturer's standard. 2.4 FITTINGS A.Provide fittings according to ASTM F 626. B.Post Caps: Provide for each post. 1.Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail. C.Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post. D.Rail Fittings: Provide the following: 1.Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches long. 2.Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting intermediate and bottom rails to posts. E.Tension and Brace Bands: Pressed steel. F.Tension Bars: Steel , length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post. G.Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626. 1.Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, according to the following: a. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 0.148-inch- diameter wire ; galvanized coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric. H.Finish: 1.Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 2.0 oz./sq. ft. of zinc. 2.5 CONCRETE A.Concrete for post footings shall have a 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi. (17.2 MPa). 2.6 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A.Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications. B.Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating, and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer for exterior applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for a certified survey of property lines and legal boundaries, site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 3.3 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION A.Install chain-link fencing according to ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified. 1.Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line. B.Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. C.Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 1.Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. 2.Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a.Concealed Concrete: Place top of concrete 2 inches below grade to allow covering with surface material. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 D.Terminal Posts: Install terminal end, corner, and gate posts according to ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 30 degrees or more . For runs exceeding 500 feet, space pull posts an equal distance between corner or end posts. E.Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 96 inches o.c. F.Post Bracing and Intermediate Rails: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fence posts. Diagonally brace terminal posts to adjacent line posts with truss rods and turnbuckles. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. 1.Locate horizontal braces at midheight of fabric 72 inches or higher, on fences with top rail, and at two- third fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. G.Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fence posts. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch- diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 24 inches o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric. Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations: 1.Shall be installed 4 in. (101.6 mm) up from the bottom of the fabric. Fences without top rail shall have a tension wire installed 4 in. (101.6 mm) down from the top of the fabric. Tension wire to be stretched taut, independently and prior to the fabric, between the terminal posts and secured to the terminal post using a brace band. Secure the tension wire to the chain link fabric with a 9 gauge hog rings 18 in. (457.2 mm) on center and to each line post with a tie wire.. H.Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fence posts. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer. I.Intermediate and Bottom Rails: Secure to posts with fittings. J.Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 1-inch bottom clearance between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released. K.Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts, with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches o.c. L.Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric according to ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing. 1.Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches o.c. and to braces at 24 inches o.c. M.Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. 3.4 GATE INSTALLATION A.Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.5 ADJUSTING A.Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B.Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. END OF SECTION 323113 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 323132 - COMPOSITE FENCES & GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A.Privacy fencing and gates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A.All wood materials shall be treated wood, or wood of a natural resistance to decay. Materials shall be free from loose knots, cracks, and other imperfections. 2.2 FENCE SLATS A.Fence slats shall be square edge, solid composite boards. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide TREX, Transcend Square Edge Board, or a comparable product. a.Nominal Dimensions: 1 inch thick X 6 inch wide. 2.3 POSTS A.Posts shall be pressure treated wood for severe weather. B.Line posts shall be 4-inch by 4-inch nominal. 1.Line post spacing shall not exceed 72 inches. C.Man Gate posts shall be 4-inch by 4-inch nominal. D.Drive Gate posts shall be at minimum dual 6-inch by 6-inch nominal. 2.4 RAILS A.Rails shall be pressure treated wood for severe weather. B.Top, bottom and intermediate rails shall be 2-inch by 4-inch nominal. 2.5 GATES A.Provide additional horizontal, vertical, and diagonal members to ensure proper gate operation and for attachment of wood, hardware and accessories. Consult manufacturer as necessary. B.Accessibility: Gate stops, latches and locks shall be accessible from either side of gate. C.Types: Gates. 1.Man Gates a.Openings shall be a minimum of 3 feet wide. 2.Vehicle Gates a.Openings shall be a minimum of 12 feet wide. 2.6 GATE HARDWARE A.Gate hardware including, but not limited to, latches, hinges, stops and bolts shall be galvanized. B.Hinges and Pins shall be heavy duty and sized as per manufacturer's recommendations. C.For vehicle gates (double-leaf), a drop rod or stop shall be installed on one leaf, include at least one guide and shall extend into concrete base or similarly solid base. D.Dual access (accessible and lockable from either side) latch and lock systems are required on all gates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for a verified survey of property lines and legal boundaries, site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION. A.Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet (152.5 m)or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 3.3 LAYOUT OF WORK A.Insure that in no circumstance shall a fence or gate be located outside the property line. B.Gate location shall be as indicated on the drawings. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF POSTS A.Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate 12 inch diameter holes for posts and at spacing indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 B.Provide 3 inches of dry gravel at bottom of the hole. Maintain minimum 30 inches of post embedment. C.Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 1.Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. D.Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect above ground portion of posts from concrete splatter. E.Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at maximum 72 inches o.c. F.Top, Bottom and Intermediate Rails: Install maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. 1.Attached top, bottom, and intermediate rails with galvanized nails or coated screws for exterior use with minimum 2 ½ inch embedment. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF FENCE SLATS A.Install fence slats vertical with 1/4 inch gap between each slats. 1.Attach fence slats to top, bottom and intermediate rails with coated screws for exterior use with minimum 1 ½ inch embedment. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF GATES A.Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage as recommended by the fence manufacturer. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. B.Man Gates: 1.Shall be installed as indicated on drawings. 2.Shall open/close in direction as indicated on drawings. C.Vehicle Gates: 1.Shall be installed as indicated on drawings. 2.Shall open/close in direction as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 323132 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SITE TABLES 323343.53 - 1 SECTION 323343.53 – SITE TABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Site picnic table. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.Maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SITE TABLES A.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide BCI Burke Company, LLC,, or comparable product. 1. PT-1 - 6’ Recycled Plastic Table. 2. PT-2 - 8’ ADAAG Recycled Plastic Table. 2.2 MATERIALS A.Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following: 1.Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A500/A500M. a.Zinc-Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 0.9 oz./sq. ft. of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, polymer film. Internal, same as external or consisting of 81 percent zinc pigmented coating, not less than 0.3 mil thick. b. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A123/A123M, ASTM A153/A153M, or ASTM A924/A924M. B.Wood: Surfaced smooth on four sides with eased edges; kiln dried, free of knots, solid stock of species indicated. 1.Wood Species: a.Pine: Southern pine; No. 2 or better. 2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A.Preservative Treatment: Pressure-treat wood according to AWPA U1, Use Category UC3b, and the following: 1.Use preservative chemicals acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 2.Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 and 15 percent. Do not use materials that are warped or do not comply with requirements for untreated materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required. B.Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed. C.Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and positioned at locations indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION 323343.53 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 323346 - DECORATIVE CHAIN BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A.Section Includes: 1. Decorative chain barrier. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For each type of product. B.Shop Drawings: For decorative chain barrier. 1.Include plans, elevations, sections, gate locations, post spacing, and mounting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DECORATIVE CHAIN BARRIER Decorative Chain Barrier: Post and chain barrier. 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hoover Fence Co.; Snug Cottage Hardware, Central Park Cap and Post, Item # 5200-48A-P or comparable product. B.Posts: Heavy duty aluminum extruded "I" beam. 1.60 inch with 36 inch exposure. C.Post Caps: Cast aluminum and secured to the post with set screws. D.Chain: 5/16-inch, black polyester powder coated, hot dipped galvanized steel chain. E.Hardware: Provide all required hardware and appurtenances for a complete installation. 2.2 ALUMINUM AND STEEL FINISHES A.Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603, Manufacturer’s standard powder coating dry film thickness. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, 3-inch slump, and 1-inch maximum aggregate size or dry, packaged, normal-weight concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387/C 387M mixed with potable water according to manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.Do not begin installation before final grading is completed. C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A.Stake locations of decorative chain barrier posts. 3.3 DECORATIVE CHAIN BARRIER INSTALLATION A.Install decorative chain barrier according to manufacturer's written instructions. B.Install decorative chain barrier by setting posts as indicated and fastening cap & chain to posts with manufacturer’s standard recommended hardware. C.Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil. Excavate holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of not less than 24 inches plus 3 inches for each foot or fraction of a foot that decorative chain barrier height exceeds 4 feet. D.Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 1.Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. 2.Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect above ground portion of posts from concrete splatter. a.Concealed Concrete: Top 2 inches below grade as indicated on Drawings to allow covering with surface material. Slope top surface of concrete to drain water away from post. b.Extend post to within 6 inches of specified excavation depth, but not closer than 3 inches to bottom of concrete. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3.Space posts uniformly at 4 feet o.c. or as indicated on the drawings. 3.4 ADJUSTING A.Adjust hardware and other moving parts. END OF SECTION 323346 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 1 IRRIGATION - SECTION 32 84 00 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for the installation of a complete and operational automatic Landscape Irrigation system as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. The work includes: 1.Trenching, excavation, backfill including base and backfill materials. 2.Valve wiring associated with the system. 3.Maintenance of the system during the maintenance period. 4.Electrical wiring/conduit work associated with the controller. 5.Connection to water supply lines. 6.Connecting to existing irrigation zones, flushing of existing lines, and repair if required. 7.Installation of booster pump and all associated masonry work, electrical and plumbing connections. 1.03 STANDARDS & DEFINITIONS A.Unless otherwise shown or specified, all materials and methods shall conform to the applicable current sections of: 1.National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61 Drinking Water System Components 2.Texas Commission on Environmental Quality, Chapter 344 and Chapter 210 B.ASTM International Standards (latest revisions) as they apply to this work and related test methods, including: 1.A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 2.D1557 Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 3.D1784 Specification for Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds 4.D1785 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 5.D2241 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR) 6.D2287 Specification for Non-rigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer, Copolymer Molding, &Extrusion Compounds 7.D2464 Specification for Threaded Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 8.D2466 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 9.D2467 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 10.D2564 Specification for Solvent Cements for Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Piping Systems 11.D2609 Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe 12.D2672 Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement 13.D2737 Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing 14.D2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings 15.D3350 Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials 16.F477 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe. 17.F656 Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings 18.F690 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping Irrigation Systems 19.F1498 Specification for Taper Pipe Threads 60° for Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings C.AWWA Standards (latest revisions) as they apply to this work and related test methods, including: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 2 1. C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In.- 12 In. for Water Transmission and Distribution D. All materials and methods shall conform to the applicable standards of the following organizations: 1. American Society of Irrigation Consultants (ASIC) Design Guidelines for Earth Grounding Electronic Equipment in Irrigation Systems 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Standards 3. American Welding Society (AWS) Specifications 4. Copper Development Association: Copper Tube Handbook. 5. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) Standards 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards 7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards E. Relative compaction: is defined as the in-place dry density of the compacted soil divided by the laboratory compacted maximum dry density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557, expressed as a percentage. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: All materials shall be new and of the best quality available unless otherwise specified. Manufacturer shall be clearly marked on all material, containers, or certificates of contents for inspection. B. Codes: Install and test irrigation system and electrical power to controller in accordance with TCEQ standards and all local codes and manufacturer's specifications. C. Guarantee: Guarantee irrigation system for one year from date of acceptance. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Product data: all specified irrigation equipment, including any proposed substitutions. B. Certification: Prior to the Substantial Completion Review submit to the Architect: 1. Written statement that the controller has been grounded adequately from the controller manufacturer’s representative or other qualified testing professional. C. Drawings: Irrigation As-built Drawing(s) and Valve Stationing Plan(s). D. Close-out Documentation: As specified herein. 1.06 REVIEWS A. Request at least five (5) days in advance the following reviews prior to progressing with the work: 1. Preliminary Review – Main-line layout, trenching, pressure-test, flushing of main-line. 2. Intermediate Review - Irrigation coverage, controller locations. Requirements for irrigation coverage review are specified herein. 3. Substantial Completion Review - valve box inspection, and overall operation of the irrigation system. 4. Final Review (at the completion of Maintenance Period) - all punch-list items identified at Substantial Completion Review, Close-out Documentation 5. Each review will be conducted only after all items pertaining to that review as noted above and in related Sections have been completed. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 3 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Exercise care in loading, unloading, storage, and handling of pipe, fittings, and irrigation equipment. B. Remove any pipe / fittings that have been cracked, dented, or otherwise damaged from the site. If installed, replace pipe / fittings with undamaged pipe / fittings as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 UTILITIES A. Contractor shall verify location of all on site utilities prior to trenching. Notify Architect by telephone and in writing of any conflicts prior to installation. Restoration of damaged utilities shall be made at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Architect. 1.09 CODES A. Irrigation system and electrical power to controller shall be installed and tested in accordance with local codes and manufacturer's specifications. 1.10 TESTING A. A licensed testing agency is to test the backflow preventer prior to substantial completion. Submit test results certificate to Owner as part of Substantial Completion review for Landscape Maintenance Period authorization. B. Mainline pressure testing as specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Unless otherwise noted: 1. Lateral Lines shall be Schedule-40 PVC, solvent weld joints. 2. Main lines shall be Class 200-PVC Rubber Ring Joint w/ fittings. 3. Risers and Nipples: Schedule 80 PVC, molded thread. Machine threaded nipples will not be permitted. 4. Pipe Thread Sealant: low VOC soft setting multi-purpose sealant, ASTM D2564, Weld-On All Seal by IPS Corporation or approved equal. 5. PVC cement: low VOC high strength solvent weld cement, ASTM D2564, Weld-On 2711 by IPS Corporation or approved equal. 6. Primer: low VOC primer, ASTM F656, Weld-On P-70 by IPS Corporation or approved equal. 7. Ensure that cans of solvents and primers have labels intact and stamped with the date of manufacture. Do not use cans dated over 1-year old. Do not thin solvents and primers. B. Reclaimed Water: All plastic pipe shall be manufactured from purple-colored PVC material and shall be printed on two sides with the wording "CAUTION-RECLAIMED WATER" every 24 inches along pipe. 2.02 SLEEVING A. Sleeves: As indicated in the General Notes on the Drawing. 2.03 VALVE BOXES A. General: Pre-cast plastic with bolt-down covers free of all cracks, chips or structural defects. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 4 1. Size: valve boxes as required by equipment plus adequate clearance to operate valves unless otherwise noted. 2. Color: unless otherwise noted on the Drawings: Purple. B. Models / Types: 1. Turf/Gravel areas: ribbed / reinforced lids capable of withstanding the loads of ride-on lawn mowers. Carson TrussT Line, Rainbird VB Series, NDS Pro Plus Series or approved equal. 2. Vehicular paving: concrete with traffic rated lids. C. Valve identification tags: Christy’s ID Tags by T.Christy Enterprises, Anaheim CA, (800)258-4583, or approved equal. 2.04 IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT A. General: Supply and install irrigation equipment as shown on the Drawings, or Equal. 2.05 CONDUCTORS A. The two-wire shall have the following operating voltage: 600 V RMS max B. The two-wire shall have the following temperature rating: 140°F (60°C) C. The two-wire shall meet one criterion within each of the following categories: 1. Outer Jacket a. High density polyethylene (HDPE) between 0.035” and 0.048” thick, conforming to ICEA S-61-402 and NEMA WC5 2. Conductors - two of the same gauge, conforming to ASTM B-33, B-3, or B-8 a. Bare copper b. Tin coated solid copper 3. Conductor Arrangement a. Conductors that are twisted b. Conductors that are laid in parallel 4. Conductor Insulation a. Low density, high molecular weight polyethylene (PE) with a thickness of 0.045” b. PVC conforming to UL-493 or UL-719 for thermoplastic-insulated style UF (Underground Feeder) 5. Conductor Color Coding a. Black & red (recommended) b. Black & white c. Blue & red Wire Path D. The two-wire path may be looped, spliced, or branched permitting extensions of the path in multiple directions. E. The distance from the controller to the end of any one wire run shall not exceed the maximum distance specified for the gauge of wire. F. The distance from the controllers to the farthest device shall not exceed a distance of 5000 feet (1524 m) using 14-gauge wire or 8000 feet (2438.4 m) using 12-gauge wire. G. The total length of wire connected to any one controller shall not exceed 16,000 feet (4572 m) on 14-gauge or 12-gauge. H. All splices shall be made in a valve box. Wire Installation Details I. The two-wire shall be laid with the main line between valve boxes and installed without damage including nicks, cuts, or abrasions to the outer jackets. J. There shall be at least a 24-inch (61 cm) slack loop in the two-wire path at every valve box for making connections. K. The two-wire shall be tested before decoders are installed. Direct Bury Connectors L. All two-wire connectors shall be 3M™ DBR/Y-6 or equivalent direct bury splice. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 5 M. The connectors shall electrically connect two or more pre-stripped copper wires and moisture seal the connection. N. The connectors shall be installed per manufacturer’s specifications, and as specified herein. O. All twist connectors shall have a steel spring and a flame-retardant insulator. P. The outer tube shall be made of UV-resistant polypropylene. Q. The tube shall be filled with moisture-resistant grease. R. The voltage rating shall be a minimum of 600 volts. S. The operating temperature shall be -40°F to 221°F (-40°C to 105°C). Connector Installation Details T. All connectors shall be installed per manufacturer’s specifications. U. The installer shall make all connections per manufacturer’s specifications. V. The installer shall verify that no loose, unshielded wiring shall touch the ground, water, or other copper conductor causing a leakage of current to the ground or a short circuit across wires. W. The installer shall make all connections moisture proof. X. All splices shall be made inside a valve box. Y. The installer shall score the outer jacket of the wire 6 to 10 inches (15.24 cm to 25.4 cm) from each end without scoring conductor insulation. Z. The installer shall strip 1 inch (2.54 cm) of insulation from conductor without scoring the conductor. AA. Installer shall bundle like conductors, twist them together, and trim off ½ inch (1.27 cm) of conductors. BB. Installer shall twist a wire connector in a clockwise direction, and then place a moisture-proof DBR/Y-6 tube over the top making sure connector is fully seated at the top of the tube. Snap the cover completely closed. CC. Installer shall ensure that all connections are mounted in a vertical orientation to eliminate standing water inside the connector. DD. Installer shall provide a strain relief to eliminate pressure on connector (for example, a loop knot in wire or a tie wrap). EE. All splices shall be made inside a valve box. 2.06 CONDUIT A. Conduits: rigid nonmetallic type, conforming to UL 651, rated 90 degrees C, and NSF certified. Schedule 40 PVC plastic for underground installations with glue-on PVC couplings and factory made elbows and sweeps. Carlon Plus 80 or approved equal. 1. Size: minimum 1” diameter or size for the conductors, whichever is greater. 2. Install conduits minimum 18” depth in planting areas, minimum 24” depth under paving. 3. Make couplings and connectors watertight in all runs. Utilize solvent cement of type approved by conduit manufacturer. 4. Join conduits with approved conduit couplings with ends butted in all such cases. Ream all conduit ends to remove burrs and sharp edges. 5. Provide adapters and locknuts where conduit is attached to metal boxes and panels. 6. Chamfer inner edges of conduits which open into pull boxes or install bushings. 7. Bends: free from dents or flattening, made with standard conduit elbows or conduit bent to not less than same radius. No more than 360 degrees of bend between pull boxes. 8. Leave a 14 AWG trace wire in each empty conduit. 9. Use Duct Seal to seal all conduit ends. B. Conduits above grade: rigid galvanized steel. 1. Field wrap steel conduits extending below grade with 3M Scotchrap 50, with a 50% overlap. Complete with necessary fittings for a complete watertight installation. 2.07 GROUNDING & SURGE PROTECTION A. Install surge arrestors and grounding plates and equipment for each major component along the two-wire path per manufacturer’s recommendations and ASIC guidelines. The first surge arrestor shall not exceed 25’ distance from the controller, and shall not exceed every 600’ along the two- wire path, minimum three grounding plates in 30 degree array pattern. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 6 2.08 BOOSTER PUMP A. Supply & Install Booster Pump as Follows: 1. PIB-15-C-463-2XP14/ALC-2-463-Duplex/F6-12FC-4013A1/GT-Heater/Insul450WD Variable Speed Booster Pumping System, available from SiteOne, or Equal. Contact Jim White (210) 838-5576. 2.09 RECLAIMED WATER A. Irrigation system shall be installed for reclaimed water use. All work shall be in accordance with TCEQ Chapter 210, Use of Reclaimed Water. See Appendix 3 for additional information. B. Equipment: 1. Irrigation pipe shall be purple color, with stenciling identifying it as recycled water in accordance with AWWA Guidelines for the Distribution of Non Potable Water. 2. Valve boxes shall be purple color. 3. Sleeving shall be purple color. 4. Sprinkler heads shall be installed with purple caps. 5. Any other equipment not noted above, shall be purple color, if available as a color option. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Acceptance of Work: Complete site grading to specified tolerances before trenching. Verify the existing conditions on site and the removal and or reinstallation required making the grades. B. Existing Utilities: Verify location of all on site utilities prior to trenching. Notify Architect by telephone and in writing of any conflicts prior to installation. Restore damaged utilities as directed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Coordination: Coordinate trenching as required with trenching contractor as well as with any other trades affected by irrigation installation. Coordinate installation of pipe and other irrigation equipment with other existing and proposed utilities and planting locations. D. Grading: Install all irrigation features to their finished elevation and at depths indicated. E. Finish Grade: Unless otherwise noted, set all heads at and perpendicular to, finish grade. F. As-Built Conditions: regularly update a print of the system and any changes made to the system throughout the project. See Valve Stationing requirements elsewhere in this Specification. G. Unusual Conditions: Immediately notify the Architect in the event that any unusual soil conditions are encountered during irrigation trenching operations. Excavate unsuitable material encountered below the natural grade and dispose of as directed by the Architect. H. Hazardous Materials: In the event existing asbestos pipe is encountered and needs to be modified and/or removed, comply with the requirements of Federal (OSHA) regulations. 3.02 INSTALLATION – TRENCHING & PIPE A. Point of Connection: below grade. Connect to water line and remaining irrigation system. B. Excavation: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 7 1. Depth – excavate trenches for mainline, sleeves, and laterals to the depth required for laying pipe or conduit, plus depth of bedding if required as noted below. 2. For pipes 4” dia. and less - level bottom of trenches for a smooth flat grade, and excavate bell holes where necessary to ensure that pipe rests for entire length on solid ground. Should rock or other unsuitable material be encountered, excavate to 6" below bottom of pipe and replace with well tamped and compacted approved backfill material or sand before laying pipe. 3. For pipes greater than 4” dia. – depth of pipe and bedding as shown on the Drawings, or 6” below bottom of pipe whichever is greater. 4. Width – excavate trenches wide enough to provide adequate working space to align and lay pipe or to construct the trench, make up and inspect joints, and allow placing and compaction of bedding material. Maximum trench width at the top of the pipe is the pipe outside diameter plus 12- inches on each side of the pipe. 5. Maintain excavations free of water while installing pipe and until backfilled. C. Thrust Blocks: Install on all main-lines and laterals 3” and greater as shown on the Plans 1. Concrete for irrigation facilities, unless otherwise specified, shall be produced from commercial quality aggregates and cement and shall contain not less than 275 kg (463 pounds) of cement per cubic yard. Hand mixing of the concrete will be permitted. D. Bedding: Install bedding upwards from the bottom of the trench to the extent shown on the Drawings. 1. Bedding material: compacted approved sub-soil or sand as defined herein. 2. In planting areas excluding natural turf sports fields, sand bedding may be jetted or ponded into place. Compact to equal that of the adjacent prepared sub-grade as specified herein. Mechanical compaction may be necessary to achieve this required density. If the bedding is jetted or ponded, the operation should be closely supervised and provisions should be made for the removal of excess water. E. Backfill: Cover no joints until system has been pressure tested and approved by the Architect. 1. Backfill material: selected on-site excavated/sub-soil material, imported sandy soils, subject to prior approval by the Architect. Backfill with potentially damaging rocks and debris is not permitted. 2. When piping has been installed, tested, inspected, and approved, backfill excavations in layers not exceeding 8". Moisten and machine tamp as required. 3. In planting areas, install on-site near surface soils in the top 6" of the trenches compacted to maximum 85% relative compaction. For trenches in existing planting areas maintain near surface soils as uniform as possible with existing upper stratum soils. 4. In paving areas, install fill in maximum 8-inch lifts (compacted layers) and compact by mechanical means only. Condition fill conditioned, at time of compaction, to 1% to 3% above the optimum moisture content of the soil, and compact each lift to minimum 95% relative compaction. 5. For trenches in existing areas, restore the ground or paving to original condition. 6. After backfilling, remove from the premises all surplus earth resulting from this work and dispose of same, to the satisfaction of the Architect. F. Pipe: pipes shown parallel on the Plan may be installed in a common trench. Where required, snake pipe from side to side when trench exceeds 30 feet in length. 1. Install pipes in planting areas including those shown schematically adjacent or parallel to such areas. 2. Install all changes in depth of pipe using 45 degree fittings. 3. Use Teflon tape on all threaded connections. G. Sleeves: install sleeves for all wiring and irrigation lines to be placed (with ends clearly marked above grade) under driveways and walks prior to their construction. 1. Install sleeves minimum 42” under paving. 2. Extend sleeves a minimum of 12-inches into planting areas. 3. Install all wiring in a separate sleeve. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 8 4. Install temporary PVC caps to prevent intrusion of earth/debris prior to installation of pipes / wire. 5. For longer lengths of sleeve (> 15’-20’) with multiple pipes, consider installing pipes along with sleeve and connecting later. 6. Install removable non-decaying plugs, expanding insulation foam, grout, or equal, at ends of sleeves and conduits to prevent entrance of earth and roots. G. Fabrication: Install all manifolds in a neat and orderly manner, for ease in maintenance operations. Install manifolds to allow valve boxes to be parallel to each other and to adjacent walls, walks, and curbs. Cuts and joints shall be free of burrs, smooth and minimum in quantity. H. Swing Joints: After installation, cap the swing joints and drill a 1/8” diameter hole in the capped end. Bury the capped swing joints, with the drilled hole pointing up, deep enough to avoid the tilling depth specified in Specification Section Soil Preparation. I. Flushing of System: After installation of pipe lines and risers, but before installation of sprinkler heads, thoroughly flush the system to remove any foreign material in the pipes. 1. Flush the system in the presence of the Architect. 2. For flushing mainline and sprinkler portions of the system utilize full water main pressure. 3. After flushing, backfill and settle soil. Rake smooth to match surrounding grade. 4. Check grade tolerance with 10’ straight edge across each head. 3.03 INSTALLATION – EQUIPMENT A. General: Install irrigation equipment as shown on the Drawings B. Valve Boxes: Install valve boxes so that the top of box is ½” above finish grade in turf areas. Install valve box assembly in ground cover / shrub and not in hard paved areas. Install in lawn area only if groundcover does not exist adjacent to lawn. 1. Label valve box lids with the valve station number using a weather resistant method. Plastic valve box lids may be labeled using a branding tool / branding iron. 2. Attach a Valve ID tag, with the valve station number clearly marked with weatherproof method, to the inside of each remote control valve, and attached by means of a weatherproof tie. C. Sprinklers: 1. Install sprinkler heads at a spacing not to exceed that shown on the Drawings, unless verified in advance with the Architect. Also Install sprinkler heads to replace existing heads as shown. 2. Install sprinkler bodies and swing joints down at lateral depth with hole in swing joint cap to allow for un-impeded soil preparation of entire area. See “Heading Up” clause in this Specification. 3. Coverage Adjustments: Adjust all heads for arc, radius, riser height, and distribution for uniform and optimum coverage, and eliminate overspray onto paved surfaces and structures. Such adjustments are to include nozzle changes without additional cost to the Owner. 3.04 CONTROL WIRE A. General: Install control wire in pipe trenches wherever practical. Install wire below or level with the bottom of adjacent pipes. Install wire inside conduits as specified in this section where pipes are not available. 1. Lay two-wire with main line between valve boxes, and installed without damage including nicks, cuts, or abrasions to the outer jacket. 2. Test all wiring before decoders are installed. B. Splices: All splices shall be made in the valve box 1. Provide min. 24" excess wiring in each valve box / pull box. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 9 3.05 BOOSTER PUMP A. General: Install pump on a concrete pad per the Drawings, and bolt to the pad as shown on the manufacturer’s drawings and instructions. Coordinate electrical connections with electrical contractor. 1. Pipe and fittings: ductile iron from the pump into the ground until connection with plastic pipe. 2. Connect the Controller to the Pump start controls. 3. Provide the Owner with a written statement of verification, approving the installation including plumbing and electrical connections, and for starting the pump for the first time, by the pump manufacturer’s authorized representative. 4. Contact the Manufacturer's authorized representative for a Training Session with the Owner’s maintenance personnel. 5. Statement of Verification and Training Session shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.06 CONTROLLER A. General: Based on existing soil types, soil imports, and final ground conditions, additional grounding equipment may require to be installed at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Submit manufacturers grounding equipment details recommended for the Project. B. Installation: install controller enclosure per the Drawings. C. Power: Install power to controller following all applicable electrical codes. Install GFCI switch and 9-volt battery. 3.07 VALVE STATIONING A. As-built Drawing: Provide the Architect as-built mark-ups of the most current irrigation drawings, to reflect changes to the irrigation system layout, including: 1. Point of connection, isolation valves, filter, pressure regulator, as applicable. 2. Remote control valve locations and renumbering if applicable. 3. Isolation valve, quick couplers, and stub-out locations as applicable. 4. Valve boxes for intermediate control wire splices. 5. Main-line and lateral lines. 6. Dimensionally locate all the above irrigation equipment with at least two measurements from surface features such as pavements, fences and buildings. Dimensionally locate each direction of main-line with one offset measurement from a surface feature. Lateral lines and drip irrigation supply pipes do not require measurements but are required to be drawn accurately. 7. Record all final changes before trenches are backfilled. B. Valve-stationing Plan: Clearly label and sequence stations according to the assigned valve identification numbers shown on the As-built Drawings and color code the corresponding valve zones. Use a separate color for each valve zone. 1. Valve Stationing Maps shall be electronically and neatly prepared in color using software capable of annotating PDF documents. Hand colored mark-ups will not be accepted. Provide the Owner an unlocked copy of the PDF for future use. 2. In case valve sequencing needs to be changed for ease in maintenance operations, verify changes in advance with the Architect. 3. Provide (2) 11”x17” laminated copies for reference purposes inside the controller, and for the Owner’s record. 4. Include a non-laminated 3rd copy of the Valve-stationing Plan in the Post 5. Submit completed valve-stationing plan to the Architect before final payment request. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 10 3.07 PRESSURE TEST A. Pressure Test: 1. Notify the Architect a minimum of five (5) working days prior to pressure test. 2. Furnish all equipment and temporary connections required for tests at no additional cost to the Owner. 3. Exercise caution in filling the system to prevent excessive surge pressure and water hammer. 4. Test pipe subject to continuous water pressure (pressure lines) at 125 lbs. of hydrostatic pressure for two hours with a maximum 5 PSI drop. 5. Pressure test all lateral supply lines (non-pressurized) with joints under paving that are connected to planters. 6. Repair any leaks, if necessary, and re-test. 7. Have the Architect visually inspect the pressure gauge at the start and end of the test period, without which the test will not be approved. B. Closing in Un-inspected Work: Pay all costs necessitated by requiring opening, restoration and correction of all work closed in or concealed before inspection, testing as required and approval by Architect. Notify Architect 48 hours in advance of required testing. 3.08 IRRIGATION COVERAGE A. Inspection of irrigation coverage shall take place during the Intermediate Review, as specified herein. 1. In the presence of the Architect, perform a coverage and operation test to determine if the system is fully operational. 2. If it is determined that adjustments in the irrigation equipment and the re-spacing of heads will provide more complete coverage, then make such adjustments prior to planting. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle and degrees of nozzle arc as necessary. 3. Make changes and obtain complete and adequate coverage in all irrigated areas at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.09 HARDWARE A. Contractor shall provide the Owner at the in-service meeting (2) sets of each of the following: 1. Irrigation Controller – enclosure keys 2. Special tools required for the maintenance of specific components 3. Other enclosures – enclosure / lock keys 3.10 CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTATION A. Submit prior to Final Review, the following documents: 1. Sheet containing: a. Contractor’s name, address, and phone number. b. Controller manufacturer’s service address, and phone number 2. Copies of the following documents: a. Valve-stationing Plan 3. Warranties and Certificates. Warranty documents or accompanying letters on company letterhead are to include project name and location and effective start date for warranties. a. Irrigation Controller Warranty. b. Booster Pump Warranty c. Backflow Prevention Device testing certificate. 4. In-service Meeting discussions & decisions. 5. For new projects, include all the documents in a 3-ring binder. B. The Final Review will not be considered complete until the Close-out Documentation has been reviewed and approved by the Architect. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 IRRIGATION SECTION 328400 - 11 3.11 CLEAN-UP A. Keep project area clean on a daily basis, removing debris from the site. 3.12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. The Contract lump sum price paid for Landscape Irrigation shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals, for all work involved as specified in this Section, as shown on the Drawings, and as directed by the Architect, and no separate payment shall be made. END OF SECTION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SOIL PREPARATION SECTION 32 91 13 - 1 SOIL PREPARATION - SECTION 32 91 13 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for Soil Preparation of sod areas as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. The work includes installation of soil amendments and finish grading. B. Related work includes but is not limited to: 1. Landscape Planting 1.03 REVIEWS A. Contractor shall specifically request at least (2) two days in advance the following review prior to progressing with the work: 1. Intermediate Review – completion of site grading, amendment depths, finish grade. 2. See Specification Sections Landscape Irrigation and Landscape Planting for other items to be inspected during this review. 3. The review shall be conducted only after all items pertaining to the review as noted above and in related Sections have been completed by the Contractor. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Test Samples: Contractor shall provide samples, as specified herein, to an agricultural soils testing laboratory approved by the Architect, referred to herein as the Testing Lab, unless delivered to the site in original, unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer guaranteed analysis. 1. Testing Lab – Soil, Water and Forage Testing Laboratory, 2610 F&B Road, College Station, TX 77845, (979) 845-4816 or prior approved equal. 2. Use of an alternate soil testing lab without prior approval shall be cause for rejection of the submitted analysis. 3. No material shall be delivered to the site until the Architect approves the material. 4. The same Testing Lab shall be used for all tests specified herein. 5. Contractor shall pay for all testing fees from the Testing Lab for all tests specified herein. B. Product Certificates: Certification stating quantity, type, and composition, weight and origin for all amendments and chemicals shall be delivered to the Architect within fourteen (14) days of the Notice to Proceed and before the material is delivered to the site. C. Testing – Amendments: Contractor shall provide, along with a sample, latest analysis of amendments / bulk organic materials by the Testing Lab for verification of conformance to this specification, and specific recommendations as to exact quantities to be used in planting. 1. Analysis shall conform to physical and chemical properties specified herein. 2. Analysis shall not be more than three months old at the time of submitting sample. D. Testing – Imported Topsoil: Contractor shall provide, along with sample, latest analysis of soil proposed to be imported by the Testing Lab for testing, analysis test #12, as to exact fertilizers and soil amendments to be used in planting. 1. Submit certificate or sample of any proposed bulk organic materials simultaneously for testing with soil samples for optimum amendment recommendations. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SOIL PREPARATION SECTION 32 91 13 - 2 2.Analysis shall not be more than three months old at the time of submitting sample. 3.Should the final soil mixture be a combination of existing soil and imported topsoil, Contractor shall provide additional lab recommendations on method of mixing and exact fertilizers and soil amendments to be used in planting for the mixture. E.Submit delivery tags for all amendments and fertilizers delivered to the Site for the Project. 1.05 PROTECTION A.Protect concrete from any sulfate-based amendments that may be specified from soils analysis to avoid staining. Concrete damaged from amendment placement shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EXISTING SOIL A.Topsoil: The top layer of existing soil in sod areas below the grass root zone, containing minerals and organic materials including humus. Depth of topsoil shall be taken to be 2-4 inches deep or as determined by the Architect at the time of construction after clearing and grubbing. See Specification Section Site Clearing. 1.At turf areas topsoil starts below the grass root zone. 2.At planting areas other than turf, topsoil starts below the mulch and organic matter layer (O horizon). 3.Soil underneath paving and aggregate base areas shall not be considered as top soil. B. Sub-soil: Shall be the remaining existing soil on the site after clearing & grubbing, after topsoil has been removed, and after all rocks over one cubic inch and all foreign debris and organic material have been removed. 1.Soil under paving and aggregate base areas shall be considered as subsoil provided contamination testing as specified elsewhere in this section indicates that it is free of contaminants that are harmful to plant growth. 2.02 IMPORTED TOPSOIL A.Imported Topsoil: USDA classification of fraction passing a 2.0 mm sieve: Shall be loose, friable silty clay, free of harmful insects, all weed growth, clods over 1" and/or clods that will not be pulverized during operations, and free of rocks. 1.Class particle size range maximum % minimum % Coarse sand 0.5 - 2.0 mm 30 15 Silt plus clay <0.05mm 50 15 Other classes Organic 15 5 2. Chemistry - Suitability Considerations Salinity: Soil Saturation Extract (ECe) - Less than 4.0 dS/m (mmhos.cm) @ 25° C. Sodium: Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) - Less than 6.0 Boron: Saturation Extract Concentration - Less than 1.0 ppm Reaction: pH of Saturated Paste – 5.5-7.0 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SOIL PREPARATION SECTION 32 91 13 - 3 3. Fertility Considerations: Soil to contain sufficient quantities of available nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, calcium and magnesium to support normal plant growth. In the event of nutrient inadequacies, provisions shall be made to add required materials prior to planting. 2.03 FERTILIZER A. Fertilizer shall be the following: 1. Commercial fertilizer: for soil amendment shall be 16-6-8 (N-P-K) uniform pellet. 2. Commercial fertilizer packets: for plants shall be controlled-release three year 16-8-8 (N-P-K) by Nutri Pak. 3. The requirements above are for bidding purposes only, exact fertilizer types to be determined by Testing Lab analysis. 2.04 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Nitrogen Stabilized Organic Amendment: shall be mineralized and nitrogen stabilized bark or sawdust humus, with wetting agent and properly pulverized and shall have a minimum of 270 lbs. per cubic yard of amendment. Submit sample analysis for approval. B. Gypsum: Agricultural Grade 2.05 CHEMICALS A. The following brand names of various chemicals to be used in this Section are provided for ease of specifying; equals or brands with similar chemicals that will match or improve performance may be used at the Contractor's discretion. Contractor shall verify use of any chemicals with Architect prior to application: 1. Pre-emergent herbicides - (granular form only) “Treflan “ or “Ron Star “ 2. Post-emergent herbicides PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Limits and Grades: Prior to commencing soil preparation operations, Contractor shall request a review by the Architect to verify specified limits of soil preparation work to commence. Soil amendment limits include all naturalized areas unless otherwise noted. 3.02 IMPORTED TOPSOIL PLACEMENT A. Imported topsoil shall be installed and completed as necessary to produce final finish grade requirements as shown on the civil drawings. Sod soil depth shall be considered when finish grading. B. Sub-grade shall be cross-ripped or cultivated to a depth of 6 inches. Water shall be added and ripping or cultivation shall be continued until the entire 6 inch depth is loose and friable. Place topsoil uniformly over sub-grade and thoroughly cultivate and bring to a smooth, even grade. Soil shall be thoroughly water settled and high/low areas re-graded in accordance with paragraph "Finish Grading" this Section. 3.03 AMENDMENT PLACEMENT A. The requirements below are for bidding purposes only, adjustments to the bidding formula shall be determined by the Testing Lab analysis. B. All sod areas shall be thoroughly cross-ripped to a minimum 6 inch depth. Upon completion of cross-ripping the amendments shall be applied, including the naturalized areas, as follows: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SOIL PREPARATION SECTION 32 91 13 - 4 Amount/1000 Square Feet 6 cubic yards Nitrogen Stabilized Organic Amendment 12 lbs. Commercial Fertilizer 50 lbs Gypsum C. The materials shall then be uniformly spread and incorporated to obtain a homogeneously blended soil, six inches in depth. 3.04 FINISH GRADING A. Contractor shall finish grade all sod areas unless otherwise noted, and shall remove all rocks and clods. All areas shall be smooth and uniformly graded. All erosion damage during the construction period shall be repaired by the Contractor. B. Unless otherwise noted, all soil finish grades shall be 1/2 inch below finish grade of walks, pavements, and curbs. 3.05 CHEMICALS A. Herbicides and pesticides: Contractor shall verify compatibility, dosage and other application procedures with the manufacturer. All chemicals shall be applied by a pest control operator licensed in the State of Texas. B. Sod areas: Treat all areas for weed control with pre-emergent herbicide, as recommended by the manufacturer. See Specification Section Landscape Maintenance for related work. C. Include copies of documentation of pesticide and herbicide applications, countersigned by the Architect, in the Maintenance Binder – see Specification Section Landscape Maintenance. 3.06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. The Contract unit price paid for Soil Preparation shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals, for all work involved as specified in this Section, as shown on the Drawings, and as directed by the Architect, and no separate payment shall be made. END OF SECTION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 HYDRO SEEDING SECTION 329213 - 1 HYDRO SEEDING - SECTION 32 92 13 PART l- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for hydroseeding turf areas as shown on the Drawings, and as specified in this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Certificates: 1.Cellulose Fiber for hydromulch shall be certified to indicate that laboratory and field testing of the product has been accomplished and meets all requirements specified herein based on testing. Weight specifications from the supplier for this material shall refer only to air dry weight of the fiber material. 2.Hydromulch seed delivered to the site shall be tagged and labeled in accordance with Texas Agricultural Code. B.Submittals: Submit the following within fourteen (14) days after Notice to Proceed. Samples shall be the basis of all rejection or approval of the material. 1.Hydroseeding schedule. 2. Eight ounce sample of each seed species used in the hydromulch, to be provided from the same batch that is to be used in the hydroseeding. Samples shall be labeled with the species botanical name and accompanied by the supplier’s certificate. 3.4 oz sample of fiber material. PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A.Lawn Seed: Shall be minimum 95% purity and 85% germination, and shall be certified by the Texas Crop Improvement Association. Inert matter shall not exceed 5.0% nor weed content of 0.22%, with no noxious weeds. Seed shall be certified and shall be 100% Sahara Bermuda 1.Rate of application shall be 3 lbs per 1000 square feet. B.Fiber: shall be 100% natural (pulp) fiber, such as wood chips (Ecofiber, Conwed Fibers 1000, Terra-Wood or approved equal), and shall be free from synthetic paper or plastic materials. 1. Fiber shall be of such character that the fiber will disperse into a uniform slurry when mixed with water. 2.Fiber shall be colored with a non-toxic, water-soluble green dye to provide a proper visual gauge for metering of material over ground surfaces. 3.Fiber shall be manufactured in such a manner that after addition and agitation in slurry tanks with fertilizer, seed, water and other approved additives, the fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to form a homogeneous slurry; and that when hydraulically sprayed on the ground, the material will form a blotter-like ground cover impregnated uniformly with seed; and which after application, will allow the absorption of moisture and allow the rainfall to percolate to the underlying soil. 4.Materials that inhibit germination or growth shall not be present in the mixture. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 HYDRO SEEDING SECTION 329213 - 2 C. Fertilizer: 1. For turf areas shall be Granular Urea Formaldehyde 38-0-0 (N-P-K) and shall conform to the applicable state fertilizer laws. It shall be uniform in composition, dry and free flowing and shall be delivered to the site in the original, unopened containers, each bearing the manu- facturer's guaranteed analysis. Any fertilizer which becomes caked or otherwise damaged, making it unsuitable for use, will not be accepted. D. Tackifier/Binder: 1. For turf areas shall be a natural 100% organic concentrate derived from the outer coatings of seeds, Ecology Control M-Binder by S&S Seeds, or equal. PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Hydroseeding shall be performed during a windless period using approved equipment and materials. B. Preparation of Surfaces: Prior to hydroseeding, prepare the soil per the plans. Soil shall be moist to a depth of at least 1/2" prior to applying hydroseed. 3.02 MIXING A. With agitation system operation at part speed, water shall be added to the tank, and good circulation shall be established. Materials shall be added in such a manner that they are uniformly blended into the mixture. The seed shall be added first; then fiber. The fiber shall not be added until the tank is at least one-third filled with water. The mixture shall be agitated at full speed when the tank is two-thirds to three-fourths full. Seed shall not remain in the seeder longer than one (1) hour. Seed kept longer shall be rejected by the Architect for this Work and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense and disposed of off-site. A dispersing agent may be added, provided that the Contractor furnished evidence that the additive is not harmful to the mixture. 3.03 HYDROSEEDING A. Hydraulic equipment used for the application of the fertilizer, seed and slurry of prepared wood pulp shall be of the type approved by the Architect. This equipment shall have a built-in agitation system and operating capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend and mix homogeneously the slurry mixture. The slurry distribution lines shall be large enough to prevent stoppage. This discharge line shall be equipped with a set of hydraulic spray nozzles which shall provide a continuous non- fluctuation discharge and delivery of the slurry in the prescribed quantities uniformly, without misses, waste, or erosion. The slurry tank shall have a minimum capacity of 500 gallons and shall be mounted on a traveling unit which may be either self-propelled or drawn with a separate unit which will place the slurry tank and spray nozzle within sufficient proximity to the areas to be seeded so as to provide uniform distribution. Equipment with smaller tank capacity shall be required by the Architect to demonstrate that it has the necessary agitation system and sufficient pump capacity to spray the slurry in a uniform coat. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 HYDRO SEEDING SECTION 329213 - 3 B. Application Rates: The materials shall be mixed and applied in approximately the following proportions: Turf Materials Per Acre Fiber 2,000 lbs. Seed As specified herein Fertilizer: Granular Urea Formaldehyde 38-0-0(N-P-K) 300 lbs. Tackifier/Binder: M-Binder 70 lbs. Water As needed for application 3.04 PROTECTION A. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure seeded areas are not damaged. 3.05 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. Inspection of the work shall be made by the Architect at the request of the Contractor at the completion of the work to determine acceptability of the work. B. Any bare spots must be re-seeded and all clean-up completed prior to final acceptance by the Architect. 3.06 PAYMENT A. The Contract unit price paid for Hydro Seeding shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals, for all work involved as specified in this Section, as shown on the Drawings, and as directed by the Architect, and no separate payment shall be made. END OF SECTION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LANDSCAPE PLANTING SECTION 32 93 03 - 1 LANDSCAPE PLANTING - SECTION 32 93 03 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary for the provision and installation of plant materials as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. B. Related work includes but is not limited to: 1. Soil Preparation 2. Landscape Irrigation 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality: Minimum quality of all plant material shall unless otherwise indicated conform to: 1. ANSI Z60.1-2004 American Standard for Nursery Stock, Sponsored by the American Nursery and Landscape Association (ANLA) 2. Additional standards as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Applicable ASTM International Standards (latest revisions) as they apply to this work and related test methods, including: 1. C602 Specification for Agricultural Liming Materials 2. D5268 Specification for Topsoil Used for Landscaping Purposes 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Within fourteen (14) days after Notice to Proceed submit the following: 1. Documentation certifying quantity and species of plant material ordered, the nursery supplier(s), any plant material not available at that time, or proposed substitutions to be reviewed. 2. Product data on all associated planting products specified herein. 1.05 REVIEWS A. Contractor shall specifically request at least (2) two days in advance the following review prior to progressing with the work: 1. Intermediate Review – Layout/locations. See Specification Sections Landscape Irrigation and Soil Preparation for other items to be inspected during this review. B. Contractor shall specifically request at least (5) five days in advance the following reviews prior to progressing with the work: 1. Substantial Completion Review – all planting areas including turf. 2. Final Review - All planting areas including turf and all punch-list items identified at Substantial Completion Review. C. Each review shall be conducted only after all items pertaining to that review as noted above and in related Sections have been completed by the Contractor. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LANDSCAPE PLANTING SECTION 32 93 03 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A.Nomenclature and Labels: Plant botanical names conform to “Standardized Plant Names,” second edition. All plants of each clone, species, and cultivar shall be delivered to the site labeled with their full botanical name. Every plant species shall be labeled with no less than one label for every ten plants of a species. B.Quantities: Contractor shall furnish and install sod shown schematically on the Drawings. C.Root Systems: Any plant material, within two years following the final acceptance of the project, determined by the Architect to be defective, restricted, declining or otherwise deficient due to abnormal root growth, shall be replaced by the Contractor, to the equal condition of the adjacent grass, at the time of replacement. D.Health: All sod shall be free of all disease, insect stages, burns and weeds. E.Untrue Species: All plant material, within two years following the final acceptance of the Project, determined by the Owner to be untrue to the species, clone, and/or variety specified, shall be replaced by the Contractor, to the equal condition of adjacent plants at the time of replacement. 2.03 FERTILIZER A.20-10-15 (N-P-K) Commercial Fertilizer, uniform pellet. 1.The requirements above are for bidding purposes only, exact fertilizer types per Testing Lab analysis. 2.04 TURF SOD A.Sod shall be grown from high quality seed in soil treated with appropriate State and Federal agency approved pesticides, fungicides, and herbicides and regularly inspected by the State. 1.Sod shall have a well-developed root structure sufficiently mature so that it will hold together when held by one end of the roll. 2.Yellowing, brown, diseased, dried, or pest infested sod shall be rejected. 3.Soil thickness of the sod shall be 1/4 inch to 5/8 inch thick excluding top growth and thatch. 4.Size of rolls or slabs shall be consistent to the supplier’s standard length and width and is not to vary by more than 2% in either dimension. 5.See submittal requirements for sod soil as specified herein. B.Sod shall be certified Tif-Tuf Bermuda. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A.Plant Material Approvals: Before planting operations commence, all plant material shall be reviewed by the Architect. Defective plants shall be removed from the site and acceptable material substituted in its place. The review does not accept defective plants which may be installed. B.Layout: Only plant material to be planted in any single day should be laid out. Locations shall be reviewed prior to planting. Plant material installed without this review may be transplanted/relocated as directed by the Architect. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LANDSCAPE PLANTING SECTION 32 93 03 - 3 C. Protection of Plants: Contractor shall maintain all plant material in a healthy growing condition prior to and during planting operation. Contractor shall be responsible for vandalism, theft, and damage to plant material until commencement of the maintenance period. 3.02 CHEMICALS A. Pesticide: Contractor shall verify compatibility, dosage and other application procedures with the manufacturer. All pesticides shall be applied by a pest control operator licensed in the State of Texas. B. Include copies of documentation of pesticide applications, countersigned by the Architect, in the Maintenance Binder – see Specification Section Landscape Maintenance. 3.03 FERTILIZER A. Apply Commercial Fertilizer at 5 pounds per 1,000 square feet to all sod areas, 30 days after planting. Re-application shall be scheduled at 45 day intervals. 1. The requirements above are for bidding purposes only, exact application rates per Testing Lab analysis. B. Include copies of documentation of fertilizer applications, countersigned by the Architect, in the Maintenance Binder – see Specification Section Landscape Maintenance. 3.04 SOD INSTALLATION A. The installation specifications below shall prevail over the sod grower’s installation specifications, unless otherwise noted. B. Grading / Soil Preparation: Finish grade to smooth, even surface, allowing for sod thickness at pavement and other structures to leave the sod flush to the finish grade of adjacent surfaces. The soil surface shall be sufficiently firm to resist impressions over 1/4 inch deep, and shall be lightly rolled until meeting this firmness. The top six to eight inches of soil shall be watered until this zone has an optimum moisture content for root growth. C. Installation: Sod shall be laid in rows with staggered ends neatly and tightly butted on all edges. Harvesting netting shall be removed upon installation. Sod shall be protected from wind and sun exposure during transportation and storage, with a maximum storage period of twenty-four hours. No overlap, gaps, ripples, or other uneven placement will be accepted. Contractor shall lightly roll sod after installation to insure optimum contact with the soil. Trimming and cutting around structures shall be completed with sharp tools and carefully fitted so the final appearance is a solid, continuous turf. D. Establishment Watering / Mowing: Follow sod grower’s specifications. E. Rolling: The sod shall be allowed to grow for a minimum of two weeks before rolling. Roll both in length and width. 3.05 CLEAN UP A. After completion of all operations, Contractor shall remove all trash, excess soil and other debris. All walks, walls, and pavement shall be swept and washed clean. Leave the entire area in a neat, orderly condition. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 LANDSCAPE PLANTING SECTION 32 93 03 - 4 3.11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. The Contract lump sum price paid for Landscape Planting shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all labor, material, equipment, tools, and incidentals, for all work involved as specified in this Section, as shown on the Drawings, and as directed by the Architect, and no separate payment shall be made. END OF SECTION Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A.This specification shall govern all work required for trenchless utility installation as required tocomplete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A.31 23 16.13 TRENCHING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used and obtained by the ContractorA.ASTM C581 – Standard Practice for Determining Chemical Resistance of Thermosetting Resins Used inGlass-Fiber-Reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid ServiceB.ASTM D790 – Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plasticsand Electrical Insulating MaterialsC.ASTM D2122 – Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and FittingsD.ASTM D5813 – Standard Specification for Cured-In-Place Thermosetting Resin Sewer Piping SystemsE.ASTM F1216 – Standard Practice for Rehabilitation of Existing Pipelines and Conduits by the Inversionand Curing of a Resin-Impregnated TubeF.Part 1926, Subpart P – Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and HealthAdministration (OSHA) Standards and InterpretationsG.Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C – Trench Safety 1.04 Submittals A.Cured-In-Place-Pipe (CIPP)1.Resina.Technical data sheet indicating physical and chemical properties for the proposed resin to beused.b.Test results to show compliance with ASTM 581.2.Tubea.Technical data indicating physical properties3.CIPPa. Scheduleb.Copies of curing log sheets with temperature reading prior to curing, during curing, and cooldown for each installation section.c.Copies of all test results performed by the Contractor’s Independent Testing Laboratory.d.Contractors Quality Control Plan and / or Procedures showing control conditions used during impregnation of the resin to ensure proper materials and proper dispersion is achieved in thewet out process.e.Submit pre-installation video inspection after cleaning and video inspection after placementand curing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Casing Pipe A.Steel Pipe1.Unless indicated otherwise in the Drawings, casing pipe shall be seamless smooth pipe with minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi. 2.Minimum casing wall thickness shall be as shown in Table 1: Table 1 Minimum Casing Wall Thickness Casing Diameter (Inches) Minimum Wall Thickness (Inches) Less than 12 5/16 Over 12 to 18 3/8 Over 18 to 22 7/16 Over 22 to 28 1/2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Over 28 to 34 9/16 Over 34 to 42 5/8 Over 42 to 48 11/16 Over 48 Specified by Owner B.Casing End Seal1.Shall be made of synthetic rubber, conical shape, pull-on or wrap-around style with Type 304stainless steel bands 2.02 Cured-In-Place-Pipe (CIPP) A.Pre-Approved Products1.The only pre-approved products for this work shall be those identified in the plans.2.To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide allrequired information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Ownerfor approval prior to incorporation into the Project.B.General1.The Contractor is to supply all products and equipment required to perform the work.2.All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.3.Shall be properly sized Type III cured-in-place thermosetting resin wastewater pipe in accordance with ASTM D5813.4.The flexible felt fiber tube shall be fabricated to a size that when installed it will neatly fit theinternal circumference of the existing pipe.a.An allowance shall be made for some circumferential stretching during inversion.5.The minimum length shall effectively span the distance from the inlet to the outlet of the respective manholes unless otherwise specified.6.The Contractor shall verify the circumference of the host pipe and the lengths in the field beforeimpregnation of the tube with the resin.7.Individual insertion runs can be made over one or more manhole sections as determined in thefield by the Contractor and approved by the qualified factory field service representative and theOwner.C.Tube1.The tube shall consist of one or more layers of flexible needled felt or an equivalent nonwoven orwoven material or a combination of nonwoven and woven materials that are compatible with theresin system used and are capable of supporting and carrying resin.2.The tube shall be capable of withstanding installation procedures and curing temperatures.3.Longitudinal and circumferential joints between multiple layers of a tube should be staggered tonot overlap.4.The tube shall be fabricated to fit its final in-place position in the existing pipe, with allowance forstretch as recommended by the manufacturer.5.The elongation or expansion of the flexible tube during installation, both longitudinally andcircumferentially should be limited to 5-10% to minimize reduction of the finished wall thickness.D.Tube Coating1.The inside or outside surface, or both, of the tube shall be coated with a plastic flexible materialthat is compatible with the tube and the resin system used.2.The coating shall allow visual inspection of the proper impregnation of the tube fabric with resin.3.The final inside flexible plastic coating will form the inner layer of the finished pipe and is requiredto contain the impregnated resin in the tube.E.CIPP Wall1.The layers which constitute the pipe wall must be such that when the thermosetting resin curesthe Cured-In-Place-Pipe has no delamination, dry spots or lifts.2.The minimum allowable wall thickness for CIPP shall be per Table 3 and as directed by the Ownerafter review of the TV Inspection. Table 3 Wall Thickness For CIPP Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 H (Feet) DR T (inch) Sound Host Pipe Deteriorated Host Pipe <10 60 50 T = D/DR 10 – 15 50 40 15 – 20 45 35 20 – 25 40 30 >25 40 25 H, Height of cover over pipe (ft) T = Wall thickness of CIPP (in) DR – Dimension Ratio, D/T D = Nominal Diameter (in) 3.When cured, the CIPP must form a mechanical bond with the conduit.4.The wall color of the interior pipe surface of the CIPP after installation shall be a light reflectivecolor so that a clear detail examination with closed circuit television inspection equipment may bemade. 2.03 Pipebursting A.Polyethylene1.Shall be in accordance with ASTM D-3350 with a cell classification of 335434B, D, or E.2.In addition linear shall be manufactured of resins classified as Type III, Class C, Category 5, GradeP34, in accordance with ASTM D-1248.3.Shall conform to PPI PE3408.4.Dimensionsa.Shall be SDR17, IPS per ASTM F714 of the nominal diameter indicated on the Drawings or asdirected by the Owner.5.Qualitya.All pipe shall be homogenous throughout, and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign materials,blisters, or other deleterious faults.b.All materials shall be of the highest quality and highest performance.c.It shall be the product of a manufacturer actively engaged in research, development, and themanufacturer of said materials. 2.04 Backfill A.Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A.All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturerrecommendations, and industry standards.1.In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall befollowed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner.B.Coordination and permitting with other utilities, facilities, and agencies shall be the responsibility of theContractor.C.Where encasement or carrier pipe is required to be installed under railroad embankments orunder highways, streets, or other facilities by jacking, boring or tunneling methods, construction shallbe made in a manner that will not interfere with the operation of the railroad, highway, or other facility,and will not weaken or damage any embankment or structure.D.During construction operations, barricades and lights to safeguard traffic and pedestrians shallbe furnished and maintained as directed by the Owner, until such time as the backfill has beencompleted and then shall be removed from the site by the Contractor.E.The drilling of pilot holes for the alignment of pipe prior to its installation by jacking, boring or tunnelingwill not be a requirement but may be necessary to maintain grade. F.The drilling of pilot holes will be considered as incidental work and the cost thereof shall be includedin such contract pay items as are provided in the proposal and contract. G.The Contractor shall take the proper precautions to avoid excavating earth beyond the limits of excavation needed to install the conduit. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 H.All damages by excavating or tunneling, either to surface or subsurface structures, shall be repaired orreplaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense to the requirements of the damaged items owner. I.The removal of any obstruction that may be found to conflict with the placing of this pipe will not bemeasured for payment or paid for as a separate contract pay item. J.All surplus materials shall become the Contractors and disposal shall be in accordance with local, state,and federal regulations and will be the responsibility of the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by theOwner.K.The ends of the carrier pipe shall be enclosed as noted on the Drawings, or directed by the Owner. 3.02 Safety Requirements A.It is the responsibility of the Contractor to adhere to all safety procedures and requirements of local, state, and federal regulations. B.If at any time a trench shall be required to perform the work then the requirements of Section 31 23 16TRENCHING shall be required.C.Any excavation that remains open after working hours shall be covered with a steel plate ofsufficient thickness to support traffic. 3.03 Construction by Jacking A.If the grade of the pipe at the jacking end is below the ground surface, suitable pipes or trenches shall beexcavated for the purpose of conducting the jacking operations and for placing end joints of the pipe. B.This excavation shall not be carried to greater depth than is required for placing of the guide and jackingtimbers and no nearer the roadbed than the minimum distance shown on the Drawings. C.At the other end of the pipe, an approach trench shall be excavated accurately to grade. D.All open trenches and pits shall be braced and shored in such a manner as will adequately prevent caving or sliding of the walls into the open trench or pit. E.Heavy-duty jacks suitable for forcing the pipe through the embankment shall be provided by theContractor. F.In operating jacks, even pressure shall be applied to all jacks used. G.A suitable jacking head not less than six-inches (6”) larger than the outside diameter of the pipe, usually of timber and suitable bracing between jacks and jacking head, shall be provided by the Contractor so thatpressure will be applied to the pipe uniformly around the ring of the pipe. H.The jacking head shall be of such weight and dimensions that it will not bend or deflect when an openingfor the removal of excavated material as the jacking proceeds. I.A suitable jacking frame or backstop shall be provided by the Contractor. J.The pipe to be jacked shall be set on guides that are straight and securely braced together in such manner to support the section of the pipe and to direct it in the proper line and grade. K.All timber and other materials used in the construction of the jacking assembly will be of such quality and dimensions that they will withstand all stresses to which they are subjected in such a manner as to insure even pressures on the pipe during jacking operations. L.The whole jacking assembly shall be placed so as to line up with the direction and grade of the pipe. M.As the jacking proceeds, the embankment material shall be excavated slightly in advance of the pipe insuch a manner to avoid making the excavation larger than the outside diameter of the pipe, with theexcavated material being removed through the pipe. N.The excavation for the underside of the pipe, for at least one third of the circumference of the pipe, shallconform to the contour and grade of the pipe. O.The excavation for the top half of the pipe shall conform closely to the outside diameter of the pipe and aclearance greater than two-inches (2”) will not be permitted.P.All voids between the pipe and the earth shall be filled with non-shrinking grout. Q.Grout holes shall be provided in the pipe. R.The grouting shall follow immediately upon completion of the jacking operation. S.All carrier pipes installed by jacking shall be supported as required by the Drawings. T.The distance that the excavation shall extend beyond the end of the pipe depends on the character of thematerials, but it shall not exceed two-feet (2’) in any case. U.The pipe, preferably, shall be jacked from the low or downstream end, as indicated on the Drawings ordirected by the Owner. V.When jacking of pipe is once begun, the operation shall be carried on without interruption, insofar as Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 practicable; to prevent the pipe from becoming firmly set in the embankment. W.Any pipe damaged in jacking operations shall be repaired or removed and replaced by the Contractor athis entire expense. X.The pits or trenches excavated to facilitate jacking operation shall be filled immediately after the jackingof the pipe has been completed unless an encasement only has been installed; in which case, the trenches and pits shall be left open until the carrier pipe has been laid through and manholes have been built ifrequired. Y.The pits or trenches shall then be backfilled in accordance with the backfill for the applicable utility. 3.04 Construction by Boring A.The hole shall be bored, at a minimum diameter, mechanically with a suitable boring assembly designedto produce a smooth, straight shaft and so operated that the completed shaft will be at the established line and grade. B.The size of the bored hole shall be of such diameter to provide ample clearance for bells or other joints. C.Voids outside the casing shall be grouted with non-shrinking grout and will be considered subsidiarywork.D.In addition to the requirements stated above, the applicable provisions of "Construction By Jacking", inregard to the construction of trench, tolerance in line and grade, method of operation, backfilling, etc., shall govern for construction by boring. 3.05 Construction by Tunneling A.The tunnel shall be excavated in such a manner and to such dimensions, which will permit placing of theproper supports necessary to protect the excavation. B.The Contractor shall take the proper precautions to avoid excavating earth beyond the limits of excavation shown on the Drawings. C.All damages by excavating, either to surface or subsurface structures, shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. D.If required by the Drawings or if required for safety, suitable steel or timber sheeting, shoring and bracing shall be used to support the sides and roof of the excavation.E.Supports may be left in place provided that they clear the steel liner plate or carrier pipe.F.No separate payment will be made for supports left in place. G.Nothing contained herein shall prevent the Contractor from placing such temporary or permanentsupports as he shall deem necessary, nor shall it be construed as relieving the Contractor from his fullresponsibility for the safety of the work, and for all damages to persons and property. H.Liner plate shall be place when the foundation is in a condition satisfactory to the Owner. I.Tunnel dimensions shall be minimum dimensions and subsequent backfill, concrete or grout fill, shall beat the expense of the Contractor. The liner plate shall be laid true to line and grade. J.Tolerance in line and grade shall be as specified in, "Construction by Jacking". K.The void between the tunnel wall and the tunnel lining shall be backfilled with non-shrinking grout having a minimum compressive strength of 1000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days. L.No concrete or grout shall be placed around the pipe unless the sheeting, bottom, sides and roof of thetunnel are in a condition satisfactory to prevent displacement of the liner plate. M.All pipe damaged during construction operations shall be repaired or removed and replaced by theContractor at his entire expense. 3.06 Microtunneling A.Microtunneling Equipment. In case of MTBM, use spoil transportation system which: 1.Balances soil and ground water pressures by use of slurry or earth pressure balance system; systemshall be capable of adjustments required to maintain face stability for particular soil condition andshall monitor and continuously balance soil and ground water pressure to prevent loss of slurry oruncontrolled soil and ground water inflow, or, in case of slurry spoil transportation system:a.Provides pressure at excavation face by use of slurry pumps, pressure control valves, and flowmeter. b.Includes slurry bypass unit in system to allow direction of flow to be changed and isolated, asnecessary. c.Includes separation process. d.Design it to provide adequate separation of spoil from slurry so that slurry with sediment content Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 within limits required for successful tunneling can be returned to cutting face for reuse. e.Appropriately contain spoil at site prior to disposal. f.Uses type of separation process suited to size of tunnel being constructed, soil type beingexcavated, and work space available at each work area for operating plant. g.Allows composition of slurry to be monitored to maintain slurry weight and viscosity limitsrequired. 2.In case of cased auger earth pressure balance system, system shall be capable of adjustments required to maintain face stability for particular soil condition to be encountered. Monitor and continuouslybalance soil and ground water pressure to prevent loss of soil or uncontrolled ground water inflow. a.In cased auger spoil transportation system, manage pressure at excavation face by controllingvolume of spoil removal with respect to advance rate. b.Monitor speed of rotation of auger flight, and addition of water. 3.Remote Control System. Provide MTBM which includes remote control system with followingfeatures: a.Allows for operation of system without need for personnel to enter tunnel. b.Has display available to operator, at remote operation console, showing position of shield inrelation to design reference together with other information such as face pressure, roll, pitch,steering attitude, valve positions, thrust force, and cutter head torque; rate of advance andinstalled length. c.Integrates system of excavation and removal of spoil and its simultaneous replacement by pipe.d.As each pipe section is jacked forward, control system shall synchronize all of operationalfunctions of system.4.Active Direction Control. a.Provide MTBM which includes active direction control system with following features: 1)Controls line and grade by guidance system that relates actual position of MTBM to designreference (e.g., by laser beam transmitted from jacking shaft along pipe to target mounted in shield).2)Provides active steering information which shall be monitored and transmitted to operating console.3)Provides positioning and operation information to operator on control console. 5.Use generator which is suitably insulated for noise (“hospital” type) in residential or commercialareas. B.Line and Grade1.The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining the line and grades. 2.Contractor shall record the exact position of the MTBM during the process. C.Monitoring1.Instruments a.The Contractor shall install and maintain instrumentation system to monitor and detectmovement of ground surface and adjacent structures. b.Instruments shall be installed in accordance with Drawings and manufacturer’srecommendations. 2.Settlement or Upheavala.The Contractor shall record location of settlement or upheaval to an accuracy of 0.01 feet for each monitoring point.b.Points shall be along the centerline of the tunnel at a maximum of 100-foot intervals. c.Railroads 1)Monitor track sub base at centerline of each tract. d.Utilities and Pipelines 1)Monitor ground directly above and ten-feet (10’) before and after utility or pipelineintersection. 3.07 Casing Joints A.Steel1.Joints shall be welded sealed for the full circumference. 3.08 Cured-In-Place-Pipe (CIPP) Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 A.Pre-Installation1.Generala.The Contractor will be solely responsible for complying with all safety regulations.b.The Contractor will be responsible for providing all Traffic Control when required.2.Control of Wastewater Flowa.The Contractor shall control the wastewater flow3.Cleaninga.The Contractor shall clean the wastewater system4.Televised Inspectiona.The Contractor shall inspect the condition of the pipe5.Point Repairs and Line Obstructionsa.The Contractor shall clear the line of obstructions that may impede or injure the CIPP.b.Point repairs shall be made when directed by the Owner in the event that the existing pipeis in an unsuitable condition to allow the CIPP to be constructed.6.Service Connectionsa.The Contractor shall maintain continuous service without disruptions.7.Public Notificationa.The Contractor will be responsible for contacting each property owner connected to thewastewater line three (3) days prior to commencing work that affects the owner.1)Written notice shall be delivered to each property owner describing the work,schedule, how it affects them, telephone number to Contractor to discuss any concerns orissues.b.The Contractor shall contact the property owner the day prior to performing the work toensure the owner knows of the work.B.Installation1.Wet-Outa.The Contractor shall identify the location where the tube will be impregnated (“wet-out”) withresin using distribution rollers and vacuum to saturate the tube felt fiber thoroughly prior toinstallation.1)A vacuum impregnation process shall be used.2)To insure a thorough wet-out, the point of vacuum shall be as recommended by themanufacturer and per ASTM F1216.b.The Contractor shall allow the qualified factory field service engineer and Owner to inspectthe materials and wet-out procedure at the designated location.c.A catalyst system or additive compatible with the resin and the tube shall be used.d.The amount of resin used for tube impregnation shall be sufficient to fill the volume of airvoids in the tube with additional allowances for polymerization shrinkage and the loss of resinthrough cracks and irregularities in the original pipe wall.e.Handling of the resin-impregnated flexible tube to prevent resin setting until it is ready forinsertion and during installation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.2.Insertiona.The wet-out tube shall be inserted through an existing manhole or other approved accessby means of an inversion or pull-in process and the application of a water column sufficientto fully extend it to the next designated manhole or termination point.b.The tune end shall initially be turned inside out and attached to a platform ring or standpipe.c.The inversion water column will be adjusted to be of sufficient height to cause theimpregnated tube to invert from manhole to manhole and hold the tube tight against theexisting pipe wall, to produce dimples at side connections, and flared ends at the manholes.d.If the pull-in method is used, the primary (impregnated) liner is towed into the host pipethrough the existing manhole with a cable winch or approved other device.e.The primary liner shall be floated into place virtually eliminating stresses on the material.f.Proper lubrication may be needed for longer and thicker liners. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 g.This may extrude small amount of resin through the perforations of the outer coating of theprimary liner.h.For the pull-in method, insertion of the new liner shall in no case exceed 800 linear feet.3.Curinga.After installation is complete, the Contractor shall cure the material in accordance withmanufacturer recommendations.b.Temperature gauges shall be placed at the ends of the CIPP material to ensure that thetemperature is consistent.c.Do not discharge water above 100 degrees Fahrenheit into the wastewater system.4.Cool Downa.The Contractor shall cool the hardened CIPP to a temperature below 100 degrees Fahrenheitbefore relieving the water column.1)Do not discharge water above 100 degrees Fahrenheit into the wastewater system.b.Care shall be taken in the release of the water column so that a vacuum will not be developedthat could damage the CIPP.C.Warranty1.The CIPP shall be continuous over the entire length of an inversion run and be free from visualdefects.2.It shall meet the leakage requirements of Section 33 31 13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPINGCI.Sealing of Manholes1.If the CIPP fails to make a tight seal at a manhole, the Contractor shall apply a seal at that point.2.The seal shall be of a material compatible with the CIPP material.3.Do not leave any angular gaps.4.Seal the annular space with a one-half inch (1/2”) diameter activated Oakum band soaked inchemical sealant.5.Seal any annular spaces greater than one-half inch (1/2”) with the manhole wall repair material.6.Finish off the seal with a non-shrink all solids epoxy placed around the pipe opening from insidethe manhole in a band at least four-inches (4”) wide.7.Complete the sealing procedure for each liner segment immediately after the liner is cured.CII.Service Connections1.After curing is complete the Contractor shall reopen the existing active service connections asdesignated by the Owner.2.Reestablishing service connections shall be accomplished without excavation by means of roboticcutting devices with lights and cameras.a.The opening shall be the same size as the service connection with no inner lip.b.High pressure water is not allowed to be used to cut the CIPP.3.The edges of the opening shall be sealed with a resin mixture compatible with the tube resin.4.The Contractor shall have a minimum of two (2) cutting devices plus additional parts on-site prior to commencing insertion.CIII.Testing1.Chemical Resistancea.The CIPP shall meet the chemical resistance requirements of ASTM F1216.b.The test specimens shall be capable of exposure for a minimum of one (1) month at atemperature of 73.4 F.c.During this period the CIPP test specimens should lose no more than twenty-percent (20%)of their initial flexural strength and flexural modulus when tested in accordance with ASTMF1216.2.Leakage Testinga.It shall be in accordance with Section 33 31 13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING3.Wall Thickness Testa.This thickness shall be measured in accordance with ASTM D 21224.Samplesa.Per ASTM F1216, the preparation of two (2) CIPP samples is required for each insertion Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 segment. 1)The sample shall be cut from a section of cured CIPP at an intermediate manhole or at thetermination point that has been inverted or pull-in through a like diameter pipe whichhas been held in place by a suitable heat sink, such as sandbags.2)The sample should be fabricated from material taken from the tube and the resin/catalyst system used and cured in a clamped mold placed in the down tube when circulatingheated water is used and in the silencer when steam is used.3)The samples for each of these cases should be large enough to provide a minimum of three (3) specimens and a recommended five (5) specimens for flexural testing and also fortensile testing, if applicable.4)The Short-term Flexural (Bending) Properties testing should be in accordance with TestMethods ASTM D 790 and shall have a minimum flexural modulus of 250 ksi and aminimum tensile strength of 2500 psi. G.Patent1.This process is patented and is to be installed by a licensed Contractor.2.The Contractor shall warrant to the Owner that the methods, materials, and equipment used herein,are covered by the license and are furnished in accordance with the license.3.The Contactor shall warrant and save harmless the Owner and all individuals and representativesagainst all claims for patent infringement and any loss thereof. 3.09 Pipebursting A.Delivery, Storage and Handling of Materials1.The Contractor shall handle all materials in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations.B.Pipe Jointing1.Sections of the liner pipe shall be joined by butt-fusion method and performed in strict conformance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations using approved equipment.2.The Contractor shall make arrangements to have a technical representative of the pipe manufacturer present for the start-up of the butt-fusion jointing and training of the Contractor’s personnel, orarrangements shall be made for the pipe manufacturer’s representative to remain on the job until alljointing has been completed.3.When requested by the Owner, samples of butt-fusion joints shall be furnished by the Contractor for laboratory testing.4.The test of such samples shall clearly demonstrate joint integrity, strength, etc.C.Pulling Pipe1.New polyethylene pipe shall be pulled immediately behind the pipe bursting equipment inaccordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.2.The equipment shall be specifically designed and manufactured for the pipe insertion process.3.The Contractor shall install all pulleys, rollers, bumpers, alignment control devices, and otherequipment required to protect existing manholes and to protect the new pipe from damage duringinstallation.4.Lubrication may be used as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.5.Under no circumstances shall the pipe be stressed beyond fifty-percent (50%) of its tensile strengthat yield.6.Provide a suitable pull measuring device connected to the pulling system.7.Upon commencement, insertion shall be continuous without interruption, unless approved by theOwner.8.Terminal sections of pipe that are joined within the insertion pit shall be connected with a quarter-inch (1/4”) thick neoprene gasket and a stainless steel band clamp having a minimum of four (4)bolt/nut down fixtures.9.The butt gap between pipe ends shall not exceed half-inch (1/2”).10.The installed pipe shall be allowed the manufacturer’s recommended amount of time, but not less Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 than twenty-four (24) hours, for relaxation prior to any reconnection of service lines, sealing of the annulus, or backfilling the insertion pit. 11.Sufficient excess length shall be allowed to provide for this occurrence. D.Service Connections1.All service connections shall be identified, excavated, and disconnected prior to pipe bursting.2.After the new main has been pulled into place, allowed to recover, and secured to the manhole walls, each service shall be reconnected to the new main.3.Shall be connected by the use of an approved pre-fabricated saddle.a.Saddle shall be equipped with a neoprene gasket installed between the saddle and the liner pipeso that a complete water seal is accomplished when the two-piece saddle is placed around thepolyethylene pipe and pulled together with stainless steel bands.4.Drill hole in main shall be flush with the inside diameter of the saddle.5.Continuous service shall be maintained, unless otherwise indicated by the Owner.DI.Annulus Sealing1.The relaxed pipe shall be cut four-inch (4”) inside of manholes and any annular space sealed.2.The annular space may be sealed with a mechanical device, chemical seal, or quick-setting concrete.a.The method chosen shall be approved by the Owner prior to construction.3.The sealant shall form a smooth transition above the liner projection into the manhole.4.The sealant shall be applied three-inches (3”) beyond the annulus on the inside wall of the manhole.5.The complete joint shall be uniform and water-tight.DII.Cleanup1.The Contractor will be responsible for all cleanup and restoration of the existing surfaceimprovements to a like or better condition as existed prior to construction.2.All excess materials shall become the property of the Contractor whom is responsible for disposal in accordance with Local, State, and Federal regulations. 3.10 Excavation and Backfill A.Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIESB.Insertion Pits1.The location and number of insertion pits shall be determined by the Contractor to maximizeinsertion lengths and keep the number of excavations to a minimum.2.The insertion pit size shall be the minimum necessary to perform the insertion operations in a safemanner.3.Locations of the pits shall be acceptable to the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-1 SECTION 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for the excavation and backfill of water utilities, wastewater utilities, and storm drainage utilities, as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related SectionsA.03 31 11.13 CONCRETE STRUCTURESB.31 23 16.13 TRENCHINGC.31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENTD.33 05 07 TRENCHLESS UTILITY INSTALLATIONE.33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPINGF.33 31 13 WASTEWATER UTILITY FORCE MAIN PIPING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. ASTM C 150 – Specification for Portland Cement B. ASTM D 558 – Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures C. ASTM D 698 – Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) D. ASTM D 2487 – Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) E. ASTM D 2922 – Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place By Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) F. Part 1926, Subpart P – Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Interpretations G. Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C – Trench Safety H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 421, Hydraulic Cement Concrete I. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS–4610, Fly Ash J. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-106-E 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Final Backfill – Material located from the top of the Initial Backfill to a specified height and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall B. Pipe Bedding – Material located from the top of the foundation to the bottom level line of the pipe and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall. C. Initial Backfill – Material placed from the Pipe Bedding up to a determined level line above the top of pipe and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall. D. Pipe Embedment – Backfill Material consisting of Pipe Bedding and Initial Backfill. E. Pipe Foundation – Material located at the bottom of the trench and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Class I Backfill Materials A. Material shall be well-graded gravels, sands, gravel-sand mixture, with all meet the following requirements: 1. Meet the requirements of ASTM D2487 for: GW, SW. 2. Gradation a. GW 1) D60 / D10 – greater than four-percent (4%) 2) 1-1/2” (37.5 mm) Sieve – one-hundred percent 100% passing 3) No. 4 (4.75 mm) Sieve – less than 50% of coarse fraction passing 4) No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve – less than or equal to five-percent (5%) passing Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-2 b. SW 1) D60 / D10 – greater than six-percent (6%) 2) 1-1/2” (37.5 mm) Sieve – one-hundred percent 100% passing 3) No. 4 (4.75 mm) Sieve – more than 50% of coarse fraction passing 4) No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve – less than or equal to five-percent (5%) passing 3. Plasticity Index a. GW 1) Non-plastic b. SW 1) Non-plastic 2.02 Class II Backfill Materials A. Material shall meet the following requirements: 1. Meet the requirements of ASTM D2487 for: GM, GP, SM, SP, SP-SM, SW-SM, GP-GM, GW-GM. 2. Gradation a. GP 1) No. 4 (4.75 mm) Sieve – minimum 30% passing 2) No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve – less than five-percent (5%) passing b. SP 1) No. 4 (4.75 mm) Sieve – minimum 30% passing 2) No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve – less than five-percent (5%) passing c. GP-GM, GW-GM, SP-SM, SW-SM 1) No. 4 (4.75 mm) Sieve – minimum 30% passing 2) No. 200 (0.075 mm) Sieve – between five-percent (5%) and twelve-percent (12%) passing 3. Plasticity Index a. GP 1) Non-plastic to 4 b. SP 1) Non-plastic to 4 c. GP-GM, GW-GM, SP-SM, SW-SM 1) Non-plastic to 4 2.03 Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material A. Material shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421, Aggregate Grade 4 or 5. 2.04 Crushed Stone Backfill Material A. Material shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421, Aggregate Grade 2, 3, or 4. 2.05 Flowable Fill Backfill Material A. Cement 1. Shall be Cement Portland cement in accordance with ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Fly Ash 1. Fly ash shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT DMS-4610. C. Filler Aggregate 1. Shall consist of sand, stone screenings, other granular material that is compatible with the other components. 2. Shall be fine enough to stay in suspension to the extent required for proper flow without segregation and for minimal settlement. 3. Shall have a Plasticity Index (TxDOT Test Method Tex-106-E) less than 15 and shall conform to the following gradation: a. Percent passing Sieve No. 200 shall be 0% – 10% D. Mixing Water 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. E. Additives 1. Darafill® or approved other. F. Strength 1. Shall be 100 – 300 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days 2.06 Select Backfill Material A. Shall be native on-site material from excavation, imported material, or a mixture of sand and clay or Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-3 other suitable granular material free from vegetation, rocks, debris, and material that is in large clumps greater than two-inches (2”) meeting the following requirements: 1. Liquid limit of thirty-five (35) maximum, 2. Plasticity index range from eight (8) to twenty (20), 3. Moisture range from -1% to 3%. B. This material shall not include soils with a Unified Soil Classification System of OL, MH, OH, CH, and PT or soils with an AASHTO classification of A7. 2.07 Sand Backfill Material A. Sand 1. Gradation shall be as follows: a. Percent passing #4 sieve – 55 – 100 b. Percent passing #10 sieve – 40 – 100 c. Percent passing #40 sieve – 25 – 100 d. Percent passing #200 sieve – 10 – 20 e. Plasticity Index – Non-plastic to 4 2.08 Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material A. Shall be a mixture of cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of two (2) sacks of standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand. B. Sand 1. Gradation shall be as follows: a. Percent passing #4 sieve – 55 - 100 b. Percent passing #10 sieve – 40 - 100 c. Percent passing #40 sieve – 25 - 100 d. Percent passing #200 sieve – 10 - 20 e. Plasticity Index – NP – 10 2.09 Native Backfill Material A. Suitable material chosen from on-site excavation or imported may be used. 1. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. B. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. C. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. D. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. 2.10 Topsoil Backfill Material A. Suitable material chosen from on-site excavation or imported may be used. 1. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. B. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. C. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. D. Should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading. E. Capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. 2.11 Other Backfill Materials A. Other material of comparable featured and equal quality may be substituted for the above items with approval of the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. All surplus materials shall become the Contractors and disposal shall be in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations and will be the responsibility of the Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. C. All damages by excavating, either to surface or subsurface structures, shall be repaired or replaced by the Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-4 Constructor at his own cost and expense to the requirements of the damaged items owner. 3.02 Safety Requirements A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to adhere to all safety procedures and requirements of local, state, and federal regulations. B. If at any time a trench shall be required to perform the work then the requirements of Section 31 23 16.13 TRENCHING shall be required. C. Any excavation that remains open after working hours shall be covered with a steel plate of sufficient thickness to support traffic. 3.03 Excavation A. General 1. Trenching a. Excavation shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides in accordance with Section 31 23 16.13 TRENCHING. b. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks, driveways, power pole, drainage, streets, etc. c. The Contractor shall not have more the 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the Drawings and specification. 1) No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours, without prior authorization from the Owner. d. If, for whatever reason, the trench width at the top of pipe must exceed that width indicated in the bedding details, the Contractor shall modify bedding as required by the Owner to accommodate the additional load on the pipe. 1) Excavation width shall not exceed the right-of-way width, easement width, or as indicated on the Drawings or by Owner. e. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material develop or is encountered during the excavation, the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the Drawings. 1) If the unstable condition is a result of ground water, the Contractor, prior to additional excavation shall control it. 2) After stable conditions have been achieved, unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of: a) Two-feet (2’) below the bottom of pipe for pipes two-feet (2’) or more in height. b) To a depth equal to the height of pipe, twelve-inches (12”) minimum, for pipe less than two-feet (2’) in height. c) Such excavation shall be carried at least one-foot (1’) beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. 3) All unstable soil removed shall be replaced with Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or approved suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Owner, and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. 4) For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms, seals, sheathing, and bracing, any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor's expense. a) The limit of excavation may be modified to allow for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting, shoring, bracing, etc. 2. Trenchless a. Shall be done in accordance with Section 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS UTILITY INSTALLATION 3. For all utilities to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one-foot (1’) above the top of the pipe or conduit in accordance with Section 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENT, after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. B. Pipes 1. General a. The limit of excavation shall allow for all work to be performed in a safe manner, for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting, shoring, bracing, etc. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-5 b. Trenches shall have a maximum width as required to one-foot (1’) above the outside surface of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or by the Owner. 2. Vertical Side a. The limit shall not exceed three-feet (3’) outside the Pipe Embedment on a vertical plane parallel to the Pipe Embedment except where specifically approved otherwise by the Owner. b. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, other improvements and utilities, etc. c. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all trench protection. d. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed, as the excavation is backfilled in a safe manner. 3. Sloping Sides a. In unimproved areas, where sufficient space is available, the Contractor shall be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation as long as it is completed in a safe manner in accordance with all Local, State, and Federal regulations. 1) Backfill material will be required to be in accordance with the backfill for the pipe installed. 4. Unauthorized Over Excavation a. In the event the excavation is carried on below the indicated elevation, the Contractor at his expense shall bring the grade back to requirements by filling with Pipe Embedment Backfill material as required, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. C. Manholes and Inlets 1. General a. The limit of excavation shall allow for all work to be performed in a safe manner, for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting, shoring, bracing, etc. 2. Vertical Side a. The limit shall not exceed three-feet (3’) outside the footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the Owner. b. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, other improvements and utilities, etc. c. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all trench protection. d. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed, as the excavation is backfilled in a safe manner. 3. Sloping Sides a. In unimproved areas, where sufficient space is available, the Contractor shall be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation as long as it is completed in a safe manner in accordance with all Local, State, and Federal regulations. 1) Backfill material will be required to be in accordance with the backfill for the pipe installed. 4. Unauthorized Over Excavation a. Excavation for slabs, footings, etc., that rest on earth, shall not be carried below the elevation shown on the Drawings. 1) In the event the excavation is carried on below the indicated elevation, the Contractor at his expense shall bring the slab, footing, etc., to the required grade by filling with concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. D. Shaping of Trench Bottom 1. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. E. De-watering 1. The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of cofferdams, bailing, pumping well pointing, or any combination as the particular situation may warrant. a. Removal of well-points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-6 2. All de-watering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for construction, removal of forms, and inspection of exterior of formwork. 3. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a firm dry bed. 4. The foundation bed shall be kept in a de-watered condition for a sufficient period of time to insure the safety of the structure, but in no case shall de-watering be terminated sooner than seven (7) days after placing concrete. 5. All de-watering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Owner. 6. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Owner before work on the structure is started. 7. The Contractor shall provide a relatively smooth, firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed earth without additional cost to the Owner, regardless of the soil conditions encountered. a. The Owner will be the sole judge as to whether these conditions have been met. F. Excavation in Streets 1. Excavation in streets, together with the maintenance of traffic where specified, and the restoration of the pavement riding surface shall be in accordance with Drawing detail, or as required by other applicable specifications. G. Removing Abandoned Structures 1. When abandoned masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth of one foot (1’) below the bottom of the trench. 2. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no Drawing provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility, such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth one-foot (1’) below the bottom of the trench. 3. In each instance, the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. 4. Where the trench cuts through utility lines which are known to be abandoned, these sewers shall be cut flush with sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. H. Protection of Utilities 1. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute, provide temporary detours, or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay. 2. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. 3. If a utility is damaged it shall be restored promptly by the Contractor at his expense in accordance with the utility owners requirements. 4. The Contractor shall not hold the Owner liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of utility adjustments or conflicts. I. Excess Excavated Material 1. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed, by the Contractor, from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved, or incorporated into the project. 3.04 Water Utilities Backfill A. Main Piping and Accessories 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not enclosed in concrete valve boxes, laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells, so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-7 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. 5) Care shall be taken to not damage the tracer wire or cause wire to come off of pipe. b. Pipes 6” to 14” 1) Material a) Shall be Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Eight-inches (8”) below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12”) of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12”) above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes 16” and Larger 1) Material a) Shall be Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Twelve-inches (12”) below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12”) of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12”) above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. e. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Warning Tape a. Shall be placed as required in Section 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 4. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Paved Areas a) Top of Pipe Embedment Material to the bottom of road subgrade material Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-8 (1) Select Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Non-Paved Areas a) Top of Pipe Embedment Material to six-inches (6”) below finished grade (1) Native Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Top six-inches (6”) (1) Topsoil Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Select Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent (90%) Standard Proctor, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet (2’) of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet (3’) or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies), or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-9 c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet (2’) of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies), or Owner. 6. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) for any pipe section between main line valves and every one-hundred linear feet (100’) of main pipe per two-feet (2’) vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill, not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet (2') above top of pipe, in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure 1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Service Lines 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells, so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Pipes up to 2” 1) Material a) Shall be Select Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6”) below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of six-inches (6”) of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Six-inches (6”) above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes Larger Than 2” a) Shall be considered Main Piping and be in accordance with Section A of the Water Utilities Backfill in this specification. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. e. Compaction Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-10 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Shall be Native Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent (90%) Standard Proctor, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4. Compaction Testing a. Are to be tested at a rate of one (1) for every six (6) services staggered or every three-hundred linear feet (300’) of water service installed. 3.05 Wastewater Utilities Backfill A. Main Piping and Accessories 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells, so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Pipes 6” to 14” 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet (<20’) in depth and above groundwater table: Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-11 (1) Shall be Class I Backfill Material, Class II Backfill Material, Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet (>20’) in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6”) below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12”) of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12”) above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes 16” and Larger 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet (<20’) in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Class I Backfill Material, Class II Backfill Material, Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet (>20’) in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Twelve-inches (12”) below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12”) of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12”) above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. e. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Class I Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Class II Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at three-percent (3%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698 without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-12 5) Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Warning Tape a. Ductile Iron Pipe 1) Shall be placed as required in Section 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING b. Plastic Pipe 1) Shall be placed as required in Section 33 31 13.13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 4. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to three-feet (3’) below the bottom of road subgrade material (1) Select Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Three-feet (3’) below the bottom of road base material to the bottom of the road subgrade material (1) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material. 2) Non-Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to six-inches (6”) below finished grade (1) Native Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Top six-inches (6”) (1) Topsoil Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Select Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent (90%) Standard Proctor, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-13 5. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet (2’) of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet (3’) or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies), or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet (2’) of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies), or Owner. 6. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) for any pipe section between manholes and every one-hundred linear feet (100’) of main pipe per two-feet (2’) vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill, not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet (2') above top of pipe, in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure 1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Service Lines 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells, so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-14 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Pipes 4” to 6” 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet (<20’) in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet (>20’) in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6”) below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of six-inches (6”) of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Six-inches (6”) above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes Larger Than 6” a) Shall be considered Main Piping and be in accordance with Section A of the Wastewater Utilities Backfill in this specification. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. e. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Shall be Native Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-15 d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility. 2) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent (90%) Standard Proctor, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet (2’) of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet (3’) or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies), or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet (2’) of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies), or Owner. 5. Compaction Testing 6. Are to be tested at a rate of one (1) for every six (6) services staggered or every three-hundred linear feet (300’) of wastewater service installed in accordance with ASTM D 2922. C. Manhole A.Schedule of Backfilling 1.Backfilling around the manholes shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. B.Subgrade 1.Shall be undisturbed native material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2.Compact top six-inches (6”) to 95% Standard Proctor Density. C.Bedding 1.General a.The placing of the backfill material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-16 2.Material a.Crushed Stone Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3.Requirement a.Below Foundation (1)Eight-inches (8”) , or as required by the Drawings or Owner b.Width (1)Foundation width plus two-feet (2’) or to edge of excavation whichever is greater. 4.Placement a.Compact to form a stable surface to place foundation upon, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. D.Initial Backfill 1.General a.The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2.Material a.Excavation less than twenty-feet (<20’) in depth and above groundwater table: (1)Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b.Excavation greater than twenty-feet (>20’) in depth and below groundwater table: (1)Shall be Flowable Fill Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2)Allow to cure prior to placement of Final Backfill 3.Requirement a.Above Bedding (1)Five-feet (5’), or as required by the Drawings or Owner b.Width (1)To extent of excavation. 4.Placement a.Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility. b.Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c.The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 5.Compaction a.General (1)Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility. b.Crushed Stone Backfill Material (1)Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. E.Final Backfill 1.General a.All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. b.The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. c.Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. 2.Material a.Paved Areas (1)Top of Initial Backfill to the bottom of road subgrade material (a) Cement Stabilized Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b.Non-Paved Areas (1)Top of Embedment Material to six-inches (6”) below finished grade (a) Select Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2)Top six-inches (6”) (a) Topsoil Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3.Placement Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-17 a.Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c.The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4.Compaction a.General (1)Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Select Backfill Material (1)Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c.Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1)Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d.Topsoil Backfill Material (1)Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2)Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. F.Compaction Testing 1.Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) per two-feet (2’) vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill, not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet (2') above top of Initial Backfill, in accordance with ASTM D 2922. 2.Failure a.If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. 3.06 Storm Water Utilities Backfill A. Main Piping and Accessories 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner.. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells, so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. All Pipes 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet (<20’) in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Class I Backfill Material, Class II Backfill Material, Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet (>20’) in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-18 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6”) below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12”) of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12”) above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Class I Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Class II Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at three-percent (3%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698 without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5) Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to three-feet (3’) below the bottom of road subgrade material (1) Select Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Three-feet (3’) below the bottom of road base material to the bottom of the road subgrade material (1) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material. 2) Non-Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to six-inches (6”) below finished grade (1) Native Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Top six-inches (6”) Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-19 (1) Topsoil Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Select Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent (90%) Standard Proctor, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet (2’) of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet (3’) or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies), or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-20 c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet (2’) of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies), or Owner. 5. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) for any pipe section between manholes, junction boxes, inlets, and every one-hundred linear feet (100’) of main pipe per two-feet (2’) vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill, not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet (2') above top of pipe, in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure 1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Manhole A.Schedule of Backfilling 1.Backfilling around the manholes shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. B.Subgrade 1.Shall be undisturbed native material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2.Compact top six-inches (6”) to 95% Standard Proctor Density. C.Bedding 1.General a.The placing of the backfill material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2.Material a.Crushed Stone Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3.Requirement a.Below Foundation (1)Eight-inches (8”) , or as required by the Drawings or Owner b.Width (1)Foundation width plus two-feet (2’) or to edge of excavation whichever is greater. 4.Placement a.Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c.The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 5.Compaction a.General (1)Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Class I Backfill Material (1)Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c.Class II Backfill Material (1)Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at three-percent (3%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698 without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d.Crushed Stone Backfill Material Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-21 (1)Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. D.Initial Backfill 1.General a.The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2.Material a.Excavation less than twenty-feet (<20’) in depth and above groundwater table: (1)Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b.Excavation greater than twenty-feet (>20’) in depth and below groundwater table: (1)Shall be Flowable Fill Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2)Allow to cure prior to placement of Final Backfill 3.Requirement a.Above Bedding (1)Five-feet (5’) or to the bottom of the bottom of road subgrade material, whichever is less, or as required by the Drawings or Owner b.Width (1)To extent of excavation. 4.Placement a.Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c.The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 5.Compaction a.General (1)Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1)Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. E.Final Backfill 1.General a.All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. b.The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. c.Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. 2.Material a.Paved Areas (1)Top of Initial Backfill to the bottom of road subgrade material (a) Cement Stabilized Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b.Non-Paved Areas (1)Top of Initial Backfill to six-inches (6”) below finished grade (a) Native Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2)Top six-inches (6”) (a) Topsoil Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3.Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-22 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4.Compaction a.General (1)Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1)Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c.Native Backfill Material (1)Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent (90%) Standard Proctor, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d.Topsoil Backfill Material (1)Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2)Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5.Compaction Testing a.Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) per two-feet (2’) vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill, not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet (2') above top of Initial Backfill, in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b.Failure (1)If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. C. Inlet A.Schedule of Backfilling 1.Backfilling shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. B.Subgrade 1.Shall be undisturbed native material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2.Compact top six-inches (6”) to 95% Standard Proctor Density. C.Bedding 1.General a.The placing of the backfill material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2.Material a.Crushed Stone Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3.Requirement a.Below Foundation (1)Eight-inches (8”), or as required by the Drawings or Owner b.Width (1)Foundation width plus two-feet (2’) or to edge of excavation whichever is greater. 4.Placement a.Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c.The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 5.Compaction a.General (1)Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Crushed Stone Backfill Material Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-23 (1)Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. D.Initial Backfill 1.General a.The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2.Material a.Paved Side (1)Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2)Requirement (a) Above Bedding i. Five-feet (5’) or to the bottom of the bottom of road subgrade material, whichever is less, or as required by the Drawings or Owner (b) Width i. To extent of excavation. b.Non Paved Side (1)Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2)Requirement (a) Above Bedding i. Five-feet (5’) or eight-inches (8“) below final grade, or as required by the Drawings or Owner (b) Width i. To extent of excavation. 3.Placement a.Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c.The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4.Compaction a.Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1)Shall be hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. E.Final Backfill 1.General a.All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. b.The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. c.Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. 2.Material a.Paved Side (1)Top of Initial Backfill to the bottom of road subgrade material (a) Cement Stabilized Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b.Non-Paved Side (1)Top of Initial Backfill Material to six-inches (6”) below finished grade (a) Native Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2)Top six-inches (6”) (a) Topsoil Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-24 3.Placement a.Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. c.The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock, or other foreign matter. 4.Compaction a.General (1)Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b.Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1)Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c.Native Backfill Material (1)Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent (90%) Standard Proctor, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d.Topsoil Backfill Material (1)Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8”) in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2)Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. F.Compaction Testing 1.Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) per two-feet (2’) vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill, not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet (2') above top of Initial Backfill, in accordance with ASTM D 2922. 2.Failure a.If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A.This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of Plastic and DuctileIron Pipe and fittings as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A.33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A.ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C104) – Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for WaterB.ANSI A 21.5 (AWWA C105) – Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe SystemsC.ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110) – Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 inch through 48 inchD.ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C111) – Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and FittingsE.ANSI A 21.15 (AWWA C115) – Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron or Gray Iron ThreadedFlangesF.ANSI A21.16 (AWWA C 116) – Protective Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and ExteriorSurfaces of Ductile Iron and Grey iron Fittings for Water Supply ServiceG.ANSI A 21.50 (AWWA C150) – Thickness Design of Ductile Iron PipeH.ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C151) – Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water and Other LiquidsI.ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C153) – Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water ServiceJ.ASME B 16.1 – Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged FittingsK.ASTM A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural SteelL.ASTM A 536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron CastingsM.ASTM F 477 – Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic PipeN.ASTM D 1599 – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and FittingsO.ASTM F 1674 – Standard Test Method for Joint Restraint Products for Use with PVC PipeP.ASTM D 1784 – Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC)CompoundsQ.ASTM D 2122 – Standard Method of Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and FittingsR.ASTM 2241 – Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)S.ASTM D 3139 – Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible ElastomericSealsT.AWWA C 900 – AWWA Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4Inch Through 12 Inch, for Water Transmission and DistributionU.AWWA C 905 – AWWA Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe Diameters 14inch through 36 inchV.AWWA M 23 – PVC Pipe Design and InstallationW.AWWA C 600 – Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and their AppurtenancesX.NSF / ANSI Standard 61 – Drinking Water System ComponentsY.American Public Works Association (APWA)Z.Texas Administrative Code – 30 TAC §217.53(d)AA. Texas Administrative Code – 30 TAC §290.44(e)BB. Standard Water Details (as applicable) 1.04 Submittals A.Pipe1.Submit manufacturer’s certifications that the pipe meets the provisions of this section and complywith the references.B.Fittings1.Submit manufacturer’s certifications that the fittings meet the provisions of this section andcomply with the references.C.Gaskets1.An analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and thatno natural rubber is present shall be supplied. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.05 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. ASME – American Society of Mechanical EngineersB.ASTM – American Society of Testing and MaterialsC.ANSI – American National Standards InstituteD.AWWA – American Water Works AssociationE.Dimension Ratio (DR) – the ratio of the pipe outside diameter to the minimum wall thickness. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General A.All products must comply with NSF/ANSI Standard 61.B.To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide allrequired information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner forapproval prior to incorporation into the Project.C.All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.02 Plastic Pipe A.General1.Identification markingsa.Each length of pipe shall bear identification markings in conformance with AWWA.b.Markings shall be applied at intervals of not more than five-feet (5’) on the pipe.c.The minimum markings are as follows:1)Nominal Size and OD base2)PVC3)Dimension Ratio (DR#)4)AWWA Pressure Rating (PR#)5)AWWA Designation Number (AWWA C#)6)Manufacturer’s name and trademark7)Manufacturer’s production code, including day, month, year, shift, Plant, and extruder ofmanufacture.2.Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths of twenty-feet (20’) (plus or minus one-inch(1”)), unless otherwise noted.3.Certificationa.Pipe1)The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification.b.Gaskets1)The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification.c.Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials.4.Pipe shall be integrally blue in color.B.AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe1.Generala.Specification covers six-inch (6”) through twelve-inch (12”) diameter.2.Materiala.Shall be made of Class 1245A or Class 1245B compounds, as defined in ASTM D 1784 with anestablished Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 4,000 psi .3.Dimensiona.Shall be manufactured to cast iron pipe equivalent outside diameters.b.Dimensions and tolerances for each nominal pipe sizes shall be in accordance with AWWAC900.4.Jointa.Pipe shall have an integral bell formed on the pipe end and be designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall in accordance with ASTM D 3139.b.The use of solvent weld pipe is not allowed. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 c.Joint restraints shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer or Owner.5.Gasketa.An elastomeric gasket shall be manufactured with a retainer ring, which “locks” the gasket intothe integral bell groove and shall be installed at the point of manufacturer.b.Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F 477.6.Pipe Pressure Classa.Shall be Class 150 (DR 18) with the following requirements:1)Sustained pressure requirement of 500 psi in accordance with ASTM D 2241,2)Minimum burst pressure of 755 psi in accordance with ASTM D 1599.7.Dimension Ratioa.Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings pipe shall have a dimension ratio of 18 (DR 18) and in accordance with AWWA C 900.8.Cause for Rejectiona.Pipe does not meet the specification,b.Scratched pipe,c.Evidence of ultraviolet radiation “sunburn” due to extended unprotected storage conditions,d.Damaged pipe, ore.Damaged gasketC.AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe1.Generala.Specification covers sixteen-inch (16”) through twenty-four inch (24”) diameter.2.Materiala.Shall be made of Class 1245A or Class 1245B compounds, as defined in ASTM D 1784 with anestablished Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 4,000 psi.3.Dimensiona.Be manufactured to cast iron pipe equivalent outside diameters.b.Dimensions and tolerances for each nominal pipe sizes shall be in accordance with AWWA C905.4.Jointa.Pipe shall have an integral bell formed on the pipe end and be designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall in accordance with ASTM D 3139.b.The use of solvent weld pipe is not allowed.c.Joint restraints shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer or Owner.5.Gasketa.An elastomeric gasket shall be manufactured with a retainer ring, which “locks” the gasket intothe integral bell groove and shall be installed at the point of manufacturer.b.Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F 477.6.Pipe Pressure Classa.Shall be Class 165 (DR25) with the following requirements:1)Sustained pressure requirement of 500 psi in accordance with ASTM D 2241,2)Minimum burst pressure of 755 psi in accordance with ASTM D 1599.7.Dimension Ratioa.Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings pipe shall have a dimension ratio (DR) of 25 (DR25) and in accordance with AWWA C 905.8.Cause for Rejectiona.Pipe does not meet the specification,b.Scratched pipe,c.Evidence of ultraviolet radiation “sunburn” due to extended unprotected storage conditions,d.Damaged pipe, ore.Damaged gasket 2.03 Ductile Iron Pipe A.General1.Shall conform to ANSI A 21.15 (AWWA C115), ANSI A 21.50 (AWWA C150), and ANSI A 21.51(AWWA C 151).2.Identification Markings Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 a.Each length of pipe shall bear identification markings in conformance with AWWA.b.Markings shall be applied at intervals of not more than five-feet (5’) on the pipe.1)The minimum markings are as follows:a)Nominal Size and OD baseb)Wall Thicknessc)AWWA Pressure Classd)AWWA Designation Number (AWWA C#)e)Manufacturer’s name and trademarkf)Manufacturer’s production code, including day, month, year, shift, plant.c.The face of bells shall be plainly marked by color coding for classes so as to be readilyidentified in the field.3.Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths plus or minus one-inch (1”) unless otherwisenoted.4.Certificationa.A certification shall accompany each order furnished to job site.b.The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit ofcompliance with this specification.5.Pressure class for ductile iron pipe shall meet the requirements of Table 1: Table 1 Pressure Class for Ductile Iron Pipe Diameter (inches) Pressure Class (psi) Wall Thickness (inches) Range of Maximum Allowable Depth Cover (A – B)1 (feet) 6 350 0.25 30 – 65 8 350 0.25 20 – 50 12 350 0.28 15 – 44 16 300 0.32 13 – 39 24 250 0.37 11 – 29 1 Range of maximum allowable depth of pipe where: A = Groundwater, unstable bottom, or quick condition B = Ideal trench conditions, and sand encasement is at an average density in excess of 90% Standard Proctor. B.Coatings1.Interiora.Shall be either:1)Lined with Cement mortar with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C104).2)Lined with Fusion Bonded Epoxy in accordance with ANSI A21.16 (AWWA C 116).b.Shall be free of voids and holidays.2.Exteriora.Shall have a coating of coal tar epoxy of approximately 1 mil thick or as specified in ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C151). 2.04 Fittings A.General1.Shall be ductile iron and in accordance with ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110) or ANSI A 21.53 (AWWAC153). Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.Shall be same size as pipe.3.Shall have a pressure rating of:a.250 psi for sizes through twelve-inch (12"), unless shown differently on Drawings,b.150 psi for sixteen-inch (16") and twenty-four inch (24”), unless shown differently onDrawings.B.Coatings1.Interiora.Shall be either:1)Lined with Cement mortar with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C104),or2)Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coated in accordance with ANSI A21.16 (AWWA C 116).2.Exteriora.Shall have a coating of coal tar epoxy of approximately 1 mil thick or as specified in ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C151).C.Reducers1.Are not permitted to facilitate an off-size fitting,2.Reducing bushings are prohibited,3.Make reductions in pipe size by reducing fittings.D.Certification1.A certification shall accompany each order furnished to job site.2.The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit ofcompliance with this specification.3.A copy of a lab analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of syntheticrubber and that no natural rubber is present. 2.05 Joining A.Pipe1.Shall be tighten on or push on type.B.Fittings1.Shall be mechanical joints, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.C.Push on Joints1.Push on joints shall conform to ANSI A 21.11. Push on joints shall be complete with lubricant andgasket material. Gasket material shall be synthetic rubber, odor free, and containing no naturalrubber.D.Mechanical Joints1.Shall conform to ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C111) and/or ANSI A 21.53 (C153).2.Shall be furnished complete with joint material, Cor-ten nuts, Cor-ten bolts, glands and gaskets.E.Restrained Joints1.When indicated on the Drawings or required by manufacturer of pipe, restrained joints for pipeand fittings shall be mechanical joint push on type with retainer gland with a minimum of 250 psirated working pressure, manufactured from high strength ductile iron, and be in accordance withASTM A 536.F. Gaskets1.Shall be of synthetic rubber.2.An analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and thatno natural rubber is present shall be supplied. 2.06 Polyethylene Wrapping A.The polyethylene material shall:1.Have a minimum thickness of 8 mils2.May be either clear or black. 2.07 Backfill A.Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unlessotherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2.08 Warning Tape A.The tape shall be:1.APWA compliant color coding Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 a.Blue2.Shall be heavy duty polyethylene3.Minimum three-inches (3") wide4.4 Mil thickness5.Be continuously repeated in one and one-half inch (1-1/2”) letters marked witha.“CAUTION BURIED WATER LINE BELOW" 2.09 Tracer Wire A.Wire shall be of solid core 10 gauge insulatedB.Shall be Blue insulation PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A.All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturerrecommendations, and industry standards.1.In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall befollowed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Handling A.General1.The Contractor shall be responsible for the handling and safe storage of all materials in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and the specifications.2.All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will berejected.a.Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work by the end of thework day.3.Care shall be taken not to scratch pipe and fittings.a.Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of pipe or fitting.B.Unloading1.Materials shall be unloaded at point of delivery and hauled to the site by the Contractor.2.Materials may be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed provided that it isto be incorporated into the project within ten (10) days.C.Storing Materials1.Materials shall be stored on platforms and allows the material to not touch the ground orvegetation and protects it from damage, and blowing soil and debris.2.The interior of materials shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter.3.Materials shall be stored as recommended by the manufacturer and as directed by the Owner.4.Materials shall not be placed on private property, unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner by the Contractor.5.Materials shall not be placed within ten-feet (10’) of the back of curb or edge of pavement withoutpermission of the Owner.a.If road is open to traffic then the Contractor will be required to install Traffic Control devices as required to notify the public.D.Distribution of Materials1.Distribution of materials at the work site shall be allowed provided that they are incorporated intothe work within ten (10) days.2.The Contractor shall not distribute material in such a manner as to cause undue inconvenience tothe public.3.Materials shall not be placed on private property, unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner by the Contractor.4.Materials shall not be placed within five-feet (5’) of the back of curb or edge of pavement withoutpermission of the Owner.a.If road is open to traffic then the Contractor will be required to install Traffic Control devices as required to notify the public. 3.03 Excavation A.Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3.04 Placing Pipe and Accessories in Trench A.General1.Shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C 600 and the specifications.2.The trench shall be excavated true and parallel to the pipe centerline with the required clearancesbelow the pipe bottom and the required clearance from the bottom of the bell to the bottom of thebell hole as per 33 05 10.00 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES and manufacturerrecommendations.3.Proper implements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Owner shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work.4.Pipe identification markings shall be located on the top of the pipe when pipe is in the final position in the trench.5.All pipe and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of a derrick, ropes, orother suitable equipment, in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and accessories.6.Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench.B.Inspection of Pipe and Accessories1.The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering in the trench.2.Any defective, damaged, or unsound pipe shall be replaced.C.Clean Pipe1.All foreign matter, or dirt, shall be removed from the interior of the pipe prior to lowering into thetrench.2.Pipe shall be kept clean both in and out of the trench at all times during the laying.D.Tracer Wire1.Tracer wire shall be taped directly to the pipe at a minimum of ten-inch (10”) increments.2.Wire shall be continuous along the top of the pipe with no splices allowed.3.Wire shall come up to the top of valve extensions and fire hydrant stems, as directed by the Owner. 3.05 Alignment and Grade A.General1.All pipes and fittings shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades.2.Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such asconduits, ducts, pipes, connections to sewers or drains, the obstruction shall be permanentlysupported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, incooperation with the Owners of such utility structures.3.Temporary support and adequate protection of all underground and surface utility structuresencountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor.B.Utility Separation Distances1.Generala.Separation is to be measured from the outside surface of each respective piece.2.General utilitiesa. Parallel – vertical and horizontal separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2'), unlessotherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner.b.Crossing1)Separation of six-inches (6") to two-feet (2') – cement stabilized sand (10% cement percubic yard of sand) shall be placed between and two-feet (2') beyond each utility, unlessotherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner.2)Separation of more than two-feet (2') – backfill shall be as Drawings indicate or equal toor better than existing, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by theOwner.3.Wastewater utilitiesa. General1)In all cases the water utility shall be above the wastewater utility2)Water line pipe joint (18'+) is to be centered on the crossingb.Separation nine-feet (9') or more in all directions1)In all cases the water line is to be located above the wastewater utility and installed asindicated on the Drawings and by manufacturer recommendations.c.Separation nine-feet (9') or less in any direction Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1)New wastewater utilitya)The installation must meet the requirements of 30 TAC §217.53(d) and 30 TAC§290.44(e).(1)Parallel – vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and horizontalseparation shall be a minimum of four-feet (4'), unless otherwise noted on theDrawings, or required by the Owner.(2)Crossing – vertical separation shall be a minimum of one-foot (1') betweenoutside diameters and have cement stabilized sand (10% cement per cubic yardof sand) placed between and five-feet (5') beyond utility and the sewage line must be below the water utility, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or requiredby the Owner.2)Existing wastewater utilitya)If the wastewater utility line is leaking the line must be replaced nine-feet (9') in eachdirection of the crossing, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by theOwner.b)The installation must meet the requirements of 30 TAC §217.53(d) and 30 TAC§290.44(e).(1)Parallel – vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and horizontalseparation shall be a minimum of four-feet (4'), unless otherwise noted on theDrawings, or required by the Owner.(2)Crossing – vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and havecement stabilized sand (10% cement per cubic yard of sand) placed between andfive-feet (5') beyond, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by theOwner.4.Utilities conveying hazardous materials (oil, etc.)a.Contact Owner for requirements.C.Deviation from Drawings1.No deviation from the line and grade shown on Drawings may be made without the consent of theOwner.D.Depth of Cover1.Depth of cover will be measured from the established street grade or the surface of the permanentimprovement, or from finished grade to the top of the pipe barrel.2.Under Paved Areaa.Lines less than twelve-inch (12”)1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be thirty-sixinches (36”).2)The maximum depth of cover shall be forty-eight inches (48”).3)When depth of cover exceeds forty-eight inches (48”) to avoid obstruction the use ofbends may be required.4)The top of pipe shall be a minimum of twelve-inches (12”) below subgrade at all points.b.Lines twelve-inch (12”) and greater1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be forty-eight-inches (48”).2)When depth of cover exceeds forty-eight inches (48”) to avoid obstruction the use ofbends may be required.3)Be a minimum of twelve-inches (12”) below subgrade at all points.3.Under Non-Paved Areaa.Lines less than twelve-inch (12”)1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be thirty-six-inches (36”).2)The maximum depth of cover shall be forty-eight inches (48”).3)When depth of cover exceeds forty-eight inches (48”) to avoid obstruction the use ofbends may be required.4)Lines under Creeks and Drainage Channels shall be placed at a minimum of thirty-sixinches (36”) below the anticipated depth. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 b.Lines twelve-inch (12”) and greater1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be forty-eightinches (48”).2)When depth of cover exceeds forty-eight inches (48”) to avoid obstruction the use ofbends may be required.3)Lines under Creeks and Drainage Channels shall be placed at a minimum of forty-eightinches (48”) below the anticipated depth.4.Deviations from the minimum depth or maximum depth shall be promptly marked on the fieldDrawings. 3.06 Joining Pipes A.All pipes shall be joined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.B.When mechanical joints or restrained joints are to be constructed they are to be in accordance withthe manufacturer’s recommendations.C.Pipe deflection shall not exceed seventy-five percent (75%) of the maximum amount recommendedby the manufacturer. 3.07 Polyethylene Wrapping A.All buried ductile iron pipe and fittings, valves, except pipe or valves which are laid in encasement pipe, in concrete valve boxes, or above ground, shall be wrapped in two (2) plys of polyethylene inaccordance with ANSI A 21.5 (AWWA C105).B.The wrapping shall be lapped in such manner that all surfaces of pipe valves and fittings, includingjoints, shall have a double thickness of polyethylene.C.Polyethylene shall be lapped a minimum of eighteen-inches (18”) and the lap shall be placed in thelower quadrant of the pipe and in such a manner that backfill material cannot fall into the lap.D.The wrapping shall be lapped in such a manner that all surfaces of the pipe shall have a doublethickness of polyethylene.E.The polyethylene shall be secured in place with poly vinyl tape and/or twine at not more than six-foot(6’) intervals.F.Damage to the polyethylene wrapping shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Owner, so as to form the best protection to the pipes. 3.08 Backfill A.Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES.B.The backfill shall be placed in a manner that will not injure the polyethylene wrapping and shall becompacted under, around the sides, and over the pipe in a manner that will reduce settlement to aminimum and as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Hydrostatic Testing and Sterilization of Water System A.Products1.Generala.All products must comply with NSF/ANSI Standard 61.b.Pre-Approved materials and equipment can be found within the City of Corpus Christi ProductList – Water Department.1)Use of material and equipment from the list does not relieve the Contractor from meetingthe requirements of this specification.c.To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provideall required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to theOwner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project.d.All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on theDrawings.2.Test Riser Assemblya.Test Riser Assembly for two-inch (2") water line shall consist of (in order):1)2" Brass Nipple of length to allow top of nipple to be 12” minimum to 36” maximum abovegrade2)2" Brass Gate Valve3)2” Brass 90 Degree Street Elbow4)2” x 12” Brass Nippleb.Test Riser Assembly for four-inch (4") and up water line shall consist of (in order): Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1)M.J. Cap, ring, gasket, and hardware with a drilled and tapped 2" female iron pipe thread2)2" Brass 90 Degree Street Elbow3)2" x 12” Brass Nipple4)2" Brass Straight Coupling5)2" Brass Nipple of length to allow top of nipple to be 12” minimum to 36” maximum abovegrade6)2" Brass Gate Valve7)2” Brass 90 Degree Street Elbow8)2” x 12” Brass Nipple3.Watera.Water for filling the new water line and performing all tests shall be furnished by the Contractor from the City potable water system through a standard water construction meter connection.4.Standard Water Construction Meter and Gaugea.Will be supplied by the City after the Contractor has paid all applicable fees for the waterconstruction meter.5.Test Pump and Gaugea.The test pump, gauge, and applicable hardware at connection points shall be furnished by theContractorb.The Gauge shall be protected against extreme pressures by the use of a one-inch (1”) safety relief valve set at ten (10) psi above the test pressure.6.Calcium Hypochloritea.Shall be furnished and handled in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and local,state, and federal regulations.B.Execution1.Generala.All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturerrecommendations, and industry standards.2.Riser Assemblya.The Contractor shall install riser assemblies on each end of water lines to be tested.1)Note that this includes all two-inch (2") service connections.b.The assembly shall be wrapped in polyethylene, and concrete thrust blocking shall be applied at the base.c.After the line is tested and ready for connection to the existing water system, the Contractor shallremove the test riser assembly as listed below:1)For two-inch (2") water linea)Removal(1)2" Brass Nipple of length to allow top of nipple to be 12” minimum to 36” maximum above grade(2)2" Brass Gate Valve(3)2” Brass 90 Degree Street Elbow(4)2” x 12” Brass Nippleb)Install(1)2” Brass Plug2)For four-inch (4") and up water linea)Removal(1)2" Brass Straight Coupling(2)2" Brass Nipple of length to allow top of nipple to be 12” minimum to 36” maximum above grade(3)2" Brass Gate Valve(4)2” Brass 90 Degree Street Elbow(5)2” x 12” Brass Nippleb)Install(1)2” Brass Cap3)The removed test riser assembly shall remain the property of the Contractor.3.Test Pump and Gauge Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 a.Connection points shall be approved by the Water Superintendent or designated agent.b.Installation shall be approved by the Water Superintendent or designated agent.c.Gauge shall be directly connected to the pipe being tested by the use of copper tubing or anapproved reinforced hose.4.Hydrostatic Testinga. General1)Tests shall be made by the Contractor and witnessed by the Owner only after completionof backfill as specified in Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES.2)Testing shall be completed, and all work shall pass the required testing prior to placementof pavement.a)Contractor may proceed with placement of pavement and will incur all costs associated with the removal and replacement of pavement if utility fails testing and needs to bereplaced.3)Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure,measured at the point of lowest elevation, shall be applied.4)During the filling of the pipe, and before applying the specified test pressure, all air shallbe expelled from the pipeline.5)During the test, all exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints shall be carefullyexamined.a)If found to be leaking, they shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor.b)If the leaking is due to cracked or defective material, the defective material shall beremoved and replaced by the Contractor with sound material.b.Testing1)All pipes shall be subjected to two (2) hydrostatic tests.a)The first hydrostatic test shall be a two (2) hour test at a pressure of 150 P.S.I.(1)Ductile Iron Pipe(a)The maximum allowable leakage shall be calculated by the equation asfollows:L = S(D√P) / 133,200 L = Maximum Allowable Leakage (Gal./Hr.) Or S = Length of Pipe Tested (feet) L = N(D√P) / 7,400 N = Number of Joints in Tested Line (Pipe & Fittings) D = Nominal Diameter of Pipe (In.) P = Average Test Pressure (P.S.I.) (2)Plastic Pipe (PVC)(a)The maximum allowable leakage shall be calculated by the equation asfollows:L = N(D√P) / 7,400 L = Maximum Allowable Leakage (Gal./Hr.) N = Number of Joints in Tested Line (Pipe & Fittings) D = Nominal Diameter of Pipe (In.) P = Average Test Pressure (P.S.I.)b)The second hydrostatic test shall be for a 24-hour period at City operating pressurefor waterlines.(1)The second test shall be no less than 48 hours after successful completion of thefirst hydrostatic test.(2)The maximum allowable leakage shall be zero (0).2)If the pressure system fails to meet the leakage requirements, the Contractor shall makethe required repairs to the system and the system shall be retested.3)This procedure shall be repeated until the system complies with leakage requirements.5.Sterilizationa. General1)Where soil or other substances have come in contact with the water surfaces of the pipeand accessories, the interior shall be washed and sterilized with a two-percent (2%)solution of calcium hypochlorite.b.Test Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1)After passing the hydrostatic test, the new line shall be slowly filled with a solution ofwater and a concentrated calcium hypochlorite solution, and allowed to stand for 48hours.2)After sterilization period is completed, lines shall be flushed by the Contractor under thedirect supervision of a representative of the City Water Department.a)The calcium hypochlorite water shall be disposed of by the Contractor in accordancewith TCEQ regulations.3)After flushing of the new main, the Contractor will be required to obtain a sample andperform all required City and Texas State Health Department Purification Standards tests.a)After a 24 hour incubation period the results of the bacteriological test shall beobtained.b)If the sample does not pass Texas State Health Department purification standards, theprocedure shall be repeated.(1)Two (2) series of test failures shall require the Contractor to “pig” the systembefore any more bacteriological samples can be collected.4)The entire procedure shall be coordinated under the supervision of the WaterSuperintendent or designated agent and Owner.5)During sterilization process, valves shall be operated only under the supervision of theWater Superintendent or designated agent and Owner.c.Passing Test1)Remove test riser assembly.2)Complete tie-in of new water line to existing water system.a)Contact Water Superintendent or designated agent and Owner on date and time offinal tie-in a minimum of 24 hours prior to. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 33 31 13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A.This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of gravity flowWastewater Utility Public Piping as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A.03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURESB.33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A.ASTM D2487 – Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified SoilClassification System)B.ASTM D2564 – Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) PlasticPiping SystemsC.ASTM D2665 – Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and VentPipe and FittingsD.ASTM D3034 – Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe andFittingsE.ASTM D3212 – Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using FlexibleElastomeric SealsF.ASTM D3311 – Standard Specification for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings PatternsG.ASTM F679 – Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic GravitySewer Pipe and Fittings”H.Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association "Recommended Practice for Low Pressure Air Test of Installed Sewer Pipe" UNI-B-6I.Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction andMaintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 421, Hydraulic Cement ConcreteJ.Texas Administrative CodeK.American Water Works Association (AWWA)L.American Public Works Association (APWA)M.UNI-BELL PVC Pipe AssociationN.American National Standards InstituteO.Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) 1.04 Submittals A.Product Information1.Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and relatedspecification(s).B.Certification1.Pipea.The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit ofcompliance with this specification.2.Gasketsa.The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit ofcompliance with this specification.3.Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials.B.Televised Inspection1.A Televised Inspection Report Log must be turned into the Owner within in three (3) working daysafter completion for review shall be submitted for each line or segment inspected. Report formatshall be in accordance with the specifications and procedures of the local governing entity.2.A Inspection Video and Report must be turned into the Owner within in three (3) working daysafter completion for review shall be submitted for each line or segment inspected.a.The Video and report shall be labeled with the following information:1)Line Identification2)Date Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3)Project4)Inspection Company PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Pipe and Fittings A.Poly-vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings1.Shall be in accordance with:a.ASTM D3034 for pipe sizes three-inch (3”) to fifteen-inch (15”)b.ASTM F679 for pipe sizes eighteen-inch (18”) to forty-eight inch (48”).2.Pipe shall be integrally green in color.3.Pipe shall have an SDR of 26 and a Pipe Stiffness of 115 psi.4.Pipe and fittings shall have push-on compression gasket joints in accordance with ASTM D3212.5.Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths of twenty-feet (20’), plus or minus one-inch (1”)unless otherwise noted.6.Identification markingsa.Each length of pipe shall bear identification markings in conformance with AWWA.b.Markings shall be applied at intervals of not more than five-feet (5’) on the pipe.c.The minimum markings are as follows:1)Nominal Size and OD base2)PVC3)Dimension Ratio (DR#)4)AWWA Pressure Rating (PR#)5)AWWA Designation Number (AWWA C#)6)Manufacturer’s name and trademark7)Manufacturer’s production code, including day, month, year, shift, plant, and extruder ofmanufacture.7.Certificationb.Pipe1)The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification.c.Gaskets1)The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification.2)Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials. 2.02 Backfill Materials A.As per SECTION 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 2.03 Wastewater Public Service Lines A.Pipe and fittings shall be solvent weld SCH 40 PVC in accordance with ASTM D2665 and ASTM D3311,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.B.Pipe Size1.Residential – four-inch (4”) diameter and as noted on the Drawings.2.Commercial – six-inch (6") diameter and as noted on the Drawings.C.Solvent cement for PVC shall comply with ASTM D2564.D.No co-mingling of different materials except through the use of proper adaptors.E.Adaptors shall have a stainless steel or fiberglass shear ring.F.Cleanout Boot1.Sigma VB 103 or approved equal. 2.04 Service Marker A.Shall be brass and in accordance with applicable details or governing municipality 2.05 Concrete A.Shall be Class B concrete in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2.06 Warning Tape A.The tape shall be:1.APWA compliant color codinga. Green Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.Shall be heavy duty polyethylene3.Minimum three-inches (3") wide4.4 Mil thickness5.Be continuously repeated in one and one-half inch (1-1/2”) letters marked with:a.“CAUTION BURIED SEWER LINE BELOW" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A.All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturerrecommendations, and industry standards.1.In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall befollowed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Handling Materials A.General1.The Contractor shall be responsible for the handling and safe storage of all materials in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and the specifications.2.All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will berejected.a.Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work by the end of thework day.3.Care shall be taken not to scratch pipe and fittings.a.Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of pipe or fitting.B.Unloading1.Materials shall be unloaded at point of delivery and hauled to the site by the Contractor.2.Materials may be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed provided that it isto be incorporated into the project within ten (10) days.C.Storing Materials1.Materials shall be stored on platforms and allows the material to not touch the ground orvegetation and protects it from damage, and blowing soil and debris.2.The interior of materials shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter.3.Materials shall be stored as recommended by the manufacturer and as directed by the Owner.4.Pipe shall be protected against ultraviolet radiation “sunburn”.5.Materials shall not be placed on private property, unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner by the Contractor.6.Materials shall not be placed within ten-feet (10’) of the back of curb or edge of pavement withoutpermission of the Owner.a.If road is open to traffic then the Contractor will be required to install Traffic Control devices as required to notify the public.D.Distribution of Materials1.Distribution of materials at the work site shall be allowed provided that they are incorporated intothe work within ten (10) days.2.The Contractor shall not distribute material in such a manner as to cause undue inconvenience tothe public.3.Materials shall not be placed on private property, unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner by the Contractor.4.Materials shall not be placed within five-feet (5’) of the back of curb or edge of pavement withoutpermission of the Owner.5.If road is open to traffic then the Contractor will be required to install Traffic Control devices asrequired to notify the public. 3.03 Excavation A.As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 3.04 Jointing Pipe A.Poly-Vinyl Chloride Pipe1.Shall have mating surfaces of the gasket joint wiped clean of dirt and foreign matter. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.A lubricant recommended by the coupling manufacturer shall be applied to the bell and spigotmating surfaces just prior to joining.3.The spigot shall then be centered on grade into the bell of the previous pipe and shall be shovedhome to compress the joint and to assure a tight fit between the inner surfaces.4.Pipe shall not be assembled in reverse order by pushing bell onto spigot.5.When the pipe is being installed, bell holes shall be excavated in the bedding material.6.When the joint has been made, the bell hole shall be carefully filled with material to provide foradequate support of the pipe.7.The spigot shall be centered within one-quarter inch (1/4) of the home line marked on the spigot. 3.05 Alignment and Grade A.General1.All pipes and fittings shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades.2.Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such asconduits, ducts, pipes, connections to sewers or drains, the obstruction shall be permanentlysupported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, incooperation with the Owners of such utility structures.3.Temporary support and adequate protection of all underground and surface utility structuresencountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor.B.Utility Separation Distances1.Generala.Separation is to be measured from the outside surface of each respective piece.2.General utilitiesa. Parallel – vertical and horizontal separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2'), unlessotherwise noted on the Drawings.b.Crossing1)Separation of six-inches (6") to two-feet (2') – cement stabilized sand (10% cement percubic yard of sand) shall be placed between and two-feet (2') beyond each utility, unlessotherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner.2)Separation of more than two-feet (2') – backfill shall be as Drawings indicate or equal toor better than existing, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by theOwner.3.Wastewater utilitiesa. General1)In all cases the water utility shall be above the wastewater utility2)Water line pipe joint (18'+) is to be centered on the crossingb.Separation nine-feet (9') or more in all directions1)In all cases the water line is to be located above the wastewater utility and installed asindicated on the Drawings and by manufacturer recommendations.c.Separation nine-feet (9') or less in any direction1)New wastewater utilitya)The installation must meet the requirements of 30 TAC §217.53(d) and 30 TAC§290.44(e).(1)Parallel – vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and horizontalseparation shall be a minimum of four-feet (4'), unless otherwise noted on theDrawings, or required by the Owner.(2)Crossing – vertical separation shall be a minimum of one-foot (1') betweenoutside diameters and have cement stabilized sand (10% cement per cubic yardof sand) placed between and five-feet (5') beyond utility and the sewage line must be below the water utility, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or requiredby the Owner.2)Existing wastewater utilitya)If the wastewater utility line is leaking the line must be replaced nine-feet (9') in eachdirection of the crossing, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by theOwner.b)The installation must meet the requirements of 30 TAC §217.53(d) and 30 TAC Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 §290.44(e).(1)Parallel – vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and horizontalseparation shall be a minimum of four-feet (4').(2)Crossing – vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and havecement stabilized sand (10% cement per cubic yard of sand) placed between andfive-feet (5') beyond, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by theOwner.4.Utilities conveying hazardous materials (oil, etc.)a)Contact Owner for requirements.C.Deviation from Drawings1.No deviation from the line and grade shown on Drawings may be made without the consent of theOwner.D.Depth of Cover1.Depth of cover will be measured from the established street grade or the surface of the permanentimprovement, or from finished grade to the top of the pipe barrel.2.Under Paved Areaa.Lines less than twelve-inch (12”)1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be thirty-sixinches (36”).b.Lines twelve-inch (12”) and greater1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be forty-eight-inches (48”).3.Under Non-Paved Areaa.Lines less than twelve-inch (12”)1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be thirty-six-inches (36”).b.Lines twelve-inch (12”) and greater1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be forty-eightinches (48”).4.Deviations from the minimum depth or maximum depth shall be promptly marked on the fieldDrawings. 3.06 Pipe Placement A.General1.The trench shall be excavated true and parallel to the pipe centerline with the minimum clearances below the pipe bottom and the required clearance from the bottom of the bell to the bottom of thebell hole as per the Backfill portion of this specification.2.Proper implements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Owner shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work.3.All pipe and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of a derrick, ropes, orother suitable equipment, in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and accessories.4.Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench.B.Inspection of Pipe and Accessories1.The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering in the trench.2.Any defective damage or unsound pipe shall be replaced.C.Clean Pipe1.All foreign matter, or dirt, shall be removed from the interior of the pipe prior to lowering into thetrench.2.Pipe shall be kept clean both in and out of the trench at all times during the laying. 3.07 Backfill A.As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 3.08 Warning Tape A.Shall be as per Drawings.1.If not indicated on the Drawings then the tape shall be placed eighteen-inches (18”) directly abovethe pipe. 3.09 Wastewater Public Service Lines Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 A.Where possible, service tees or wyes shall be placed along the main as required for services (no taps).B.Minimum slopes:1.Residential – Four-inch (4") pipes shall be one-eighth inch (1/8”) per foot (S= 0.01), unlessotherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner.2.Commercial – Six-inch (6") pipes shall be one-sixteenth inch (1/16”) per foot (S= 0.005), unlessotherwise noted on the Drawings, or required by the Owner.C.Sanitary sewer service lines shall cross under water mainsD.The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing alignment and maintaining grade for the proposedservice.E.Lines shall be bored, jetted, or jacked under sidewalks, driveways, and other such improved surfaces;unless authorized by the Owner.F.Service lines shall be leakage tested with the main sewer. 3.10 Testing A.General1.Testing shall be done by the Contractor and witnessed by the Owner.2.The Contractor may wish to check pipe immediately after backfilling for job control.a.However, this shall not qualify as acceptance testing.3.No pipe can be tested for formal acceptance until it has been in place, complete with backfill for atleast thirty (30) days.4.Retestinga.Any defective work or Materials shall be corrected or replaced by the Contractor at theContractors sole expense, and retested.5.This shall be repeated until all work and materials are acceptable.6.Testing shall be completed and all work shall pass the required testing prior to placement ofpavement.a.Contractor may proceed with placement of pavement and will incur all costs associated with theremoval and replacement of pavement if utility fails testing and needs to be replaced.B.Low Pressure Air Test1.Generala.Required for all pipeb.Equipment for test shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.c.The Contractor shall test the entire sanitary sewerage piping system for leaks.d.This work shall be witnessed by the Owner or a representative designated by the Owner.2.Testinga.Shall be tested in accordance with Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association "Recommended Practice for Low Pressure Air Test of Installed Sewer Pipe" UNI-B-6, and Texas Administration Code.b.The test section shall be plugged and subjected to a test pressure not in excess of five (5) psi.c.The time required for a one (1) psi pressure drop shall be measured and be a minimum of thevalue obtained in Equation A and/or shown in Table 1.Equation A: T = 0.0237D2L Where: T = Minimum allowable time (seconds) for a pressure drop of one (1) psi gage pressure D = Nominal pipe diameter (inches) L = Length of pipe run (feet) Table 1 Minimum Testing Times for Low-Pressure Air Test Pipe Diameter (inches) Minimum Time (seconds) Maximum Length for Minimum Time Time for Longer Length (seconds/foot) 4 226 597 0.380 6 340 398 0.855 8 454 298 1.520 10 567 239 2.374 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 12 680 199 3.419 15 850 159 5.342 18 1020 133 7.693 21 1190 114 10.471 24 1360 100 13.676 27 1530 88 17.309 30 1700 80 21.369 33 1870 72 25.856 C.Deflection Testing1.Generala.Required for all PVC Pipe, except for pipe that is a service line.b.All pipe shall be tested for deflection no less than thirty (30) days after placement of backfill.c.All deflection testing is to be completed by means of pulling a mandrel through the pipe.a)For pipes with an inside diameter (ID) of twenty-seven inches (27”) and greater, other test methods may be used to determine vertical deflection.2.Equipment for Deflection Testinga.All equipment is to be provided by the Contractor.b.Mandrels1)Mandrel Sizea)Shall have an outside diameter (OD) of not less than ninety-five percent (95%) of thebase inside diameter (ID) or average inside diameter (ID) of the pipe as specified in the appropriate standard by the ASTMs, American Water Works Association, UNI-BELL, or American National Standards Institute.2)Mandrel Designa)Mandrels shall be of machined rigid corrosion resistant pipe that can withstand 200psi without being deformed and shall be in accordance with Texas AdministrativeCode.b)With a length not less than one and one-half (1-1/2) diameters.c)Adjustable or flexible mandrels are prohibited.d)Mandrels will be sized for SDR 26 PVC pipe at five-percent (5%) deflection.3.Procedurea.Shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code.b.The test shall be witnessed by the Owner or a representative designated by the Owner.c.The mandrel shall not be pulled by any mechanical pulling devices.d.If a section of pipe fails then that portion shall be corrected and a second test of that portionshall be completed no less than thirty (30) days after placement of backfill.D.Televised Inspection1.Shall be completed in accordance with the local governing entities specifications and procedures.Reports shall be submitted as required by the local governing entity.2.If bellies/dips are found, they shall not be more then as noted in Table 2 and may not occur morethan one (1) time between manholes or in 300 feet, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or bythe Owner. Table 2 Maximum Allowable Belly / Dip Depth in Inches Pipe Size 8” 10” 12” 15” 18” 21” 24” 27” >27”Maximum Belly / Dip 3/4” 1” 1-1/4” 1-1/2” 1-3/4” 2” 2-1/4” 2-1/2” 2-3/4” 3.11 Soil Borings A.The Owner does not assume responsibility for subsurface information.B.Soil data and other subsurface information shown on the Drawings or in the appendix is withoutwarranty as to correctness of fact or interpretation. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 33 31 23 WASTEWATER UTILITY FORCE MAIN PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A.This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of wastewater utilityforce main piping as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A.03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURESB.33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A.AWWA C 600 – Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and their AppurtenancesB.AWWA C900 – AWWA Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4Inch Through 12 Inch, for Water Transmission and DistributionC.AWWA C905 – AWWA Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe Diameters 14inch through 36 inchD.AWWA C909 – AWWA Standard for Molecularly Oriented Polyvinyl Chloride (PVCO) Pressure Pipe, 4Inch Through 24 Inch, for Water, Wastewater, and Reclaimed Water ServiceE.ASTM G 62 – Standard Test Methods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline CoatingsF.ASTM F477 – Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic PipeG.ASTM F1674 – Standard Test Method for Joint Restraint Products for Use with PVC PipeH.ASTM D1248 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials For Wire and CableI.ASTM D1784 – Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) CompoundsJ.ASTM D2122 – Standard Method of Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe and FittingsK.ASTM D2487 – Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified SoilClassification System)L.ASTM D3139 –Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric SealsM.ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C104) – Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for WaterN.ANSI A 21.5 (AWWA C105) – Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe SystemsO.ANSI A 21.10 (AWWA C110) – Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 inch through 48 inchP.ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA C111) – Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and FittingsQ.ANSI A 21.15 (AWWA C115) – Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron or Gray Iron ThreadedFlangesR.ANSI A 21.50 (AWWA C150) – Thickness Design of Ductile Iron PipeS.ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C151) – Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water and Other LiquidsT.ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C153) – Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water ServiceU.ASME B 16.1 – Gray Iron Threaded FittingsV.SSPC-SP 6 – Steel Structures Painting Council, Commercial Blast CleaningW.Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction andMaintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 421, Hydraulic Cement ConcreteX.National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) Standard RP0274 – High Voltage ElectricalInspection of Pipeline CoatingsY.Standard Details (as applicable) 1.04 Submittals A.Pipe1.Submit manufacturer’s certifications that the pipe meets the provisions of this section and complywith the references.B.Fittings1.Submit manufacturer’s certifications that the fittings meet the provisions of this section andcomply with the references.C.Gaskets1.An analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and thatno natural rubber is present shall be supplied. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.05 Definitions A.Dimension Ratio (DR) – the ratio of the pipe outside diameter to the minimum wall thickness.B.ASME – American Society of Mechanical EngineersC.ASTM – American Society of Testing and MaterialsD.ANSI – American National Standards InstituteE.AWWA – American Water Works AssociationF.SSPC – The Society for Protective Coatings PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Pre-Approved Products A.Pre-Approved materials and equipment can be found within the City of Corpus Christi Product List –Wastewater Department.1.Use of material and equipment from the list does not relieve the Contractor from meeting therequirements of this specification.B.To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide allrequired information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner forapproval prior to incorporation into the Project. 2.02 General A.Pipe1.Identification markingsa.Each length of pipe shall bear identification markings in conformance with AWWA.b.Markings shall be applied at intervals of not more than five-feet (5’) on the pipe.c.The minimum markings are as follows:1)Nominal Size and OD base2)PVC3)Dimension Ratio (DR#)4)AWWA Pressure Rating (PR#)5)AWWA Designation Number (AWWA C#)6)Manufacturer’s name and trademark7)Manufacturer’s production code, including day, month, year, shift, Plant, and extruder ofmanufacture.2.Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths of 20 feet plus or minus one-inch (1”) unlessotherwise noted.3.Certificationa.Pipe1)The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification.b.Gaskets1)The Contractor shall furnish in duplicate to the Owner a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with this specification.c.Certification shall accompany each delivery of materials.B.Backfill1.As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES.C.Concrete1.Shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days and be in accordance withSection 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2.03 AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe A.General1.Specification covers 4” through 12” diameter.B.Material1.Shall be made of Class 1245A or Class 1245B compounds, as defined in ASTM D1784 with anestablished Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 4,000 psi.2.Pipe shall be integrally green in colorC.Dimension Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1.Shall be manufactured to cast iron pipe equivalent outside diameters.2.Dimensions and tolerances for each nominal pipe sizes shall be in accordance with AWWA C900.D.Joint1.Pipe shall have an integral bell formed on the pipe end and be designed to be at least as strong asthe pipe wall in accordance with ASTM D2472.2.The use of solvent weld pipe is not allowed.3.Joint restraints shall be used as recommended by the manufacurer or Owner.E.Gasket1.An elastomeric gasket shall be designed with a retainer ring, which “locks” the gasket into theintegral bell groove and shall be installed at the point of manufacturer.2.Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F477.F.Pipe Pressure Class1.Shall be Class 165 (DR 25) with the following requirements:a.Sustained pressure requirement of 500 psi in accordance with ASTM D2241,b.Minimum burst pressure of 755 psi in accordance with ASTM D1599.G.Dimension Ratio1.Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings pipe shall have a dimension ratio (DR) of 25 (DR 25) and in accordance with AWWA C900.H.Cause for Rejection1.Pipe does not meet the specification,2.Scratched pipe,3.Evidence of ultraviolet radiation “sunburn” due to extended unprotected storage conditions,4.Damaged pipe,5.Damaged gasket, 2.04 AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe A.General1.Specification covers 14” through 36” diameter.B.Material1.Shall be made of Class 1245A or Class 1245B compounds, as defined in ASTM D1784 with anestablished Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 4,000 psi2.Shall be integrally green in colorC.Dimension1.Be manufactured to cast iron pipe equivalent outside diameters.2.Dimensions and tolerances for each nominal pipe sizes shall be in accordance with AWWA C905.D.Joint1.Pipe shall have an integral bell formed on the pipe end and be designed to be at least as strong asthe pipe wall in accordance with ASTM D2472.2.The use of solvent weld pipe is not allowed.3.Joint restraints shall be used as recommended by the manufacurer or Owner.E.Gasket1.An elastomeric gasket shall be designed with a retainer ring, which “locks” the gasket into theintegral bell groove and shall be installed at the point of manufacturer.2.Gaskets for jointing pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM F477.F.Pipe Pressure Class1.Shall be Class 165 (DR 25) with the following requirements:a.Sustained pressure requirement of 500 psi in accordance with ASTM D2241,b.Minimum burst pressure of 755 psi in accordance with ASTM D1599.G.Dimension Ratio1.Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings pipe shall have a dimension ratio (DR) of 18 (DR 18) and in accordance with AWWA C905.H.Cause for Rejection1.Pipe does not meet the specification,2.Scratched pipe,3.Evidence of ultraviolet radiation “sunburn” due to extended unprotected storage conditions,4.Damaged pipe, Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 5.Damaged gasket, 2.05 Ductile Iron Pipe A.General1.Shall conform to ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C151).2.The face of bells shall be plainly marked by color coding for classes so as to be readily identified inthe field.3.Pressure class for ductile iron pipe shall meet the requirements of Table 1: Table 1 Pressure Class for Ductile Iron Pipe Diameter (inches) Pressure Class (psi) Wall Thickness (inches) Range of Maximum Allowable Depth Cover (A – B)1 (feet) 6 350 0.25 30 – 65 8 350 0.25 20 – 50 12 350 0.28 15 – 44 16 300 0.32 13 – 39 18 300 0.34 13 – 36 20 300 0.36 13 – 35 24 250 0.37 11 – 29 24+ x x x 1 Range of maximum allowable depth of pipe where: A = Groundwater, unstable bottom, or quick condition B = Ideal trench conditions, and sand encasement is at an average density in excess of 90% Standard Proctor. x = Requires special evaluation B.Coatings1.Interiora. General1)Shall be Protecto 401 or approved other.b.Operating Limits1)The lining shall have the capability of withstanding operating temperatures from 0°F to170°F and withstanding sewage with a minimum pH of 4.0.c.Application1)The interior surface of each pipe shall be blast-cleaned to remove high temperature oxidefilm and to form an anchor pattern over the entire surface prior to heating and lining.2)Polyethylene lining is to cover the inner surface of the pipe, extending from the plain orbeveled end, to the rear of the gasket socket.d.Adhesion1)Pipe shall be checked at the point of manufacture to assure bond of the lining to the pipe.2)Any indication of separation of lining from pipe is cause for rejection. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3)The acceptable method of testing is to use a knife to slit the lining to bare metal.4)This slit will be one inch (1") to two inch (2") in length and will be made approximatelyone foot (1’) from the plain end of the pipe.5)The knife point will then be used to attempt to pry the lining from the pipe.6)If the lining can be readily separated in this manner, the pipe shall be rejected.7)A minimum of two (2) slit tests shall be performed per production shift.8)If either of the two (2) tests result in rejection, only the remaining pipe from thatproduction shift which independently passes the slit test may be accepted.9)After testing, the slit shall be repaired with a small torch lightly flaming the slit until thesurface has fused.e.Entrapped Material1)Any sizeable protrusion in the lining, obviously caused by lining over foreign materials,shall be cause for rejection.f. Separations1)Linings which have separations caused by hot slips produced during the lining operationshall be rejected.2)A "Hot Slip" defect would appear as a double flow or fold in the lining with evidence ofseparation.g.Damages to Lining1)Injurious mechanical damage, such as chuck marks and gouges, extending to bare metalare not acceptable.2)The pipe having such a defect shall be rejected.h.Lining Thickness1)Linings of nominal 40 mil thickness shall generally equal or exceed 40 mil throughout the pipe.2)At pipe ends, lining thickness may taper for a distance of 4 inches from the ends, to aminimum of 20 mil thickness.3)However, the lining shall not deviate by more than 5 mil from the 40 mil nominalthickness as required through the pipe.4)The lining thickness of each pipe and fitting shall be taken at the point of manufactureusing a general electric magnetic dry film thickness device, digital coating thicknessgauge, Positector 2000, or approved equal, pipe and/or fittings with a lining thickness less than the minimum specified shall be rejected.i.Bell and Plain End Overcoat1)The bell socket and the last two inch (2") of the plain end of each pipe shall be coated onthe inside and outside with a factory applied mastic or epoxy coating.2)This coating shall be a minimum of ten (10) mil thickness.j.Pinholes and/or Holidays1)The inside surface of each pipe or fitting shall be free of pinholes, holiday discontinuitiesand any blister type surface imperfections.2)The manufacturer shall check each pipe or fitting for holidays at the point of manufacturewith a high voltage holiday detection device, Tinker & Rasor Model AP-W, or approvedequal.3)Testing shall be conducted at the voltage as calculated in Section 3: Testing and Voltagesof the "Recommended Practice for High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline CoatingsPrior to Installation" as published by the National Association of Corrosion Engineers(NACE) Technical Practices Committee.4)All actual holiday testing procedures shall conform to NACE standard RP-02-74 andAmerican Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Designation: G62-Latest "Standard TestMethods for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings."5)No holidays, misses or skips larger than a pinhole will be accepted for repair.6)A maximum of six (6) holidays, as defined in ASTM Standard G62 and as determined bythe detection test described above, on any one standard pipe length, fitting or special maybe repaired by the heat refusion (torch flaming) or with epoxy.k.Independent Testing Laboratory Representation Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1)All testing as specified herein including the slit test, the lining thickness test, and theholiday test shall be witnessed by a representative from an approved independent testing laboratory.2)The independent laboratory shall be a member of the American Council of IndependentLaboratories.3)Manufacturer must submit for approval by the Owner the name of the testing laboratoryand actual qualifications of actual representative that will witness the testing.4)The manufacturer shall furnish three (3) copies of report by independent testinglaboratory depicting results of all testing witnessed by the independent laboratory.l.Field Testing1)Each pipe and fitting are subject to inspection in the field by the Owner for conformanceto these specifications prior to installation.2)Any defects as specified herein with any pipe or fittings shall be grounds for rejection.m.Sealing Cut Ends and Repairing Field Damaged Areas1)Remove burrs from field cut ends and smooth out edge of polyethylene lining.2)Remove all traces of oil or lubricant used during field cutting operation.3)All areas of loose lining associated with the cutting operation shall be removed and theexposed metal cleaned by sanding or scraping.4)For larger areas, roughen the bare pipe surface with a small chisel to provide an anchorpattern for the epoxy.5)The polyethylene lining shall be "stripped" back by chiseling, cutting or scraping aboutone inch (1") to two inch (2") into well adhered lined area before patching.6)After removal of loose lining and dirt, the area to be patched shall be "scratched" or"gouged" to offer an anchor pattern for the epoxy.7)Include an overlap of one inch (1") to two inch (2") of roughened polyethylene lining inthe area to be epoxy coated.8)The roughening shall be done with a rough grade emery paper (40 grit), rasp, or smallchisel.9)Avoid honing, buffing, or wire brushing since these tend to make surface to be repairedtoo smooth.10)With the area to be sealed or repaired absolutely clean and suitably "roughened," apply athick coat of two (2) part coal tar epoxy.11)The detailed mixing and application procedure for the epoxy shall follow the epoxymanufacturer's instructions.12)This heavy coat of epoxy shall be "worked" into the scratched surface by brushing.13)The Contractor shall maintain a supply of epoxy on the job site as required to seal cut endsand repair damaged pipe when encountered.14)Epoxy shall be of the type recommended or supplied by the pipe manufacturer.n. Warranty1)A five (5) year warranty shall be furnished by the manufacturer on the service ability ofthe lining.2)This warranty shall include, but not be limited to the statement, at any time up to the endof the fifth year from the date of pipe shipment:a)The lining shall not have disbound.b)The lining shall not have suffered any appreciable underfilm migration.c)The interior pipe metal, at points of pinholes or holidays, shall not have suffereddetrimental deterioration.d)The lining shall have maintained its smooth surface characteristics.3)Contractor and/or manufacturer shall not make any exemption or exception to abovestated conditions or warranty within the limits as stated in this section of specifications.o. Certification1)The manufacturer shall furnish notarized certificates of compliance stating that the liningconforms to all requirements of these specifications.2.Exteriora.Shall have a coating of coal tar epoxy of approximately 1 mil thick or as specified in ANSI A Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 21.5 (AWWA C105). b.Buried pipe shall be wrapped in two (2) plys of eight (8) mil polyethylene.C.Fittings1.Generala.Shall be either gray cast iron or ductile iron and in accordance with ANSI A 21.10 (AWWAC110) or ANSI A 21.53 (AWWA C153).b.Shall be same size as pipe.c.Shall have a pressure rating of 250 psi for sizes through 12" and 150 psi for 14" and largersizes, unless shown differently on Drawings.2.Coatingsa.Interior1)Shall be lined with Cement mortar with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C104).b.Exterior1)Shall have a coating of coal tar epoxy of approximately one (1) mil thick or as specified inANSI A 21.5 (AWWA C105).2)Buried fittings shall be wrapped in two (2) plys of eight (8) mil polyethylene.3.Reducersa.Are not permitted to facilitate an off-size fitting,b.Reducing bushings are prohibited,c.Make reductions in pipe size by reducing fittings.D.Joints1.Pipea.Shall be mechanical type.2.Fittingsa.Shall be mechanical joints, unless shown otherwise on drawings.3.Mechanical Jointsa.Shall conform to ANSI A 21.11 (AWWA Clll) and/or ANSI A 21.53 (C153).b.Shall be furnished complete with joint material, Cor-ten nuts, Cor-ten bolts, glands andgaskets.4.Restrained Jointsa.When indicated on the drawings, restrained joints for pipe and fittings of 12" diameter andless shall be mechanical joint with retainer gland Series 1100 by EBA Iron Works or approvedequal with a minimum of 250 psi rated working pressure.b.Restrained joints for pipe and fittings over 12" in diameter shall be push on type with aretainer ring as LOK-RING by American Ductile Iron Pipe or TR FLEX by U.S. Pipe, or approvedequal.5.Gasketsa.Shall be of synthetic rubber.b.An analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber andthat no natural rubber is present shall be supplied.E.Certifications1.Pipea.A certification shall accompany each order furnished to job site.b.Certification shall include the following items:1)Indicate that pipe complies with this specification,2)Indicate that fittings and joints comply with this specification,a)The supplier shall furnish sufficient technical material for the Owner to determinewhether or not push-on joints can comply with the "or equal" clause.3)A copy of a lab analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type ofsynthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present.2.Fittingsa.A certification shall accompany each order furnished to job site.b.Certification shall include the following items:1)Indicate that pipe complies with this specification, Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2)Indicate that fittings and joints comply with this specification,a)The supplier shall furnish sufficient technical material for the Owner to determinewhether or not push-on joints can comply with the "or equal" clause.3)A copy of a lab analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type ofsynthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present. 2.06 Automatic Sewage Air Release Valve A.General1.Shall be designed to operate under pressure to allow entrapped air to escape from a sewage forcemain line, sewage pump, or wastewater system.2.After the air escapes out of the air release valve, the valve shall shut off until more air accumulatesin it and the opening cycle will repeat automatically.3.The sewage air release valve must have a compound internal linkage of precision molded delrin.4.All other internals must be stainless steel to positively prevent galvanic action.5.The float rod shall be twenty inches (20") long to provide an air gap between the linkage and wastelevel inside the valve to retard the waste solids from clogging the linkage.6.Each valve shall be complete with hose and blow-off valves to permit back flushing withoutdismantling valve.B.Materials1.Body Stainless Steel SAE 316 / Reinforced Nylon2.Discharge Outlet – Polypropylene3.Rolling Seal Assembly – Reinforced Nylon + EPDM + Stainless Steel4.Float – Foamed Polypropylene5.Clamping Stem – Reinforced Nylon6.Crown Nut – Stainless Steel SAE 3167.O-Ring – BUNA-N8.Stopper – Polypropylene9.Spring – Stainless Steel SAE 31610.Washer – Stainless Steel SAE 31611.Stem – Stainless Steel SAE 31612.Clamp – Stainless Steel SAE 31613.Seal – Fiber14.Ball Valve – Stainless Steel SAE 31615.Base – Stainless Steel SAE 316 / Reinforced Nylon16.Valve Height – 18”17.Inlet Size – 2" I.P.T.18.Orifice Size – 5/16"19.Minimum Capacity – 20 CFM @ 15 PSIG20.Operating Pressure Range – 10 to 25 PSIGC.Accessories1.Stainless Steel Service Saddle2.Two - 2" I.P.T. Short Nipples Stainless Steel3.One - 2" I.P.T. Shut-Off Valve (Gate Valve) Stainless Steel4.One - 1" I.P.T. Short Nipple Stainless Steel5.One - 1" I.P.T. Blow-Off Valve (Gate Valve) Stainless Steel6.One - 1" I.P.T. 90. Elbow Stainless Steel7.One - 2" I.P.T. Nipple Stainless Steel8.One - 2" I.P.T. Shut-Off Valve (Gate Valve) Stainless Steel9.Two - 2" I.P.T. Quick Connect Valve Couplings Stainless Steel10.One - Rubber Hose (10' Minimum Length) with two (2) Quick Connect Couplings for In Place BackFlushingD.Operation & Maintenance Manual and Field Service1.The Contractor shall submit five (5) sets of detailed drawing and specifications with installationinstructions and maintenance procedures for the Owner's review prior to installation.2.The manufacturer's field representative shall check installation and make any required adjustmentsprior to operation of system. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2.07 Magnetic Warning Tape A.The tape shall be:1.Magnetic2.Green in color3.Two inches (2") wide4.Be continuously repeated in one and one-half inch (1.5”) letters marked with: "PressurizedWastewater” 2.08 Polyethylene Wrapping A.The polyethylene material shall:1.Have a minimum thickness of eight (8) mils2.May be either clear or black. 2.09 Concrete A.Shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days.B.Shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Handling Materials A.General1.The Contractor shall be responsible for the handling and safe storage of all materials in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and the specifications.2.All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws or other defects will berejected.a.Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work by the end of thework day.3.Care shall be taken not to scratch pipe and fittings.a.Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of pipe or fitting.B.Unloading1.Materials shall be unloaded at point of delivery and hauled to the site by the Contractor.2.Materials may be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed provided that it isto be incorporated into the project within ten (10) days.C.Storing Materials1.Materials shall be stored on platforms and allows the material to not touch the ground orvegetation and protects it from damage, and blowing soil and debris.2.The interior of materials shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter.3.Materials shall be stored as recommended by the manufacturer and as directed by the Owner.4.Pipe shall be protected against ultraviolet radiation “sunburn”.5.Materials shall not be placed on private property, unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner by the Contractor.6.Materials shall not be placed within ten-feet (10’) of the back of curb or edge of pavement withoutpermission of the Owner.a.If road is open to traffic then the Contractor will be required to install Traffic Control devices as required to notify the public.D.Distribution of Materials1.Distribution of materials at the work site shall be allowed provided that they are incorporated intothe work within ten (10) days.2.The Contractor shall not distribute material in such a manner as to cause undue inconvenience tothe public.3.Materials shall not be placed on private property, unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner by the Contractor.4.Materials shall not be placed within five-feet (5’) of the back of curb or edge of pavement withoutpermission of the Owner.5.If road is open to traffic then the Contractor will be required to install Traffic Control devices asrequired to notify the public. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 3.02 Polyethylene Wrapping A.All ductile or cast iron pipe, valves and fittings, except pipe or valves which are laid in encasement pipeor in concrete valve boxes, shall be wrapped in polyethylene.B.The wrapping shall be lapped in such manner that all surfaces of pipe valves and fittings, includingjoints, shall have a double thickness of polyethylene.C.Double thickness of polyethylene shall be lapped a minimum of eighteen-inches (18”) and the lap shall be placed in the lower quadrant of the pipe and in such a manner that backfill material cannot fall intothe lap.D.The wrapping shall be lapped in such a manner that all surfaces of the pipe shall have a doublethickness of polyethylene.E.The polyethylene shall be secured in place with poly vinyl tape and/or twine at not more than six-foot(6’) intervals.F.Damage to the polyethylene wrapping shall be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Owner, so as to form the best protection to the pipes.G.The sand backfill shall be placed in a manner that will not injure the polyethylene wrapping and shallbe compacted under, around the sides, and over the pipe in a manner that will reduce settlement to aminimum and as directed by the Owner. 3.03 Excavation A.As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 3.04 Alignment and Grade A.General1.All pipes and fittings shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades.2.Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such asconduits, ducts, pipes, connections to sewers or drains, the obstruction shall be permanentlysupported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense, incooperation with the Owners of such utility structures.3.Temporary support and adequate protection of all underground and surface utility structuresencountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor.B.Utility Separation Distances1.Generala.Separation is to be measured from the outside surface of each respective piece.2.General utilitiesa. Parallel – vertical and horizontal separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2').b.Crossing1)Separation of six-inches (6") to two-feet (2') – cement stabilized sand (10% cement percubic yard of sand) shall be placed between and two-feet (2') beyond each utility.2)Separation of more than two-feet (2') – backfill shall be as Drawings indicate or equal toor better than existing.3.Wastewater utilitiesa. General1)In all cases the water utility shall be above the wastewater utility2)Water line pipe joint (18'+) is to be centered on the crossingb.Separation nine-feet (9') or more in all directions1)In all cases the water line is to be located above the wastewater utility and installed asindicated on the Drawings and by manufacturer recommendations.c.Separation nine-feet (9') or less in any direction1)New wastewater utilitya)The installation must meet the requirements of 30 TAC §217.53(d) and 30 TAC§290.44(e).(1)Parallel – vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and horizontalseparation shall be a minimum of four-feet (4').(2)Crossing – vertical separation shall be a minimum of one-foot (1') betweenoutside diameters and have cement stabilized sand (10% cement per cubic yardof sand) placed between and five-feet (5') beyond utility and the sewage line must be below the water utility. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 2)Existing wastewater utilitya)If the wastewater utility line is leaking the line must be replaced nine-feet (9') in eachdirection of the crossing.b)The installation must meet the requirements of 30 TAC §217.53(d) and 30 TAC§290.44(e).(1)Parallel – vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and horizontalseparation shall be a minimum of four-feet (4').(2)Crossing – vertical separation shall be a minimum of two-feet (2') and havecement stabilized sand (10% cement per cubic yard of sand) placed between andfive-feet (5') beyond.4.Utilities conveying hazardous materials (oil, etc.)a)Contact Owner for requirements.C.Deviation from Drawings1.No deviation from the line and grade shown on Drawings may be made without the consent of theOwner.D.Depth of Cover1.Depth of cover will be measured from the established street grade or the surface of the permanentimprovement, or from finished grade to the top of the pipe barrel.2.Under Paved Areaa.Lines less than twelve-inch (12”)1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be thirty-sixinches (36”).b.Lines twelve-inch (12”) and greater1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be forty-eight-inches (48”).3.Under Non-Paved Areaa.Lines less than twelve-inch (12”)1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be thirty-six-inches (36”).b.Lines twelve-inch (12”) and greater1)Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, the minimum depth of cover shall be forty-eightinches (48”).4.Deviations from the minimum depth or maximum depth shall be promptly marked on the fieldDrawings. 3.05 Placing Pipe and Accessories in Trench A.General1.The trench shall be excavated true and parallel to the pipe centerline with a minimum clearanceof eight inches (8”) below the pipe bottom and with a like clearance from the bottom of the bell tothe bottom of the bell hole.2.Proper implements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Owner shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work.3.All pipe and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of a derrick, ropes, orother suitable equipment, in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and accessories.4.Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench.B.Inspection of Pipe and Accessories1.The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering in the trench.2.Any defective damage or unsound pipe shall be replaced.C.Clean Pipe1.All foreign matter, or dirt, shall be removed from the interior of the pipe prior to lowering into thetrench.2.Pipe shall be kept clean both in and out of the trench at all times during the laying. 3.06 Pipe Placement A.General1.The trench shall be excavated true and parallel to the pipe centerline with the minimum clearances below the pipe bottom and the required clearance from the bottom of the bell to the bottom of the Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 bell hole as per the Backfill portion of this specification. 2.Proper implements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Owner shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work.3.All pipe and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of a derrick, ropes, orother suitable equipment, in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and accessories.4.Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench.B.Inspection of Pipe and Accessories1.The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering in the trench.2.Any defective damage or unsound pipe shall be replaced.C.Clean Pipe1.All foreign matter, or dirt, shall be removed from the interior of the pipe prior to lowering into thetrench.2.Pipe shall be kept clean both in and out of the trench at all times during the laying. 3.07 Jointing Pipe A.Poly-Vinyl Chloride Pipe1.Shall have mating surfaces of the gasket joint wiped clean of dirt and foreign matter.2.A lubricant recommended by the coupling manufacturer shall be applied to the bell and spigotmating surfaces just prior to joining.3.The spigot shall then be centered on grade into the bell of the previous pipe and shall be shovedhome to compress the joint and to assure a tight fit between the inner surfaces.4.Pipe shall not be assembled in reverse order by pushing bell onto spigot.5.When the pipe is being installed, bell holes shall be excavated in the bedding material.6.When the joint has been made, the bell hole shall be carefully filled with material to provide foradequate support of the pipe.7.The spigot shall be centered within one-quarter inch (1/4) of the home line marked on the spigot. 3.08 Restrained Joints and Fittings A.Metal harness, tie rods and clamps, or swivel fittings shall be used to prevent movement when soilconditions will not withstand thrust blocking.B.Steel rods and clamps shall be galvanized, or otherwise rust proofed or coated with hot coal tar enamel, then wrapped with two (2) layers of polyethylene wrapping. 3.09 Backfill A.As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 3.10 Magnetic Warning Tape A.Shall be as per Drawings.1.If not indicated on the Drawings then the tape shall be placed eighteen-inches (18”) directly abovethe pipe. 3.11 Hydrostatic Testing A.All materials and products shall be supplied by the Contractor.B.Tests shall be made only after completion of backfill as specified, and not until at least five (5) daysafter the last concrete thrust block has been cast.C.Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure, measured atthe point of lowest elevation, shall be applied.D.During the filling of the pipe, and before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelledfrom the pipeline.E.During the test, all exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints shall be carefully examined.1.If found to be leaking, they shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor.2.If the leaking is due to cracked or defective material, the defective material shall be removed andreplaced by the Contractor with sound material.F.All pipes shall be subjected to two (2) hydrostatic tests.1.The first hydrostatic test shall be a two (2) hour test at a pressure of 150 P.S.I.a.Ductile Iron Pipe1)The maximum allowable leakage shall be calculated by the equation as follows:L = S(D√P) / 133,200 L = Maximum Allowable Leakage (Gal./Hr.) Or S = Length of Pipe Tested (feet) L = N(D√P) / 7,400 N = Number of Joints in Tested Line (Pipe & Fittings) Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 D = Nominal Diameter of Pipe (In.) P = Average Test Pressure (P.S.I.) b.Plastic Pipe (PVC)1)The maximum allowable leakage shall be calculated by the equation as follows:L = N(D√P) / 7,400 L = Maximum Allowable Leakage (Gal./Hr.) N = Number of Joints in Tested Line (Pipe & Fittings) D = Nominal Diameter of Pipe (In.) P = Average Test Pressure (P.S.I.) 2.The second hydrostatic test shall be for a 24-hour period at City operating pressure for waterlines.a.The second test shall be no less than 48 hours after successful completion of the firsthydrostatic test.b.The maximum allowable leakage shall be zero (0).G.If the pressure system fails to meet the leakage requirements, the Contractor shall make the requiredrepairs to the system and the system shall be retested.H.This procedure shall be repeated until the system complies with leakage requirements. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-1 SECTION 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and placing of stormwater pipe and the material and incidental construction requirements for stormwater pipe as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES C. 31 23 16.13 TRENCHING D. 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS UTILITY INSTALLATION 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. AASHTO M 198 – Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants B. AASHTO M 259 – Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers C. AASHTO M 273 – Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers with Less Than 2 ft of Cover Subjected to Highway Loadings D. AASHTO M 288 – Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications E. ASTM C 76 – Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, Sewer Pipe F. ASTM C 443 – Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe using Rubber Gaskets. G. ASTM C 497 – Standard Test Method for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile. H. ASTM C 506 – Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, Sewer Pipe. I. ASTM C 507 – Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, Sewer Pipe. J. ASTM C 655 – Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain, Sewer Pipe. K. ASTM C 990 – Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants L. ASTM C 1433 – Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers. M. ASTM D 2487 – Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) N. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges Item 462 – Concrete Box Culverts and Storm Drains O.American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) P. American Welding Society Specifications Q. American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA) R. National Precast Concrete Association (NCPA) 1.04 Submittals A. Pipe information noting compliance with this specification. B. Gasket information noting compliance with this specification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All pipe shall be manufactured at an American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA) Certified Plant or a National Precast Concrete Association (NCPA) Certified Plant. B. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. C. All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-2 2.02 Concrete Pipe A. General 1. All pipe shall be bell and spigot, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or indicated by the Owner. 2. Bell and spigot shall be formed for the acceptance of gasket material B. Workmanship and Finish 1. Pipe shall be substantially free from fractures, large or deep cracks and surface roughness. 2. The ends of the pipe shall be normal to the walls and centerline of the pipe within the limits of variations allowed under the applicable ASTM specification. 3. Shall be in accordance with the industry standards. a. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. C. Fabrication 1. Pipe shall conform to ASTM Designation C 76 for Circular Pipe; ASTM Designation C 506 for Arch Pipe, or ASTM Designation C 507 for Elliptical Pipe. 2. All precast concrete pipe shall be machine made or cast by a process that will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure a dense concrete. 3. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. 4. Transit mixed concrete will not be acceptable for use in precast concrete pipe. D. Lifting Holes 1. Do not place more than two (2) holes for lifting and placing in the top section of precast pipe 2. Cast, cut, or drill the lifting holes in the wall of the pipe. a. The holes shall be neat and without spalling of the concrete. 3. The maximum hole diameter is three-inch (3”) at the inside surface of the pipe wall and four-inch (4”) at the outside surface. 4. Do not cut more than one (1) longitudinal wire or two (2) circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. E. Design 1. All pipe shall be Class III (Wall "B") unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. 2. The shell thickness, the amount of circumferential reinforcement and the strength of the pipe shall conform to the specified Class as summarized in ASTM Designation C 76 for Circular Pipe; C 506 for Arch Pipe; C 507 for Elliptical pipe. 3. Minimum cover for all pipes shall be one foot (1’). F. Physical Test Requirements 1. The acceptability of the pipe shall be determined by the results of the following tests: a. Material tests required in ASTM C 76, C 655, C 506, or C 507 b. Absorption tests in accordance with ASTM C 497 c. Three-edge bearing test in accordance with ASTM C 497 1) Shall be performed on one (1) pipe for each 300 pipes, or faction thereof, for each type, size class, or D-Load produced within 30 calendar days. 2) Test for the load to produce a 0.01-inch crack or fifteen-percent (15%) in excess of the required D-Load, whichever is less. 3) Test the pipe to ultimate load when directed. d. As an alternate to the three-edge bearing test, concrete pipe fifty-four inches (54”) in diameter and larger may be accepted, at the option of the manufacturer, on the basis of compressive strength of cores cut from the wall of the pipe. e. The manufacturer must determine the compressive strength of the samples. Obtain, cure, prepare, and test the cores in accordance with ASTM C 496. f. The manufacturer must plug and seal the core holes in the pipe wall after testing. g. Inspect the finished pipe to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in these specifications and its freedom from defects. G. Marking 1. The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of pipe: a. The class of pipe, Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-3 b. ASTM designation, c. The date of manufacture, d. The name of trade mark of the manufacturer, e. All markings shall be indented on the pipe section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. f. Elliptical Pipe 1) One (1) end of each section of pipe with elliptical reinforcement shall be clearly marked during the process of manufacture or immediately thereafter on the inside and the outside of opposite walls to show the location of the "top" or "bottom" of the pipe as it should be installed, unless the external shape of the pipe is such that the correct position of the top and bottom is obvious. H. Inspection 1. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished pipe shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer at the pipe manufacturing Plant. 2. In addition, the finished pipe shall be subject to further inspection by the Owner at the project site prior to and during installation. I. Curing 1. Pipe shall be cured in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe. J. Minimum Age for Shipment 1. Pipe shall be considered ready for shipment when it conforms to the requirements of the tests specified herein and has cured. K. Causes for Rejection 1. Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. 2. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint, b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing and molding, c. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture, d. Damaged ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint, e. Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 inch or more and extending for a length of twelve-inch (12”) or more. f. Circular pipe which is “out-of-round”. L. Repairs 1. Pipe may be repaired if necessary, because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental injury during the handling in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, and will be acceptable if, in the opinion of the Owner, the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired pipe conforms to the requirements of the specifications. M. Rejections 1. All rejected pipes shall be plainly marked by the Owner and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe that meets the requirements of these specifications. 2. Such rejected pipe shall be removed immediately from the worksite. 2.03 Concrete Box Culvert A. General 1. The Contractor shall have the option of furnishing cast-in-place and/or precast boxes unless a specific type is called for on the Drawings or in the special provisions. B. Cast-in Place 1. When cast-in-place boxes are used, they shall conform to the details of the culvert designs shown in the Drawings. C. Precast 1. General a. All pipe shall be manufactured at an American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA) Certified Plant or a National Precast Concrete Association (NCPA) Certified Plant. b. All box culvert shall be bell and spigot, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or indicated by the Owner. c. Bell and spigot shall be formed for the acceptance of gasket material Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 33 42 11-4 2. Workmanship and Finish a. Box culvert shall be substantially free from fractures, large or deep cracks and surface roughness. b. The ends of the box culvert shall be normal to the walls and centerline of the box culvert within the limits of variations allowed under the applicable ASTM specification. c. Shall be in accordance with the industry standards. 1) In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3. Fabrication a. Box culvert shall conform to AASHTO M 259, AASHTO M 273, ASTM C 1433, and be rated for AASHTO HS-20 loading. b. All precast concrete box culvert shall be machine made or cast by a process that will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure a dense concrete. c. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. d. Transit mixed concrete will not be acceptable for use in precast concrete box culvert. 4. Lifting Holes a. Do not place more than four (4) holes for lifting and placing in the top section of precast box culvert b. Cast, cut, or drill the lifting holes in the wall of the box culvert. 1) The holes shall be neat and without spalling of the concrete. c. The maximum hole diameter is three-inch (3”) at the inside surface of the box culvert wall and four (4) inch at the outside surface. d. Do not cut more than one (1) longitudinal wire or two (2) circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. 5. Design a. All box culvert shall be Class III (Wall "B") unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. b. The shell thickness, the amount of circumferential reinforcement and the strength of the box culvert shall conform to ASTM C 1433. c. Minimum cover for all box culverts shall be two-foot (2’). 6. Physical Test Requirements a. The acceptability of the box culvert shall be determined by the results of the following tests: 1) Material tests required in ASTM C 1433. 2) The manufacturer must plug and seal the core holes in the box culvert wall after testing. 3) Inspect the finished box culvert to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in these specifications and its freedom from defects. 7. Marking a. The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of box culvert: 1) The class of box culvert, 2) ASTM designation, 3) The date of manufacture, 4) The name of trade mark of the manufacturer, 5) All markings shall be indented on the box culvert section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. 8. Inspection a. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished box culvert shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer at the box culvert manufacturing Plant. b. In addition, the finished box culvert shall be subject to further inspection by the Owner at the project site prior to and during installation. 9. Curing a. Box culvert shall be cured in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of box culvert. 10. Minimum Age for Shipment a. Box culvert shall be considered ready for shipment when it conforms to the requirements of the tests specified herein and has cured. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 33 42 11-5 11. Causes for Rejection a. Box culvert shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. b. Individual sections of box culvert may be rejected because of any of the following: 1) Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint, 2) Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing and molding, 3) Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture, 4) Damaged ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint, 5) Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 inch or more and extending for a length of twelve-inch (12”) or more. 6) Box culvert which is “out-of-square”. 12. Repairs a. Box culvert may be repaired if necessary, because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental injury during the handling in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, and will be acceptable if, in the opinion of the Owner, the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired box culvert conforms to the requirements of the specifications. 13. Rejections a. All rejected box culverts shall be plainly marked by the Owner and shall be replaced by the Contractor with box culvert that meets the requirements of these specifications. 1) Such rejected box culvert shall be removed immediately from the worksite. 14. Alternate designs of precast boxes will be considered for approval upon submission of shop drawings detailing the box and certifications that the box, as designed, is structurally comparable to or better than the box shown in the contract drawings and is designed to support HS-20 loading per AASHTO M 273 and ASTM C 1433. a. The shop drawings and certifications shall be signed and sealed by a Texas Registered Professional Engineer. D. Concrete 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, Class "A" concrete shall be used for cast-in-place and precast (formed) boxes, conforming to the requirements of Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2. Class "C" concrete will be required for direct traffic boxes for cast-in-place and precast boxes. 3. Concrete for precast (machine-made) boxes shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 76, Sections: Cement, Aggregates and Mixture, and shall have a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. 2.04 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe A. General 1. The product supplied under this specification shall be high density polyethylene corrugated exterior/smooth interior pipe. Twelve to 36 inch diameters shall conform to AASHTO M294 Type S; 8- and 10-inch diameters shall meet the strength requirements of AASHTO M252 with the addition that the pipe have a smooth interior liner. Material shall conform to ASTM D3350. Minimum conveyance factors shall be as shown in Table 1. B. Rejection of Polyethylene Pipe 1. All rejected pipe shall be plainly marked by the Engineer and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe which meets the requirements of these specifications. Such rejected pipe shall be removed immediately from the site of work. Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint. b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing and molding. c. Damaged ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. d. Careless dumping of pipe from truck. The Engineer shall be judge of aforesaid items. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 33 42 11-6 2.05 Jointing Materials A. Concrete Pipe 1. Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets a. Shall conform to AASHTO M 198 and ASTM C 990. b. Joint material and primer shall be supplied for use on pipe as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Geotextile for wrapping joints shall be Class 1 geotextile for subsurface drainage with an average opening size, AOS, of .22 mm. and two-feet (2) wide in accordance AASHTO M 288. B. Polyethylene Pipe 1. Pipe joints and fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252 or AASHTO M294 2. All coupling bands shall conform to ASTM D3212 (10.8 psi watertight) and meet or exceed the soil- tightness requirements of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Section 23, paragraph 23.3.1.5.4(e). a. Coupling bands shall cover at least one full corrugation on each section of pipe. b. When gasketed coupling bands are required, the gasket shall be made of closed-cell synthetic expanded rubber meeting the requirements of ASTM D1056, Grade RE42. 1) All gaskets shall be installed on the coupler by the pipe manufacturer prior to delivery to the job site. 3. Fittings shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M294. 2.06 Lift Hole Plug A. Concrete Plug 1. Shall be tapered, or as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe. 2. Shall be used for mechanically and man-made lift holes B. Polyethylene Plug 1. Shall resist internal pressure within the pipe of a minimum of 7 psi. 2. Shall be used for mechanically made lift holes 2.07 Cement Mortar A. Shall be composed of one (1) part Portland Cement and (2) parts sand. 2.08 Backfill Materials A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GeneralA.All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards.1.In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner.B.Cast-in Place1.The requirement of Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES shall govern for cast-in-place concrete culverts and for precast (formed) boxes except where otherwise specified herein.2.Concrete boxes shall be given an ordinary surface finish.3.Formsa.Forms for precast (machine-made) boxes shall be made of steel.b.Forms for cast-in-place boxes and precast (formed) boxes may be either wood or steel.c.Forms shall be mortar-tight and of sufficient strength to prevent excessive bulging or misalignment of adjacent boxes.d.They shall be constructed to permit their removal without damage to the concrete.e.Offsets at form joints shall not exceed one-eighth inch (1/8”).f.Forms shall be clean and free of extraneous matter when concrete is placed.4.Positive means of supporting steel cages in place throughout forming and concrete placement shall be required and subject to the approval of the Owner.5.Welding of reinforcing steel will be permitted only where shown on the Drawings.a.Welding shall be done by a qualified welder and shall conform to the requirements of the applicable section of the American Welding Society specifications. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 33 42 11-7 C. Precast (machine-made) boxes shall be cast by a process, which will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the forms and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure dense concrete. D. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch Plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. E. Transit mixed concrete shall not be acceptable for use in precast (machine-made) boxes. 3.02 Testing and Certification A. Physical Requirements 1. Precast boxes shall meet the requirement of TxDOT Tex 704-I. B. Testing 1. Testing shall be done by a Materials Engineering Laboratory which meets the requirements for membership in the American Council of Independent Laboratories. C. Certification 1. Certification of quality shall be provided with each delivery of materials to the job site by the manufacturer. 2.Certification shall be a written report by the Materials Engineering Testing Laboratory. 3.03 Fabrication Tolerances A. Precast boxes shall conform to the following tolerances: 1. When two (2) box sections are fitted together on a flat surface, in proper alignment and in the position they will be installed, the longitudinal opening at any point shall not exceed one-inch (1”). 2. When fine cracks or hairline cracks on the surface indicate poor curing practices, further production of precast boxes shall be discontinued until corrections are made and proper curing provided. 3.04 Defects and Repairs A. Fine cracks or checks on the surface 1. If it does not extend to the plane of the nearest reinforcement will not be cause for rejection unless they are numerous and extensive. 2. Cracks that extend into the plane of the reinforcing steel but are acceptable otherwise, shall be repaired in an approved manner. B. Small damaged or honeycombed areas 1. Purely surface in nature may be repaired. 2. Excessive damage, honeycomb or cracking will be subject to structural review. 3.Repairs shall be sound, properly finished and cured in conformance with the pertinent specifications. 3.05 Excavation A. As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 3.06 Laying Pipe A. Unless otherwise authorized by the Owner, the laying of pipe on the prepared foundation shall be started at the outlet end with the spigot or tongue end pointing downstream and shall proceed upstream with the abutting sections properly matched, true to the established lines and grades. B. Lifting holes shall be at the 12:00 position (on the top) of the pipe when pipe is in final place. C. Where bell and spigot pipe are used, cross trenches shall be cut in the foundation to allow the barrel of the pipe to rest firmly upon the prepared bed. 1. These cross trenches shall be not more than two-inches (2”) larger than the bell ends of the pipe. D. Proper facilities shall be provided for hoisting and lowering the sections of pipe into the trench without disturbing the prepared foundation and the sides of the trench. E. The ends of the pipe shall be carefully cleaned before the pipe is placed. F. As each length of pipe is laid, the mouth of the pipe shall be protected to prevent the entrance of earth or bedding material. G. The pipe shall be fitted and matched so that when laid in the bed, it shall form a smooth, uniform conduit. H. When elliptical pipe with circular reinforcing or circular pipe with elliptical reinforcing is used, the pipe shall be laid in the trench in such position that the markings "Top" or "Bottom", shall not be more than five (5)degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. I. Multiple installations of reinforced concrete pipe shall be laid with the centerlines of individual barrels parallel. When not otherwise indicated on Drawings, the Table 1 clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipe shall be used. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-8 Table 1 Minimum Clear Distance Between Multiple Pipes Diameter of Pipe (inch)Clear Distance Between Pipes 18"0'- 9" 24"0'-11" 30"1'- 1" 36"1'- 3" 42"1'- 5" 48"1'- 7" 54"1'-11" 60" to 84"2'- 0" 3.07 Jointing A. Joints using Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets: 1. Primer a. Shall be installed as per manufacturer recommendations. b. No primer shall be applied over mud, sand, dirt, or sharp cement protrusions. c. The surface to be primed must be clean and dry when primer is applied. 2. Gasket a. Before laying the pipe in the trench, the plastic gasket sealer shall be attached around the tapered tongue or tapered groove near the shoulder or hub of each pipe joint. b. Gasket shall be installed as per manufacturer recommendations. c. The paper wrapper shall be removed from one side only of the two-piece wrapper on the gasket and pressed firmly to the clean, dry pipe joint surface. d. When the atmospheric temperature is below 60 degrees F, plastic joint seal gaskets shall either be stored in an area warmed to above 70 degrees F, or artificially warmed to this temperature in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. 1) Gaskets shall be applied to pipe joints immediately prior to placing pipe in trench, followed by connection to previously laid pipe. e. The outside wrapper shall not be removed until immediately before pushing the pipe into its final position. f. Additional gasket material may be required if, in the opinion of the Owner, a proper joint is not secured, and additional gasket material shall be required for non-circular concrete pipe as required by the Owner. 3. Joining a. When the tongue is correctly aligned with the flare of the groove, the outside wrapper on the gasket shall be removed and the pipe shall be pulled or pushed home with sufficient force and power to cause the evidence of squeeze-out of the gasket material on the inside or outside around the complete pipe joint circumference. b. Any joint material pushed out into the interior of the pipe that would tend to obstruct the flow shall be removed. c. Pipe shall be pulled or pushed home in a straight line with all parts of the pipe on line and grade at all times. 4. All pipe joints shall be wrapped with Geotextile. a. The wrap shall be centered on each joint. b. The wrap does not remove the requirements of the use of gasket. B. Mortar Joints 1. Is prohibited from jointing pipe except at manholes, pipe junction, etc., or where specifically approved by the Owner. 2. Pipe shall be pulled or pushed home in a straight line with all parts of the pipe on line and grade at all times. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-9 3. Shall be placed as to form a durable watertight joint. 4. The installation shall be as required by the Owner. 3.08 Lifting Holes A. When used by the Contractor to handle the pipe shall be used in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. B. Filling of Hole 1. Concrete Plug a. Plug shall be used in conjunction with a Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gasket to form a seal that will not allow soil to migrate through the opening, or required on the Drawings or by the Owner. b. Shall be used for mechanically and man-made lift holes c. The pipe at the location of the plug shall be wrapped with Geotextile. 1) Care shall be taken to not allow the Geotextile to move or allow backfill material to be under Geotextile 2. Polyethylene Plug a. Plug shall be installed as recommended by Manufacturer b. Shall be covered with mortar and allowed to set to firm prior to installation of backfill c. Shall be used only for mechanically made lift holes. 3.09 Backfill A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 33 42 30-1 SECTION 33 42 30 STORMWATER STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installing of storm water utility manholes, inlets, frames, grates, and covers as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES C. 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. AASHTO M 105 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings B. AASHTO M 288 – Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications C. AASHTO M 306 – Standard Specification for Drainage, Sewer, Utility, and Related Castings D. ASTM A 27 – Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application E. ASTM A 36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel F. ASTM A 48 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings G. ASTM A 536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings H. ASTM C 76 – Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe. I. ASTM C 443 – Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets J. ASTM C 478 – Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections K. ASTM C 581 – Practice for determining chemical resistance of thermosetting resins used in glass-fiber reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service L. ASTM C 923 – Standard Specification for Resilient manhole connectors M. ASTM D 695 – Test method for compressive properties of rigid plastics N. ASTM D 790 – Test methods for flexural properties of unreinforced and reinforced plastics and electrical insulating materials. O. ASTM D 2412 – Test Method for external loading properties of plastic pipe by parallel-plate loading. P. ASTM D 2583 – Test method for indentation hardness of rigid plastics by means of a barcol impresser. Q. ASTM D 2584 – Test method for ignition loss of cured reinforced resins R. ASTM D 3753 – Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester Manholes S. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) T. Texas Administrative Code Title 30, Part 1, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule §217.55 U. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) V. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS 7340 – Qualification Procedure for Multi-Project Fabrication Plants of Precast Concrete Junction Boxes and Inlets W. American Welding Society 1.04 Submittals A. Submit manufacturer’s data, details, and shop drawings for the following items showing compliance with specifications: 1. Manhole a. Design b. Fabrication c. Fiberglass components d. Installation instruction e. Pipe Connector f. Base g. Inflow Inhibitor 2. Grade Adjustment Rings 3. Frames and Covers Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. B. All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.02 Manholes A. General 1. Manholes may be made from cast in place Class "A" Concrete, precast concrete, fiberglass, or a combination of these materials when indicated by the Owner. 2. Reinforcing steel, if required, shall be as shown on Drawings. a. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of the specification Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. 3. The bottom of manholes shall be carefully formed and inverted smoothly when finished, with pipes cut to fit inside surface of walls. 4. Mortar for masonry or plastering shall be: a. One (1) part Portland Cement to three (3) parts clean hard and sharp mortar sand, free of all foreign substances or injurious alkalis. b. Water shall be clean potable water free of foreign substances or injurious alkalis. B. Concrete 1. Formed in Place a. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES b. Concrete shall be Class "A" conforming to Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2. Precast a. Precast manholes shall allow unobstructed view of all pipes connected to the manhole. b. Precast manholes shall be designed in accordance with ASTM C 478, and AASHTO M 306. 1) Must be designed and sealed by a Texas Licensed Engineer. c. Either concentric or eccentric cones may be required. 1) Where not specified, the eccentric cones shall be used. d. Manhole designs shall be submitted for approval. e. Shall be monolithic when possible. 1) If non-monolithic then joint shall be tongue and groove. f. The following information shall be clearly marked on each manhole: 1) The class of pipe, 2) ASTM designation, 3) The date of manufacture, 4) The name of trade mark of the manufacturer, 5) Marking shall be indented on the pipe section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. g. Shall be constructed with base of not less than twelve-inches (12”) thick below lowest invert. C. Fiberglass 1. Fiberglass manholes shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM D 3753 and the referenced design criteria as follows: a. ASTM C 581 – Practice for determining chemical resistance of thermosetting resins used in glass-fiber reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service b. ASTM D 695 – Test method for compressive properties of rigid plastics c. ASTM D 790 – Test methods for flexural properties of unreinforced and reinforced plastics and electrical insulating materials. d. ASTM D 2412 – Test Method for external loading properties of plastic pipe by parallel-plate loading. e. ASTM D 2583 – Test method for indentation hardness of rigid plastics by means of a barcol impresser. f. ASTM D 2584 – Test method for ignition loss of cured reinforced resins 2. The minimum wall thickness for all fiberglass manholes at all depths shall be one-half inch (1/2”). 3. The inside diameter of the manhole barrel shall be either forty-eight inches (48") or one and one- half (1.5) times the nominal pipe diameter of the largest pipe, which ever is larger. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 33 42 30-3 4. A concentric reducer over the barrel shall have a minimum inside diameter in accordance with the Drawings. 5. Shall be able to withstand AASHTO M 306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. 6. Markings and Identifications a. Shall be placed on the inside and/or outside as required. b. Inside required Markings and Identifications shall be placed immediately below the upper factory bond joint or approximately one foot (1’) below the corbel, whichever is less. 1) Manufacturers Name 2) Manufacturers Trademark 3) Manufacturers Serial Number 4) Manhole Length 5) ASTM Designation D. Manhole Diameter 1. Shall be as noted on the Drawings a. In all cases shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code Title 30, Part 1, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule §217.55 E. Manhole Pipe Connectors 1. Fiberglass a. Gasket Material 1) Shall be in accordance with ASTM C 923 2. Concrete a. Shall provide a watertight connection and be in accordance with ASTM C 923 b. Mortar shall be used when indicated on the Drawings or by the Owner. F. Geotextile Wrap 1. Shall be Class A Subsurface Drainage Geotextile, AASHTO M 288. G. Manhole Base 1. Concrete shall be Class A in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Base shall be in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 478 as shown on construction Drawings and detail Drawings. 3. Reinforcing Steel a. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of the specification Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. 2.03 Grade Adjustment Rings A. All rings to adjust the height of the manhole shall be made from HDPE and withstand ASSHTO M 306 HS- 20 Traffic Loading. B. The internal diameter of the ring shall not be less than thirty inches (30”). 2.04 Inlets A. General 1. Concrete a. Concrete for inlets shall be Class "A" concrete conforming to the requirements of the specification, Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES, except as otherwise provided on the Drawings. b. Mortar 1) Mortar shall be composed of one (1) part Portland cement and two (2) parts clean, sharp mortar sand suitable graded for the purpose by conforming in other respects to the provisions of the section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES for fine aggregate. 2) Hydrated lime or lime putty may be added to the mix but in no case shall it exceed ten- percent (10%) by weight of the total dry mix. c. Reinforcing Steel 1) Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of the specification Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. B. Precast Inlet 1. Submit shop drawings which indicate size of the inlet and is sealed by a Licensed Texas Professional Engineer. 2. Inlet top shall be interlocking to the base and be grouted in which will construct a one-piece unit. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-4 C. Inlet Pipe Connectors 1. Gasket Material a. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 1) Rubber gaskets are not allowed. 2. Geotextile Wrap a. Shall be Class A Subsurface Drainage Geotextile, AASHTO M 288. 2.05 Grade Adjustment Rings A. All rings to adjust the height of the manhole shall be made from 100% HDPE and withstand ASSHTO M 306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. B. The internal diameter of the ring shall not be less than thirty inches (30”). 2.06 Frames, Grates and Covers A. General 1. Manhole frame & cover shall be designated for street application designed to meet AASHTO M306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. a. Shall be rated for traffic service withstanding an application of 40,000 pound proof load in accordance with AASHTO M 306. b. Within the Right-of-Way and in Pavements, Sidewalks, Driveways 1) Shall be heavy duty traffic rated meeting AASHTO M 306 c. Within the Right-of-Way and in Pavements, Sidewalks, Driveways within School Zones 1) Shall be heavy duty traffic rated and able to be bolted meeting AASHTO M 306 2. All products shall be domestically made in the United States of America. 3. Shall be in accordance with the details shown in the Drawings. a. Other patterns for frames, grates, and covers may be submitted for approval by the Owner 4. Cover shall be permeable with openings that meet the requirements of Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 5. Shall be true to pattern, form, and dimensions. 6. Shall be free from cracks, sponginess, and blowholes. 7. Shall be machined to yield a fit which will not rattle with passing traffic load. 8. Each casting shall be identifiable and show, at a minimum, the following: a. Name of the producing foundry b. Country of manufacture c. ASTM material designation d. Recycle symbol e. Individual part number f. Cast or heat date B. Coatings 1. Shall be dipped in coal tar or asphalt unless the Drawings or Owner requires a different treatment. C. Welded Steel Frames and Grates 1. Shall conform to the member size, dimensions and details shown on the Drawings and shall be welded into an assembly in accordance with those details. 2. Welding shall be in accordance with American Welding Society 3. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 36. D. Castings 1. Whether Carbon-Steel, Gray Cast Iron or Ductile Iron shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown in the Drawings and shall be clean substantial castings, free from burnt-on sand and shall be reasonable smooth. a. Runners, risers, fins, and other cast-on pieces shall be removed from the castings and such areas ground smooth. 2. Bearing surfaces between manhole rings and covers or grades and frames shall be cast or machined with such precision that uniform bearing shall be provided throughout the facilitate subsequent identification at installation. 3. Steel Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of specifications for "Mild to Medium Strength Carbon Steel Castings for General Application", ASTM A 27. b. Grade 70-36 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-5 4. Cast Iron Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of "Gray Iron Castings", ASTM A 48, Class 30, and AASHTO M 105. 5. Ductile Iron Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of "Ductile Iron Castings", ASTM A 536. b. Grade 70-50-05 shall be used otherwise specified. E. Openings 1. Shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code Title 30, Part 1, Chapter 217, Subchapter C, Rule §217.55 F. Manufacturing Facilities 1. Manufacturing facilities shall be domestic in compliance with Local, State, and Federal workplace and environmental regulations. G. Bolts when required 1. Commercial grade 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be used when indicated on the Drawings or required by the Owner. 2.07 Concrete A. All concrete and accessories shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and in accordance with this specification. B. All concrete and accessories shall be rated for use in high sulfur dioxide conditions. 2.08 Non-Shrink Grout A. Shall be prepackaged and meet the requirements of ASTM C1107, be flowable, Nonmetallic, Inorganic, Non-gas liberating, Cement based, have a compressive strength of 7000 psi, and requires only the addition of water. 2.09 Concrete Coatings A. Provide as indicated on the Drawings or approved equal. 2.10 Backfill Materials A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Manholes A. General 1. All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES, unless otherwise specified. 2. Refer to the Details within the Drawings for additional information regarding execution. 3. Installation Assist Marks a. Shall be vertical lines 90 degrees apart at the base of the manhole and at other locations to assist in construction. b. Can be applied by Manufacturer and/or by Contractor. c. Marks shall be in a color and visible so that the Contractor and Owner can easily determine the use and determine when requirements are met. d. Required Marks 1) Continuous mark around manhole a) Minimum embedment into base b) Maximum embedment into base c) Minimum initial backfill height 2) Location of dowels (if required) 3) Location and size of pipe penetrations prior to cut. B. Excavation 1. As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-6 C. Non-monolithic 1. The tongue and groove joint shall have a gasket material placed between prior to joining and exterior of joint wrapped with geotextile. D. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations 1. Cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus two-inches (2”), plus gasket to form a non-leak seal. 2. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with proper blade. 3. Impact type tools shall not be used. 4. Where multiple pipe connections occur, maximum wall cutout shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations, nor shall be cut leaving less than twelve-inches (12”) between pipes, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by Owner. E. Pipe Penetrations 1. Pipe connection shall be made with gasket material installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the exterior portion shall have geotextile placed across it, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Owner. F. Pipe Stub outs for Future Connections 1. Shall be installed where noted on the Drawings and in accordance with the details. 2. Shall have an approved gasket placed between pipe and manhole. 3. Gasket shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. A watertight plug shall be installed in the pipe at the end of the pipe and remain until the pipe is connected for future service. G. Handling 1. Shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the item or the surroundings. 2. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. a. If manhole must be moved by rolling, the ground which it transverses shall be smooth and free of rocks, debris, etc. H. Installation 1. Shall be installed as specified by the manufacturer and in accordance with this specification and the details. 2. Field verify all existing elevations and conditions prior to ordering new manholes. I. Inverts 1. The inverts passing out or through the manhole shall be shaped and routed across the floor of manhole as shown on the Drawings. 2. This shaping may be accomplished by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. J. Concrete and Grout 1. Concrete a. All concrete work shall be completed in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. b. All concrete shall be placed within forms. 2. Grout a. Grout shall be placed in a manner which will not allow for separation of materials. b. All exposed grout inside the manhole shall have an approved concrete coating applied to the surface in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations. K. Backfill 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. L. Grade Adjustment Rings 1. A minimum of twelve-inches (12”) of rings are allowed. 2. A maximum of eighteen-inches (18”) of rings are allowed. M. Concrete Collar 1. Shall be circular or square of size indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 3. Traffic shall be restricted from the traversing across for thirty-six (36) hours after placement of Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-7 frame and concrete. 3.03 Inlets A. General 1. Shall be constructed from concrete with all concrete work in accordance with the requirements of the Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES, unless otherwise specified. 2. Forms will be required for all concrete walls, except where the nature of the surrounding material is such that it can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face. 3. Inlets for Precast Concrete Pipe Sewers. a. The construction of inlets for precast concrete pipe sewers shall be done as soon as is practicable after storm lines into or through inlet locations are completed. b. All sewers shall be cut neatly at the inside face of the walls of inlet and cleaned up with mortar. B. Excavation 1. As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. C. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations 1. Cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus two-inches (2”), plus gasket to form a non-leak seal. 2. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with proper blade. 3. Impact type tools shall not be used. 4. Where multiple pipe connections occur, maximum wall cutout shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations, nor shall be cut leaving less than twelve-inches (12”) between pipes, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by Owner. D. Pipe Penetrations 1. Pipe connection shall be made with gasket material installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the exterior portion shall have geotextile placed across it, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Owner. E. Pipe Stub outs for Future Connections 1. Shall be installed where noted on the Drawings and in accordance with the details. 2. Shall have an approved gasket placed between pipe and manhole. 3. Gasket shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. A watertight plug shall be installed in the pipe at the end of the pipe and remain until the pipe is connected for future service. F. Handling 1. Shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the item or the surroundings. 2. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. a. If manhole must be moved by rolling, the ground which it transverses shall be smooth and free of rocks, debris, etc. G. Installation 1. Shall be installed as specified by the manufacturer and in accordance with this specification and the details. 2. Field verify all existing elevations and conditions prior to ordering new manholes. H. Inverts 1. The inverts passing out or through the inlet shall be shaped and routed across the floor of inlet as shown on the Drawings. 2. This shaping may be accomplished by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. I. Concrete and Grout 1. Concrete a. All concrete work shall be completed in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. b. All concrete shall be placed within forms. 2. Grout a. Grout shall be placed in a manner which will not allow for separation of materials. b. All exposed grout inside the manhole shall have an approved concrete coating applied to the surface in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-8 J. Backfill 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3.04 Frames, Grates and Covers A. Frames, grates, and covers shall be constructed of the materials as specified and in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and shall be placed carefully to the lines or grades indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. B. All welding shall conform to the requirements of the applicable section of the latest American Welding Society Specifications. C. Apply non-seize graphite or approved equal around all the frame, grate, and/or cover prior to installation. 3.05 Grade Adjustment of Existing Fiberglass Manhole A. Adjustment by Rings 1. The adjustment of the frame and cover is to be achieved by removal or addition of HDPE grade adjustment rings that rest above the fiberglass corbel. 2. Butyl Sealant shall be placed between each ring in a manner to form a continuous seal between each ring. 3. Butyl Sealant shall be placed between the ring and manhole to form a continuous seal. B. Adjustment by Lowering Top of Manhole 1. If the frame and cover must be lowered to the extent that the new elevation cannot be achieved by removal of grade adjustment rings and it is necessary to remove a section of the fiberglass manhole, this work shall be done as described below: a. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. b. Remove the appropriately sized section of the existing manhole from the vertical manhole wall at least six inches (6") below the seam where the corbel meets the vertical wall. c. Excavate evenly around the manhole as required. d. Mark, cut and remove the required section of the manhole. 1) Make a square cut as necessary for a good butt splice. e. Grind and clean ends of fiberglass that are to be re-united. f. Replace and align the top. g. Apply new Fiberglass in accordance with Manhole Manufacturer recommendations and the recommendations of the repair kit. 1) Repair kit shall be of type as required by Manhole Manufacturer. h. After curing, backfill in accordance with the backfill requirements for Manholes, the Drawings, and/or as directed by the Owner. C. Concrete Collar 1. Shall be circular or square of size indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 3. Traffic shall be restricted from the traversing across for thirty-six (36) hours after placement of frame and concrete. 3.06 Grade Adjustment of Existing Concrete Manhole A. Shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00 31 32 - 1 APPENDIX 1 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA 1.1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA A.This Document with its referenced attachments is part of the Procurement and Contracting Requirements for Project. They provide Owner's information for Bidders' convenience and are intended to supplement rather than serve in lieu of Bidders' own investigations. They are made available for Bidders' convenience and information, but are not a warranty of existing conditions. This Document and its attachments are not part of the Contract Documents. B.Geotechnical Engineering Recommendations: 1.Geotechnical Engineering prepared by Tolunay-Wong Engineers END OF Appendix 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 APPENDIX 1 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT PROVIDED BY TOLUNAY WONG Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY 23170 WESTSIDE PONY BALL FIELDS SYNTHETIC PLAYING SURFACES INSTALL CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS Prepared for: City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Prepared by: Tolunay-Wong Engineers, Inc. 826 South Padre Island Drive Corpus Christi, Texas 78416 March 11, 2025 Project No. 25.53.010 / Report No. 35983 826 South Padre Island Drive • Corpus Christi, Texas 78416 • Phone (361) 884-5050 March 11, 2025 City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attn: Priscilla Ramirez, BBA Sr. Project Manager Email: PriscillaR@cctexas.com Ref: Geotechnical Engineering Study 23170 Westside Pony Ball Fields Synthetic Playing Surfaces Install Corpus Christi, Texas TWE Project No. 25.53.010 / Report No. 35983 Dear Ms. Ramirez, Tolunay-Wong Engineers, Inc. (TWE) is pleased to submit this report of our geotechnical engineering study for the above referenced project. This report contains a detailed description of the field program and laboratory services performed for this geotechnical engineering study as well as soil boring logs. Also included in this report are our geotechnical design and construction recommendations for installation of a new synthetic playing surfaces for the Westside Pony ball fields in Corpus Christi, Texas. We appreciate the opportunity to work with you on this phase of the project and look forward to the opportunity of providing additional services as the project progresses. If you have any questions or comments regarding this report or if we can be of further assistance, please contact us. Sincerely, TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. Texas Board of Professional Engineers Firm Registration Number F -000124 Justin Buchen Don R. Rokohl, P.E. Staff Professional Branch Manager 03/11/25 DRR/JB/drr Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 Report No. 35983 i TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION 1-1 1.1 Introduction 1-1 1.2 Project Description 1-1 2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES 2-1 3 FIELD PROGRAM 3-1 3.1 Soil Borings 3-1 3.2 Drilling Methods 3-1 3.3 Soil Sampling 3-1 3.4 Boring Logs 3-1 3.5 Groundwater Measurements 3-2 4 LABORATORY SERVICES 4-1 5 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 5-1 5.1 General 5-1 5.2 Site Description and Surface Conditions 5-1 5.3 Subsurface Conditions 5-1 5.4 Groundwater Observations 5-1 5.5 Shrink/Swell Potential 5-2 6 PREPARATION FOR SYNTHETIC SURFACE INSTALLATION 6-1 6.1 Discussion 6-1 6.2 Shrink/Swell Movements and their Mitigation 6-1 7 EARTHWORK CONSIDERATIONS 7-1 7.1 Subgrade Preparation and Structural Select Fill 7-1 8 DESIGN REVIEW AND LIMITATIONS 8-1 8.1 Design Review and Construction Monitoring 8-1 8.2 Limitations 8-1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 Report No. 35983 ii TABLES AND APPENDICES TABLES Table 4-1 Laboratory Testing Program 4-1 Table 5-1 General Relationship Between PI and Shrink/Swell Potential 5-2 Table 6-1 Minimum Typical Flexible Pavement Thickness 6-1 Table 7-1 Compaction Equipment and Maximum Lift Thickness 7-1 APPENDICES Appendix A: Soil Boring Location Plan TWE Drawing No. 25.53.010-1 Appendix B: Log of Project Borings and a Key to Terms and Symbols used on Boring Logs Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 1-1 Report No. 35983 1 INTRODUCTION AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION 1.1 Introduction This report presents the results of our geotechnical engineering study performed for installation of new synthetic playing surfaces at the 23170 Westside Pony ball fields in Corpus Christi, Texas. Our geotechnical engineering study was conducted in accordance with TWE Proposal No. P25-C004, dated January 7, 2025, and authorized by Contract 4812 between the City of Corpus Christi and Tolunay-Wong Engineers, Inc. and executed Task Order No. 18 Agreement dated January 31, 2025. 1.2 Project Description The project involves the installation of a new synthetic playing surfaces at the 23170 Westside Pony Ball Fields in Corpus Christi, Texas. The existing playing surface are natural grass. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 2-1 Report No. 35983 2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF SERVICES The purposes of our geotechnical engineering study were to investigate the soil and groundwater conditions within the project site and to provide geotechnical design and construction recommendations for the synthetic playing surfaces install. Our scope of services performed for the project consisted of: 1.Drilling and sampling 10 soil borings (6 borings at the larger field and 4 borings at the smaller field) to depths of 12-ft. within the project site to evaluate subsurface stratigraphy and groundwater conditions; 2.Performing geotechnical laboratory tests on recovered soil samples to evaluate the physical and engineering properties of the strata encountered; 3.Providing geotechnical design and construction recommendations for installation of the synthetic playing surface; and, 4.Providing geotechnical construction recommendations including site and subgrade preparation, excavation considerations, fill and backfill requirements, compaction requirements, and overall quality control monitoring, testing, and inspection services. Our scope of services did not include any environmental assessments for the presence or absence of wetlands or of hazardous or toxic materials within or on the soil, air, or water within this project site. Any statements in this report or on the boring logs regarding odors, colors or unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for the information of the Client. A geological fault study was also beyond the scope of our services associated with this geotechnical engineering study. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 3-1 Report No. 35983 3 FIELD PROGRAM 3.1 Soil Borings TWE conducted an exploration of subsurface soil and groundwater conditions at the project site on February 11, 2025, by drilling and sampling 10 soil borings to depths of 12-ft. below existing grade at time of the field program. The soil boring locations are presented on TWE Drawing No. 25.53.010-1 in Appendix A of this report. Drilling and sampling of the soil borings was performed using conventional truck-mounted drilling equipment. Our field personnel coordinated the field activities and logged the boreholes. The boring locations were marked at the site by TWE. The final latitude and longitude coordinates for the borings were determined using a hand-held GPS unit and are presented on the boring logs in Appendix B of this report. 3.2 Drilling Methods Field operations were performed in general accordance with the Standard Practice for Soil Investigation and Sampling by Auger Borings [American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 1452]. The soil borings were drilled using truck-mounted drilling equipment with a rotary head. The boreholes were advanced using dry auger drilling methods. Samples were obtained continuously from existing grade until the boring completion depths were reached. 3.3 Soil Sampling Fine-grained, cohesive soil samples and semi-cohesionless soils (clayey sands) were recovered from the soil borings by hydraulically pushing 3-in diameter, thin-walled Shelby tubes a distance of about 24-in. The field sampling procedures were conducted in general accordance with the Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils (ASTM D 1587). Our geotechnician visually classified the recovered soils and obtained field strength measurements using a pocket penetrometer. The samples were extruded in the field, wrapped in foil, placed in moisture sealed containers and protected from disturbance prior to transport to the laboratory. The recovered soil sample depths with corresponding pocket penetrometer measurements are presented on the boring logs in Appendix B. 3.4 Boring Logs Our interpretations of general subsurface soil and groundwater conditions at the soil boring locations are included on the boring logs. Our interpretations of the soil types throughout the boring depth and the locations of strata changes were based on visual classifications during field sampling and laboratory testing in accordance with Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) (ASTM D 2487) and Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure) (ASTM D 2488). The boring logs include the type and interval depth for each sample along with its corresponding pocket penetrometer measurements. The boring log and a key to terms and symbols used on boring logs is presented in Appendix B. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 3-2 Report No. 35983 3.5 Groundwater Measurements Groundwater level measurements were attempted in the open boreholes during dry-auger drilling. Water level readings were attempted in the open boreholes when groundwater was first encountered and after a fifteen (15) minute time period. The groundwater observations are summarized in Section 5.4 of this report entitled “Groundwater Observations.” Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 4-1 Report No. 35983 4 LABORATORY SERVICES A laboratory testing program was conducted on selected samples to assist in classification and evaluation of the physical and engineering properties of the soils encountered in the project borings. Laboratory tests were performed in general accordance with ASTM International standards. The types of laboratory tests performed are presented in Table 4 -1. A brief description of the testing methods is listed below. Table 4-1: Laboratory Testing Program Test Description Test Method Amount of Material in Soils Finer than No. 200 Sieve ASTM D 1140 Water (Moisture) Content of Soil ASTM D 2216 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils ASTM D 4318 Amount of Materials in Soils Finer than No. 200 (75-µm) Sieve (ASTM D 1140) This test method determines the amount of materials in soils finer than the No. 200 (75-µm) sieve by washing. The loss in weight resulting from the wash treatment is presented as a percentage of the original sample and is reported as the percentage of silt and clay particles in the sample. Water (Moisture) Content of Soil by Mass (ASTM D 2216) This test method determines water (moisture) content by mass of soil where the reduction in mass by drying is due to loss of water. The water (moisture) content of soil, expressed as a percentage, is defined as the ratio of the mass of water to the mass of soil solids. Moisture content may provide an indication of cohesive soil shear strength and compressibility when compared to Atterberg Limits. Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils (ASTM D 4318) This test method determines the liquid limit, plastic limit and the plasticity index of soils. These tests, also known as Atterberg limits, are used from soil classification purposes. They also provide an indication of the volume change potential of a soil when considered in conjunction with the natural moisture content. The liquid limit and plastic limit establish boundaries of consistency for plastic soils. The plasticity index is the difference between the liquid limit and plastic limit. Standard geotechnical laboratory test results and soil properties encountered in the project borings are presented on the boring logs in Appendix B of this report. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 5-1 Report No. 35983 5 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 5.1 General Our interpretations of soil and groundwater conditions within the project site are based on information obtained at the soil boring locations only. This information has been used as the basis for our conclusions and recommendations included in this report. Subsurface conditions may vary at areas not explored by the soil borings. Significant variations at areas not explored by the soil borings will require reassessment of our recommendations. 5.2 Site Description and Surface Conditions The project site is located at the existing Westside Pony baseball fields in Corpus Christi, Texas. At the time of our field investigation, the site was covered by two ball fields. 5.3 Subsurface Conditions The subsurface conditions encountered in the project borings were generalized for the site. A summary of the subsurface conditions and soil properties encountered within the soil borings is presented here-in. Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered at the boring locations and tabulated test results at the recovered sample depths are presented on the boring logs in Appendix B. The soil profile encountered in the borings consisted of very stiff to hard, but occasionally stiff, cohesive FAT CLAY (CH), SANDY FAT CLAY (CH), and FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) soils. A two (2)-foot layer of hard semi-cohesionless CLAYEY SAND (SC) was encountered at the surface of boring B-3. Results of Atterberg Limit tests on selected cohesive soil samples from the project borings indicated liquid limits (LL) ranging from 36 to 65 with corresponding plasticity indices (PI) ranging from 20 to 49. In-situ moisture contents of the cohesive soils ranged from 14% to 28%. The amount of material passing the No. 200 ranged from 60% to 91% within the selected cohesive soil sample tested for grain size distribution. In-situ moisture content from a test performed on the selected semi-cohesionless sample was 18%. The amount of materials finer than the No. 200 sieve on the selected semi -cohesionless sample was 39%. 5.4 Groundwater Observations Groundwater was not observed in the project soil borings during drilling and sampling. Groundwater levels may fluctuate with climatic and seasonal variations as well as tidal conditions and should be verified before construction. Accurate determination of the static groundwater level is typically made with a standpipe piezometer. Installation of a piezometer to evaluate the long- term groundwater condition was not included within the current scope of services. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 5-2 Report No. 35983 5.5 Shrink / Swell Potential The tendency for a soil to shrink and swell with change in moisture content is a function of clay content and type which are generally reflected in soil consistency as defined by Atterberg Limits. A generalized relationship between shrink/swell potential and soil plasticity index (PI) is shown in Table 5-1 below. Table 5-1: General Relationship Between PI and Shrink/Swell Potential P.I. Range Shrink/Swell Potential 0 – 15 Low 15 – 25 Medium 25 – 35 High > 35 Very High The amount of expansion that will actually occur with increase in moisture content is inversely related to the overburden pressure. Therefore, the larger the overburden pressure, the smaller the amount of expansion. Near-surface soils are thus most susceptible to shrink/swell behavior because they experience low magnitude of overburden. Overall, the cohesive clay soils at this site possess very high shrink/swell potential. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 6-1 Report No. 35983 6 PREPARATION FOR SYNTHETIC SURFACE INSTALLATION 6.1 Discussion The project involves the installation of new synthetic playing surfaces at the 23170 Westside Pony Ball Fields in Corpus Christi, Texas which presently have natural grass playing surfaces. We understand that it is usually desired to limit shrink/swell movements below the synthetic surface to one (1) in or less. Since the site contains cohesive clay soils that possess very high shrink/swell potential, mitigation of the shrink/swell movements will be necessary for installation of the new synthetic surfaces. Our geotechnical design and construction considerations for the new synthetic playing surfaces are included in the sections below. 6.2 Shrink/Swell Movements and their Mitigation As previously discussed, the surface and near surface clay soils at this site possess very high shrink/swell potential. Based on the results of our field and laboratory programs, the Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) calculated for the existing soil profile at the site determined by Test Method TEX-124-E is on the order of 3-1/2-in. We understand that it is the synthetic surface industry practice to reduce these movements to more tolerable levels. A typical method of reducing swell potential includes removal of a portion of the existing clay soils and replacement with non-expansive structural fill. This method has beneficial results but does not eliminate all potential for shrink/swell movements. The PVR presented above can be reduced with the placement of non-expansive structural select fill within the areas to receive new synthetic surfaces. The thickness of the non-expansive structural select fill needed below the synthetic surfaces is dependent upon the amount of movement the synthetic surfaces can tolerate. A summary of calculated PVR values with corresponding non-expansive structural select fill thicknesses is provided in Table 6-1 below. It should be realized that this method has beneficial results but does not eliminate all potential for shrink/swell movements. Table 6-1: Material Excavation and Replacement with Resulting PVR Thickness of Structural Select Fill Pad as Measured Below Floor Slabs (feet) Resulting PVR (in.) 0 3-½ 2 2-½ 4 1-½ 5 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 6-2 Report No. 35983 Material and compaction requirements for non-expansive structural fill are provided below in Section 7.1 of this report. It is recommended that select fill be used for elevation of the synthetic surface above existing surrounding grades at least 6 inches to provide positive drainage away from the synthetic surface. •We recommend that site preparation also include: Removal of the existing soils to at least 5-ft. beyond the outside perimeter of the synthetic surface. •After achieving specified subgrade elevation to receive fill, proof-roll exposed subgrade and compact as indicated below. •After testing and acceptance of subgrade, immediately place and compact non-expansive structural fill material to at least 5-ft beyond the outside perimeter of the synthetic surface. •Maintain moisture in structural fill pad until the synthetic surface is installed. It should be noted that these methods for reducing shrink/swell movements are designed for normal seasonal changes in soil moisture content of the natural clay soils. Excessive shrink/swell movements can be expected if increases in soil moisture content occur as a result of broken water and sewer lines, improper drainage of surface water, shrubbery and trees planted near the synthetic surface and excessive lawn or shrubbery irrigation. Due to the expansive nature of the subgrade soils at this site, special care should be taken not to allow the exposed subgrade soils to become extremely wet or extremely dry of the existing moisture content. Therefore, it is vitally important that delays between excavation and fill placement be avoided. If construction occurs during wet weather and the exposed subgrade soils are allowed to become wet or saturated, removal and replacement of excessively soft, wet soils or lime-stabilization should be anticipated. The depth of undercutting should be determined in the field by TWE. An alternate method of shrink/swell movement mitigation is water/chemical injection process. If desired, details for this method can be provided upon request. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 7-1 Report No. 35983 7 EARTHWORK CONSIDERATIONS 7.1 Subgrade Preparation and Structural Select Fill Any subgrade to receive fill soils should be proof rolled with at least a 20-ton pneumatic roller, loaded dump truck, or equivalent, to detect weak areas. Such weak areas should be removed and replaced with soils exhibiting similar classification, moisture content, and density as the adjacent in-place soils. Subsequent to proof rolling, and just prior to placement of non-expansive structural select fill, the exposed subgrade should be compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density at a moisture above (+1% to +4%) the optimum moisture in accordance with Standard Proctor (ASTM D 698) procedures. Proper site drainage should be maintained during construction so that ponding of surface runoff does not occur and cause construction delays and/or inhibit site access. Due to the nature of the subgrade, the cohesive soils can become wet and soft. If the subgrade becomes wet and soft, consideration can be given to removal or replacement of the wet material with structural fill material. The maximum loose thickness for each lift will depend on the type of compaction equipment used. Recommended fill layers are summarized in Table 7-1 below. Table 7-1: Compaction Equipment and Maximum Lift Thickness Compaction Equipment Maximum Lift Thickness Mechanical Hand Tamper 4.0-in Pneumatic Tired Roller 6.0-in Tamping Foot Roller 8.0-in Sheepsfoot Roller 8.0-in Non-expansive structural select fill for this project should consist of a clean low-plasticity sandy clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC) material with a liquid limit of less than 40 and a plasticity index between 7 and 20. The select fill should be placed in thin lifts, not exceeding 8-in. loose measure, moisture conditioned to between -2% and +3% of optimum moisture content, and compacted to a minimum 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor). Prior to any filling operations, samples of the proposed borrow materials should be obtained for soil classification and laboratory moisture-density testing. The tests will provide a basis for evaluation of fill compaction by in-place density testing. A qualified soil technician should perform sufficient in-place density tests during the earthwork operations to verify that proper levels of compaction are being attained. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 8-1 Report No. 35983 8 DESIGN REVIEW AND LIMITATIONS 8.1 Design Review and Construction Monitoring Geotechnical Design Review Geotechnical review of the design drawings and specifications should be performed prior to construction. This review is recommended to check that the geotechnical recommendations and construction guidelines presented herein have been properly interpreted and incorporated into the construction documents. Construction Monitoring The performance of the foundations and pavements for this project will be highly dependent on the quality of construction. Thus, it is recommended that construction activities be monitored by an experienced laboratory proficient in quality control testing/inspection procedures. TWE would be pleased to assist in the development of a plan for construction monitoring to be incorporated in the overall quality control program. Construction surveillance is recommended and has been assumed in preparing our recommendations. These field services are required to check for changes in conditions that may result in modifications to our recommendations. Performance of the foundation system and pavements will be directly related to the Contractor’s adherence to the recommendations in this report and the project plans and specifications. Testing should be provided for all site preparation, foundation concrete pours, and pavement construction activities. TWE would be pleased to provide these services to verify that construction has been performed in accordance with the intentions of this report upon request. 8.2 Limitations Scope of Study The scope of this study, as well as the conclusions and recommendations provided herein, were developed based on our understanding of the project. Assumptions were made when specific information was unknown. Revisions to our conclusions and recommendations could be necessary as a result of any significant project changes or if our assumptions are incorrect. Construction dewatering design, earth retention design, and construction site safety are the responsibility of the Contractor and have not been addressed herein. The scope of our study did not include evaluation of areal fill conditions or geologic faults. In addition, assessment of environmental conditions, including investigation for hazardous materials/pollutants/wastes, regulatory compliance, threatened or endangered species, cultural resources, floodplains, and jurisdictional wetlands were beyond the scope of our study. Warranty The professional services that form the basis for this report have been performed using that degree of care and skill ordinarily exercised, under similar circumstances, by reputable geotechnical engineers practicing in the same locality. No warranty, expressed or implied, is made as to the professional advice set forth. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 8-2 Report No. 35983 Subsurface Variations Our interpretations of subsurface conditions are based on data obtained at the boring locations only and at the time of our field exploration. Subsurface variations could exist between the boring locations and at areas not explored. The validity of our recommendations is based, in part, on assumptions made about subsurface conditions in areas not explored. Such assumptions can only be confirmed during construction. Therefore, construction observations by qualified geotechnical representatives are recommended to check for variations in subsurface conditions. Significant changes from our assumptions could require modification to our findings and recommendations. Report Reliance This report was prepared as an instrument of service for the sole and exclusive use by City of Corpus Christi subject to the limitations stated herein and with specific application to the referenced project. This report should not be applied for any other purpose or project, expect as described herein. This report shall remain the property of Tolunay-Wong Engineers, Inc. No third party may use or rely upon the information provided herein without our express written consent. If any party other than City of Corpus Christi chooses to rely on this instrument without our consent, said party expressly waives any rights it may otherwise have to claim its reliance on this instrument of professional service that resulted in injury, loss, or damage of any kind and will defend and indemnify Tolunay-Wong Engineers, Inc., from any such claim. Report Distribution If any changes in the nature, design or location of the project are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report should not be considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and the conclusions modified or verified in writing by TWE. TWE is not responsible for any claims, damages or liability associated with interpretation or reuse of the subsurface data or engineering analyses without the expressed written authorization of TWE. This geotechnical engineering report is intended to assist in the planning and design of the project and is neither appropriate nor intended for use as technical specifications. This report should not be incorporated into the construction documents either directly or by reference. We recommend the Client engage the services of a Design Engineer to perform final design of any site improvements and to prepare construction plans and specifications. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service during this phase of the project and we look forward to continuing our services during the construction phase and on future projects. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 Report No. 35983 APPENDIX A SOIL BORING LOCATION PLAN TWE DRAWING NO. 25.53.010-1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 TWE Project No. 25.53.010 Report No. 35983 APPENDIX B LOGS OF PROJECT BORINGS AND A KEY TO TERMS AND SYMBOLS USED ON BORING LOGS Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hard dark brown SANDY FAT CLAY (CH) -color changes to dark brown and brown Very stiff brown FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) -becomes stiff Very stiff brown FAT CLAY (CH) Bottom @ 12' (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)3.0 (P)2.0 (P)3.0 18 24 26 64 48 64 74 88 TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. LOG OF BORING BB-1 PROJECT: 23170 Westside Pony - 3 Baseball Fields Corpus Christi, Tx CLIENT: City of Corpus Chiristi Corpus Christi, Tx COMPLETION DEPTH:12 ft NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Boring was terminated at 12-ft.DATE BORING STARTED:2/11/25DATE BORING COMPLETED: 2/11/25LOGGER:B.HarrisPROJECT NO.:25.53.010 Page 1 of 1ELEVATION (FT)---------------------------DEPTH (FT)SAMPLE TYPESYMBOLMATERIAL DESCRIPTION COORDINATES: SURFACE ELEVATION: DRILLING METHOD: Dry Augered: to Wash Bored: to (P) POCKET PEN (tsf)(T) TORVANE (tsf)STD. PENETRATIONTEST BLOWCOUNTMOISTURECONTENT (%)DRY UNIT WEIGHT(pcf)LIQUID LIMIT(%)PLASTICITYINDEX (%)COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH (tsf)FAILURE STRAIN (%)CONFININGPRESSURE (psi)PASSING #200SIEVE (%)OTHER TESTSPERFORMED0'12' 27° 45' 43.65"97° 25' 57.79"NW Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hard dark gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) -becomes very stiff and color changes to brown Very stiff brown FAT CLAY (CH) Bottom @ 12' (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)3.5 (P)3.5 (P)4.0 (P)3.5 25 25 55 40 80 91 TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. LOG OF BORING BB-2 PROJECT: 23170 Westside Pony - 3 Baseball Fields Corpus Christi, Tx CLIENT: City of Corpus Chiristi Corpus Christi, Tx COMPLETION DEPTH:12 ft NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Boring was terminated at 12-ft.DATE BORING STARTED:2/11/25DATE BORING COMPLETED: 2/11/25LOGGER:B.HarrisPROJECT NO.:25.53.010 Page 1 of 1ELEVATION (FT)---------------------------DEPTH (FT)SAMPLE TYPESYMBOLMATERIAL DESCRIPTION COORDINATES: SURFACE ELEVATION: DRILLING METHOD: Dry Augered: to Wash Bored: to (P) POCKET PEN (tsf)(T) TORVANE (tsf)STD. PENETRATIONTEST BLOWCOUNTMOISTURECONTENT (%)DRY UNIT WEIGHT(pcf)LIQUID LIMIT(%)PLASTICITYINDEX (%)COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH (tsf)FAILURE STRAIN (%)CONFININGPRESSURE (psi)PASSING #200SIEVE (%)OTHER TESTSPERFORMED0'12' 27° 45' 43.37"97° 25' 56.24"NW Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hard reddish brown CLAYEY SAND (SC) Hard gray and brown FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) -color changes to brown -becomes very stiff Bottom @ 12' (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)4.5 (P)4.5 (P)4.0 18 25 59 46 39 78 TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. LOG OF BORING BB-3 PROJECT: 23170 Westside Pony - 3 Baseball Fields Corpus Christi, Tx CLIENT: City of Corpus Chiristi Corpus Christi, Tx COMPLETION DEPTH:12 ft NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Boring was terminated at 12-ft.DATE BORING STARTED:2/11/25DATE BORING COMPLETED: 2/11/25LOGGER:B.HarrisPROJECT NO.:25.53.010 Page 1 of 1ELEVATION (FT)---------------------------DEPTH (FT)SAMPLE TYPESYMBOLMATERIAL DESCRIPTION COORDINATES: SURFACE ELEVATION: DRILLING METHOD: Dry Augered: to Wash Bored: to (P) POCKET PEN (tsf)(T) TORVANE (tsf)STD. PENETRATIONTEST BLOWCOUNTMOISTURECONTENT (%)DRY UNIT WEIGHT(pcf)LIQUID LIMIT(%)PLASTICITYINDEX (%)COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH (tsf)FAILURE STRAIN (%)CONFININGPRESSURE (psi)PASSING #200SIEVE (%)OTHER TESTSPERFORMED0'12' 27° 45' 42.27"97° 25' 57.41"NW Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hard gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) -becomes very stiff -color changes to brown Stiff brown LEAN CLAY with SAND (CL) Bottom @ 12' (P)4.5+ (P)4.5 (P)3.0 (P)3.0 (P)2.5 (P)2.0 28 26 25 36 20 71 75 76 TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. LOG OF BORING BB-4 PROJECT: 23170 Westside Pony - 3 Baseball Fields Corpus Christi, Tx CLIENT: City of Corpus Chiristi Corpus Christi, Tx COMPLETION DEPTH:12 ft NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Boring was terminated at 12-ft.DATE BORING STARTED:2/11/25DATE BORING COMPLETED: 2/11/25LOGGER:B.HarrisPROJECT NO.:25.53.010 Page 1 of 1ELEVATION (FT)---------------------------DEPTH (FT)SAMPLE TYPESYMBOLMATERIAL DESCRIPTION COORDINATES: SURFACE ELEVATION: DRILLING METHOD: Dry Augered: to Wash Bored: to (P) POCKET PEN (tsf)(T) TORVANE (tsf)STD. PENETRATIONTEST BLOWCOUNTMOISTURECONTENT (%)DRY UNIT WEIGHT(pcf)LIQUID LIMIT(%)PLASTICITYINDEX (%)COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH (tsf)FAILURE STRAIN (%)CONFININGPRESSURE (psi)PASSING #200SIEVE (%)OTHER TESTSPERFORMED0'12' 27° 45' 43.28"97° 25' 54.87"NW Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hard gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) -becomes very stiff -color changes to gray and brown -color changes to brown -becomes stiff -becomes very stiff Bottom @ 12' (P)4.5+ (P)4.0 (P)4.0 (P)3.5 (P)2.5 (P)3.5 22 20 62 59 46 47 73 82 TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. LOG OF BORING BB-5 PROJECT: 23170 Westside Pony - 3 Baseball Fields Corpus Christi, Tx CLIENT: City of Corpus Chiristi Corpus Christi, Tx COMPLETION DEPTH:12 ft NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Boring was terminated at 12-ft.DATE BORING STARTED:2/11/25DATE BORING COMPLETED: 2/11/25LOGGER:B.HarrisPROJECT NO.:25.53.010 Page 1 of 1ELEVATION (FT)---------------------------DEPTH (FT)SAMPLE TYPESYMBOLMATERIAL DESCRIPTION COORDINATES: SURFACE ELEVATION: DRILLING METHOD: Dry Augered: to Wash Bored: to (P) POCKET PEN (tsf)(T) TORVANE (tsf)STD. PENETRATIONTEST BLOWCOUNTMOISTURECONTENT (%)DRY UNIT WEIGHT(pcf)LIQUID LIMIT(%)PLASTICITYINDEX (%)COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH (tsf)FAILURE STRAIN (%)CONFININGPRESSURE (psi)PASSING #200SIEVE (%)OTHER TESTSPERFORMED0'12' 27° 45' 41.99"97° 25' 55.60"NW Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hard dark gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) -color changes to gray -becomes very stiff and color changes to brown Stiff brown SANDY FAT CLAY (CH) -becomes very stiff Bottom @ 12' (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)3.0 (P)3.5 (P)2.5 (P)3.5 20 23 65 48 70 62 TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. LOG OF BORING BB-6 PROJECT: 23170 Westside Pony - 3 Baseball Fields Corpus Christi, Tx CLIENT: City of Corpus Chiristi Corpus Christi, Tx COMPLETION DEPTH:12 ft NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Boring was terminated at 12-ft.DATE BORING STARTED:2/11/25DATE BORING COMPLETED: 2/11/25LOGGER:B.HarrisPROJECT NO.:25.53.010 Page 1 of 1ELEVATION (FT)---------------------------DEPTH (FT)SAMPLE TYPESYMBOLMATERIAL DESCRIPTION COORDINATES: SURFACE ELEVATION: DRILLING METHOD: Dry Augered: to Wash Bored: to (P) POCKET PEN (tsf)(T) TORVANE (tsf)STD. PENETRATIONTEST BLOWCOUNTMOISTURECONTENT (%)DRY UNIT WEIGHT(pcf)LIQUID LIMIT(%)PLASTICITYINDEX (%)COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH (tsf)FAILURE STRAIN (%)CONFININGPRESSURE (psi)PASSING #200SIEVE (%)OTHER TESTSPERFORMED0'12' 27° 45' 41.00"97° 25' 57.26"NW Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hard gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) -color changes to gray and brown -becomes very stiff and color changes to brown -becomes stiff -becomes very stiff Bottom @ 12' (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)3.5 (P)3.0 (P)2.5 (P)3.0 16 24 57 42 74 76 TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. LOG OF BORING SB-1 PROJECT: 23170 Westside Pony - 3 Baseball Fields Corpus Christi, Tx CLIENT: City of Corpus Chiristi Corpus Christi, Tx COMPLETION DEPTH:12 ft NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Boring was terminated at 12-ft.DATE BORING STARTED:2/11/25DATE BORING COMPLETED: 2/11/25LOGGER:B.HarrisPROJECT NO.:25.53.010 Page 1 of 1ELEVATION (FT)---------------------------DEPTH (FT)SAMPLE TYPESYMBOLMATERIAL DESCRIPTION COORDINATES: SURFACE ELEVATION: DRILLING METHOD: Dry Augered: to Wash Bored: to (P) POCKET PEN (tsf)(T) TORVANE (tsf)STD. PENETRATIONTEST BLOWCOUNTMOISTURECONTENT (%)DRY UNIT WEIGHT(pcf)LIQUID LIMIT(%)PLASTICITYINDEX (%)COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH (tsf)FAILURE STRAIN (%)CONFININGPRESSURE (psi)PASSING #200SIEVE (%)OTHER TESTSPERFORMED0'12' 27° 45' 44.94"97° 25' 59.26"NW Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hard gray SANDY FAT CLAY (CH) Hard gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) -becomes very stiff and color changes to brown -becomes stiff Bottom @ 12' (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)3.5 (P)4.5 (P)2.0 (P)2.5 24 24 23 53 38 60 70 77 TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. LOG OF BORING SB-2 PROJECT: 23170 Westside Pony - 3 Baseball Fields Corpus Christi, Tx CLIENT: City of Corpus Chiristi Corpus Christi, Tx COMPLETION DEPTH:12 ft NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Boring was terminated at 12-ft.DATE BORING STARTED:2/11/25DATE BORING COMPLETED: 2/11/25LOGGER:B.HarrisPROJECT NO.:25.53.010 Page 1 of 1ELEVATION (FT)---------------------------DEPTH (FT)SAMPLE TYPESYMBOLMATERIAL DESCRIPTION COORDINATES: SURFACE ELEVATION: DRILLING METHOD: Dry Augered: to Wash Bored: to (P) POCKET PEN (tsf)(T) TORVANE (tsf)STD. PENETRATIONTEST BLOWCOUNTMOISTURECONTENT (%)DRY UNIT WEIGHT(pcf)LIQUID LIMIT(%)PLASTICITYINDEX (%)COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH (tsf)FAILURE STRAIN (%)CONFININGPRESSURE (psi)PASSING #200SIEVE (%)OTHER TESTSPERFORMED0'12' 27° 45' 44.93"97° 26' 00.85"NW Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hard gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) -becomes very stiff and color changes to brown Stiff brown FAT CLAY (CH) Bottom @ 12' (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)3.5 (P)3.0 (P)4.0 (P)2.5 18 26 62 52 47 38 73 91 TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. LOG OF BORING SB-3 PROJECT: 23170 Westside Pony - 3 Baseball Fields Corpus Christi, Tx CLIENT: City of Corpus Chiristi Corpus Christi, Tx COMPLETION DEPTH:12 ft NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Boring was terminated at 12-ft.DATE BORING STARTED:2/11/25DATE BORING COMPLETED: 2/11/25LOGGER:B.HarrisPROJECT NO.:25.53.010 Page 1 of 1ELEVATION (FT)---------------------------DEPTH (FT)SAMPLE TYPESYMBOLMATERIAL DESCRIPTION COORDINATES: SURFACE ELEVATION: DRILLING METHOD: Dry Augered: to Wash Bored: to (P) POCKET PEN (tsf)(T) TORVANE (tsf)STD. PENETRATIONTEST BLOWCOUNTMOISTURECONTENT (%)DRY UNIT WEIGHT(pcf)LIQUID LIMIT(%)PLASTICITYINDEX (%)COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH (tsf)FAILURE STRAIN (%)CONFININGPRESSURE (psi)PASSING #200SIEVE (%)OTHER TESTSPERFORMED0'12' 27° 45' 46.29"97° 25' 59.25"NW Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 Hard gray FAT CLAY with SAND (CH) -color changes to brown -becomes very stiff -becomes stiff -becomes very stiff Bottom @ 12' (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)4.5+ (P)3.0 (P)2.5 5/6"7/6"12/6" 14 22 25 64 49 73 76 72 TOLUNAY-WONG ENGINEERS, INC. LOG OF BORING SB-4 PROJECT: 23170 Westside Pony - 3 Baseball Fields Corpus Christi, Tx CLIENT: City of Corpus Chiristi Corpus Christi, Tx COMPLETION DEPTH:12 ft NOTES: Groundwater not encountered during drilling. Boring was terminated at 12-ft.DATE BORING STARTED:2/11/25DATE BORING COMPLETED: 2/11/25LOGGER:B.HarrisPROJECT NO.:25.53.010 Page 1 of 1ELEVATION (FT)---------------------------DEPTH (FT)SAMPLE TYPESYMBOLMATERIAL DESCRIPTION COORDINATES: SURFACE ELEVATION: DRILLING METHOD: Dry Augered: to Wash Bored: to (P) POCKET PEN (tsf)(T) TORVANE (tsf)STD. PENETRATIONTEST BLOWCOUNTMOISTURECONTENT (%)DRY UNIT WEIGHT(pcf)LIQUID LIMIT(%)PLASTICITYINDEX (%)COMPRESSIVESTRENGTH (tsf)FAILURE STRAIN (%)CONFININGPRESSURE (psi)PASSING #200SIEVE (%)OTHER TESTSPERFORMED0'12' 27° 45' 46.30"97° 26' 00.78"NW Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 KEY TO SYMBOLS AND TERMS USED ON BORING LOGS FOR SOIL Most Common Unified Soil Sampler Symbols Meaning Classifications System Symbols 0 •77 7 •f7 \A-,7' 7 /T . 7: L A/^7 Lean Clay (CL ) Lean Clay w/Sand (CL) Sandy Lean Clay (CL ) Fat Clay (CH) Fat Clay w/Sand (CH ) Sandy Fat Clay (CH) Silty Clay (CL-ML ) Sandy Silty Clay (CL-ML) Silty Clayey Sand (SC-SM ) Clayey Sand (SC) Sandy Silt (ML ) Silty Sand (SM) Silt w/Sand (ML ) *;'V "I /1 i: s 1 i I *1 *1 « i i r 4^/./• •••*• ••••• Well Graded Sand (SW) Well Graded Sand w/Gravel (SW-GM ) Poorly Graded Sand (SP) Poorly Graded Sand w/Silt (SP-SM) Silt (ML ) Elastic Silt (MH) Elastic Silt w/Sand (MH-SP) Silty Gravel (GM ) Clayey Gravel (GC ) Well Graded Gravel (GW) Well Graded Gravel w/Sand (SP-GM ) Poorly Graded Gravel (GP) Peat Miscellaneous Materials Asphalt and/or BaseFill'A :. is ' 'A Concrete Pavement core Thin -walled tube sample Standard Penetration Test (SPT) Auger sample Sampling attempt with no recovery TxDOT Cone Penetrometer Test Field Test Data 2.50 Pocket penetrometer reading in tons per square foot (T )1.13 Torvane Measurement in tons per square foot 8/6"Blow count per 6 -in.interval of the Standard Penetration Test 37 Observed free water during drilling ^Observed static water level Laboratory Test Data Wc (%)Moisture content in percent Dens,(pcf )Dry unit weight in pounds per cubic foot Qu (tsf )Unconfined compressive strength in tons per square foot m H I B 0 M UU (tsf )Compressive strength under confining pressure in tons per square foot Str.(%)Strain at failure in percent LL Liquid Limit in percent PI Plasticity Index #200 (%)Percent passing the No.200 mesh sieve ()Confining pressure in pounds per square inch *Slickensided failure **Did not fail @ 15%strain RELATIVE DENSITY OF COHESIONLESS &SEMI-COHESIONLESS SOILS The following descriptive terms for relative density apply to cohesionless soils such as gravels,silty sands,and sands as well as semi-cohesive and semi-cohesionless soils such as sandy silts,and clayey sands. Relative Density Very Loose Loose Medium Dense Dense Very Dense Typical N 60 Value Range * 0-4 5-10 11-30 31-50 Over 50 CONSISTENCY OF COHESIVE SOILS The following descriptive terms for consistency apply to cohesive soils such as clays,sandy clays,and silty clays. Typical Compressive Strength (tsf ) qu<0.25 0.25 <qu<0.50 0.50 <qu<1.00 1.00 <qu<2.00 2.00 <qu <4.00 qu >4.00 Consistency Very soft Soft Firm Stiff Very Stiff Hard Typical SPT "N 60 " Value Range** <2 3-4 5-8 9-15 16-30 >31 *N60 is the number of blows from a 140-lb weight having a free fall of 30-in .required to penetrate the final 12-in.of an 18-in. sample interval,corrected for field procedure to an average energy ratio of 60%(Terzaghi,Peck,and Mesri,1996). **An "N 60"value of 31 or greater corresponds to a hard consistency. The correlation of consistency with a typical SPT "NM"value range is approximate. Tolunay-Wong #Engineers,Inc. REVISION DATE 1-5-12 GEOSYSTEM Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 APPENDIX 2 FOAL PLAYING FIELD DIMENSIONS AND DISTANCES APPLIES TO PROJECTS: Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 2 5 'Recommended Foul Line 125' 6'50'5 0 ' 6' 4' 8' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 9'9' 9' 9' Circle 70' 8½"38'20' Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Pocket 200'6"8"6"17" 4'0"8'0"3'0"4'0" 43" 90° Optional Batter's Box C B B3'0"8"Foal Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesPONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG Appendix 2 Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 2 5 'Recommended Foul Line 125' 6'50'5 0 ' 6' 4' 8' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 9'9' 9' 9' Circle 70' 8½"38'20' Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Pocket 200'6"8"6"17" 4'0"8'0"3'0"4'0" 43" 90° Optional Batter's Box C B B3'0"8"Shetland Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesPONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 5 0 'Recommended Foul Line 150' 6'60'6 0 ' 6' 4' 8' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 9' Circle 38'20' Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Pocket 200'6"8"6"17" 4'0"8'0"3'0"4'0" 43" 90° Optional Batter's Box C B B3'0"8"Pinto Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesPONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG 84' 10"10'10' 10' Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 7 5 'Recommended Foul Line 175' 6'60'6 0 ' 6' 4' 8' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 10'10' 10' 9' Circle 84' 10"46'20' Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Pocket 225'6"8"6"17" 4'0"8'0"3'0"4'0" 43" 90° Optional Batter's Box C B B3'0"8"Mustang Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesPONY BASEBALL ANDSOFTBALL – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 2 2 5 'Recommended Foul Line 225' 9'70'7 0 ' 6' 6' 1 2 ' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 2 ' Ci r c l e 6 5 ' 11'11' 11' 12' Circle 99' 0"50'30' Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Pocket 275'6"8"6"17" 4'0"8'0"3'0"4'0" 43" 90° Optional Batter's Box C B B3'0"8"Bronco Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesPONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 2 6 5 'Recommended Foul Line 265' 1 2 '80'8 0 ' 6' 8' 1 6 ' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 4 ' Ci r c l e 8 0 ' 12'12' 12' 15' Circle 113' 2"54'40' Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Pocket 315'6"8"6"17" 4'0"8'0"3'0"4'0" 43" 90° Optional Batter's Box C B B3'0"8"Pony Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesPONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 3 0 0 'Recommended Foul Line 300' 1 5 '90'9 0 ' 6' 1 0 ' 2 0 ' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 6 ' Ci r c l e 9 5 ' 13'13' 13' 18' Circle 127' 3"60' 6"50' Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Pocket 350'6"8"6"17" 4'0"8'0"3'0"4'0" 43" 90° Optional Batter's Box C B B3'0"8"Colt Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesPONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 3 0 0 'Recommended Foul Line 300' 1 5 '90'9 0 ' 6' 1 0 ' 2 0 ' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 6 ' Ci r c l e 9 5 ' 13'13' 13' 18' Circle 127' 3"50' Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Pocket 350'6"8"6"17" 4'0"8'0"3'0"4'0" 43" 90° Optional Batter's Box C B B3'0"8"Palomino Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesPONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL 60' 6" Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 3 0 0 'Recommended Foul Line 300' 1 5 '90'9 0 ' 6' 1 0 ' 2 0 ' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 6 ' Ci r c l e 9 5 ' 13'13' 13' 18' Circle 127' 3"50' Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Pocket 350'6"8"6"17" 4'0"8'0"3'0"4'0" 43" 90° Optional Batter's Box C B B3'0"8"PONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG 60' 6"Thorobred Playing Field Dimensions and Distances Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 APPENDIX 3 PONY GIRLS FAST PITCH PLAYING FIELD DIMENSIONS AND DISTANCES APPLIES TO PROJECT: Sparkling City Softball 23172 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 55’5 5 ’ 6' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 9'9' 9'77’ 9"40’Du g O u t Dug O ut PONY Girls Fast Pitch Shetland 6U Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesPONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG Recommend Distance to Fence 150’ to 175’8' 3' 1 5 ' Optional 8' Radius Circle R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 5 0 'Recommended Foul Line 150' 25’ to 30' 3'0"10'0"3'0"3'0" 8’5" Batter's Box Catcher’s Box Left Batter’s Box 4'0"Right Batter’s Box 6"8"6"17"8"Sparkling City Softball 23172 PONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG 55’5 5 ’ 6' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 9'9' 9'77’ 9"40’25’ to 30' Du g O u t Dug O ut PONY Girls Fast Pitch Pinto 8U Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesRecommend Distance to Fence 150’ to 175’8' 3' 1 5 ' Optional 8' Radius Circle R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 5 0 'Recommended Foul Line 150' 3'0"10'0"3'0"3'0" 8’5" Batter's Box Catcher’s Box Left Batter’s Box 4'0"Right Batter’s Box 6"8"6"17"8"Sparkling City Softball 23172 60'6 0 ' 6' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 10'10' 10'84' 10"35’Du g O u t Dug O ut PONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG PONY Girls Fast Pitch Mustang 10U Playing Field Dimensions and DistancesRecommend Distance to Fence 150’ to 175’8' 3' 1 5 ' 8' Radius Circle R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 5 0 'Recommended Foul Line 150' 25’ to 30' 3'0"10'0"3'0"3'0" 8’5" Batter's Box Catcher’s Box Left Batter’s Box 4'0"Right Batter’s Box 6"8"6"17"8"Sparkling City Softball 23172 40’PONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG PONY Girls Fast Pitch Bronco 12U Playing Field Dimensions and Distances R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 7 5 'Recommended Foul Line 175'60'6 0 ' 6' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 10'10' 10'84' 10"Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Fence 175’ to 200’8' 3' 1 5 ' 8' Radius Circle 25’ to 30' 3'0"10'0"3'0"3'0" 8’5" Batter's Box Catcher’s Box Left Batter’s Box 4'0"Right Batter’s Box 6"8"6"17"8"Sparkling City Softball 23172 43’PONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG PONY Girls Fast Pitch Pony 14U Playing Field Dimensions and Distances R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 7 5 'Recommended Foul Line 175'60'6 0 ' 6' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 10'10' 10'84' 10"Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Fence 175’ to 200’8' 3' 1 5 ' 8' Radius Circle 25’ to 30' 3'0"10'0"3'0"3'0" 8’5" Batter's Box Catcher’s Box Left Batter’s Box 4'0"Right Batter’s Box 6"8"6"17"8"Sparkling City Softball 23172 43’PONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG PONY Girls Fast Pitch Colt 16U Playing Field Dimensions and Distances R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 7 5 'Recommended Foul Line 175'60'6 0 ' 6' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 10'10' 10'84' 10"Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Fence 175’ to 200’8' 3' 1 5 ' 8' Radius Circle 25’ to 30' 3'0"10'0"3'0"3'0" 8’5" Batter's Box Catcher’s Box Left Batter’s Box 4'0"Right Batter’s Box 6"8"6"17"8"Sparkling City Softball 23172 43’PONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG PONY Girls Fast Pitch Palomino 18U Playing Field Dimensions and Distances R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 7 5 'Recommended Foul Line 175'60'6 0 ' 6' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 10'10' 10'84' 10"Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Fence 175’ to 200’8' 3' 1 5 ' 8' Radius Circle 25’ to 30' 3'0"10'0"3'0"3'0" 8’5" Batter's Box Catcher’s Box Left Batter’s Box 4'0"Right Batter’s Box 6"8"6"17"8"Sparkling City Softball 23172 43’PONY BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL WWW.PONY.ORG PONY Girls Fast Pitch Palomino 23U Playing Field Dimensions and Distances R e c omm e n d e d F o u l L i n e 1 7 5 'Recommended Foul Line 175'60'6 0 ' 6' Coach's Box Nex t B a t t e r ' s Circ l e 5 ' Back Stop 2 0 ' Ci r c l e 5 0 ' 10'10' 10'84' 10"Du g O u t Dug O utRecommend Distance to Fence 175’ to 200’8' 3' 1 5 ' 8' Radius Circle 25’ to 30' 3'0"10'0"3'0"3'0" 8’5" Batter's Box Catcher’s Box Left Batter’s Box 4'0"Right Batter’s Box 6"8"6"17"8"Sparkling City Softball 23172 APPENDIX 4 TCEQ REPORT – USE OF RECLAIMED WATER Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Title 30 Environmental Quality Part 1 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Chapter 210 Use of Reclaimed Water Subchapter B General Requirements for the Production, Conveyance, and Use of Reclaimed Water Rule §210.24 Irrigation Using Reclaimed Water (a) The reclaimed water user shall provide reasonable control of the application rates for reclaimed water applied to irrigation areas. These controls shall encourage the efficient use of reclaimed water and avoid excessive application of reclaimed water that results in surface runoff or excessive percolation below the root zone. (b) The reclaimed water provider or user, as applicable, shall determine and document typical irrigation demands for the proposed use based on type of vegetation and land area to be irrigated. As one alternative, a typical method for determining irrigation needs is shown in Table 1 of this section. However, other alternative methods may be used. (c) The reclaimed water provider shall be responsible for conducting periodic audits of appropriate controls implemented by reclaimed water users. Other typical irrigation operational considerations that must be addressed include the following: (1) Irrigation of Food Crops. (A) Irrigation of edible crops that will be peeled, skinned, cooked, or thermally processed before consumption is allowed. Direct contact of the reclaimed water with such crops is allowed. (B) Irrigation of citrus fruit is allowed. Direct contact of the reclaimed water with citrus is allowed. (C) Irrigation of edible crops that will not be peeled, skinned, cooked, or thermally processed before consumption is allowed if an indirect application method is used which will preclude the direct contact with the reclaimed water. For instance, a ridge and furrow, drip irrigation, or a subsurface distribution system may be used to irrigate such above ground crops. However, these methods would not be suitable for crops such as carrots or radishes. (D) Irrigation of edible crops that will not be peeled, skinned, cooked, or thermally processed before consumption that allows for direct contact of the reclaimed water on the crop is prohibited. (2) Irrigation of pastures used by animals milked for human consumption shall be conducted in a manner to avoid contact of reclaimed water with such animals. (3) Irrigation of landscaped areas. (A) Application of reclaimed water on public access facilities shall be controlled by agreement with the reclaimed water provider or by local ordinance. (B) Reclaimed water may not be used to fill swimming pools, hot tubs, wading pools, or other structures designed for contact recreation. (d) General irrigation requirements. (1) A provider or user designing or operating an irrigation system using reclaimed water is responsible for ensuring that reclaimed water overflow, crop stress, and undesirable soil contamination by a salt does not occur. To prevent such occurrences, the provider or user is required to consider, evaluate, and respond appropriately to the following factors as the need arises: (A) Precipitation inputs to the water balance should utilize the average monthly precipitation based on past rainfall records. (B) The consumptive use requirements (evapotranspiration losses) of the crop system should be developed on a monthly basis. The method of determining the consumptive use requirement shall be documented by the provider or user as a part of the water balance study and the records of the study maintained for possible commission review. (C) A leaching requirement, calculated as shown in Table 1 of this section, shall be included in the water balance study when the total dissolved solids concentration of the reclaimed water presents the potential for developing excessive soil salinity buildup due to the long term operation of the irrigation system. (2) The irrigation site must be maintained with a vegetative cover or be under cultivation during times when reclaimed water is being applied. (3) The irrigation practices shall be designed so as to prevent incidental ponding or standing water except where local farming conditions and the accepted irrigation delivery systems and cropping patterns are such that, as an unavoidable consequence of such conditions, systems, and patterns, there will be standing water. Appendix 4 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 (4) Irrigation application rates and application times shall be developed so as to minimize "wet grass" conditions in unrestricted landscaped areas during the periods the area could be in use. (5) Irrigation systems shall be designed so that the irrigation spray does not reach any privately- owned premises outside the designated irrigation area or reach public drinking fountains. (6)There shall be no application of effluent when the ground is water saturated or frozen. (7)Distribution systems must be designed to prevent operation by unauthorized personnel. (8) Irrigation operations shall be managed in a manner to minimize the inadvertent contact of reclaimed water with humans. (9) Operational or tailwater controls shall be provided to preclude discharge of reclaimed water from irrigation sites. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Title 30 Environmental Quality Part 1 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Chapter 210 Use of Reclaimed Water Subchapter B General Requirements for the Production, Conveyance, and Use of Reclaimed Water Rule §210.25 Special Design Criteria for Reclaimed Water Systems (a)All hose bibs and faucets shall be painted purple and designed to prevent connection to a standard water hose. Hose bibs shall be located in locked, below grade vaults which shall be clearly labeled as being of non-potable quality. As an alternative to the use of locked, below grade vaults with standard hose bibs services, hose bibs may be placed in a non-lockable service box which can only be operated by a special tool so long as the hose bib is clearly labeled as non-potable water, in accordance with subsection (b) of this section. (b) One of the following requirements must be met by the user or provider, for any area where reclaimed water is stored or where there exist hose bibs or faucets: (1)Signs having a minimum size of eight inches by eight inches, as shown in Figure 1, shall be posted at all storage areas and on all hose bibs and faucets reading, in both English and Spanish, "Reclaimed Water, Do Not Drink" or similar warning. (c)Reclaimed water piping shall be separated from potable water piping by a horizontal distance of at least nine feet. Where the nine foot separation distance cannot be achieved, the reclaimed water piping must meet the line separation requirements of Chapter 290 of this title (relating to Water Hygiene). (d) Where a reclaimed water line parallels a sewer line, the reclaimed water line shall be constructed in accordance with subsection (e) or (f) of this section. The horizontal separation distance shall be three feet (outside to outside) with the reclaimed water line at the level of or above the sewer line. Reclaimed water lines which parallel sewer lines may be placed in the same benched trench. Where a reclaimed water line crosses a sewer line, the requirements of §290.44(e)(5)(B) of this title (relating to Location of Water Lines) shall be followed, with "reclaimed water line" substituted in §290.44(e) of this title (relating to Location of Water Lines) for "water line." (e)Reclaimed water lines which transport reclaimed water under pressure shall be sized according to acceptable engineering practices for the needs of the reclaimed water users. The designer shall consider methods to prevent or maintain lines to mitigate the effect of the deposition of solids in such lines. Pipe specified for reclaimed water force mains shall be of a type having an expected life at least as long as that of the lift station and shall be suitable for the reclaimed water being pumped and operating pressure to which it will be subjected. All pipe shall be identified in the technical specifications with appropriate American Society for Testing and Materials, American National Standard Institute, or American Water Works Association (AWWA) standard numbers for both quality control (dimensions, tolerance, and installation such as bedding or backfill). All pipes and fittings shall have a minimum working pressure rating of 150 pounds per square inch. Final plans and specifications shall describe required pressure testing for all installed reclaimed water force mains. Minimum test pressure shall be 1.5 times the maximum design pressure. Allowable leakage rates shall be determined as described in §317.2(d)(4) of this title (relating to Pressure Sewer Systems). (f) Gravity flow reclaimed water lines shall meet the requirements of §317.2(a) of this title (relating to General Requirements) and §317.2(c) of this title (relating to High Velocity Protection). The designer shall consider methods to prevent high velocity scour or maintain line fluid velocity to mitigate the effects of the deposition of solids in the gravity conveyance. (g)All exposed piping and piping within a building shall be either purple pipe or painted purple. All buried piping installed after the effective date of these rules shall be one of the following: manufactured in purple, painted purple, taped with purple metallic tape, or bagged in purple. All exposed piping should be stenciled in white with a warning reading "NON-POTABLE WATER." All exposed or buried reclaimed water piping constructed at a wastewater treatment facility is exempt from the color coding requirements of this section. (h) When applicable, in accordance with §317.1(a)(3)-(4) of this title, (relating to General Provisions), the design of distribution systems which will convey reclaimed water to a user shall be submitted to the executive director and must receive an approval. The design of the distribution systems must meet the requirements of Chapter 317 of this title (relating to Design Criteria for Sewerage Systems). Where a municipality is the plan review authority for certain sewer systems which transport primarily Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 domestic waste, in accordance with §317.1(a)(5) of this title, in lieu of the commission, design submittal will not be subject to submittal to the commission and instead must be approved by the municipality. Materials shall be submitted for approval by the executive director in accordance with the Texas Engineering Practice Act (Article 3271a, Vernon's Annotated Texas Statutes). (i)All ground level and elevated storage tanks shall be designed, installed, and constructed in accordance with current AWWA standards with reference to materials to be used and construction practices to be followed, except for health-based standards strictly related to potable water storage and contact practices, where appropriately less restrictive standards may be applied. To view TCEQ Chapter 210, Subchapters A -F in their entirety, visit https://www.tceq.texas.gov/ Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 APPENDIX 5 MEMO ON WATER/ CHEMICAL PRESSURE INJECTION METHOD PROVIDED BY TOLUNAY WONG Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 826 South Padre Island Drive Corpus Christi, Texas 78416 Phone: (361) 884-5050 ng MEMO Date: September 29, 2025 To: City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78401 Attn: Ms. Priscilla Ramirez, BBA Senior Project Manager Via email: PriscillaR@cctexas.com From: Don R. Rokohl, P.E. TWE Corpus Christi Re: Water/Chemical Pressure Injection Method for Purposes of PVR Mitigation and Use of Flexible Base Material below Concrete Walking Surface 23170 Westside Pony Ball Fields Synthetic Playing Surfaces Install Corpus Christi, Texas Supplement No. 1 to TWE Project No. 25.53.010/Report 35983 Ms. Ramirez, As requested by Mr. Nick Gignac, Associate AIA, LEED AP BD+C with Gignac Architects on behalf of the city of Corpus Christi, we are providing information regarding the effect of water/chemical pressure injection in conjunction with select fill placement on the mitigation of potential vertical rise (PVR) for the proposed baseball and softball fields at the above referenced site. A summary of our analyses is provided in the table below. The result below present the mitigation effects on both fields (baseball and softball). Cut Depth (ft)1 Injection Depth (ft)1 Select Fill Thickness (ft) Resulting PVR (in.) 0 10 0 1-1/2 to 1-3/4 1 10 1 1-1/4 to 1-1/2 2 10 2 1 Notes: 1. Depth measured below grade at the time the soil borings were drilled. To verify proper injection of the athletic fields, test borings should be taken 48 to 72 hours after injection has been completed. One (1) test boring should be taken for every 2,500 square feet of injected area to a depth equal to the bottom of the injection depth. The samples from the test borings will be delivered to our laboratory and tested for moisture content, swell potential, and possibly other classification tests. If it is determined that the initial injection has not produced results with the satisfactory PVR reduction, the area should be pressure injected again. Again, after 48 to 72 hours, additional test borings should be taken and the process repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. To help ensure that the injection process yields successful results, Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Appendix 5 September 29, 2025 Memo No. 1 Project No.25.53.010 Report 35983 Page 2 of 5 ng the water and chemical pressure injection guidelines attached to this letter should be closely followed during the injection and testing processes. After acceptable pressure injection has been accomplished, the upper 6-in. of the exposed subgrade should be scarified and compacted to a density between 94 percent and 98 percent of the maximum dry density determined by ASTM D 698 at a moisture content of at least 3% above the optimum moisture content. The placement of non-expansive structural fill should then proceed without delay. Non-expansive structural select fill for this project should consist of a clean low-plasticity sandy clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC) material with a liquid limit of less than 40 and a plasticity index between 7 and 20. The select fill should be placed in thin lifts, not exceeding 8-in. loose measure, moisture conditioned to between -2% and +3% of optimum moisture content, and compacted to a minimum 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor). Prior to any filling operations, samples of the proposed borrow materials should be obtained for soil classification and laboratory moisture-density testing. The tests will provide a basis for evaluation of fill compaction by in-place density testing. A qualified soil technician should perform sufficient in- place density tests during the earthwork operations to verify that proper levels of compaction are being attained. A compacted 6-inch layer of flexible base material should suffice as a stabilized surface below the general concrete walking surface at the sports complex. The compacted flexible base should be placed on a 6-inch compacted subgrade. The flexible base material should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined ASTM D 698 at a moisture of -2% to +3% of the optimum moisture content. The subgrade material should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined ASTM D 698 at a moisture of 0% to +4% of the optimum moisture content Please let us know if you have questions or need further information. Thank you, Don R. Rokohl, P.E. Branch Manager Corpus Christi 9/29/25 Attachments Soil Modification Water Pressure Injection Guidelines Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 September 29, 2025 Memo No. 1 Project No.25.53.010 Report 35983 Page 3 of 5 ng SOIL MODIFICATION WATER/CHEMICAL PRESSURE INJECTION Guidelines GEOTECHNCIAL ENGINEERING STUDY MULTI-FAMLIY RESIDENTIAL DEVELOPMENT HUNTWICK AVENUE CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS TWE REPORT NO. 25.53.097 Purpose The purpose of these recommendations is to obtain a relatively uniform, moist, stable zone of soil beneath the proposed synthetic playing surfaces. Due to wide variation in quality of injection subcontractors, water/chemical pressure injection should not be used as a soil moistening technique unless a full-time laboratory inspector of Tolunay-Wong Engineers, Inc. is retained. Material 1. The slurry is to consist of clean fresh water/chemical and surfactant and shall be continuously agitated to ensure uniformity of mixture. 2. recommendations, but in no case should proportions be less than one part (undiluted) per 3,500gallons water. Application 1. Provide injection work after the subgrade has been under cut to the desired depths and prior to fill and synthetic surface placement. 2. Injection vehicle should have injection pipes spaced on 5-foot center, and each injection pipe should be capable of exerting a minimum penetration force of 10,000 pounds per square inch (psi). Force injection pipe into the soil; do not wash down by scouring action of fluid. Furnish track-mounted injection vehicle in order to traverse the ground under its own power, or if rubbered tire-mounted vehicle is used, provide a track-mounted machine where necessary to pull injection vehicle through mud. 3. Continue injection of fluid until refusal at all probes (i.e., until soil will not take any more and fluid is running freely on the surface, either out of previous injection holes or has fractured the ground in several places around refusal). If this occurs around any probe, cut this probe off so that water can be properly injected through the remaining probes until refusal occurs for all probes. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 September 29, 2025 Memo No. 1 Project No.25.53.010 Report 35983 Page 4 of 5 ng 4. Injection pipes should penetrate the soils in approximately 12-inch intervals, injecting to refusal at each interval to a total depth as required by contract. 5. Lower portion of injection pipe should consist of a hole pattern that will uniformly disperse fluid throughout the entire depth. Injection vehicle should be fitted with individual cutoff valves for each probe. As each 12-inch interval, each valve should be cutoff and on to assure that each probe is not blocked and that injection fluid is flowing. If one of two probes are blocked, cut the others off so that added pressure will clear out the blockage. 6. Do not exceed 5 feet on center each way for injection spacing. Each consecutive injection should be 5 feet in center and spaced 2-1/2 feet offset in two orthogonal directions from the previous injection. 7. Adjust injection pressures to inject the greatest quantity of fluid possible within a pressure range of 50 100 psi. in order to assure that pressure is within this specified range, equip each injection vehicle with a calibrated pressure gauge attached to the manifold (the pipe fitting on which the probe valves are attached). 8. Extend injection 5 feet outside the perimeter of the synthetic playing surface. 9. At a minimum, three water injections should be performed prior to testing. 10. The swell potential, moisture content, and other soil properties will be evaluate to determine acceptance of injected areas. The test results should be used to determine if additional water/chemical injections are required. 11. Repeat injections with water and surfactant 5 feet on center. Each consecutive water and surfactant injection should extend to a depth required by contract, injected as described above. 12. A minimum of 24 hours should elapse between each injection application in any one area to allow for moisture absorption. 13. Upon completion of the final pressure injection, compact the exposed surface to between 94 percent and 98 percent of the maximum dry density at a minimum of 3 % points above the optimum value. Observation and Testing 1. A full-time laboratory technician should be present throughout the injection operations. Undisturbed samples should be taken at one-foot intervals to the total depth injected from one test hole per 2,500 square feet of injected area. Adjustment in the testing program should be at the discretion of the geotechnical engineer of record. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 September 29, 2025 Memo No. 1 Project No.25.53.010 Report 35983 Page 5 of 5 ng 2. engineer (engineer of record) on the basis of laboratory tests on tube samples (not cutting) obtained from the borings. A minimum of two free swell tests should be performed per test hole. Samples will be tested at the approximate overburden pressure of the sample depth. The water/chemical pressure injections could be terminated when the results of the free swell tests extrapolated over the contracted injection depth indicate that post- construction movement will be limited to the magnitude agreed upon by the owner and the design/construction team. Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS – ADDENDUM 2 DIVISION / SECTION TITLE DIVISION 00 PREFACE DOCUMENTS 00 00 00 COVER SHEET 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 01 SEALS PAGE 00 01 02 LIST OF DRAWINGS DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 52 23 AGREEMENT (REV 12-2021) – Addendum 2 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS (REV 6-2021) 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (REV 4-2022) – Addendum 2 DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK (REV 10-2018) 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES (REV 5-2020) – Addendum 2 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT (REV 5-2020) 01 33 01 SUBMITTAL REGISTER (REV 10-2018) – Addendum 2 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES (REV 10-2018) 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS (REV 8-2019) 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS (REV 8-2019) 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Part T Technical Specifications 01 45 23 TESTING REQUIREMENTS 01 57 23 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 03 11 13.11 CONCRETE FORMS 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING 03 49 00 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 DIVISION / SECTION TITLE 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 63 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 16 00 SHEATHING 06 41 16 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 42 23 PLYWOOD INTERIOR PANELING 07 41 13.16 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 07 46 46.13 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 33 13 COILING COUNTER DOORS 08 71 11 DOOR HARDWARE 08 83 00 MIRRORS 08 91 19 FIXED LOUVERS 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD 09 65 13 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 91 00 PAINTING 10 14 16.13 PLAQUE DISPLAY STANDS 10 14 19 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 28 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 75 16 FLAGPOLES 11 68 33 BASEBALL–SOFTBALL FIELD EQUIPMENT 11 68 33.13 BASEBALL-SOFTBALL TEAM BENCHES 11 68 33.23 BASEBALL-SOFTBALL FIELD FENCE TOP PROTECTION 11 68 43 EXTERIOR SCOREBOARDS 12 36 23.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS 12 62 23 OUTDOOR PORTABLE BLEACHERS 13 31 33 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURE Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 DIVISION / SECTION TITLE 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 22 13.10 SITE GRADING 31 22 16.13 ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING 31 22 16.23 CHANNEL SHAPING 31 23 16.13 TRENCHING 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENT 32 01 13.61 SLURRY SEAL 32 01 13.62 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS 32 11 00 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 23 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 32 12 16.13 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 32 15 13.13 STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING 32 16 13.13 CURB AND GUTTER 32 16 23 SIDEWALKS 32 16 33 DRIVEWAYS 32 17 13 PRECAST CONCRETE PARKING BUMPERS 32 17 23.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 18 23 INFILLED SYNTHETIC TURF – Addendum 2 32 18 23.13 BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL RED INFIELD DIRT 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 31 32 COMPOSITE FENCES AND GATES 32 33 43.53 SITE TABLES 32 33 46 DECORATIVE CHAIN BARRIER 32 84 00 IRRIGATION 32 91 13 SOIL PREPARATION 32 92 13 HYDROSEEDING 32 93 03 LANDSCAPE PLANTING 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PIPING Table of Contents 00 01 00 - 4 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 1/2022 DIVISION / SECTION TITLE 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 31 13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 33 31 23 WASTEWATER UTILITY FORCE MAIN PIPING 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 30 STORMWATER STRUCTURES Appendix All Testing Reports as Applicable 1 APPENDIX 1 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT PROVIDED BY TOLUNAY WONG 2 APPENDIX 2 PONY BASEBALL FIELD DIMENSIONS AND DISTANCES 3 APPENDIX 3 PONY GIRLS FAST PITCH PLAYING FIELD DIMENSIONS AND DISTANCES 4 APPENDIX 4 TCEQ REPORT – USE OF RECLAIMED WATER 5 APPENDIX 5 MEMO ON WATER/ CHEMICAL PRESSURE INJECTION METHOD PROVIDED BY TOLUNAY WONG 6 APPENDIX 6 ENVIRONMENTAL ASBESTOS AND LEAD REPORT PROVIDED BY SITEX – Addendum 2 7 APPENDIX 7 RAS REVIEW REPORT PROVIDED BY JRG ACCESS ABILITY – Addendum 2 END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 00 52 23 AGREEMENT – ADDENDUM 2 This Agreement, for the Project awarded on , is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1 – WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Greenwood Sports Complex: Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 ARTICLE 2 – DESIGNER AND OWNER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Gignac Architects 416 Starr St Corpus Christi, Texas, 78401 nickgignac@gignac-associates.com 2.02 The Owner’s Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson 4917 Holly Rd., Bldg 5 Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 JosephJ@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 280 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed Agreement 00 52 23 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 310 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each, are as defined in Section 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner $400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 Total Base Bid Price $ ARTICLE 5 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.B, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner’s option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6 – INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. Agreement 00 52 23 - 4 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor’s safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. Agreement 00 52 23 - 5 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER’S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8 – ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor’s records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor’s fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 01 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor’s Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23 - 6 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10 – CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES (SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS) ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta City Secretary Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E Director of Engineering Services __________________________ AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL ___________________________ Assistant City Attorney ATTEST (IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Title: Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS – ADDENDUM 2 These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi, Texas Gignac & Associates, LLP York Engineering MS2 Consulting Engineers Munoz Engineering Adla inc. A. Paragraph 1.01.A.54 “Substantial Completion” is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. The following items are fully functional and suitable for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. A Certificate of Occupancy is required b. RAS Inspection must be completed All required inspections to be me ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR’S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor’s progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of 24 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 24 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. a. Geotechnical Reports include the following: Geotechnical Engineering Study, prepared by Tolunay Wong, dated March 11, 2025, 30 pages - The Contractor may rely on the following Technical Data provided in this document. Geotechnical Memo, prepared by Tolunay Wong, dated September 29th, 2025, 5 pages - The Contractor may rely on the following Technical Data provided in this document. 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: NONE Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. 1. Environmental Reports include the following: Environmental Asbestos and Lead Report, prepared by Sitex, dated October 15th, 2025, 30 pages 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to known Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site include the following: NONE B. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner. ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Broad Form 2. Premises – Operations 3. Underground Hazard 4. Products / Completed Operations 5. Contractual Liability 6 Independent Contractors 7. Personal & Advertising Injury $1,000,000 Per Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate Business Automobile Liability - Owned, Non- Owned, Rented and Leased $500,000 Combined Single Limit Workers’ Compensation Statutory Employer’s Liability $500,000/ 500,000/ 500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability Required if Contract Price > $5,000,000 $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Contractor’s Pollution Liability / Environmental Impairment Coverage $1,000,000 Per Claim ☐ Required x☐ Not Required Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 4 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 Not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation > 5 ft or asbestos present Builder’s Risk (All Perils including Collapse) Required for vertical structures and bridges Coverage limit shall be in the amount of the total cost of the project. x☐ Required ☐ Not Required Installation/Equipment Floater Required if installing city-owned equipment or storing contractor equipment on city- owned property Equal to Contract Price x☐ Required ☐ Not Required ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: The Contractor’s goal is to perform at least 30 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees. ARTICLE 14 – PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination (WD) No Construction Type Project Type TX21 Heavy Heavy Construction Projects (including Sewer and Water Line Construction and Drainage Projects) TX29 Highway Highway Construction Projects (excluding tunnels, building structures in rest area projects & railroad construction; bascule, suspension & spandrel arch bridges designed for commercial navigation, bridges involving marine construction; and other major bridges). TX33 Heavy Pipeline - On-Shore Pipeline Construction TX34 Heavy Pipeline - Off-Shore Construction Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 5 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) TX51 Heavy Dredging projects along the Texas gulf coast area including all public channels, harbors, rivers, tributaries and the Gulf Intracoastal Waterways. TX55 Heavy Tunnel Construction Projects (Bored, 48” In Diameter Or More) "General Decision Number: TX20250288 03/14/2025 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20240288 State: Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Aransas, Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(1). Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 6 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 ______________________________________________________________ |If the contract is entered |. Executive Order 14026 | |into on or after January 30, | generally applies to the | |2022, or the contract is | contract. | |renewed or extended (e.g., an |. The contractor must pay | |option is exercised) on or | all covered workers at | |after January 30, 2022: | least $17.75 per hour (or | | | the applicable wage rate | | | listed on this wage | | | determination, if it is | | | higher) for all hours | | | spent performing on the | | | contract in 2025. | |______________________________|_____________________________| |If the contract was awarded on|. Executive Order 13658 | |or between January 1, 2015 and| generally applies to the | |January 29, 2022, and the | contract. | |contract is not renewed or |. The contractor must pay all| |extended on or after January | covered workers at least | |30, 2022: | $13.30 per hour (or the | | | applicable wage rate listed| | | on this wage determination,| | | if it is higher) for all | | | hours spent performing on | | | that contract in 2025. | |______________________________|_____________________________| The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must still submit a Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 7 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2025 1 03/14/2025 * BOIL0074-003 01/01/2025 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 33.17 24.92 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0278-002 08/25/2024 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$ 30.80 8.97 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1) Tower Crane.............$ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 8 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 Crane 60 tons and above.....$ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under..............$ 32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0084-011 06/01/2024 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 28.26 8.13 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 ** 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 ** 0.00 INSULATOR - MECHANICAL (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 ** 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 22.16 5.26 LABORER: Common or General......$ 9.68 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick...$ 11.36 ** 0.00 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 9 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 LABORER: Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearoff...........$ 11.28 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 14.25 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................$ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill.................$ 16.22 ** 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift..............$ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................$ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic..............$ 17.52 ** 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete).........$ 16.03 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................$ 12.70 ** 0.00 PAINTER (Brush, Roller, and Spray)...........................$ 14.45 ** 0.00 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 10 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 PIPEFITTER.......................$ 25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$ 25.64 8.16 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 22.73 7.52 SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct Installation...........$ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 12.39 ** 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................$ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck.......$ 12.00 ** 4.11 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 11 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($17.75) or 13658 ($13.30). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Please also note that the minimum wage requirements of Executive Order 14026 are not currently being enforced as to any contract or subcontract to which the states of Texas, Louisiana, or Mississippi, including their agencies, are a party. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/government-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iii)). Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 12 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classifications and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the type(s) of construction and geographic area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order under rate identifiers indicating whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate), a survey rate, a weighted union average rate, a state adopted rate, or a supplemental classification rate. Union Rate Identifiers A four-letter identifier beginning with characters other than ""SU"", ""UAVG"", ?SA?, or ?SC? denotes that a union rate was prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2024. PLUM is an identifier of the union whose collectively bargained rate prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2024 in the example, is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all changes over time that are reported to WHD in the rates in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing the classification. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 13 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 Union Average Rate Identifiers The UAVG identifier indicates that no single rate prevailed for those classifications, but that 100% of the data reported for the classifications reflected union rates. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 01/01/2024. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the State of Ohio. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 01/01/2024 in the example, indicates the date the wage determination was updated to reflect the most current union average rate. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January, to reflect a weighted average of the current rates in the collective bargaining agreements on which the rate is based. Survey Rate Identifiers The ""SU"" identifier indicates that either a single non-union rate prevailed (as defined in 29 CFR 1.2) for this classification in the survey or that the rate was derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As a weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SUFL2022-007 6/27/2024. SU indicates the rate is a single non-union prevailing rate or a weighted average of survey data for that classification. FL indicates the State of Florida. 2022 is the year of the survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 14 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 6/27/2024 in the example, indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. ?SU? wage rates typically remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. However, the Wage and Hour Division (WHD) has the discretion to update such rates under 29 CFR 1.6(c)(1). State Adopted Rate Identifiers The ""SA"" identifier indicates that the classifications and prevailing wage rates set by a state (or local) government were adopted under 29 C.F.R 1.3(g)-(h). Example: SAME2023-007 01/03/2024. SA reflects that the rates are state adopted. ME refers to the State of Maine. 2023 is the year during which the state completed the survey on which the listed classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. The date, 01/03/2024 in the example, reflects the date on which the classifications and rates under the ?SA? identifier took effect under state law in the state from which the rates were adopted. ----------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: a) a survey underlying a wage determination b) an existing published wage determination c) an initial WHD letter setting forth a position on Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 15 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 a wage determination matter d) an initial conformance (additional classification and rate) determination On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be directed to the WHD Branch of Wage Surveys. Requests can be submitted via email to davisbaconinfo@dol.gov or by mail to: Branch of Wage Surveys Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 Regarding any other wage determination matter such as conformance decisions, requests for initial decisions should be directed to the WHD Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Requests can be submitted via email to BCWD-Office@dol.gov or by mail to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2) If an initial decision has been issued, then any interested party (those affected by the action) that disagrees with the decision can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Requests for review and reconsideration can be submitted via Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 16 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 email to dba.reconsideration@dol.gov or by mail to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION" ARTICLE 19 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES C. For the Contractor’s convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Gignac Architects 361-884-2661 Nick Gignac 361-884-2661 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 17 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 Water/ Wastewater/ Stormwater 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks & Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div. for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department (City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications (Network Operations Center) 1-888-632-0931 CenturyLink 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25 – SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Reference Specification Section 01 33 01 Submittal Registe SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00 - 18 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 3/2023 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: Hourly Rates Principal Architect: $ 260.00 Project Manager (Architect): $ 195.00 Project Construction Manager: $ 195.00 Construction Administrator: $ 145.00 Intern: $ 110.00 Administrative: $ 80.00 More than 2 submittals is considered excessive City will request reimbursement from Contractor at the rates listed above. ARTICLE 26 – RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: 1. Reference Specification Section 01 33 01 Submittal Register 2. Red lined As-Built Plas when project is complete SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 5/2020 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES – ADDENDUM 2 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate, and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. The Bid Items described as “Allowances” have been set as noted in the Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner’s discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES NONE Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 5/2020 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES 1. PROJECT 23170 WESTSIDE PONY BASEBALL A. Allowance A-F1 - UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS 1. The sum of$150,000 to be used for Unforeseen Conditions. B. Allowance A-F2 - MISCELLANEOUS ASPHALT PATCHING 1. The sum of $7,000 to be used for the purchase of Miscellaneous Asphalt Patching. C. Allowance A-F3 – PATCHING REPAIR OF BUILDING EAVES/SOFFITS/FASCIA 1. The sum of $3,000 to be used for the purchase of Patching Repair of Building Eaves/Soffits/Fascia. D. Allowance A-F4 – SPORTS LIGHTING LAMP REPLACEMENT 1. The sum of $4,000 to be used for the purchase of Sports Lighting Lamp Replacement. 2. PROJECT 23171 UNIVERSAL LEAGUE YOUTH BASEBALL A. Allowance B-D1 - UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS 1. The sum of $70,000 to be used for Unforeseen Conditions. B. Allowance B-D2 – PATCHING REPAIR OF BUILDING EAVES/SOFFITS/FASCIA 1. The sum of $3,000 to be used for the purchase of Patching Repair of Building Eaves/Soffits/Fascia. C. Allowance B-D3 – IRRIGATION REPAIR BUDGET The sum of $7,500 to be used for the repair of the irrigation system. D. Allowance B-D4 – SPORTS LIGHTING LAMP REPLACEMENT 1. The sum of $4,000 to be used for the purchase of Sports Lighting Lamp Replacement. 3. PROJECT 23172 SPARKLING CITY SOFTBALL A. Allowance C-E1 - UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS 1. The sum of $70,000 to be used for Unforeseen Conditions. B. Allowance C-E2 – PATCHING REPAIR OF BUILDING EAVES/SOFFITS/FASCIA 1. The sum of $3,000 to be used for the purchase of Patching Repair of Building Eaves/Soffits/Fascia. C. Allowance C-E3 – SPORTS LIGHTING LAMP REPLACEMENT 1. The sum of $8,000 to be used for the purchase of Sports Lighting Lamp Replacement. D. Allowance C-E4 – SINK HOLE/ PLUMBING REPAIRS The sum of $8,000 to be used for the Sink Hole and Plumbing Repairs. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 Rev 5/2020 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01 33 01 Submittal Register - Addendum 2 Product Information Sample or Mockup Operations Data 014523 TESTING REQUIREMENTS 2.01.A Record Data 014523 TESTING REQUIREMENTS 2.01.B Record Data 015723 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 1.03.A Sample 015723 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 1.03.B Shop Drawing 024119 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 2.0 Record Data 031113.11 CONCRETE FORMS 1.03.A Record Data 032111 REINFORCING STEEL 1.04.A Record Data 032111 REINFORCING STEEL 1.04.B Record Data 033111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.04.A Record Data 033511 CONCRETE FINISHING 1.04.A Record Data 033911 CONCRETE CURING 1.04.A Record Data 034900 GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 1.2.A Record Data 034900 GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 1.2.B Shop Drawing 034900 GLASS-FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE 1.2.C Sample 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1.3.A Record Data 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1.3.B Shop Drawing 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1.3.C Sample 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY 1.3.A Record Data 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY 1.3.C Shop Drawing 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY 1.3.D Sample 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.4.A Record Data 061063 EXTERIOR ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.1.A Record Data 061600 SHEATHING 1.3.A Record Data 064116 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.3.A Record Data 064116 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.3.B Shop Drawing 064116 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.3.C Sample 064223 PLYWOOD INTERIOR PANELING 1.2.A Record Data 074113.16 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 1.3.A Record Data 074113.16 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 1.3.B Shop Drawing 074113.16 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 1.3.C Sample 074646.13 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 1.4.A Record Data 074646.13 FIBER CEMENT SIDING 1.4.B Sample 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.4.A Record Data 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.4.B Shop Drawing 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.4.C Sample 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.3.A Record Data 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.3.B Shop Drawing 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.3.C Record Data 083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 1.3.A Record Data 083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 1.3.B Shop Drawing 083313 COILING COUNTER DOORS 1.3.C Sample 087111 DOOR HARDWARE 1.3.A Record Data 087111 DOOR HARDWARE 1.3.B Record Data 088300 MIRRORS 1.3.A Record Data 088300 MIRRORS 1.3.B Shop Drawing 088300 MIRRORS 1.3.C Sample 089119 FIXED LOUVERS 1.4.A Record Data 089119 FIXED LOUVERS 1.4.B Shop Drawing 089119 FIXED LOUVERS 1.4.C Sample 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 1.3.A Record Data 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.3.A Record Data 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.3.B Sample 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.3.C Record Data Paragraph No. Specification Section Specification Description Types of Submittals Required Submittal Register Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 01 33 01-1 10/2018 01 33 01 Submittal Register Product Information Sample or Mockup Operations Data Paragraph No. Specification Section Specification Description Types of Submittals Required 099100 PAINTING 1.4.A Record Data 099100 PAINTING 1.4.B Sample 101416.13 PLAQUE DISPLAY STANDS 1.3.A Record Data 101416.13 PLAQUE DISPLAY STANDS 1.4.B Shop Drawing 101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 1.4.A Record Data 101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 1.4.B Shop Drawing 101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 1.4.C Sample 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 1.2.A Record Data 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 1.2.B Shop Drawing 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 1.2.C Sample 10 14 23.13 PANEL SIGNAGE 1.2.D Record Data 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1.3.A Record Data 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1.3.B Shop Drawing 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1.3.C Sample 102613 CORNER GUARDS 1.3.A Record Data 102613 CORNER GUARDS 1.3.B Sample 102813 TOILET ACCESSORIES 1.3.A Record Data 102800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1.3.A Record Data 102800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1.3.B Sample 102800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1.3.C Record Data 107516 FLAGPOLES 1.4.A Record Data 107516 FLAGPOLES 1.4.B Shop Drawing 107516 FLAGPOLES 1.4.C Record Data 107516 FLAGPOLES 1.4.D Sample 116833 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL FIELD EQUIPMENT 1.4.A Record Data 116833 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL FIELD EQUIPMENT 1.4.B Shop Drawing 116833.13 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL TEAM BENCHES 1.4.A Record Data 116833.13 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL TEAM BENCHES 1.4.B Shop Drawing 116833.23 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL FENCE TOP PROTECTION 1.4.A Record Data 116833.23 BASEBALL/SOFTBALL FENCE TOP PROTECTION 1.4.B Shop Drawing 116843 EXTERIOR SCOREBOARDS 1.04.A Record Data 116843 EXTERIOR SCOREBOARDS 1.04.B Shop Drawing 123623.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1.2A Record Data 123623.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1.2B Shop Drawing 123623.13 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD COUNTERTOPS 1.2C Sample 126223 OUTDOOR PORTABLE BLEACHERS 1.3.A Record Data 126223 OUTDOOR PORTABLE BLEACHERS 1.3.B Shop Drawing 126223 OUTDOOR PORTABLE BLEACHERS 1.3.C Sample 133133 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES 1.3.A Record Data 133133 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES 1.3.B Record Data 133133 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES 1.3.C Sample 312213.10 SITE GRADING 1.03.A Record Data 3122316.23 CHANNEL SHAPING 1.03.A Record Data 312316.13 TRENCHING 1.03.A Record Data 312316.13 TRENCHING 1.03.B Shop Drawing 312413.10 EMBANKMENT 1.04.A Record Data 320113.61 SLURRY SEAL 1.03.A Record Data 320113.62 ASPHALT SURFACE TREATMENTS 1.03.A Record Data 321100 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 1.03.A Record Data 321100 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 1.03.B Record Data 321113.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 1.03.A Record Data 321113.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 1.03.B Record Data 321113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 1.03.A Record Data 321113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 1.03.B Record Data Submittal Register Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 01 33 01 Submittal Register Product Information Sample or Mockup Operations Data Paragraph No. Specification Section Specification Description Types of Submittals Required 311123 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 1.04.A Record Data 311123 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 1.04.B Record Data 311213.19 PRIME COAT 1.03.A Record Data 311213.19 PRIME COAT 1.03.B Record Data 311213.19 PRIME COAT 1.03.C Record Data 321216.13 PLANT MIX ASPHALT PAVING 1.04.A Record Data 321216.13 PLANT MIX ASPHALT PAVING 1.04.B Record Data 323343.53 CONCRETE PAVING 1.03.A Record Data 321513.13 STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING 1.5.A Record Data 321513.13 STABILIZED DECOMPOSED GRANITE SURFACING 1.5.A Sample 321613.13 CURB & GUTTER 1.03.A Record Data 321623 SIDEWALKS 1.04.A Record Data 321633 DRIVEWAYS 1.03.A Record Data 321723.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 1.03.A Record Data 321823 INFILLED SYNTHETIC TURF 1.4.A Sample 321823 INFILLED SYNTHETIC TURF 1.4.B Record Data 321823.13 BASEBALL AND SOFTBALL RED INFIELD DIRT 1.3.A Sample 323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1.4.A Record Data 323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1.4.B Shop Drawing 323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1.4.C Sample 323343.53 SITE TABLES 1.2.A Record Data 323323 SITE TRASH RECEPTACLES 1.2.B Sample 323346 DECORATIVE CHAIN BARRIER 1.3.A Record Data 323346 DECORATIVE CHAIN BARRIER 1.3.B Shop Drawing 328400 IRRIGATION 1.5.A Record Data 328400 IRRIGATION 1.5.B Record Data 328400 IRRIGATION 1.5.C Shop Drawing 329113 SOIL PREPARATION 1.4.A Sample 329303 LANDSCAPE PLANTING 1.4.A Record Data 334211 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 1.4.B Record Data 334230 STORMWATER STRUCTURES 1.04.A Record Data 334230 STORMWATER STRUCTURES 1.04.A Sample Submittal Register Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 01 33 01-3 10/2018 INFILLED SYNTHETIC TURF 321823 - 1 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 SECTION 321823 - INFILLED SYNTHETIC TURF – Addendum 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK A. Furnishing all labor, materials and equipment needed to install the infilled synthetic turf material as shown on the plans and as specified herein. A complete installation includes the acceptance of sub-base and coordination with all trades to ensure a complete and timely installation. All these materials need to be in accordance with all approved shop drawings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Meet all ASTM requirements. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 2000 Earthwork 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a 9”x12” sample of the turf product to be used. B. Submit a list with a minimum of 10 fields using the turf product to be used in this project. C. Submit alternate products to Engineer for approval prior to bidding in accordance with Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to manufacturing and shall contain information regarding the following: 1. Field Layout: a. Field marking plan and details for the specified sport, roll, seaming layouts and attachment methods. 2. Product Data: a. Submit material safety sheets preparation and installation instructions and recommendations. b. Submit fiber manufacturer’s type and composition. c. Submit manufacturer’s certification to ensure products and materials comply with specifications. d. Submit test results indicating compliance with ASTM standards. 1.6 INSTALLERS EXPERIENCE A. The turf installer shall have done at least 5 acceptable installation of a Baseball and Softball Fields in the US within the past 5yrs. Installer shall provide a list of projects with Owner information including phone number. B. Turf contractors shall have at least 6-year experience installing this type of turf material. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Maintenance manuals shall be provided by turf contractor prior to accepting the field. 1.8 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 7700 Closeout Procedures. B. The contractor shall provide an 8yr warranty to the Owner covering defects in material and workmanship. C. The manufacturer’s warranty shall include wear and damage caused from UV degradation. D. The warranty shall be fully third-party insured with an aggregate liability coverage of $1,000,000. E. Contractor must provide a sample copy of insured, non-prorated warranty and insurance policy information. F. Warranty shall become effective the day the substantial completion certificate has been signed by the Owner and Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved turf system manufacturers are as follows: 1. AstroTurf 2. Field Turf 3. Hellas 4. Shaw 5. Sporturf 6. Sprinturf B. Approved base builders: INFILLED SYNTHETIC TURF 321823 - 2 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 1. Fielder’s Choice 2. Hellas 3. Mid-Valley Paving 4. Paragon 5. Symmetry 2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Equipment: 1. Synthetic Turf Groomer: Contractor shall furnish a sweeper/groomer 920 SDE or approved equivalent. 2. Contractor to include (5) additional synthetic turf base mount, home base and bases cutouts per field. B. Contractor/installer must make sure the infield turf meets the following characteristics: Standard Property Characteristic ASTM D5848 Pile Weight 40-46 oz/sq.yd. ASTM D5823 Pile Height minimum 2 1/8” ASTM D Total Weight 69-87 oz/sq.yd ASTM D1907 Yarn Denier 10,800 ASTM D1335 Tuft Bind >10 lbs ASTM D5848 Primary Backing Weight 7-8 oz/sq.yd ASTM D5848 Secondary Coating Weight 20 - 26 oz/sq.yd ASTM F1936 Gmax 100 @ installation <160 over warranty life ASTM D5034-D1682 Grab Tear Strength >300 lbs ASTM D4491 Permeability >40 in/hr Fabric Width 15’ ASTM D5793 Tuft Gauge 3/8” Fiber C8 Resin low friction and UV-resistant Yarn Structure Monofilament * All characteristics listed above are nominal 3% +/-. C. Contractor/installer must verify all measurements. D. Synthetic Glue Material: 1. Contractor shall only use adhesive products that are suitable for the installation of turf systems per the adhesive manufacturer. E. Infill Material: 1. The synthetic infill material shall be a combination of graded sand and ambient rubber materials. Rubber-SBR (Styrene butadiene rubber) Free of any steel material Mesh Size % Retained No. 10 0-15 No. 12 15-30 No. 16 40-70 No. 30 0-10 No. 40 0-1 Sand (Roundness .06+, Density 90-95lbs/CF, Angle of Response <30d) Mesh Size % Retained No. 8 0-15 No. 16 15-30 INFILLED SYNTHETIC TURF 321823 - 3 Greenwood Sports Complex – Westside Pony Baseball 23170 Universal League Youth Baseball 23171 Sparkling City Softball 23172 No. 20 40-70 No. 30 0-10 No. 50 0-1 No. 100 99-100 No. 200 100 * Total minimum weight = 3lb/sf of rubber infill material 2.3 GMAX INFORMATION A. Gmax turf installer shall provide all data providing that the required Gmax’s shock attenuation has been met. B. If at any point during the 8-year warranty period the field is G-Max tested and does not meet the specified requirements, the turf contractor and/or manufacturer shall reimburse the owner for the test cost and shall make the necessary improvements to the field to bring into the specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD MARKINGS A. Field Markings shall be installed in accordance with approved project shop drawings. 3.2 GENERAL A. The installation of the synthetic turf system shall be completed in full compliance with approved shop drawings. B. The turf project supervisor must be present during all construction activity, including testing. C. Only trained technicians under direct supervision of the turf project supervisor shall perform any sewing, gluing or cutting operations. D. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid disturbing the sub-base when installing the synthetic turf rolls. E. Infill materials shall be applied in numerous thin lifts. The turf shall be brushed as the mixture is applied. Infill material shall be placed to a depth determined by the manufacturer. 3.3 SITE INSPECTION A. Prior to commencing the installation, the contractor/installer of the synthetic turf shall inspect the sub-base for the purpose of determining the acceptability of the surface. B. The acceptance of the sub-base includes a very detailed planarity check. Contractor/installer shall use a laser level as a tool for the planarity check and shall correct any deviations to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.4 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, contractor/installer must inspect the sub-base for tolerance to grade. B. Sub-base shall also be inspected and accepted by the Engineer. C. The Engineer shall not approve the sub-base until a survey has been provided meeting all requirements. 3.5 CLEAN UP A. Labor, supplies and equipment shall be provided by Contractor as needed for final cleaning of all installed items. B. After turf installation is complete, all surfaces and site, including track surfaces, shall be clean throughout the project. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Contractor/installer shall complete all required installation of the synthetic turf in accordance with the published project schedule. END OF SECTION - 321823 HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 Environmental Inspection Report October 15, 2025 GREENWOOD SPORTS COMPLEX 3801 GREENWOOD DRIVE CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS Prepared for: GIGNAC ARCHITECTS Prepared by: SITEX, INC. 5233 IH 37 SUITE A3 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXAS 78408 (361)887-9400 SITEX PROJECT NUMBER: 23344 APPENDIX 6 HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 October 15, 2025 Ms. Sofia Gignac Project Manager Gignac Architects 416 Starr Street Corpus Christi, TX 78401 RE: Limited Environmental Inspection Greenwood Sports Complex 3801 Greenwood Drive Corpus Christi, TX 78416 Sitex Project Number: 23344 Dear Ms. Gignac: Enclosed is the report for the environmental inspection performed at 3801 Greenfield Drive in Corpus Christi, TX. The inspection was performed on September 9, 2025, by Mr. Frank Medina of Sitex, Inc. Mr. Medina is licensed as an Asbestos Inspector (60-3185) by the Texas Department of State Health Services. SCOPE OF WORK The scope of this project was limited to suspect asbestos materials and lead-containing paint films associated with designated building structures at the above reference property. Nineteen (19) samples of suspect asbestos ma- terials and five (5) samples of suspect lead-containing paint were collected. Asbestos Result Summary Suspect asbestos-containing materials (ACM) were collected according to protocol established by the Texas As- bestos Health Protection Rules (TAHPR) §296.191(a)(2) for building demolitions and renovations. During the in- spection, sampled materials were assigned a sample number and a homogenous area number. Samples were collected of each area and the friability and condition of the suspect material was assessed. The State of Texas defines asbestos-containing materials as having greater than one percent (>1%) asbestos con- tent. No asbestos was detected in any of the samples collected. Lead in Paint Result Summary Paint sampling was conducted in accordance with commonly accepted commercial and professional standard practices for similar assignments. The intent of the project was to identify painted surfaces that may contain HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 elevated levels of lead. Visually discernable painted surface coatings associated with the above-referenced build- ing were sampled for lead content. The State of Texas defines lead-based paint as having ≥ 1.0 mg/cm as measured by XRF or laboratory analysis, or ≥ 5000 parts per million (ppm) lead, ≥ 0.5% lead by weight, or ≥ 5000 mg/kg concentration, as measured by labor- atory analysis. All samples collected were below the regulatory limit for being considered lead containing paint. Sampled Materials Data Tables I and II contain the homogenous area numbers, material types, material descriptions, material locations, condition assessments, and a summary of the analytical results for asbestos. A list of definitions can be found following the text of this report. Table III associates homogenous paint descriptions, locations, and a summary of the analytical results. The complete laboratory analytical results for asbestos and paint film samples are listed in separate laboratory documents following the text of this report. ANALYTICAL METHODS Asbestos and lead analyses were performed at SanAir Technologies Laboratories Inc. laboratory in North Chester- field, VA. SanAir is an American Industrial Hygiene Association participant laboratory (#162952), a National Insti- tute of Standards and Technology NVLAP-accredited laboratory (#200870), and licensed by the Texas Department of State Health Services (#30-0440) for asbestos laboratory analysis. Polarized light microscopy (PLM) lab analyses of asbestos samples was performed using standard oil immersion and optical staining techniques, in accordance with EPA 600/R-93/116 protocol. Lead-based paint film lab analyses were performed via EPA Method SW- 846/M3050B/7000B, using flame atomic absorption spectrophotometry. LIMITATIONS This sampling report does not guarantee that additional asbestos-containing materials are not present. The scope of this project was limited to the materials sampled within this report. Areas such as, but not limited to, beneath existing flooring, inside walls, inside doors, interior of ductwork, interior of mechanical or other equipment, inte- rior of piping flanges/valves, interior of electrical components, behind all non-movable finish materials, and all other portions of the building not designated in the Scope of Work were specifically excluded and not sampled for the presence of asbestos. This sampling report likewise does not guarantee that additional lead-containing paint is not present in the build- ing. The scope of this project was limited to the paint films sampled within this report. The following analytical results pertain to only the samples analyzed and may not reflect the actual composition of the entire homogeneous area. Sitex, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any subsequent use or interpretations HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 of these analytical results. This report must not be used to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any other state or federal government agency. Please call us if you have any questions regarding this inspection report. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you. Sincerely, Stacy Kraatz Asbestos Consultant (#10-5874) South Texas Regional Manager Sitex, Inc. Frank Medina Asbestos Inspector (#60-3185) Sitex, Inc. HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 List of Asbestos Definitions Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM) - any material containing more than one percent asbestos (chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite asbestos). Demolition - the wrecking or taking out of any load-supporting structure member and any related razing, remov- ing, or stripping of asbestos products. Disturbance - contact which releases fibers from ACM or debris containing ACM including activities which that disrupts the matrix of ACM, render ACM friable, or generate visible debris. Encapsulation - a method of control of asbestos fibers in which the surface of ACM is penetrated by or covered with a liquid coating prepared for that purpose. Enclosure - the construction of an airtight, impermeable, semi-permanent barrier surrounding asbestos to prevent the release of asbestos fibers into the air. Fiber - a particulate form of asbestos, 5 micrometers or longer, with a length-to diameter ratio of at least 3 to 1. Friable Materials - any material that when dry can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pres- sure. Homogeneous Area - an area of surfacing material or thermal system that is uniform in color and texture. Intact - means that the ACM has not crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise deteriorated so that it is no longer likely to be bound with its matrix. Removal - all operations where ACM is taken out or stripped from structures or substrates, and includes demoli- tion operations. Renovation - the modifying of any existing structure, or portion thereof. Repair - overhauling, rebuilding, reconstructing, or reconditioning of structures or substrates, including encapsu- lation or other repair of ACM attached to structures or substrates. HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 Table I – Asbestos Sample Materials Summary HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 TABLE I – ASBESTOS SAMPLE MATERIALS SUMMARY 3801 Greenfield Drive Corpus Christi, TX 78416 H.A.* MATERIAL NAME MATERIAL DESCRIPTION MATERIAL LOCATION CONDITION FRIABLE ASBESTOS- CONTAINING MATERIAL 1 Joint Compound Dried White Gypsum Mud Westside Pony Concession Walls and Ceiling Good Yes No 2 Drywall White Chalky Gypsum Board Westside Pony Concession Walls and Ceiling Good Yes No 3 Cove Bass Mastic Yellow Adhesive Westside Pony Concession Be- hind Vinyl Baseboards Good No No 4 Roofing Material Shingle Westside Pony Concession Good No No 5 Joint Compound Dried White Gypsum Mud Sparkling City Concession Walls and Ceiling Good Yes NA (not submitted) 6 Drywall White Chalky Gypsum Board Sparkling City Concession Walls and Ceiling Good Yes No * Homogeneous Area HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 Table II – Asbestos Sample Locations / Homogenous Area Association HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 TABLE II: ASBESTOS SAMPLE NUMBER ⇔ HOMOGENEOUS AREA 3801 Greenwood Drive, Corpus Christi, TX 78416 SAMPLE # H.A.* SAMPLE LOCATION 1 1 Southwest Corner 2 1 Southeast Corner 3 1 Northwest Corner 4 2 Southwest Corner 5 2 Southeast Corner 6 2 Northwest Corner 7 1 Stairwell 8 1 Upstairs Press Box 9 3 Upstairs Press Box 10 3 Restroom 11 3 Press box 12 4 Roof 13 4 Roof 14 5 Concession Area 15 5 Concession Area 16 5 Concession Area 17 6 Concession Area 18 6 Concession Area 19 6 Concession Area * Homogeneous Area HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 Table III – Lead in Paint Sample Summary HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 TABLE III – PAINT FILM SAMPLE SUMMARY 3801 Greenwood Drive, Corpus Christi, TX 78416 SAMPLE # PAINT COLOR LAYER DESCRIPTION SAMPLE LOCATION ANALYSIS SUMMARY ug/kg ANALYSIS SUMMARY % by weight LEAD BASED PAINT P1 Gray Exterior 2nd Floor Wall <91.8 <0.009 No P2 White Interior 1st Floor Wall <86.1 <0.009 No P3 White Exterior Wall <90.4 <0.009 No P4 White Exterior Wall <88.7 <0.009 No P5 White Exterior Wall <88.5 <0.009 No EPA, HUD, and Texas Standards for paint being considered lead-containing are: 1.0 mg/cm²-X-ray fluorescence (XRF); ≥ 5000 parts per million (ppm); ≥ 5000 mg/kg concentration; ≥ 0.5% by weight HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 Asbestos and Paint Sample Location Diagrams HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 Asbestos Polarized Light Microscopy Laboratory Analytical Results SanAir ID#: 25068490 Project #: 23344 Project Name: Greenwood Sports Complex Report Date: 10/15/2025 Analysis Report prepared for SITEX Inc. Page 1 of 7 Dear Frank Medina, We at SanAir would like to thank you for the work you recently submitted. The 19 sample(s) were received on Friday, October 10, 2025 via FedEx. The final report(s) is enclosed for the following sample(s): 23344-1, 23344-2, 23344-3, 23344-4, 23344-5, 23344-6, 23344-7, 23344-8, 23344-9, 23344-10, 23344-11, 23344-12, 23344-13, 23344-17, 23344-18, 23344-19. The following sample(s) were unusable and were not tested: 23344-14, 23344-15, 23344-16 These results only pertain to this job and should not be used in the interpretation of any other job. This report is only complete in its entirety. Refer to the listing below of the pages included in a complete final report. Sincerely, Sandra Sobrino Asbestos & Materials Laboratory Manager SanAir Technologies Laboratory Final Report Includes: - Cover Letter - Analysis Pages - Disclaimers and Additional Information Sample conditions: - 2 samples in Discrepancy w/ COC condition. (#7, #8) - 14 samples in Good condition. - 3 samples in Sample Not Received condition. (#14, #15, #16) 10501 Trade Ct., N. Chesterfield, VA 23236 | 804.897.1177 | Fax: 804.897.0070 | www.SanAir.com | LabReports@SanAir.com 23344Project Number: P.O. Number: Project Name:Greenwood Sports Complex 10/9/2025Collected Date: 10/10/2025 10:05:00 AMReceived Date: 10/15/2025 12:04:07 PM 25068490 SanAir ID Number FINAL REPORT SITEX Inc.Name: Address:1525 S. Broadway St. Louis, MO 63104 713-782-4411Phone: Page 2 of 7 Analyst: Pisula, Nicholas Asbestos Bulk PLM EPA 600/R-93/116 Stereoscopic Components SanAir ID / Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-fibrous Asbestos Fibers 23344-1 / 25068490-001 Joint Compound - Westside Pony Concession White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 100% Other None Detected 23344-2 / 25068490-002 Joint Compound - Westside Pony Concession White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 100% Other None Detected 23344-3 / 25068490-003 Joint Compound - Westside Pony Concession White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 100% Other None Detected 23344-4 / 25068490-004 Sheetrock - Westside Pony Concession White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 2% Cellulose 98% Other None Detected 23344-5 / 25068490-005 Sheetrock - Westside Pony Concession White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 2% Cellulose 98% Other None Detected 23344-6 / 25068490-006 Sheetrock - Westside Pony Concession White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 2% Cellulose 98% Other None Detected 23344-7 / 25068490-007 Joint Compound - Stairwell, Drywall White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 100% Other None Detected 23344-8 / 25068490-008 Joint Compound - 2nd Floor, Drywall White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 100% Other None Detected 23344-9 / 25068490-009 Covebase Mastic - Concession Area Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 2% Cellulose 98% Other None Detected 23344-10 / 25068490-010 Covebase Mastic - Restroom Grey Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 3% Cellulose 2% Synthetic 95% Other None Detected Analyst: Analysis Date:10/15/2025 Date:10/15/2025 Approved Signatory: 10501 Trade Ct., N. Chesterfield, VA 23236 | 804.897.1177 | Fax: 804.897.0070 | www.SanAir.com | LabReports@SanAir.com 23344Project Number: P.O. Number: Project Name:Greenwood Sports Complex 10/9/2025Collected Date: 10/10/2025 10:05:00 AMReceived Date: 10/15/2025 12:04:07 PM 25068490 SanAir ID Number FINAL REPORT SITEX Inc.Name: Address:1525 S. Broadway St. Louis, MO 63104 713-782-4411Phone: Page 3 of 7 Analyst: Pisula, Nicholas Asbestos Bulk PLM EPA 600/R-93/116 Stereoscopic Components SanAir ID / Description Appearance % Fibrous % Non-fibrous Asbestos Fibers 23344-11 / 25068490-011 Covebase Mastic - 2nd Floor Tan Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 3% Cellulose 97% Other None Detected 23344-12 / 25068490-012 Roofing Shingle - Roof Black Non-Fibrous Heterogeneous 3% Glass 97% Other None Detected 23344-13 / 25068490-013 Roofing Tar Paper - Roof Black Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 3% Cellulose 97% Other None Detected 23344-14 / 25068490-014 Joint Compound - Sparkling City Concession Not Submitted 23344-15 / 25068490-015 Joint Compound - Sparkling City Concession Not Submitted 23344-16 / 25068490-016 Joint Compound - Sparkling City Concession Not Submitted 23344-17 / 25068490-017 Sheetrock - Sparkling City Concession White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 100% Other None Detected 23344-18 / 25068490-018 Sheetrock - Sparkling City Concession White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 100% Other None Detected 23344-19 / 25068490-019 Sheetrock - Sparkling City Concession White Non-Fibrous Homogeneous 100% Other None Detected Analyst: Analysis Date:10/15/2025 Date:10/15/2025 Approved Signatory: 10501 Trade Ct., N. Chesterfield, VA 23236 | 804.897.1177 | Fax: 804.897.0070 | www.SanAir.com | LabReports@SanAir.com 23344Project Number: P.O. Number: Project Name:Greenwood Sports Complex 10/9/2025Collected Date: 10/10/2025 10:05:00 AMReceived Date: 10/15/2025 12:04:07 PM 25068490 SanAir ID Number FINAL REPORT SITEX Inc.Name: Address:1525 S. Broadway St. Louis, MO 63104 713-782-4411Phone: Page 4 of 7 Disclaimer and Additional Information: Asbestos Bulk PLM EPA 600/R-93/116 This report is the sole property of the client named on the chain-of-custody (COC) submitted to SanAir Technologies Laboratory, Inc. (SanAir). Results in the report are confidential information intended only for the use by the customer listed on the COC. Neither results nor reports will be discussed with or released to any third party without our client's written permission. The final report shall not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval of the laboratory to assure that parts of the report are not taken out of context. This report and any information contained within shall not be edited, altered, or modified in any way by any persons or agencies receiving, viewing, distributing, or otherwise possessing a copy of this final report. The laboratory reserves the right to perform amendments to any finalized report, of which shall supersede and make obsolete any previous editions. Such changes, modifications, additions, or deletions shall be effective immediately upon notice thereof, which may be given by means including but not limited to posting on the SanAir client portal website, electronic or conventional mail, or by any other means. The information provided in this report applies only to the samples submitted and is relevant only for the date, time, and location of sampling. The accuracy of the results is dependent upon the client’s sampling procedure and information provided to the laboratory by the client on the COC. SanAir assumes no responsibility for the sampling procedure and will provide evaluation reports based solely on the sample(s) in the condition received at the laboratory and information provided by the client on the COC, such as: project number, project name, collection dates, P.O. number, special instructions, samples collected by, sample numbers, sample identifications, sample type, selected analysis type, flow rate, total volume or area, and start-stop times that may affect the validity of the results in this report. Samples were received in good condition unless otherwise noted on the report. When the client requires samples to be tested that deviates from a specific method or condition, all reported results may be affected by the deviation. SanAir assumes no responsibility or liability for the manner in which the results are used or interpreted. This report does not constitute nor shall not be used by the client to claim product, process, system, or person certification, approval, or endorsement by NVLAP, NIST, NELAC, AIHA LAP, LLC or any other U.S. governmental agencies; all or somet tests contained in this report may not be accredited by every local, state, and federal regulatory agencies. Refer to the SanAir website at www.sanair.com for copies of current certificates and scopes of various accreditations, certifications, and licenses or contact the laboratory for inquiries regarding the status or scope of an accreditation or certification. Samples are held for a period of 60 days. Fibers smaller than 5 microns cannot be seen with this method due to scope limitations. For NY state samples, method EPA 600/M4-82-020 is performed. NYELAP Disclaimer: Polarized-light microscopy is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor covering and similar non-friable organically bound materials. Quantitative transmission electron microscopy is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non-asbestos containing. Asbestos Accreditations, Certifications, and Licenses National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) Lab Code 200870-0 City of Philadelphia Department of Public Health Air Management Services, Certification#ALL-460 Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection Number 68-05397 California State Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program Certificate Number 2915 Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment Registration Number AL-23143 Connecticut Department of Public Health Environmental Laboratory Registration Number PH-0105 Massachusetts Department of Labor Standards Asbestos Analytical Services License Number: AA000222 State of Maine Department of Environmental Protection License Number: LB-0075 New York State Department of Health Laboratory ID: 11983 State of Rhode Island Department of Health Certification No.: PLM00126 Texas Department of State Health Services License Number: 300440 Commonwealth of Virginia Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation Number: 3333000323 State of Washington Department of Ecology Laboratory ID: C989 State of West Virginia Bureau for Public Health Analytical Laboratory Number: LT000616 Vermont Department of Health License Number: Asb-Co-An-000006 Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality AI Number 212253, LELAP Lab ID #05088 Revision#03, 10/3/2024 Page 5 of 7 Page 6 of 7 Page 7 of 7 HOUSTON • CORPUS CHRISTI CORPUS CHRISTI OFFICE: 5233 IH 37 Suite A3 • Corpus Christi, Texas 78408 • Phone 361-887-9400 Lead in Paint Laboratory Analytical Results SanAir ID#: 25068487 Project #: 23344 Project Name: Greenwood Sports Complex Report Date: 10/15/2025 Analysis Report prepared for SITEX Inc. Page 1 of 5 Dear Frank Medina, We at SanAir would like to thank you for the work you recently submitted. The 5 sample(s) were received on Friday, October 10, 2025 via FedEx. The final report(s) is enclosed for the following sample(s): 23344-P1, 23344-P2, 23344- P3, 23344-P4, 23344-P5. These results only pertain to this job and should not be used in the interpretation of any other job. This report is only complete in its entirety. Refer to the listing below of the pages included in a complete final report. Sincerely, Abisola Kasali Metals Laboratory Director SanAir Technologies Laboratory Final Report Includes: - Cover Letter - Chemistry Analysis - Disclaimers and Additional Information Sample conditions: - 5 samples in Good condition. 10501 Trade Ct., N. Chesterfield, VA 23236 | 804.897.1177 | Fax: 804.897.0070 | www.SanAir.com | LabReports@SanAir.com 23344Project Number: P.O. Number: Project Name:Greenwood Sports Complex 10/9/2025Collected Date: 10/10/2025 10:05:00 AMReceived Date: 10/15/2025 12:41:23 PM 25068487 SanAir ID Number FINAL REPORT SITEX Inc.Name: Address:1525 S. Broadway St. Louis, MO 63104 713-782-4411Phone: Page 2 of 5 Analyst: Templeton, Kat Test Method: SW846/M3050B/7000B Lead Paint Analysis PAINT µg Pb Sample Size Calculated Sample Sample Sample Description In Sample (grams)RL Results Results 25068487 - 1 23344-P1 < 10 0.1089 91.8 <91.8 <0.009 % Westside Pony Baseball - 2nd Floor µg/g (ppm) By Weight 25068487 - 2 23344-P2 < 10 0.1161 86.1 <86.1 <0.009 % Westside Pony Baseball - 1st Floor µg/g (ppm) By Weight 25068487 - 3 23344-P3 < 10 0.1106 90.4 <90.4 <0.009 % Universal League - 1st Floor Exterior µg/g (ppm) By Weight 25068487 - 4 23344-P4 < 10 0.1128 88.7 <88.7 <0.009 % Sparkling City Youth - Concession µg/g (ppm) By Weight 25068487 - 5 23344-P5 < 10 0.113 88.5 <88.5 <0.009 % Sparkling City Youth - Restrooms µg/g (ppm) By Weight Method Reporting Limit <10 µg/0.1 g paint Signature: Date:10/14/2025 Date:10/15/2025 Sample 23344-P2 contained substrate. Reviewed: 10501 Trade Ct., N. Chesterfield, VA 23236 | 804.897.1177 | Fax: 804.897.0070 | www.SanAir.com | LabReports@SanAir.com 23344Project Number: P.O. Number: Project Name:Greenwood Sports Complex 10/9/2025Collected Date: 10/10/2025 10:05:00 AMReceived Date: 10/15/2025 12:41:23 PM 25068487 SanAir ID Number FINAL REPORT SITEX Inc.Name: Address:1525 S. Broadway St. Louis, MO 63104 713-782-4411Phone: Page 3 of 5 Disclaimer This report is the sole property of the client account named on the chain-of-custody (COC) submitted to SanAir Technologies Laboratory, Inc. (SanAir). Results in the report are confidential information intended only for the use by the customer listed on the chain of custody. Neither results nor reports will be discussed with or released to any third party without our client’s written permission. Final reports cannot be reproduced, except in full, without written approval from SanAir to assure that parts of the report are not taken out of context. This report and any information contained within shall not be edited, altered, or modified in any way by any persons or agencies receiving, viewing, distributing, or otherwise possessing a copy of this final report. The laboratory reserves the right to perform amendments to any finalized report, of which shall supersede and make obsolete any previous editions. Such changes, modifications, additions, or deletions shall be effective immediately upon notice thereof, which may be given by means including but not limited to posting on the SanAir client portal website, electronic or conventional mail, or by any other means. The information provided in this report applies only to the samples submitted and is relevant only for the date, time, and location of sampling. The accuracy of the results of the analysis is dependent upon the method of sample procurement and information provided by the client on the COC. SanAir is not responsible for the method of sample procurement. SanAir assumes no responsibility for information provided by the client on the COC such as project number, project name, collection dates, po number, special instructions, samples collected by, sample numbers, sample identifications, sample type, selected analysis type, flow rate, total volume or area, and start stop times that may affect the validity of the results in this report. SanAir only assures the precision and accuracy of the data it generates and assumes no responsibility for errors or biasing that occur during collection prior to SanAir’s receipt of the sample(s). Evaluation reports are based solely on the sample(s) in the condition in which they are received at the laboratory and on the information provided by the client on the COC. Sample(s) were received in good condition unless otherwise noted on the report. All quality control results are acceptable unless otherwise noted. SanAir does not make contamination corrections to reports based upon analysis of laboratory and/or field blanks. When the client requires samples to be tested that deviate from a specific method or condition, all reported results may be affected by the deviation. SanAir assumes no responsibility or liability for the manner in which the results are used or interpreted. SanAir’s Method Detection Limits (MDL) and Reporting Limits (RL) have been derived using various materials meeting each accrediting agencies’ standards. All samples are disposed of after 60 days unless otherwise requested by the client. For Lead Exposure Limits, refer to HUD Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control of Lead-Based Paint Hazards and State and Federal Regulations, where applicable. SanAir Technologies Laboratory, Inc. participates in the Environmental Lead Accreditation Program (ELAP) administered by AIHA LAP, LLC (Laboratory ID LAP-162952), and has met the EPA's NLLAP program standards. SanAir also participates in the State of New York’s DOH-ELAP program (NY Lab Id No. 11983) for lead in paint. This report does not constitute nor shall be used by the client to claim product, process, system, or person certification, approval, or endorsement by AIHA LAP, LLC, NELAC, NIST, and/or any other U.S. governmental agencies. All or some test results contained in this report may not be accredited by every local, state or federal regulatory agency. Refer to the SanAir website at www.sanair.com for copies of current certificates and scopes of various accreditations, certifications, and licenses or contact the laboratory for inquiries regarding the status or scope of an accreditation or certification. AIHA LAP, LLC Lab ID: LAP-162952 New York State Department of Health Laboratory ID No: 11983 State of Connecticut Department of Public Health Environmental Laboratory Registration Number: PH-0105 Ohio Department of Health Environmental Lead Laboratory Approval Number E10049 State of Rhode Island Department of Health Environmental Lead Laboratory No LAO00371 Revision Date 3/24/2025 Page 4 of 5 Page 5 of 5 JRG Access Ability, LLC 709 Alameda St. San Juan, TX 78589 956/227.4178 Mai-Theresa Bernal October 10, 2025 City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard St. Corpus Christi, TX 78401 Rudy Gonzalez Gignac Architects 416 Starr St. Corpus Christi, TX 78401 Re: Greenwood Sports Complex Universal League Youth Baseball TABS2026000606 Universal League Youth Baseball 3801 Greenwood Dr. Corpus Christi, TX 78405 PLAN REVIEW - COMPLETED Dear Mrs. Bernal and Mr. Gonzalez, The plan/revision review is complete and the results are enclosed. A copy will be forwarded to the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation. Should any deficiencies be noted, the referenced project may be eligible for inspection approval if constructed in accordance with the Texas Accessibility Standards. Items which are the responsibility of the owner should be referred to the appropriate person for action. The building or facility owner must request an inspection no later than thirty (30) days after the completion of construction. If the completion date provided on the Project Registration Form is no longer correct, notify this office (in writing) of the revised completion date as soon as possible. This determination is applicable only to ensuring compliance with Texas Government Code, Chapter 469 and does not address the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), (P.L. 101-336), or any other federal, state, or local requirement. For information on the ADA, call the ADA Hotline, (800) 949-4232 or the United States Department of Justice at (202) 514-0301. If you have any questions or need further assistance, or if you are not the owner of record for this facility, contact Jose Rick Guerrero at 956-227-4178. Please reference the TABS number in all future correspondence pertaining to this project. Sincerely, Jose Rick Guerrero Registered Accessibility Specialist #1426 PLAN REVIEW-COMPLETED TRANSMITTAL LETTER APPENDIX 7 Plan Review – Greenwood Sports Complex Universal League Youth Baseball View Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf 1 PLAN/REVISIONS REVIEW REPORT The following report identifies deficiencies with the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). No response is required to this review, however, all items noted as "Unacceptable" should be addressed prior to inspection. We encourage you to view the Texas Accessibility Standards (2012 TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf RAS Name:Rick Guerrero RAS #:1426 Review Date: Revision Date: 10-10-2025 Project #:TABS2026000606 Project Information: Project Name:Greenwood Sports Complex Universal League Youth Baseball Facility Name:Universal League Youth Baseball Project Address:3801 Greenwood Dr.City:Corpus Christi Detailed Description of Construction Activities: Renovation of existing Baseball Fields including renovating interior of public restrooms, concession stand upgrades, new dugouts, new bleachers, concrete walkways some field upgrades. Owner Information Name:City of Corpus Christi - Mai-Theresa Bernal Address:1201 Leopard St. City:Corpus Christi State:TX Zip:78401 201 Application 201.1 Scope. All areas of newly designed and newly constructed buildings and facilities and altered portions of existing buildings and facilities shall comply with these requirements. These standards apply to fixed or built-in elements of buildings, structures, site improvements, and pedestrian routes or vehicular ways located on a site. These requirements are to be applied to all areas of a facility unless exempted, or where scoping limits the number of multiple elements required to be accessible. Note: This accessibility review references the ADA Guidelines included in the construction drawings. Since many details and interior elevations are either not dimensioned or only include general references to the standards, this report has been prepared under the assumption that the construction team will follow the referenced ADA Guidelines or this accessibility report during implementation. It remains the responsibility of the design and construction team to ensure full compliance in the field. No response is required to this review, however, all items noted as "Unacceptable" should be addressed prior to inspection. Items identified with “General Note” have been included as an advisory to ensure compliance on unspecified or insufficient information provided. Plan Review – Greenwood Sports Complex Universal League Youth Baseball View Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf 2 Chapter 3: Building Blocks 303 Changes in Level General Note Note: Any change in level greater than 1/4 inch must comply with the following sections. Ensure that accessible parking and sidewalk transitions, door transitions, and flooring transitions comply with the following sections: 303.1 General. Where changes in level are permitted in floor or ground surfaces, they shall comply with 303. 303.2 Vertical. Changes in level of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high maximum shall be permitted to be vertical. 303.3 Beveled. Changes in level between 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high minimum and 1/2 inch (13 mm) high maximum shall be beveled with a slope not steeper than 1:2. 303.4 Ramps. Changes in level greater than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high shall be ramped, and shall comply with 405 or 406. 307 Protruding Objects General Note Note: Objects mounted between 27 and 80 inches above the finish floor that protrude more than 4 inches into the circulation path are considered protruding objects. Ensure paper towel dispensers and other mounted elements do not extend more than 4 inches into the circulation path unless cane detection is provided. Comply with the following section: 307.2 Protrusion Limits. Objects with leading edges more than 27 inches (685 mm) and not more than 80 inches (2030 mm) above the finish floor or ground shall protrude 4 inches (100 mm) maximum horizontally into the circulation path. 309 Operable Parts General Note Note: Ensure operable parts (light switches, thermostats, alarm pulls, fire extinguishers, lavatory faucets, and elements used by facility occupants) comply with the following sections: 309.3 Height. Operable parts shall be placed within one or more of the reach ranges specified in 308. 309.4 Operation. Operable parts shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. The force required to activate operable parts shall be 5 pounds (22.2 N) maximum Plan Review – Greenwood Sports Complex Universal League Youth Baseball View Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf 3 Chapter 4: Accessible Routes 403 Walking Surfaces General Note Note: Ensure accessible walking surfaces (such as sidewalks and accessible routes) comply with the following requirements: 403.3 Slope. The running slope of walking surfaces shall not be steeper than 1:20. The cross slope of walking surfaces shall not be steeper than 1:48. 403.5.1 Clear Width. Except as provided in 403.5.2 and 403.5.3, the clear width of walking surfaces shall be 36 inches (915 mm) minimum. Chapter 6: Plumbing Elements & Facilities 604 Water Closets and Toilet Compartments General Note Note: Ensure toilet compartment doors are self-closing, have door pulls on both sides, and that the toilet compartments provide the required toe clearances. Comply with the following sections: 604.8.1.2 Doors. Toilet compartment doors, including door hardware, shall comply with 404 except that if the approach is to the latch side of the compartment door, clearance between the door side of the compartment and any obstruction shall be 42 inches (1065 mm) minimum. Doors shall be located in the front partition or in the side wall or partition farthest from the water closet. Where located in the front partition, the door opening shall be 4 inches (100 mm) maximum from the side wall or partition farthest from the water closet. Where located in the side wall or partition, the door opening shall be 4 inches (100 mm) maximum from the front partition. The door shall be self- closing. A door pull complying with 404.2.7 shall be placed on both sides of the door near the latch. Toilet compartment doors shall not swing into the minimum required compartment area. 604.8.1.4 Toe Clearance. The front partition and at least one side partition shall provide a toe clearance of 9 inches (230 mm) minimum above the finish floor and 6 inches (150 mm) deep minimum beyond the compartment- side face of the partition, exclusive of partition support members. Compartments for children's use shall provide a toe clearance of 12 inches (305 mm) minimum above the finish floor. 605 Urinals General Note Note: The accessible urinal space is not dimensioned. A 30-inch minimum clear floor space is required; however, a 36-inch clear floor space is required when side partitions extend more than 24 inches. Ensure compliance with the following sections. 605.3 Clear Floor Space. A clear floor or ground space complying with 305 positioned for forward approach shall be provided. 305.7 Maneuvering Clearance. Where a clear floor or ground space is located in an alcove or otherwise confined on all or part of three sides, additional maneuvering clearance shall be provided in accordance with 305.7.1 and 305.7.2. 305.7.1 Forward Approach. Alcoves shall be 36 inches (915 mm)wide minimum where the depth exceeds 24 inches (610 mm). JRG Access Ability, LLC 709 Alameda St. San Juan, TX 78589 956/227.4178 Mai-Theresa Bernal October 14, 2025 City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard St. Corpus Christi, TX 78401 Rudy Gonzalez Gignac Architects 416 Starr St. Corpus Christi, TX 78401 Re: Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball TABS2026000634 Sparkling City Youth Softball 3801 Greenwood Dr. Corpus Christi, TX 78405 PLAN REVIEW - COMPLETED Dear Mrs. Bernal and Mr. Gonzalez, The plan/revision review is complete and the results are enclosed. A copy will be forwarded to the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation. Should any deficiencies be noted, the referenced project may be eligible for inspection approval if constructed in accordance with the Texas Accessibility Standards. Items which are the responsibility of the owner should be referred to the appropriate person for action. The building or facility owner must request an inspection no later than thirty (30) days after the completion of construction. If the completion date provided on the Project Registration Form is no longer correct, notify this office (in writing) of the revised completion date as soon as possible. This determination is applicable only to ensuring compliance with Texas Government Code, Chapter 469 and does not address the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), (P.L. 101-336), or any other federal, state, or local requirement. For information on the ADA, call the ADA Hotline, (800) 949-4232 or the United States Department of Justice at (202) 514-0301. If you have any questions or need further assistance, or if you are not the owner of record for this facility, contact Jose Rick Guerrero at 956-227-4178. Please reference the TABS number in all future correspondence pertaining to this project. Sincerely, Jose Rick Guerrero Registered Accessibility Specialist #1426 PLAN REVIEW-COMPLETED TRANSMITTAL LETTER Plan Review – Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball View Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf 1 PLAN/REVISIONS REVIEW REPORT The following report identifies deficiencies with the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). No response is required to this review, however, all items noted as "Unacceptable" should be addressed prior to inspection. We encourage you to view the Texas Accessibility Standards (2012 TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf RAS Name:Rick Guerrero RAS #:1426 Review Date: Revision Date: 10-13-2025 Project #:TABS2026000634 Project Information: Project Name:Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball Facility Name:Sparkling City Youth Softball Project Address:3801 Greenwood Dr.City:Corpus Christi Detailed Description of Construction Activities: Renovation of existing Baseball Fields including renovating interior of public restrooms, concession stand upgrades, new dugouts, new bleachers, concrete walkways and some field upgrades. Owner Information Name:City of Corpus Christi - Mai-Theresa Bernal Address:1201 Leopard St. City:Corpus Christi State:TX Zip:78401 201 Application 201.1 Scope. All areas of newly designed and newly constructed buildings and facilities and altered portions of existing buildings and facilities shall comply with these requirements. These standards apply to fixed or built-in elements of buildings, structures, site improvements, and pedestrian routes or vehicular ways located on a site. These requirements are to be applied to all areas of a facility unless exempted, or where scoping limits the number of multiple elements required to be accessible. Note: This accessibility review references the ADA Guidelines included in the construction drawings. Since many details and interior elevations are either not dimensioned or only include general references to the standards, this report has been prepared under the assumption that the construction team will follow the referenced ADA Guidelines or this accessibility report during implementation. It remains the responsibility of the design and construction team to ensure full compliance in the field. No response is required to this review, however, all items noted as "Unacceptable" should be addressed prior to inspection. Items identified with “General Note” have been included as an advisory to ensure compliance on unspecified or insufficient information provided. Plan Review – Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball View Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf 2 Chapter 3: Building Blocks 303 Changes in Level General Note Note: Any change in level greater than 1/4 inch must comply with the following sections. Ensure that accessible parking and sidewalk transitions, door transitions, and flooring transitions comply with the following sections: 303.1 General. Where changes in level are permitted in floor or ground surfaces, they shall comply with 303. 303.2 Vertical. Changes in level of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high maximum shall be permitted to be vertical. 303.3 Beveled. Changes in level between 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high minimum and 1/2 inch (13 mm) high maximum shall be beveled with a slope not steeper than 1:2. 303.4 Ramps. Changes in level greater than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high shall be ramped, and shall comply with 405 or 406. 305 Clear Floor or Ground Space General Note Note: Ensure the required clear floor space is provided next to the relocated B.B.Q. Pit. Comply with the following sections: 226.1 General. Where dining surfaces are provided for the consumption of food or drink, at least 5 percent of the seating spaces and standing spaces at the dining surfaces shall comply with 902. In addition, where work surfaces are provided for use by other than employees, at least 5 percent shall comply with 902. 305.1 General. Clear floor or ground space shall comply with 305. 305.2 Floor or Ground Surfaces. Floor or ground surfaces of a clear floor or ground space shall comply with 302. Changes in level are not permitted. 305.3 Size. The clear floor or ground space shall be 30 inches (760 mm) minimum by 48 inches (1220 mm) minimum. 305.5 Position. Unless otherwise specified, clear floor or ground space shall be positioned for either forward or parallel approach to an element. 305.6 Approach. One full unobstructed side of the clear floor or ground space shall adjoin an accessible route or adjoin another clear floor or ground space. 307 Protruding Objects General Note Note: Objects mounted between 27 and 80 inches above the finish floor that protrude more than 4 inches into the circulation path are considered protruding objects. Ensure paper towel dispensers and other mounted elements do not extend more than 4 inches into the circulation path unless cane detection is provided. Comply with the following section: 307.2 Protrusion Limits. Objects with leading edges more than 27 inches (685 mm) and not more than 80 inches (2030 mm) above the finish floor or ground shall protrude 4 inches (100 mm) maximum horizontally into the circulation path. Plan Review – Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball View Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf 3 309 Operable Parts General Note Note: Ensure operable parts (light switches, thermostats, alarm pulls, fire extinguishers, lavatory faucets, and elements used by facility occupants) comply with the following sections: 309.3 Height. Operable parts shall be placed within one or more of the reach ranges specified in 308. 309.4 Operation. Operable parts shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. The force required to activate operable parts shall be 5 pounds (22.2 N) maximum Chapter 4: Accessible Routes 403 Walking Surfaces General Note Note: Ensure accessible walking surfaces (such as sidewalks and accessible routes) comply with the following requirements: 403.3 Slope. The running slope of walking surfaces shall not be steeper than 1:20. The cross slope of walking surfaces shall not be steeper than 1:48. 403.5.1 Clear Width. Except as provided in 403.5.2 and 403.5.3, the clear width of walking surfaces shall be 36 inches (915 mm) minimum. Chapter 6: Plumbing Elements & Facilities 604 Water Closets and Toilet Compartments General Note Note: Ensure toilet compartment doors are self-closing, have door pulls on both sides, and that the toilet compartments provide the required toe clearances. Comply with the following sections: 604.8.1.2 Doors. Toilet compartment doors, including door hardware, shall comply with 404 except that if the approach is to the latch side of the compartment door, clearance between the door side of the compartment and any obstruction shall be 42 inches (1065 mm) minimum. Doors shall be located in the front partition or in the side wall or partition farthest from the water closet. Where located in the front partition, the door opening shall be 4 inches (100 mm) maximum from the side wall or partition farthest from the water closet. Where located in the side wall or partition, the door opening shall be 4 inches (100 mm) maximum from the front partition. The door shall be self- closing. A door pull complying with 404.2.7 shall be placed on both sides of the door near the latch. Toilet compartment doors shall not swing into the minimum required compartment area. 604.8.1.4 Toe Clearance. The front partition and at least one side partition shall provide a toe clearance of 9 inches (230 mm) minimum above the finish floor and 6 inches (150 mm) deep minimum beyond the compartment- side face of the partition, exclusive of partition support members. Compartments for children's use shall provide a toe clearance of 12 inches (305 mm) minimum above the finish floor. 605 Urinals General Note Note: The accessible urinal space is not dimensioned. A 30-inch minimum clear floor space is required; however, a 36-inch clear floor space is required when side partitions extend more than 24 inches. Ensure compliance with the following sections. 605.3 Clear Floor Space. A clear floor or ground space complying with 305 positioned for forward approach shall be provided. 305.7 Maneuvering Clearance. Where a clear floor or ground space is located in an alcove or otherwise confined on all or part of three sides, additional maneuvering clearance shall be provided in accordance with 305.7.1 and 305.7.2. 305.7.1 Forward Approach. Alcoves shall be 36 inches (915 mm)wide minimum where the depth exceeds 24 inches (610 mm). JRG Access Ability, LLC 709 Alameda St. San Juan, TX 78589 956/227.4178 Mai-Theresa Bernal October 15, 2025 City of Corpus Christi 1201 Leopard St. Corpus Christi, TX 78401 Rudy Gonzalez Gignac Architects 416 Starr St. Corpus Christi, TX 78401 Re: Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball TABS2026000632 Westside Pony Baseball 3801 Greenwood Dr. Corpus Christi, TX 78405 PLAN REVIEW - COMPLETED Dear Mrs. Bernal and Mr. Gonzalez, The plan/revision review is complete and the results are enclosed. A copy will be forwarded to the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation. Should any deficiencies be noted, the referenced project may be eligible for inspection approval if constructed in accordance with the Texas Accessibility Standards. Items which are the responsibility of the owner should be referred to the appropriate person for action. The building or facility owner must request an inspection no later than thirty (30) days after the completion of construction. If the completion date provided on the Project Registration Form is no longer correct, notify this office (in writing) of the revised completion date as soon as possible. This determination is applicable only to ensuring compliance with Texas Government Code, Chapter 469 and does not address the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), (P.L. 101-336), or any other federal, state, or local requirement. For information on the ADA, call the ADA Hotline, (800) 949-4232 or the United States Department of Justice at (202) 514-0301. If you have any questions or need further assistance, or if you are not the owner of record for this facility, contact Jose Rick Guerrero at 956-227-4178. Please reference the TABS number in all future correspondence pertaining to this project. Sincerely, Jose Rick Guerrero Registered Accessibility Specialist #1426 PLAN REVIEW-COMPLETED TRANSMITTAL LETTER Plan Review – Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball View Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf 1 PLAN/REVISIONS REVIEW REPORT The following report identifies deficiencies with the Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). No response is required to this review, however, all items noted as "Unacceptable" should be addressed prior to inspection. We encourage you to view the Texas Accessibility Standards (2012 TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf RAS Name:Rick Guerrero RAS #:1426 Review Date: Revision Date: 10-14-2025 Project #:TABS2026000632 Project Information: Project Name:Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball Facility Name:Westside Pony Baseball Project Address:3801 Greenwood Dr.City:Corpus Christi Detailed Description of Construction Activities: Renovation of existing Baseball Field including renovating interior of public restrooms, concession stand upgrades, new dugouts, new bleachers, concrete walkways and some field upgrades. Owner Information Name:City of Corpus Christi - Mai-Theresa Bernal Address:1201 Leopard St. City:Corpus Christi State:TX Zip:78401 201 Application 201.1 Scope. All areas of newly designed and newly constructed buildings and facilities and altered portions of existing buildings and facilities shall comply with these requirements. These standards apply to fixed or built-in elements of buildings, structures, site improvements, and pedestrian routes or vehicular ways located on a site. These requirements are to be applied to all areas of a facility unless exempted, or where scoping limits the number of multiple elements required to be accessible. Note: This accessibility review references the ADA Guidelines included in the construction drawings. Since many details and interior elevations are either not dimensioned or only include general references to the standards, this report has been prepared under the assumption that the construction team will follow the referenced ADA Guidelines or this accessibility report during implementation. It remains the responsibility of the design and construction team to ensure full compliance in the field. No response is required to this review, however, all items noted as "Unacceptable" should be addressed prior to inspection. Items identified with “General Note” have been included as an advisory to ensure compliance on unspecified or insufficient information provided. Plan Review – Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball View Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf 2 Chapter 3: Building Blocks 303 Changes in Level General Note Note: Any change in level greater than 1/4 inch must comply with the following sections. Ensure that accessible parking and sidewalk transitions, door transitions, and flooring transitions comply with the following sections: 303.1 General. Where changes in level are permitted in floor or ground surfaces, they shall comply with 303. 303.2 Vertical. Changes in level of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high maximum shall be permitted to be vertical. 303.3 Beveled. Changes in level between 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high minimum and 1/2 inch (13 mm) high maximum shall be beveled with a slope not steeper than 1:2. 303.4 Ramps. Changes in level greater than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high shall be ramped, and shall comply with 405 or 406. 307 Protruding Objects General Note Note: Objects mounted between 27 and 80 inches above the finish floor that protrude more than 4 inches into the circulation path are considered protruding objects. Ensure paper towel dispensers and other mounted elements do not extend more than 4 inches into the circulation path unless cane detection is provided. Comply with the following section: 307.2 Protrusion Limits. Objects with leading edges more than 27 inches (685 mm) and not more than 80 inches (2030 mm) above the finish floor or ground shall protrude 4 inches (100 mm) maximum horizontally into the circulation path. 309 Operable Parts General Note Note: Ensure operable parts (light switches, thermostats, alarm pulls, fire extinguishers, lavatory faucets, and elements used by facility occupants) comply with the following sections: 309.3 Height. Operable parts shall be placed within one or more of the reach ranges specified in 308. 309.4 Operation. Operable parts shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist. The force required to activate operable parts shall be 5 pounds (22.2 N) maximum Chapter 4: Accessible Routes 403 Walking Surfaces General Note Note: Ensure accessible walking surfaces (such as sidewalks and accessible routes) comply with the following requirements: 403.3 Slope. The running slope of walking surfaces shall not be steeper than 1:20. The cross slope of walking surfaces shall not be steeper than 1:48. 403.5.1 Clear Width. Except as provided in 403.5.2 and 403.5.3, the clear width of walking surfaces shall be 36 inches (915 mm) minimum. Plan Review – Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball View Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf 3 General Note Note: A clear width of 32 inches, measured between the face of the door and the stop with the door open 90 degrees, is required at doors intended for user passage. Ensure Door A104 complies with the following section if user passage is intended: 404.2.3 Clear Width. Door openings shall provide a clear width of 32 inches (815 mm) minimum. Clear openings of doorways with swinging doors shall be measured between the face of the door and the stop, with the door open 90 degrees. Openings more than 24 inches (610 mm) deep shall provide a clear opening of 36 inches (915 mm) minimum. There shall be no projections into the required clear opening width lower than 34 inches (865 mm) above the finish floor or ground. Projections into the clear opening width between 34 inches (865 mm) and 80 inches (2030 mm) above the finish floor or ground shall not exceed 4 inches (100 mm). General Note Note: Ensure that the proposed exterior doors do not exceed a 2% slope at the required maneuvering clearance area. Comply with the following sections. 404.2.4.4 Floor or Ground Surface. Floor or ground surface within required maneuvering clearances shall comply with 302. Changes in level are not permitted. Chapter 6: Plumbing Elements & Facilities 604 Water Closets and Toilet Compartments General Note Note: Ensure toilet compartment doors are self-closing, have door pulls on both sides, and that the toilet compartments provide the required toe clearances. Comply with the following sections: 604.8.1.2 Doors. Toilet compartment doors, including door hardware, shall comply with 404 except that if the approach is to the latch side of the compartment door, clearance between the door side of the compartment and any obstruction shall be 42 inches (1065 mm) minimum. Doors shall be located in the front partition or in the side wall or partition farthest from the water closet. Where located in the front partition, the door opening shall be 4 inches (100 mm) maximum from the side wall or partition farthest from the water closet. Where located in the side wall or partition, the door opening shall be 4 inches (100 mm) maximum from the front partition. The door shall be self- closing. A door pull complying with 404.2.7 shall be placed on both sides of the door near the latch. Toilet compartment doors shall not swing into the minimum required compartment area. 604.8.1.4 Toe Clearance. The front partition and at least one side partition shall provide a toe clearance of 9 inches (230 mm) minimum above the finish floor and 6 inches (150 mm) deep minimum beyond the compartment- side face of the partition, exclusive of partition support members. Compartments for children's use shall provide a toe clearance of 12 inches (305 mm) minimum above the finish floor. Plan Review – Greenwood Sports Complex Westside Pony Baseball View Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) online at www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/2012TAS/2012tascomplete.pdf 4 Chapter 9: Built-In Elements 904 Check-Out Aisles and Sales and Service Counters General Note Note: Not enough information was provided to review the Concession window counter height. Ensure the counter surface does not exceed 36 inches above the finish floor and that the required clear floor space does not exceed the permitted 2% slope. Comply with the following sections: 227.3 Counters. Where provided, at least one of each type of sales counter and service counter shall comply with 904.4. Where counters are dispersed throughout the building or facility, counters complying with 904.4 also shall be dispersed. 904.4 Sales and Service Counters. Sales counters and service counters shall comply with 904.4.1 or 904.4.2. The accessible portion of the counter top shall extend the same depth as the sales or service counter top. 904.4.1 Parallel Approach. A portion of the counter surface that is 36 inches (915 mm) long minimum and 36 inches (915 mm) high maximum above the finish floor shall be provided. A clear floor or ground space complying with 305 shall be positioned for a parallel approach adjacent to the 36 inch (915 mm) minimum length of counter. 305.3 Size. The clear floor or ground space shall be 30 inches (760 mm) minimum by 48 inches (1220 mm) minimum. PROJECT # 23171 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 GREENWOOD SPORTS COMPLEX UNIVERSAL LEAGUE YOUTH BASEBALL BALLPARK 1: FIELDS 1, 2 & 3 PROJECT DESIGN PROJECT ARCHITECT GIGNAC ARCHITECTS 9708 S. PADRE ISLAND DR., SUITE A-200 CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78418 T 361.245.9400 CIVIL ENGINEER YORK ENGINEERING 1608 S. BROWNLEE BOULEVARD CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78404 T 361.946.4848 STRUCTURAL ENGINEER MUNOZ ENGINEERING 900 ISOM, SUITE 306 SAN ANTONIO, TEXS 78216 T 210.736.4265 MEP ENGINEER MS2 CONSULTING ENGINEERS PROJECT # 23170 WESTSIDE PONY BASEBALL BALLPARK 3: FIELDS 1,2 & CRICKET FIELD PROJECT # 23172 SPARKLING CITY YOUTH SOFTBALL BALLPARK 2: FIELDS 1,2,3 & 4 BOND 2022/2024 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 PROJECT # 23171 UNIVERSAL LEAGUE YOUTH BASEBALL BALLPARK 1: FIELDS 1, 2 & 3 PROJECT # 23170 WESTSIDE PONY BASEBALL BALLPARK 3: FIELDS 1,2 & CRICKET FIELD 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 PROJECT # 23172 SPARKLING CITY YOUTH SOFTBALL BALLPARK 2: FIELDS 1,2,3 & 4 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 PROJECT # 23170 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 GREENWOOD SPORTS COMPLEX WESTSIDE PONY BASEBALL BALLPARK 3: FIELDS 1,2 & CRICKET FIELD BOND 2022/2024 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 A/C AIR CONDITIONING ACP.ACOUSTICAL PANEL ACT.ACOUSTICAL TILE A.D.AREA DRAIN A.D.A.AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT ADJ.ADJUSTABLE A.F.F.ABOVE FINISH FLOOR A.F.G.ABOVE FINISH GRADE A.H.J.ATHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION ALUM ALUMINUM ALT.ALTERNATE ∟ANGLE ASPH.ASPHALT BD.BOARD BLDG.BUILDING BLK.BLOCK BM.BEAM B.U.R.BUILT-UP ROOF C CHANNEL CAB, CABT CABINET CFMF COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING C.J.CONTROL JOINT CL CENTER LINE CLG.CEILING C.M.U.CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COL.COLUMN COMP.COMPRESSIBLE CONC.CONCRETE COND.CONDITION CONT.CONTINUOUS CORR.CORRIDOR CPT.CARPET CT.CERAMIC TILE CTSK.COUNTERSINK C.W.COLD WATER D DRYER D.F.DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIA.DIAMETER DIM.DIMENSION D.P.DAMPPROOFING DTL DETAIL D.S.DOWN SPOUT DWG. DRAWING EA.EACH EDF ELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAIN EL.ELEVATION (HEIGHT) ELEC., ELECT. ELECTRICAL ELEV.ELEVATION (DRAWING) E.J.EXPANSION JOINT EQ.EQUAL EQUIP EQUIPMENT EXIST.EXISTING EXP.EXPANSION EXT.EXTERIOR FB.FACE BRICK FD.FLOOR DRAIN F.E.FIRE EXTINGUISHER F.E.C. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET F.H.C.FIRE HOSE CABINET FIN.FINISH FIXT.FIXTURE FLR.FLOOR FLSHG. FLASHING FLUOR FLUORESCENT GA.GAUGE GALV.GALVANIZED G.B.GRAB BAR CMBU GLAZED CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT GEN.GENERAL G.I.GALVANIZED IRON GL.GLASS GR.GRADE GTP.GLAZED TILE PAVER GYP.GYPSUM HC HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE HT.HEIGHT HORIZ HORIZONTAL HM HOLLOW METAL FRAME H.W.HOT WATER I.D.INSIDE DIAMETER INSUL INSULATION INT.INTERIOR I.P.S.IRON PIPE SIZE JT.JOINT LAM.LAMINATE LAV.LAVATORY L.P.LIGHT POLE LT.LIGHT LT. WT. LIGHT WEIGHT MANUF., MFR. MANUFACTURER MAS.MASONRY MATL.MATERIAL MAX.MAXIMUM MB.MARKER BOARD MECH.MECHANICAL MEM.MEMBRANE MEM. WP. MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING MEP MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING MEZZ.MEZZANINE M.H.MAN HOLE MIN.MINIMUM MISC.MISCELLANEOUS M.O.MASONRY OPENING MOD.MODULE MTL.METAL MTP.METAL TOILET PARTITION N.D.NAPKIN DISPOSAL N.I.C.NOT IN CONTRACT NO.NUMBER N.T.S.NOT TO SCALE N.V.NAPKIN VENDOR O.C.ON CENTER O.C.E.W. ON CENTER EACH WAY O.D.OUTSIDE DIAMETER O.F.C.I.OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED O.H.OPPOSITE HAND OPNG.OPENING OPP.OPPOSITE P.C.PRECAST P.H.PAPER HOLDER PL.PLATE P.L.PROPERTY LINE P. LAM. PLASTIC LAMINATE PLUMB. PLUMBING PLWD.PLYWOOD POL.POLISHED P.P.POWER POLE PR.PAIR PREFIN. PREFINISHED PT.POINT PTD.PAINTED P.W.B.PREFINISHED WALL BOARD QT.QUARRY TILE R RADIUS RD.ROOF DRAIN RE., REF. REFERENCE RECP.RECEPTACLE REINF.REINFORCE RES.RESILIENT REQ., REQ'D. REQUIRED REV.REVISION, REVISED RF RECREATIONAL RESILIENT FLOOR RPG.RELOCATABLE PAINTED GYP. BD. RSS.ROD STOCK AND SEALANT S.C.SEALED CONCRETE SCH., SCHED. SCHEDULE(D) SCPL SOLID CORE PLASTIC LAMINATE S.D.SOAP DISPENSER SEC.SECTION SHT.SHEET SIM.SIMILAR SPC.SPECIAL COATING SYSTEM SPEC., SPECS. SPECIFICATIONS SQ.SQUARE SS.SOUND STRIP S.S., ST. STL. STAINLESS STEEL STL.STEEL STR., STRUCT. STRUCTURAL SUSP.SUSPENDED SVF SHEET VINYL FLOORING SVDF SHEET VINYL DANCE FLOORING T.A.S.TEXAS ACCESSIBLITY STANDARDS T.B.TACK BOARD T.D.R.TOWEL DISPENSER & RECEPT. TEL TELEPHONE TERR.TERRAZZO THK.THICK T.O.TOP OF T.O.B.TOP OF (WOOD) BLOCKING T.O.M.TOP OF MASONRY T.O.S.TOP OF STEEL T.T.D.TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER TYP.TYPICAL U.N.O.UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UR.URINAL V VENT V.C.T. VINYL COMPOSITE TILE VENT.VENTILATING, VENTILATED VER.VERIFY VERT.VERTICAL VGB (PREFINISHED) VINYL CLAD GYPSUM BOARD V.I.F.VERIFY IN FIELD VWC VINYL WALL COVERING W WASHING MACHINE W/WITH W.C.WATER CLOSET WD.WOOD WDW.WINDOW W.P.WATERPROOFING W.S.WEATHERSTRIP WT.WEIGHT W.W.WATER WELL W.W.F.WELDED WIRE FABRIC Abbreviations EARTH (existing) 02 SITE CONSTRUCTION EARTH (backfill) DRAINAGE FILL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 CONCRETE PRECAST CONCRETE GROUT BRICK 04 MASONRY CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS STONE CAST STONE 05 METALS STEEL ALUMINUM 06 WOODS AND PLASTICS CONTINUOUS WOOD INTERMITTENT WOOD PLYWOOD FINISH WOOD HARDBOARD PARTICLE BOARD SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 07 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION BATT INSULATION LOOSE FILL INSULATION RIGID INSULATION GLASS 08 GLAZING LATH AND PLASTER 09 FINISHES MEDIUM DENSITY FIBER BOARD (MDF) GYPSUM BOARD Material Conventions COLUMN LINE FLOOR LINE MATCH LINE ELEVATION SYMBOL DOOR DESIGNATION WINDOW DESIGNATION PARTITION TYPE REVISION NUMBER PLAN OR DETAIL ENLARGED DETAIL AND VERTICAL SECTIONS 100' - 0" FIN. FLOOR M1 DIMENSIONS - ALL DIMENSIONS TO FACE OF WALL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 5'-6"7'-3" Drawing Conventions A A101 A101 1 1 A-500 1 A-600 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 EXIT 6' - 8"4' - 0" MAX.MIN.1' - 3"9"12"TYPICAL48" MAX.EQ EQ FIRE ALARM (COMBINATION SPEAKER AND STROBE)FIREMAN'S PHONE JACK WALL MOUNTED EXIT LIGHT LIGHT SWITCH AND DIMMER THERMOSTAT OR OTHER CONTROL DEVICE ELECTRIC, TELEPHONE, OR DATA RECEPTACLE ALIGN ITEMS WHEN POSSIBLE AT COUNTERS46" MAX.10 - 24" OBSTRUCTION MIN. 24" ALIGN STACKED DEVICES WHERE POSSIBLE 54" TYPICALSIGNAGE 18" CLEAR SPACE AT TACTILE SIGNAGE BOTTOM OF REFLECTIVE SURFACE FINISHED FLOOR 34" MAX40" MAX24"28" MIN8" MIN 11" MIN 9" MIN12" MIN. 12" MIN.LESS THAN 27"LESS THAN 27"Y NOTE: X IS THE 12" MINIMUM HANDRAIL EXTENSION REQUIRED AT EACH TOP RISER. Y IS THE MINIMUM HANDRAIL EXTENSION OF 12" PLUS THE WIDTH OF ONE TREAD THAT IS REQUIRED AT THE BOTTOM RISER. X 504.2 TREADS AND RISERS. ALL STEPS ON A FLIGHT OF STAIRS SHALL HAVE UNIFORM RISER HEIGHTS AND UNIFORM TREAD DEPTHS. RISERS SHALL BE 4 INCHES HIGH MINIMUM AND 7 INCHES MAXIMUM. TREADS SHALL BE 11 INCHES DEEP MINIMUM 504.5 NOSINGS. THE RADIUS CURVATURE AT THE LEADING EDGE OF THE TREAD SHALL BE 1/2 INCH MAXIMUM. NOSINGS THAT PROJECT BEYOND THE RISERS SHALL HAVE THE UNDERSIDE OF THE LEADING EDGE CURVED OR BEVELED. RISERS SHALL BE PERMITTED TO SLOPE UNDER THE TREAD AT AN ANGLE OF 30 DEGREES MAXIMUM FROM VERTICAL. THE PERMITTED PROJECTION OF THE NOSING SHALL EXTEND 1 1/2 INCHES MAXIMUM OVER THE TREAD BELOW. 2" MAX11" MIN. RADIUS7"RADIUS 11" MIN.2" MAX 7"30° (B) ANGLED NOSING (C) ROUNDED NOSING RADIUS 2" MAX11"7"30° (A) TYPICAL 60" MIN.18" MIN., 24" PREFERRED 48" MIN.X NOTE: X = 12" IF DOOR HAS BOTH A CLOSER AND A LATCH PUSH SIDEPULL SIDE X NOTE: Y = 48" MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS BOTH A LATCH AND CLOSER 54" MIN. NOTE: X = 36" MINIMUM IF Y = 60"; X = 42" MINIMUM IF Y = 54"YY42" MIN.PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE X 24" MIN. NOTE: Y = 48" MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS CLOSER NOTE: Y = 54" MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS CLOSER PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE Y48" MIN.X 24" MIN.Y42" MIN.1 1/4" - 2"1 1/2"1 1/4" - 2"1 1/2"1 1/4" - 2"1 1/2" (A) HANDRAIL (B) HANDRAIL (C) GUARDRAIL 1/2" MAX PREDOMINANT DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC 302.3 OPENINGS. OPENINGS IN FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES SHALL NOT ALLOW PASSAGE OF A SPHERE MORE THAN 1/2 INCH DIAMETER EXCEPT AS ALLOWED IN 407.4.3, 409.4.3, 410.4, 810.5.3 AND 810.10. ELONGATED OPENINGS SHALL BE PLACED SO THAT THE LONG DIMENSION IS PERPENDICULAR TO THE DOMINANT DIRECTION OF TRAVEL. 48" MIN. 48" MIN. SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"3 MISCELLANEOUS HEIGHTS SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"2 LAVATORY CLEARANCES SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"5 STAIR HANDRAILS SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"6 TREAD WIDTH AND NOSINGS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"7 FRONT APPROACH DOORS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 HINGE SIDE APPROACH DOORS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"9 LATCH SIDE APPROACH DOORS SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"10 SIZE AND SPACING OF HANDRAILS AND GRAB BARS SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"11 GRATINGS IN ACCESSIBLE ROUTES SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"12 TWO HINGED DOOR IN SERIES SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"4 ROOM SIGNAGE 1 MOUNTING HEIGHTS 1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 1-STORYBLDG 1-STORYBLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938. ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT. Booster PumpNTS4NOTE:1. VALVES SHALL BE 6" BELOW TOP OF VALVE BOX2. INSTALL WIRE UNDER MAINLINE PER MFRSINSTRUCTIONS.3. PROVIDE 36" EXPANSION LOOP AT WIRECONNECTION1/2" PEA GRAVEL OR DRAIN ROCK: 4" DEPTHCONTROL WIRESELECTRIC VALVE : SEE IRRIGATION PLANSSCH. 40 MALE ADAPTERSCH 40 P.V.C. LATERAL LINEMAINLINE FITTINGMAINLINE / SUBMAIN: SCH 40SCHEDULE 40 P.V.C. NIPPLE(LENGTH AS REQ'D), TYP.WATER PROOF CONNECTORS3M-DBRYVALVE BOX W/ BOLT DOWN LIDVALVE WIRE: 36" IN LOOSE COILSCH. 40 PVC 90° ELBOW6"LATERAL DEPTHBRICK BLOCKINGRemote Control ValveNTS612" NIPPLE: SCH 80 PVCPVC LATERAL: SEE PLANRotor HeadNTS5FINISH GRADE: FLUSH W/ HEAD.SEE NOTE BELOWROTOR HEAD w/ PURPLE CAP: SEE IRRIGATION PLANSNOTE:1. ALL IRRIGATION HEADS TO BE INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR TO FINAL GRADE.2. ALL IRRIGATION HEADS TO BE INSTALLED WITH SWING JOINTS AS SHOWN.SCH 40 FITTINGSCH 40 MARLEX STREET ELLS, TYP.ASSEMBLE AS A 3-SWING JOINTDISTANCE FROM PAVING OR HEADERBOARD,SEE PLAN.RODENT PROTECTION SCREEN: 12" X 12"19 GAUGE WWM, WRAP ENDS OF SCREENMaster Valve / Flow sensorNTS3BODYINSERT(+) REDFLOW FLOW SENSORSENSORBLACK (-)FLOW5 X PIPE DIA.FLOW10 X PIPE DIA.1" IN THE TURF AREAFINISH GRADEEXTENSION (IF NEEDED)VALVE BOX (14"x19") OR LARGERWATER TIGHT FUSE HOLDERINSTALL IN PVC CONDUITALLOWING 2' OF EXTRA CABLE.MASTER VALVE, DOWNSTREAM FROM BACK-FLOW: INSTALL INVALVE BOX W/ BOLTDOWN LID. SEE SPECS.REDUCING COUPLING ATDISTANCE EQUAL TO 10X PIPEDIAMETER FROM FLOW SENSOR1" CONDUIT TO CONTROLLER:SHARE WITH FLOW SENSOR WIRE14"x19" PLASTIC VALVE BOXW/ EXTENSIONS IF NEEDEDAND BOLT DOWN LIDWATERPROOF CONNECTION* NOTE POLARITY ON SENSOR TOSENSOR CABLE HOOKUP* NOTE:FLOW SENSOR MUST BE INSTALLEDW/ INSERT (TOP) POSITIONEDVERTICALLY AND BODY (TEE)POSITIONED HONIZONTALLY.REDUCING COUPLING ATDISTANCE EQUAL TO 5X PIPEDIAMETER FROM FLOW SENSOR6" DEEP 3/4" DRAINROCKSUMP, TYP.BRICK BLOCKING,TYP.RODENT PROTECTIONSCREEN: 12" X 12" 19GAUGE WWM, WRAPENDS OF SCREEN, TYP.APPLIES TO BOTHVALVE BOXESNOTE: ATTACH RECYCLED WATERWARNING TAG TO VALVE STEM, TYP.COMMUNICATION CABLE:FINISH GRADE. SEE SPECS FORRELATION TO TOP OF VALVE BOXVALVE BOX W/ BOLT DOWN LID:SEE SPECS.ISOLATION VALVE :SEE PLANSPVC EXTENSION OR EQUALWARNING TAG: SEENIPPLE (LENGTH AS REQUIRED)PVC SCH. 40 45's W/ NIPPLES ASREQUIRED, 18" LENGTH, TYP.PVC SCH. 40 COUPLING TYP.IRRIGATION SUPPLY LINE, TYP.BRICK BLOCKING1/2" PEA GRAVEL OR DRAINROCK: 4" DEPTHCOMPACTED SUBGRADE36" EXCESS LOW VOLTAGE WIRING.TERMINATE WIRE W/ WATERPROOFINSULATING CONNECTOR12" MIN. 2"Isolation Valve (3" Line & Greater)NTS2SAME DEPTH AS IRRIGATION SUPPLY LINE RODENT PROTECTION SCREEN:12" X 12" 19 GAUGE WWM, WRAPENDS OF SCREENNOTE: ATTACH RECYCLED WATERWARNING TAG TO VALVE STEM, TYP.SET BOXES SQUARE TO ADJACENT STRUCTURESAND PERPENDICULAR AND FLUSH WITH FINISH GRADETHRUST (T)TOTAL LBS. WITH 100 PSI PRESSURECONCRETE AREA - FTPIPE48506"INCHES6"4"3"SIZE4"PIPESIZE3"2.04.07.046° -90°A2685DEAD END1225CONNECTION1.22.65.022.5°REDUCER3063104768003705RESULTANT (R)1.02.04.022.5° -45°B1.22.62.5T'sC3775122790°2.04.027.0CROSS205593645°4773332.0 FT3.0 FT4.0 FTSUPPORTSVALVE23FTSECTION A-A'NOTE:1. ISOLATION VALVES 3" AND LARGER SHALL HAVE A THRUST BLOCK INSTALLED WITH #4 REBAR BENT OVER VALVE BODY FIRMLYSECURED INTO CONCRETE.2. CONCRETE TO BE SHAPED INTO WEDGE WITH THE WIDE END AGAINST THE SOLID WALL OF TRENCH. THRUST BLOCK TO BEUNDISTURBED EARTH ONLY. DISTANCE FROM UNDISTURBED SOIL TO PIPE SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 18".3. THRUST BLOCK APPLIES TO RING TITE PIPE ONLY.4. CONCRETE SHALL BE KEPT BEHIND THE BELL OF OF THE FITTING WITH CONCRETE NOT PERMITTED TO RUN OVER AGAINST THEPIPE OR INTO THE JOINT.5. CONCRETE SHALL BE MIXED AND POURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PIPE MANUFACTURING RECOMMENDED STANDARDS ANDSPECIFICATIONS FOR THRUST BLOCKS.FLOWISOLATION VALVE: SEE8" CLASS 160 OR SCH 40 PVC PIPE(NOTCH TO FIT OVER MAIN LINEPIPE)CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKO-RING PVC MAINLINE2 EACH- #4 REBAR- BEND OVERVALVE BODY 180° TYP. EACH SIDE2- #4 REBARIsolation Valve Thrust Block (3" Line or Greater)NTS7Thrust Block (3" Line & Greater)NTS8CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK (TYP.)TRENCH EDGE46° TO 90° ELBOWDETAIL BDETAIL A11.25° TO 45°ELBOWSAME DEPTH AS IRRIGATIONSUPPLY LINE 12"MN 12" MINCOL. B (TYP.)COL. A (TYP.)12" MINUNION (SIZE AS REQUIRED)/L-3.24WARNING TAG: SEE/L-3.24WARNING TAG:SEE/L-3.24WARNING TAG: SEE/L-3.24/L-3.12Backflow PreventerNTS1ENCLOSURE: INSULATED STRONGBOX, MODEL Flow 12" MIN.EXISTING BACKFLOW DEVICE: SEE PLANSBBC-30ALI. INSTALL ON CONCRETE PAD PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.REINSTALL BALL VALVENEW CONCRETE PAD: MIN. 4" THICKINSTALLATION HEIGHT: REDUCE HEIGHT OF BACKFLOW TO FIT MFR.RECOMMENDED CLEARANCE. ICD DECODER: SIZE PER GROUPED VALVESFINISH GRADEIN 10" RND. VALVE BOX12" MIN. ABOVE HIGHEST HEAD.416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232FOTEXASS T TA ELICENSEDIIR RRG ATO23293 ALEXIS M DOMINGUEZ09/09/25 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STOR Y BLDG 2-STOR Y BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STOR Y BLDG 1-STOR Y BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 ELECT. YARD 1-STOR Y BLDG 1-STOR Y BLDG2-STOR Y BLDG 1-STOR Y BLDG GREENWOOD DR.(60' R.O.W.)416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORYBLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 UNPAVED AREAS PAVED AREAS 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 UNPAVED AREAS PAVED AREAS EFFLUENT DEFLECTION DETAIL 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 PARKING P A R K I N G DRI V E W A Y GREENWOOD DR.1 SITE PLAN1:60 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/202534 1 34 2 LEGEND 34 3 35 6 PARKING P A R K I N G DRI V E W A Y GREENWOOD DR.1 SITE PLAN DEMOLITION1:60 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025LEGEND BLEACHERS DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSCONCESSION DUGOUT STORAGE 1 ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/202536 1 40 1 2 ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20 LEGEND 3 ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20 36 3 GREENWOOD SPORTSCOMPLEX WESTSIDE 4035 GREENWOOD DRIVE 35 3 35 3 35 5 1 MONUMENT ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20253 MONUMENTSECTION3/4"=1'-0" 2 MONUMENT ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0" 5 DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 6 DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE PLAN1/4"=1'-0" 4 PLAQUE PEDESTAL1/2"=1'-0" 7 TYP. PARK FIELD SIGN - PS1N.T.S. 7 DUGOUT CROSS SECTION - ALTERNATE #83/4"=1'-0" 3 TYP. SHADE CANOPY/BLEACHER LAYOUT1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20254 DUGOUT ELEVATION - ALTERNATE #81/4"=1'-0" 6 DUGOUT SECTION - ALTERNATE #83/4"=1'-0"5 DUGOUT SECTION - ALTERNATE #83/4"=1'-0" 2 DUGOUT FLOOR PLAN - ALTERNATE #8 - N.I.C. (NOT IN CONTRACT)1/4"=1'-0" 1 DUGOUT FLOOR PLAN - BASE BID1/4"=1'-0" 1 FLAG POLE DETAIL1/2"=1'-0"2 ACCESSIBLE SIGN DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 4 WHEELSTOP DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0" 5 CHAINLINK FENCE GATE DETAIL3/4"=1'-0"3 BOLLARD DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 6 FENCE DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"7 FENCE CORNER DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"8 FENCE GATE DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20259 CONCRETE EDGE DETAIL @EXIST. FENCE3"=1'-0"10CONCRETE EDGE DETAIL @NEW FENCE3"=1'-0" 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20251 BATTING CAGE FLOOR PLAN - ALT. NO. 11/8"=1'-0" 2 BATTING CAGE ELEVATION - ALT. NO. 11/8"=1'-0"N.I.C. (NOT IN CONTRACT) MENSTAIRS CONCESSION WOMEN CLOSET PRESSBOX STAIRS 1 FLOOR PLAN DEMOLITION - CONCESSION/RESTROOM1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20252 FLOOR PLAN DEMOLITION- PRESS BOX1/4"=1'-0" LEGEND MENSTAIRS CONCESSION WOMEN CLOSET PRESSBOX STAIRS 1 FLOOR PLAN - CONCESSION/RESTROOM1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20252 FLOOR PLAN - PRESS BOX1/4"=1'-0" LEGEND 3 COUNTER SECTION3/4"=1'-0" 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20251 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"2 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"3 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0" 4 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0" 1 RIDGE CAP DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0" 2 EAVE DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20253 RAKE DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0" 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 GENERAL NOTESSHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALSDESIGN CRITERIAFOUNDATION AND EARTHWORKCONCRETE NOTESTENSION LAPS AND EMBEDMENTTABLE AREINFORCEMENTCONCRETE MASONRY NOTES·····CONCRETE NOTES CONT'D:STRUCTURAL NOTES I 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 ABBREVIATIONSWINDSTORM & CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION:·········STRUCTURAL NOTES II WOOD FRAMING NOTESSTRUCTURAL STEEL NOTESSTRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONS GR E E N W O O D D R .SITE PLAN1SITE PLAN 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.42321212121261735 DUGOUT FOUNDATION PLAN1DUGOUT FRAMING PLAN2SITE MONUMENT 2 FOUNDATION PLAN3BLEACHERS FOUNDATION PLAN4SITE MONUMENT 1 FOUNDATION PLAN5416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 ABAAADAAFOUNDATION NOTES & LEGEND:AENTRY SIGN FOUNDATION PLAN6BA11AFOUNDATION & FRAMING PLANS I 22DFIELD SIGN PIER PLAN7NIC 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 FOUNDATION & FRAMING PLANS IIWATER TANK FOUNDATION PLAN2AAAABBBATTING CAGE FOUNDATION PLAN - (ALTERNATE #1)1CGENERAL NOTE:NIC STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS I SECTIONCSECTIONASADDLE DETAIL1SECTIOND416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232EMBED PLATE - EP1 & EP22TYPICAL CORNER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL6TYPICAL PERIMETER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL745TYPICAL BEAMINTERSECTION DETAILTYPICAL BEAMCORNER DETAILTYPICAL CONSTRUCTIONJOINT SLAB-ON-GRADE DETAIL3SECTIONB TYP MASONRY DOWEL DETAIL2416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232TYP CMU WALL SECTION - (ALTERNATE #8)ASECTIONBMONUMENT SIGN1SECTIONCBCSTRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS II NIC 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232MASONRY BOND BEAM5REINFORCING @REINFORCING @ MASONRY4OF GROUTING BLOCK1LOW LIFT METHOD REINF DETAIL2TYP CMU WALLS STEP DETAIL3TYP CMU BOND BEAMCONTROL JOINT7EXPANSION JOINT6FLUSH WALL PILASTER8TYPICAL CMU SECTIONS & DETAILS NICNIC 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 6751 09/08/202509/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 6752 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 00 – GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 1.Give all requisite notices, file plans if required, obtain and pay for all permits and pay all deposits and fees necessary for the installation of the plumbing work. Obtain and pay for all inspections required by all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or public authority having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for certificates of such inspections, and file such certificates with Owner. 2.Bidders shall examine all Drawings and Specification. Bidders must be familiar with the codes, rules, regulations (and the local interpretations) in effect at the site of the work. 3.The plumbing plans are intended to be diagrammatic and are based on one manufacturer’s equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact location, the exact dimensions, or all the details of the equipment. The Contractor shall verify the actual dimensions of the equipment proposed to ensure that the equipment will fit in the available space. 4.Installation shall be within the limitations imposed by the architectural, structural, electrical, and mechanical requirements, with adequate space for maintenance. 5.All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one year, beginning with the date of acceptance of the project in writing. Special warranties will be called for under some sections of equipment. This warranty shall be in writing and shall include written copies of factory warranties with expiration dates on items of equipment where the warranty date might differ from the acceptance date, such as five-year warrant of sealed refrigerant systems. No warranty shall start before the acceptance date. 6.REQUIRED SUBMITTALS: a.Submittals shall be clearly marked to show the intended item, with identification as to unit number or other marking to show location, service, and function. Submittals not marked to identify the equipment and application will be rejected. b.The supplier, by submitting, certifies that the materials or equipment proposed is satisfactory for the application intended, including adverse conditions that may prevail at the job site, and that materials and equipment are in current production with no known plans to cease production. c.Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders; that the purpose of submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept; and that this understanding is demonstrated by indicating which equipment and materials he or she intends to furnish and install and the fabrication and installation methods he or she intends to use. d.Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between submittals and Contract documents are discovered either prior to or after submittals are processed by the Engineer, the Contract Documents shall control and shall be followed. e.Submittals shall include: (1) Pipe, valves, insulation, etc. (2) Plumbing fixtures. 7.At the close of the job, prior to final review, five bound copies of the following maintenance and operations manuals on all equipment shall be submitted by transmittal to the Architect or Engineer for review and acceptance. a.Equipment warranties. b.Contractor’s warranty. c.Parts list and manuals for all equipment. d.Operating Instruction (in writing). e.Written instructions on maintenance and care of the system. 8.Material and equipment shall be the standard catalog products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturer of products conforming to the Specification. 9.When any material or equipment is identified on the plans or in the Specifications by reference to one manufacturer’s name or model number, it is intended to establish a required standard of design and quality, and it is not intended to limit competition. It is understood that the phrase “or accepted equivalent” is hereby inserted following the one manufacturer’s name, whether such phrase occurs or not. 10.Where three names are given for any equipment, the Contractor shall furnish one of named manufacturers. 11.All work shall be concealed in walls, chases or above ceilings, unless specifically shown to be exposed. 12.All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in such a way that all components requiring access are so located and installed that they may be serviced, replaced, etc., by service people with normal service tools and equipment. If any equipment or components are shown in such a position that this Contractor cannot comply with the above, the Contractor shall notify the General Contractor and attempt to resolve the problem of access. If this consultation is not successful, the Architect and Engineer shall be notified in writing and a decision requested. 13.Install unions or flanges at all piping connections to equipment. 14.Cutting, patching, furring, painting, electrical, mechanical, etc., shall be done by the affected trade at this Contractor’s expense for changes required in work already installed or work required by other trades for changes made by this Contractor in type or size of equipment purchased. 15.Openings in floors, walls, and roof shall be furnished by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall inform the General contractor of the location and size required. This contractor shall furnish all sleeves, frames, including framing between joist unless shown on the Architectural or Structural Drawings, access doors, prefabricated curbs, and other accessories necessary for a complete installation. Only those items specifically shown and/or specified in other Sections are excluded. 16.Flashing of roof for curbs, pipes, stands, etc., shall be by the General Contractor (roofer). Curbs and counter flashing shall be by this Contractor. 17.Power wiring, including final connections, is by the Electrical Contractor. (This Contractor shall install all motors and furnish the starting equipment to the Electrical Contractor for installation. Control wiring, including 115 volt from power source, conduit, switches, thermostats, interlock, etc., shall be furnished by this Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings. This Contractor shall see that the electrical equipment does not block access to service areas of equipment, i.e., disconnect switches mounted on the compressor or control access doors of equipment.). 18.Furnish and install all special foundations and supports required for equipment installed under this Section, unless they are a part of the building structure and are shown in other Sections. 19.All work shall be in accordance with the following rules and regulations and any applicable laws. International Plumbing Code (IPC). Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). International Energy Conservation Code (IECC). 20.Where any of the above are at variance with the Drawings and Specification, the code requirements shall take precedence and any cost necessary to meet these shall be included in the Contract. 21.All metal items inside the building subject to rusting, and all ferrous metal exposed to weather, shall be given one coat of rust preventive primer as soon as installed. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates shall comply with VOC requirements of Green Seal Standard GC-03. Maximum 250 g/L VOC content. 22.In addition to the warranty of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, Contractor shall and hereby does warrant all materials, workmanship and equipment furnished and installed by him to be free from defects for a period of one year after date of final completion of Contract, or from full occupancy of the building by the Owner (whichever is earlier). Should any defects in material, workmanship, or equipment be made known to Contractor within one year warranty period, Contractor shall replace such materials, workmanship, or equipment without charge. 23.The Contractor shall coordinate and make provisions for final connection to all fixtures, equipment and any connections to equipment furnished by others, for a complete and operating system. SECTION 22 05 23 – VALVES 1.Provide valves of the same manufacturer throughout where possible. 2.All valves shall be manufactured in the United States. 3.Provide threaded valves for pipe sizes 2-inches and smaller. 4.Provide flanged or grooved end butterfly valves for pipe sizes 2-1/2-inches and larger. 5.Install valves for shutoff and isolating service. 6.Use Class 150 bronze body ball and check valves for water services 2-inches and under. Use Class 150 iron butterfly and check valves on sizes 2-1/2-inches and larger. 7.Provide shutoff valves and check valves on discharge of pumps. 8.Where valves are installed concealed in pipe chases or above inaccessible ceilings, provide access door with concealed hinge and key operated locks. 9.Lead-free valves shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex F and NSF/ANSI 372. Lead-free valves shall be installed in systems that deliver water for human consumption. SECTION 22 05 29 – SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1.Provide electro-galvanized steel hanger rods. 2.Group pipe where possible on trapeze hangers. 3.Provide two layers of PVC tape if ferrous hangers are used. 4.Provide sleeves at all wall and floor penetrations. 5.Pipe hangers on insulated lines shall be sized to fit the outside of the insulation. Provide galvanized sheet metal saddles at hanger locations. 6.Support piping with all thread rod and clevis hangers. Group pipe where possible on trapeze hangers constructed of angle iron or unistrut. Attach piping to support the U-bolts or suitable pipe clamps. 7.Prime coat non-galvanized or non-plated steel hangers, reinforcements and supports. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates shall comply with VOC requirements of Green Seal Standard GC-03. Maximum 250 g/L VOC content. 8.Flash and counterflash where plumbing piping passes through weather or waterproof walls, floors and roofs. 9.Provide lead flashing at all vent pipe penetrations of the roof. 10.Seal all pipes passing through walls and floors with fire rated silicone foam fire-stop sealant. 11.Provide anchors properly sized to withstand the forces of expansion and contraction. SECTION 22 05 53 – PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 1. Provide pipe labeling identifying all piping systems. SECTION 22 07 00 – PLUMBING INSULATION 1.Provide thermal insulation on all PVC piping installed in a return air plenum. 2.Provide thermal insulation on domestic cold and hot water and hot water return piping. 3.Provide thermal insulation on all condensate piping. 4.Provide insulation where required to prevent freezing or condensation. 5.All insulation products shall comply with ASTM E-84 smoke developed rating of 50, fuel contributed rating of 50 and flame spread rating of 25. 6.Insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves. 7.Provide thermal insulation on piping excluding valves, strainers, and unions. Insulation shall be heavy-duty pre-molded glass fiber insulation with all service jacket and self-sealing lap. Taper insulation at valves and miter insulation at fittings and finish with mastic. 8.For exterior insulated piping provide aluminum jacket with bands on 12-inch centers. 9.Insulation system shall be weatherproof. 10.Insulation thickness shall be according to the following table: 11.Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 12.Insulated piping exposed outdoors shall be covered with 0.016-inch thick corrugated aluminum jacketing secured with aluminum bands. Provide pre-molded aluminum fitting covers from fitting, valves, etc. Seal all joints with silicone sealant. SECTION 22 20 00 – PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 1.Sanitary waste and vent piping underground shall be Schedule 40 PVC-DWV with solvent weld joints. 2.Sanitary waste and vent piping aboveground shall be Schedule 40 PVC-DWV with solvent weld joints. 3.Domestic water piping above grade shall Be Type L hard temper copper pipe with wrought copper fittings and silver soldered connections or press-fit type fittings, or straight lengths of PEX-A with expansion fittings. . 4.Lead-free components shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex F and NSF/ANSI 372. Lead-free components shall be installed in systems that deliver water for human consumption. SECTION 22 40 00 – PLUMBING FIXTURES 1.Water closets shall be 1.28 GPF. 2.Urinals shall be 0.5 GPF. 3.Lavatories shall be counter mounted or wall hung, with 0.5 GPM faucets. 4.Service sinks shall be floor mounted. 5.Electric water coolers on each floor shall be wall hung and suitable for handicapped use. 6.Provide carriers for all wall mounted fixtures. 7.All plumbing fixtures shall be manufactured in the United States. 8.Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the drawings. 9.Lead-free components shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex F and NSF/ANSI 372. Lead-free components shall be installed in systems that deliver water for human consumption. DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL SECTION 23 05 00 – GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.Give all requisite notices, file plans if required, obtain and pay for all permits and pay all deposits and fees necessary for the installation of the mechanical work. Obtain and pay for all inspections required by all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or public authority having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for certificates of such inspections, and file such certificates with Owner. 2.Bidders shall examine all Drawings and Specification. Bidders must be familiar with the codes, rules, regulations (and the local interpretations) in effect at the site of the work. 3.The mechanical plans are intended to be diagrammatic and are based on one manufacturer’s equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact location, the exact dimensions, or all the details of the equipment. The Contractor shall verify the actual dimensions of the equipment proposed to ensure that the equipment will fit in the available space. 4.Installation shall be within the limitations imposed by the architectural, structural, electrical, and plumbing requirements, with adequate space for maintenance. 5.All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one year, beginning with the date of acceptance of the project in writing. Special warranties will be called for under some sections of equipment. This warranty shall be in writing and shall include written copies of factory warranties with expiration dates on items of equipment where the warranty date might differ from the acceptance date, such as five-year warrant of sealed refrigerant systems. No warranty shall start before the acceptance date. 6.REQUIRED SUBMITTALS: a.Submittals shall be clearly marked to show the intended item, with identification as to unit number or other marking to show location, service, and function. Submittals not marked to identify the equipment and application will be rejected. b.The supplier, by submitting, certifies that the materials or equipment proposed is satisfactory for the application intended, including adverse conditions that may prevail at the job site, and that materials and equipment are in current production with no known plans to cease production. c.Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders; that the purpose of submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept; and that this understanding is demonstrated by indicating which equipment and materials he or she intends to furnish and install and the fabrication and installation methods he or she intends to use. d.Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between submittals and Contract documents are discovered either prior to or after submittals are processed by the Engineer, the Contract Documents shall control and shall be followed. e.Submittals shall include: (1)All equipment; cooling, heating, ventilation, etc. (2)Voltage, phase, and amps of each electrical item such as motors, heaters, etc. (3)All auxiliary equipment. (4)Ductwork shop drawings, insulation, etc. (5)Supply and return registers, grilles, etc. (6)Pipe, valves, insulation, etc. 7.At the close of the job, prior to final review, five bound copies of the following maintenance and operations manuals on all equipment shall be submitted by transmittal to the Architect or Engineer for review and acceptance. a.Equipment warranties. b.Contractor’s warranty. c.Parts list and manuals for all equipment. d.Balance and Test readings. e.Operating Instruction (in writing). f.Written instructions on maintenance and care of the system. 8.Material and equipment shall be the standard catalog products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturer of products conforming to the Specification. 9.When any material or equipment is identified on the plans or in the Specifications by reference to one manufacturer’s name or model number, it is intended to establish a required standard of design and quality, and it is not intended to limit competition. It is understood that the phrase “or accepted equivalent” is hereby inserted following the one manufacturer’s name, whether such phrase occurs or not. 10.Where three names are given for any equipment, the Contractor shall furnish one of named manufacturers. 11.All work shall be concealed in walls, chases or above ceilings, unless specifically shown to be exposed. 12.All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in such a way that all components requiring access (such as drain pans, drains, fire dampers, control dampers, control operators, motors, drives, etc.) are so located and installed that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated, etc., by service people with normal service tools and equipment. If any equipment or components are shown in such a position that this Contractor cannot comply with the above, the Contractor shall notify the General Contractor and attempt to resolve the problem of access. If this consultation is not successful, the Architect and Engineer shall be notified in writing and a decision requested. 13.Install unions or flanges at all piping connections to equipment. 14.Cutting, patching, furring, painting, electrical, plumbing, etc., shall be done by the affected trade at this Contractor’s expense for changes required in work already installed or work required by other trades for changes made by this Contractor in type or size of equipment purchased. 15.Openings in floors, walls, and roof shall be furnished by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall inform the General contractor of the location and size required. This contractor shall furnish all sleeves, frames, including framing between joist unless shown on the Architect or Structural Drawings, access doors, prefabricated curbs, and other accessories necessary for a complete installation. Only those items specifically shown and/or specified in other Sections are excluded. 16.Flashing of roof for curbs, pipes, stands, etc., shall be by the General Contractor (roofer). Curbs and counter flashing shall be by this Contractor. 17.Power wiring, including final connections, is by the Electrical Contractor. (This Contractor shall install all motors and furnish the starting equipment to the Electrical Contractor for installation. Control wiring, including 115 volt from power source, conduit, switches, thermostats, interlock, etc., shall be furnished by this Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings. This Contractor shall see that the electrical equipment does not block access to service areas of equipment, i.e., disconnect switches mounted on the compressor or control access doors of equipment.). 18.Furnish and install all special foundations and supports required for equipment installed under this Section, unless they are a part of the building structure and are shown in other Sections. 19.Project Windstorm Requirements: a.This project is located within a windstorm area and requires the special attention associated with windstorm zones. b.The contractor is responsible for providing construction services as needed to satisfy the requirements of the construction drawings and specifications, the referenced building code and the Texas Department of Insurance Windstorm Inspection Program. All the construction administration cost associated with the submittal preparation, submittal review, inspection coordination, including all general conditions, overhead and profit, shall be included in the contractor bid. c.For the new exterior mechanical equipment, exposed exterior ductwork and exposed exterior piping, the engineering design for these assemblies, including their support components (curbs, stands, sleepers, etc.) and anchoring of these items to the structure shall be a delegated design, performed by the equipment, ductwork and piping manufacturer. Hence, this responsibility falls on the general contractor, their subcontractors, and their vendors. Neither the mechanical engineer or windstorm inspector is responsible for designing the rooftop equipment assemblies, ductwork/piping assemblies nor the anchoring of these assemblies to the structure. Submittals of the engineered assemblies need to be provided by the contractor for review and for use in field inspections. 20.All work shall be in accordance with the following rules and regulations and any applicable laws. International Building Code (IBC). International Mechanical Code (IMC). International Plumbing Code (IPC). International Fire Code (IFC). National Electrical Code (NEC). Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). International Energy Conservation Code (IECC). 21.Where any of the above are at variance with the Drawings and Specification, the code requirements shall take precedence and any cost necessary to meet these shall be included in the Contract. 22.All metal items inside the building subject to rusting, and all ferrous metal exposed to weather, shall be given one coat of rust preventive primer as soon as installed. 23.In addition to the warranty of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, Contractor shall and hereby does warrant all materials, workmanship and equipment furnished and installed by him to be free from defects for a period of one year after date of final completion of Contract, or from full occupancy of the building by the Owner (whichever is earlier). Should any defects in material, workmanship, or equipment be made known to Contractor within one year warranty period, Contractor shall replace such materials, workmanship, or equipment without charge. 24.Demolition and Relocations: a.The Contractor shall modify, remove, and relocate all materials and items so indicated on the Drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials except asbestos shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination as directed by the Owner. Non-salvageable materials and equipment shall become the property of the Contractor and removed from the site. b.Asbestos abatement is being performed under a separate Contract. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner of any area where the Contractor suspects or becomes aware of the existence of asbestos or other potentially hazardous materials on this project. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide written request to the Owner for the services of an Industrial Hygienist who shall provide all necessary testing, analysis and documentation of the status of any areas where asbestos or potentially hazardous materials exist. The Industrial Hygienist shall then prepare plans and specifications which provide for the removal of all potentially hazardous substances and their disposal in a lawful manner. The Contractor shall not remove or disturb asbestos or other potentially hazardous substances until he has obtained approval in writing of the methods he shall use from the authorities having jurisdiction. c.All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocation and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. Where items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the Contractor’s responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as approved by the Owner, at not additional cost to the Owner or the Architect. The Contractor may, at his discretion, and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and items to be relocated. d.Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. e.The Contactor before beginning work in existing areas shall send proper notices and receive written permission from the Owner to enter the areas, shall make necessary arrangements and perform other services required for the care, protection, and in-service maintenance of all mechanical, plumbing, electrical, communications and fire protection systems. The Contractor shall provide temporary or new services to all existing facilities as required to maintain their proper operation when normal services are disrupted as a result of the work being accomplished under this project. Outages or services as required by the new installations will be permitted but only at a time approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall allow the Owner two weeks in order to schedule required outages. The time allowed for outages will not be during normal working hours unless otherwise approved by the Owner. All costs of outages, including overtime charges, shall be included in the Contract amount. f.Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access to existing utilities, Contractor shall remove doors, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, wiring, light fixtures, air conditioning ductwork, and equipment, etc. to provide this access and shall reinstall same upon completion of work in the areas affected. g.Where partitions, walls, floors, or ceilings of existing construction are indicated to be removed, the Contractor shall remove and reinstall in locations approved by the Architect all devices required for the operation of the various systems installed in the existing construction. This is to include but is not limited to temperature control system devices, electrical switches, relays, fixtures, piping, conduit, etc. h.The Contractor shall carefully measure existing facilities before preparing Shop Drawings. SECTION 23 05 13 – MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS 1.Provide high efficiency motors. 2.Motors less than 3/4 HP shall be single phase. 3.Motors 3/4 HP and larger shall be three phase. 4.Horsepower rating shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the prevailing ambient temperatures without exceeding the NEMA standard temperature rises for the motor insulation. 5.Belt driven equipment motors 15 HP and less shall have adjustable speed pulleys. Motors 20 HP and above shall have fixed drive and shall be provided with an extra set of pulleys for final testing and balancing. 6.Motor speeds shall be nominally 1800 RPM when applied to a 60 hertz system. 7.A motor controller shall be provided for each piece of motor driven equipment, except when such motor is below 1/8 HP and when internally protected. The controller shall have thermal protective devices. 8.Provide reduced voltage starters on each motor 50 HP and larger. 9.Whenever variable frequency PWM drives are installed to control AC motors, a maintenance-free, circumferential, conductive microfiber shaft grounding ring (SGR) shall be installed on the AC motor to discharge shaft currents to ground. Grounding ring shall be similar to that manufactured by AEGIS®SGR. Device to be installed per manufacturers recommendations. 10.Electric motors shall meet the minimum efficiency requirements of following Tables C405.8(1) through C405.8(4) when tested and rated in accordance with the DOE 10 CFR 431. The efficiency shall be verified through certification under an approved certification program or, where a certification program does not exist, the equipment efficiency ratings shall be supported by data furnished by the motor manufacturer. a. Exception: The standards in this section shall not apply to the following exempt electric motors: i.Air-over electric motors. ii.Component sets of an electric motor. iii.Liquid-cooled electric motors. iv.Submersible electric motors. v.Inverter-only electric motors. TABLE C405.8(1) MINIMUM NOMINAL FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCIES FOR NEMA DESIGN A, NEMA DESIGN B, AND IEC DESIGN N MOTORS (EXCLUDING FIRE PUMP) ELECTRIC MOTORS AT 60 HZ MOTOR HP (KW) NOMINAL FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCY (%) AS OF JUNE 2016 2-POLE 4-POLE 6-POLE 8-POLE ENCLOSED OPEN ENCLOSED OPEN ENCLOSED OPEN ENCLOSED OPEN 1 (0.75) 77 77 85.5 85.5 82.5 82.5 75.5 75.5 1.5 (1.1) 84 84 86.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 78.5 77 2 (1.5) 85.5 85.5 86.5 86.5 88.5 87.5 84 86.5 3 (2.2) 86.5 85.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 85.5 87.5 5 (3.7) 88.5 86.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 88.5 7.5 (5.5) 89.5 88.5 91.7 91 91 90.2 86.5 89.5 10 (7.5) 90.2 89.5 91.7 91.7 91 91.7 89.5 90.2 15 (11) 91 90.2 92.4 93 91.7 91.7 89.5 90.2 20 (15) 91 91 93 93 91.7 92.4 90.2 91 Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness (in inches) Fluid Operating Temperature Range and Usage (◦F) Insulation Conductivity Nominal Pipe or Tube Size (inches) Conductivity Btu▪in./(h▪ft2▪◦F) Mean Rating Temperature, ◦F <1 1 to <1-1/2 1-1/2 to <4 4 to <8 ≤8 >350 0.32-0.34 250 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 251-350 0.29-0.32 200 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 201-250 0.27-0.30 150 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 141-200 0.25-0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 85-140 0.21-0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 40-84 0.21-0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 <40 0.20-0.26 50 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 09/08/2025 09/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 6753 25 (18.5) 91.7 91.7 93.6 93.6 93 93 90.2 91 30 (22) 91.7 91.7 93.6 94.1 93 93.6 91.7 91.7 40 (30) 92.4 92.4 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.1 91.7 91.7 50 (37) 93 93 94.5 94.5 94.1 94.1 92.4 92.4 60 (45) 93.6 93.6 95 95 94.5 94.5 92.4 93 75 (55) 93.6 93.6 95.4 95 94.5 94.5 93.6 94.1 100 (75) 94.1 93.6 95.4 95.4 95 95 93.6 94.1 TABLE C405.8(2) MINIMUM NOMINAL FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCIES FOR NEMA DESIGN C, AND IEC DESIGN H MOTORS ELECTRIC MOTORS AT 60 HZ MOTOR HP (KW) 4-POLE 6-POLE 8-POLE ENCLOSED OPEN ENCLOSED OPEN ENCLOSED OPEN 1 (0.75)85.5 85.5 82.5 82.5 75.5 75.5 1.5 (1.1)86.5 86.5 87.5 86.5 78.5 77 2 (1.5)86.5 86.5 88.5 87.5 84 86.5 3 (2.2)89.5 89.5 89.5 88.5 85.5 87.5 5 (3.7)89.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 86.5 88.5 7.5 (5.5)91.7 91 91 90.2 86.5 89.5 10 (7.5)91.7 91.7 91 91.7 89.5 90.2 15 (11)92.4 93 91.7 91.7 89.5 90.2 20 (15)93 93 91.7 92.4 90.2 91 25 (18.5)93.6 93.6 93 93 90.2 91 30 (22)93.6 94.1 93 93.6 91.7 91.7 40 (30)94.1 94.1 94.1 94.1 91.7 91.7 50 (37)94.5 94.5 94.1 94.1 92.4 92.4 60 (45)95 95 94.5 94.5 92.4 93 75 (55)95.4 95 94.5 94.5 93.6 94.1 100 (75)95.4 95.4 95 95 93.6 94.1 TABLE C405.8(3) MINIMUM AVERAGE FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCY POLYPHASE SMALL ELECTRIC MOTORS MOTOR HORSEPOWER OPEN MOTORS NUMBER OF POLES 2 4 6 SYNCHRONOUS SPEED (RPM)3600 1800 1200 0.25 -65.6 69.5 67.5 0.33 -69.5 73.4 71.4 0.50 -73.4 78.2 75.3 0.75 -46.8 81.1 81.7 1.0 -77.0 83.5 82.5 1.5 -84.0 86.5 83.8 2.0 -85.5 86.5 N/A 3.0 -85.5 86.9 N/A TABLE C405.8(4) MINIMUM AVERAGE FULL-LOAD EFFICIENCY FOR CAPACITOR-START CAPACITOR-RUN AND CAPACITOR-START INDUCTION-RUN SMALL ELECTRIC MOTORS MOTOR HORSEPOWER OPEN MOTORS NUMBER OF POLES 2 4 6 SYNCHRONOUS SPEED (RPM)3600 1800 1200 0.25 -66.6 68.5 62.2 0.33 -70.5 72.4 66.6 0.5 -72.4 76.2 76.2 0.75 -76.2 81.8 80.2 1 -80.4 82.6 81.1 1.5 -81.5 83.8 N/A 2 -82.9 84.5 N/A 3 -84.1 N/A N/A SECTION 23 05 29 – SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1.Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs. 2.Provide electro-galvanized steel hanger rods. 3.Group pipe where possible on trapeze hangers. 4.Provide copper plated hangers for copper pipe or two layers of PVC tape if ferrous hangers are used. 5.Support ductwork in accordance with SMACNA Standards. 6.Provide sleeves at all wall and floor penetrations. 7.Pipe hangers on insulated lines shall be sized to fit the outside of the insulation. Provide galvanized sheet metal saddles at hanger locations. 8.Support vertical piping with riser clamps. 9.Provide housekeeping pads at all equipment. 10.Support piping with all thread rod and clevis hangers. Group pipe where possible on trapeze hangers constructed of angle iron or unistrut. Attach piping to support the U-bolts or suitable pipe clamps. 11.Prime coat non-galvanized or non-plated steel hangers, reinforcements and supports. 12.Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through weather or waterproof walls, floors and roofs. 13.Provide curbs for all roof mounted equipment. 14.Seal all pipes passing through walls and floors with fire rated silicone foam fire-stop sealant. 15.Provide anchors properly sized to withstand the forces of expansion and contraction. SECTION 23 05 53 – MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 1.Provide pipe labeling identifying all piping systems. 2.Provide aluminum name plates for each piece of equipment. 3.Provide brass valve tags on all valves. Provide schedule listing all valves by number and identifying the service and the valve type. SECTION 23 07 00 – MECHANICAL INSULATION 1.Provide thermal insulation on all chilled water and heating water pipes. 2.Provide thermal and acoustical insulation on all supply, return and outside air ductwork. 3.Provide thermal insulation for all heat exchangers and equipment. 4.Provide board insulation for all ducts exposed to view and also in mechanical rooms. 5.Provide insulation where required to prevent freezing or condensation. 6.All insulation products shall comply with ASTM E-84 smoke developed rating of 50, fuel contributed rating of 50 and flame spread rating of 25. 7.Insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves. 8.Provide thermal insulation on piping including valves strainers, and unions. Insulation shall be heavy-duty pre-molded glass fiber insulation with all service jacket and self-sealing lap. Mitre insulation at valves and fittings or wrap with glass fiber blanket and finish with glass fabric and mastic. 9.For exterior insulated piping provide aluminum jacket with bands on 12-inch centers. 10.Insulation system shall be weatherproof. 11.Insulation thickness shall be according to the following table: 12.Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 13.Insulated piping exposed outdoors and up to 7’-0” above floor in mechanical rooms shall be covered with 0.016-inch thick corrugated aluminum jacketing secured with aluminum bands. Provide pre-molded aluminum fitting covers from fitting, valves, etc. Seal all joints with silicone sealant. 14.Finish insulated ductwork exposed outdoors with 0.016-inch thick textured aluminum overlapped and adhered with rivets so as not to penetrate the vapor barrier. Seal all joints with silicone sealant. On outdoor ducts, overlap and seal rivets in a manner to shed rainwater and provide a weathertight seal. 15.Where indicated on the Drawings, ductwork shall be lined with 1-inch thick 1.5 pcf mat faced duct liner. Duct dimensions are net inside 16.Supply and return air ducts and plenums shall be insulated with a minimum of R-6 insulation where located in unconditioned spaces and where located outside the building with a minimum R-8 insulation in Climate Zones 1 through 4 and a minimum of R-12 insulation in Climate Zones 5 though 8. Where located within a building envelope assembly, the duct or plenum shall be separated from the building exterior or unconditioned or exempt spaces by a minimum of R-8 insulation in Climates Zones 1 through 4 and a minimum of R-12 insulation in Climate Zones 5 through 8. 17.Insulation seams on ductwork and supply grilles shall be sealed with mastic. 18.Provide sealed insulation pins for insulated ductwork over 18” wide. SECTION 23 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 1.COMMISSIONING AGENCY: The commissioning agency (CA) has been contracted directly with the owner for this project. The CA has overall responsibility for planning and coordinating the commissioning process. However, commissioning involves all parties to the design and construction process, including the mechanical (Division 23) contractor, and all specialty sub-contractors within Division 23, such as sheet metal, piping, refrigeration, water treatment, and controls, plus major equipment suppliers as required. 2.CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY: The mechanical (Division 23) contractor’s responsibilities are defined in Division 01 of the specifications. These responsibilities apply to all specialty sub-contractors and major equipment suppliers within Division 23. Each contractor and supplier shall review Division 01, and their bids shall include for carrying out the work described, as it applies to each Section within the Division 23 specifications, individually and collectively. SECTION 23 31 00 – DUCTWORK 1.All ductwork shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet metal. 2.All ductwork shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA’s HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Fourth Edition - 2020. a.Low-pressure Duct Systems: Longitudinal and transverse joints, seams and connections of supply and return ducts operating at a static pressure less than or equal to 2 inches water gauge (w.g.) (498 Pa) shall be securely fastened and sealed with welds, gaskets, mastics (adhesives), mas-tic-plus-embedded-fabric systems or tapes installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Pressure classifications specific to the duct system shall be clearly indicated on the construction documents in accordance with the International Mechanical Code. 3.Ductwork installed indoors and exposed to view shall be constructed as double wall ductwork. System shall consist of perforated galvanized steel inner liner, neoprene coated glass fiber acoustical insulation and spiral would galvanized outer duct. Materials shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof, and odorless. A tightly woven fiberglass cloth equal to BGF Industries or JPS Style 7628 shall be installed between the acoustical blanket and perforated inner duct. a.Material shall comply with ASTM E-84, NFPA 90A-2018 and UL requirements, and shall have the following maximum fire classification values: (1)Flame Spread 25. (2)Fuel Contributed 20. (3)Smoke Developed 0. b.Insulation shall be adequate to prevent condensation on the outside of the outer duct under normal operating conditions. Panels shall be mounted using neoprene gaskets and rubber washers, cadmium plated screws. c.Terminated ends of double wall system with factory made adapters at transition to different construction. 4.Ductwork exposed to weather shall be sealed watertight. 5.Kitchen exhaust duct shall be stainless steel continuously welded with cleanout ports and washdown provisions if necessary. 6.Flexible ducts shall be UL Class 1 air duct consisting of metal flexible ducting, glass fiber insulation and vapor barrier jacket. Maximum flex duct length is 6 feet. 7.Provide fire dampers where ducts penetrate fire separations. SECTION 23 34 00 – CEILING MOUNTED FANS 1.Fan casing shall be constructed of minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel with thermal and acoustical liner. Blower and motor assembly shall be mounted to a minimum 14 gauge reinforcing channel and shall be easily removable from the housing. 2.Wheel shall be forward curved type mounted on a resilient fan and motor base. 3.Motor shall be open drip proof type with permanently lubricated bearings, built-in thermal overload protection and disconnect plug. 4.Fans shall be furnished with backdraft damper. 5.Fans manufactured by Greenheck, Cook and Acme are acceptable provided they meet the Specification. 6.Motors for fans that are not less than 1/12 hp (0.062 kW) and less than 1 hp (0.746 kW) shall be electronically commutated motors or shall have a minimum motor efficiency of 70 percent, rated in accordance with DOE 10 CFR 431. These motors shall have the means to adjust motor speed for either balancing or remote control. The use of belt-driven fans to sheave adjustments for airflow balancing instead of a varying motor speed shall be permitted. SECTION 23 82 39 – ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS 1.Electric heaters shall be UL listed. 2.Comply with all requirements of the National Electrical Code and Division 26 of these Specifications. 3.Equipment capacity shall meet or exceed that scheduled on the drawings. 4.Casing shall be heavy gauge steel with baked enamel finish. Provide threaded connections for hanger rods. 5.Elements shall be high mass, all steel, tubular finned type. 6.Fan shall be direct drive propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced with grease lubricated ball bearings. 7.Air outlet shall be adjustable pattern diffuser on projection models and four-way louvers on horizontal throw models. 8.Provide manual rest thermal overload fuses and all other required safety devices. 9.Install unit in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. SECTION 23 90 00 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 1.All testing, adjusting and balancing shall be done by an independent certified test and balance engineer. 2.Testing and balancing shall be done in accordance with NEBB or AABC Standards. 3.Test, adjust and balance all air systems. 4.Provide sound and vibration measurement. 5.Submit complete report on NEBB or AABC standard forms. 6.Change drives if necessary to accomplish proper air flow at no additional cost to the Owner. 7.Calibrate, set and adjust all automatic temperature controls. Coordinate Test and Balance functions with the Controls Contractor. 8.Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks damper sequences, air and water resets, high- and low-limit stats, etc. 9.Cycle through all safety devices and circuits to verify correct operation. 10.Verify correct electric power supply voltage and trip settings on various overload devices. 11.After Owner Occupancy: After Owner has occupied and using the building, make three additional inspections of the system (at one-month intervals) to: a. Correct any Owner-observed temperature imbalance. b. Check correct operation of equipment and verify by letter to the Engineer on each trip. List in the letter corrections made. DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 00 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1.The separation of Division 26 into sections is for convenience only and is not intended to establish limits of work. 2.Codes, Permits and Inspections: Comply with applicable laws of the Government, State, and community having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for permits required. 3.Electrical work, material, and installation shall conform to the latest accepted editions of the following codes, regulations, and associations: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) American Standards Association (ASA) International Building Code (IBC) National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (UL) International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 4.Material and Workmanship: Materials shall be new, UL approved where a standard has been established. Where no UL standard has been established, obtain written approval from the Engineer prior to placing order. 5.Whenever the words “or equal”, “equivalent”, “acceptable”, or other words with similar intent are used implying judgment to be exercised, the judgment of the Engineer is that which is referenced. 6.Drawings and Specifications: Consider as complementary each to the other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. 7.Coordination: Coordinate work so as to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. 8.Testing: Electrical systems shall be fully tested by the Contractor including, but not limited to, the following: a.Available voltage and ampere load readings on feeders, transformers, and major branch circuits with systems operating at maximum load shall be recorded. b.Test receptacle for circuit continuity and grounding with a Daniel Woodhead or equal status tester. c.Test results shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer on one set of Contract Drawings. 9.Patch and repair existing surfaces, required to be maintained, that are damaged by the Contractor in performing the work. 10.Record Documents for the Owner: Keep at the site one set of plans for the express purpose of daily correcting in red or yellow pencil every change at the time it is made. Prints shall detail actual field dimensions of conduit stub-outs, conduit runs, equipment installation, and conduit routing concealed within slabs or below grade. Mark-up prints shall be turned over to the Owner. 11.Submittals: Provide proposed manufacturer’s literature and dimensioned shop drawings to the Engineer for review. Submittals shall include the following sections of work. a.Section 26 24 16– Branch Circuit Panelboards b.Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices c.Section 26 28 00 – Overcurrent Protective Devices d.Section 26 51 00 – Lighting. VE packages shall include photometrics of proposed fixtures. e.Unsubmitted sections shall be installed as specified. 12.Protection of Materials: Equipment and materials shall be protected against damage from water, dirt, chemical, or mechanical injury. After fixtures have been installed, they shall be completely protected against breakage or the depositing of waste or material therein until the system is accepted. 13.The Contractor shall be responsible for work, existing or new, damaged, by him or his sub-contractor in the executing work. 14.Provide line voltage power connections to Division 22 and Division 23 power supplies, actuators, dampers and control panels. Coordinate with Division 22 and Division 23 for quantities and locations of such connections. 15.Provide one year guarantee on all parts and labor. SECTION 26 05 19 – WIRE AND CABLE 1.Description of Work: Wire and cable for lighting, power, control, and special systems rated 600 volts or less shall be furnished and installed as a part of this Section. 2.Acceptable Manufacturers: a.American Insulated Wire Corp. b.Essex International, Inc. c.Rome Cable. 3.Copper conductor for wire and cable shall be 98% conductivity annealed copper per ASTM B3 and shall be tinned or untinned in accordance with established standards for the type of insulation applied over the conductors. #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid and #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, conductor sizes are based on copper. Conductors shall be copper. 4.Wire and Cable Wire: a.Rated 600 volt A.C. b.Installed in approved raceways or conduit. c.Not less than #12 AWG, except that #14 AWG may be used for control and low voltage wiring. d.Insulation type: THW or THHN-THWN. e.Permanently marked at 24-inch intervals with size, voltage, and temperature ratings. 5.Control/Communications (Low Voltage) Type Wires and Cables: Size, type, and materials, as called for under the specific system and as required by the system equipment manufacturer. 6.Feeder and branch circuit wiring shall be installed using color coded conductors. For conductors #6 and smaller, color coding shall be by factory applied color-impregnated insulation. For conductors #4 and larger, color coding shall be by plastic coated self-sticking markers, colored nylon cable ties, or heat shrink type sleeves. 7.Conductor Identification: Provide identification for feeder conductors within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Identification shall be by means of nylon marker ties, Type “PLM” as manufactured by Panduit Corporation or as approved. 8.Conductor Installation: a.Conductors shall be carefully handled and installed to ensure that maximum tensile and compressive strengths of conductor and insulation are not exceeded and that the conductors are not “kinked” or the insulation damaged. b.Wire pulling compound, when used, shall be UL listed, Ideal “Yellow 77”, Holub “Hi Green”, or approved equal. The use of soap flakes, liquid detergents, or vegetable oils is unacceptable. SECTION 26 05 20 – WIRE CONNECTIONS AND SPLICES 1.Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide connectors and splices for wire and cable rated 600 volt and less. 2.Splices and Connectors (UL 486A, 486B, and 486C): a.Connectors for wires #10 AWG and smaller: Insulated pressure type in accordance with UL 486A or 486C (twist-on splicing connector). 3.Terminations (UL 468A and 468B): a.Terminating kits designed for the conductor and application. 4.Connectors shall be of material compatible with the materials of the conductors to prevent corroding, differences in coefficients of expansion, and electrolysis. 5.Splices and Terminations: Splices in conductors shall be as few as possible. Where joints are necessary, they shall be mechanically strong and well made so that the electrical resistance of a joint shall not exceed that of 2 feet of the conductor. Splices and terminations shall be made only in junction or pull boxes and never in conduit elbows or similar fittings. Splices will not be allowed in panels. SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING 1.Description of Work: Electrical systems and equipment shall be grounded as required by NEC Article 200 and Article 250, as specified herein, and as shown on the Drawings. Nothing in this Specification or on the Drawings shall be construed as exempting the installation from compliance with applicable codes. 2.Materials: a.Connectors shall be industry standard, hot dip galvanized malleable iron or cast bronze or copper alloy nonferrous material which will not cause galvanic action between contact surfaces. b.Clamps, connectors, mechanical lugs, or wire terminals shall be used to bond ground wires together or to junction and panel boxes. c.Ground conductors shall be copper. d.Equipment grounding conductors shall have a green jacket. e.Ground electrode conductors and bonding jumpers shall be bare copper. f.Materials shall be UL listed. 3.Items to be Grounded: The noncurrent carrying metallic parts, components, and materials of the electrical distribution system and utilization equipment connected thereto shall be grounded by means of direct connection to the grounding conductor and the system grounding electrodes. 4.Supplemental Grounding: Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness (in inches) Fluid Operating Temperature Range and Usage (◦F) Insulation Conductivity Nominal Pipe or Tube Size (inches) Conductivity Btu▪in./(h▪ft2▪◦F) Mean Rating Temperature, ◦F <1 1 to <1-1/2 1-1/2 to <4 4 to <8 ≤8 >350 0.32-0.34 250 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 251-350 0.29-0.32 200 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 201-250 0.27-0.30 150 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 141-200 0.25-0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 85-140 0.21-0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 40-84 0.21-0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 <40 0.20-0.26 50 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 09/08/2025 09/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 6754 a.The noncurrent carrying metallic parts of the electrical distribution system shall be grounded by the metal raceway and by a supplemental equipment grounding conductor. b.The equipment grounding conductor shall be insulated with a green cover. c.Equipment grounding conductors shall be provided in the same conduit with the circuit conductors. d.Receptacles must be connected by means of a jumper to the box. This connection shall not be made directly to the ground wires. Ground wires entering a box must be solidly connected together and bonded to the box or enclosure. 5.Raceway and Enclosure Bonding: a.Bonding jumpers shall be provided around remaining concentric or eccentric knock-outs that are punched or otherwise formed in the enclosures and boxes. b.Metal raceways, equipment, frames, enclosure, and other metal noncurrent carrying parts must be bonded together in accordance with NEC 250.96. 6.General: a.Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before connections are made to insure good metal-to-metal contact. b.Splices shall not be permitted in ground conductors except in boxes and enclosures where permitted by the NEC. c.Conductors and connections must be protected from physical damage. SECTION 26 05 33– RACEWAYS 1.Description of Work: Unless otherwise specifically noted, electrical systems wiring specified herein or shown on the Drawings shall be installed in one of the raceway or conduit systems specified in this Section. A raceway is defined as any channel for holding wire, cable, or buss bars that is designed expressly for, and used solely for, this purpose. 2.The raceways to be covered under this Section: a.IMC: Threaded, intermediate metal conduit. b.EMT: Electrical metal tubing. c.FMC: Flexible metal conduit. d.LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. e.PVC: Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit. 3.Flexible nonmetallic conduit systems will not be allowed on this project. 4.Acceptable Manufacturers: a.Conduit – IMC and EMT: (1)Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. (2)LTV/Republic Steel Corp. (3)Triangle PWC Inc. b.Conduit – FMC and LFMC: (1)American Flexible Conduit Company. (2)Anamet, Inc. (3)Electri-flex Company. (4)International Metal Hose. c.Conduit – PVC: (1)Can-Tex Industries. (2)Carlon. (3)Certainteed Corp. 5.IMC: Comply with NEC Article 342, UL 1242 and Fed. Spec. WW-C581. Fittings: Threaded type, cadmium or zinc coated, in accordance with UL 514B. 6.EMT: Comply with NEC Article 358, Fed. Spec. WW-C563, UL 797, and ANSI C80.3. Fittings: watertight compression type. 7.FMC and LFMC: Comply with NEC Article 348 or Article 350, and UL 1. Fittings: Cadmium or zinc coated, in accordance with UL 514. Screw-in type fittings are not acceptable. 8.PVC: Comply with NEC Article 352, Type EPC-40 (EPC-80), NEMA TC2, UL 651, and Federal Specification W-C-1094A. NEMA TC3 fittings. 9.Fire stops shall be O-Z “Fire Seal” type or equal. 10.Wiring Methods: Electrical installations shall consist of insulated conductors installed in conduit, except where specifically indicated, specified otherwise, or required by NEC to be installed otherwise. 11.IMC: a.Shall be installed: (1)For elbow transitions from underground to above grade or slab. (2)Where passing below grade beams, at 12 inches minimum below and to a distance of 5 feet either side thereof. (3)Where passing through footings to a distance of 5 feet either side thereof. b.May be installed: (1)Exposed in unfinished areas to a height of 60 inches above finished floor. (2)Underground, when protected by factory-applied plastic resin epoxy coating. 12.EMT: a.May be installed: (1)Where concealed within the building. (2)Exposed in unfinished areas at least 60 inches above finished floor. b.Shall not be installed: (1)For feeder conduits. (2)In wet/damp locations. (3)Outdoors. 13.FMC and LFMC: a.Shall be installed from the point of connection to vibration producing equipment and machines such as transformers, rotating and reciprocating equipment, to the point of connection with the rigidly supported branch circuit conduit wiring system. Minimum length shall be 24 inches or 12 inches per 1 inch of conduit diameter, whichever is greater. 14.PVC: a.May be installed for underground branch circuit and feeder conduits from a point 5’-0” outside the building line to the point of exposure above grade or the load served. b.May be installed under building slab on grade Where passing below grade beams, install minimum of 12-inches below bottom of beam. c.Provide IMC elbows and IMC conduits for transition from underground to above ground. d.Shall not be installed concealed or exposed within the building. e.Below grade installation: Minimum trade size permitted for below grade installation, 1-inch diameter. f.Make joints watertight. Install couplings, connectors, and elbows using approved adhesive, driving joint tight and ensure permanent adhesive set prior to backfill or conductor installation. g.May be installed in interior, dry spaces per NEC 334.10 in Type III, IV, and V construction. h.Not permitted to be installed in areas described in NEC 334.12. i.Must be secured at least every 4.5’ and not more than 12” from a fitting, box, or cabinet. Reference NEC 334.30 15.Conduit Installation: a.Install parallel with or at right angles to building lines, structural members, ceiling members, and walls. b.Install pull boxes to limit the number of equivalent 90 degree bends in any conduit run to three to prevent exceeding the maximum pulling tension and side wall pressure of installed wire and cable. c.Install conduits passing through fire rated partitions, walls, and floors in a manner so as to maintain the specified and required fire rating. d.Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets using two locknuts where nonmetallic insulating bushings are used and elsewhere with at least one locknut and one metal bushing. e.Provide insulated bushings for conduits 1 inch and larger terminating in unthreaded openings of metal and nonmetallic boxes, cabinets, or enclosure. Bushings for service entrance conduits shall be insulated metal grounding bushings. f.Provide pull wire in empty conduit systems. g.Field cutting and threading: Cut conduit ends square; thread using proper hand or power machines; ream and leave cut ends free of burrs and jagged edges. Threads shall be painted with Thomas and Betts “KOPR-SHIELD” compound. Exposed threads shall be painted with a cold galvanized compound. h.Conduit systems shall be complete and electrically continuous before conductors are installed. i.Provide insulated bushings for conduits terminations and stub-outs in spaces such as plenums, chases, raised floors, and communications equipment rooms where wiring method changes to open wiring. When the conduit end is not threaded, the bushing shall be installed in combination with a threadless connector. 16.Conduit Support: a.Provide support at a maximum of 8 feet on center; at not more than 3 feet from outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, and fittings; and at each elbow. Support conduit by means of pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, and trapeze assembles. The load applied to fasteners and supports shall not exceed one-fourth of the proof test load. Perforated strap iron is unacceptable. b.Fasten to wood surfaces using wood screws; to hollow masonry units using toggle bolts; to concrete and brick surfaces using inserts or expansion bolts; to metal, lumber, and steel work using machine screws or spring tension clamps. Use insert anchors in poured-in-place concrete construction. Threaded C-clamps may be used only on rigid conduit. Do not weld pipe straps or conduits to steel structures. c.Branch circuit conduit systems shall not be supported by suspended ceiling supporting systems. d.Support FMC and LFMC at intervals not exceeding 54 inches on center and within 12 inches of each termination in a junction, pull box, conduit fitting, or cabinet. e.Coordination: Prior to rough-in, coordinate the work of this Section with that of other sections to avoid conflicts of space utilization. 17.Underground Conduits: a.Excavation and Backfill: (1)Excavate along straight lines to the width and depth required for proper installation of conduits. Where excavated below the necessary elevation, backfill and sand and compact to the proper elevation. (2)Where rocks, materials with sharp edges, permanently moist, or unstable ground is encountered, excavate to a depth 4-inches below the specified elevation, and backfill with 4-inches of sand, free of particles that would be retained by a 1/4-inch sieve. (3)Dewater trenches before installing conduit. (4)Backfill in not more than 6-inch lifts, compacted to 95 percent of the density of adjacent soil, with soil materials free of rocks, debris, roots, wood, scrap materials, or vegetable matter. (5)Where necessary to remove sod, remove in large sections and carefully set aside and care for until replaced. Backfill the top 4-inches of trench with topsoil before replacing sod. Carefully replace sod and water thoroughly. If dead or severely damaged, replace with like material or seed as directed by the Architect. b.Underground Conduits Without Concrete Encasement: (1)Install to code required depth, but not less than 24-inches, below finished grade or as detailed in the drawings and at a minimum slope of 3-inches per 100-feet away from buildings. (2)Following backfill and prior to conductor installation, clean each conduit using a testing mandrel not less than 12-inches long with a diameter 1/4-inch less than the inside diameter of the conduit. Pull through the conduit followed by a brush having stiff bristles, until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand, gravel and other contaminates. 18.The minimum bend radius for underground service entrance and feeder conduit – 36 inches except at vertical risers to equipment. SECTION 26 05 34 – BOXES 1.Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide boxes, including outlet, floor, pull, junction, and cable tap boxes and supports associated therewith. 2.Outlet Boxes and Covers: a.Concealed and exposed dry locations except where prohibited herein: One piece die formed 14 gauge zinc galvanized steel, in accordance with UL 514. 3.Junction and Pull Boxes: UL 514 4.Wireways: UL 870. 5.Provide boxes in the raceway system wherever required for pulling conductors, making connections, and mounting devices and fixtures. 6.Boxes: a.Minimum volume required by NEC for the number and size of conductors installed. b.Not less that 1-1/2 inches deep. c.Not less than 4-inches square, except that 4”x2” boxes may be used when only one raceway enters the box. d.4 inches square for two devices and solid ganged boxes for more than two devices. 7.Supports: a.Supports boxes and pendants for surface mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independent of ceiling supports or make adequate provisions for distributing the load over the ceiling supporting members, using approved bar hangers or 1-1/2 inch lathers channel. b.Receptacle outlets shall be installed in light weight stud construction using bar hangers and box clips, Caddy Fasteners No. BHA/BHC or as approved. c.Boxes for switches shall be supported using sheet metal screws, Caddy Fasteners Series “MF” Clips, or approved equal. d.Fixtures, loads of 50 lbs. or more, and for ceiling fans shall be supported from the building structure, independent of box, raceway or suspended ceiling supports. 8.Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise noted, mounting heights for outlets shall be as listed below. Dimensions are from finished floor or work surface to centerline of outlet. Wall Switches 46 inches *Receptacles 18 inches Toggle Switches 46 inches *Desk Telephone Outlets 18 inches * A.C. – Above counter tops (6 inches normally). The exact mounting heights required for these devices shall be coordinated with the Architect. 9.Install boxes so that device covers are plumb and tight against the wall finish. SECTION 26 05 35 – COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 1.Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide a system of raceways, outlet boxes with covers, terminal boards, and grounding to accommodate the installation of communications systems cabling and equipment. 2.Materials: a.Raceways: In accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 33, “Raceways”. b.Boxes: In accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 34, “Boxes”. c.Outlet Coverplates: In accordance with the requirements of Section 26 27 26, “Wiring Devices”. d.Terminal Boards: 3/4” Type AB plywood having two coats if insulating varnish or insulating oil base exterior enamel paint applied before installation on both sides and all edges. 3.Installation: a.Install materials required by the work of this Section in accordance with other Division 26 Specifications pertaining to the material. b.Install terminal boards straight and level at locations indicated on the Drawings. Attach to masonry walls using expansion anchors, to CMU walls using toggle bolts, and to sheetrock and plaster walls using wood or sheet metal lag bolts fastened into the wall supporting structure. The use of toggle bolts in sheetrock and plaster walls is not acceptable. Install anchors at a maximum of 24 inches on center at the perimeter of each board. c.Raceways: EMT with insulating bushings at ends. d.The conduit size for each communication outlet shall be 3/4” minimum. Conduits shall not be grouped for multiple outlets. e.Boxes shall be steel having minimum dimensions of 4” x 4” x 2-1/8”. f.Provide conduit from each outlet location to an accessible location above a lay-in type ceiling. g.Provide 3/4” conduit with #6 AWG bare copper ground wire from main terminal location to and bond to the premises grounding electrode. h.Provide pull wire or mylar cord in empty conduits. SECTION 26 05 53 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1.This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following: a.Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors. b.Operational instruction signs. c.Warning and caution signs. d.Equipment labels and signs. 2.References a.ANSI Standard C2 and A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems”, with regard to type and size of lettering for raceway and cable levels. b.National Electrical Codes, NFPA70. c.NEMA standards applicable to the product provided. d.UL standards applicable to the product provided. e.OSHA standards. 3.Submittals a.Manufacturer’s product data on each product and component. b.Manufacturer’s written installation instructions for each product and component. 4.Acceptable Manufacturers a.Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1)American Labelmark Co. (2)Brimar. (3)Calpico, Inc. (4)Cole-Flex Corp. (5)Emed Co., Inc. (6)George-Ingraham Corp. (7)Ideal Industries, Inc. (8)Kraftbilt. (9)LEM Products, Inc. (10)Markal Corp. (11)National Band and Tag Co. (12)Panduit Corp. (13)Radar Engineers Div., EPIC Corp. (14)Seton Name Plate Co. (15)Standard Signs, Inc. (16)W. H. Brady & Co. (17)3M Scotch Code. b.Other manufacturers equal in design and function will be considered upon submittal of manufacturer’s data. 5.Electrical Identification Products a.General: Provide manufacturer’s standard products of categories and types required for each application unless otherwise indicated. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer’s option, but provide single selection for each application. b.Adhesive Marking Labels for Raceway and Metal-Clad Cable: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive labels with legend indicating voltage and service (Emergency, Lighting, Power, Light, Power dc, Air Conditioning, Communications, Control, Fire). c.Label Size: As follows: (1)Raceways 1-inch and Smaller: 1-1/8-inches high by 4-inches long. (2)Raceways Larger than 1”: 1-1/8-inches high by 8-inches long. d.Color: Black legend on orange background unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations. e.Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils. thick by 1-inch to 2-inches in width. f.Pre-Tensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Raceway and Cable Identification: Flexible acrylic bands sized to suit the raceway diameter and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when coiled around the raceway or cable. g.Underground Line Marking Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, plastic tape compounded for direct-burial service not less than 6-inches wide by 4 mils. thick. Printed legend indicative of general type of underground line below. h.Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letters. i.Aluminum, Wraparound, Cable Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch thick, aluminum sheet, fitted with slots or ears for securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. Provide for legend application with stamped letters or number. j.Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with pre-printed and field-printed legends to suit the application. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener. k.Aluminum-Faced Card Stock Tags: Weather-resistant, 18 point minimum card stock face down both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002-inch thick, and laminated with moisture-resistant acrylic adhesive. Preprint legend to suit the application, and punch for tie fastener. l.Brass or Aluminum Tags: Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener. Dimensions: 2-inches x 2-inches x 19 gage. m.Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 sq. in., or 8-inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black face and punched for mechanical fasteners. n.Baked-Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. o.Exterior Metal-Blacked Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20 gage, galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. p.Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. q.Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50 lb. minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 degrees F to 350 degrees F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding. 6.Installation a.Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code. b.Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and requirements of NEC and applicable ANSI standards. c.Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. d.Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed or accessible raceways of the following systems for identification. Bands shall be pre-tensioned, snap- around, colored plastic sleeves, colored adhesive marking tape, or a combination of the two. Make each color band 2-inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two color markings in contact, side by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 40 foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors: (1)Fire Alarm System: Red. (2)Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and Yellow. (3)Combined Fire Alarm and Watchmen’s Report System: Red and Blue. (4)Watchmen’s Report System: Blue. (5)Security System: Blue and Yellow. (6)Civil Defense System: Yellow. (7)Clock System: Green. (8)Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and Blue. (9)Telephone System: Green and Yellow. e.Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Code required caution sign for boxes shall be pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange background. Install on outside of box cover. Also, label box covers with identity of contained circuits. Use pressure-sensitive plastic labels at exposed locations and similar labels or plasticized card stock tags at concealed boxes. f.Underground Electrical Line Identification: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, signal, and communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line grade. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16-inches; install a single line marker. g.Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway. h.Conductor Color Coding: (1)Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows: 208/120 VOLTS PHASE 480/277 VOLTS Black A Purple Red B Brown Blue C Yellow White **Neutral Gray ** Green Ground Green Verify color coding with local ordinances and standards prior to installation. ** Neutral to have stripe to match phase color. (2)Use conductors with color factory applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows: i.The following field applied color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6-inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration. Conductors #10 and smaller, color code by means of factory applied, color impregnated insulation. Conductors #8 and larger, color code by means of plastic coated self-sticking markers, colored nylon cable ties, or heat shrink type sleeves, or colored vinyl tape. ii.In lieu of pressure-sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification. Apply three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3-inches from the terminal and spaced 3-inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length. j.Power Circuit Identification: Securely fasten identifying metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands to cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pullboxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms with ¼-inch steel letter and number stamps with legend to correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach them with approximately 55-lb. test monofilament line or one-piece self-locking nylon cable ties. k.Tag or label conductors as follows: (1)Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under another contract with identification indicating source and circuits numbers. (2)Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications/signal conductors are present in the same box or enclosure (except for three-circuit, four-wire homeruns), label each conductor or cable. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit number, and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated by means of coded color of conductor insulation. For control and communications/signal wiring, use color coding or wire/cable marking tape at terminations and at intermediate location where conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tapes. (3)Match identification markings with designations used in panelboard Shop Drawings. Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility’s electrical installations. l.Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows: (1)Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, by ANSI, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Locations shall include but not be limited to the following: i.Doors to electrical rooms. ii.Electrical equipment rated over 600V. iii.Doors and enclosures which, when opened, expose electrically energized parts. Install engraved, plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. (2)Emergency Operation Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, or other emergency operations. m.Install equipment/system circuit/device identification as follows: (1)Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of electrical equipment in building, including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication/signal/alarm system, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with 1/2-inch high letter on 1-1/2-inches high label (2-inches high where two lines are required), white lettering in black field. Text shall match terminology and number of the Contract Documents and Shop Drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment: i.Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. ii.Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. iii.Electrical switchgear and switchboards. iv.Motor control centers. v.Motor starters. vi.Pushbutton stations. vii.Power transfer equipment. viii.Contactors. ix.Remote controlled switches. x.Dimmers. xi.Control devices. xii.Transformers. xiii.Power generating units. xiv.Telephone switching equipment. xv.Clock/program master equipment. xvi.Call system master station. xvii.TV/audio monitoring master station. xviii.Fire alarm master station or control panel. xix.Security monitoring master station or control panel. n.Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. o.Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. SECTION 26 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 09/08/202509/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 6755 1.COMMISSIONG AGENCY: The commissioning agency (CA) has been contracted directly with the owner for this project. The CA has overall responsibility for planning and coordinating the commissioning process. However, commissioning involves all parties to the design and construction process, including the electrical (Division 26) contractor, and all specialty sub-contractors within Division 26, such as conduits, lights, and major equipment suppliers as required. 2.CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY a.The electrical (Division 26) contractor’s responsibilities are defined in Division 01 of the specifications. These responsibilities apply to all specialty sub-contractors and major equipment suppliers within Division 26. Each contractor and supplier shall review Division 01, and their bids shall include for carrying out the work described, as it applies to each Section within the Division 26 specifications, individually and collectively. b.Lighting Functional Testing/Commissioning Plan: The Contractor shall complete the tasks below to commission the lighting control system and submit written documentation detailing the tasks below. For each task, list the date performed, person completing the task, the initial setting/condition, actions performed, and final setting condition. Submit documentation at or before substantial completion to facilitate obtaining the Certificate of Occupancy. (1)Ensure all lighting fixtures have lamps installed and are functional. (2)Test all exit signs, emergency lighting fixtures, and emergency ballasts furnished integral to fixtures. (3)Ensure all occupancy sensors have been installed and are operational. (4)Ensure all wall-boxes and scene controllers are installed and operational. (5)Test each individual device for occupancy sensor ceiling mounted. (6)Test 10% of devices for occupancy sensor wall mounted. (7)Verify the following: i.Sensors have been located and aimed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. ii.Status indicators on devices are operational and correct. iii.Devices control lighting fixtures as indicated on drawings. iv.Time delays have been set as indicated on the drawings. v.Movement in adjacent areas and/or cycling of HVAC systems does not false trigger sensors SECTION 26 22 13 – DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER 1.Description of Work: This section includes the work required to provide dry type transformers. 2.Acceptable Manufacturers: a.Eaton. b.ABB. c.Siemens. d.Square D. 3.Transformers: a.Three-phase, 480-volt delta primary and 208/120-volt wye secondary, unless scheduled otherwise. b.Units 15 kVA and larger: Minimum (4) 2-1/2% full capacity primary taps. 4.Insulation Systems: a.2 kVA and Below: 150 degrees C insulation system based upon 80 degrees C maximum temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient. b.3 to 15 kVA: 185 degrees C insulation based upon 115 degrees C maximum temperature rise above 40 degree C ambient. c.15 kVA and Above: 220 degrees C insulation system based upon 150 degrees C maximum temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient. d.Insulation Materials: Flame retardant, not supporting combustion. 5.Core and Coil Assemblies: a.Core: Constructed of high grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, low hysteresis, and eddy current losses. Provide core volume sufficient to allow efficient operation at 10% above highest tap voltage. b.Transformer Coils: Continuous wound copper conductor. c.Transformer Rated 15 kVA and Below: Encapsulate assembled core and coil in a resin and aggregate mixture, providing a moisture proof and shock resistant seal. d.Transformers Rated Greater than 15 kVA: Impregnate assembled core and coil using non-hydroscopic, thermo-setting varnish and heat cure to seal out moisture. Secure the completed core and coil to the base using vibration absorbing mounts, without metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure. 6.Enclosures: a.Units Rated Above 15 kVA: NEMA 2, ventilated and drip proof, constructed of heavy gauge, cold rolled sheet steel. Transformers 75 kVA and smaller: Designed so they can be either floor or wall mounted. Transformers above 75 kVA: Floor-mounted design. b.Units Rated 15 kVA and Below: NEMA 3R, totally enclosed, non-ventilated, constructed of heavy gauge, cold rolled sheet steel and suitable for wall mounting. c.Finish: Degreased, cleaned, phosphatized, primed, and finished with a gray, weather-resistance enamel. 7.Maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 35 degrees C rise above a 40 degrees C ambient. 8.Installation: a.Install in accordance with the recommendations of ANSI C57.12.94 and the requirements of NEC. b.Isolate line and load side terminations using a minimum of 24 inches of FMC or LFMC. c.Provide NEC clearance from adjacent surfaces. d.Provide a 3-1/2-inches housekeeping pad at each transformer. e.Provide vibration isolation at each point of contact with building or supporting members using Korfund Corporation Type EU devices or equivalent. f.Prior to energizing transformers 50 kVA and above, perform insulation resistance and ratio tests as recommended by ANSI C57.12.94. SECTION 26 24 14 - DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 1.This Section includes the work required to provide Distribution Panelboards. 2.References a. NEMA AB 1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers b. NEMA KS 1 – Enclosed Switches. c. NEMA PB 1 – Panelboards. d. NEMA PB 1.1 – Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. e. NEMA PB 1.2 – Application Guide for Ground-Fault Protective Devices for Equipment. f. UL 489 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 3.Submittals a.Submit manufacturer’s product data sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the specified and referenced standards of construction and performance. b.Submit Drawings indicating dimensions, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and ratings, voltage, main, neutral and equipment ground bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating and enclosure type. 4.Product Delivery, Storage and Handling a. Deliver distribution panelboards in factory-fabricated water-resistant wrapping. b. Handle panelboards carefully to avoid damage to material component, enclosure and finish. c. Store in a clean, dry space and protect from the weather. 5.Acceptable Manufacturers a.Eaton. b.ABB. c.Siemens. d.Square D Company. 6.Panelboard Construction a.Molded case circuit breaker or enclosed fusible switch type panelboards as scheduled. b.Enclosure: NEMA Type 1 unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings. c.Box and Cover: Dead front in accordance with NEMA PB-1. Box of code gauge hot dipped galvanized steel. Trim cover of code gauge cold rolled steel. Dead front cover to conceal overcurrent devices and line and load terminations. d.Interior Assembly: Unit construction with busses factory assembled and secured to and insulated from a steel chassis; chassis to incorporate neutral and ground busses and device mounting and support components. Buss and chassis shall be adequate for direct mounting of the largest scheduled frame size or fuse size of overcurrent device. e.Bus: Copper, 1000 amperes/square inch maximum density. f.Bus Configuration: Sequence bussed, entire length of panel. g.Equipment Ground Bus: Copper. h.Neutral Bus: Full capacity. i.Finish: Exterior and interior steel surfaces cleaned and finished with gray enamel over a rust inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color – ANSI 61 gray. j.Integrated Equipment Rating: As scheduled in the Drawings, minimum 10,000 amps symmetrical at 208V and minimum 14,000 amps symmetrical at 480V. k.Spare Capacity: Provide each panelboard with fully bussed space as indicated in the Drawings, complete with mounting hardware required for the indicated frame sizes. l.Circuit Directory: Type written and secured to the inside of the trim door with formed bezel and covered with clear plastic protector. m.Standard of Construction and Performance: Equal to Eaton Types Pow-R-Line 3A and 4. 7.Switching and Overcurrent Protective Devices a.Fusible Switches: Quick-make, quick-break, Type HD conforming to NEMA KS-1, with externally operable handle and equipped with fuse holders to accommodate Class RK1 or L fuses. b.Molded Case Circuit Breakers – UL Listed Conforming to NEMA AB-1: (1)Breakers 400 Ampere Frame and Less: UL listed molded case construction, bolt-on type, integral inverse time delay thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip. Breakers 225 ampere through 400 ampere, provide continuously adjustable magnetic pick-ups of approximately five to ten times trip rating. (2)Breakers 600 Ampere Frame and Above: Provide with micro-processor based RMS current sensing trip, consisting of current sensors, trip unit and flux transfer shunt trip. (3)Interrupting Capacity: Equal to or in excess of available short circuit current indicated for panelboard, as scheduled in the Drawings and as specified in paragraph 2.2 J. (4)Standard of Construction and Performance: Equal to Eaton Series C molded case circuit breakers and Digitrip 310 True RMS micro-processor trip unit. (5)Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be UL listed for series application. 8.Installation k.Install distribution panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and the NEC, and NEMA PB 1.1. l.Anchor firmly to walls and structural surfaces using mechanical fasteners as specified for conduits in Section 26 05 33, “Raceway Systems”. m.Provide engraved name plates at each panelboard as specified in Section 16010, “General Requirements for Electrical Work”. SECTION 26 24 16 - BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 1.Description of Work: This Section includes the work required to provide Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards. 2.Acceptable Manufacturers: a.Eaton. b.ABB. c.Siemens. d.Square D Company. 3.Panelboard Construction: a.Molded case circuit breaker type panelboards as scheduled. b.Enclosure: NEMA Type 1 unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings. c.Box and Cover: Box, dead front cover and trim cover in accordance with NEMA PB-1. Box: Code gauge hot dipped galvanized steel. Dead front cover and trim cover: Code gauge cold rolled steel. Dead front cover to conceal overcurrent devices and line and load terminations. d.Finish: Exterior and interior steel surfaces cleaned and finished with gray enamel over a rust inhibiting phosphatized coating. e.Integrated Equipment Rating: As scheduled in the Drawings, minimum 10,000 amps symmetrical at 208V and minimum 14,000 amps symmetrical at 480V. f.Standard of Construction and Performance: Equal to Eaton Types Pow-R-Line 1, 1A and 2. 4.Bussing: a.Phase Busses: Copper, sequenced entire length of panel. b.Neutral Buss: Full-capacity, Copper. c.Equipment Ground Buss: Copper. 5.Overcurrent Protective Devices: a.Satisfy requirements of Specification Section 26 28 00. b.Interrupting Capacity: Equal to or in excess of available short circuit current indicated for panelboard, as scheduled in the Drawings and as specified. 6.Installation: a.Provide type written directory, secured to the inside of the panel trim door. b.Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, requirements of the NEC, and NEMA PB 1.1. c.Anchor firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secured. d.Test each phase under load to verify phase current balance. Configure loads to provide phase current imbalance not to exceed 20 percent of the total connected load. e.Flush Mounted Panelboards: Provide (3) 3/4-inch conduits with pull wire from each panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. SECTION 26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES 1.Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide wiring devices such as receptacles, switches, and cover plates. 2.Acceptable Manufacturers: a.Arrow Hart b.Hubbell c.Leviton 3.Wiring Devices: Wiring devices shall be installed complete in accordance with these Specifications, single or ganged as required, generally flush mounted. 4.Generally wall switches shall be specification-grade, toggle type, back and side wired, 120/277 volt. 5.Generally receptacle devices shall be specification-grade, grounding type, back and side wired, 125-volt, NEMA 5-20R, unless other NEMA configuration is indicated in the Drawings. 6.The Drawings and Specifications indicate typical configuration requirements and it is the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the proper NEMA configuration for equipment or appliances as required by the equipment furnished. Prior to purchase of any devices coordinate with equipment shop drawings and supplier, and furnish proper protection, connections, and voltage as required by equipment characteristics and as specified. 7.Device plates: One-piece, ganged, specification-grade, high-impact nylon. 8.Receptacle and device plate color: Coordinate with the Architect. SECTION 26 28 00 – OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 1.Description of Work: This Section covers molded case circuit breakers rated 600 volts or less in panelboards. 2.Acceptable Manufacturers: a.Eaton. b.ABB. c.Square D Company. d.Siemens. 3.Circuit Breakers: a.Inverse time tripping characteristics with fixed thermal trip action. b.Permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. c.Calibrated for operation in a minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. d.Labeled to indicate their current and voltage rating. e.Interrupting capacity compatible with the panelboard integrated equipment rating. f.Minimum AIC of 10,000A on 208/120V systems and 14,000A on 480/277 volt systems. g.One, two or three pole molded case circuit breakers as specified on the Drawings. h.Common trip type. 4.Provide overcurrent protection for wiring and equipment in accordance with the NEC. SECTION 26 28 16 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES 1.Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide disconnecting means for service entrance, branch and feeder circuits. 2.Acceptable Manufacturers a.Eaton. b.ABB. c.Siemens. d.Square D Company. 3.Safety Switches: a.NEMA Type HD: Heavy Duty, conforming to NEMA KS-1 and UL 98, quick-make and quick-break type having overcenter toggle action to preclude contact teasing. b.Horsepower rated. c.Equipped with Class R fuseholders and fuses where indicated to be fusible type. d.Dead front construction with removable arc suppressor. e.Front removable 60 degrees C./75 degrees C. UL listed copper/aluminum terminals. f.Current-carrying parts plated by an electrolytic process. g.NEMA enclosure based on ANSI/NEMA 250-1979, suitable for the installed location. h.Enclosures: NEMA 1 unless noted otherwise. 4.Toggle Switch Disconnects: Horsepower rated for motor disconnecting means. 5.Receptacles: Horsepower rated for motor circuits. 6.Service Entrance Disconnects: UL listed as “Suitable for Service Equipment” and provided with neutral and equipment ground buses. 7.Installations a.Provide phenolic label on disconnect switch identifying load served. b.Provide insulated solid neutral terminal unless otherwise indicated. c.Install to provide minimum front clear working space as required by NEC Article 110. d.Install fusible switches at no more than 6’-6” above finished floor to the operating handle in its highest position. e.Mount in the vertical position with ON position being the up position. f.In wet locations and outdoors install with a minimum of 1/4-inch clearance between the enclosure and the mounting surface. g.Provide a label inside of each fused switch indicating the fuse type, ampere rating, and interrupting rating originally specified. h.Motor and Control Circuit Disconnects: Disconnect device shall disconnect simultaneously the control circuits and the power circuits (Reference NEC 430.74). SECTION 26 43 13 – SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES – STANDARD INTERRUPTING 1.Surge protection devices are specified by type and manufacturer on the drawings. 2.Furnish and install surge protection devices with seven protection modes L, G, N. 3.The maximum UL 1449 listed surge ratings for each and/or all of the specified protection modes shall not exceed 1000V in any mode of protection. 4.The SPD System shall be duty life cycle tested to survive 3,000 20KV, 10KA surges, per IEEE C62.41 Category C3 surge current with less than 5% degradation of clamping voltage. 5.Compliant with UL 1283 Standards. 6.Provide 10-year warranty for panelboards. SECTION 26 51 00 - LIGHTING 1.Description of Work: This Section covers lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps. 2.Fixtures shall be as specified and scheduled on the Drawings. 3.Drivers: a.Operate as a parallel circuit allowing continued operation if one or more lamps fail. b.Sustain voltage variation of 10% (voltage and frequency) from normal without damage. c.Tolerate ambient temperatures up to 105 degrees F without damage. d.Meet ANSI C62.41-1991 (transient immunity) and ANSI C82.11-1993 (instant starting sequence and ballast factor). e.Have 10% or less total harmonic distortion. 4.Lamps: Color temperature specified in the Light Fixture Schedule. 5.Luminaires: a.Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. b.Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. c.Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. d.Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. e.Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. f.Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. g.Recessed Luminaires: Ceiling Compatibility – Comply with NEMA LE 4. h.LED Luminaires: (1) Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. (2) Tested in accordance with IES LM-70 and IES LM-80. (3) LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. 6.Set fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceilings and walls, in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures and secure in accordance with manufacturer’s directions and approved shop drawings. The installation shall meet the requirements of NEC. 7.Provide (2) support wires for each fixture. Support wires shall be attached to the structure. 8.Fixtures shall be clean and free of dirt, dust, grease, finger prints, etc., at the completion of the job. 9.Lighting Functional Testing/Commissioning Plan: The Contractor shall complete the tasks below to commission the lighting control system and submit written documentation detailing the tasks below. For each task, list the date performed, person completing the task, the initial setting/condition, actions performed, and final setting condition. Submit documentation at or before substantial completion to facilitate obtaining the Certificate of Occupancy. a.Ensure all lighting fixtures have lamps installed and are functional. b.Test all exit signs, emergency lighting fixtures, and emergency ballasts furnished integral to fixtures. c.Ensure all occupancy sensors have been installed and are operational. d.Ensure all wallbox and scene controllers are installed and operational. e.Test each individual device for occupancy sensor types: OS1, OS2, OS3, and OS4. f.Test 10% of devices for occupancy sensor types: Wallbox type WSD-PDT. g.Verify the following: (1)Sensors have been located and aimed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. (2)Status indicators on devices are operational and correct. (3)Devices control lighting fixtures as indicated on drawings. (4)Time delays have been set as indicated on the drawings. (5)Movement in adjacent areas and/or cycling of HVAC systems does not false trigger sensors. 10.Lighting Standards and Poles: a.Exterior area lighting units of sizes, types and ratings indicated, complete with, but not limited to, poles/standards, brackets, luminaries and other components and accessories required for complete exterior area lighting systems. Provide Bussman Type “HEB” in-line waterproof fuse holders within each pole access for each phase conductor feeding overhead luminaire(s). b.Provide metal, raceway-type, lighting poles and standards, of sizes and types indicated, comprised of shafts, luminary bracket arms, and tenon joints. Equip with grounding connections readily accessible from handhole access doors; and constructed of the following materials and additional construction features: (1)Material: Steel. (2)Configuration: Anchor base type with handhole and cover where indicated. (3)Finishes: Paint finishes over corrosion resisting coatings. (4)Metal Lighting Standard Accessories: Provide accessories for metal lighting standards, including anchor bolts, as recommended by standard manufacturer, of sizes and materials needed to fulfill loading and erection application requirements. 11.Installation of Exterior Lighting Fixtures: a.Install exterior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA’s “Standard of Installation”, NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. b.Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code. c.Fasten electrical lighting fixtures and brackets securely to indicated structural supports; and ensure that installed fixtures are plum and level. 12.Provide equipment grounding connections for exterior lighting fixtures. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 13.Upon completion of installation of exterior lighting fixtures, and associated electrical supply circuitry, apply electrical energy to circuitry to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTION 09/08/202509/08/2025 DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHERSDUGOUTCONCESSIONRESTROOMSBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSCONCESSIONSTORAGEPARKINGPARKINGDUGOUT1MEP-201416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465675609/08/202509/08/2025 DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTSTORAGECONCESSIONRESTROOMSBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSCONCESSIONSTORAGEPARKINGDRIVEWAYDUGOUTGR E E N W O O D D R .1E-301416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46509/08/202509/08/2025 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG DUGOUT DUGOUT BLEACHE R S DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S DUGOUTDUGOUTSTORAGE CONCESSION RESTROOMS ELECT.YARD BLE A C H E R S BLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 6758 09/08/2025 09/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 6759 09/08/202509/08/2025 MENSTAIRSCONCESSIONWOMENCLOSETPRESSBOXSTAIRS416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465676009/08/2025 MENSTAIRSCONCESSIONWOMENCLOSETPRESSBOXSTAIRS416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465 676109/08/2025 MENSTAIRSCONCESSIONWOMENCLOSETPRESSBOXSTAIRS416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465676209/08/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46509/08/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465676409/08/2025 MENSTAIRSCONCESSIONWOMENCLOSET11111PRESSBOXSTAIRS416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465676509/08/2025 MENSTAIRSCONCESSIONWOMENCLOSETP-1P-1P-3P-2P-211111PRESSBOXSTAIRS416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465676609/08/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465676709/08/2025 PROJECT # 23171 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 GREENWOOD SPORTS COMPLEX UNIVERSAL LEAGUE YOUTH BASEBALL BALLPARK 1: FIELDS 1, 2 & 3 BOND 2022/2024 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 A/C AIR CONDITIONING ACP.ACOUSTICAL PANEL ACT.ACOUSTICAL TILE A.D.AREA DRAIN A.D.A.AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT ADJ.ADJUSTABLE A.F.F.ABOVE FINISH FLOOR A.F.G.ABOVE FINISH GRADE A.H.J.ATHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION ALUM ALUMINUM ALT.ALTERNATE ∟ANGLE ASPH.ASPHALT BD.BOARD BLDG.BUILDING BLK.BLOCK BM.BEAM B.U.R.BUILT-UP ROOF C CHANNEL CAB, CABT CABINET CFMF COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING C.J.CONTROL JOINT CL CENTER LINE CLG.CEILING C.M.U.CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COL.COLUMN COMP.COMPRESSIBLE CONC.CONCRETE COND.CONDITION CONT.CONTINUOUS CORR.CORRIDOR CPT.CARPET CT.CERAMIC TILE CTSK.COUNTERSINK C.W.COLD WATER D DRYER D.F.DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIA.DIAMETER DIM.DIMENSION D.P.DAMPPROOFING DTL DETAIL D.S.DOWN SPOUT DWG. DRAWING EA.EACH EDF ELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAIN EL.ELEVATION (HEIGHT) ELEC., ELECT. ELECTRICAL ELEV.ELEVATION (DRAWING) E.J.EXPANSION JOINT EQ.EQUAL EQUIP EQUIPMENT EXIST.EXISTING EXP.EXPANSION EXT.EXTERIOR FB.FACE BRICK FD.FLOOR DRAIN F.E.FIRE EXTINGUISHER F.E.C. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET F.H.C.FIRE HOSE CABINET FIN.FINISH FIXT.FIXTURE FLR.FLOOR FLSHG. FLASHING FLUOR FLUORESCENT GA.GAUGE GALV.GALVANIZED G.B.GRAB BAR CMBU GLAZED CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT GEN.GENERAL G.I.GALVANIZED IRON GL.GLASS GR.GRADE GTP.GLAZED TILE PAVER GYP.GYPSUM HC HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE HT.HEIGHT HORIZ HORIZONTAL HM HOLLOW METAL FRAME H.W.HOT WATER I.D.INSIDE DIAMETER INSUL INSULATION INT.INTERIOR I.P.S.IRON PIPE SIZE JT.JOINT LAM.LAMINATE LAV.LAVATORY L.P.LIGHT POLE LT.LIGHT LT. WT. LIGHT WEIGHT MANUF., MFR. MANUFACTURER MAS.MASONRY MATL.MATERIAL MAX.MAXIMUM MB.MARKER BOARD MECH.MECHANICAL MEM.MEMBRANE MEM. WP. MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING MEP MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING MEZZ.MEZZANINE M.H.MAN HOLE MIN.MINIMUM MISC.MISCELLANEOUS M.O.MASONRY OPENING MOD.MODULE MTL.METAL MTP.METAL TOILET PARTITION N.D.NAPKIN DISPOSAL N.I.C.NOT IN CONTRACT NO.NUMBER N.T.S.NOT TO SCALE N.V.NAPKIN VENDOR O.C.ON CENTER O.C.E.W. ON CENTER EACH WAY O.D.OUTSIDE DIAMETER O.F.C.I.OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED O.H.OPPOSITE HAND OPNG.OPENING OPP.OPPOSITE P.C.PRECAST P.H.PAPER HOLDER PL.PLATE P.L.PROPERTY LINE P. LAM. PLASTIC LAMINATE PLUMB. PLUMBING PLWD.PLYWOOD POL.POLISHED P.P.POWER POLE PR.PAIR PREFIN. PREFINISHED PT.POINT PTD.PAINTED P.W.B.PREFINISHED WALL BOARD QT.QUARRY TILE R RADIUS RD.ROOF DRAIN RE., REF. REFERENCE RECP.RECEPTACLE REINF.REINFORCE RES.RESILIENT REQ., REQ'D. REQUIRED REV.REVISION, REVISED RF RECREATIONAL RESILIENT FLOOR RPG.RELOCATABLE PAINTED GYP. BD. RSS.ROD STOCK AND SEALANT S.C.SEALED CONCRETE SCH., SCHED. SCHEDULE(D) SCPL SOLID CORE PLASTIC LAMINATE S.D.SOAP DISPENSER SEC.SECTION SHT.SHEET SIM.SIMILAR SPC.SPECIAL COATING SYSTEM SPEC., SPECS. SPECIFICATIONS SQ.SQUARE SS.SOUND STRIP S.S., ST. STL. STAINLESS STEEL STL.STEEL STR., STRUCT. STRUCTURAL SUSP.SUSPENDED SVF SHEET VINYL FLOORING SVDF SHEET VINYL DANCE FLOORING T.A.S.TEXAS ACCESSIBLITY STANDARDS T.B.TACK BOARD T.D.R.TOWEL DISPENSER & RECEPT. TEL TELEPHONE TERR.TERRAZZO THK.THICK T.O.TOP OF T.O.B.TOP OF (WOOD) BLOCKING T.O.M.TOP OF MASONRY T.O.S.TOP OF STEEL T.T.D.TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER TYP.TYPICAL U.N.O.UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UR.URINAL V VENT V.C.T. VINYL COMPOSITE TILE VENT.VENTILATING, VENTILATED VER.VERIFY VERT.VERTICAL VGB (PREFINISHED) VINYL CLAD GYPSUM BOARD V.I.F.VERIFY IN FIELD VWC VINYL WALL COVERING W WASHING MACHINE W/WITH W.C.WATER CLOSET WD.WOOD WDW.WINDOW W.P.WATERPROOFING W.S.WEATHERSTRIP WT.WEIGHT W.W.WATER WELL W.W.F.WELDED WIRE FABRIC Abbreviations EARTH (existing) 02 SITE CONSTRUCTION EARTH (backfill) DRAINAGE FILL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 CONCRETE PRECAST CONCRETE GROUT BRICK 04 MASONRY CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS STONE CAST STONE 05 METALS STEEL ALUMINUM 06 WOODS AND PLASTICS CONTINUOUS WOOD INTERMITTENT WOOD PLYWOOD FINISH WOOD HARDBOARD PARTICLE BOARD SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 07 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION BATT INSULATION LOOSE FILL INSULATION RIGID INSULATION GLASS 08 GLAZING LATH AND PLASTER 09 FINISHES MEDIUM DENSITY FIBER BOARD (MDF) GYPSUM BOARD Material Conventions COLUMN LINE FLOOR LINE MATCH LINE ELEVATION SYMBOL DOOR DESIGNATION WINDOW DESIGNATION PARTITION TYPE REVISION NUMBER PLAN OR DETAIL ENLARGED DETAIL AND VERTICAL SECTIONS 100' - 0" FIN. FLOOR M1 DIMENSIONS - ALL DIMENSIONS TO FACE OF WALL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 5'-6"7'-3" Drawing Conventions A A101 A101 1 1 A-500 1 A-600 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 EXIT 6' - 8"4' - 0" MAX.MIN.1' - 3"9"12"TYPICAL48" MAX.EQ EQ FIRE ALARM (COMBINATION SPEAKER AND STROBE)FIREMAN'S PHONE JACK WALL MOUNTED EXIT LIGHT LIGHT SWITCH AND DIMMER THERMOSTAT OR OTHER CONTROL DEVICE ELECTRIC, TELEPHONE, OR DATA RECEPTACLE ALIGN ITEMS WHEN POSSIBLE AT COUNTERS46" MAX.10 - 24" OBSTRUCTION MIN. 24" ALIGN STACKED DEVICES WHERE POSSIBLE 54" TYPICALSIGNAGE 18" CLEAR SPACE AT TACTILE SIGNAGE BOTTOM OF REFLECTIVE SURFACE FINISHED FLOOR 34" MAX40" MAX24"28" MIN8" MIN 11" MIN 9" MIN12" MIN. 12" MIN.LESS THAN 27"LESS THAN 27"Y NOTE: X IS THE 12" MINIMUM HANDRAIL EXTENSION REQUIRED AT EACH TOP RISER. Y IS THE MINIMUM HANDRAIL EXTENSION OF 12" PLUS THE WIDTH OF ONE TREAD THAT IS REQUIRED AT THE BOTTOM RISER. X 504.2 TREADS AND RISERS. ALL STEPS ON A FLIGHT OF STAIRS SHALL HAVE UNIFORM RISER HEIGHTS AND UNIFORM TREAD DEPTHS. RISERS SHALL BE 4 INCHES HIGH MINIMUM AND 7 INCHES MAXIMUM. TREADS SHALL BE 11 INCHES DEEP MINIMUM 504.5 NOSINGS. THE RADIUS CURVATURE AT THE LEADING EDGE OF THE TREAD SHALL BE 1/2 INCH MAXIMUM. NOSINGS THAT PROJECT BEYOND THE RISERS SHALL HAVE THE UNDERSIDE OF THE LEADING EDGE CURVED OR BEVELED. RISERS SHALL BE PERMITTED TO SLOPE UNDER THE TREAD AT AN ANGLE OF 30 DEGREES MAXIMUM FROM VERTICAL. THE PERMITTED PROJECTION OF THE NOSING SHALL EXTEND 1 1/2 INCHES MAXIMUM OVER THE TREAD BELOW. 2" MAX11" MIN. RADIUS7"RADIUS 11" MIN.2" MAX 7"30° (B) ANGLED NOSING (C) ROUNDED NOSING RADIUS 2" MAX11"7"30° (A) TYPICAL 60" MIN.18" MIN., 24" PREFERRED 48" MIN.X NOTE: X = 12" IF DOOR HAS BOTH A CLOSER AND A LATCH PUSH SIDEPULL SIDE X NOTE: Y = 48" MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS BOTH A LATCH AND CLOSER 54" MIN. NOTE: X = 36" MINIMUM IF Y = 60"; X = 42" MINIMUM IF Y = 54"YY42" MIN.PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE X 24" MIN. NOTE: Y = 48" MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS CLOSER NOTE: Y = 54" MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS CLOSER PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE Y48" MIN.X 24" MIN.Y42" MIN.1 1/4" - 2"1 1/2"1 1/4" - 2"1 1/2"1 1/4" - 2"1 1/2" (A) HANDRAIL (B) HANDRAIL (C) GUARDRAIL 1/2" MAX PREDOMINANT DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC 302.3 OPENINGS. OPENINGS IN FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES SHALL NOT ALLOW PASSAGE OF A SPHERE MORE THAN 1/2 INCH DIAMETER EXCEPT AS ALLOWED IN 407.4.3, 409.4.3, 410.4, 810.5.3 AND 810.10. ELONGATED OPENINGS SHALL BE PLACED SO THAT THE LONG DIMENSION IS PERPENDICULAR TO THE DOMINANT DIRECTION OF TRAVEL. 48" MIN. 48" MIN. SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"3 MISCELLANEOUS HEIGHTS SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"2 LAVATORY CLEARANCES SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"5 STAIR HANDRAILS SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"6 TREAD WIDTH AND NOSINGS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"7 FRONT APPROACH DOORS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 HINGE SIDE APPROACH DOORS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"9 LATCH SIDE APPROACH DOORS SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"10 SIZE AND SPACING OF HANDRAILS AND GRAB BARS SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"11 GRATINGS IN ACCESSIBLE ROUTES SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"12 TWO HINGED DOOR IN SERIES SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"4 ROOM SIGNAGE 1 MOUNTING HEIGHTS 1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 1-STORYBLDG 1-STORYBLDG 2-STORYBLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUT PROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT. NOTESClouds Around Rotor Symbols Indicate Existing Zones. Trace and Locate 16 Valves for theThree Universal Baseball Fields. Extend New Mainline and Two Wire Path to Each ValveLocation. Replace each Existing Valve with New Hunter ICV-FS-R Valves, Match Size.Connect Valves to Controller and Number Them Zones 23 - 39. Install in New Valve Box per. . Ensure No Cross Connections Between Effluent and Potable Water Lines, andProvide Required Lateral and Horizontal Separation Distances. Remove and Dispose ofExposed Pipe. Cleanly Cut and Abandon in Place Undisturbed Pipe Min. 6" Below Grade.Replace Each Rotor with New Hunter I-20-06-PRB-R Rotors. Install Nozzles to Provide Headto Head Coverage, But do Not Exceed Original Zone Volume or Maximum Velocity ThroughExisting Lateral Pipes. Install New Rotors Flush and Perpendicular to Finish Grade. Backfilland Tamp Around Each Rotor with Screened Topsoil to Avoid Settling. If Encountered,Replace Broken Pipe and Swing Joints.Install New Hunter I-20-06-PRB-R Rotor w/ Swing Joint. Nozzle as Required.Install New Hunter ICVFS-R Valve w/ ACCU-SYNC-ADJ Pres. Reg. in New Box perRemove All Existing Quick Couplers. Backfill Voids with Screened Topsoil and Compact.Before Demolition Commences, Coordinate Irrigation Meter Shut off and Removal with theCity of Corpus Christi Water Department. Remove Irrigation Controller and BackflowPreventer.Return All Removed Irrigation Equipment to the City Parks Department Yard. Dispose ofEquipment Legally Off-site if the City Provides Direction to Dispose.For sod/hydroseed areas, scarify subgrade minimum 4" deep. Place and till in 1" of EnrichedTopsoil and Milorganite fertilizer at 72 lbs./2,500 SF to a depth of 4". All areas shall beuniformly graded for positive drainage. All rocks and clods shall be removed in sod areas.The soil surface for sod areas shall be rolled to resist impressions over 1/4" deep. Finishgrade all sod areas leaving room for sod thickness to leave sod flush with adjacentcurbs/pavements.Hydroseed Approximately 7,500 Square Feet. Provide Temporary Effuent Irrigation withOptimum Moisture for Seed Germination, and Water Until Fully Established. SeeSpecifications.Install Approximately 2,600 Square Feet of Solid Celebration Bermuda Sod. Solid sod piecesshall be uniformly sized, and tightly laid in rows with staggered ends and no overlap.Trimming shall be performed with sharp tools, and carefully fitted around structures. ProvideTemporary Effluent Irrigation and Water Until Fully Established.Install Approximately 4,000 Square Feet of Solid Celebration Bermuda Sod. Solid sod piecesshall be uniformly sized, and tightly laid in rows with staggered ends and no overlap.Trimming shall be performed with sharp tools, and carefully fitted around structures. ProvideIrrigation as Shown with Hunter I-20-06-PRB-MPR-R Heads.Install six 2.5" Caliper Multi-trunk Thornless Mesquite Trees per Detail . Set upTemporary Effleunt Irrigation and Water for 90 Days.3/L-3.16215768/L-3.274/L-3.169101112NOTE1. See Sht. L-1.1 for Legend, Notes, & Calculations.1-STORYBLDGEXIST.CONCESSIONEXISTRESTROOMSDUGOUTDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHERSDUGOUTDUGOUTEXIST .STORAGEELECT.YARDBLEACHERSBLEACHERS BLEACHERS BLEACHERSBLEACHERS3333128108101211MPR35MPR35MPR30MPR35401.5"26.664MPR35MPR35MPR25MPR35MPR35MPR30983/4"3/4"3/4"3/4"3/4"1"1"1 1/4"1 1/4"1 1/2"1 1/2"416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232FOTEXASS T TA ELICENSEDIIR RRG ATO23293 ALEXIS M DOMINGUEZ09/09/2530 030 60 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 ELECT. YARD 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 ELECT. YARD 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 ELECT. YARD 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 2-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG ELECT. YARD ELECT. YARD 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG ELECT. YARD ELECT. YARD 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 ELECT. YARD ELECT. YARD 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 ELECT. YARD 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 2-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 DUGOUT DUGOUT BLEACHE R S DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S DUGOUTDUGOUTEXIST. STORAGE EXIST. CONCESSION EXIST RESTROOMS ELECT. YARD BLE A C H E R S BLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S 1 SITE PLAN1:30 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/202520 1 LEGEND EXIST. STORAGE EXIST. CONCESSION EXIST RESTROOMS 1 SITE PLAN DEMOLITION1:30 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025LEGEND DUGOUT DUGOUT BLEACHE R S DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S DUGOUTDUGOUTEXIST. STORAGE EXIST. CONCESSION EXIST RESTROOMS ELECT. YARD BLE A C H E R S BLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S 1 SITE PLAN1:20 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/202521 1 23 1 LEGEND 21 3 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20252 DUGOUT FLOOR PLAN - ALTERNATE #4 - N.I.C. (NOT IN CONTRACT)1/4"=1'-0" 7 DUGOUT CROSS SECTION - ALTERNATE #43/4"=1'-0" 3 TYP. SHADE CANOPY/BLEACHER LAYOUT1/4"=1'-0" 4 DUGOUT ELEVATION - ALTERNATE #41/4"=1'-0" 5 DUGOUT SECTION - ALTERNATE #43/4"=1'-0"6 DUGOUT SECTION - ALTERNATE #43/4"=1'-0" 1 DUGOUT FLOOR PLAN - BASE BID1/4"=1'-0" 1 FLAG POLE DETAIL1/2"=1'-0"2 CHAINLINK FENCE GATE DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 3 FENCE DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0" 4 FENCE CORNER DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"5 FENCE GATE DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20256 FENCE DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 7 CURB DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0"8 CURB DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0" 9 TYP. PARK FIELD SIGN - PS1N.T.S. STORAGERESTROOM STORAGE STAIRS CONCESSION STORAGE PRESSBOX STORAGE OFFICE STAIRS 1 FLOOR PLAN DEMOLITION - CONCESSION/RESTROOMS1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20252 FLOOR PLAN DEMOLITION - PRESS BOX1/4"=1'-0" LEGEND STORAGERESTROOM STORAGE STAIRS CONCESSION STORAGE PRESSBOX STORAGE OFFICE STAIRS 1 FLOOR PLAN - CONCESSION/RESTROOMS1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20252 FLOOR PLAN - PRESS BOX1/4"=1'-0" LEGEND 1 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20252 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0"3 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0" 4 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0" 6 FASCIA DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0" 5 CANOPY DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 GENERAL NOTESSHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALSDESIGN CRITERIAFOUNDATION AND EARTHWORKCONCRETE NOTESTENSION LAPS AND EMBEDMENTTABLE AREINFORCEMENTCONCRETE NOTES CONT'D:STRUCTURAL NOTES I ABBREVIATIONS416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232STRUCTURAL NOTES II WINDSTORM & CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION:········WOOD FRAMING NOTESSTRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONSSTRUCTURAL STEEL NOTES SITE PLAN1416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232SITE PLAN 1 21 21 21 21 2123 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 FOUNDATION & FRAMING PLANS DUGOUT FOUNDATION PLAN1ABAAAELECTRICAL YARD FOUNDATION PLANAAAA3FOUNDATION NOTES & LEGEND:22D11DBLEACHERS FOUNDATION PLANAAAAB4DUGOUT FRAMING PLAN2BLEACHERS FOUNDATION PLANAAAAB5PICNIC BENCH FOUNDATION PLANCCCC6NICNICNIC 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS I SECTIONBSECTIONASADDLE DETAIL1SECTIONDEMBED PLATE - EP1 & EP22TYPICAL CORNER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL6TYPICAL PERIMETER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL745TYPICAL BEAMINTERSECTION DETAILTYPICAL BEAMCORNER DETAILTYPICAL CONSTRUCTIONJOINT SLAB-ON-GRADE DETAIL3SECTIONCNIC 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232TYP MASONRY DOWEL DETAIL1TYP CMU WALL SECTIONASTRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS II - (ALTERNATE #2)NICNIC 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232MASONRY BOND BEAM5REINFORCING @REINFORCING @ MASONRY4OF GROUTING BLOCK1LOW LIFT METHOD REINF DETAIL2TYP CMU WALLS STEP DETAIL3TYP CMU BOND BEAMCONTROL JOINT7EXPANSION JOINT6FLUSH WALL PILASTER8TYPICAL CMU SECTIONS & DETAILS - (ALTERNATE #2)NIC 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465334609/08/202509/08/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46534DIVISION 22 – PLUMBINGSECTION 22 05 00 – GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS1. Give all requisite notices, file plans if required, obtain and pay for all permits and pay all deposits and fees necessary for theinstallation of the plumbing work. Obtain and pay for all inspections required by all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations orpublic authority having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for certificates of such inspections, and file such certificates with Owner.2. Bidders shall examine all Drawings and Specification. Bidders must be familiar with the codes, rules, regulations (and thelocal interpretations) in effect at the site of the work.3. The plumbing plans are intended to be diagrammatic and are based on one manufacturer’s equipment. They are notintended to show every item in its exact location, the exact dimensions, or all the details of the equipment. The Contractorshall verify the actual dimensions of the equipment proposed to ensure that the equipment will fit in the available space.4. Installation shall be within the limitations imposed by the architectural, structural, electrical, and mechanical requirements,with adequate space for maintenance.5. All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one year, beginning with the date ofacceptance of the project in writing. Special warranties will be called for under some sections of equipment. This warrantyshall be in writing and shall include written copies of factory warranties with expiration dates on items of equipment where thewarranty date might differ from the acceptance date, such as five-year warrant of sealed refrigerant systems. No warrantyshall start before the acceptance date.6. REQUIRED SUBMITTALS: a. Submittals shall be clearly marked to show the intended item, with identification as to unit number or other marking toshow location, service, and function. Submittals not marked to identify the equipment and application will be rejected.b. The supplier, by submitting, certifies that the materials or equipment proposed is satisfactory for the application intended,including adverse conditions that may prevail at the job site, and that materials and equipment are in current productionwith no known plans to cease production.c. Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders; that the purpose of submittals by theContractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept; and that thisunderstanding is demonstrated by indicating which equipment and materials he or she intends to furnish and install andthe fabrication and installation methods he or she intends to use.d. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between submittals and Contract documents arediscovered either prior to or after submittals are processed by the Engineer, the Contract Documents shall control andshall be followed.e. Submittals shall include:(1) Pipe, valves, insulation, etc.(2) Plumbing fixtures.7. At the close of the job, prior to final review, five bound copies of the following maintenance and operations manuals on allequipment shall be submitted by transmittal to the Architect or Engineer for review and acceptance.a. Equipment warranties.b. Contractor’s warranty.c. Parts list and manuals for all equipment.d. Operating Instruction (in writing).e. Written instructions on maintenance and care of the system.8. Material and equipment shall be the standard catalog products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturer ofproducts conforming to the Specification.9. When any material or equipment is identified on the plans or in the Specifications by reference to one manufacturer’s nameor model number, it is intended to establish a required standard of design and quality, and it is not intended to limitcompetition. It is understood that the phrase “or accepted equivalent” is hereby inserted following the one manufacturer’sname, whether such phrase occurs or not.10. Where three names are given for any equipment, the Contractor shall furnish one of named manufacturers.11. All work shall be concealed in walls, chases or above ceilings, unless specifically shown to be exposed.12. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in such a way that all componentsrequiring access are so located and installed that they may be serviced, replaced, etc., by service people with normal servicetools and equipment. If any equipment or components are shown in such a position that this Contractor cannot comply withthe above, the Contractor shall notify the General Contractor and attempt to resolve the problem of access. If thisconsultation is not successful, the Architect and Engineer shall be notified in writing and a decision requested.13. Install unions or flanges at all piping connections to equipment.14. Cutting, patching, furring, painting, electrical, mechanical, etc., shall be done by the affected trade at this Contractor’sexpense for changes required in work already installed or work required by other trades for changes made by this Contractorin type or size of equipment purchased.15. Openings in floors, walls, and roof shall be furnished by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall inform the Generalcontractor of the location and size required. This contractor shall furnish all sleeves, frames, including framing between joistunless shown on the Architectural or Structural Drawings, access doors, prefabricated curbs, and other accessoriesnecessary for a complete installation. Only those items specifically shown and/or specified in other Sections are excluded.16. Flashing of roof for curbs, pipes, stands, etc., shall be by the General Contractor (roofer). Curbs and counter flashing shallbe by this Contractor.17. Power wiring, including final connections, is by the Electrical Contractor. (This Contractor shall install all motors and furnishthe starting equipment to the Electrical Contractor for installation. Control wiring, including 115 volt from power source,conduit, switches, thermostats, interlock, etc., shall be furnished by this Contractor unless specifically shown on the ElectricalDrawings. This Contractor shall see that the electrical equipment does not block access to service areas of equipment, i.e.,disconnect switches mounted on the compressor or control access doors of equipment.).18. Furnish and install all special foundations and supports required for equipment installed under this Section, unless they are apart of the building structure and are shown in other Sections.19. All work shall be in accordance with the following rules and regulations and any applicable laws.International Plumbing Code (IPC).Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).International Energy Conservation Code (IECC).20. Where any of the above are at variance with the Drawings and Specification, the code requirements shall take precedenceand any cost necessary to meet these shall be included in the Contract.21. All metal items inside the building subject to rusting, and all ferrous metal exposed to weather, shall be given one coat of rustpreventive primer as soon as installed. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates shallcomply with VOC requirements of Green Seal Standard GC-03. Maximum 250 g/L VOC content.22. In addition to the warranty of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, Contractor shall and hereby does warrant all materials,workmanship and equipment furnished and installed by him to be free from defects for a period of one year after date of finalcompletion of Contract, or from full occupancy of the building by the Owner (whichever is earlier). Should any defects inmaterial, workmanship, or equipment be made known to Contractor within one year warranty period, Contractor shall replacesuch materials, workmanship, or equipment without charge.23. The Contractor shall coordinate and make provisions for final connection to all fixtures, equipment and any connections toequipment furnished by others, for a complete and operating system.SECTION 22 05 23 – VALVES1. Provide valves of the same manufacturer throughout where possible.2. All valves shall be manufactured in the United States.3. Provide threaded valves for pipe sizes 2-inches and smaller.4. Provide flanged or grooved end butterfly valves for pipe sizes 2-1/2-inches and larger.5. Install valves for shutoff and isolating service.6. Use Class 150 bronze body ball and check valves for water services 2-inches and under. Use Class 150 iron butterfly andcheck valves on sizes 2-1/2-inches and larger.7. Provide shutoff valves and check valves on discharge of pumps.8. Where valves are installed concealed in pipe chases or above inaccessible ceilings, provide access door with concealedhinge and key operated locks.9. Lead-free valves shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex F and NSF/ANSI 372. Lead-free valves shall be installed insystems that deliver water for human consumption.SECTION 22 05 29 – SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS1. Provide electro-galvanized steel hanger rods.2. Group pipe where possible on trapeze hangers.3. Provide two layers of PVC tape if ferrous hangers are used.4. Provide sleeves at all wall and floor penetrations.5. Pipe hangers on insulated lines shall be sized to fit the outside of the insulation. Provide galvanized sheet metal saddles athanger locations.6. Support piping with all thread rod and clevis hangers. Group pipe where possible on trapeze hangers constructed of angleiron or unistrut. Attach piping to support the U-bolts or suitable pipe clamps.7. Prime coat non-galvanized or non-plated steel hangers, reinforcements and supports. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paintsapplied to interior ferrous metal substrates shall comply with VOC requirements of Green Seal Standard GC-03. Maximum250 g/L VOC content.8. Flash and counterflash where plumbing piping passes through weather or waterproof walls, floors and roofs.9. Provide lead flashing at all vent pipe penetrations of the roof.10. Seal all pipes passing through walls and floors with fire rated silicone foam fire-stop sealant.11. Provide anchors properly sized to withstand the forces of expansion and contraction.SECTION 22 05 53 – PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION1. Provide pipe labeling identifying all piping systems.SECTION 22 07 00 – PLUMBING INSULATION1. Provide thermal insulation on all PVC piping installed in a return air plenum.2. Provide thermal insulation on domestic cold and hot water and hot water return piping.3. Provide thermal insulation on all condensate piping.4. Provide insulation where required to prevent freezing or condensation.5. All insulation products shall comply with ASTM E-84 smoke developed rating of 50, fuel contributed rating of 50 and flamespread rating of 25.6. Insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves.7. Provide thermal insulation on piping excluding valves, strainers, and unions. Insulation shall be heavy-duty pre-molded glassfiber insulation with all service jacket and self-sealing lap. Taper insulation at valves and miter insulation at fittings and finishwith mastic. 8. For exterior insulated piping provide aluminum jacket with bands on 12-inch centers. 9. Insulation system shall be weatherproof. 10. Insulation thickness shall be according to the following table:11. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.12. Insulated piping exposed outdoors shall be covered with 0.016-inch thick corrugated aluminum jacketing secured withaluminum bands. Provide pre-molded aluminum fitting covers from fitting, valves, etc. Seal all joints with silicone sealant.SECTION 22 20 00 – PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES1. Sanitary waste and vent piping underground shall be Schedule 40 PVC-DWV with solvent weld joints.2. Sanitary waste and vent piping aboveground shall be Schedule 40 PVC-DWV with solvent weld joints.3. Domestic water piping above grade shall Be Type L hard temper copper pipe with wrought copper fittings and silver solderedconnections or press-fit type fittings, or straight lengths of PEX-A with expansion fittings. .4. Lead-free components shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex F and NSF/ANSI 372. Lead-free components shall beinstalled in systems that deliver water for human consumption.SECTION 22 40 00 – PLUMBING FIXTURES1. Water closets shall be 1.28 GPF. 2. Urinals shall be 0.5 GPF.3. Lavatories shall be counter mounted or wall hung, with 0.5 GPM faucets.4. Service sinks shall be floor mounted.5. Electric water coolers on each floor shall be wall hung and suitable for handicapped use.6. Provide carriers for all wall mounted fixtures.7. All plumbing fixtures shall be manufactured in the United States.8. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the drawings.9. Lead-free components shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex F and NSF/ANSI 372. Lead-free components shall beinstalled in systems that deliver water for human consumption.DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICALSECTION 26 05 00 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK1. The separation of Division 26 into sections is for convenience only and is not intended to establish limits of work. 2. Codes, Permits and Inspections: Comply with applicable laws of the Government, State, and community having jurisdiction.Obtain and pay for permits required.3. Electrical work, material, and installation shall conform to the latest accepted editions of the following codes, regulations, andassociations:American National Standards Institute (ANSI)American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)American Standards Association (ASA)International Building Code (IBC)National Electrical Code (NEC)National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (UL)International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)4. Material and Workmanship: Materials shall be new, UL approved where a standard has been established. Where no ULstandard has been established, obtain written approval from the Engineer prior to placing order.5. Whenever the words “or equal”, “equivalent”, “acceptable”, or other words with similar intent are used implying judgment tobe exercised, the judgment of the Engineer is that which is referenced.6. Drawings and Specifications: Consider as complementary each to the other. What is called for by one shall be as binding asif called for by both. 7. Coordination: Coordinate work so as to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades.8. Testing: Electrical systems shall be fully tested by the Contractor including, but not limited to, the following:a. Available voltage and ampere load readings on feeders, transformers, and major branch circuits with systems operatingat maximum load shall be recorded.b. Test receptacle for circuit continuity and grounding with a Daniel Woodhead or equal status tester.c. Test results shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer on one set of Contract Drawings.9. Patch and repair existing surfaces, required to be maintained, that are damaged by the Contractor in performing the work.10. Record Documents for the Owner: Keep at the site one set of plans for the express purpose of daily correcting in red oryellow pencil every change at the time it is made. Prints shall detail actual field dimensions of conduit stub-outs, conduitruns, equipment installation, and conduit routing concealed within slabs or below grade. Mark-up prints shall be turned overto the Owner.11. Submittals: Provide proposed manufacturer’s literature and dimensioned shop drawings to the Engineer for review.Submittals shall include the following sections of work.a. Section 26 24 16– Branch Circuit Panelboardsb. Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devicesc. Section 26 28 00 – Overcurrent Protective Devicesd. Section 26 51 00 – Lighting. VE packages shall include photometrics of proposed fixtures.e. Unsubmitted sections shall be installed as specified.12. Protection of Materials: Equipment and materials shall be protected against damage from water, dirt, chemical, ormechanical injury. After fixtures have been installed, they shall be completely protected against breakage or the depositingof waste or material therein until the system is accepted.13. The Contractor shall be responsible for work, existing or new, damaged, by him or his sub-contractor in the executing work. 14. Provide line voltage power connections to Division 22 and Division 23 power supplies, actuators, dampers and controlpanels. Coordinate with Division 22 and Division 23 for quantities and locations of such connections.15. Provide one year guarantee on all parts and labor. SECTION 26 05 19 – WIRE AND CABLE1. Description of Work: Wire and cable for lighting, power, control, and special systems rated 600 volts or less shall befurnished and installed as a part of this Section.2. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. American Insulated Wire Corp.b. Essex International, Inc.c. Rome Cable.3. Copper conductor for wire and cable shall be 98% conductivity annealed copper per ASTM B3 and shall be tinned oruntinned in accordance with established standards for the type of insulation applied over the conductors. #10 AWG andsmaller shall be solid and #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, conductor sizes arebased on copper. Conductors shall be copper.4. Wire and Cable Wire:a. Rated 600 volt A.C.b. Installed in approved raceways or conduit.c. Not less than #12 AWG, except that #14 AWG may be used for control and low voltage wiring.d. Insulation type: THW or THHN-THWN.e. Permanently marked at 24-inch intervals with size, voltage, and temperature ratings.Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness (in inches)FluidOperatingTemperatureRange andUsage (◦F)Insulation Conductivity Nominal Pipe or Tube Size (inches)ConductivityBtu▪in./(h▪ft2▪◦F)Mean RatingTemperature,◦F<1 1 to<1-1/21-1/2to <44 to<8≤8>350 0.32-0.34 250 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0251-350 0.29-0.32 200 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5201-250 0.27-0.30 150 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0141-200 0.25-0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.085-140 0.21-0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.540-84 0.21-0.2775 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0<40 0.20-0.2650 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.54609/08/202509/08/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465355. Control/Communications (Low Voltage) Type Wires and Cables: Size, type, and materials, as called for under the specificsystem and as required by the system equipment manufacturer.6. Feeder and branch circuit wiring shall be installed using color coded conductors. For conductors #6 and smaller, colorcoding shall be by factory applied color-impregnated insulation. For conductors #4 and larger, color coding shall be byplastic coated self-sticking markers, colored nylon cable ties, or heat shrink type sleeves.7. Conductor Identification: Provide identification for feeder conductors within each enclosure where a tap, splice, ortermination is made. Identification shall be by means of nylon marker ties, Type “PLM” as manufactured by PanduitCorporation or as approved.8. Conductor Installation:a. Conductors shall be carefully handled and installed to ensure that maximum tensile and compressive strengths ofconductor and insulation are not exceeded and that the conductors are not “kinked” or the insulation damaged.b. Wire pulling compound, when used, shall be UL listed, Ideal “Yellow 77”, Holub “Hi Green”, or approved equal. The useof soap flakes, liquid detergents, or vegetable oils is unacceptable.SECTION 26 05 20 – WIRE CONNECTIONS AND SPLICES1. Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide connectors and splices for wire and cable rated 600 voltand less.2. Splices and Connectors (UL 486A, 486B, and 486C):a. Connectors for wires #10 AWG and smaller: Insulated pressure type in accordance with UL 486A or 486C (twist-onsplicing connector).3. Terminations (UL 468A and 468B):a. Terminating kits designed for the conductor and application.4. Connectors shall be of material compatible with the materials of the conductors to prevent corroding, differences incoefficients of expansion, and electrolysis.5. Splices and Terminations: Splices in conductors shall be as few as possible. Where joints are necessary, they shall bemechanically strong and well made so that the electrical resistance of a joint shall not exceed that of 2 feet of the conductor.Splices and terminations shall be made only in junction or pull boxes and never in conduit elbows or similar fittings. Spliceswill not be allowed in panels.SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING1. Description of Work: Electrical systems and equipment shall be grounded as required by NEC Article 200 and Article 250, asspecified herein, and as shown on the Drawings. Nothing in this Specification or on the Drawings shall be construed asexempting the installation from compliance with applicable codes.2. Materials:a. Connectors shall be industry standard, hot dip galvanized malleable iron or cast bronze or copper alloy nonferrousmaterial which will not cause galvanic action between contact surfaces.b. Clamps, connectors, mechanical lugs, or wire terminals shall be used to bond ground wires together or to junction andpanel boxes.c. Ground conductors shall be copper.d. Equipment grounding conductors shall have a green jacket.e. Ground electrode conductors and bonding jumpers shall be bare copper.f. Materials shall be UL listed.3. Items to be Grounded: The noncurrent carrying metallic parts, components, and materials of the electrical distributionsystem and utilization equipment connected thereto shall be grounded by means of direct connection to the groundingconductor and the system grounding electrodes.4. Supplemental Grounding:a. The noncurrent carrying metallic parts of the electrical distribution system shall be grounded by the metal raceway and bya supplemental equipment grounding conductor.b. The equipment grounding conductor shall be insulated with a green cover.c. Equipment grounding conductors shall be provided in the same conduit with the circuit conductors. d. Receptacles must be connected by means of a jumper to the box. This connection shall not be made directly to theground wires. Ground wires entering a box must be solidly connected together and bonded to the box or enclosure.5. Raceway and Enclosure Bonding:a. Bonding jumpers shall be provided around remaining concentric or eccentric knock-outs that are punched or otherwiseformed in the enclosures and boxes.b. Metal raceways, equipment, frames, enclosure, and other metal noncurrent carrying parts must be bonded together inaccordance with NEC 250.96.6. General:a. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before connections are made to insure good metal-to-metal contact.b. Splices shall not be permitted in ground conductors except in boxes and enclosures where permitted by the NEC.c. Conductors and connections must be protected from physical damage.SECTION 26 05 33– RACEWAYS 1. Description of Work: Unless otherwise specifically noted, electrical systems wiring specified herein or shown on the Drawingsshall be installed in one of the raceway or conduit systems specified in this Section. A raceway is defined as any channel forholding wire, cable, or buss bars that is designed expressly for, and used solely for, this purpose.2. The raceways to be covered under this Section:a. IMC: Threaded, intermediate metal conduit.b. EMT: Electrical metal tubing.c. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.d. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.e. PVC: Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit.3. Flexible nonmetallic conduit systems will not be allowed on this project.4. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Conduit – IMC and EMT:(1) Allied Tube and Conduit Corp.(2) LTV/Republic Steel Corp.(3) Triangle PWC Inc.b. Conduit – FMC and LFMC:(1) American Flexible Conduit Company.(2) Anamet, Inc.(3) Electri-flex Company.(4) International Metal Hose.c. Conduit – PVC:(1) Can-Tex Industries.(2) Carlon.(3) Certainteed Corp.5. IMC: Comply with NEC Article 342, UL 1242 and Fed. Spec. WW-C581. Fittings: Threaded type, cadmium or zinc coated, inaccordance with UL 514B.6. EMT: Comply with NEC Article 358, Fed. Spec. WW-C563, UL 797, and ANSI C80.3. Fittings: watertight compression type.7. FMC and LFMC: Comply with NEC Article 348 or Article 350, and UL 1. Fittings: Cadmium or zinc coated, in accordancewith UL 514. Screw-in type fittings are not acceptable.8. PVC: Comply with NEC Article 352, Type EPC-40 (EPC-80), NEMA TC2, UL 651, and Federal Specification W-C-1094A.NEMA TC3 fittings.9. Fire stops shall be O-Z “Fire Seal” type or equal.10. Wiring Methods: Electrical installations shall consist of insulated conductors installed in conduit, except where specificallyindicated, specified otherwise, or required by NEC to be installed otherwise.11. IMC:a. Shall be installed:(1) For elbow transitions from underground to above grade or slab.(2) Where passing below grade beams, at 12 inches minimum below and to a distance of 5 feet either side thereof.(3) Where passing through footings to a distance of 5 feet either side thereof.b. May be installed:(1) Exposed in unfinished areas to a height of 60 inches above finished floor.(2) Underground, when protected by factory-applied plastic resin epoxy coating.12. EMT:a. May be installed:(1) Where concealed within the building.(2) Exposed in unfinished areas at least 60 inches above finished floor.b. Shall not be installed:(1) For feeder conduits.(2) In wet/damp locations.(3) Outdoors.13. FMC and LFMC:a. Shall be installed from the point of connection to vibration producing equipment and machines such as transformers,rotating and reciprocating equipment, to the point of connection with the rigidly supported branch circuit conduit wiringsystem. Minimum length shall be 24 inches or 12 inches per 1 inch of conduit diameter, whichever is greater.14. PVC:a. May be installed for underground branch circuit and feeder conduits from a point 5’-0” outside the building line to the pointof exposure above grade or the load served.b. May be installed under building slab on grade Where passing below grade beams, install minimum of 12-inches belowbottom of beam.c. Provide IMC elbows and IMC conduits for transition from underground to above ground.d. Shall not be installed concealed or exposed within the building.e. Below grade installation: Minimum trade size permitted for below grade installation, 1-inch diameter.f. Make joints watertight. Install couplings, connectors, and elbows using approved adhesive, driving joint tight and ensurepermanent adhesive set prior to backfill or conductor installation.g. May be installed in interior, dry spaces per NEC 334.10 in Type III, IV, and V construction.h. Not permitted to be installed in areas described in NEC 334.12.i. Must be secured at least every 4.5’ and not more than 12” from a fitting, box, or cabinet. Reference NEC 334.3015. Conduit Installation:a. Install parallel with or at right angles to building lines, structural members, ceiling members, and walls.b. Install pull boxes to limit the number of equivalent 90 degree bends in any conduit run to three to prevent exceeding themaximum pulling tension and side wall pressure of installed wire and cable.c. Install conduits passing through fire rated partitions, walls, and floors in a manner so as to maintain the specified andrequired fire rating. d. Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets using two locknuts where nonmetallic insulating bushings are usedand elsewhere with at least one locknut and one metal bushing.e. Provide insulated bushings for conduits 1 inch and larger terminating in unthreaded openings of metal and nonmetallicboxes, cabinets, or enclosure. Bushings for service entrance conduits shall be insulated metal grounding bushings.f. Provide pull wire in empty conduit systems.g. Field cutting and threading: Cut conduit ends square; thread using proper hand or power machines; ream and leave cutends free of burrs and jagged edges. Threads shall be painted with Thomas and Betts “KOPR-SHIELD” compound.Exposed threads shall be painted with a cold galvanized compound.h. Conduit systems shall be complete and electrically continuous before conductors are installed.i. Provide insulated bushings for conduits terminations and stub-outs in spaces such as plenums, chases, raised floors, andcommunications equipment rooms where wiring method changes to open wiring. When the conduit end is not threaded,the bushing shall be installed in combination with a threadless connector.16. Conduit Support:a. Provide support at a maximum of 8 feet on center; at not more than 3 feet from outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes,cabinets, and fittings; and at each elbow. Support conduit by means of pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, and trapezeassembles. The load applied to fasteners and supports shall not exceed one-fourth of the proof test load. Perforatedstrap iron is unacceptable.b. Fasten to wood surfaces using wood screws; to hollow masonry units using toggle bolts; to concrete and brick surfacesusing inserts or expansion bolts; to metal, lumber, and steel work using machine screws or spring tension clamps. Useinsert anchors in poured-in-place concrete construction. Threaded C-clamps may be used only on rigid conduit. Do notweld pipe straps or conduits to steel structures.c. Branch circuit conduit systems shall not be supported by suspended ceiling supporting systems.d. Support FMC and LFMC at intervals not exceeding 54 inches on center and within 12 inches of each termination in ajunction, pull box, conduit fitting, or cabinet.e. Coordination: Prior to rough-in, coordinate the work of this Section with that of other sections to avoid conflicts of spaceutilization.17. Underground Conduits:a. Excavation and Backfill:(1) Excavate along straight lines to the width and depth required for proper installation of conduits. Where excavatedbelow the necessary elevation, backfill and sand and compact to the proper elevation.(2) Where rocks, materials with sharp edges, permanently moist, or unstable ground is encountered, excavate to a depth4-inches below the specified elevation, and backfill with 4-inches of sand, free of particles that would be retained by a1/4-inch sieve.(3) Dewater trenches before installing conduit.(4) Backfill in not more than 6-inch lifts, compacted to 95 percent of the density of adjacent soil, with soil materials free ofrocks, debris, roots, wood, scrap materials, or vegetable matter.(5) Where necessary to remove sod, remove in large sections and carefully set aside and care for until replaced. Backfillthe top 4-inches of trench with topsoil before replacing sod. Carefully replace sod and water thoroughly. If dead orseverely damaged, replace with like material or seed as directed by the Architect.b. Underground Conduits Without Concrete Encasement:(1) Install to code required depth, but not less than 24-inches, below finished grade or as detailed in the drawings and ata minimum slope of 3-inches per 100-feet away from buildings.(2) Following backfill and prior to conductor installation, clean each conduit using a testing mandrel not less than 12-inches long with a diameter 1/4-inch less than the inside diameter of the conduit. Pull through the conduit followed bya brush having stiff bristles, until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand, gravel and other contaminates.18. The minimum bend radius for underground service entrance and feeder conduit – 36 inches except at vertical risers toequipment.SECTION 26 05 34 – BOXES1. Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide boxes, including outlet, floor, pull, junction, and cable tapboxes and supports associated therewith.2. Outlet Boxes and Covers:a. Concealed and exposed dry locations except where prohibited herein: One piece die formed 14 gauge zinc galvanizedsteel, in accordance with UL 514.3. Junction and Pull Boxes: UL 5144. Wireways: UL 870.5. Provide boxes in the raceway system wherever required for pulling conductors, making connections, and mounting devicesand fixtures.6. Boxes: a. Minimum volume required by NEC for the number and size of conductors installed.b. Not less that 1-1/2 inches deep.c. Not less than 4-inches square, except that 4”x2” boxes may be used when only one raceway enters the box.d. 4 inches square for two devices and solid ganged boxes for more than two devices.7. Supports:a. Supports boxes and pendants for surface mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independent of ceiling supports ormake adequate provisions for distributing the load over the ceiling supporting members, using approved bar hangers or1-1/2 inch lathers channel.b. Receptacle outlets shall be installed in light weight stud construction using bar hangers and box clips, Caddy FastenersNo. BHA/BHC or as approved.c. Boxes for switches shall be supported using sheet metal screws, Caddy Fasteners Series “MF” Clips, or approved equal.d. Fixtures, loads of 50 lbs. or more, and for ceiling fans shall be supported from the building structure, independent of box,raceway or suspended ceiling supports.8. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise noted, mounting heights for outlets shall be as listed below. Dimensions are fromfinished floor or work surface to centerline of outlet.Wall Switches46 inches*Receptacles18 inches Toggle Switches46 inches*Desk Telephone Outlets18 inches* A.C. – Above counter tops (6 inches normally). The exact mounting heights required for these devices shallbe coordinated with the Architect.9. Install boxes so that device covers are plumb and tight against the wall finish.SECTION 26 05 35 – COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS1. Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide a system of raceways, outlet boxes with covers, terminalboards, and grounding to accommodate the installation of communications systems cabling and equipment.2. Materials:a. Raceways: In accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 33, “Raceways”.b. Boxes: In accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 34, “Boxes”.c. Outlet Coverplates: In accordance with the requirements of Section 26 27 26, “Wiring Devices”.d. Terminal Boards: 3/4” Type AB plywood having two coats if insulating varnish or insulating oil base exterior enamel paintapplied before installation on both sides and all edges. 3. Installation:a. Install materials required by the work of this Section in accordance with other Division 26 Specifications pertaining to thematerial.b. Install terminal boards straight and level at locations indicated on the Drawings. Attach to masonry walls using expansionanchors, to CMU walls using toggle bolts, and to sheetrock and plaster walls using wood or sheet metal lag boltsfastened into the wall supporting structure. The use of toggle bolts in sheetrock and plaster walls is not acceptable.Install anchors at a maximum of 24 inches on center at the perimeter of each board.c. Raceways: EMT with insulating bushings at ends.d. The conduit size for each communication outlet shall be 3/4” minimum. Conduits shall not be grouped for multiple outlets.e. Boxes shall be steel having minimum dimensions of 4” x 4” x 2-1/8”.f. Provide conduit from each outlet location to an accessible location above a lay-in type ceiling.g. Provide 3/4” conduit with #6 AWG bare copper ground wire from main terminal location to and bond to the premisesgrounding electrode.h. Provide pull wire or mylar cord in empty conduits.SECTION 26 05 53 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION1. This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electricalidentification components including but not limited to the following:a. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors.b. Operational instruction signs.c. Warning and caution signs.d. Equipment labels and signs.2. Referencesa. ANSI Standard C2 and A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems”, with regard to type and size of letteringfor raceway and cable levels.b. National Electrical Codes, NFPA70.c. NEMA standards applicable to the product provided.d. UL standards applicable to the product provided.e. OSHA standards.3. Submittalsa. Manufacturer’s product data on each product and component.b. Manufacturer’s written installation instructions for each product and component.4. Acceptable Manufacturersa. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may beincorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:(1) American Labelmark Co.(2) Brimar. (3) Calpico, Inc.(4) Cole-Flex Corp.(5) Emed Co., Inc.(6) George-Ingraham Corp.(7) Ideal Industries, Inc.(8) Kraftbilt.(9) LEM Products, Inc.(10) Markal Corp.(11) National Band and Tag Co.(12) Panduit Corp.(13) Radar Engineers Div., EPIC Corp.(14) Seton Name Plate Co.(15) Standard Signs, Inc.4609/08/202509/08/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46536(16) W. H. Brady & Co.(17) 3M Scotch Code.b. Other manufacturers equal in design and function will be considered upon submittal of manufacturer’s data.5. Electrical Identification Productsa. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard products of categories and types required for each application unlessotherwise indicated. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer’s option, butprovide single selection for each application.b. Adhesive Marking Labels for Raceway and Metal-Clad Cable: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive labels with legendindicating voltage and service (Emergency, Lighting, Power, Light, Power dc, Air Conditioning, Communications, Control,Fire).c. Label Size: As follows:(1) Raceways 1-inch and Smaller: 1-1/8-inches high by 4-inches long.(2) Raceways Larger than 1”: 1-1/8-inches high by 8-inches long.d. Color: Black legend on orange background unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations.e. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils. thick by1-inch to 2-inches in width.f. Pre-Tensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Raceway and Cable Identification: Flexible acrylicbands sized to suit the raceway diameter and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when coiledaround the raceway or cable.g. Underground Line Marking Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, plastic tape compounded for direct-burial service not less than 6-inches wide by 4 mils. thick. Printed legend indicative of general type of underground linebelow.h. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor markers withpreprinted numbers and letters.i. Aluminum, Wraparound, Cable Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch thick, aluminum sheet, fitted with slots or earsfor securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. Provide for legend application withstamped letters or number.j. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends to suit the application. Orangebackground, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener.k. Aluminum-Faced Card Stock Tags: Weather-resistant, 18 point minimum card stock face down both sides withembossable aluminum sheet, 0.002-inch thick, and laminated with moisture-resistant acrylic adhesive. Preprint legend tosuit the application, and punch for tie fastener.l. Brass or Aluminum Tags: Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener. Dimensions: 2-inches x 2-inches x 19gage.m. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inchminimum thick for signs up to 20 sq. in., or 8-inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in whiteletters on black face and punched for mechanical fasteners.n. Baked-Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, withcolors, legend, and size appropriate to the location.o. Exterior Metal-Blacked Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading preprinted cellulose acetatebutyrate signs with 20 gage, galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.p. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32 stainless steelmachine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.q. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50 lb.minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 degrees F to 350 degrees F. Provide tiesin specified colors when used for color coding.6. Installationa. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identificationwork with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved insubmittals and as required by code.b. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and requirements of NEC andapplicable ANSI standards.c. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification aftercompletion of finish work.d. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed or accessible raceways of the followingsystems for identification. Bands shall be pre-tensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves, colored adhesive markingtape, or a combination of the two. Make each color band 2-inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and placeadjacent bands of two color markings in contact, side by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations ofwalls and floors, and at 40 foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors:(1) Fire Alarm System: Red.(2) Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and Yellow.(3) Combined Fire Alarm and Watchmen’s Report System: Red and Blue.(4) Watchmen’s Report System: Blue.(5) Security System: Blue and Yellow.(6) Civil Defense System: Yellow.(7) Clock System: Green.(8) Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and Blue.(9) Telephone System: Green and Yellow.e. Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Code required caution sign for boxes shall be pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange background. Install on outside of box cover.Also, label box covers with identity of contained circuits. Use pressure-sensitive plastic labels at exposed locations andsimilar labels or plasticized card stock tags at concealed boxes.f. Underground Electrical Line Identification: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, signal, andcommunications lines, install continuous underground plastic line grade. Where multiple lines installed in a commontrench or concrete envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16-inches; install a single line marker.g. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway.h. Conductor Color Coding: (1)Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system asfollows:208/120 VOLTS PHASE480/277 VOLTSBlackAPurpleRedBBrownBlueCYellowWhite **NeutralGray **GreenGroundGreenVerify color coding with local ordinances and standards prior to installation.** Neutral to have stripe to match phase color.(2) Use conductors with color factory applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows:i. The following field applied color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded wire for sizes larger thanNo. 10 AWG. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6-inchesfrom terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with notension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cableidentification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration.Conductors #10 and smaller, color code by means of factory applied, color impregnated insulation.Conductors #8 and larger, color code by means of plastic coated self-sticking markers, colored nylon cableties, or heat shrink type sleeves, or colored vinyl tape.ii. In lieu of pressure-sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification. Apply three ties ofspecified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3-inches from the terminal and spaced 3-inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length.j. Power Circuit Identification: Securely fasten identifying metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands to cables,feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pullboxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms with ¼-inch steel letterand number stamps with legend to correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach themwith approximately 55-lb. test monofilament line or one-piece self-locking nylon cable ties.k. Tag or label conductors as follows:(1) Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under another contract withidentification indicating source and circuits numbers.(2) Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications/signal conductors are present inthe same box or enclosure (except for three-circuit, four-wire homeruns), label each conductor or cable. Providelegend indicating source, voltage, circuit number, and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branchcircuit wiring may be indicated by means of coded color of conductor insulation. For control andcommunications/signal wiring, use color coding or wire/cable marking tape at terminations and at intermediatelocation where conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/numberconductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tapes.(3) Match identification markings with designations used in panelboard Shop Drawings. Contract Documents, and similarpreviously established identification schemes for the facility’s electrical installations.l. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows:(1) Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, by ANSI, where indicated, or where reasonablyrequired to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect.Locations shall include but not be limited to the following:i. Doors to electrical rooms.ii. Electrical equipment rated over 600V.iii. Doors and enclosures which, when opened, expose electrically energized parts.Install engraved, plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations areneeded for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items.(2) Emergency Operation Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, or other emergency operations.m. Install equipment/system circuit/device identification as follows:(1) Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of electrical equipment inbuilding, including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication/signal/alarm system,unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single lineof text, with 1/2-inch high letter on 1-1/2-inches high label (2-inches high where two lines are required), white letteringin black field. Text shall match terminology and number of the Contract Documents and Shop Drawings. Apply labelsfor each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment:i. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.ii. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.iii. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.iv. Motor control centers.v. Motor starters.vi. Pushbutton stations.vii. Power transfer equipment.viii. Contactors.ix. Remote controlled switches.x. Dimmers.xi. Control devices.xii. Transformers.xiii. Power generating units.xiv. Telephone switching equipment.xv. Clock/program master equipment.xvi. Call system master station.xvii. TV/audio monitoring master station.xviii. Fire alarm master station or control panel.xix. Security monitoring master station or control panel.n. Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, pushbuttons,pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, exceptpanelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed,typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker.o. Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operationand maintenance of equipment.SECTION 26 08 00 – COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS1. COMMISSIONG AGENCY: The commissioning agency (CA) has been contracted directly with the owner for this project.The CA has overall responsibility for planning and coordinating the commissioning process. However, commissioninginvolves all parties to the design and construction process, including the electrical (Division 26) contractor, and all specialtysub-contractors within Division 26, such as conduits, lights, and major equipment suppliers as required.2. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITYa. The electrical (Division 26) contractor’s responsibilities are defined in Division 01 of the specifications. Theseresponsibilities apply to all specialty sub-contractors and major equipment suppliers within Division 26. Each contractorand supplier shall review Division 01, and their bids shall include for carrying out the work described, as it applies to eachSection within the Division 26 specifications, individually and collectively.b. Lighting Functional Testing/Commissioning Plan: The Contractor shall complete the tasks below to commission thelighting control system and submit written documentation detailing the tasks below. For each task, list the dateperformed, person completing the task, the initial setting/condition, actions performed, and final setting condition. Submitdocumentation at or before substantial completion to facilitate obtaining the Certificate of Occupancy.(1) Ensure all lighting fixtures have lamps installed and are functional.(2) Test all exit signs, emergency lighting fixtures, and emergency ballasts furnished integral to fixtures.(3) Ensure all occupancy sensors have been installed and are operational.(4) Ensure all wall-boxes and scene controllers are installed and operational.(5) Test each individual device for occupancy sensor ceiling mounted.(6) Test 10% of devices for occupancy sensor wall mounted. (7) Verify the following:i. Sensors have been located and aimed per the manufacturer’s recommendations.ii. Status indicators on devices are operational and correct.iii. Devices control lighting fixtures as indicated on drawings.iv. Time delays have been set as indicated on the drawings.v. Movement in adjacent areas and/or cycling of HVAC systems does not false trigger sensorsSECTION 26 22 13 – DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER1. Description of Work: This section includes the work required to provide dry type transformers.2. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Eaton.b. ABB.c. Siemens.d. Square D.3. Transformers:a. Three-phase, 480-volt delta primary and 208/120-volt wye secondary, unless scheduled otherwise.b. Units 15 kVA and larger: Minimum (4) 2-1/2% full capacity primary taps.4. Insulation Systems:a. 2 kVA and Below: 150 degrees C insulation system based upon 80 degrees C maximum temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient.b. 3 to 15 kVA: 185 degrees C insulation based upon 115 degrees C maximum temperature rise above 40 degree C ambient.c. 15 kVA and Above: 220 degrees C insulation system based upon 150 degrees C maximum temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient.d. Insulation Materials: Flame retardant, not supporting combustion.5. Core and Coil Assemblies:a. Core: Constructed of high grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, low hysteresis, and eddy current losses. Provide core volume sufficient to allow efficient operation at 10% above highest tap voltage.b. Transformer Coils: Continuous wound copper conductor.c. Transformer Rated 15 kVA and Below: Encapsulate assembled core and coil in a resin and aggregate mixture, providing a moisture proof and shock resistant seal.d. Transformers Rated Greater than 15 kVA: Impregnate assembled core and coil using non-hydroscopic, thermo-setting varnish and heat cure to seal out moisture. Secure the completed core and coil to the base using vibration absorbing mounts, without metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure.6. Enclosures:a. Units Rated Above 15 kVA: NEMA 2, ventilated and drip proof, constructed of heavy gauge, cold rolled sheet steel. Transformers 75 kVA and smaller: Designed so they can be either floor or wall mounted. Transformers above 75 kVA: Floor-mounted design.b. Units Rated 15 kVA and Below: NEMA 3R, totally enclosed, non-ventilated, constructed of heavy gauge, cold rolled sheet steel and suitable for wall mounting.c. Finish: Degreased, cleaned, phosphatized, primed, and finished with a gray, weather-resistance enamel.7. Maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 35 degrees C rise above a 40 degrees C ambient.8. Installation:a. Install in accordance with the recommendations of ANSI C57.12.94 and the requirements of NEC.b. Isolate line and load side terminations using a minimum of 24 inches of FMC or LFMC.c. Provide NEC clearance from adjacent surfaces.d. Provide a 3-1/2-inches housekeeping pad at each transformer.e. Provide vibration isolation at each point of contact with building or supporting members using Korfund Corporation Type EU devices or equivalent.f. Prior to energizing transformers 50 kVA and above, perform insulation resistance and ratio tests as recommended by ANSI C57.12.94.SECTION 26 24 14 - DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS1. This Section includes the work required to provide Distribution Panelboards.2.Referencesa. NEMA AB 1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakersb. NEMA KS 1 – Enclosed Switches.c. NEMA PB 1 – Panelboards.d. NEMA PB 1.1 – Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.e. NEMA PB 1.2 – Application Guide for Ground-Fault Protective Devices for Equipment.f. UL 489 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers.3.Submittalsa. Submit manufacturer’s product data sufficient to demonstrate compliance with the specified and referenced standards of construction and performance.b. Submit Drawings indicating dimensions, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and ratings, voltage, main, neutraland equipment ground bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating and enclosure type.4. Product Delivery, Storage and Handlinga. Deliver distribution panelboards in factory-fabricated water-resistant wrapping.b. Handle panelboards carefully to avoid damage to material component, enclosure and finish.c. Store in a clean, dry space and protect from the weather.5. Acceptable Manufacturersa. Eaton.b. ABB.c. Siemens.d. Square D Company.6. Panelboard Constructiona. Molded case circuit breaker or enclosed fusible switch type panelboards as scheduled.b. Enclosure: NEMA Type 1 unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings.c. Box and Cover: Dead front in accordance with NEMA PB-1. Box of code gauge hot dipped galvanized steel. Trim cover of code gauge cold rolled steel. Dead front cover to conceal overcurrent devices and line and load terminations. d. Interior Assembly: Unit construction with busses factory assembled and secured to and insulated from a steel chassis; chassis to incorporate neutral and ground busses and device mounting and support components. Buss and chassis shallbe adequate for direct mounting of the largest scheduled frame size or fuse size of overcurrent device. e. Bus: Copper, 1000 amperes/square inch maximum density. f. Bus Configuration: Sequence bussed, entire length of panel.g. Equipment Ground Bus: Copper.h. Neutral Bus: Full capacity.i. Finish: Exterior and interior steel surfaces cleaned and finished with gray enamel over a rust inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color – ANSI 61 gray.j. Integrated Equipment Rating: As scheduled in the Drawings, minimum 10,000 amps symmetrical at 208V and minimum 14,000 amps symmetrical at 480V.k. Spare Capacity: Provide each panelboard with fully bussed space as indicated in the Drawings, complete with mounting hardware required for the indicated frame sizes.l. Circuit Directory: Type written and secured to the inside of the trim door with formed bezel and covered with clear plastic protector.m. Standard of Construction and Performance: Equal to Eaton Types Pow-R-Line 3A and 4.7. Switching and Overcurrent Protective Devices a. Fusible Switches: Quick-make, quick-break, Type HD conforming to NEMA KS-1, with externally operable handle and equipped with fuse holders to accommodate Class RK1 or L fuses.b. Molded Case Circuit Breakers – UL Listed Conforming to NEMA AB-1:(1) Breakers 400 Ampere Frame and Less: UL listed molded case construction, bolt-on type, integral inverse time delay thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip. Breakers 225 ampere through 400 ampere, provide continuously adjustablemagnetic pick-ups of approximately five to ten times trip rating.(2) Breakers 600 Ampere Frame and Above: Provide with micro-processor based RMS current sensing trip, consisting ofcurrent sensors, trip unit and flux transfer shunt trip.(3) Interrupting Capacity: Equal to or in excess of available short circuit current indicated for panelboard, as scheduled inthe Drawings and as specified in paragraph 2.2 J.(4) Standard of Construction and Performance: Equal to Eaton Series C molded case circuit breakers and Digitrip 310 True RMS micro-processor trip unit.(5) Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be UL listed for series application.27. Installationk. Install distribution panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and the NEC, and NEMA PB 1.1.l. Anchor firmly to walls and structural surfaces using mechanical fasteners as specified for conduits in Section 26 05 33, “Raceway Systems”.m. Provide engraved name plates at each panelboard as specified in Section 16010, “General Requirements for Electrical Work”.4609/08/202509/08/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46537SECTION 26 24 16 - BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS1. Description of Work: This Section includes the work required to provide Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards.2. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Eaton.b. ABB.c. Siemens.d. Square D Company.3. Panelboard Construction:a. Molded case circuit breaker type panelboards as scheduled.b. Enclosure: NEMA Type 1 unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings.c. Box and Cover: Box, dead front cover and trim cover in accordance with NEMA PB-1. Box: Code gauge hot dippedgalvanized steel. Dead front cover and trim cover: Code gauge cold rolled steel. Dead front cover to concealovercurrent devices and line and load terminations. d. Finish: Exterior and interior steel surfaces cleaned and finished with gray enamel over a rust inhibiting phosphatizedcoating.e. Integrated Equipment Rating: As scheduled in the Drawings, minimum 10,000 amps symmetrical at 208V and minimum14,000 amps symmetrical at 480V.f. Standard of Construction and Performance: Equal to Eaton Types Pow-R-Line 1, 1A and 2.4. Bussing:a. Phase Busses: Copper, sequenced entire length of panel.b. Neutral Buss: Full-capacity, Copper.c. Equipment Ground Buss: Copper.5. Overcurrent Protective Devices:a. Satisfy requirements of Specification Section 26 28 00.b. Interrupting Capacity: Equal to or in excess of available short circuit current indicated for panelboard, as scheduled in theDrawings and as specified.6. Installation:a. Provide type written directory, secured to the inside of the panel trim door.b. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, requirements of the NEC, and NEMA PB 1.1.c. Anchor firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secured.d. Test each phase under load to verify phase current balance. Configure loads to provide phase current imbalance not toexceed 20 percent of the total connected load.e. Flush Mounted Panelboards: Provide (3) 3/4-inch conduits with pull wire from each panelboard to an accessible locationabove ceiling.SECTION 26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES1. Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide wiring devices such as receptacles, switches, andcoverplates.2. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Arrow Hartb. Hubbellc. Leviton3. Wiring Devices: Wiring devices shall be installed complete in accordance with these Specifications, single or ganged asrequired, generally flush mounted.4. Generally wall switches shall be specification-grade, toggle type, back and side wired, 120/277 volt.5. Generally receptacle devices shall be specification-grade, grounding type, back and side wired, 125-volt, NEMA 5-20R,unless other NEMA configuration is indicated in the Drawings.6. The Drawings and Specifications indicate typical configuration requirements and it is the responsibility of the Contractor tofurnish the proper NEMA configuration for equipment or appliances as required by the equipment furnished. Prior topurchase of any devices coordinate with equipment shop drawings and supplier, and furnish proper protection, connections,and voltage as required by equipment characteristics and as specified.7. Device plates: One-piece, ganged, specification-grade, high-impact nylon.8. Receptacle and device plate color: Coordinate with the Architect.SECTION 26 28 00 – OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES1. Description of Work: This Section covers molded case circuit breakers rated 600 volts or less in panelboards.2. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Eaton.b. ABB.c. Square D Company.d. Siemens.3. Circuit Breakers:a. Inverse time tripping characteristics with fixed thermal trip action.b. Permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole.c. Calibrated for operation in a minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C.d. Labeled to indicate their current and voltage rating.e. Interrupting capacity compatible with the panelboard integrated equipment rating.f. Minimum AIC of 10,000A on 208/120V systems and 14,000A on 480/277 volt systems.g. One, two or three pole molded case circuit breakers as specified on the Drawings.h. Common trip type.4. Provide overcurrent protection for wiring and equipment in accordance with the NEC.SECTION 26 28 16 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES1. Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide disconnecting means for service entrance, branch andfeeder circuits.2. Acceptable Manufacturersa. Eaton.b. ABB.c. Siemens.d. Square D Company.3. Safety Switches:a. NEMA Type HD: Heavy Duty, conforming to NEMA KS-1 and UL 98, quick-make and quick-break type having overcentertoggle action to preclude contact teasing.b. Horsepower rated.c. Equipped with Class R fuseholders and fuses where indicated to be fusible type.d. Dead front construction with removable arc suppressor.e. Front removable 60 degrees C./75 degrees C. UL listed copper/aluminum terminals.f. Current-carrying parts plated by an electrolytic process.g. NEMA enclosure based on ANSI/NEMA 250-1979, suitable for the installed location.h. Enclosures: NEMA 1 unless noted otherwise.4. Toggle Switch Disconnects: Horsepower rated for motor disconnecting means.5. Receptacles: Horsepower rated for motor circuits.6. Service Entrance Disconnects: UL listed as “Suitable for Service Equipment” and provided with neutral and equipmentground buses.7. Installationsa. Provide phenolic label on disconnect switch identifying load served.b. Provide insulated solid neutral terminal unless otherwise indicated.c. Install to provide minimum front clear working space as required by NEC Article 110.d. Install fusible switches at no more than 6’-6” above finished floor to the operating handle in its highest position.e. Mount in the vertical position with ON position being the up position.f. In wet locations and outdoors install with a minimum of 1/4-inch clearance between the enclosure and the mountingsurface.g. Provide a label inside of each fused switch indicating the fuse type, ampere rating, and interrupting rating originallyspecified.h. Motor and Control Circuit Disconnects: Disconnect device shall disconnect simultaneously the control circuits and thepower circuits (Reference NEC 430.74).SECTION 26 43 13 – SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES – STANDARD INTERRUPTING1. Surge protection devices are specified by type and manufacturer on the drawings.2. Furnish and install surge protection devices with seven protection modes L, G, N.3. The maximum UL 1449 listed surge ratings for each and/or all of the specified protection modes shall not exceed 1000V inany mode of protection.4. The SPD System shall be duty life cycle tested to survive 3,000 20KV, 10KA surges, per IEEE C62.41 Category C3 surgecurrent with less than 5% degradation of clamping voltage.5. Compliant with UL 1283 Standards.6. Provide 10-year warranty for panelboards.SECTION 26 51 00 - LIGHTING1. Description of Work: This Section covers lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps.2. Fixtures shall be as specified and scheduled on the Drawings.3. Drivers:a. Operate as a parallel circuit allowing continued operation if one or more lamps fail.b. Sustain voltage variation of 10% (voltage and frequency) from normal without damage.c. Tolerate ambient temperatures up to 105 degrees F without damage.d. Meet ANSI C62.41-1991 (transient immunity) and ANSI C82.11-1993 (instant starting sequence and ballast factor).e. Have 10% or less total harmonic distortion.4. Lamps: Color temperature specified in the Light Fixture Schedule.5. Luminaires:a. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.b. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.c. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.d. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses,housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.e. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports,trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.f. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion,corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.g. Recessed Luminaires: Ceiling Compatibility – Comply with NEMA LE 4.h. LED Luminaires:(1) Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.(2) Tested in accordance with IES LM-70 and IES LM-80.(3) LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IESLM-80 test data.6. Set fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceilings and walls, in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures and secure inaccordance with manufacturer’s directions and approved shop drawings. The installation shall meet the requirements ofNEC.7. Provide (2) support wires for each fixture. Support wires shall be attached to the structure.8. Fixtures shall be clean and free of dirt, dust, grease, finger prints, etc., at the completion of the job.9. Lighting Functional Testing/Commissioning Plan: The Contractor shall complete the tasks below to commission the lightingcontrol system and submit written documentation detailing the tasks below. For each task, list the date performed, personcompleting the task, the initial setting/condition, actions performed, and final setting condition. Submit documentation at orbefore substantial completion to facilitate obtaining the Certificate of Occupancy.a. Ensure all lighting fixtures have lamps installed and are functional.b. Test all exit signs, emergency lighting fixtures, and emergency ballasts furnished integral to fixtures.c. Ensure all occupancy sensors have been installed and are operational.d. Ensure all wallbox and scene controllers are installed and operational.e. Test each individual device for occupancy sensor types: OS1, OS2, OS3, and OS4.f. Test 10% of devices for occupancy sensor types: Wallbox type WSD-PDT.g. Verify the following:(1) Sensors have been located and aimed per the manufacturer’s recommendations.(2) Status indicators on devices are operational and correct.(3) Devices control lighting fixtures as indicated on drawings.(4) Time delays have been set as indicated on the drawings.(5) Movement in adjacent areas and/or cycling of HVAC systems does not false trigger sensors.10. Lighting Standards and Poles:a. Exterior area lighting units of sizes, types and ratings indicated, complete with, but not limited to, poles/standards,brackets, luminaries and other components and accessories required for complete exterior area lighting systems.Provide Bussman Type “HEB” in-line waterproof fuse holders within each pole access for each phase conductor feedingoverhead luminaire(s).b. Provide metal, raceway-type, lighting poles and standards, of sizes and types indicated, comprised of shafts, luminarybracket arms, and tenon joints. Equip with grounding connections readily accessible from handhole access doors; andconstructed of the following materials and additional construction features:(1) Material: Steel.(2) Configuration: Anchor base type with handhole and cover where indicated.(3) Finishes: Paint finishes over corrosion resisting coatings.(4) Metal Lighting Standard Accessories: Provide accessories for metal lighting standards, including anchor bolts, asrecommended by standard manufacturer, of sizes and materials needed to fulfill loading and erection applicationrequirements.11. Installation of Exterior Lighting Fixtures:a. Install exterior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer’s writteninstructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA’s “Standard of Installation”, NEMA standards, and with recognizedindustry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.b. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s publishedtorque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated,tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and theNational Electrical Code.c. Fasten electrical lighting fixtures and brackets securely to indicated structural supports; and ensure that installed fixturesare plum and level.12. Provide equipment grounding connections for exterior lighting fixtures. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torquesspecified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.13. Upon completion of installation of exterior lighting fixtures, and associated electrical supply circuitry, apply electrical energy tocircuitry to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site,then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.END OF SECTION4609/08/202509/08/2025 DUGOUT DUGOUT BLEACHE R S DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S DUGOUTDUGOUTEXIST. STORAGE EXIST. CONCESSION EXIST RESTROOMS ELECT. YARD BLE A C H E R S BLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S 1 3 1 E-201,E-301 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 09/08/202509/08/2025 46 STORAGERESTROOMSTORAGESTAIRSCONCESSIONSTORAGEPRESSBOXSTORAGEOFFICESTAIRS416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465394609/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 40 46 09/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 41 46 09/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 09/08/2025 46 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 09/08/2025 46 STORAGERESTROOMSTORAGESTAIRSCONCESSIONNO PLUMBING SCOPE1111111STORAGEPRESSBOXSTORAGEOFFICESTAIRSNO PLUMBING SCOPE416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465444609/08/2025 STORAGERESTROOMSTORAGESTAIRSCONCESSIONP-3P-3AP-1P-2P-2P-1AP-1ANO PLUMBING SCOPE1111111STORAGEPRESSBOXSTORAGEOFFICESTAIRSNO PLUMBING SCOPE416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465454609/08/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465464609/08/2025 PROJECT # 23172 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 GREENWOOD SPORTS COMPLEX SPARKLING CITY YOUTH SOFTBALL BALLPARK 2: FIELDS 1,2,3 & 4 BOND 2022/2024 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 A/C AIR CONDITIONING ACP.ACOUSTICAL PANEL ACT.ACOUSTICAL TILE A.D.AREA DRAIN A.D.A.AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT ADJ.ADJUSTABLE A.F.F.ABOVE FINISH FLOOR A.F.G.ABOVE FINISH GRADE A.H.J.ATHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION ALUM ALUMINUM ALT.ALTERNATE ∟ANGLE ASPH.ASPHALT BD.BOARD BLDG.BUILDING BLK.BLOCK BM.BEAM B.U.R.BUILT-UP ROOF C CHANNEL CAB, CABT CABINET CFMF COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING C.J.CONTROL JOINT CL CENTER LINE CLG.CEILING C.M.U.CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COL.COLUMN COMP.COMPRESSIBLE CONC.CONCRETE COND.CONDITION CONT.CONTINUOUS CORR.CORRIDOR CPT.CARPET CT.CERAMIC TILE CTSK.COUNTERSINK C.W.COLD WATER D DRYER D.F.DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIA.DIAMETER DIM.DIMENSION D.P.DAMPPROOFING DTL DETAIL D.S.DOWN SPOUT DWG. DRAWING EA.EACH EDF ELECTRIC DRINKING FOUNTAIN EL.ELEVATION (HEIGHT) ELEC., ELECT. ELECTRICAL ELEV.ELEVATION (DRAWING) E.J.EXPANSION JOINT EQ.EQUAL EQUIP EQUIPMENT EXIST.EXISTING EXP.EXPANSION EXT.EXTERIOR FB.FACE BRICK FD.FLOOR DRAIN F.E.FIRE EXTINGUISHER F.E.C. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET F.H.C.FIRE HOSE CABINET FIN.FINISH FIXT.FIXTURE FLR.FLOOR FLSHG. FLASHING FLUOR FLUORESCENT GA.GAUGE GALV.GALVANIZED G.B.GRAB BAR CMBU GLAZED CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT GEN.GENERAL G.I.GALVANIZED IRON GL.GLASS GR.GRADE GTP.GLAZED TILE PAVER GYP.GYPSUM HC HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE HT.HEIGHT HORIZ HORIZONTAL HM HOLLOW METAL FRAME H.W.HOT WATER I.D.INSIDE DIAMETER INSUL INSULATION INT.INTERIOR I.P.S.IRON PIPE SIZE JT.JOINT LAM.LAMINATE LAV.LAVATORY L.P.LIGHT POLE LT.LIGHT LT. WT. LIGHT WEIGHT MANUF., MFR. MANUFACTURER MAS.MASONRY MATL.MATERIAL MAX.MAXIMUM MB.MARKER BOARD MECH.MECHANICAL MEM.MEMBRANE MEM. WP. MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING MEP MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING MEZZ.MEZZANINE M.H.MAN HOLE MIN.MINIMUM MISC.MISCELLANEOUS M.O.MASONRY OPENING MOD.MODULE MTL.METAL MTP.METAL TOILET PARTITION N.D.NAPKIN DISPOSAL N.I.C.NOT IN CONTRACT NO.NUMBER N.T.S.NOT TO SCALE N.V.NAPKIN VENDOR O.C.ON CENTER O.C.E.W. ON CENTER EACH WAY O.D.OUTSIDE DIAMETER O.F.C.I.OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED O.H.OPPOSITE HAND OPNG.OPENING OPP.OPPOSITE P.C.PRECAST P.H.PAPER HOLDER PL.PLATE P.L.PROPERTY LINE P. LAM. PLASTIC LAMINATE PLUMB. PLUMBING PLWD.PLYWOOD POL.POLISHED P.P.POWER POLE PR.PAIR PREFIN. PREFINISHED PT.POINT PTD.PAINTED P.W.B.PREFINISHED WALL BOARD QT.QUARRY TILE R RADIUS RD.ROOF DRAIN RE., REF. REFERENCE RECP.RECEPTACLE REINF.REINFORCE RES.RESILIENT REQ., REQ'D. REQUIRED REV.REVISION, REVISED RF RECREATIONAL RESILIENT FLOOR RPG.RELOCATABLE PAINTED GYP. BD. RSS.ROD STOCK AND SEALANT S.C.SEALED CONCRETE SCH., SCHED. SCHEDULE(D) SCPL SOLID CORE PLASTIC LAMINATE S.D.SOAP DISPENSER SEC.SECTION SHT.SHEET SIM.SIMILAR SPC.SPECIAL COATING SYSTEM SPEC., SPECS. SPECIFICATIONS SQ.SQUARE SS.SOUND STRIP S.S., ST. STL. STAINLESS STEEL STL.STEEL STR., STRUCT. STRUCTURAL SUSP.SUSPENDED SVF SHEET VINYL FLOORING SVDF SHEET VINYL DANCE FLOORING T.A.S.TEXAS ACCESSIBLITY STANDARDS T.B.TACK BOARD T.D.R.TOWEL DISPENSER & RECEPT. TEL TELEPHONE TERR.TERRAZZO THK.THICK T.O.TOP OF T.O.B.TOP OF (WOOD) BLOCKING T.O.M.TOP OF MASONRY T.O.S.TOP OF STEEL T.T.D.TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER TYP.TYPICAL U.N.O.UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UR.URINAL V VENT V.C.T. VINYL COMPOSITE TILE VENT.VENTILATING, VENTILATED VER.VERIFY VERT.VERTICAL VGB (PREFINISHED) VINYL CLAD GYPSUM BOARD V.I.F.VERIFY IN FIELD VWC VINYL WALL COVERING W WASHING MACHINE W/WITH W.C.WATER CLOSET WD.WOOD WDW.WINDOW W.P.WATERPROOFING W.S.WEATHERSTRIP WT.WEIGHT W.W.WATER WELL W.W.F.WELDED WIRE FABRIC Abbreviations EARTH (existing) 02 SITE CONSTRUCTION EARTH (backfill) DRAINAGE FILL CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 CONCRETE PRECAST CONCRETE GROUT BRICK 04 MASONRY CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS STONE CAST STONE 05 METALS STEEL ALUMINUM 06 WOODS AND PLASTICS CONTINUOUS WOOD INTERMITTENT WOOD PLYWOOD FINISH WOOD HARDBOARD PARTICLE BOARD SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 07 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION BATT INSULATION LOOSE FILL INSULATION RIGID INSULATION GLASS 08 GLAZING LATH AND PLASTER 09 FINISHES MEDIUM DENSITY FIBER BOARD (MDF) GYPSUM BOARD Material Conventions COLUMN LINE FLOOR LINE MATCH LINE ELEVATION SYMBOL DOOR DESIGNATION WINDOW DESIGNATION PARTITION TYPE REVISION NUMBER PLAN OR DETAIL ENLARGED DETAIL AND VERTICAL SECTIONS 100' - 0" FIN. FLOOR M1 DIMENSIONS - ALL DIMENSIONS TO FACE OF WALL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED 5'-6"7'-3" Drawing Conventions A A101 A101 1 1 A-500 1 A-600 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 EXIT 6' - 8"4' - 0" MAX.MIN.1' - 3"9"12"TYPICAL48" MAX.EQ EQ FIRE ALARM (COMBINATION SPEAKER AND STROBE)FIREMAN'S PHONE JACK WALL MOUNTED EXIT LIGHT LIGHT SWITCH AND DIMMER THERMOSTAT OR OTHER CONTROL DEVICE ELECTRIC, TELEPHONE, OR DATA RECEPTACLE ALIGN ITEMS WHEN POSSIBLE AT COUNTERS46" MAX.10 - 24" OBSTRUCTION MIN. 24" ALIGN STACKED DEVICES WHERE POSSIBLE 54" TYPICALSIGNAGE 18" CLEAR SPACE AT TACTILE SIGNAGE BOTTOM OF REFLECTIVE SURFACE FINISHED FLOOR 34" MAX40" MAX24"28" MIN8" MIN 11" MIN 9" MIN12" MIN. 12" MIN.LESS THAN 27"LESS THAN 27"Y NOTE: X IS THE 12" MINIMUM HANDRAIL EXTENSION REQUIRED AT EACH TOP RISER. Y IS THE MINIMUM HANDRAIL EXTENSION OF 12" PLUS THE WIDTH OF ONE TREAD THAT IS REQUIRED AT THE BOTTOM RISER. X 504.2 TREADS AND RISERS. ALL STEPS ON A FLIGHT OF STAIRS SHALL HAVE UNIFORM RISER HEIGHTS AND UNIFORM TREAD DEPTHS. RISERS SHALL BE 4 INCHES HIGH MINIMUM AND 7 INCHES MAXIMUM. TREADS SHALL BE 11 INCHES DEEP MINIMUM 504.5 NOSINGS. THE RADIUS CURVATURE AT THE LEADING EDGE OF THE TREAD SHALL BE 1/2 INCH MAXIMUM. NOSINGS THAT PROJECT BEYOND THE RISERS SHALL HAVE THE UNDERSIDE OF THE LEADING EDGE CURVED OR BEVELED. RISERS SHALL BE PERMITTED TO SLOPE UNDER THE TREAD AT AN ANGLE OF 30 DEGREES MAXIMUM FROM VERTICAL. THE PERMITTED PROJECTION OF THE NOSING SHALL EXTEND 1 1/2 INCHES MAXIMUM OVER THE TREAD BELOW. 2" MAX11" MIN. RADIUS7"RADIUS 11" MIN.2" MAX 7"30° (B) ANGLED NOSING (C) ROUNDED NOSING RADIUS 2" MAX11"7"30° (A) TYPICAL 60" MIN.18" MIN., 24" PREFERRED 48" MIN.X NOTE: X = 12" IF DOOR HAS BOTH A CLOSER AND A LATCH PUSH SIDEPULL SIDE X NOTE: Y = 48" MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS BOTH A LATCH AND CLOSER 54" MIN. NOTE: X = 36" MINIMUM IF Y = 60"; X = 42" MINIMUM IF Y = 54"YY42" MIN.PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE X 24" MIN. NOTE: Y = 48" MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS CLOSER NOTE: Y = 54" MINIMUM IF DOOR HAS CLOSER PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE Y48" MIN.X 24" MIN.Y42" MIN.1 1/4" - 2"1 1/2"1 1/4" - 2"1 1/2"1 1/4" - 2"1 1/2" (A) HANDRAIL (B) HANDRAIL (C) GUARDRAIL 1/2" MAX PREDOMINANT DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC 302.3 OPENINGS. OPENINGS IN FLOOR OR GROUND SURFACES SHALL NOT ALLOW PASSAGE OF A SPHERE MORE THAN 1/2 INCH DIAMETER EXCEPT AS ALLOWED IN 407.4.3, 409.4.3, 410.4, 810.5.3 AND 810.10. ELONGATED OPENINGS SHALL BE PLACED SO THAT THE LONG DIMENSION IS PERPENDICULAR TO THE DOMINANT DIRECTION OF TRAVEL. 48" MIN. 48" MIN. SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"3 MISCELLANEOUS HEIGHTS SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"2 LAVATORY CLEARANCES SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"5 STAIR HANDRAILS SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0"6 TREAD WIDTH AND NOSINGS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"7 FRONT APPROACH DOORS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"8 HINGE SIDE APPROACH DOORS SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"9 LATCH SIDE APPROACH DOORS SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0"10 SIZE AND SPACING OF HANDRAILS AND GRAB BARS SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"11 GRATINGS IN ACCESSIBLE ROUTES SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"12 TWO HINGED DOOR IN SERIES SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0"4 ROOM SIGNAGE 1 MOUNTING HEIGHTS 1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025 1-STORYBLDG 1-STORYBLDG 1-STORYBLDG 2-STORYBLDG 1-STORYBLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUT PROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT. 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 ELECT. YARD 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 2-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 STORAGE RESTROOMS DUGOUTBLEACHERSCONCESSIONDUGOUTBLEACHERSRESTROO M S DU G O U T BLE A C H E R S DU G O U T BLE A C H E R S DU G O U T BLE A C H E R S DU G O U T BLE A C H E R SDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHERS PAR K I N GDUGOUT 1 SITE PLAN1:30 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025LEGEND 21 1 1 SITE PLAN DEMOLITION1:30 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/2025LEGEND DUGOUTBLEACHERSCONCESSIONDUGOUTBLEACHERSRESTROO M S DU G O U T BLE A C H E R S DU G O U T BLE A C H E R S DU G O U T BLE A C H E R S DU G O U T BLE A C H E R SDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHERSDUGOUT 1 ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/202524 1 24 2 LEGEND 22 1 TYP. 22 3 TYP. 7 DUGOUT CROSS SECTION - ALTERNATE #43/4"=1'-0" 3 TYP. SHADE CANOPY/BLEACHER LAYOUT1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20254 DUGOUT ELEVATION - ALTERNATE #41/4"=1'-0" 5 DUGOUT SECTION - ALTERNATE #43/4"=1'-0"6 DUGOUT SECTION - ALTERNATE #43/4"=1'-0" 2 DUGOUT FLOOR PLAN - ALTERNATE #4 - N.I.C. (NOT IN CONTRACT)1/4"=1'-0" 1 DUGOUT FLOOR PLAN - BASE BID1/4"=1'-0" 1 FLAG POLE DETAIL1/2"=1'-0"2 ACCESSIBLE SIGN DETAIL3/4"=1'-0"3 WHEELSTOP DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0"4 CHAINLINK FENCE GATE DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 5 FENCE DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0" 6 FENCE CORNER DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"7 FENCE GATE DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20258 TYP. PARK FIELD SIGN - PS1N.T.S. 9 CURB DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0" CONCESSION EMPLOYEE GARAGE WOMEN MEN 1 FLOOR PLAN DEMOLITION - CONCESSION1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20252 FLOOR PLAN DEMOLITION - RESTROOMS1/4"=1'-0" LEGEND CONCESSION EMPLOYEE GARAGE WOMEN MEN 1 FLOOR PLAN - CONCESSION1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20252 FLOOR PLAN - RESTROOMS1/4"=1'-0" LEGEND 1 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20252 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0"3 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0"4 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0" 7 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0"6 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0"8 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0"5 EXTERIOR ELEVATION1/8"=1'-0" STRUCTURAL NOTES I 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 GENERAL NOTESSHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALSDESIGN CRITERIAFOUNDATION AND EARTHWORKCONCRETE NOTESTENSION LAPS AND EMBEDMENTTABLE AREINFORCEMENTCONCRETE NOTES CONT'D: ABBREVIATIONS416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232STRUCTURAL NOTES II WINDSTORM & CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION:·········WOOD FRAMING NOTESSTRUCTURAL STEEL NOTESSTRUCTURAL STEEL CONNECTIONS SITE PLAN11212121212121212416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232SITE PLAN FOUNDATION & FRAMING PLANS 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 FOUNDATION NOTES & LEGEND:ABAAA22DUGOUT FOUNDATION PLAN1C11CBLEACHERS FOUNDATION PLANAAAAB3DUGOUT FRAMING PLAN2NIC STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS I 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232SECTIONBSECTIONASADDLE DETAIL1SECTIONC2TYPICAL CORNER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL6TYPICAL PERIMETER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL745TYPICAL BEAMINTERSECTION DETAILTYPICAL BEAMCORNER DETAILTYPICAL CONSTRUCTIONJOINT SLAB-ON-GRADE DETAIL3EMBED PLATE - EP1 & EP2 STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS II - (ALTERNATE #2) 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232TYP MASONRY DOWEL DETAIL1TYP CMU WALL SECTIONANICNIC 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 TYPICAL CMU SECTIONS & DETAILS - (ALTERNATE #2)MASONRY BOND BEAM5REINFORCING @REINFORCING @ MASONRY4OF GROUTING BLOCK1LOW LIFT METHOD REINF DETAIL2TYP CMU WALLS STEP DETAIL3TYP CMU BOND BEAMCONTROL JOINT7EXPANSION JOINT6FLUSH WALL PILASTER8NIC 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 3434 47 09/08/2025 09/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 35 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 00 – GENERAL PLUMBING PROVISIONS 1. Give all requisite notices, file plans if required, obtain and pay for all permits and pay all deposits and fees necessary for the installation of the plumbing work. Obtain and pay for all inspections required by all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or public authority having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for certificates of such inspections, and file such certificates with Owner. 2. Bidders shall examine all Drawings and Specification. Bidders must be familiar with the codes, rules, regulations (and the local interpretations) in effect at the site of the work. 3. The plumbing plans are intended to be diagrammatic and are based on one manufacturer’s equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact location, the exact dimensions, or all the details of the equipment. The Contractor shall verify the actual dimensions of the equipment proposed to ensure that the equipment will fit in the available space. 4. Installation shall be within the limitations imposed by the architectural, structural, electrical, and mechanical requirements, with adequate space for maintenance. 5. All equipment, materials, and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one year, beginning with the date of acceptance of the project in writing. Special warranties will be called for under some sections of equipment. This warranty shall be in writing and shall include written copies of factory warranties with expiration dates on items of equipment where the warranty date might differ from the acceptance date, such as five-year warrant of sealed refrigerant systems. No warranty shall start before the acceptance date. 6. REQUIRED SUBMITTALS: a. Submittals shall be clearly marked to show the intended item, with identification as to unit number or other marking to show location, service, and function. Submittals not marked to identify the equipment and application will be rejected. b. The supplier, by submitting, certifies that the materials or equipment proposed is satisfactory for the application intended, including adverse conditions that may prevail at the job site, and that materials and equipment are in current production with no known plans to cease production. c. Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders; that the purpose of submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept; and that this understanding is demonstrated by indicating which equipment and materials he or she intends to furnish and install and the fabrication and installation methods he or she intends to use. d. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between submittals and Contract documents are discovered either prior to or after submittals are processed by the Engineer, the Contract Documents shall control and shall be followed. e. Submittals shall include: (1) Pipe, valves, insulation, etc. (2) Plumbing fixtures. 7. At the close of the job, prior to final review, five bound copies of the following maintenance and operations manuals on all equipment shall be submitted by transmittal to the Architect or Engineer for review and acceptance. a. Equipment warranties. b. Contractor’s warranty. c. Parts list and manuals for all equipment. d. Operating Instruction (in writing). e. Written instructions on maintenance and care of the system. 8. Material and equipment shall be the standard catalog products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturer of products conforming to the Specification. 9. When any material or equipment is identified on the plans or in the Specifications by reference to one manufacturer’s name or model number, it is intended to establish a required standard of design and quality, and it is not intended to limit competition. It is understood that the phrase “or accepted equivalent” is hereby inserted following the one manufacturer’s name, whether such phrase occurs or not. 10. Where three names are given for any equipment, the Contractor shall furnish one of named manufacturers. 11. All work shall be concealed in walls, chases or above ceilings, unless specifically shown to be exposed. 12. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in such a way that all components requiring access are so located and installed that they may be serviced, replaced, etc., by service people with normal service tools and equipment. If any equipment or components are shown in such a position that this Contractor cannot comply with the above, the Contractor shall notify the General Contractor and attempt to resolve the problem of access. If this consultation is not successful, the Architect and Engineer shall be notified in writing and a decision requested. 13. Install unions or flanges at all piping connections to equipment. 14. Cutting, patching, furring, painting, electrical, mechanical, etc., shall be done by the affected trade at this Contractor’s expense for changes required in work already installed or work required by other trades for changes made by this Contractor in type or size of equipment purchased. 15. Openings in floors, walls, and roof shall be furnished by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall inform the General contractor of the location and size required. This contractor shall furnish all sleeves, frames, including framing between joist unless shown on the Architectural or Structural Drawings, access doors, prefabricated curbs, and other accessories necessary for a complete installation. Only those items specifically shown and/or specified in other Sections are excluded. 16. Flashing of roof for curbs, pipes, stands, etc., shall be by the General Contractor (roofer). Curbs and counter flashing shall be by this Contractor. 17. Power wiring, including final connections, is by the Electrical Contractor. (This Contractor shall install all motors and furnish the starting equipment to the Electrical Contractor for installation. Control wiring, including 115 volt from power source, conduit, switches, thermostats, interlock, etc., shall be furnished by this Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings. This Contractor shall see that the electrical equipment does not block access to service areas of equipment, i.e., disconnect switches mounted on the compressor or control access doors of equipment.). 18. Furnish and install all special foundations and supports required for equipment installed under this Section, unless they are a part of the building structure and are shown in other Sections. 19. All work shall be in accordance with the following rules and regulations and any applicable laws. International Plumbing Code (IPC). Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). International Energy Conservation Code (IECC). 20. Where any of the above are at variance with the Drawings and Specification, the code requirements shall take precedence and any cost necessary to meet these shall be included in the Contract. 21. All metal items inside the building subject to rusting, and all ferrous metal exposed to weather, shall be given one coat of rust preventive primer as soon as installed. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates shall comply with VOC requirements of Green Seal Standard GC-03. Maximum 250 g/L VOC content. 22. In addition to the warranty of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, Contractor shall and hereby does warrant all materials, workmanship and equipment furnished and installed by him to be free from defects for a period of one year after date of final completion of Contract, or from full occupancy of the building by the Owner (whichever is earlier). Should any defects in material, workmanship, or equipment be made known to Contractor within one year warranty period, Contractor shall replace such materials, workmanship, or equipment without charge. 23. The Contractor shall coordinate and make provisions for final connection to all fixtures, equipment and any connections to equipment furnished by others, for a complete and operating system. SECTION 22 05 23 – VALVES 1. Provide valves of the same manufacturer throughout where possible. 2. All valves shall be manufactured in the United States. 3. Provide threaded valves for pipe sizes 2-inches and smaller. 4. Provide flanged or grooved end butterfly valves for pipe sizes 2-1/2-inches and larger. 5. Install valves for shutoff and isolating service. 6. Use Class 150 bronze body ball and check valves for water services 2-inches and under. Use Class 150 iron butterfly and check valves on sizes 2-1/2-inches and larger. 7. Provide shutoff valves and check valves on discharge of pumps. 8. Where valves are installed concealed in pipe chases or above inaccessible ceilings, provide access door with concealed hinge and key operated locks. 9. Lead-free valves shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex F and NSF/ANSI 372. Lead-free valves shall be installed in systems that deliver water for human consumption. SECTION 22 05 29 – SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1. Provide electro-galvanized steel hanger rods. 2. Group pipe where possible on trapeze hangers. 3. Provide two layers of PVC tape if ferrous hangers are used. 4. Provide sleeves at all wall and floor penetrations. 5. Pipe hangers on insulated lines shall be sized to fit the outside of the insulation. Provide galvanized sheet metal saddles at hanger locations. 6. Support piping with all thread rod and clevis hangers. Group pipe where possible on trapeze hangers constructed of angle iron or unistrut. Attach piping to support the U-bolts or suitable pipe clamps. 7. Prime coat non-galvanized or non-plated steel hangers, reinforcements and supports. Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates shall comply with VOC requirements of Green Seal Standard GC-03. Maximum 250 g/L VOC content. 8. Flash and counterflash where plumbing piping passes through weather or waterproof walls, floors and roofs. 9. Provide lead flashing at all vent pipe penetrations of the roof. 10. Seal all pipes passing through walls and floors with fire rated silicone foam fire-stop sealant. 11. Provide anchors properly sized to withstand the forces of expansion and contraction. SECTION 22 05 53 – PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 1. Provide pipe labeling identifying all piping systems. SECTION 22 07 00 – PLUMBING INSULATION 1. Provide thermal insulation on all PVC piping installed in a return air plenum. 2. Provide thermal insulation on domestic cold and hot water and hot water return piping. 3. Provide thermal insulation on all condensate piping. 4. Provide insulation where required to prevent freezing or condensation. 5. All insulation products shall comply with ASTM E-84 smoke developed rating of 50, fuel contributed rating of 50 and flame spread rating of 25. 6. Insulation shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves. 7. Provide thermal insulation on piping excluding valves, strainers, and unions. Insulation shall be heavy-duty pre-molded glass fiber insulation with all service jacket and self-sealing lap. Taper insulation at valves and miter insulation at fittings and finish with mastic. 8. For exterior insulated piping provide aluminum jacket with bands on 12-inch centers. 9. Insulation system shall be weatherproof. 10. Insulation thickness shall be according to the following table: 11. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 12. Insulated piping exposed outdoors shall be covered with 0.016-inch thick corrugated aluminum jacketing secured with aluminum bands. Provide pre-molded aluminum fitting covers from fitting, valves, etc. Seal all joints with silicone sealant. SECTION 22 20 00 – PLUMBING PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 1. Sanitary waste and vent piping underground shall be Schedule 40 PVC-DWV with solvent weld joints. 2. Sanitary waste and vent piping aboveground shall be Schedule 40 PVC-DWV with solvent weld joints. 3. Domestic water piping above grade shall Be Type L hard temper copper pipe with wrought copper fittings and silver soldered connections or press-fit type fittings, or straight lengths of PEX-A with expansion fittings. . 4. Lead-free components shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex F and NSF/ANSI 372. Lead-free components shall be installed in systems that deliver water for human consumption. SECTION 22 40 00 – PLUMBING FIXTURES 1. Water closets shall be 1.28 GPF. 2. Urinals shall be 0.5 GPF. 3. Lavatories shall be counter mounted or wall hung, with 0.5 GPM faucets. 4. Service sinks shall be floor mounted. 5. Electric water coolers on each floor shall be wall hung and suitable for handicapped use. 6. Provide carriers for all wall mounted fixtures. 7. All plumbing fixtures shall be manufactured in the United States. 8. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the drawings. 9. Lead-free components shall comply with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex F and NSF/ANSI 372. Lead-free components shall be installed in systems that deliver water for human consumption. DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 00 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 1. The separation of Division 26 into sections is for convenience only and is not intended to establish limits of work. 2. Codes, Permits and Inspections: Comply with applicable laws of the Government, State, and community having jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for permits required. 3. Electrical work, material, and installation shall conform to the latest accepted editions of the following codes, regulations, and associations: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) American Standards Association (ASA) International Building Code (IBC) National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (UL) International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 4. Material and Workmanship: Materials shall be new, UL approved where a standard has been established. Where no UL standard has been established, obtain written approval from the Engineer prior to placing order. 5. Whenever the words “or equal”, “equivalent”, “acceptable”, or other words with similar intent are used implying judgment to be exercised, the judgment of the Engineer is that which is referenced. 6. Drawings and Specifications: Consider as complementary each to the other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. 7. Coordination: Coordinate work so as to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. 8. Testing: Electrical systems shall be fully tested by the Contractor including, but not limited to, the following: a. Available voltage and ampere load readings on feeders, transformers, and major branch circuits with systems operating at maximum load shall be recorded. b. Test receptacle for circuit continuity and grounding with a Daniel Woodhead or equal status tester. c. Test results shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer on one set of Contract Drawings. 9. Patch and repair existing surfaces, required to be maintained, that are damaged by the Contractor in performing the work. 10. Record Documents for the Owner: Keep at the site one set of plans for the express purpose of daily correcting in red or yellow pencil every change at the time it is made. Prints shall detail actual field dimensions of conduit stub-outs, conduit runs, equipment installation, and conduit routing concealed within slabs or below grade. Mark-up prints shall be turned over to the Owner. 11. Submittals: Provide proposed manufacturer’s literature and dimensioned shop drawings to the Engineer for review. Submittals shall include the following sections of work. a. Section 26 24 16– Branch Circuit Panelboards b. Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices c. Section 26 28 00 – Overcurrent Protective Devices d. Section 26 51 00 – Lighting. VE packages shall include photometrics of proposed fixtures. e. Unsubmitted sections shall be installed as specified. 12. Protection of Materials: Equipment and materials shall be protected against damage from water, dirt, chemical, or mechanical injury. After fixtures have been installed, they shall be completely protected against breakage or the depositing of waste or material therein until the system is accepted. 13. The Contractor shall be responsible for work, existing or new, damaged, by him or his sub-contractor in the executing work. 14. Provide line voltage power connections to Division 22 and Division 23 power supplies, actuators, dampers and control panels. Coordinate with Division 22 and Division 23 for quantities and locations of such connections. 15. Provide one year guarantee on all parts and labor. SECTION 26 05 19 – WIRE AND CABLE 1. Description of Work: Wire and cable for lighting, power, control, and special systems rated 600 volts or less shall be furnished and installed as a part of this Section. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. American Insulated Wire Corp. b. Essex International, Inc. c. Rome Cable. 3. Copper conductor for wire and cable shall be 98% conductivity annealed copper per ASTM B3 and shall be tinned or untinned in accordance with established standards for the type of insulation applied over the conductors. #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid and #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, conductor sizes are based on copper. Conductors shall be copper. 4. Wire and Cable Wire: a. Rated 600 volt A.C. b. Installed in approved raceways or conduit. c. Not less than #12 AWG, except that #14 AWG may be used for control and low voltage wiring. d. Insulation type: THW or THHN-THWN. e. Permanently marked at 24-inch intervals with size, voltage, and temperature ratings. Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness (in inches) Fluid Operating Temperature Range and Usage (◦F) Insulation Conductivity Nominal Pipe or Tube Size (inches) Conductivity Btu▪in./(h▪ft2▪◦F) Mean Rating Temperature, ◦F <1 1 to <1-1/2 1-1/2 to <4 4 to <8 ≤8 >350 0.32-0.34 250 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 251-350 0.29-0.32 200 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 201-250 0.27-0.30 150 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 141-200 0.25-0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 85-140 0.21-0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 40-84 0.21-0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 <40 0.20-0.26 50 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 47 09/08/202509/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 36 5. Control/Communications (Low Voltage) Type Wires and Cables: Size, type, and materials, as called for under the specific system and as required by the system equipment manufacturer. 6. Feeder and branch circuit wiring shall be installed using color coded conductors. For conductors #6 and smaller, color coding shall be by factory applied color-impregnated insulation. For conductors #4 and larger, color coding shall be by plastic coated self-sticking markers, colored nylon cable ties, or heat shrink type sleeves. 7. Conductor Identification: Provide identification for feeder conductors within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Identification shall be by means of nylon marker ties, Type “PLM” as manufactured by Panduit Corporation or as approved. 8. Conductor Installation: a. Conductors shall be carefully handled and installed to ensure that maximum tensile and compressive strengths of conductor and insulation are not exceeded and that the conductors are not “kinked” or the insulation damaged. b. Wire pulling compound, when used, shall be UL listed, Ideal “Yellow 77”, Holub “Hi Green”, or approved equal. The use of soap flakes, liquid detergents, or vegetable oils is unacceptable. SECTION 26 05 20 – WIRE CONNECTIONS AND SPLICES 1. Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide connectors and splices for wire and cable rated 600 volt and less. 2. Splices and Connectors (UL 486A, 486B, and 486C): a. Connectors for wires #10 AWG and smaller: Insulated pressure type in accordance with UL 486A or 486C (twist-on splicing connector). 3. Terminations (UL 468A and 468B): a. Terminating kits designed for the conductor and application. 4. Connectors shall be of material compatible with the materials of the conductors to prevent corroding, differences in coefficients of expansion, and electrolysis. 5. Splices and Terminations: Splices in conductors shall be as few as possible. Where joints are necessary, they shall be mechanically strong and well made so that the electrical resistance of a joint shall not exceed that of 2 feet of the conductor. Splices and terminations shall be made only in junction or pull boxes and never in conduit elbows or similar fittings. Splices will not be allowed in panels. SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING 1. Description of Work: Electrical systems and equipment shall be grounded as required by NEC Article 200 and Article 250, as specified herein, and as shown on the Drawings. Nothing in this Specification or on the Drawings shall be construed as exempting the installation from compliance with applicable codes. 2. Materials: a. Connectors shall be industry standard, hot dip galvanized malleable iron or cast bronze or copper alloy nonferrous material which will not cause galvanic action between contact surfaces. b. Clamps, connectors, mechanical lugs, or wire terminals shall be used to bond ground wires together or to junction and panel boxes. c. Ground conductors shall be copper. d. Equipment grounding conductors shall have a green jacket. e. Ground electrode conductors and bonding jumpers shall be bare copper. f. Materials shall be UL listed. 3. Items to be Grounded: The noncurrent carrying metallic parts, components, and materials of the electrical distribution system and utilization equipment connected thereto shall be grounded by means of direct connection to the grounding conductor and the system grounding electrodes. 4. Supplemental Grounding: a. The noncurrent carrying metallic parts of the electrical distribution system shall be grounded by the metal raceway and by a supplemental equipment grounding conductor. b. The equipment grounding conductor shall be insulated with a green cover. c. Equipment grounding conductors shall be provided in the same conduit with the circuit conductors. d. Receptacles must be connected by means of a jumper to the box. This connection shall not be made directly to the ground wires. Ground wires entering a box must be solidly connected together and bonded to the box or enclosure. 5. Raceway and Enclosure Bonding: a. Bonding jumpers shall be provided around remaining concentric or eccentric knock-outs that are punched or otherwise formed in the enclosures and boxes. b. Metal raceways, equipment, frames, enclosure, and other metal noncurrent carrying parts must be bonded together in accordance with NEC 250.96. 6. General: a. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before connections are made to insure good metal-to-metal contact. b. Splices shall not be permitted in ground conductors except in boxes and enclosures where permitted by the NEC. c. Conductors and connections must be protected from physical damage. SECTION 26 05 33– RACEWAYS 1. Description of Work: Unless otherwise specifically noted, electrical systems wiring specified herein or shown on the Drawings shall be installed in one of the raceway or conduit systems specified in this Section. A raceway is defined as any channel for holding wire, cable, or buss bars that is designed expressly for, and used solely for, this purpose. 2. The raceways to be covered under this Section: a. IMC: Threaded, intermediate metal conduit. b. EMT: Electrical metal tubing. c. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. d. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. e. PVC: Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit. 3. Flexible nonmetallic conduit systems will not be allowed on this project. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Conduit – IMC and EMT: (1) Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. (2) LTV/Republic Steel Corp. (3) Triangle PWC Inc. b. Conduit – FMC and LFMC: (1) American Flexible Conduit Company. (2) Anamet, Inc. (3) Electri-flex Company. (4) International Metal Hose. c. Conduit – PVC: (1) Can-Tex Industries. (2) Carlon. (3) Certainteed Corp. 5. IMC: Comply with NEC Article 342, UL 1242 and Fed. Spec. WW-C581. Fittings: Threaded type, cadmium or zinc coated, in accordance with UL 514B. 6. EMT: Comply with NEC Article 358, Fed. Spec. WW-C563, UL 797, and ANSI C80.3. Fittings: watertight compression type. 7. FMC and LFMC: Comply with NEC Article 348 or Article 350, and UL 1. Fittings: Cadmium or zinc coated, in accordance with UL 514. Screw-in type fittings are not acceptable. 8. PVC: Comply with NEC Article 352, Type EPC-40 (EPC-80), NEMA TC2, UL 651, and Federal Specification W-C-1094A. NEMA TC3 fittings. 9. Fire stops shall be O-Z “Fire Seal” type or equal. 10. Wiring Methods: Electrical installations shall consist of insulated conductors installed in conduit, except where specifically indicated, specified otherwise, or required by NEC to be installed otherwise. 11. IMC: a. Shall be installed: (1) For elbow transitions from underground to above grade or slab. (2) Where passing below grade beams, at 12 inches minimum below and to a distance of 5 feet either side thereof. (3) Where passing through footings to a distance of 5 feet either side thereof. b. May be installed: (1) Exposed in unfinished areas to a height of 60 inches above finished floor. (2) Underground, when protected by factory-applied plastic resin epoxy coating. 12. EMT: a. May be installed: (1) Where concealed within the building. (2) Exposed in unfinished areas at least 60 inches above finished floor. b. Shall not be installed: (1) For feeder conduits. (2) In wet/damp locations. (3) Outdoors. 13. FMC and LFMC: a. Shall be installed from the point of connection to vibration producing equipment and machines such as transformers, rotating and reciprocating equipment, to the point of connection with the rigidly supported branch circuit conduit wiring system. Minimum length shall be 24 inches or 12 inches per 1 inch of conduit diameter, whichever is greater. 14. PVC: a. May be installed for underground branch circuit and feeder conduits from a point 5’-0” outside the building line to the point of exposure above grade or the load served. b. May be installed under building slab on grade Where passing below grade beams, install minimum of 12-inches below bottom of beam. c. Provide IMC elbows and IMC conduits for transition from underground to above ground. d. Shall not be installed concealed or exposed within the building. e. Below grade installation: Minimum trade size permitted for below grade installation, 1-inch diameter. f. Make joints watertight. Install couplings, connectors, and elbows using approved adhesive, driving joint tight and ensure permanent adhesive set prior to backfill or conductor installation. g. May be installed in interior, dry spaces per NEC 334.10 in Type III, IV, and V construction. h. Not permitted to be installed in areas described in NEC 334.12. i. Must be secured at least every 4.5’ and not more than 12” from a fitting, box, or cabinet. Reference NEC 334.30 15. Conduit Installation: a. Install parallel with or at right angles to building lines, structural members, ceiling members, and walls. b. Install pull boxes to limit the number of equivalent 90 degree bends in any conduit run to three to prevent exceeding the maximum pulling tension and side wall pressure of installed wire and cable. c. Install conduits passing through fire rated partitions, walls, and floors in a manner so as to maintain the specified and required fire rating. d. Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets using two locknuts where nonmetallic insulating bushings are used and elsewhere with at least one locknut and one metal bushing. e. Provide insulated bushings for conduits 1 inch and larger terminating in unthreaded openings of metal and nonmetallic boxes, cabinets, or enclosure. Bushings for service entrance conduits shall be insulated metal grounding bushings. f. Provide pull wire in empty conduit systems. g. Field cutting and threading: Cut conduit ends square; thread using proper hand or power machines; ream and leave cut ends free of burrs and jagged edges. Threads shall be painted with Thomas and Betts “KOPR-SHIELD” compound. Exposed threads shall be painted with a cold galvanized compound. h. Conduit systems shall be complete and electrically continuous before conductors are installed. i. Provide insulated bushings for conduits terminations and stub-outs in spaces such as plenums, chases, raised floors, and communications equipment rooms where wiring method changes to open wiring. When the conduit end is not threaded, the bushing shall be installed in combination with a threadless connector. 16. Conduit Support: a. Provide support at a maximum of 8 feet on center; at not more than 3 feet from outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, and fittings; and at each elbow. Support conduit by means of pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, and trapeze assembles. The load applied to fasteners and supports shall not exceed one-fourth of the proof test load. Perforated strap iron is unacceptable. b. Fasten to wood surfaces using wood screws; to hollow masonry units using toggle bolts; to concrete and brick surfaces using inserts or expansion bolts; to metal, lumber, and steel work using machine screws or spring tension clamps. Use insert anchors in poured-in-place concrete construction. Threaded C-clamps may be used only on rigid conduit. Do not weld pipe straps or conduits to steel structures. c. Branch circuit conduit systems shall not be supported by suspended ceiling supporting systems. d. Support FMC and LFMC at intervals not exceeding 54 inches on center and within 12 inches of each termination in a junction, pull box, conduit fitting, or cabinet. e. Coordination: Prior to rough-in, coordinate the work of this Section with that of other sections to avoid conflicts of space utilization. 17. Underground Conduits: a. Excavation and Backfill: (1) Excavate along straight lines to the width and depth required for proper installation of conduits. Where excavated below the necessary elevation, backfill and sand and compact to the proper elevation. (2) Where rocks, materials with sharp edges, permanently moist, or unstable ground is encountered, excavate to a depth 4-inches below the specified elevation, and backfill with 4-inches of sand, free of particles that would be retained by a 1/4-inch sieve. (3) Dewater trenches before installing conduit. (4) Backfill in not more than 6-inch lifts, compacted to 95 percent of the density of adjacent soil, with soil materials free of rocks, debris, roots, wood, scrap materials, or vegetable matter. (5) Where necessary to remove sod, remove in large sections and carefully set aside and care for until replaced. Backfill the top 4-inches of trench with topsoil before replacing sod. Carefully replace sod and water thoroughly. If dead or severely damaged, replace with like material or seed as directed by the Architect. b. Underground Conduits Without Concrete Encasement: (1) Install to code required depth, but not less than 24-inches, below finished grade or as detailed in the drawings and at a minimum slope of 3-inches per 100-feet away from buildings. (2) Following backfill and prior to conductor installation, clean each conduit using a testing mandrel not less than 12- inches long with a diameter 1/4-inch less than the inside diameter of the conduit. Pull through the conduit followed by a brush having stiff bristles, until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand, gravel and other contaminates. 18. The minimum bend radius for underground service entrance and feeder conduit – 36 inches except at vertical risers to equipment. SECTION 26 05 34 – BOXES 1. Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide boxes, including outlet, floor, pull, junction, and cable tap boxes and supports associated therewith. 2. Outlet Boxes and Covers: a. Concealed and exposed dry locations except where prohibited herein: One piece die formed 14 gauge zinc galvanized steel, in accordance with UL 514. 3. Junction and Pull Boxes: UL 514 4. Wireways: UL 870. 5. Provide boxes in the raceway system wherever required for pulling conductors, making connections, and mounting devices and fixtures. 6. Boxes: a. Minimum volume required by NEC for the number and size of conductors installed. b. Not less that 1-1/2 inches deep. c. Not less than 4-inches square, except that 4”x2” boxes may be used when only one raceway enters the box. d. 4 inches square for two devices and solid ganged boxes for more than two devices. 7. Supports: a. Supports boxes and pendants for surface mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independent of ceiling supports or make adequate provisions for distributing the load over the ceiling supporting members, using approved bar hangers or 1-1/2 inch lathers channel. b. Receptacle outlets shall be installed in light weight stud construction using bar hangers and box clips, Caddy Fasteners No. BHA/BHC or as approved. c. Boxes for switches shall be supported using sheet metal screws, Caddy Fasteners Series “MF” Clips, or approved equal. d. Fixtures, loads of 50 lbs. or more, and for ceiling fans shall be supported from the building structure, independent of box, raceway or suspended ceiling supports. 8. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise noted, mounting heights for outlets shall be as listed below. Dimensions are from finished floor or work surface to centerline of outlet. Wall Switches 46 inches *Receptacles 18 inches Toggle Switches 46 inches *Desk Telephone Outlets 18 inches * A.C. – Above counter tops (6 inches normally). The exact mounting heights required for these devices shall be coordinated with the Architect. 9. Install boxes so that device covers are plumb and tight against the wall finish. SECTION 26 05 53 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1. This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following: a. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors. b. Operational instruction signs. c. Warning and caution signs. d. Equipment labels and signs. 2. References a. ANSI Standard C2 and A13.1, “Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems”, with regard to type and size of lettering for raceway and cable levels. b. National Electrical Codes, NFPA70. c. NEMA standards applicable to the product provided. d. UL standards applicable to the product provided. e. OSHA standards. 3. Submittals a. Manufacturer’s product data on each product and component. b. Manufacturer’s written installation instructions for each product and component. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: (1) American Labelmark Co. (2) Brimar. (3) Calpico, Inc. (4) Cole-Flex Corp. (5) Emed Co., Inc. (6) George-Ingraham Corp. (7) Ideal Industries, Inc. (8) Kraftbilt. (9) LEM Products, Inc. (10) Markal Corp. (11) National Band and Tag Co. (12) Panduit Corp. (13) Radar Engineers Div., EPIC Corp. (14) Seton Name Plate Co. (15) Standard Signs, Inc. (16) W. H. Brady & Co. (17) 3M Scotch Code. b. Other manufacturers equal in design and function will be considered upon submittal of manufacturer’s data. 5. Electrical Identification Products a. General: Provide manufacturer’s standard products of categories and types required for each application unless otherwise indicated. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer’s option, but provide single selection for each application. b. Adhesive Marking Labels for Raceway and Metal-Clad Cable: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive labels with legend indicating voltage and service (Emergency, Lighting, Power, Light, Power dc, Air Conditioning, Communications, Control, Fire). c. Label Size: As follows: (1) Raceways 1-inch and Smaller: 1-1/8-inches high by 4-inches long. (2) Raceways Larger than 1”: 1-1/8-inches high by 8-inches long. d. Color: Black legend on orange background unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations. e. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils. thick by 1-inch to 2-inches in width. f. Pre-Tensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Raceway and Cable Identification: Flexible acrylic bands sized to suit the raceway diameter and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when coiled around the raceway or cable. g. Underground Line Marking Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, plastic tape compounded for direct- burial service not less than 6-inches wide by 4 mils. thick. Printed legend indicative of general type of underground line below. h. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letters. i. Aluminum, Wraparound, Cable Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch thick, aluminum sheet, fitted with slots or ears for securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. Provide for legend application with stamped letters or number. 47 09/08/202509/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 37 j. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends to suit the application. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener. k. Aluminum-Faced Card Stock Tags: Weather-resistant, 18 point minimum card stock face down both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002-inch thick, and laminated with moisture-resistant acrylic adhesive. Preprint legend to suit the application, and punch for tie fastener. l. Brass or Aluminum Tags: Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener. Dimensions: 2-inches x 2-inches x 19 gage. m. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 sq. in., or 8-inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black face and punched for mechanical fasteners. n. Baked-Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. o. Exterior Metal-Blacked Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20 gage, galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. p. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. q. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50 lb. minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 degrees F to 350 degrees F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding. 6. Installation a. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code. b. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and requirements of NEC and applicable ANSI standards. c. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. d. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed or accessible raceways of the following systems for identification. Bands shall be pre-tensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves, colored adhesive marking tape, or a combination of the two. Make each color band 2-inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two color markings in contact, side by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 40 foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors: (1) Fire Alarm System: Red. (2) Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and Yellow. (3) Combined Fire Alarm and Watchmen’s Report System: Red and Blue. (4) Watchmen’s Report System: Blue. (5) Security System: Blue and Yellow. (6) Civil Defense System: Yellow. (7) Clock System: Green. (8) Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and Blue. (9) Telephone System: Green and Yellow. e. Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Code required caution sign for boxes shall be pressure-sensitive, self- adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange background. Install on outside of box cover. Also, label box covers with identity of contained circuits. Use pressure-sensitive plastic labels at exposed locations and similar labels or plasticized card stock tags at concealed boxes. f. Underground Electrical Line Identification: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, signal, and communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line grade. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16-inches; install a single line marker. g. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway. h. Conductor Color Coding: (1) Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows: 208/120 VOLTS PHASE 480/277 VOLTS Black A Purple Red B Brown Blue C Yellow White **Neutral Gray ** Green Ground Green Verify color coding with local ordinances and standards prior to installation. ** Neutral to have stripe to match phase color. (2) Use conductors with color factory applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows: i. The following field applied color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6-inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration. Conductors #10 and smaller, color code by means of factory applied, color impregnated insulation. Conductors #8 and larger, color code by means of plastic coated self-sticking markers, colored nylon cable ties, or heat shrink type sleeves, or colored vinyl tape. ii. In lieu of pressure-sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification. Apply three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3-inches from the terminal and spaced 3- inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length. j. Power Circuit Identification: Securely fasten identifying metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands to cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pullboxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms with ¼-inch steel letter and number stamps with legend to correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach them with approximately 55-lb. test monofilament line or one-piece self-locking nylon cable ties. k. Tag or label conductors as follows: (1) Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under another contract with identification indicating source and circuits numbers. (2) Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications/signal conductors are present in the same box or enclosure (except for three-circuit, four-wire homeruns), label each conductor or cable. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit number, and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated by means of coded color of conductor insulation. For control and communications/signal wiring, use color coding or wire/cable marking tape at terminations and at intermediate location where conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tapes. (3) Match identification markings with designations used in panelboard Shop Drawings. Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility’s electrical installations. l. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows: (1) Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, by ANSI, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Locations shall include but not be limited to the following: i. Doors to electrical rooms. ii. Electrical equipment rated over 600V. iii. Doors and enclosures which, when opened, expose electrically energized parts. Install engraved, plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. (2) Emergency Operation Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8- inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, or other emergency operations. m. Install equipment/system circuit/device identification as follows: (1) Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of electrical equipment in building, including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication/signal/alarm system, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with 1/2-inch high letter on 1-1/2-inches high label (2-inches high where two lines are required), white lettering in black field. Text shall match terminology and number of the Contract Documents and Shop Drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment: i. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. ii. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. iii. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. iv. Motor control centers. v. Motor starters. vi. Pushbutton stations. vii. Power transfer equipment. viii. Contactors. ix. Remote controlled switches. x. Dimmers. xi. Control devices. xii. Transformers. xiii. Power generating units. xiv. Telephone switching equipment. xv. Clock/program master equipment. xvi. Call system master station. xvii. TV/audio monitoring master station. xviii. Fire alarm master station or control panel. xix. Security monitoring master station or control panel. n. Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. o. Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. SECTION 26 22 13 – DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER 1. Description of Work: This section includes the work required to provide dry type transformers. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Eaton. b. ABB. c. Siemens. d. Square D. 3. Transformers: a. Three-phase, 480-volt delta primary and 208/120-volt wye secondary, unless scheduled otherwise. b. Units 15 kVA and larger: Minimum (4) 2-1/2% full capacity primary taps. 4. Insulation Systems: a. 2 kVA and Below: 150 degrees C insulation system based upon 80 degrees C maximum temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient. b. 3 to 15 kVA: 185 degrees C insulation based upon 115 degrees C maximum temperature rise above 40 degree C ambient. c. 15 kVA and Above: 220 degrees C insulation system based upon 150 degrees C maximum temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient. d. Insulation Materials: Flame retardant, not supporting combustion. 5. Core and Coil Assemblies: a. Core: Constructed of high grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, low hysteresis, and eddy current losses. Provide core volume sufficient to allow efficient operation at 10% above highest tap voltage. b. Transformer Coils: Continuous wound copper conductor. c. Transformer Rated 15 kVA and Below: Encapsulate assembled core and coil in a resin and aggregate mixture, providing a moisture proof and shock resistant seal. d. Transformers Rated Greater than 15 kVA: Impregnate assembled core and coil using non-hydroscopic, thermo-setting varnish and heat cure to seal out moisture. Secure the completed core and coil to the base using vibration absorbing mounts, without metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure. 6. Enclosures: a. Units Rated Above 15 kVA: NEMA 2, ventilated and drip proof, constructed of heavy gauge, cold rolled sheet steel. Transformers 75 kVA and smaller: Designed so they can be either floor or wall mounted. Transformers above 75 kVA: Floor-mounted design. b. Units Rated 15 kVA and Below: NEMA 3R, totally enclosed, non-ventilated, constructed of heavy gauge, cold rolled sheet steel and suitable for wall mounting. c. Finish: Degreased, cleaned, phosphatized, primed, and finished with a gray, weather-resistance enamel. 7. Maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 35 degrees C rise above a 40 degrees C ambient. 8. Installation: a. Install in accordance with the recommendations of ANSI C57.12.94 and the requirements of NEC. b. Isolate line and load side terminations using a minimum of 24 inches of FMC or LFMC. c. Provide NEC clearance from adjacent surfaces. d. Provide a 3-1/2-inches housekeeping pad at each transformer. e. Provide vibration isolation at each point of contact with building or supporting members using Korfund Corporation Type EU devices or equivalent. f. Prior to energizing transformers 50 kVA and above, perform insulation resistance and ratio tests as recommended by ANSI C57.12.94. SECTION 26 24 16 - BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 1. Description of Work: This Section includes the work required to provide Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Eaton. b. ABB. c. Siemens. d. Square D Company. 3. Panelboard Construction: a. Molded case circuit breaker type panelboards as scheduled. b. Enclosure: NEMA Type 1 unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings. c. Box and Cover: Box, dead front cover and trim cover in accordance with NEMA PB-1. Box: Code gauge hot dipped galvanized steel. Dead front cover and trim cover: Code gauge cold rolled steel. Dead front cover to conceal overcurrent devices and line and load terminations. d. Finish: Exterior and interior steel surfaces cleaned and finished with gray enamel over a rust inhibiting phosphatized coating. e. Integrated Equipment Rating: As scheduled in the Drawings, minimum 10,000 amps symmetrical at 208V and minimum 14,000 amps symmetrical at 480V. f. Standard of Construction and Performance: Equal to Eaton Types Pow-R-Line 1, 1A and 2. 4. Bussing: a. Phase Busses: Copper, sequenced entire length of panel. b. Neutral Buss: Full-capacity, Copper. c. Equipment Ground Buss: Copper. 5. Overcurrent Protective Devices: a. Satisfy requirements of Specification Section 26 28 00. b. Interrupting Capacity: Equal to or in excess of available short circuit current indicated for panelboard, as scheduled in the Drawings and as specified. 6. Installation: a. Provide type written directory, secured to the inside of the panel trim door. b. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, requirements of the NEC, and NEMA PB 1.1. c. Anchor firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secured. d. Test each phase under load to verify phase current balance. Configure loads to provide phase current imbalance not to exceed 20 percent of the total connected load. e. Flush Mounted Panelboards: Provide (3) 3/4-inch conduits with pull wire from each panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. SECTION 26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES 1. Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide wiring devices such as receptacles, switches, and coverplates. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Arrow Hart b. Hubbell c. Leviton 3. Wiring Devices: Wiring devices shall be installed complete in accordance with these Specifications, single or ganged as required, generally flush mounted. 4. Generally wall switches shall be specification-grade, toggle type, back and side wired, 120/277 volt. 5. Generally receptacle devices shall be specification-grade, grounding type, back and side wired, 125-volt, NEMA 5-20R, unless other NEMA configuration is indicated in the Drawings. 6. The Drawings and Specifications indicate typical configuration requirements and it is the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the proper NEMA configuration for equipment or appliances as required by the equipment furnished. Prior to purchase of any devices coordinate with equipment shop drawings and supplier, and furnish proper protection, connections, and voltage as required by equipment characteristics and as specified. 7. Device plates: One-piece, ganged, specification-grade, high-impact nylon. 8. Receptacle and device plate color: Coordinate with the Architect. SECTION 26 28 00 – OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 1. Description of Work: This Section covers molded case circuit breakers rated 600 volts or less in panelboards. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Eaton. b. ABB. c. Square D Company. d. Siemens. 3. Circuit Breakers: a. Inverse time tripping characteristics with fixed thermal trip action. b. Permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. c. Calibrated for operation in a minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. d. Labeled to indicate their current and voltage rating. e. Interrupting capacity compatible with the panelboard integrated equipment rating. f. Minimum AIC of 10,000A on 208/120V systems and 14,000A on 480/277 volt systems. g. One, two or three pole molded case circuit breakers as specified on the Drawings. h. Common trip type. 4. Provide overcurrent protection for wiring and equipment in accordance with the NEC. SECTION 26 28 16 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES 1. Description of Work: This Section includes work required to provide disconnecting means for service entrance, branch and feeder circuits. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Eaton. b. ABB. c. Siemens. d. Square D Company. 3. Safety Switches: a. NEMA Type HD: Heavy Duty, conforming to NEMA KS-1 and UL 98, quick-make and quick-break type having overcenter toggle action to preclude contact teasing. b. Horsepower rated. c. Equipped with Class R fuseholders and fuses where indicated to be fusible type. d. Dead front construction with removable arc suppressor. e. Front removable 60 degrees C./75 degrees C. UL listed copper/aluminum terminals. f. Current-carrying parts plated by an electrolytic process. g. NEMA enclosure based on ANSI/NEMA 250-1979, suitable for the installed location. h. Enclosures: NEMA 1 unless noted otherwise. 4. Toggle Switch Disconnects: Horsepower rated for motor disconnecting means. 5. Receptacles: Horsepower rated for motor circuits. 6. Service Entrance Disconnects: UL listed as “Suitable for Service Equipment” and provided with neutral and equipment ground buses. 7. Installations a. Provide phenolic label on disconnect switch identifying load served. b. Provide insulated solid neutral terminal unless otherwise indicated. c. Install to provide minimum front clear working space as required by NEC Article 110. d. Install fusible switches at no more than 6’-6” above finished floor to the operating handle in its highest position. e. Mount in the vertical position with ON position being the up position. f. In wet locations and outdoors install with a minimum of 1/4-inch clearance between the enclosure and the mounting surface. g. Provide a label inside of each fused switch indicating the fuse type, ampere rating, and interrupting rating originally specified. h. Motor and Control Circuit Disconnects: Disconnect device shall disconnect simultaneously the control circuits and the power circuits (Reference NEC 430.74). 47 09/08/2025 09/08/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 38 SECTION 26 51 00 - LIGHTING 1. Description of Work: This Section covers lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps. 2. Fixtures shall be as specified and scheduled on the Drawings. 3. Drivers: a. Operate as a parallel circuit allowing continued operation if one or more lamps fail. b. Sustain voltage variation of 10% (voltage and frequency) from normal without damage. c. Tolerate ambient temperatures up to 105 degrees F without damage. d. Meet ANSI C62.41-1991 (transient immunity) and ANSI C82.11-1993 (instant starting sequence and ballast factor). e. Have 10% or less total harmonic distortion. 4. Lamps: Color temperature specified in the Light Fixture Schedule. 5. Luminaires: a. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. b. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. c. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. d. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. e. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. f. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. g. Recessed Luminaires: Ceiling Compatibility – Comply with NEMA LE 4. h. LED Luminaires: (1) Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. (2) Tested in accordance with IES LM-70 and IES LM-80. (3) LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. 6. Set fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceilings and walls, in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures and secure in accordance with manufacturer’s directions and approved shop drawings. The installation shall meet the requirements of NEC. 7. Provide (2) support wires for each fixture. Support wires shall be attached to the structure. 8. Fixtures shall be clean and free of dirt, dust, grease, finger prints, etc., at the completion of the job. 9. Lighting Functional Testing/Commissioning Plan: The Contractor shall complete the tasks below to commission the lighting control system and submit written documentation detailing the tasks below. For each task, list the date performed, person completing the task, the initial setting/condition, actions performed, and final setting condition. Submit documentation at or before substantial completion to facilitate obtaining the Certificate of Occupancy. a. Ensure all lighting fixtures have lamps installed and are functional. b. Test all exit signs, emergency lighting fixtures, and emergency ballasts furnished integral to fixtures. c. Ensure all occupancy sensors have been installed and are operational. d. Ensure all wallbox and scene controllers are installed and operational. e. Test each individual device for occupancy sensor types: OS1, OS2, OS3, and OS4. f. Test 10% of devices for occupancy sensor types: Wallbox type WSD-PDT. g. Verify the following: (1) Sensors have been located and aimed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. (2) Status indicators on devices are operational and correct. (3) Devices control lighting fixtures as indicated on drawings. (4) Time delays have been set as indicated on the drawings. (5) Movement in adjacent areas and/or cycling of HVAC systems does not false trigger sensors. 10. Lighting Standards and Poles: a. Exterior area lighting units of sizes, types and ratings indicated, complete with, but not limited to, poles/standards, brackets, luminaries and other components and accessories required for complete exterior area lighting systems. Provide Bussman Type “HEB” in-line waterproof fuse holders within each pole access for each phase conductor feeding overhead luminaire(s). b. Provide metal, raceway-type, lighting poles and standards, of sizes and types indicated, comprised of shafts, luminary bracket arms, and tenon joints. Equip with grounding connections readily accessible from handhole access doors; and constructed of the following materials and additional construction features: (1) Material: Steel. (2) Configuration: Anchor base type with handhole and cover where indicated. (3) Finishes: Paint finishes over corrosion resisting coatings. (4) Metal Lighting Standard Accessories: Provide accessories for metal lighting standards, including anchor bolts, as recommended by standard manufacturer, of sizes and materials needed to fulfill loading and erection application requirements. 11. Installation of Exterior Lighting Fixtures: a. Install exterior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA’s “Standard of Installation”, NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. b. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code. c. Fasten electrical lighting fixtures and brackets securely to indicated structural supports; and ensure that installed fixtures are plum and level. 12. Provide equipment grounding connections for exterior lighting fixtures. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 13. Upon completion of installation of exterior lighting fixtures, and associated electrical supply circuitry, apply electrical energy to circuitry to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting. END OF SECTION 47 09/08/2025 09/08/2025 1-STORYBLDG1-STORYBLDG1-STORYBLDG2-STORYBLDG1-STORYBLDGBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTSTORAGECONCESSIONRESTROOMSDU G O U T BLE A C H E R S CONCE S S I O N DU G O U T BLE A C H E R S RESTROOMSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDU G O U T BLE A C H E R S BLE A C H E R S PARKINGDU G O U T1E-201,E-3011E-401416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46509/08/202509/08/202547339 CONCESSIONEMPLOYEEGARAGEWOMENMEN416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465404709/08/2025 WOMENMEN416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465 414709/08/2025 WOMENMEN416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465424709/08/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46509/08/202547 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46509/08/20254744 CONCESSIONEMPLOYEEGARAGENO PLUMBING SCOPEWOMENMEN11111111111416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465454709/08/2025 CONCESSIONEMPLOYEEGARAGENO PLUMBING SCOPEWOMENMEN11111111111P-1AP-1AP-1P-1P-3P-3AP-2P-2P-2P-2P-4416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465464709/08/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-465474709/08/2025 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 1-STOR Y BLDG 1-STOR Y BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 ELECT. YARD 1-STOR Y BLDG 1-STOR Y BLDG2-STOR Y BLDG 1-STOR Y BLDG GREENWOOD DR.(60' R.O.W.)416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXAS ENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 PARKING P A R K I N G DRI V E W A Y GREENWOOD DR.1 SITE PLAN1:60 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/202534 1 34 2 LEGEND 34 3 35 6 PARKINGPARKINGDRIVEWAYGR E E N W O O D D R .1SITE PLAN DEMOLITION1:60416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 EXPIRATION DATE 11/30/2025 SIGNED ON 09/08/2025 LEGEND BLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSCONCESSIONDUGOUTSTORAGE1ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 EXPIRATION DATE 11/30/2025 SIGNED ON 09/08/20253614012ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20LEGEND3ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20363 GREENWOOD SPORTSCOMPLEX WESTSIDE4035 GREENWOOD DRIVE3533533551MONUMENT ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 EXPIRATION DATE 11/30/2025 SIGNED ON 09/08/20253MONUMENTSECTION3/4"=1'-0"2MONUMENT ELEVATION1/4"=1'-0"5DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE DETAIL3/4"=1'-0"6DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE PLAN1/4"=1'-0"4PLAQUE PEDESTAL ELEVATIONS1/2"=1'-0"7TYP. PARK FIELD SIGN - PS1N.T.S.8PEDESTAL SECTION3/4"=1'-0"9BASEBALL BATTER'S BOX LAYOUTN.T.S. 1 FLAG POLE DETAIL1/2"=1'-0"2 ACCESSIBLE SIGN DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 4 WHEELSTOP DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0" 5 CHAINLINK FENCE GATE DETAIL3/4"=1'-0"3 BOLLARD DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 6 FENCE DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0" 7 FENCE CORNER DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"8 FENCE GATE DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20259 CONCRETE EDGE DETAIL @EXIST. FENCE3"=1'-0"10CONCRETE EDGE DETAIL @NEW FENCE3"=1'-0"11DRAINAGE AT BASEBALL FIELD1"=1'-0" STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS I SECTIONCSECTIONASADDLE DETAIL1SECTIOND416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232EMBED PLATE - EP1 & EP22TYPICAL CORNER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL6TYPICAL PERIMETER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL745TYPICAL BEAMINTERSECTION DETAILTYPICAL BEAMCORNER DETAILTYPICAL CONSTRUCTIONJOINT SLAB-ON-GRADE DETAIL3SECTIONBANCHOR DETAIL8TYPICAL BLEACHER2 BLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSCONCESSIONSTORAGEPARKINGPARKINGDUGOUT1MEP-201GREENWOOD DRIVE416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46511/04/202501 11/04/25 MS2 ADDENDA #12 DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTSTORAGECONCESSIONRESTROOMSBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSCONCESSIONSTORAGEPARKINGDRIVEWAYDUGOUTGR E E N W O O D D R .1E-301416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46501 11/04/25 MS2 ADDENDA #111/04/202511/04/20252 BLEACHERS DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSCONCESSION DUGOUT STORAGE 1 ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/202536 1 40 1 2 ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20 LEGEND 3 ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20 36 3 DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTSTORAGECONCESSIONRESTROOMSBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSCONCESSIONSTORAGEPARKINGDRIVEWAYDUGOUTGR E E N W O O D D R .1E-301416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46511/12/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46511/12/2025 1-STORY BLDG 2-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG ELECT. YARD ELECT. YARD 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG ELECT. YARD ELECT. YARD 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXAS ENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXAS ENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 ELECT. YARD ELECT. YARD 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 DUGOUTDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHERSDUGOUTDUGOUTEXIST .STORAGEEXIST.CONCESSIONEXISTRESTROOMSELECT.YARDBLEACHERSBLEACHERS BLEACHERS BLEACHERSBLEACHERS1SITE PLAN1:20416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 EXPIRATION DATE 11/30/2025 SIGNED ON 09/08/2025211231 LEGEND213 1 FLAG POLE DETAIL1/2"=1'-0"2 CHAINLINK FENCE GATE DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 3 FENCE DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0" 4 FENCE CORNER DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"5 FENCE GATE DETAIL 3/8"=1'-0"416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232EXPIRATION DATE11/30/2025SIGNED ON09/08/20256 FENCE DETAIL3/4"=1'-0" 7 CURB DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0"8 CURB DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0" 9 TYP. PARK FIELD SIGN - PS1N.T.S. 10TYP. BASEBALL MOUND GRADINGN.T.S. 11INFIELD SKINNED AREAS DETAILN.T.S. 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS I SECTIONBSECTIONASADDLE DETAIL1SECTIONDEMBED PLATE - EP1 & EP224TYPICAL BEAMINTERSECTION DETAILTYPICAL CONSTRUCTIONJOINT SLAB-ON-GRADE DETAIL3SECTIONCNICTYPICAL CORNER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL6TYPICAL PERIMETER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL75TYPICAL BEAMCORNER DETAILANCHOR DETAIL8TYPICAL BLEACHER2 DUGOUT DUGOUT BLEACHE R S DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S DUGOUTDUGOUTEXIST. STORAGE EXIST. CONCESSION EXIST RESTROOMS ELECT. YARD BLE A C H E R S BLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S 1 E-201,E-301 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 0111/04/25MS2ADDENDA #111/04/2025 2 DUGOUT DUGOUT BLEACHE R S DUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S DUGOUTDUGOUTEXIST. STORAGE EXIST. CONCESSION EXIST RESTROOMS ELECT. YARD BLE A C H E R S BLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHERSBLEACHE R S 1 E-201,E-301 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 11/12/2025 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232Ph: 210 736-4265 San Antonio, Texas 78216 900 Isom, Suite 306 Firm Reg. No. F-465 11/12/2025 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 1-STORY BLDG 1-STORY BLDG 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PR O FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICENS E D 124938 0111.04.2025ALHADDENDUM 00201 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938. ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICEN S E D 124938 416 STARR STREETCORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401T 361.884.2661F 361.884.4232THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WASAUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C. YORK, P.E. 124938. ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUTPROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLEENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXASENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT.STA T E OF TEXAS PRO FESSIONAL E N G INEERLICEN S E D 124938 01 0111.04.2025 ALH ADDENDUM 002 STORAGERESTROOMSDU G O U T BLE A C H E R S CONCE S S I O N DU G O U T BLE A C H E R S RESTROOMSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDU G O U T BLE A C H E R S BLE A C H E R S PARKINGDU G O U T1SITE PLAN1:30416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 EXPIRATION DATE 11/30/2025 SIGNED ON 09/08/2025 LEGEND211 DUGOUT BLE A C H E R S CONCESSION DUGOUT BLEACHERS RESTROOMSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDU G O U T BLE A C H E R S BLE A C H E R S DU G O U T1ENLARGED SITE PLAN1:20416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 EXPIRATION DATE 11/30/2025 SIGNED ON 09/08/2025241242LEGEND221 TYP.223 TYP. 1FLAG POLE DETAIL1/2"=1'-0"2ACCESSIBLE SIGN DETAIL3/4"=1'-0"3WHEELSTOP DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0"4CHAINLINK FENCE GATE DETAIL3/4"=1'-0"6FENCE CORNER DETAIL3/8"=1'-0"7FENCE GATE DETAIL3/8"=1'-0"416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 EXPIRATION DATE 11/30/2025 SIGNED ON 09/08/20258TYP. PARK FIELD SIGN - PS1N.T.S.9CURB DETAIL1 1/2"=1'-0"10SOFTBALL BATTER'S BOX LAYOUTN.T.S.5FENCE DETAIL3/8"=1'-0"11SOFTBALL PITCHING MOUNDN.T.S. STRUCTURAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS I 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232SECTIONBSECTIONASADDLE DETAIL1SECTIONC2TYPICAL CORNER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL6TYPICAL PERIMETER WIDENED BEAM DETAIL745TYPICAL BEAMINTERSECTION DETAILTYPICAL BEAMCORNER DETAILTYPICAL CONSTRUCTIONJOINT SLAB-ON-GRADE DETAIL3EMBED PLATE - EP1 & EP2ANCHOR DETAIL8TYPICAL BLEACHER2 1-STORYBLDG1-STORYBLDG1-STORYBLDG2-STORYBLDG1-STORYBLDGBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTSTORAGECONCESSIONRESTROOMSDU G O U T BLE A C H E R S CONCE S S I O N DU G O U T BLE A C H E R S RESTROOMSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDU G O U T BLE A C H E R S BLE A C H E R S PARKINGDU G O U T1E-201,E-3011E-401416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46511/04/202501 11/04/25 MS2 ADDENDA #12 1-STORYBLDG1-STORYBLDG1-STORYBLDG2-STORYBLDG1-STORYBLDGBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTSTORAGECONCESSIONRESTROOMSDU G O U T BLE A C H E R S CONCE S S I O N DU G O U T BLE A C H E R S RESTROOMSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDUGOUTBLEACHERSDU G O U T BLE A C H E R S BLE A C H E R S PARKINGDU G O U T1E-201,E-3011E-401416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46511/12/2025 416 STARR STREET CORPUS CHRISTI, TEXS 78401 T 361.884.2661 F 361.884.4232 Ph: 210 736-4265San Antonio, Texas 78216900 Isom, Suite 306Firm Reg. No. F-46511/12/2025 BID FORM Project Name: Project Number: Owner: OAR: Designer: of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder:(full legal name of Bidder) Signature:(signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name:(printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title:(title of person signing Bid Form) Attest:(signature) State of Residency: __________________________________________ Federal Tx ID No. ____________________________________________ Address for Notices: _________________________________________ _________________________________________ _________________________________________ Phone: ______________________ Email: ___________________________________ By its signature below, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement, acknowledges receipt GREENWOOD SPORTS COMPLEX - WESTSIDE PONY BASEBALL (A), UNIVERSAL LEAGUE YOUTH BASEBALL (B), SPARKLING CITY SOFTBALL (C) City of Corpus Christi Joseph Johnson, Assistant Director Construction Management Gignac Architects 23170 (WESTSIDE), 23171 (UNIVERSAL), 23172 (SPARKLING CITY) Bid Form 23170 - WESTSIDE PONY BASEBALL, 23171 - UNIVERSAL LEAGUE YOUTH BASEBALL, 23172 - SPARKLING CITY SOFTBALL Page 1 of 5 Rev 8/2019Addendum No. 2 Barcom Construction, Inc. Patrick Hoffman Treasurer Texas 45-4563476 1146 Heinsohn Road Corpus Christi, TX 78406 361-851-1000 patrickh@barcomcc.com